Marc 2010 Doc Volume C

Marc 2010
Volume C: Program Input
Corporate
MSC.Software Corporation
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Telephone: (800) 345-2078
FAX: (714) 784-4056
Europe
MSC.Software GmbH
Am Moosfeld 13
81829 Munich
GERMANY
Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0
Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6
Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200
Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
User Documentation: Copyright 2010 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This document, and the software described in it, are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of such license. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written authorization of
MSC.Software Corporation is strictly prohibited.
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this document are for illustrative and educational purposes
only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. THIS DOCUMENT IS
PROVIDED ON AN AS-IS BASIS AND ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE
DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
MSC.Software logo, MSC, MSC., MD Nastran, Adams, Dytran, Marc, Mentat, and Patran are trademarks or registered trademarks of
MSC.Software Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. Python is a trademark of the Python Software Foundation. LS-DYNA is a trademark of
Livermore Software Technology Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC.Software suppliers.
METIS is copyrighted by the regents of the University of Minnesota. HP MPI is developed by Hewlett-Packard Development Company,
L.P. MS MPI is developed by Microsoft Corporation. PCGLSS 6.0, copyright 1992-2005 Computational Applications and System
Integration Inc. MPICH Copyright 1993, University of Chicago and Mississippi State University. MPICH2 copyright 2002, University
of Chicago.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation),
as applicable.
MA*V2010*Z*Z*Z*DC-VOL-C
Contents
Marc Volume C: Program Input
Contents
Preface
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Who Should Read this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Other Marc Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Introduction
Formats in Marc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Free Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
28
28
Input of List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
31
Edges and Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Typical Marc Problem Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marc Input for New Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
39
40
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
Parameters List
Parameters
Basic Input Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TITLE Output Title Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALLOCATE Initial Workspace Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIZING Working Space Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREALLOC Initial Workspace Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELEMENTS Element Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
69
70
71
72
73
4 Marc Volume C: Program Input
VERSION Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FEATURE Specification of the Behavior of a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCESSOR Parallelization Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNIT Invoke Unit System Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$NO LIST No Listing of Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTENDED Extended Precision of Reading in Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END End of Parameter Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analysis Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELASTIC Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN SENSITIVITY Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION Perform Design Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADAPTIVE Adaptive Mesh Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINEAR Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOURIER Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DYNAMIC Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARMONIC Frequency Response Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS-ROLLING Steady State Transport Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESPONSE Spectrum Response Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-P FLOW Rigid-Plastic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPFLOW Superplastic Forming Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LARGE DISP Large Displacement or Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LARGE STRAIN Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPDATE Updated Lagrange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINITE Finite Strain Plasticity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONSTANT DILATATION Define That Elements Are to Use Constant Dilatation Formulation.
ASSUMED STRAIN Improved Bending Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELASTICITY Elasticity Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLASTICITY Plasticity Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOLLOW FOR Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry
Application of Total Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUCKLE Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREEP Creep Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCO ELAS Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRUCTURAL Mechanical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COUPLE Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECOUPLING Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUID Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PORE Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T-T-T Time-Temperature-Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEAT Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOULE Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIFFUSION Diffusion Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABLATION Specify Ablation Occurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PYROLYSIS Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
75
77
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
89
90
91
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
120
121
122
124
125
126
127
Contents 5
CURING Curing Analysis Parameter Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BEARING Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRO Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAGNETO Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EL-MA Perform Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIEZO Activate Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACOUSTIC Acoustic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIATION Radiation Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAVITY Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBE Rigid Body Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MACHINING NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
138
139
140
Rezoning and Substructure Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REZONING Allow Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MNF MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPER Super Element Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER Create User-defined Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
142
143
144
145
Additional Flags for Various Analyses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CENTROID State Storage at Centroid Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALL POINTS State Storage at All Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD COR Residual Load Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO LOADCOR Suppression of Load Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCALE Scaling to First Yield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISTRESS Define Initial Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUMP Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPBC Application of Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACCUMULATE Accumulation of Strain and Displacements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIAS Define Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
Program Function and I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NEW Use New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE Indicate How Tables are to be used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMENT Define Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT Debug Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP Exit following Workspace Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOTES Print Notes and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT TAPE Specify Device for Model Definition Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELSTO Out-of-Core Storage of Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OOC Out-of-core Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBOOC Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO ECHO Suppress Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INCLUDE Insert File into the Input File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
160
161
162
163
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
Modifying Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STATE VARS Define Number of State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST LOADS Distributed Loads or Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUXES Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILMS Film Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTRICTOR Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELDING Welding Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Specify Maximum Number of Boundary Conditions to be Defined
SHELL SECT Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSHEAR Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIE
Define Tying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC-CHECK Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOMSET Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOSPC Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO-DEACTIVATE Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
188
189
Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BEAM SECT Beam Section Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
190
191
Model Definition Options List
Model Definition Options
MESH2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-dimensional Mesh Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESH2D Define a Two-dimensional Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCKS Define Working Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type) Define Block Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANY TYPES Define Multiple Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START NUMBER Specify Starting Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOUNDARY Define Boundary Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFIED NODES Specify Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAPPER Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONSTRAINT Generate Boundary Condition Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MERGE Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MERGE SELECTIVE Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECT Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRTCONNECT Print Out Block Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYMMETRY Define Axis of Symmetry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERATE End of Mesh Generation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
Mesh Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEW Use New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFINE (Sets) Define Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
231
232
Contents 7
CONNECTIVITY Specify Element Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONN FILL Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONN GENER Copy Element Connectivity Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFCONN Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORDINATES Enter Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INCLUDE Insert File into the Input File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FXORD Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE CIRCLE Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE FILL Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE GENER Generate Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE MERGE Merge Duplicate Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFXORD Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CYLINDRICAL Define Cylindrical Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WRITE Write Connectivity and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADAPTIVE Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADAPT GLOBAL Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINTS Define Geometric Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURVES Define Geometric Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURFACES Define Geometrical Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRING Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTACH NODE Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTACH EDGE Define the Element Edges which are attached to Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTACH FACE Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GEOMETRY Specify Geometrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODAL THICKNESS Define Nodal Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTUATOR Define the Length of the Actuator Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSFORMATION Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORD SYSTEM Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom
SHELL TRANSFORMATION Define Shell Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UTRANFORM Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CYCLIC SYMMETRY Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TYING Define Tying Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERVO LINK Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBE2 Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBE3 Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RROD Rigid 2-node Constraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIN CODE Define Pin Code for Beam Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSERT Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPRINGS Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBUSH Input Data for Cbush Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CFAST Shell Patch Fastener Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PFAST CFAST Fastener Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CWELD Weld or Fastener Element Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWELD Connector Element Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235
237
238
240
241
243
244
247
248
249
250
251
252
254
255
263
274
275
280
286
288
290
291
292
296
297
298
301
308
309
310
313
321
323
325
328
329
330
332
336
344
347
349
357
SWLDPRM Parameters for CWELD Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SUPERELEM Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications) Create DMIG of Substructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DMIG-OUT Output Control of Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSQUEAL Specify Data for Output of Matrices used in Brake Squeal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPCOUT Output Control of Tying Matrices (MPC Entries) for all Glued Contacts . . . . . . . . . .
DMIG Direct Matrix Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K2GG, K2PP Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2GG, M2PP Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B2GG, B2PP Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P2G Selects Direction Input Load Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BACKTOSUBS Recover Substructure Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MNF UNITS MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STIFSCALE Define Stiffness Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COEFFICIENT Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEACTIVATE Deactivate Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR ESTIMATE Create Error Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USDATA Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
359
365
367
370
375
377
378
381
382
383
384
385
386
388
389
392
393
394
Program Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CASE COMBIN Combine Load Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLVER Specify Direct or Iterative Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPTIMIZE Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST Create File for Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOADCASE Define Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACK Enter a List of Points to be Tracked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLOW LINE Define a Flow Line Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IRM
Intergraph Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDRC SDRC I-DEAS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYPERMESH HyperMesh Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CHOICE Specify Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT ELEMENT Specify Elements to be Included in Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT NODE Specify Nodes to be Included in Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT SPRING Controls the Print Out of Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT SPRING Deactivates the Printing of All Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CONTACT Prints the Contact Body Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT CONTACT Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRID FORCE Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT VMASS Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAUTO Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTART Set Flags for Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTART LAST Use Condensed Restart File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UDUMP Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUMMARY Create Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
395
396
398
402
404
423
426
427
429
435
438
440
442
445
447
448
449
450
451
452
454
455
457
460
462
463
Contents 9
NO SUMMARY Do Not Create Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELEMENT SORT Sort Element Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO ELEM SORT Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE SORT Sort Nodal Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO NODE SORT Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN OBJECTIVE Define Objective Function to be Optimized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN VARIABLES Define Variable Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Displacement Response . . . . . .
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Stress Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Strain Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response . . . . . . .
464
465
467
468
470
471
472
474
476
478
480
Mechanical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Mechanical) Control Option for Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATUDS Provide Additional Data for Material User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONUDS Provide Additional Data for Contact User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Define Fixed Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED DISP (Mechanical) Define Fixed Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input) Define Distributed Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST LOADS Define Distributed Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FACE IDS Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films,
and Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input) Define Nodal Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT LOAD Define Nodal Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input) Neglect Incremental Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOLD NODES Neglect Incremental Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INERTIA RELIEF Define Inertia Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATION A Define Rotational Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CORNERING AXIS Define Cornering Axis in Steady State Rolling Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUID DRAG Define Fluid Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAVITY Define Constants and Reference Values for Structures with Internal Cavities . . . . . . .
PRE STATE Transfer History Data from Previous Analysis to the Current Analysis as
the Initial State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AXITO3D Transfer Data from Axisymmetric Analysis to 3-D Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLK Generation of Global Local File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLOBALLOCAL Structural Zooming Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT STRESS Define Initial Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN Define Initial Plastic Strain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input) Initialize State Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL STATE Initialize State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input) Redefine State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
481
482
489
493
494
495
499
501
506
511
516
520
523
525
526
528
529
530
532
533
537
541
542
546
548
552
554
556
559
562
CHANGE STATE Redefine State Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL FICTIVE (with TABLE Input) Initialize Fictive Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL FICTIVE Initialize State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAP TEMP Map Temperatures from Different Meshes to Current Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL LOADS Input Temperature Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress) Define Initial Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress) Define Initial Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input) Define Point Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT TEMP Define Point Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORCDT Input Displacement or Load Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input) Input Elastic Foundation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOUNDATION Input Elastic Foundation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOURIER Describe Fourier Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-INTEGRAL Define Path for J-Integral Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LORENZI Define Path for Modified J-Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VCCT Virtual Crack Closure Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELAMINATION Determines When to Split Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISLAND REMOVAL Deactivate Islands of Connected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
566
570
572
574
576
578
580
582
584
586
587
590
591
593
594
597
601
603
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deformable and Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motion of Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Variables and Option Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact/Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Heat Transfer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Electrical Data (Joule Heating Analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Step Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Contact - Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three-dimensional Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selective Contact Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact with Adaptive Meshing or Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spring-Back Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corner Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Segment-to-segment Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT (2-D) Define 2-D Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) Define 3-D Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES Define Contact Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
604
604
604
605
605
606
606
607
608
608
608
608
612
623
623
625
625
625
626
627
629
632
646
659
678
694
Contents 11
CONTACT TABLE Define Contact Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPLINE Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UMOTION Invoke User Subroutine to Prescribe Surface Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFRICTION Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface Friction Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UHTCOEF Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface/Environment Thermal Behavior. . . . . . .
UHTCON Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface to Surface Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT NODE Define Nodes for Surface Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEACT GLUE Define Deact Glue for Nodes in Glued Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXCLUDE Ignore Contact with Certain Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WEAR Input of Wear Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
703
710
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Elastic Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Elastic-Plastic Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. Temperature Dependent Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D. Relative Density Dependent Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E. Low Tension Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F. Soil Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G. Material Dependent Failure Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H. Characterization of Gap Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I. Laminated Composite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J. Material Preferred Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K. Material Property (Element) Coordinate Systems in Marc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress) Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Stress) Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Define Mechanical Data for
Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical) Define Mechanical Data for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . .
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis.
ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical) Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYPOELASTIC Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOONEY (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOONEY Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRUDBOYCE Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENT (with TABLE Input) Define Data for the Gent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENT Define Data for the Gent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OGDEN (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model
OGDEN Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NLELAST Simplified Nonlinear Elastic Models Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOAM (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Foam Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOAM Define Data for Foam Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GASKET Define Material Data for Gasket Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
723
723
726
728
728
728
728
728
729
729
729
729
737
745
751
757
761
768
772
774
776
782
786
790
793
797
800
804
807
813
817
820
TABLE Define Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STRAIN RATE (Material Properties) Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress . . . . . . . . . . .
FORMING LIMIT Forming Limit Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WORK HARD Define Workhardening Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress) Define Effects of Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress) Temperature Effects in Coupled
Thermal-Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHO TEMP (Structural) Define Temperature Effects for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . .
TIME-TEMP Define Effects of Time/Temperature Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input) Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model . . . . . .
SHAPE MEMORY Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input) Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking. . . . . . . .
CRACK DATA Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input) Define Failure Criteria Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAIL DATA Define Failure Criteria Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATERIAL DATA Define Additional Material Data Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRAIN SIZE Define Grain Size Growth Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAMAGE Define Properties for Damaging Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GAP DATA Define Data for Gap Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPOSITE Define Properties for Laminated Composite Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIXTURE Define Constituents of Composite Material in Original and Potentially Damaged State
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input) Define Material Data for Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COHESIVE Define Mechanical Data for Cohesive Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSHELL Shell Element Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REBAR Define Rebar Positions, Areas, and Orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORIENTATION Define Orientation of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWDER (with TABLE input) Define Powder Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWDER Define Powder Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DENSITY EFFECTS Define Effects of Density on Powder Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELATIVE DENSITY (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or
Coupled Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELATIVE DENSITY Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or Coupled Thermal
Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOIL (with TABLE Input) Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOIL Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input) Define Initial Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL POROSITY Define Initial Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input) Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis . .
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis
INITIAL VOID RATIO Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input) Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis . . . . .
INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PC Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFIC WEIGHT Define Specific Weight Constant for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . .
823
831
833
835
838
843
850
860
864
870
874
876
877
891
902
903
905
912
913
916
919
922
925
928
935
943
949
953
956
958
959
965
969
971
972
974
976
977
979
981
982
983
Contents 13
INITIAL PORE Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input) Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled Soil Analysis . . . . .
CHANGE PORE Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input) Define Pressure Film Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESS FILM Define Pressure Film Coefficient Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
985
988
990
993
996
Rate Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREEP (with TABLE Input) Define Creep Constitutive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREEP Define Creep Constitutive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PHI-COEFFICIENTS Define Phi-Coefficients for Rubber Viscoelastic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELPROP Define Properties for Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELORTH Define Properties for Viscoelastic Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELMOON Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELOGDEN Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Ogden Materials . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELFOAM Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHIFT FUNCTION Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple Viscoelastic Materials .
VISCEL EXP Viscoelastic Thermal Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
997
999
1002
1007
1008
1009
1011
1012
1013
1014
1016
Dynamic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAMPING Define Damping Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUID SOLID Define Fluid-Solid Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL DISP Define Initial Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL VEL Define Initial Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED ACCE Define Fixed Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASSES Define Concentrated Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONM1 Define a General Concentrated Mass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONM2 Define a Diagonal Mass/Moment of Inertia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESPONSE SPECTRUM Define Density for Spectral Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODAL INCREMENT Define Increments for Eigenvalue Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUCKLE INCREMENT Define Increments for Buckling Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1017
1018
1020
1021
1024
1025
1027
1028
1029
1030
1036
1038
1039
1041
Heat Transfer Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input) Define Fixed Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED TEMPERATURE Define Fixed Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILMS (with TABLE Input) Define Thermal Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILMS Define Convection Film Coefficient Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input) Define Sink Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input) Define Distributed Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST FLUXES Define Distributed Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input) Define Point Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT FLUX Define Point Fluxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVECT (with TABLE Input) Define Thermal Vector Flux Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input) Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source . .
1043
1044
1047
1049
1053
1054
1056
1059
1060
1063
1064
1068
WELD FLUX Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELD PATH Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELD FILL Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Thermal or
Electrical Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL CONTACT (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Thermal or Electrical
Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Thermal or
Electrical Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL CONTACT (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Thermal or Electrical
Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer) Define Initial Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer) Define Initial Temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials .
ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer) Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for
Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . .
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Model Definition Option for Heat
Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANISOTROPIC (Thermal) Model Definition Option for Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Material Data for Interface Elements . . . . . .
COHESIVE Define Material Data for Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LATENT HEAT Define Latent Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer) Define Variation of Material Properties in
Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHO TEMP (Thermal) Define Variation of Orthotropic Thermal Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Heat Transfer) Define Control Parameters for Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . .
CONVERT Define Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONRAD GAP Define Convection/Radiation Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANNEL Define Fluid Channel Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VIEW FACTOR Read in Radiation View Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIATING CAVITY Define Outline of Radiating Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAD-CAVITY Define Radiation Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAVITY DEFINITION Define Geometry of a Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMISSIVITY Define Emissivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer) Define Nodal Velocity Components
VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer) Define Nodal Velocity Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURE RATE Cure Kinetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT CURE (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Degree of Cure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT CURE Define Initial Degree of Cure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURE SHRINKAGE Shrinkage Property of Resin Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMO-PORE Define Properties of Thermal Degrading Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURFACE ENERGY Define Surface Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1072
1076
1082
1085
1093
1099
1110
1119
1122
1124
1126
1128
1131
1133
1136
1138
1140
1141
1142
1145
1150
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1159
1162
1165
1167
1169
1172
1174
1175
1178
1183
Contents 15
RECEDING SURFACE Define Areas where Surface Recedes Due to

Thermo-chemical Erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THROAT Define Coordinates of Throat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PYROLYSIS Define Initial Pyrolysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer) Define Initial Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STREAM DEFINITION Define Stream Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT STREAMLINE Control Output of Results along a Streamline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACK STREAMLINE Track Behavior of a Point along a Streamline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1189
1191
1192
1194
1196
1198
1199
Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

JOULE Define Conversion Factor for Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Distributed Currents . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating) Define Distributed Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Point Currents. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (Joule) Define Nodal Point Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Fixed Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED VOLTAGE Define Nodal Fixed Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) Define Electric Conductivity
Properties for Isotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) Define Electric Conductivity
Properties for Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) Define Electric Conductivity
Properties for Anisotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1200
1201
1202
1205
1206
1208
1209
1211
Diffusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Initial Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Fixed Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Distributed Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Nodal Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Diffusion Properties for Isotropic Materials.
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Diffusion Properties for
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Model Definition Option for Diffusion Analysis .
1222
1223
1225
1227
1230
1232
Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) Define Nodal Velocity Components . . . . . . . .
VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic) Define Nodal Velocity Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input) Define Lubrication Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THICKNESS Define Lubrication Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input) Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTRICTOR Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Hydrodynamic) Define Maximum Number of Increments for Bearing Analysis . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) Define Lubricant Material Properties . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic) Define Lubricant Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic) Define Effect of Temperature in Bearing Analysis
1238
1239
1241
1243
1245
1246
1248
1249
1250
1252
1253
1212
1214
1218
1234
1236
Acoustic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Fixed Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic) Define Nodal Fixed Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Distributed Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST SOURCES (Acoustic) Define Distributed Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Point Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic) Define Point Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Acoustic) Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis . .
ACOUSTIC Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1255
1256
1259
1261
1264
1265
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Fixed Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic) Define Fixed Nodal Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic) Define Fixed Nodal Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE Define Nodal Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity) Define Electric Permittivity Properties for
Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity) Define Electric Permittivity
Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for
ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for
Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical) Define Electrical Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . .
1272
1273
1276
1278
1280
1282
1285
1286
1288
Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric) Define Fixed Nodal Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric) Define Distributed Charges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric) Define Nodal Point Charges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Electrical Data for
Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric) Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric Analysis. . . . . . . . . .
1300
1301
1304
1305
1308
1309
1311
Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Fixed Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1317
1318
1320
1289
1291
1295
1296
1297
1299
1312
1315
Contents 17
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Currents . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Point Current . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Point Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COIL CURRENT Define the current in a Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMWINDING Define Path and Are Orientation for Coil or Winding Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability) Define Magnetic Permeability
Properties for Isotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability) Define Magnetic Permeability
Properties for Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for
ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . .
B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear Magnetic Material.
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Permanent Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERMANENT (Magnetostatic) Define Permanent Magnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Magnetostatic) Control for Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Currents. . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Charges. . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Point Fluxes . . . . .
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE Define Nodal Point Currents and Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties
for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties for
ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties for
B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic) Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear
Magnetic Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERMANENT (Electromagnetic) Define Permanent Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic) Control for Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1322
1325
1327
1330
1331
1333
1334
1336
1341
1343
1345
1349
1350
1354
1356
1358
1360
1362
1363
1364
1367
1369
1372
1373
1376
1377
1379
1380
1382
1384
1387
1389
1391
1393
Fluid Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGION (Fluid) Define Elements in a Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COUPLING REGION Define Coupling Regions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED DISP (Fluid) Define Fixed Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid) Define Fixed Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED VELOCITY Define Fixed Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid) Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis. . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Fluid) Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRAIN RATE (Fluid) Define Strain Rate Dependent Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal) Temperature Effects in Coupled
Fluid-Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Fluid) Control Option for Fluid Analysis or Fluid-Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Fluid-Solid) Control Option for Fluid-Stress or Fluid-Thermal-Stress Analysis. . . .
END OPTION Model Definition Data End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
History Definition Options List
History Definition Options
1394
1396
1397
1401
1403
1406
1408
1410
1412
1415
1418
1421
1427
Elastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical, Acoustic, Piezoelectric or Electrostatic-Structural or Electromagnetic Analyses . . . . .
Heat Transfer Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Driven Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1434
1434
1434
1434
1435
1435
1435
1435
General Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMENT Enter Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TITLE Output Title Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEW (History Definition) Use New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INCLUDE (History Definition) Insert File into the Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CHOICE (History Definition) Define Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition) Specify Elements to be Included in Output . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT NODE (History Definition) Define Nodes and Nodal Quantities to be Printed . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT (History Definition) Suppress Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) Prints the Contact Body Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout . .
PRINT SPRING (History Definition) Controls the Print Out of Springs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition) Deactivates the Printing of All Springs . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRID FORCE (History Definition) Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level . . . . . . . . . .
SUMMARY (History Definition) Create Summary Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO SUMMARY (History Definition) Suppress Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELEMENT SORT (History Definition) Sort Elements for Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1443
1445
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1454
1455
1456
Contents 19
NO ELEM SORT (History Definition) Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element . . . . . . . . . . . .

NODE SORT (History Definition) Sort Nodal Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO NODE SORT (History Definition) Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT VMASS (History Definition) Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and
Strain Energies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition) Control Option for Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS (History Definition) Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis. . . . .
SOLVER (History Definition) Specify Direct or Iterative Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST (History Definition) Create File for Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST INCREMENT Define Increments between Writing on Post File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTART INCREMENT Define Increments between Writing on Restart File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition) Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing.
LOADCASE (History Definition) Define Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DMIG-OUT (History Definition) Output Control of Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K2GG, K2PP (History Definition) Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2GG, M2PP (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B2GG, B2PP (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P2G (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Load Vector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1458
1459
1461
1462
1463
1470
1474
1478
1494
1495
1496
1507
1510
1515
1517
1518
1519
Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DISP CHANGE Define Displacement Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELEASE NODE Define Nodes for which the Boundary Condition is Gradually Released . . . .
GAP CHANGE Redefine Data for Gap Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TYING CHANGE Define Tying Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST LOADS (History Definition) Define Distributed Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT LOAD (History Definition) Define Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO LOAD Define Equal Load Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition) Define Inertia Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BEGIN SEQUENCE Initiate a Series of Repeated Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SEQUENCE Terminates a Series of Repeated Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT Define Proportional Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO INCREMENT Define Automatic Load Stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO STEP Adaptive Load Step Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TERMINATE Terminate Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPERPLASTIC Superplastic Forming Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL LOADS (History Definition) Define Thermal Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO THERM Specify Data for Automatic Thermal Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE STATE (History Definition) Change State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT TEMP (History Definition) Define Point Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE PORE (History Definition) Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis. . . . .
TIME STEP Define Time Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESET TIME Resets Time to Zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUCKLE Specify Buckling Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPERELEM (History Definition) Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for Adams MNF Interface.
1520
1521
1524
1525
1526
1527
1531
1533
1534
1536
1537
1538
1539
1544
1551
1553
1555
1557
1559
1563
1565
1568
1569
1570
1572
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition) Create DMIG of Substructure . . . . . . .

ASSEM LOAD Assemble Equivalent Nodal Force Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTIVATE Activate Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEACTIVATE (History Definition) Deactivate Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOUNDATION (History Definition) Define Foundation Spring Force for Elements . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE RIGID Define New Geometry For a Rigid Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D) Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface. . . . . .
ADD RIGID (2-D) Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADD RIGID with TABLES (3-D) Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface . . . .
ADD RIGID (3-D) Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition) Define Contact Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT TABLE (History Definition) Define Contact Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT NODE (History Definition) Define Nodes for Surface Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOTION CHANGE Define Motion of Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS-ROLLING Define the Parameters for Steady State Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELEASE Define Release Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPROACH Move Rigid Surfaces into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVE (History Definition) Perform Rigid Body Motion on Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANNEAL Modify State of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYNCHRONIZED Move Rigid Surfaces into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINE (History Definition) Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body . . . . . .
EXCLUDE (History Definition) Ignore Contact with Certain Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTUATOR Define the Length of the Actuator Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1574
1576
1577
1578
1581
1582
1590
1596
1601
1611
1621
1630
1637
1638
1640
1643
1644
1645
1647
1648
1649
1651
1652
Rate Dependent Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CREEP INCREMENT Define Creep Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO CREEP Control Transient Creep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACCUMULATE Specify Accumulation Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTRAPOLATE Specify Extrapolation Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO THERM CREEP Automatic, Thermally-Loaded Elastic-Creep Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1653
1654
1655
1657
1658
1659
Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODAL SHAPE Define Modal Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECOVER Recover Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic) Define Integration in Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECTRUM Initiate Spectral Response Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARMONIC (Dynamic) Define Excitation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACC CHANGE Define Acceleration Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1663
1664
1666
1668
1669
1670
1671
Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRANSIENT Specify Transient or Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer) Specify Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST FLUXES (History Definition) Define Distributed Fluxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT FLUX (History Definition) Define Point Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELD FLUX (History Definition) Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source . .
WELD PATH (History Definition) Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source. . . . .
1672
1673
1675
1676
1677
1678
1682
Contents 21
WELD FILL (History Definition) Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition) Define Controls for Heat Transfer Analysis . . .
TEMP CHANGE Specify or Change Fixed Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILMS (History Definition) Define Film Coefficients and Sink Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VELOCITY CHANGE Modify Nodal Velocity Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1688
1691
1693
1695
1696
Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMRESIS Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Resistance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History Definition) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition) Define Nodal Point Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VOLTAGE CHANGE Define or Change Voltage for Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
Diffusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POROSITY CHANGE Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VOID CHANGE Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST MASS (Diffusion) Define Distributed Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT MASS (Diffusion) Define Nodal Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1704
1705
1707
1709
1712
Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THICKNS CHANGE Define Thickness Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAMPING COMPONENTS Define Damping Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STIFFNS COMPONENTS Define Stiffness Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1714
1715
1716
1717
Acoustic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESS CHANGE Define Fixed Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST SOURCES (History Definition) Define Incremental Distributed Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History Definition) Define Incremental Nodal Point Sources . . . .
HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition) Define Excitation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1718
1719
1721
1722
1723
Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEADY STATE (Electrostatic) Specify Steady-State Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMCAPAC Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Capacitance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . .
1724
1725
1726
Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Potential
Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Nodal Point Charges. . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1727
1728
1730
1731
Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic) Specify Steady-State Magnetostatic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMINDUC Initiate an Inductance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMLAMIN Initiate Lamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORCE MAGNETOSTATIC Calculate Lorenzi Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1733
1734
1735
1737
1738
1739
Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Excitation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . .
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Dynamic Change . . . . . . . .
POTENTIAL CHANGE Define or Redefine Potential Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Point Current and/or Charge.
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . .
CONTINUE (History Definition) End Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rezoning Options List
Rezoning Options
Rezoning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REZONE Specify Rezoning Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLIT BODIES Defines Rezoned Data of Contact Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTIONING (Rezoning) Define Sections for Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTIVITY CHANGE Define or Change Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GEOMETRY CHANGE Specify New Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORIENTATION CHANGE Redefine Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GAP DATA CHANGE Redefine Gap Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORDINATE CHANGE Redefine Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFRORD Use Subroutine UFRORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVE (Rezoning) Redefine Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT CHANGE Change Surface Contact after Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning) Select Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
URCONN Invoke User Subroutine URCONN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTINUE (Rezoning) End Rezoning Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END REZONE End Input for Rezoning Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1741
1742
1743
1744
1746
1747
1749
1751
1756
1757
1758
1759
1761
1762
1766
1768
1770
1771
1772
1773
1779
1781
1782
1783
Program Messages
Marc Exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 1-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 1001-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 2001-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 3001-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 4001-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 5001-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 9001-10000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1785
1785
1791
1793
1796
1799
1801
1803
Contents 23
Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option
Estimating Workspace Sizes for Marc Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1806
I/O With Marc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1807
Estimating File Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1808
Running Marc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1810
Examples of Running Marc Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1817
Default File
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model Definition Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control File
Environment Variables
Material Database
Flow Line File Format
3-D Remeshing Files
Units
Tables of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters List
Options List
1820
1820
1834

Preface
Preface
About this Manual
Who Should Read this Manual
Other Marc Manuals
Chapter Contents
25
25
25
25
About this Manual

This document describes the file format of the Marc input file. Its chapters and sections roughly parallel
the organization of that file. Appendices describe Marc program messages and provide an alphabetical
list of parameters and options for easy reference. Plus, at the beginning of each chapter is a list of the
parameters or options discussed in that particular chapter.
Who Should Read this Manual

This document is intended for current and new users of Marc. It does not purport to teach the use of Marc,
but is a reference to its specific functioning. Other Marc documents are listed below.
Other Marc Manuals

The Marc Reference Library includes:
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information
Marc Volume B: Element Library
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines
Marc Volume E: Demonstrations Problems
Marc Users Guide

Marc Python Tutorial and Reference Manual
Marc Mentat Help Reference
Chapter Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction
introduces basic concepts of Marc

program input.
Chapter 2
Parameters
describes the options that are used in the

parameter section of the Marc input files.
Chapter 3
describes the options that are used in the

model definition section of the Marc
input files.
Chapter 4
describes the options that are used for

displaying the results of the analysis.
Chapter 5
Rezoning Options
describes the options that are used in Marc

input files to specify load
history information.
Preface 26
Appendix A Program Messages
describes the messages one might see upon

termination of Marc.
Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option
details the running of Marc on

supported computers.
Appendix C Default File
lists the most commonly used parameters

and options put into a default file.
Appendix D Control File
describes how to create and use a control

file.
Appendix E Environment Variables
introduces user-controlled
environment variables.
Appendix F Material Database
describes how to enter new material into

the database.
Appendix G Flow Line File Format
provides the flow line format.
Appendix H 3-D Remeshing Files
provides how to view files within the GUI

for remeshing observation.
Appendix I
Units
provides tables for the International System

(SI) of units and conversation tables for
Imperial units from US units.
Appendix J
Parameters List
provides a complete alphabetical list of all

parameters and their associated
page numbers.
Appendix K Options List
provides a complete alphabetical list of all

program options and their associated
page numbers.
Chapter 1 Introduction
Introduction
Formats in Marc
Input of List Items
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data
38
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users
49
28
29
Chapter 1 Introduction 28
Formats in Marc
This chapter contains a brief outline of the various data input options and problem solution setups which
are available to a Marc user. It highlights only a small segment of the total problem solution capability
available. You only have to select the options required for the solution of your problem. In addition, you
can further elect to use the many default and built-in conditions which have been provided in these
options.
This user-selection feature forms the basis for Marc and input data organization. Marc then provides a
solution capability based on your selection of options. Further details on Marcs organization can be
found in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Formats used by Marc are discussed in this chapter. A short description of the organization of the input
data is given, followed by an illustrative example particularly useful for new users. Selected portions of
the output generated by Marc are shown and discussed. The last section of this chapter summarizes the
input requirements for different classes of analyses.
Formats in Marc
Marc is written in FORTRAN, but does its own data conversion to avoid system aborts due to user data
errors. All input data files are read as alphanumeric and are converted to integer, floating point, or
keywords, as necessary. Marc issues error messages and displays the illegal image if it cannot interpret
the data field according to the specifications given in the manual. When such errors occur, Marc attempts
to scan the remainder of the data files and ends the run with an exit error message at the END OPTION
(or end file). Two conventions are allowed for input format controlfixed and free format. Fixed and
free format can be mixed within a data file, but on a single data line, only one type of format can be
entered. The syntax rules for each format type are as follows:
Fixed Field
1. Integers must be right-justified (right blank fill) in their fields.
2. Floating point numbers can be given with or without exponent. In either case, the mantissa must
contain a decimal point. If an exponent is given, it must be preceded by the character E or D and
must be right justified. The size of the number must lie in the range 10-72 to 1072.
Note that, in the this manual, integer fields are indicated as I and floating point numbers are indicated
as E or F and the allowable column field is specified.
Free Field
Data can be input in free field under the following syntax rules:
1. Each data block must contain the same number of data items that it would contain under standard
fixed format control as documented in this manual. Thus, for example, the 3rd data block of the
CONNECTIVITY option is given as (16I5); therefore, no more than 16 numbers can appear on a
data line in this data block under fixed or free field format. This syntax rule allows mixing of
fixed-field and free-field data in the data file, since the number of data blocks needed to input any
data list is the same in both cases.

Input of List Items
2. Data items on a data line must be separated by a comma. This separator can be surrounded by an
arbitrary number of blanks. Within the data item itself, no embedded blanks can appear.
3. Floating point numbers can be given with or without exponent. In either case, the mantissa must
contain a decimal point. If an exponent is given, it must be preceded by the character E or D and
must immediately follow the mantissa (no embedded blanks). The size of the number must lie in
the range 10-35 to 1035.
4. Keywords must be typed exactly as written in the manual. Embedded blanks do not count as
separators here (for example, BEAM SECT is one word only).
5. Note that you must distinguish between a real and integer zero when entering data; the floating
point zero must contain a decimal point, as in Rule 3, above.
6. If a data line contains only one free-field data item, that item must be followed by a comma. Thus,
1 must be entered as 1, if it is the only data item on a data line.
Input of List Items

Marc requests that you input a list of items in association with certain program functions. These items,
as an example, can be a set of elements as in conjunction with the ISOTROPIC option, or a set of nodes
as in conjunction with the POINT LOAD option. There are 12 types of items that can be requested:
Element numbers
Points
Node numbers
Curves
Degree of freedom numbers
Surfaces
Integration point numbers
Bodies
Layer numbers
Edges
Increment numbers
Faces
A set of items can be expressed as a combination of one or more subsets. These subsets can be specified
in three different forms, depending on your convenience. The operations that can be performed between
subsets are:
AND
INTERSECT
EXCEPT
In forming a set, subsets are combined in binary operations going from left to right. Hence, a set can be
formed as:
1. SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2
which implies all items in SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2. Duplicate items are eliminated and the
resultant set is sorted.
2. SUBLIST1 INTERSECT SUBLIST2
which implies only those items occurring both in SUBLIST1 and SUBLIST2.
Input of List Items
3. SUBLIST1 EXCEPT SUBLIST2
which implies all items in SUBLIST1 except those which occur in SUBLIST2.
4. SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2 EXCEPT SUBLIST3 INTERSECT SUBLIST4
which implies take the items in SUBLIST1 and SUBLIST2 and remove those items that occur in
SUBLIST3. Then, if these items also occur in SUBLIST4, include them in the set.
The SUBLISTS can have the form:
1. A range of items can be specified as:
l TO m BY n
or
1 THROUGH M BY n
which implies items l through m by n; if BY n is not included, it is assumed to be BY 1. Note

that the range can be either increasing or decreasing.
2. A string of items can be specified as:
a1 a2 a3 ... an
which implies that n items are to be included. If continuation data is necessary, a C or

CONTINUE should be the last item on the data line.
3. A setname can be specified as:
MYSET
which implies that all items previously specified to be in the set MYSET are to be used. The items
in a set are specified using the DEFINE option.
In a list, edges and faces are entered as pairs (i:j) where i is the user element id and j is the edge id or
face id. The edge id/face id for the different element classes is given beginning on page 31.
There are two types of edge and face sets; those expressed in Marc convention or the Marc Mentat
convention. The edge/face id in Marc convention is one greater than the Marc Mentat convention.
For example, to specify edge 1 on elements 1 to 20, one would use:
1:1 TO 20:1
Sorted vs. Unsorted Lists

In Marc, most lists are sorted lists. That is, regardless of the order of the list items on the list line, Marc
returns these items sorted from lowest to highest. Unsorted lists are required in several places, however.
These places are:
1. List of nodes in the TYING option.
2. List of nodes in the SUPERINPUT and SUBSTRUCTURE option.
3. List of degrees of freedom in the FIXED DISP option.
When defining unsorted lists, the sublist connectors EXCEPT and INTERSECT cannot be used. Setnames
can be used as long as the sets themselves are unsorted. In Marc, degree of freedom sets are always

Edges and Faces
unsorted. Unsorted node sets can be defined by using set type NDSQ (for node sequence) rather than set
type NODE (see the DEFINE model definition option).
Examples
Define subsets FLOOR, NWALL, WWALL
DEFINE NODE SET FLOOR
1 TO 5 (i.e. NODES 1,2,3,4,5)
DEFINE NODE SET NWALL
5 TO 15 BY 5 AND 20 to 22 (i.e. NODES 5,10,15,20,21,22)
DEFINE NODE SET WWALL
11 TO 20 (i.e. NODES 11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20)
Possible lists can be:

1. NWALL AND WWALL, which would contain nodes
5
16
10
17
11
18
12
19
13
20
14
21
15
22
2. NWALL INTERSECT WWALL, which would contain node

15
20
3. NWALL AND WWALL EXCEPT FLOOR, which would contain nodes:

10
16
11
17
12
18
13
19
14
20
15
21
22
Edges and Faces

Marc 2003 introduces the concept of edge ids and face ids that are used with the ATTACH EDGE,
ATTACH FACE, and edge and face sets. The edge and face ids follow two different conventions - either
Marc or Marc Mentat. The difference is that the Marc Mentat number is equal to the Marc number minus
one. The edge and face ids are dependent upon the element geometry and are shown below.
1-D 2-Node Elements
y
2
1
EDGE ID
1
NODES
12
Edges and Faces
1-D 3-Node Elements

3
EDGE ID
1
NODES
123
2
1
2-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Elements
4
3
EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
NODES
12
23
34
41
Load shown on EDGE ID 1

4
EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
NODES
152
263
374
481

Edges and Faces
2-D 3-Node Triangle

3
EDGE ID
1
2
3
NODES
12
23
31
EDGE ID
1
2
3
NODES
142
253
361
2-D 6-Node Triangle

3
3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral

4
3
1
2
EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
NODES
12
23
31
14
24
34
Edges and Faces
3-D 6-Node Pentahedral

6
4
3
1
2
EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NODES
12
23
31
45
56
64
14
25
36
EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NODES
12
23
34
41
56
67
78
85
15
26
37
48
3-D 8-Node Brick

8
7
5
6
4
3
2

4
8
10
3
9
7
6
1
5
2
EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
NODES
12 5
23 6
31 7
14 8
24 9
3 4 10

Edges and Faces
3-D 20-Node Brick

8
16
15
EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
20
13
14
6
17
19
4
12
11
18
3
9
10
2
NODES
12 9
2 3 10
3 4 11
4 1 12
5 6 13
6 7 14
7 8 15
8 5 16
1 5 17
2 6 18
3 7 19
4 8 20
3-D 3-Node Shell

z
FACE ID
1
NODES
123
1
y
x
3-D 4-Node Shell/Membrane

4
P
FACE ID
1
3
1
2
NODES
1234
Edges and Faces
3-D 6-Node Shell

3
P
FACE ID
1
NODES
123456

4
3
FACE ID
1
2
3
4
NODES
124
234
314
123
1
2
6
4
3
1
2
FACE ID
1
2
3
4
5
NODES
1254
2365
3 1 4 6
132
456

Edges and Faces
3-D 8-Node Brick

8
7
5
6
4
FACE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
NODES
1265
2376
3487
4158
1234
6587
3
2

4
10
FACE ID
1
2
3
4
9
7
6
NODES
1 2 4 5 09 08
2 3 4 6 10 09
3 1 4 7 08 10
1 2 3 5 06 07
1
5
2
3
15
FACE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
4
14
10
NODES
1 2 5 04 07 14 10 13
2 3 6 05 08 15 11 14
3 1 4 06 09 13 12 15
3 2 1 08 07 09
4 5 6 10 11 12
3-D 20-Node Brick

8
16
15
7
20
13
14
6
17
19
4
12
11
18
FACE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
NODES
1 2 6 5 09 18 13 17
2 3 7 6 10 19 14 18
3 4 8 7 11 20 15 19
4 1 5 8 12 17 16 20
1 2 3 4 09 10 11 12
6 5 8 7 13 16 15 14
3
9
10
2

The input data for Marc is organized into three basic groups. These groups form a natural subdivision of
the data. Each group is then subdivided into various optional blocks of input data. The optional blocks of
data within each group have been organized to minimize the input of unnecessary data. The main idea is
to enable you to specify only the data for the optional blocks needed to define your problem. The various
blocks of input are referred to here as optional in the sense that many have built-in default values which
can be used and does not imply that they are optional in all cases. The input data is divided into the
following three groups:
Parameter Data
This group of data is used to allocate the necessary working space for the problem and to set up initial
switches which control the flow of Marc through the desired analysis. This set of input data is terminated
with END parameter data.
Model Definition Data
This set of data is used to read in the initial loading, geometry, and material data of the model. It also
provides nodal point data such a boundary conditions. In general, the initial model data is provided in this
group and control restart. Print options can also be specified here for further Marc processing. This data
provides Marc with the necessary information for determination of an initial elastic solution (zero
increment solution in Marc terminology). This group of data is terminated with END OPTION data.
History Definition Data
This group of data provide the load incrementation and control of Marc after the initial elastic analysis.
The group also includes blocks which allow changes in the initial model specifications. Each set of load
incrementation data is terminated with CONTINUE data. This data sends Marc back for another increment
or series of increments if the auto incrementation features are requested.

Input data file organization for Marc is shown in Figure 1-1.
Linear Analysis
Linear and Nonlinear Analysis

Requiring Incrementation
Proportional
Increment
Auto Load
Etc.
Connectivity
Coordinates
Fixed Displacements
Etc.
Title
Sizing
Etc.
Figure 1-1
Model
Definition
Parameter
Marc Input Data File
Typical Marc Problem Data Files

Marc Parameter Data
END Data
Marc Model Definition Data

(Zero Increment)
END OPTION Data
Marc History Definition Data

for the First Increment
CONTINUE Data
(Additional History Definition Data

for the 2nd, 3rd, ..., Increments)
History
Definition
Marc Input for New Users

Marc input format is designed to allow the input of very complex problems. The new user is, however,
faced with gaining familiarity with the system and its conventions. At the outset, therefore, you should
adopt a systematic approach to the preparation of input data. One approach is to follow the construction
of Marc and adopt the procedure of preparing input for each of the data blocks (parameter, model
definition, and history definition options) in turn.
We shall illustrate our discussion by preparing input for the analysis of a thin plate with hole subjected
to pressure loading. The problem, as shown in Figure 1-2, is a well-known one so that the results can be
compared to the exact solution (Timoshenko, Theory of Elasticity). The hole/plate size ratio is chosen to
approximate an infinite plate. A procedure preparing Marc input takes the following steps:
Finite Element Modeling
The plate has an outside dimension of 10 inches x 10 inches with a central hole of 1 inch radius. The
thickness of the plate is assumed to be 0.1 inches and the material property is assumed to be isotropic and
linear elastic. The Youngs modulus is 30 x 106 pounds per square inch (psi) with Poissons ratio of 0.3.
These quantities are sufficient to define the behavior of an isotropic, linear-elastic material.
= 1.0 psi
10 in.
R = 1.0 in.
10 in.
Plate Thickness = 0.1 in.
E = 30 X 106 psi
Figure 1-2
Plate with Hole
As shown in Figure 1-2, due to symmetry conditions, only a quarter of the plate is analyzed. Prescribed
displacement boundary conditions exist along the lines of symmetry (that is, u = 0 at line x = 0; v = 0 at
line y = 0) and traction (pressure) boundary condition exits at the top of the plate.

This quarter plate is approximated by a finite element mesh consisting of twenty 8-node plane stress
elements with appropriate loading and boundary conditions. The element (Marc type 26) is a secondorder, isoparametric two-dimensional element for plane stress. There are eight nodes with two
translational degrees of freedom at each node. A description of element type 26 can be found in Marc
Volume B: Element Library.
This example uses a coarse mesh for demonstration purposes only. The analyst must anticipate the sharp
stress gradients in this problem and design the mesh accordingly. This is achieved in this problem by
using progressively smaller elements as the hole is approached. If necessary, further mesh refinement can
be achieved by adding elements to the mesh.
The preparation of parameter, model definition, and history definition data for this example is
demonstrated as follows:
Parameter Data
The analysis to be carried out in this example is a linear elastic analysis with plots. Consequently, only
five parameters are needed for the input data:
TITLE
ELEMENTS
SIZING
END
In this example, the title, Elastic Analysis of a Thin Plate with Hole, is chosen for the problem and entered
through the TITLE parameter.
The selected Marc element type 26 is entered through the ELEMENTS parameter.
No data is required on the SIZING parameter:
Finally, the parameters are completed with an END parameter.
At this stage, the input data is:
TITLE
ELASTIC ANALYSIS OF A THIN PLATE WITH HOLE
SIZING
ELEMENTS,26,
END
Model Definition Data
The model definition data contains the bulk data for the analysis. The data entered here concerns:
1. the topology of the model (finite element mesh in terms of element connectivity and nodal
coordinates, as well as plate thickness),
2. material property (Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio),
3. pressure loading and prescribed displacement boundary conditions, and

4. plotting and output controls.
A list of the model definition options can be found in Chapter 3 of this document.
1. Topology of the Model
The topology of the plate model is numerically defined by the following model definition options:
CONNECTIVITY
COORDINATES
GEOMETRY
In this example, the mesh consists of 20 elements and 79 nodes. The data required for element
connectivity and nodal coordinates are:
CONNECTIVITY
20
1
26
1
2
26
3
3
26
9
4
26
11
5
26
5
6
26
3
7
26
30
8
26
32
9
26
38
10
26
40
11
26
1
12
26
47
13
26
9
14
26
53
15
26
49
16
26
47
17
26
30
18
26
69
19
26
38
20
26
75
COORDINATES
0
0
1
1.4000
2
1.5500
3
1.7000
.
.
.
77
0.0000
78
0.4931
79
0.0000
3
5
11
13
3
1
32
34
40
42
9
53
17
59
64
66
38
75
29
66
11
13
19
21
27
29
40
42
27
25
53
55
59
61
66
29
75
77
66
64
9
11
17
19
25
27
38
40
29
27
47
49
53
55
47
1
69
71
75
77
2
4
10
12
4
2
31
33
39
41
6
50
14
56
62
63
35
72
43
78
7
8
15
16
23
24
36
37
44
45
52
54
58
60
65
67
74
76
67
65
10
12
18
20
26
28
39
41
28
26
50
51
56
57
63
24
72
73
78
79
6
7
14
15
22
23
35
36
43
44
46
48
52
54
48
46
68
70
74
76
1.4000
1.0500
0.7000
1.2500
1.1910
1.3750
The data in the CONNECTIVITY option consists of element numbers (1,2,...,19,20), element type
(26), and for each element, four corner node numbers and four midside node numbers.

The data in the COORDINATES option consists of the node number (1); and coordinates (x = 1.4,
y = 1.4) of node 1 in the global coordinate system (x, y).
Finally, the plate thickness is entered through GEOMETRY as:
GEOMETRY
0,
0.1,
1 TO 20
A thickness of 0.1 inches is assumed for all twenty (1 to 20) elements.
2. Material Property
Material properties of the plate are entered through the ISOTROPIC option. For our problem, the only
data required for a linear elastic analysis are Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio. The same material is
used for the whole mesh (from Element No. 1 to Element No. 20). This is given a material ID of 1. The
data in ISOTROPIC is:
ISOTROPIC
1,
1,
30.E6,0.3,
1 TO 20
3. Pressure Loading and Prescribed Displacement Boundary Conditions
As shown in Figure 1-3, the pressure loading is acted on two elements (elements 13 and 14), along the
lines 61-60-59 and 59-58-17.
From CONNECTIVITY, we observe that these lines represent the 2-6-3 face of the elements. As a result,
a distributed load type of 8 can be determined for the pressure loading from the QUICK REFERENCE
of element 26 in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
"LOAD TYPE (IBODY)=8 FOR UNIFORM PRESSURE ON 2-6-3 FACE"
In addition, as shown in Figure 1-4, the sign conversion of the pressure loading is that a negative
magnitude represents a tensile distributed load. Consequently, the input for the one pound tensile
distributed loading (DIST LOADS) acting on elements 13 and 14 takes the following form:
DIST LOADS
0,
8,-1.,
13,14,
60
61
57
59
58
14
17
13
16
55
12
51
11
19
49
62
64
79
77
73
71
15
20
18
16
19
17 9
7
8 10
20
5 in.
4
5
34 37424525 22 5
2
5 in.
8
13
16
21
Radius of the
hole = 1 in.
x
Figure 1-3
4
Mesh Layout for Plate with Hole

7
Figure 1-4
Integration Points of Eight-Node, 2-D Element
The FIXED DISP option is used for the input of prescribed displacement boundary conditions at the lines
of symmetry (x = 0, y = 0). As indicated in the QUICK REFERENCE of element 26, the nodal degrees
of freedom are as follows:
dof 1 = u = global x-direction displacement
dof 2 = v = global y-direction displacement.

In this example, the symmetry conditions require that:

dof 1 = u = 0 for nodes (71, 73, 77, 79, 64, 62, 49, 51, 55, 57, 61)
along the line x=0.
and
dof 2 = v = 0 for nodes (34, 37, 42, 45, 25, 22, 5, 8, 13, 16, 21)
along the line y=0.
The input data takes the following format:

FIXED DISP
2,
0.,
2,
34,37,42,45,25,22,5,8,13,16,21,
0.,
1,
71,73,77,79,64,62,49,51,55,57,61,
4. Bandwidth Optimization and Output Controls
Although the bandwidth in this sample problem cannot be extremely large, the use of the OPTIMIZE
model definition option demonstrates the bandwidth optimization capabilities in Marc. This option can
reduce considerable computing costs in larger problems. The bandwidth optimization option creates an
internal node numbering different from your node numbering, but all data input and output is in your
node numbering system.
There are a number of options available to you for bandwidth optimization. The option number 2
(Cuthill-McKee algorithm) with a maximum of ten iterations is selected for this example.
OPTIMIZE,2,0,0,1,
10,
In order to minimize the output quantity (number of printed pages), the PRINT ELEMENT option is used
for printing out stresses and strains at a few integration points of a number of elements. The elements to
be printed are:
From Element
to
Element
10
10
Only two integration points (numbers 4 and 6) where stresses and strains are to be printed. Nodal
quantities (displacement, reactions, etc.) are printed for all nodes (from node 1 to node 79). The input
data of PRINT ELEMENT is:
PRINT ELEMENT
1,
STRESS STRAIN
2,4,5,8,10
4,6,
The SUMMARY option produces summary tables containing maximum and minimum values of stresses
and strains.
The model definition data is completed with an END OPTION.
History Definition Data
This following example is a linear-elastic analysis which requires no incrementation data.
title
elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole
sizing
elements
26
end
connectivity
20
1
26
1
3
11
9
2
7
10
6
2
26
3
5
13
11
4
8
12
7
3
26
9
11
19
17
10
15
18
14
4
26
11
13
21
19
12
16
20
15
5
26
5
3
27
25
4
23
26
22
6
26
3
1
29
27
2
24
28
23
7
26
30
32
40
38
31
36
39
35
8
26
32
34
42
40
33
37
41
36
9
26
38
40
27
29
39
44
28
43
10
26
40
42
25
27
41
45
26
44
11
26
1
9
53
47
6
52
50
46
12
26
47
53
55
49
50
54
51
48
13
26
9
17
59
53
14
58
56
52
14
26
53
59
61
55
56
60
57
54
15
26
49
64
66
47
62
65
63
48
16
26
47
66
29
1
63
67
24
46
17
26
30
38
75
69
35
74
72
68
18
26
69
75
77
71
72
76
73
70
19
26
38
29
66
75
43
67
78
74
20
26
75
66
64
77
78
65
79
76
coordinates
0
0
1
1.4000
1.4000
2
1.5500
1.0500
3
1.7000
0.7000
4
1.8500
0.3500
5
2.0000
0.0000
6
2.3000
2.3000
7
2.5250
1.1500
8
2.7500
0.0000
9
3.2000
3.2000
10
3.2750
2.4000
11
3.3500
1.6000
12
3.4250
0.8000
13
3.5000
0.0000

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
4.1000
4.1750
4.2500
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
1.7500
1.4900
1.2300
1.5000
1.3900
1.2800
1.1700
1.0600
0.7070
0.8315
0.9238
0.9810
1.0000
0.7953
1.0129
1.1250
0.8835
1.0008
1.1019
1.1855
1.2500
0.9718
1.1910
1.3750
1.0500
0.7000
0.3500
0.0000
1.1500
0.0000
2.4000
1.6000
0.8000
0.0000
2.0500
0.0000
3.7500
2.5000
1.2500
0.0000
0.0000
0.6150
0.0000
0.2650
0.5300
0.7950
4.1000
2.0500
0.0000
5.0000
3.7500
2.5000
1.2500
0.0000
0.0000
0.6150
1.2300
0.0000
0.2650
0.5300
0.7950
1.0600
0.7070
0.5557
0.3825
0.1948
0.0000
0.7953
0.4194
0.0000
0.8835
0.6753
0.4562
0.2299
0.0000
0.9718
0.4931
0.0000
1.5500
1.7000
1.8500
2.0000
2.5250
2.7500
3.2750
3.3500
3.4250
3.5000
4.1750
4.2500
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
1.7500
1.4900
1.5000
1.3900
1.2800
1.1700
68
0.5557
0.8315
69
0.3825
0.9238
70
0.1948
0.9810
71
0.0000
1.0000
72
0.4194
1.0129
73
0.0000
1.1250
74
0.6753
1.0008
75
0.4562
1.1019
76
0.2299
1.1855
77
0.0000
1.2500
78
0.4931
1.1910
79
0.0000
1.3750
geometry
1
0.1
1 to 20
isotropic
1
1
30000000.
.3
1 to 20
dist loads
1
8 -1.
13
14
fixed displacement
2
0.0000e+00
2
34
37
42
45
25
0.0000e+00
1
71
73
77
79
64
optimize,2,0,0,1,
10,
print element
1
stress strain
2
4
5
8
10
4
6
end option
22
13
16
21
62
49
51
55
57
61


Selected portions of the output for this problem are shown in the following. The small type on the output
are the authors comments and gives a further explanation.
Marc first gives a notes section which identifies the version of Marc being used. This is followed by an
echo of the input data and a summary of program sizing and options requested.
W
W
MMMMM
MMMMM
WWWWW
WWWWW
MMMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWW
WWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWW
WWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWW
MMMMMM
MMMMMMMMMMM
MMMMMM
WWWWWW
WWWWWWWWWWW
WWWWWW
MMMM
MMMMMMM
MMMM
WWWW
WWWWWWW
WWWW
MM
MMM
MM
WW
WWW
WW
M
M
M
W
W
W
MM
MMM
MM
WW
WWW
WW
MMMM
MMMMMMM
MMMM
WWWW
WWWWWWW
WWWW
MMMMMM
MMMMMMMMMMM
MMMMMM
WWWWWW
WWWWWWWWWWW
WWWWWW
MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWW
WWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWW
WWWWWWWWW
MMMMM
MMMMM
WWWWW
WWWWW
M
M
Marc REVISION 2010
MSC.SOFTWARE CORPORATION
machine type: NT
(c) COPYRIGHT 2010 MSC.Software Corporation, all rights reserved
Marc - N T
i n p u t
p a g e
d a t a
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------title
prob e2.9 elastic analysis
title
plate with hole
title
prob e2.9 elastic analysis - elmt 26
sizing
card
5
elements,26,
processor,1,1,1,
version,10,
end
connectivity
card
10
20
1
26
1
3
11
9
2
7
10
6
2
26
3
5
13
11
4
8
12
7
3
26
9
11
19
17
10
15
18
14
4
26
11
13
21
19
12
16
20
15
card
15
5
26
5
3
27
25
4
23
26
22
6
26
3
1
29
27
2
24
28
23
7
26
30
32
40
38
31
36
39
35
8
26
32
34
42
40
33
37
41
36
9
26
38
40
27
29
39
44
28
43
card
20
10
26
40
42
25
27
41
45
26
44
11
26
1
9
53
47
6
52
50
46
12
26
47
53
55
49
50
54
51
48
13
26
9
17
59
53
14
58
56
52
14
26
53
59
61
55
56
60
57
54
card
25
15
26
49
64
66
47
62
65
63
48
16
26
47
66
29
1
63
67
24
46
17
26
30
38
75
69
35
74
72
68
18
26
69
75
77
71
72
76
73
70
19
26
38
29
66
75
43
67
78
74
card
30
20
26
75
66
64
77
78
65
79
76
coordinates
2
79
1
1.4000
1.4000
2
1.5500
1.0500
card
35
3
1.7000
0.7000
4
1.8500
0.3500
5
2.0000
0.0000
6
2.3000
2.3000
7
2.5250
1.1500
card
40
8
2.7500
0.0000
9
3.2000
3.2000
10
3.2750
2.4000
11
3.3500
1.6000
12
3.4250
0.8000
card
45
13
3.5000
0.0000
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
p a g e
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------14
4.1000
4.1000
15
4.1750
2.0500
16
4.2500
0.0000
17
5.0000
5.0000
card
50
18
5.0000
3.7500
19
5.0000
2.5000
20
5.0000
1.2500
21
5.0000
0.0000
22
1.7500
0.0000

card
55
23
1.4900
0.6150
24
1.2300
1.2300
25
1.5000
0.0000
26
1.3900
0.2650
27
1.2800
0.5300
card
60
28
1.1700
0.7950
29
1.0600
1.0600
30
0.7070
0.7070
31
0.8315
0.5557
32
0.9238
0.3825
card
65
33
0.9810
0.1948
34
1.0000
0.0000
35
0.7953
0.7953
36
1.0129
0.4194
37
1.1250
0.0000
card
70
38
0.8835
0.8835
39
1.0008
0.6753
40
1.1019
0.4562
41
1.1855
0.2299
42
1.2500
0.0000
card
75
43
0.9718
0.9718
44
1.1910
0.4931
45
1.3750
0.0000
46
1.0500
1.5500
47
0.7000
1.7000
card
80
48
0.3500
1.8500
49
0.0000
2.0000
50
1.1500
2.5250
51
0.0000
2.7500
52
2.4000
3.2750
card
85
53
1.6000
3.3500
54
0.8000
3.4250
55
0.0000
3.5000
56
2.0500
4.1750
57
0.0000
4.2500
card
90
58
3.7500
5.0000
59
2.5000
5.0000
60
1.2500
5.0000
61
0.0000
5.0000
62
0.0000
1.7500
card
95
63
0.6150
1.4900
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
p a g e
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------64
0.0000
1.5000
65
0.2650
1.3900
66
0.5300
1.2800
67
0.7950
1.1700
card 100
68
0.5557
0.8315
69
0.3825
0.9238
70
0.1948
0.9810
71
0.0000
1.0000
72
0.4194
1.0129
card 105
73
0.0000
1.1250
74
0.6753
1.0008
75
0.4562
1.1019
76
0.2299
1.1855
77
0.0000
1.2500
card 110
78
0.4931
1.1910
79
0.0000
1.3750
isotropic
card
115
1
0.300e+08 0.300e+00 0.000e+00 0.000e+00 0.100e+21 0.000e+00
card
120
card
125
card
130
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
19
7
20
10
11
12
13
14
geometry
1
1.
1 to 20
fixed displacement
0.0000e+00
2
34
37
42
0.0000e+00
1
71
73
77
dist loads
45
25
22
13
16
21
79
64
62
49
51
55
57
61
8
-1.000
13
14
summary
card 135
optimize,2,0,0,1,
10,
print element
1
stress strain
card 140
2
4
5
8
10
4
6
post
16
17
2
0
19
17
equivalent von mises stress
card 145
11
1st comp of total stress
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
p a g e
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------12
2nd comp of total stress
13
3rd comp of total stress
end option
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*************************************************
*************************************************
program sizing and options requested as follows
element type requested*************************
number of elements in mesh*********************
number of nodes in mesh************************
max number of elements in any dist load list***
maximum number of point loads******************
load correction flagged or set************
number of lists of distributed loads***********
values stored at all integration points****
tape no.for input of coordinates + connectivity
no.of different materials
1 max.no of slopes
number of points on shell section *************
new style input format will be used*********
maximum number of set names is*****************
number of processors used *********************
Marc input version ************************
end of parameters and sizing
*************************************************
*************************************************
26
20
79
2
0
3
5
5
11
50
1
10
15

At this stage, Marc attempts to allocate core for input of the model definition data and assembly of the
element stiffness matrix. Marc first prints out the key to strain, stress, and displacement output for each
element type chosen. Column numbers identifying output quantities are referenced to the appropriate
components of stress, strain, or displacement. Then, the required number of words is printed out followed
by a list of the internal core allocation parameters. They reflect the maximum requirements imposed by
different elements. The internal element variables are different for each element type and are repeated for
each element type used in a given analysis.
key to stress, strain and displacement output
element type
26
8-node isoparametric plane stress quadrilateral

stresses and strains in global directions
1=xx
2=yy
3=xy
displacements in global directions
1=u global x direction
2=v global y direction
workspace needed for input and stiffness assembly
internal core allocation parameters
degrees of freedom per node (ndeg) 2
max. number of coordinates per node
2
max. nodes per element (nnodmx) 8
max. invariants per int. points (neqst) 1
max.stress components per int. point (nstrmx)
strains per integration point (ngens) 3
53059
flag for element storage (ielsto) 0

elements in core, words per element (nelsto)
total space required
vectors in core, total space required
1046
20920
6004
words per record on disk set to
40960
internal element variables
internal element number 1 library code type 26

number of nodes= 8
stresses stored per integration point =
direct continuum components stored = 2
shear continuum components stored = 1
shell/beam flag = 0
curvilinear coord. flag = 0

int.points for elem. stiffness 9
number of local inertia directions 2
int.point for print if all points not flagged 5
int. points for dist. surface loads (pressure) 3
library code type = 26
large disp. row counts
4
4
7
residual load correction is invoked
For nonlinear problems, it is important to note if the residual load correction was turned on. this is
automatically done in the current version.
This is followed by the model definition data; how it is read and interpreted by Marc. Marc then
calculates the bandwidth of the stiffness matrix and optimizes it if the OPTIMIZE model definition option
is included. The original bandwidth (try 0) and the optimized bandwidth (try 10).
direct symmetric profile solver is invoked for region
maximum connectivity in stiffness matrix is
17 at node
75
workspace needed for optimizing =

45562
maximum sky-line including fill-in is526at try 0(forward numbering)
maximum sky-line including fill-in is1128at try10(backward numbering)
maximum sky-line including fill-in is1307at try10(forward numbering)
maximum sky-line including fill-in is900at try10(backward numbering)
maximum connectivity in stiffness matrix is
maximum half-bandwidth is
26
14 at node
between nodes
21
40
and
number of profile entries including fill-in is
900
number of profile entries excluding fill-in is
546
total workspace needed with in-core matrix storage =
61121
load increments for each degree of freedom

summed over the whole model
from distributed loads
dist. loads on undeformed configuration - increments for dist. loads
increments for point loads
0.000000E+00
5.000000E+00
point loads
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
start of assembly
wall time =
cycle number is
2.00
start of matrix solution

wall time =
2.00
46

singularity ratio
1.8140E-01
end of matrix solution

wall time =
2.00
element with highest stress relative to yield is

where equivalent stress is 3.091E-20 of yield
NT version
Marc 2010
output for increment
0. "prob e2.9 elastic analysis - elmt 26"
total strain energy

within which:
elastic strain energy
plastic strain energy
total ext-force work
within which:
work by appl. force/disp.
work by contact forces
work by frictional forces
is
4.60569E-07
is
is
is
4.60569E-07
0.00000E+00
4.60569E-07
is
is
is
4.60569E-07
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
After the bandwidth calculation (and optimization), Marc assigns the necessary workspace for the in-core
solution of this matrix.
maximum connectivity is
14 at node
40
maximum half-bandwidth is
26 between nodes
21 and
46
number of profile entries including fill-in is
900
number of profile entries excluding fill-in is
546
total workspace needed with in-core matrix storage = 60117
Marc then calculates the loading and sums the load applied to each degree of freedom for distributed
loads and point loads. This information provides for a valuable check on the total loads in the different
degrees of freedom.
load increments associated with each degree of freedom
distributed loads
0.000e+00 5.000e-01
point loads
0.000e+00 0.000e-00
load increments associated with each degree of freedom
distributed loads
0.000e+00 5.000e-01
point loads
0.000e+00 0.000e-00
Then it prints the time (system billing units) at the start of assembly measured from the start of the job.
It then prints out the bandwidth which might have changed due to optimization of the nodal numbering
(if specified by you). This is followed by a printout of the time at the start of the matrix solution
start
time
start
time
of assembly
=
0.18
of matrix solution
=
0.24
If the out-of-core solver is used, a figure representing the profile of the global stiffness matrix is shown.
It then prints the following message which gives an estimate of the conditioning of the matrix. If the
singularity is of the order of the accuracy of the machine (10 for 64 bits), the equations can be considered
singular and the solution unreliable. For nonlinear problems, incremental changes in the singularity ratio
reflects approaching instabilities. Marc then prints the time at the end of the matrix solution. This is the
time at the end of matrix triangularization.
singularity ratio
1.8140e-01
end of matrix solution
time =
0.25
At this stage, Marc enters a back substitution for the displacements. This is followed by calculation of
element stress values. Default yield stress is set by Marc for a linear elastic analysis.
MARC 2010, 01/03/07, output for increment

0.
plate with hole
element with highest stress relative to yield is
0.309e-19 of yield
elastic analysis of a thin

8
where equivalent stress is
A heading is printed next. The Tresca Intensity is output for application in ASME code applications. The
Mises intensity is the equivalent yield stress. Principal stress and strain values are output. This is followed
by individual stress and strain components. The number of each column is to be used with the key printed
at the beginning of the analysis.
tresca
mises
mean
p r i n c i p a l
v a l u e s
o m p o n e n t s
intensity intensity normal minimum intermediate maximum
1
5
6
p h y s i c a l
2
intensity
element
20 point
4
integration pt. coordinate=
0.234e+00
0.121e+01
section thickness = 0.100e+00
engsts 5.802e-01 5.413e-01-1.342e-01-4.914e-01 0.000e+00 8.880e-02-4.531e-01 5.052e-02-1.440e-01
engstn 2.514e-08 1.550e-08-3.131e-09-1.727e-08 0.000e+00 7.874e-09-1.561e-08 6.215e-09-1.248e-08
element
20 point
6
integration pt. coordinate=
0.261e+00
0.137e+01
section thickness = 0.100e+00
engsts 6.055e-01 5.255e-01-2.275e-02-3.369e-01 0.000e+00 2.686e-01-2.677e-01 1.995e-01-1.926e-01
engstn 2.624e-08 1.518e-08-5.307e-10-1.391e-08 0.000e+00 1.232e-08-1.092e-08 9.326e-09-1.669e-08
The stress and strain results are followed by the increment of displacements and the total displacements
for all the nodes. If it is requested to print and store all stress points, a printout of the reaction forces would
follow the displacement output.

n o d a l
p o i n t
i n c r e m e n t a l
1 -2.17163e-08
7.15861e-08
4 -4.76926e-08
7 -4.39062e-08
1.49932e-08
4.43055e-08
d a t a
d i s p l a c e m e n t s
2 -3.08177e-08
5.15029e-08
3 -4.07290e-08
3.20392e-
08
5 -5.04297e-08
8 -5.45603e-08
t o t a l
1 -2.17163e-08
7.15861e-08
4 -4.76926e-08
7 -4.39062e-08
1.49932e-08
4.43055e-08
0.
0.
6 -2.76616e-08
9 -3.22702e-08
9.27126e-08
1.16274e-07
d i s p l a c e m e n t s
2 -3.08177e-08
5.15029e-08
3 -4.07290e-08
3.20392e-
08
5 -5.04297e-08
8 -5.45603e-08
0.
0.
6 -2.76616e-08
9 -3.22702e-08
9.27126e-08
1.16274e-07
total equivalent nodal forces (distributed plus point loads)

1
4
7
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
2
5
8
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
3
6
9
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
reaction forces at fixed boundary conditions, residual load correction elsewhere

1
1.21431e-17 -3.61690e-16
1.24033e-16 -1.11022e-16
3 -1.86483e-16
9.54098e-
1.31839e-16
1.42247e-16
5 -4.68375e-17 -4.27307e-02
6 -7.19910e-17
1.66533e-
7 -5.20417e-18
1.11022e-16
17
16
8 -3.96005e-17 -0.11445
9 -1.72388e-17
summary of externally applied loads

0.00000e+00
-0.72045e-17
0.50000e+00
summary of reaction/residual forces
-0.50000e+00
The results are concluded with an indication of the magnitude of distributed loads.
distributed load
list number
1
type
8
current
magnitude
-1.000
0.
0.
1.04083e-16
The SUMMARY model definition option prompts Marc to print summary tables of stresses and strains
as follows:
************************************************************************
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
increment
0
MARC 2010
*
*
*
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
quantity
*
value
* elem.* int.*layer*
*
*
*number*point*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of stress
* 0.52712e+00 *
7 * 2 *
1 *
* min first comp. of stress
* -0.11257e+01 *
18 * 7 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of stress
* 0.31370e+01 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min second comp. of stress
* -0.75958e-01 *
18 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max third comp. of stress
* 0.15887e+00 *
18 * 1 *
1 *
* min third comp. of stress
* -0.84812e+00 *
7 * 3 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
equivalent
stress
* 0.30910e+01 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
equivalent
stress
* 0.26979e+00 *
17 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
mean
stress
* 0.10821e+01 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
mean
stress
* -0.38696e+00 *
18 * 7 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
tresca
stress
* 0.31419e+01 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
tresca
stress
* 0.29647e+00 *
17 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of total strain
* 0.58578e-08 *
7 * 1 *
1 *
* min first comp. of total strain
* -0.37172e-07 *
18 * 7 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of total strain
* 0.10347e-06 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min second comp. of total strain
* 0.34023e-08 *
17 * 7 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max third comp. of total strain
* 0.13769e-07 *
18 * 1 *
1 *
* min third comp. of total strain
* -0.73504e-07 *
7 * 3 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
equivalent
total strain
* 0.87678e-07 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
equivalent
total strain
* 0.77458e-08 *
17 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
mean
total strain
* 0.00000e+00 *
1 * 1 *
1 *
* min
mean
total strain
* 0.00000e+00 *
1 * 1 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************

The message end of increment 0 signifies the end of analysis for 0th increment. Additional output
concerns only with post plottings. The output is finally concluded by plot messages, since plotting
was requested.
************************************************************************
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
increment
0
MARC 2010
*
*
*
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
quantity
*
value
* elem.* int.*layer*
*
*
*number*point*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
tresca
total strain
* 0.13162e-06 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
tresca
total strain
* 0.12847e-07 *
17 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max temperature
* 0.00000e+00 *
1 * 1 *
1 *
* min temperature
* 0.00000e+00 *
1 * 1 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************
************************************************************************
******************************************************************
******************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
increment
0
Marc 2010
*
*
*
******************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
quantity
*
value
* node *
*
*
* number *
*
*
*
*
******************************************************************
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of incremental disp * -0.19968e-08 *
48 *
* min first comp. of incremental disp * -0.73223e-07 *
21 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of incremental disp *
0.20382e-06 *
61 *
* min second comp. of incremental disp *
0.14872e-07 *
26 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of total disp.
* -0.19968e-08 *
48 *
* min first comp. of total disp.
* -0.73223e-07 *
21 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of total disp.
*
0.20382e-06 *
61 *
* min second comp. of total disp.
*
0.14872e-07 *
26 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of reaction force
*
0.12293e-01 *
73 *
* min first comp. of reaction force
* -0.13867e-01 *
57 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of reaction force
* -0.13839e-01 *
34 *
* min second comp. of reaction force
* -0.11445e+00 *
8 *
*
*
*
*
******************************************************************
******************************************************************
e n d
o f
time =
i n c r e m e n t
1.17
The Marc exit number 3004 indicates the problem is completed.

Chapter 2 Parameters List
Parameters List
Parameter
Page
$NO LIST
80
ABLATION
126
ACCUMULATE
157
ACOUSTIC
134
ADAPTIVE
87
ALIAS
158
ALL POINTS
149
ALLOCATE
70
APPBC
156
ASSUMED STRAIN
107
AUTOMSET
186
AUTOSPC
188
BEAM SECT
191
BEARING
129
Chapter 2 Parameters List 62
Parameter
Page
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
181
BUCKLE
112
CAVITY
138
CENTROID
148
COMMENT
162
CONSTANT DILATATION
106
COUPLE
116
CREEP
113
CURING
128
DECOUPLING
117
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION
86
DESIGN SENSITIVITY
85
DIFFUSION
125
DIST LOADS
176
DYNAMIC
91
ELASTIC
84
ELASTICITY
108
ELECTRO
130
ELEMENTS
73
EL-MA
132
ELSTO
169
END
82
EXTENDED
81
FEATURE
75
FILMS
178
FINITE
105
FLUID
118
Parameter
Page
FLUXES
177
FOLLOW FOR
110
FOURIER
90
HARMONIC
93
HEAT
122
IBOOC
171
INCLUDE
173
INPUT TAPE
168
IO-DEACTIVATE
189
ISTRESS
154
JOULE
124
LARGE DISP
98
LARGE STRAIN
99
LINEAR
89
LOAD COR
150
LUMP
155
MACHINING
140
MAGNETO
131
MNF
143
MPC-CHECK
185
NEW
160
NO ECHO
172
NO LOADCOR
151
NOTES
167
OOC
170
Chapter 2 Parameters List 64
Parameter
Page
PIEZO
133
PLASTICITY
109
PORE
120
PREALLOC
PRINT
PROCESSOR
72
163
77
PYROLYSIS
127
RADIATION
135
RBE
139
RESPONSE
95
RESTRICTOR
179
REZONING
142
R-P FLOW
96
SCALE
152
SHELL SECT
182
SIZING
71
SPFLOW
97
SS-ROLLING
94
STATE VARS
175
STOP
166
STRUCTURAL
115
SUPER
144
TABLE
161
THERMAL
153
TIE
184
TITLE
69
TSHEAR
183
T-T-T
121
Parameter
UNIT
Page
79
UPDATE
104
USER
145
VERSION
74
VISCO ELAS
114
WELDING
180
Chapter 2: Parameters
Parameters
Basic Input Requirements
Analysis Types
Rezoning and Substructure Parameters
Additional Flags for Various Analyses
Program Function and I/O Controls
Modifying Default Values
Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements
68
83
141
147
159
174
190
This chapter describes the parameter section of the Marc input file. It is the first section of the file. The
parameter section is used to specify the title of the file, the work space requirements, the elements to be
used in the analysis, and the type of analysis to be performed. It is organized according to loosely defined
categories of parameter types, as shown in the above list.
Only the TITLE, ELEMENTS, and END parameters are required. Optional parameters flag the use of
certain elements, analysis capabilities, or change the default values. The first ten columns of the
parameter data are reserved for the key words which control the input of the parameters. These key words
must be entered as left justified. Some options are set by the order in which data is input.
Chapter 2: Parameters 68
69 TITLE
Output Title Definition
TITLE
This parameter is REQUIRED.

Description
This required parameter defines the output title. There is no limit to the number of the title data read in
as long as the word TITLE appears in the first field. However, only the last TITLE data is used as an output
header. Due to the free-format processor, do not place commas within the TITLE data (Columns 11-80).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Type Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word TITLE.
11-80
2nd
Enter the title to be output with results.
ALLOCATE 70
Initial Workspace Definition
ALLOCATE
Initial Workspace Definition
Description
This parameter allows the specification of memory to be allocated at the start of the job. Marc uses
additional memory if necessary and it is available. See Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing
Option for more details. Values which are too large waste memory. The initial allocation can be done for
the following parts.
General memory: This specifies the initial allocation of the so-called general memory. This is used for
boundary condition data, material data, storing element stiffness matrices, and part or all of the assembled
global stiffness matrix among other things. Please note that element data like stresses and strains are no
longer part of the general memory starting with the 2005r3 release. Solver 0 also uses the general memory
area for the decomposition of the stiffness matrix. Initial allocation of the general memory can be used
for avoiding reallocation (increase of the workspace). For parallel processing, the amount specified is the
total for the job. It is divided by the number of domains used.
Matrix solver: This specifies the initial allocation of memory for solver 8. By giving a value that is more
than the maximum used during the run, one avoids that the solver workspace is increased (reallocated).
This can be particularly useful for large contact jobs, where additional memory may be allocated due to
contact. If the given workspace is less than what is needed, it is automatically increased. This option is
only for use with solver type 8. No check is done to see if solver type 8 is used in the job. For parallel
processing, the amount specified is the total for the job. It is divided by the number of domains used.
Format
Format
Free
Fixed
Data
Type Entry
1-8
1st
Enter the word ALLOCATE.
11-15
2nd
Size of workspace in MByte for general memory.
16-20
3rd
Size of workspace in MByte for solver memory.
71 SIZING
Working Space Definition
SIZING
Working Space Definition
Description
This parameter can be used to specify the maximum number of nodes and elements.
The values for the maximum number of elements and nodes should be set to an upper-bound if a manual
rezoning analysis is performed. In general for other cases, they are not needed.
If the number of elements or nodes in the model is greater than the value of MAXNUM in the include
file located in the tools directory, then either the value of MAXNUM should be increased or the number
of elements and nodes should be given on the SIZING parameter. The default value for MAXNUM is
one million. The value of MAXNUM may also be set using the environment value of MSC_MMEM. This is
often preferable to changing the include file.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Type Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word SIZING.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
3rd
Maximum number of elements.
26-30
4th
Maximum number of nodal points.
PREALLOC 72
Initial Workspace Allocation
PREALLOC
Initial Workspace Allocation
Description
This parameter allows the specification of memory to be allocated at the start of the job. The workspace
for solver 8, given in the second field, is used for allocating the workspace for the solver before any other
memory is allocated. By giving a value that is more than the maximum used during the run, one avoids
that the solver workspace is increased (reallocated). This can be particularly useful on 32 bit systems for
large jobs. If the given workspace is less than what is needed, it is automatically increased.
This option is only for use with solver type 8. No check is done to see if solver type 8 is used in the job. In
a job using parallel processing, the allocation applies to the local domain and is the same on all domains.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word PREALLOC.
11-20
2nd
Size of workspace in words for solver type 8 (Multifrontal Direct

Sparse Solver).
73 ELEMENTS
Element Type Selection
ELEMENTS
Element Type Selection

Description
This required parameter is used to identify the elements used in the analysis. Element codes for all the
allowable element types are found in Marc Volume B: Element Library. This data can be repeated as often
as necessary.
Note that the ALIAS parameter is available to change element library code descriptions on the
CONNECTIVITY model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word ELEMENTS.
11-15
2nd
Library code of the first type of element selected.
16-20
3rd
Library code of the second type of element selected.
21-25
4th
Library code of the third type of element selected.
Etc.
Etc.
Etc. up to 14 element types.
VERSION 74
Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File
VERSION
Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File
Description
This parameter is used to control which version of the program to use from an input perspective and a
defaults perspective. The following numbers are appropriate.
9
defaults and input associated with MSC.Marc 2001
10
11
12
defaults and input associated with Marc 2007
Note:
If this parameter is not included or is given a value of zero, it is automatically set to nine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word VERSION.
11-15
2nd
Enter the input/analysis version to be used.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 for multiphysics input associated with Marc 2008 and earlier
versions (default).
Enter 2 for multiphysics input based upon defining physics type on
material and control options.
75 FEATURE
Specification of the Behavior of a Feature
FEATURE
Description
This parameter allows the user to specify that a particular feature is to be defined in a selected data style.
This permits data files to maintain compatibility with older versions of the program while still utilizing
the latest technology.
Currently, the following options used this capability:
Option
Feature ID
(ifeat)
Consequence
RADIATION
3301
Radiation viewfactor cut-off is relative; default for before

version 11.
RADIATION
3302
Radiation viewfactor cut-off is relative; default for

version 11.
MOONEY, ARRUDBOYCE,
GENT, OGDEN
3402
use mixed J, u, p formulation for updated Lagrange rubber

formulations and permits use of series representation of
volumetric strain energy function.
5700
Set absolute rigid link rotation tolerance to 0.001; this is the

default.
5701
Do not set absolute rigid link rotation tolerance by default;

instead, read off the CONTROL option.
5800
Conventional element type 140.
5801
Add the enhanced strain contribution to improve the shell

element performance especially for distorted meshes (linear
analysis only).
5802
Extensions to 5801 for nonlinear analysis.
1002
Contact tolerance is based upon edge length of boundary

elements only.
4401
Skip recycle due to body-body contact; generally reduces

computational costs.
5301
Use double-sided tying in contact - this sometimes improves

behavior for self contact, but often leads to increase costs. It
should only be used if no other method resolves penetration
problems.
-53xx
Release node after xx separations.
+53xx
Hold node and skip separation check after xx separations.
xx>5
Message in .out file should be adjusted.
6601
Remove deactivated deformable bodies from the post file.
CONTROL
CONTACT
FEATURE 76
Feature ID
(ifeat)
Option
Consequence
8201
Activates improvements for force based friction models.
10201
After remeshing, make certain that nodes in contact stay

in contact.
PIN CODE
6901
Use static condensation to remove pin code degrees of

freedom. This is not recommended for dynamics.
HEAT
7001
Switch off Lobatto integration for convective boundary

conditions to improve compatibility with 2005 r3.
7902
Used for higher order tetrahedral elements 127, 130 and 133:
check inside-out condition based upon 16 integration points.
DIST LOADS
10101
Do not apply distributed load to a face or an edge if all nodes

on the face or edge are in contact. This feature internally
turns on FOLLOW FOR parameter.
Postprocessor
10401
Do not write out new geometry on post file due to initial

stress free projection in contact analysis. This resolves some
problems associated with external post processors.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word FEATURE.
11-15
2nd
Enter the feature ID.
This parameter may be repeated as often as necessary, or you can enter 14

feature IDs per line.
77 PROCESSOR
Parallelization Control
PROCESSOR
Description
This parameter may be used to specify the decomposition of the model when the single input DDM
procedure is used. It is necessary to start the analysis using the -nps command line argument. For more
details, see Table 2-3: Keyword Descriptions in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 2:
Program Initiation.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PROCESSOR.
11-15
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
4th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
5th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
7th
Decomposition method:
Enter 10 to use user specified decomposition (the user domains are
specified using the DEFINE element set option with name of domain*)
Enter 11 to use Metis Best decomposition; default.
Enter 12 to use Metis Element-Based decomposition.
Enter 13 to use Metis Node-Based decomposition.
Enter 14 to use Vector decomposition.
Enter 15 to use Radial decomposition.
Enter 16 to use Angular decomposition.
Enter 17 to use Recursive Coordinate Bisection decomposition.
41-45
8th
Enter 1 to use out-of-core storage for DDM single input file.
46-50
9th
Flag for Additional Domain Decomposition Information (Default 0)

0 - No additional input
1 - Additional Input (Data Blocks 2 and 3 required)
PROCESSOR 78
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Island Removal Flag for Domain Decomposition (Default is 0)

0 - Do not attempt to remove Islands
1 - Attempt to remove Islands
2 - Detect contact during Decomposition; do not attempt to remove
Islands
3 - Detect contact during Decomposition; attempt to remove Islands
6-10
2nd
Fine Graph Flag for Domain Decomposition

(Default is 0)
0 - Coarse Graph
1 - Fine Graph
11-15
3rd
Control of point on axis of rotation for Radial/Angular Decompositions.

0 - Use Centroid of the Bounding Box of the model
1 - User-supplied point; defined in 4th, 5th, and 6th fields of 3rd data
block.
16-25
4th
Element coefficient weight - Controls balance between computational

cost of domains. Range <0.,1.0>. Default is 1.0 (use full element weight).
0 means do not use element weight.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
First direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15, or
16.
11-20
2nd
Second direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15,
or 16.
21-30
3rd
Third direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15,
or 16.
31-40
4th
x-coordinate of point on axis.
41-50
5th
y-coordinate of point on axis.
51-60
6th
z-coordinate of point on axis.
79 UNIT
Invoke Unit System Definition
UNIT
Invoke Unit System Definition
Description
This parameter allows users to specify the unit system used in the analysis. The material data read in from
the material data base or from the ISOTROPIC, WORK HARD, TEMPERATURE EFFECTS, MATERIAL
DATA, GRAIN SIZE, and PARAMETERS options are converted to this set of units where appropriate.
The output indicates both the user-defined quantity and the converted value. Note that if the material data
is entered through a user subroutine, it must be consistent with the unit type specified here. This option
is not applied to data entered through the TABLE option. Hence, the data must be consistent with the unit
type entered here. For material data, it is advantageous to enter data normalized with respect to the
reference value to avoid this problem. If this parameter is not included, no conversions are performed.
If this parameter is included, the display of the results indicate the unit of the resultant quantity.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word UNIT.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 for SI-meter unit.

Enter 2 for SI-millimeter unit.
Enter 3 for US-inch unit.
Notes:
For the unit definition and conversions, see Appendix I: Units.

The unit is assumed to be SI-mm if this parameter is not used.
$NO LIST 80
No Listing of Input Data
$NO LIST
No Listing of Input Data
Description
Using this parameter results in the suppression of the printout of the remainder of the input file.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the words $NO LIST.
81 EXTENDED
Extended Precision of Reading in Data
EXTENDED
Extended Precision of Reading in Data
Description
This parameter is used to indicate that models are to be in extended precision and/or a large number of
elements or nodes exist in the model. If this option is included, the width of all the data fields described
in this manual must be doubled. For example, all I5 integer fields change to I10. If this parameter is
included, all input lines must be in this format.
Note that the post file is written in 32 bit integer mode so the largest element of node ID is still limited
to about one billion.
Note that all floating point numbers are stored in double precision. So, when using the EXTENDED
parameter, one can have about 15 digits of precision for coordinate positions.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word EXTENDED.
END 82
End of Parameter Section
END
End of Parameter Section

Description
This required parameter terminates the input of parameter data, signaling the end of the
parameter section.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word END.
83
Analysis Types
Chapt Analysis Types

er 2:
Para
meter
s
ELASTIC 84
Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads
ELASTIC
Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads
Description
When this option is invoked, each load case is independent. Total loads must be input with the POINT
LOAD, DIST LOADS, or CHANGE STATE/THERMAL LOADS model definition options after END
OPTION.
If the direct solver is invoked, the decomposed stiffness matrix is used for each load case and only a back
substitution on a series of load vectors is performed.
When the ADAPTIVE meshing option is used in conjunction with this parameter, only the loads before
the END OPTION (increment zero) are considered. This load is then re-analyzed until the error criteria
is satisfied.
Notes:
This data should never be used with any data which flags nonlinear analysis or which
change the stiffness matrix; for example, the LARGE DISP parameter or the DISP CHANGE
option.
If temperature dependent material properties are included, then a new assembly is
performed (if temperature loading is on).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word ELASTIC.
11-15
2nd
Element storage parameter, to reduce storage in elastic analysis.

Set to 1, so that creep, swelling, plastic, incremental strains, plastic strain
rates, and incremental stresses are not stored.
Set to 2, so that strain energies, thermal strains, and elastic strains are
not stored.
Note:
If you request these items on the post file and they are not
stored, the information is incorrect.
85 DESIGN SENSITIVITY
Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only
DESIGN SENSITIVITY
Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only
Description
This parameter invokes the design sensitivity capability in Marc. In this release, the capability is
restricted to linear static structural analysis and eigenvalue analysis. This option requires the model
definition options: DESIGN VARIABLES and at least one of DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS,
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS, or DESIGN FREQUENCY
CONSTRAINTS. If multiple load cases are to be evaluated, the ELASTIC parameter should be included.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-18
1st
Enter the words DESIGN SENSITIVITY. Fixed field can be truncated to 12

characters
N/A
2nd
Enter the word SORT* if you desire to sort the constraints by degree of
criticalness (optional), and also optionally to limit the number of
constraints to be analyzed (see third field).
N/A
3rd
Only if SORT* is invoked, enter the number of most critical constraints

to be analyzed. If no number is entered, the default number (100) of most
critical constraints are isolated by sorting and are subjected to
sensitivity analysis.
*If there are any eigenvalue constraints in the sorted group, these will be output before any static
response constraints. Thus, the first constraint to be output may not always be the most critical one.
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION 86
Perform Design Optimization
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION
Perform Design Optimization
Description
This parameter invokes the design optimization capability in Marc. In this release, the capability is
restricted to linear static structural analysis and eigenvalue analysis. This option requires the model
definition options: DESIGN OBJECTIVE, DESIGN VARIABLES and at least one of DESIGN
DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRAIN
CONSTRAINTS, or DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS. The DESIGN OBJECTIVE option is used to
define the objective function. If multiple load cases are to be evaluated, the ELASTIC parameter should
be included.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-19
1st
Enter the words DESIGN OPTIMIZATION. Fixed field can be truncated to

12 characters.
N/A
2nd
Enter the word ACTIVESET (optional).
N/A
3rd
Only if ACTIVESET is invoked, enter the maximum number of constraints

for the active set. This does not limit the number of constraints that can be
prescribed by you.
Default is 100.
N/A
4th
Enter the word CYCLES (optional).
N/A
5th
Only if CYCLES is invoked, enter the maximum number of design

optimization cycles (including analyses). Default is 20.
The order of the ACTIVESET and CYCLES can be reversed; for example,
Free Formats 4th and 5th become 2nd and 3rd while Free Formats 2nd and
3rd become 4th and 5th.
87 ADAPTIVE
Adaptive Mesh Refinement
ADAPTIVE
Description
This parameter is required when either a local adaptive meshing or global adaptive meshing is to be used
to improve the accuracy and/or mesh quality. The parameter indicates whether fixed bounds are set on
the number of elements and nodes or whether dynamic memory should be used.
Local Adaptive Meshing
The criteria for determining when local remeshing should occur is provided in the ADAPTIVE model
definition option.Local remeshing is available for lower-order shell and continuum elements including
triangular, quadrilateral, tetrahedral, and brick elements.
In an elastic analysis, Marc iterates based upon the excitation given to satisfy an error tolerance. The
ELASTIC parameter must be included. In a steady-state heat transfer, electrostatic, or magnetostatic
analysis, Marc iterates until the error criteria is satisfied.

In a nonlinear incremental analysis, Marc adapts the mesh at each increment, or user controlled frequency
to improve the solution.
New elements are created as described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Global Adaptive Meshing
The criteria for determining when global remeshing is to occur is provided in the ADAPT GLOBAL
model or history definition option. This option also indicates which remeshing procedure is to be used.
Additionally, the REZONING,1 parameter must be used.
Global adaptive meshing is available for lower-order triangular, quadrilateral, and tetrahedral,
continuum, and shell elements in Marc.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-8
1st
Enter the word ADAPTIVE.
11-15
2nd
Enter an upper bound to the number of elements in the mesh.
16-20
3rd
Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes in the mesh.
ADAPTIVE 88
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
4th
Enter 1 to continue to perform an incremental analysis. If the number of

nodes or elements created exceeds the maximums specified, the previous
mesh is used.
26-30
5th
Enter 1 if analysis is to be stopped when upper-bound is reached;

otherwise, dynamically allocate more space.
Note:
If only the word ADAPTIVE is entered, the program dynamically allocates memory for the
new elements and nodes (there is no limit to the number of elements or nodes unless all
memory is exceeded).
89 LINEAR
Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis
LINEAR
Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis
Description
This parameter allows additional values to be stored rather than being recalculated during subsequent
increments. This means an increase in the overall size of the workspace used for the problem, but can
actually result in a reduced computation time. The efficiency of this parameter is highly dependent upon
the analysis data and the machine on which the problem is computed. It has proven very effective in
reducing computation time for linear elastic and small displacement dynamic problems. When set to 0,
the parameter has also been used effectively on nonlinear problems such as rigid plastic flow.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word LINEAR.
11-15
2nd
Enter 0 (default) to save BETA matrix (Strain-Displacement).

Enter 1 to save the BETA matrix and the stress-strain law.
FOURIER 90
Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures
FOURIER
Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures
Description
This parameter governs the analysis of axisymmetric structures under arbitrary loading by means of the
Fourier series expansion technique. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for a description
of this analysis technique. To perform a modal Fourier analysis, you must include a DYNAMIC parameter.
To perform a Fourier buckling analysis, you must include a BUCKLE parameter.
The Fourier capability assumes that the material is linear elastic and is only available for Fourier
elements, type 62, 63, 73, 74, and 90.
Note:
Fourier analysis is not supported with the table driven input format.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word FOURIER.
11-15
2nd
Total number of FOURIER series expansions needed for characterizing

the circumferential variation of tractions, thermal loads and boundary
conditions.
16-20
3rd
Maximum number of harmonics in any of the series. The number of series

terms is two times the number of harmonics plus one.
21-25
4th
Total number of nodal degrees of freedom that are loaded by concentrated

forces or restrained by nonzero boundary conditions described by a
FOURIER series expansion.
26-30
5th
If only symmetric (cos) terms are present in all expansions used, set this
flag to 1. For strictly antisymmetric (sin) expansions, set this flag to 2.
Default is 0 which allows for the full expansion containing sine and
cosine terms.
To skip increments 0 and 1 for symmetric terms only, set this flag to -1. To
skip increments 0, 1 and 2 for antisymmetric terms only, set this flag to -2.
A negative value of this flag means that no constant loading or constant
nonzero boundary condition around the circumference are present.
31-35
6th
Maximum number of stations around circumference used for printout

during the superposition using CASE COMBIN option. Default is 24.
36-40
7th
Enter 1 if the initial stress stiffness is to be included in modal

Fourier calculation.
91 DYNAMIC
Dynamic Analysis
DYNAMIC
Dynamic Analysis
Description
This parameter sets the flags for one of several possible dynamic analysis methods. Any of several
optional data blocks can be required. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. The MODAL
SHAPE history definition option or the MODAL INCREMENT model definition option controls the
eigenvalue extraction. The DYNAMIC CHANGE or AUTO STEP history definition options control the
time steps. The RECOVER history definition option allows for modal stress recovery or storing
eigenvectors on the post file. Eigenvectors can also be stored on the post file with the MODAL
INCREMENT option.
Notes:
1) The single step Houbolt procedure is the recommended method for nonlinear
transient analysis.
2) The Lanczos method is the recommended method for extracting eigenvalues.
3) The central difference operator do not work with zero mass at any degrees of freedom.
4) The direct integration operators automatically use residual load correction, and this
cannot be overridden. The CENTROID parameter should not be used.
5) The Houbolt (IDYN=3)and central difference (IDYN=4) operators can only be used
with constant time step. If the time step is changed during analysis, results are in error.
The Newmark-beta (IDYN=2), fast central difference operator (IDYN=5), and Single
Step Houbolt (IDYN=6) can use a variable time step.
6) Rigid body modes can be handled by the inverse power sweep or Lanczos method. Use
the flag in the CONTROL option for solving a singular equation.
7) The fast central difference operator can be used with element types (2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10,
11, 18, 19, 20, 52, 64, 75, 98, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120).
8) The Newmark-beta method is unconditionally stable for linear analysis, with = 0.25,
= 0.50. These parameters can be reset through the PARAMETERS option.
9) The central difference (IDYN = 4) operator does not consider damping.
10) The central difference (IDYN = 4 or IDYN = 5) operator cannot be used with
Herrmann elements.
DYNAMIC 92
Dynamic Analysis
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word DYNAMIC.
11-15
2nd
Enter the dynamic operator type (IDYN).

Set to 1 for modal superposition dynamic response.
Set to 2 for Newmark direct integration.
Set to 3 for Houbolt direct integration.
Set to 4 for explicit direct time integration using central difference.
Set to 5 for fast explicit direct integration.
Set to 6 for Single Step Houbolt integration (preferred for implicit dynamic
analysis with contact).
Set to 8 for generalized alpha method direct integration.
16-20
3rd
Maximum number of modes to be used in the modal superposition

dynamic option. If the inverse power sweep method is used for eigenvalue
analysis, it is also the number of mode shapes and frequencies to
be extracted.
21-25
4th
Set to 0 for Inverse power sweep with double eigenvalue extraction.

Set to 1 to for the Lanczos method.
Set to 3 for Inverse power sweep with single eigenvalue extraction.
26-30
5th
Enter 1 if modal stress recovery or storing eigenvectors on post tape is to

be performed in this analysis.
31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
7th
Used only if the 2nd field is 8. Enter 0 (default) if the parameters of the
generalized alpha method are optimized for an analysis involving dynamic
contact; enter 1 if these parameters are optimized for an analysis without
dynamic contact. Note that user-defined values can be entered on the
PARAMETERS model definition or history definition option.
93 HARMONIC
Frequency Response Analysis
HARMONIC
Frequency Response Analysis
Description
The HARMONIC parameter allows the frequency response analysis to be superimposed
upon the deformed configuration. This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the EL-MA
parameter for electromagnetic (harmonic) analysis or ACOUSTIC parameter for acoustic analysis or
PIEZO parameter for piezoelectric analysis.
Note that the 3rd through 5th fields are not required if the table input format is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word HARMONIC.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if complex damping matrix is used. Default is no complex

damping.
16-20
3rd
Maximum number of excitation boundary conditions.
21-25
4th
Maximum number of excitation distributed load lists.
26-30
5th
Maximum number of elements in any excitation distributed load list.
31-35
6th
Enter 1 to include inertia effects in the calculation of the harmonic

reaction force. Note that if damping is used, the mass proportional part of
the damping matrix also contributes to the inertia effects.
SS-ROLLING 94
Steady State Transport Analysis
SS-ROLLING
Steady State Transport Analysis
Description
This flag activates steady state rolling analysis. No additional data is needed for this parameter.
Using this procedure, an Eulerian/Lagrange analysis is performed on a body that is spinning about an
axis, which may also be rotating. This is typically applied to tire models, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information for more detail.
Model definition options ROTATION A and CORNERING AXIS are used to define rotation and cornering
axes in a steady state rolling analysis. History definition option, SS-ROLLING, is used to define
parameters such as spinning velocity, cornering velocity, and translational velocities. See the options
descriptions for more details.
Only three-dimensional solid elements are supported in the current release.
This procedure results in a nonsymmetric matrix; hence, the iterative solvers are not available.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter SS-RO.
95 RESPONSE
Spectrum Response Analysis
RESPONSE
Spectrum Response Analysis
Description
This parameter allows you to perform a spectrum response analysis. See Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information for detailed directions. The modes used are specified in the SPECTRUM response load
incrementation data. To perform a spectrum response calculation, it is also necessary to include the
DYNAMIC parameter and either the MODAL INCREMENT or MODAL SHAPE option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word RESPONSE.
11-15
2nd
Enter the number of data points used to specify spectral density function.
Enter 0 to use the USSD user subroutine.
R-P FLOW 96
Rigid-Plastic Flow
R-P FLOW
Rigid-Plastic Flow
Description
This parameter is used to specify a rigid, perfectly-plastic flow analysis. See Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information for an introduction to this technique. This parameter is used either with the Herrmann
elements or with conventional elements. In the latter case, a penalty function is used to apply the
incompressibility constraint. The penalty factor is defined through the PARAMETERS history
definition option.
This parameter has two modes. In the first mode, a steady state solution is obtained.
This parameter can also be used for the analysis of laminar fluid flow problems. See the UNEWTN user
subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines. This method requires iteration on
the velocity field for convergence; convergence controls are input in the CONTROL option.
In the second mode, a transient solution is obtained. This mode is always used in contact problems. This
method required iteration on the incremental displacements. Increment 0 is suppressed.
In this formulation, if the strain rate falls below a certain value, the material is effectively rigid. This
cutoff value is specified through the PARAMETERS history definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-8
1st
Enter the words R-P FLOW.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 for steady state procedure.

Enter 2 for transient procedure (default).
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 for constant penalty factor (default).

Option 2 is not available.
Enter 3 for variable penalty factor (adjusted to limit volume loss).
97 SPFLOW
Superplastic Forming Analysis
SPFLOW
Description
This parameter specifies the use of data for superplastic forming analysis. Use of this parameter
automatically turns on the FOLLOW FOR,1 parameter. See ISOTROPIC model definition option for use
of power law and rate power law hardening models (only available hardening rules for superplastic
forming) and SUPERPLASTIC history definition option for control parameters in this document for
more information.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word SPFLOW.
LARGE DISP 98
Large Displacement or Buckling
LARGE DISP
Large Displacement or Buckling
Description
This parameter is used to specify large displacement or buckling analysis. It signals Marc to calculate the
geometric stiffness matrix and the initial stress stiffness matrix. This parameter automatically switches
on the residual load correction option and switches off the scaling option. Default is no large
displacement terms. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more information about large
displacement and buckling analysis.
Note:
The CENTROID parameter should not be used in conjunction with this parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the words LARGE DISP.
99 LARGE STRAIN
Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation
LARGE STRAIN
Description
This option indicates that a nonlinear structural problem will be performed where either the
displacements and/or the strains will be large. If no other options are specified, Marc automatically
chooses the procedure used based upon the material model selected and the element type for each element
group. If possible, the updated Lagrange procedure is the preferred procedure. In a few special cases that
are discussed below, the total Lagrange procedure is automatically flagged but can be over-ridden by the
3rd field of the LARGE STRAIN option.
Procedures
For more details on the available procedures, the user is referred to Marc Volume A: Theory And User
Information, Chapter 5. A brief synopsis is provided here to highlight the approach that is internally
flagged when the LARGE STRAIN is used.
Updated Lagrange: The equations of equilibrium are formed on the current configuration. The Cauchy
stresses and logarithmic strains are the prevailing stress and strain measures. The updated Lagrange
procedure comes in two flavors: Additive Decomposition and Multiplicative Decomposition.
a. Additive Decomposition:
This is an incremental approach where the total incremental strain is formed by using
= th + e + p +
where th is the incremental thermal strain, e is the incremental elastic strain, p is the
incremental plastic strain, etc.
b. Multiplicative Decomposition:
Here, the strain measure is based on the deformation gradient F which, in general, is given by
th e p
F = F F F
where F p is the thermal deformation gradient, F e is the elastic deformation gradient and F p
is the plastic deformation gradient. When there is no plasticity (e.g. rubber elasticity), F p is
unity.
Total Lagrange: The equations of equilibrium are formed on the original configuration. The 2nd PiolaKirchhoff stresses and Green-Lagrange strains are the prevailing stress and strain measures.
Selection of Procedure:
When LARGE STRAIN is specified, the selection of the procedure used is based upon three criteria.
1. Large strain hyperelastic material models vs. small elastic strain Elastic or Elastic-Plastic Models.
2. Displacement elements vs. Herrmann (Mixed) elements.
3. Three dimension state of stress (3-D, plane strain, axisymmetric) vs. plane stress condition.
LARGE STRAIN 100

Hyperelastic Materials
The large strain hyperelastic materials are either incompressible or nearly incompressible which are
defined through the MOONEY, OGDEN, GENT, or ARRUDBOYCE options or highly compressible
defined in the FOAM option.
For the case of large strain incompressible rubber materials the following procedure will be used by
default.
Herrmann Element
Displacement Element not plane

stress
Displacement Element plane stress
Updated Lagrange F e
Updated Lagrange - F e
Total Lagrange
For the case of large strain compressible foam materials the following procedure will be used by default.
Herrmann Element
Displacement Element not plane

stress
Displacement Element plane stress
Not Available
Total Lagrange
Isotropic Materials
The ISOTROPIC option is formulated for small elastic strains but may include large plastic (inelastic)
strains. The procedure used by default is based upon three subcriteria, whether a yield stress is provided,
the type of yield surface (von Mises or other) or other material factors. The procedure to be used is also
controlled by the suboption used: LARGE STRAIN,1 or LARGE STRAIN,2.
When LARGE STRAIN, 1 is used, the options can be summarized as follows:
Herrmann Element
Displacement Element Displacement Element

not plane stress
plane stress
No Yield
Updated Lagrange FeFp
Updated Lagrange Additive - Finite
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
ELASTIC
Total Lagrange
Total Lagrange
Updated Lagrange
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
Von Mises Yield Updated Lagrange e p
F F
Other Yield or
Cracking
Not Available
Additive - Finite
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
No Yield refers to the yield type set to blank in this case, the formulation is the same as that used for
Von Mises Yield. Other Yield or Cracking includes Linear Mohr-Columb, Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb,
Buyokozturk Concrete, ORNL yield rules, Hill, Barlat, Shima Oyane, Exponential Cap, Generalized
Plasticity, Cam Clay.
101 LARGE STRAIN

One observes that in the case of an ISOTROPIC option with an ELASTIC yield stress type, Marc
switches to a total Lagrange formulation for displacement elements. This switch occurs only for the
elastic material under the following circumstances: no creep data, no failure data, no damage data, not
associated with a gasket and not a shell or beam element (i.e., only for 2-D plane strain, axisymmetric,
plane stress and 3-D continuum elements excluding the solid shell). This switch to total Lagrange may
be useful when there is frequent loading and unloading. Since the total Lagrange formulation is based on
a strain energy functional, a zero stress state at complete unloading is captured. If an updated additive
formulation is desired even for these conditions, then one can avoid the internal total Lagrange switch by
setting the 3rd field of the LARGE STRAIN option to a 1 (i.e., LARGE STRAIN,1,1). In this case, the
following formulations are used for the elastic material:
Herrmann Element
Elastic

not plane stress
plane stress
Updated Lagrange Additive
Updated Lagrange Additive
One observes that in the case of an ISOTROPIC option with a von Mises yield stress type, Marc default
is to use the additive decomposition of strain. In situations where elastic strains may be larger (e.g.
polymers) or when there is loading/unloading, the additive decomposition may not yield sufficient
accuracy and it may be desired to use the multiplicative formulation. This can be achieved by setting the
2nd field of the LARGE STRAIN option to 2.
The following formulations are used for LARGE STRAIN,2 in conjunction with an isotropic material
Herrmann Element
No Yield
Updated Lagrange -

not plane stress
plane stress
Updated Lagrange - F e F p
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
e p
F F
ELASTIC
Von Mises Yield Updated Lagrange e p
F F
Other Yield or
Cracking
Not available
LARGE STRAIN 102

Other Materials
For the ORTHOTROPIC or ANISOTROPIC material model the updated Lagrange F e F p formulation is not
available and the additive procedure is used where appropriate.
Herrmann Element

not plane stress
plane stress
No Yield
Not available
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
ELASTIC
Total Lagrange
Total Lagrange
Total Lagrange
Von Mises Yield Not available
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
Other Yield or
Cracking
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite
Not Available
Note that the internal switch to total Lagrange for ELASTIC can again be prevented by using LARGE
STRAIN,1,1. When the 1 on the 3rd field is activated, then Updated Lagrange Additive is used for the
orthotropic/anisotropic elastic material.
For cohesive materials which are used in conjunction with the interface elements, the relationship is
between the traction and the opening displacement which always takes into account the large
deformations and rotations.
For gasket materials which are used in conjunction with continuum composite elements, the LARGE
STRAIN option results in an updated Lagrange additive formulation.
For the NLELAST family of material models, the option initiates an updated Lagrange additive
formulation.
For the rigid-plastic problem, there are two variants: steady-state and transient. For the transient
procedure, the Updated Lagrange Additive formulation is used.
For the HYPOELASTIC material model, the option sets the flags for an Updated Lagrange Additive
formulation. The user is provided with quantities like F (deformation gradient), R (rotation tensor), etc.
in HYPELA2.F to provide flexibility in either using an additive or multiplicative formulation.
For the SHAPE MEMORY material model, the Updated Lagrange Additive formulation is set for the
thermo-mechanical model and the Updated Lagrange Multiplicative formulation is set for the mechanical
model.
For the SOIL material model, the Updated Lagrange Additive formulation is set.
Miscellaneous
It is important to note that the updated Lagrange additive or multiplicative procedure is not available for
some classes of elements including the rebar elements, Fourier elements, pipe bend (type 17), cable
103 LARGE STRAIN

element (type51), shear panel (type 68), axisymmetric with bending (types 95 and 96) and piezoelectric
elements. Also, the updated Lagrange multiplicative procedure is not available for 3-D shells.
If a procedure is chosen which is not available for a particular material/element type, the program will
terminate with an Exit 13.
When using the updated Lagrange procedure, the material data should be provided with respect to the
Cauchy stress and logarithmic strain; and the output will be provided using these measures as well.
When the LARGE STRAIN option is used but the total Lagrange formulation is activated, the material
data should be provided with respect to the 2nd Piola Kirchhoff stress and the Green Lagrange strain. It
should also be noted that while the 2nd Piola Kirchhoff stresses are used for the total Lagrange analysis,
the stress quantities put on the post file for post codes 17, 117, 11 16, 111 116, 311, 391, 397 are the
appropriate Cauchy stresses.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the words LARGE STRA.
11-15
2nd
Flag to define preferred elasticity-plasticity procedure in an elastic-plastic

analysis.
= 1 Hypoelasticity and additive plasticity with mean normal return
mapping (default)
=2 Hyperelasticity and multiplicative plasticity with radial
return mapping.
16-20
3rd
Flag indicating that updated Lagrange option should be used when

possible.
If set to 1 then the total Lagrange formulation is not internally activated
for elastic materials.
UPDATE 104
Updated Lagrange Procedure
UPDATE
Updated Lagrange Procedure
Description
This parameter flags the use of the classical updated Lagrange procedure for elastic-plastic materials, the
elements for which such a formulation can be applied. The use of the procedure has two consequences.
First, the element stiffnesses are assembled in the current configuration of the element. Second, the stress
and strain output is given in the coordinate system which is applicable in the updated configuration of
the element.
The procedure is useful for analysis of shell and beam structures where rotations are large and the
nonlinear terms in the curvature expressions can no longer be neglected.
The updated Lagrange procedure can be used with or without the LARGE DISP parameter. With the
LARGE DISP parameter invoked, the effect of the internal stresses on the stiffness is taken into account.
Also, the strain increment is calculated to second order accuracy and, hence, large rotation increments
might be allowed. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a list of the elements that can be used in
an updated Lagrangian analysis. Instead of invoking the LARGE DISP parameter, the 4th entry of the
UPDATE parameter can be set to 1.
When the UPDATE parameter is used in conjunction with a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the element
conductivity is assembled based on the current configuration of the element.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-6
1st
Enter the word UPDATE.
11-15
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
3rd
Enter 2 to allow large incremental rotations for beam elements. This is

available for beam element types 52, 76, 77, 78, 79, and 98.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 to account for the effect of the internal stresses on the stiffness.
105 FINITE
Finite Strain Plasticity
FINITE
Finite Strain Plasticity
Description
This parameter flags the use of the large strain plasticity option. With this option invoked, the effects of
the change in metric due to large inelastic deformations is included. This results in a different stiffness of
the structure as well as in a modified calculation of stresses and inelastic strains. This parameter is only
used for the elements which are formulated in terms of the updated Lagrange procedure. When using this
parameter, true stresses are printed out.
The UPDATE parameter must be included in all cases when this parameter is invoked. When the FINITE
parameter is used, the work hardening slope for plasticity is defined as the rate of true stress versus the
true plastic strain rate. Hence, the work hardening curve must be entered as the true stress versus
logarithmic plastic strain curve in a uniaxial tension test. The anisotropic plasticity formulation cannot
be used with this option. The finite strain option in Marc is written such that fairly large strain increments
(up to 3%) can be allowed. However, large increments can result in many recycles as well as in decreased
accuracy.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-6
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word FINITE.
CONSTANT DILATATION 106

Define That Elements Are to Use Constant Dilatation Formulation
CONSTANT DILATATION
Define That Elements Are to Use

Constant Dilatation Formulation
Description
When performing nearly incompressible analysis with displacement based elements, the conventional
isoparametric interpolation methods result in poor behavior for lower order elements. This results in
overly stiff behavior when using element type 7, 149 (brick), type 10, 152 (axisymmetric), type 11, 151
(plane strain), type 19 (generalized plane strain), type 20 (axisymmetric with twist), or 136 (pentahedral).
When this option is included, all elements of these types are modified to use the constant dilatation
formulation. This is recommended for elastic-plastic analysis and creep analysis because of the
potentially nearly incompressible behavior.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-8
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word CONSTANT.
107 ASSUMED STRAIN

Improved Bending Behavior
ASSUMED STRAIN
Improved Bending Behavior
Description
The bending behavior can be improved by using the assumed strain formulation for element type 3, 160
(plane stress), type 11, 161 (plane strain), and type 7, 163 (brick). This procedure replaces the standard
linear interpolation functions with an enriched group that is able to represent pure bending behavior. This
formulation results in improved accuracy for isotropic behavior, but it should be noted that the
computational costs increase.
Note:
This option may not be used with all material behavior and is deactivated for those
elements for which it is not applicable.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word ASSUMED.
11-15
2nd
Enter -1 to deactivate assumed strain formulation (forced).
ELASTICITY 108
Elasticity Procedure
ELASTICITY
Elasticity Procedure
Description
This option can be used to define which formulation is used for large strain elasticity, including rubber
and foam materials. The default is total Lagrange elasticity procedure. For rubber materials, either total
(using Herrmann elements) or updated Lagrange (using either Herrmann or displacement elements) can
be used. For foam, either total or updated Lagrange procedure is supported using the displacement based
elements. The updated Lagrange procedure does not support plane stress elements and switches to total
Lagrange procedure for these elements. For more details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word ELASTICITY.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 for total Lagrange formulation (default).

Enter 2 for updated Lagrange formulation.
109 PLASTICITY
Plasticity Procedure
PLASTICITY
Plasticity Procedure
Description
This option can be used to define the plasticity procedure that is used in Marc. The default is the mean
normal procedure for satisfying the yield criteria and the additive decomposition of the incremental
strains into elastic and plastic parts. For problems which have large elastic and plastic strains, the
multiplicative decomposition is more accurate. The multiplicative decomposition implementation
requires that the elasticity is isotropic. For more details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word PLASTICITY.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 for additive decomposition using the mean normal method; small
strain formulation (default).
Enter 2 for additive decomposition using the radial return method; small
strain formulation.
Enter 3 for additive decomposition using the mean normal method; large
strain formulation using the updated Lagrange procedure.
Enter 4 for additive decomposition using the radial return method; large
strain formulation using the updated Lagrange procedure.
Enter 5 for multiplicative decomposition (FeFp) using the radial return
method and the three field variational principle; large strain formulation
using the updated Lagrange procedure.
FOLLOW FOR 110

Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry Application of Total
Boundary Condition
FOLLOW FOR
Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on

Current Geometry Application of Total Boundary Condition
Description
The FOLLOW FOR parameter is used for follower force (for example, pressure) problems. Separate flags
under this parameter are used to control follower forces for distributed loads and point loads respectively.
When this parameter is used with default values for the associated flags, all distributed loads are formed
on the basis of current geometry. This parameter requires the use of the residual load correction and,
therefore, forces the use of that option regardless of other parameters (for example, the NO LOADCOR
parameter is ignored).
Whenever FOLLOW FOR is used, the distributed load magnitude given in the FORCEM user subroutine
must be the total magnitude to be reached after the current increment, and not the incremental magnitude.
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the fluxes are based upon the current geometry.
When the table driven input procedure is not used, boundary conditions in structural analysis are
normally entered as incremental values. To specify total values, use the third field of this option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the words FOLLOW FOR.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if follower force stiffness due to distributed loads is not required

(default).
Enter 2 if follower force stiffness due to distributed loads is to be included.
Enter 3 if the follower force for distributed loads is based upon the
displacement at the beginning of the increment, as opposed to the last
iteration.
Enter -1 if the undeformed geometry is required but total values of
distributed loads are to be used.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 if total values of boundary conditions are to be entered on

DISP CHANGE, POINT LOAD, and DIST LOADS options as opposed to
the default incremental loads.
21-25
4th
Enter 0 if follower force for point loads is not required (default).

Enter 1 if follower force for point loads is to be considered.
111 FOLLOW FOR

Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry Application of Total
Notes:
If the follower force stiffness is included, the use of the SOLVER option can be used to
specify a nonsymmetric formulation. This improves convergence, but results in longer
solver times.
If the 2nd field is 0 and the 4th field is 0, follower force is turned on for all distributed loads
in the model (this allows compatibility with previous versions).
Setting the 4th field to 1 only allows the possibility that point loads can be follower forces.
Individual point loads specified under the POINT LOAD model and history definition
options are used to actually specify if the load is a follower force or not.
Follower force stiffness is not currently available for point loads.
Follower force stiffness for distributed loads is available for element types (3, 7, 10, 11, 18, 72, 75, 80,
82, 84, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 139, 149, 151, 152, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, and 185).
BUCKLE 112
Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis
BUCKLE
Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis
Description
This parameter specifies the use of buckling load estimation by eigenvalue analysis, based on a
perturbation of the tangent stiffness. Multiple eigenvectors are allowed for the case where the closest root
to the current load set is not pertinent. Either the inverse power sweep method or the Lanczos method can
be used. The BUCKLE history definition option or the BUCKLE INCREMENT modal definition option
controls the eigenvalue extraction. The RECOVER history definition option allows for modal stress
recovery or storing eigenvectors on a post file. The LARGE DISP parameter should be included to obtain
the nonlinear collapse load estimate.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-6
1st
Enter the word BUCKLE.
11-15
2nd
Maximum number of buckling modes to be estimated at any time.
16-20
3rd
Number of buckling modes with positive eigenvalues to be estimated at

any time.
In many buckling problems, collapse modes corresponding to loads of
opposite magnitude to those of interest exist. By specifying a larger
number of modes (say 5) in Columns 11-15 and one or two modes in this
field, you can ensure getting the one or two modes you are interested in.
Marc stops the modal search when all these modes have been formed, or
when all the modes requested in columns 11-15 have been formed,
whichever occurs first. If this field is left blank, all modes asked for in
columns 11-15 are formed regardless of sign.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 if modal stress recovery or storing eigenvectors on post tape is to

be performed in this analysis.
26-30
5th
Enter 3 to perform non-axisymmetric Fourier buckling.
31-35
6th
Enter 1 to use inverse power sweep with single eigenvalue extraction.
36-40
7th
Enter 0 if inverse power sweep method is to be used (default).

Enter 1 if Lanczos method is to be used.
113 CREEP
Creep Analysis
CREEP
Creep Analysis
Description
This parameter specifies a creep analysis. For more information about creep analysis, see the Creep
Constitutive Data block model definition option in the section of this manual and Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information. The Marc CRPLAW and VSWELL user subroutines, used with creep analysis, are
explained in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
Note:
When using the implicit Maxwell creep model, the stress dependence must be in
exponential form, the CRPLAW user subroutine cannot be used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word CREEP.
11-15
2nd
Enter the flag for type of explicit creep analysis. Default of 0, normal
creep (Maxwell Model); 1, viscoplastic creep; 2, viscoplastic creep with
nonassociative flow rule.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 for explicit Kelvin Model. (This is identical to the VISCO ELAS
parameter.)
21-25
4th
Enter 1 for implicit Maxwell creep or implicit viscoplastic model.
26-30
5th
For the implicit Maxwell creep model or implicit viscoplastic model:

When using the implicit Maxwell creep model, the stress dependence
must be in exponential form, the CRPLAW user subroutine cannot be used.
Enter 0 for elastic tangent
Enter 1 for secant tangent
Enter 2 for radial return
VISCO ELAS 114

Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model)
VISCO ELAS
Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model)
Description
This parameter flags the use of the CRPVIS user subroutine to model generalized Kelvin material
behavior using an explicit procedure. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details. This
parameter automatically flags the CREEP option as well, so that Maxwell behavior (VSWELL, CRPLAW
user subroutines can be included with CRPVIS).
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the words VISCO ELAS.
115 STRUCTURAL
Mechanical Analysis
STRUCTURAL
Mechanical Analysis
Description
This parameter is used in multi-physics analyses if one of the physics types is structural. It is used in
combination with other parameters such as HEAT or ELECTRO. The inclusion of both the STRUCTURAL
and ELECTRO parameters results in a coupled electrostatic-structural analysis. In such a multi-physics
analysis, one pass will be a mechanical analysis and subjected to boundary conditions defined in the
FIXED DISP, POINT LOAD, DIST LOADS, FOUNDATION, and CONTACT options.
The STRUCTURAL parameter may be used in conjunction with:
HEAT
- coupled thermal mechanical analysis
JOULE
- coupled thermal-electrical resistance analysis
ELECTRO
- Coulomb force calculation
MAGNETO
- Lorenzi force calculation
ACOUSTIC
- coupled structural-acoustic analysis
PIEZO
- structural analysis with piezoelectric effects
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word STRUCTURAL.
COUPLE 116
Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis
COUPLE
Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis
Description
This parameter allows a coupled thermal-stress analysis. In these problems, the independent variables are
displacements and temperatures. If you define displacement elements in the connectivity, heat transfer
capabilities are included for these elements. To obtain the coupling between plastic work and internal
heat generated, a DIST FLUXES model definition option with a flux type of 101 must be included. The
CUPFLX user subroutine can be used to define an alternative model for internal heat generation. Care
must be taken in defining the factor used to convert inelastic mechanical energy to thermal energy (see
the CONVERT model definition option). If shell elements are present or latent heats are used, the HEAT
parameter might also be required.
For a coupled thermo-mechanical-electrical problem, it is also necessary to include a JOULE parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word COUPLE.
117 DECOUPLING
Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis
DECOUPLING
Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis
Description
This parameter allows users to manually analyze contact between the workpiece and deformable tools in
a decoupled manner.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word DECOUPLING.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 for mechanical-only analysis.The deformable tools are treated as

rigid bodies.
Enter 2 for coupled analysis. The deformable tools are treated as rigidthermal bodies.
Enter 3 for tool stress analysis only.
Notes:
Using contact decoupling assumes that the deformation in deformable tool is small
compared to the workpiece deformation.
No remeshing is allowed in the deformable tools.
Typically, a decoupling analysis is run through the run_marc command: -dcoup.
However, you can use the control here to run the analysis manually. The data transfer file
is defined through READ FILE and WRITE FILE history options or, by default, using
jid.t70 in the current directory.
FLUID 118
Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis
FLUID
Description
This parameter controls the procedure when performing a fluid analysis. In this release, Marc provides
the ability to solve the Navier Stokes equations, excluding turbulence for incompressible fluids. Marc
offers either weakly (staggered method) or strongly (simultaneous method) procedures in multi-physics
type problems. Using the weak formulation, more iterations might be necessary, but overall computation
costs might be less. For fluid-thermal problems, the strongly coupled procedure is recommended; while
for fluid-solid problems, the weakly coupled procedure should be used. Furthermore, you can select how
the fluid incompressibility conditions are to be satisfied. Either a mixed method, with degrees of freedom
of velocity and pressure or a penalty method with degrees of freedom of velocity can be used with the
continuum elements. The penalty factor can be entered through the PARAMETERS option. For more
details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Caution:
Fluid analysis cannot be performed with element types 155 through 157.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word FLUID.
11-15
2nd
Enter one of the following codes:

10 fluid analysis mixed method
11 fluid analysis penalty method
12 fluid-thermal mixed method strong coupling
13 fluid-thermal penalty method strong coupling
2 fluid-thermal mixed method weak coupling
3 fluid-thermal penalty method weak coupling
40 fluid-solid mixed method weak coupling
41 fluid-solid penalty method weak coupling
42 fluid-thermal-solid mixed method strong weak coupling
43 fluid-thermal-solid penalty method strong weak coupling
44 fluid-thermal-solid mixed method weak weak coupling
45 fluid-thermal-solid penalty method weak weak coupling
119 FLUID
Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 to obtain gradients and fluxes at integration points.

Enter 2 to obtain in addition external flux values at nodal points. If this
field is left blank, only temperatures at integration points and nodal
temperatures are printed.
PORE 120
Soil Analysis
PORE
Soil Analysis
Description
This parameter sets the flags for one of several possible soil analysis. It is possible to perform either a
pore pressure calculation (transient or steady state), a soil analysis (including the effects of previously
obtained pore pressures), or a coupled pore-soil plasticity analysis. For information about soil analyses,
see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Notes:
If only a pore pressure calculation is be performed, use element types 41, 42 or 44.
If an uncoupled soil calculation is to be performed, use element types 27, 28 or 21.
If a coupled fluid-soil analysis is to be performed, use element types 32, 33 or 35.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word PORE.
11-15
2nd
Enter 0 if pore pressure data is to be entered.

Enter 1 if a steady state pore pressure calculation is to be performed.
Enter 2 if a transient pore pressure calculation is to be performed.
16-20
3rd
Enter 0 if only the pore pressure is to be calculated; for example, no

stress analysis.
Enter 1 if a stress analysis is to be performed.
Example
If a fully coupled analysis is required, enter:
PORE, 2, 1
121 T-T-T
Time-Temperature-Transformation
T-T-T
Time-Temperature-Transformation
Description
This parameter allocates storage for the time-temperature-phase dependent properties. The properties
themselves are defined using the TIME-TEMP model definition option.
Most materials, when quenched or air cooled from a sufficiently high temperature, exhibit a change in
mechanical or thermal properties. At any stage during the cooling process, these properties are usually
dependent not only on the current temperature but also on the previous thermal history. This is due to the
fact that the properties are influenced by the internal microstructure of the material and this in turn usually
depends on the rate at which the temperature changes. Only in instances where the temperature is
changed very gradually does the material respond in an equilibrium manner where properties are simply
a function of the current temperature. In addition, during the cooling process, certain solid-solid phase
transformations can occur. These represent another form of change in the material microstructure which
can influence the mechanical or thermal properties. This parameter allows you to account for the timetemperature-transformation interrelationships of what are generally termed thermomechanical effects.
For more information about this type of analysis, see the Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-5
1st
Enter the expression T-T-T.
11-15
2nd
Enter the maximum number of material groups with time-temperaturetransformation dependent material properties (default is 1).
16-20
3rd
Enter the maximum number of cooling rates used to define any one
property of any material group (see Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information for details). Default is 3.
21-25
4th
Enter the maximum number of temperature points at which a property

value is specified for any cooling rate. Default is 5.
25-30
5th
If the thermal coefficient of expansion for any material group is to be

expressed in terms of polynomial expansions in temperature, enter the
maximum number of temperature points at which an expansion is defined
for any cooling rate.
HEAT 122
Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis
HEAT
Description
This parameter specifies a heat transfer (conduction) analysis instead of displacement/stress analysis.
Convection can be included if the velocities are known or in a steady-state rigid plastic analysis. For the
solution of the coupled thermal/flow problem, the FLUID parameter should be used. For more
information about heat transfer capabilities in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
The HEAT parameter may be used in conjunction with:
STRUCTURAL
- coupled thermal mechanical analysis
JOULE
- Joule heating - resistive heating analysis
ELECTRO
- resistance heating
MAGNETO
- resistance and Eddy current
EL-MA (harmonics) - induction heating analysis
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-4
1st
Enter the word HEAT.
11-15
2nd
Temperature distribution in thickness direction of heat transfer shell

elements 50, 85, 86, 87, and 88.
Enter 0 for linear temperature distribution in thickness direction.
Enter 1 for quadratic temperature distribution in thickness direction.
Default is 0.
16-20
3rd
Maximum number of latent heats associated with any material type.

Default is 0.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 to obtain gradients and fluxes at integration points.

Enter 2 to obtain in addition external flux values at nodal points. If this
field is left blank, only temperatures at integration points and nodal
temperatures are printed.
26-30
5th
Enter 2 to include convective terms. This automatically initiates the

nonsymmetric solver. The velocity must be prescribed.
123 HEAT
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-35
6th
Enter the number of heat transfer layers for composite shell elements.
Default is 1.
36-40
7th
Enter 1 to linearize calculation of surface energy and receding surface

data (default).
Enter 2 to not linearize calculation.
JOULE 124
Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis
JOULE
Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis
Description
This parameter allows you to perform a coupled thermoelectrical (Joule heating) problem or a coupled
thermo-mechanical-electrical problem. The coupling between the electrical problem and the thermal
problem is because: (1) the resistance in the electric problem is dependent on temperatures and (2) the
internal heat generation in the thermal problem is a function of the electric flow. For more information
about the finite element formulation of Joule heating problems, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
In the analysis of Joule heating, the model definition options JOULE, VOLTAGE, DIST CURRENT and
POINT CURRENT must be used for the definition of electric problems. However, options for the heat
transfer analysis remain unchanged.
For a coupled thermo-mechanical-electrical problem, it is necessary to have either a COUPLE or a
STRUCTURAL parameter. In such problems, there is additional coupling because of the change in
boundary conditions through the CONTACT option which changes both the thermal and electrical
behavior. Heat is generated not only by electrical resistance (Joule heating), but also by heat generated
due to inelastic behavior.
Note:
Joule heating is not applied to shell elements, conventional heat transfer will be applied in
these regions.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-5
1st
Enter the word JOULE.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 for conventional model

Enter 2 if electrical properties are a strong function of temperature.
125 DIFFUSION
Diffusion Analysis
DIFFUSION
Diffusion Analysis
Description
This parameter indicates that a diffusion analysis is to be performed. The boundary conditions are applied
using the FIXED PRESSURE, DIST MASS, and POINT MASS options.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word DIFFUSION.
ABLATION 126
Specify Ablation Occurrence
ABLATION
Specify Ablation Occurrence
Description
This parameter is used to specify that ablation is to occur. It is normally used in conjunction with the
PYROLYSIS parameter. The surface to be ablated is specified via the RECEDING SURFACE option. Data
used to control the ablation is entered via the SURFACE ENERGY option for the advanced model.
For more information, refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 6, Nonstructural
Procedure Library, Ablation.
Note:
Ablation is not applied to shell elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter word ABLATION.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 to use normal based upon all surfaces.

Enter 2 to use normal based upon surfaces given by RECEDING
SURFACE data (default).
Enter 3 to use normal based upon direction of streamline.
Enter 4 to use normal based upon direction of streamline with projected
magnitude.
16-20
3rd
The following is used only with the shaver mesher:

Enter 1 if new surface node coordinate is equal to old, shaved coordinate
(default).
Enter 2 if new surface node coordinate is projected coordinate.
21-25
4th
Enter the frequency to write the recession information to jid.rec file,

default is write every increment.
26-30
5th
Enter 0, if s calculated at surface integration points (default).

Enter 1 if s calculated at the nodal point.
127 PYROLYSIS
Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis
PYROLYSIS
Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis
Description
This parameter is used to indicate that a thermo-poro-ablative model is being analyzed. The region which
can undergo pyrolysis is defined either via the THERMAL CONTACT or STREAM DEFINITION option.
If the simplified streamline fluid flow model is used, the STREAM DEFINITION option is required.
Procedure Library, Pyrolysis
Note:
Pyrolysis is not applied to shell elements, conventional heat transfer will be applied in
these regions.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter word PYROLYSIS.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 for no fluid generation (default).

Enter 2 for streamline fluid flow model.
Enter 3 for DArcy fluid flow model.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 to linearize calculation of surface energy and receding surface data

(default).
Enter 2 to not linearize system.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 to symmetrize convective terms (default).

Enter 2 to use nonsymmetric formulation.
26-30
5th
Enter 0 or 1 if
magnitude of
m
m
used in the surface energy or recession calculation is the

.
Enter 2 if in used in the surface energy or recession calculation is the

projection of m n .
31-35
6th
Enter 1 for in rate term (default).

Enter 2 for 2 in rate term.
Enter -1 for no in rate term.
36-40
7th
Enter 1 to include divergence in g (default).

Enter 2 to exclude divergence in g .
CURING 128
Curing Analysis Parameter Definition
CURING
Curing Analysis Parameter Definition
Description
The parameter flags the capability to take into account the curing effect on either the heat transfer or
structural analysis. In a heat transfer analysis, the cure reaction heat flux is calculated and coupled into
the heat transfer equation system. In a structural analysis, the cure induced volumetric shrinkage can also
be incorporated.
For more information, refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 5, Structural
Procedure Library, Cure-Thermal-Mechanically Coupled Analysis.
Notes:
The CURING parameter works in two analysis types:

(a) Heat transfer analysis
(b) Thermal-mechanical coupled analysis
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word CURING.
129 BEARING
Bearing Analysis
BEARING
Bearing Analysis
Description
This parameter activates the bearing analysis facility for the analysis of lubrication problems. For more
information about Marcs bearing analysis capabilities, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
In a bearing analysis, the model definition options VELOCITY, THICKNESS, RESTRICTOR,
ISOTROPIC, FIXED PRESSURE, DAMPING COMPONENTS, STIFFNS COMPONENTS, and THICKNS
CHANGE can be used to define the problem.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-7
1st
Enter the word BEARING.
11-15
2nd
Enter the maximum number of subincrements. Default is 4.
ELECTRO 130
Electrostatic Analysis
ELECTRO
Description
This parameter allows an electrostatic analysis to be performed. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC
model definition options are used to define the material properties. The FIXED POTENTIAL, DIST
CHARGES, and POINT CHARGE options are used to prescribe the boundary conditions while the history
definition option STEADY STATE is used for the steady state solution. For more information about the
electrostatic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. For
information about elements used in electrostatic analysis, see Marc Volume B: Element Library.
The ELECTRO parameter may be used in conjunction with:
STRUCTURAL
- Coulomb force calculation
HEAT
- resistance heating analysis
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word ELECTRO.
11-15
2nd
Potential distribution in thickness direction of shell elements 50, 85, 86,

87, and 88.
Enter 0 for linear potential distribution in thickness direction.
Enter 1 for quadratic potential distribution in thickness direction. Default
is 0.
16-20
3rd
Flag to indicate which method for Coulomb Force calculation is used in

a coupled electrostatic analysis.
Enter 0 for using the electric field intensity based calculation. Use this
when the distance between charged bodies is small.
Enter 1 for the nodal charge based calculation. Use this when the distance
between charged bodies is large.
See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details).
Default is 0.
131 MAGNETO
Magnetostatic Analysis
MAGNETO
Description
This parameter specifies a magnetostatic analysis. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC model
definition options are used for the input of isotropic or orthotropic magnetic permeabilities. The model
definition options FIXED POTENTIAL, POINT CURRENT, and DIST CURRENT are used for prescribed
potential and current boundary conditions. The COIL CURRENT and EMCOIL PATH may be used to
define the geometry and location of a coil. B-H RELATION is used for the input of the variation of
magnetic permeability with either the magnetic field density or the magnetic field vector. Permanent
magnets can be introduced by using the PERMANENT model definition option. The STEADY STATE
history definition option is used for the steady state option.
For more information about the magnetostatic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information. For information about elements used in magnetostatic analysis, see Marc Volume
B: Element Library.
The MAGNETO parameter may be used in conjunction with:
STRUCTURAL
- Lorenzi force calculation
HEAT
- resistance and Eddy current heating
Format
Format
Fixed
1-6
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word MAGNETO.
EL-MA 132
Perform Electromagnetic Analysis
EL-MA
Perform Electromagnetic Analysis
Description
This parameter activates the capability in Marc to perform an electromagnetic analysis. The
electromagnetic analysis can be either a harmonic or a transient analysis. The ISOTROPIC and
ORTHOTROPIC model definition options are used to define the material properties. The FIXED
POTENTIAL, DIST CURRENT, and POINT CURRENT-CHARGE options are used to prescribe the
boundary conditions while the HARMONIC and DYNAMIC CHANGE history definition options are used
for the harmonic and transient solutions, respectively. Refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information for a description of the electromagnetic analysis capability in Marc. An electromagnetic
analysis can be performed with element types 111, 112, or 113. See Marc Volume B: Element Library for
further details.
The EL-MA parameter may be used in conjunction with:
HEAT
- induction heating simulation
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word EL-MA.
11-15
2nd
Set to 0 for transient electromagnetic analysis.

Set to 1 for harmonic electromagnetic analysis.
Default is 0.
16-20
3rd
Set to 0 for transient electromagnetic analysis using Newmark

beta procedure (default).
Set to 1 for transient electromagnetic analysis using backward Euler
procedure; preferred for low-frequency simulations.
133 PIEZO
Activate Piezoelectric Analysis
PIEZO
Activate Piezoelectric Analysis
Description
This parameter activates a piezoelectric analysis. Possible analysis types are static, modal, transient
dynamic, harmonic, or buckling. A description of the piezoelectric capabilities is included in Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information. Piezoelectric analysis may be performed with the following
element types:
160
4-node plane stress
161
4-node plane strain
162
4-node axisymmetric
163
8-node brick
164
4-node tetrahedron
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word PIEZO.
ACOUSTIC 134
Acoustic Analysis
ACOUSTIC
Acoustic Analysis
Description
This parameter activates the capability to perform an acoustic analysis. The ACOUSTIC model definition
option is used to prescribe the material behavior of the fluid. The FIXED PRESSURE, DIST SOURCES,
and POINT SOURCE model definition options are used to prescribe boundary conditions.
For Modal Acoustic analysis, Marc calculates the fundamental frequencies when the MODAL SHAPE
option is encountered. A transient analysis can be performed using the DYNAMIC CHANGE option. This
option can only be used in combination with cavities with rigid reflecting surfaces
For Harmonic Acoustic analysis, Marc calculates the response of the coupled acoustic-solid system. The
coupling is done via the CONTACT option. The frequency range is specified using the HARMONIC
history definition option. Reactive boundary conditions can be given via the CONTACT TABLE option.
For more information about the acoustic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information. For information about elements used in acoustic analysis, see Marc Volume B:
Element Library.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word ACOUSTIC.
11-15
2nd
Maximum number of modes to be used in the modal superposition

DYNAMIC parameter. If the inverse power sweep method is used for
eigenvalue analysis, it is also the number of mode shapes and frequencies
to be extracted. Only needed for modal acoustics.
16-20
3rd
For modal acoustics:

Enter 0 for inverse powder sweep method.
Enter 1 to force the Lanczos method.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 if modal stress recovery or storing eigenvectors on post file is to

be performed in this analysis. Only needed for modal acoustics.
26-30
5th
Flag to indicate whether modal acoustics or harmonic acoustic analysis

is used.
1 = modal acoustics (default)
2 = harmonic acoustics
135 RADIATION
Radiation Analysis
RADIATION
Radiation Analysis
Description
This parameter activates the radiation analysis capabilities in heat transfer and coupled analyses. This
parameter selects the method to evaluate the viewfactors and controls the accuracy of the calculation of
the vivisectors, and the resulting thermal radiation calculation as well. Depending on which method is
chosen different model definition options are required to define the cavity and the specification of the
emissivity as defined below. If spectral dependent emissivity is defined it is also necessary to use the
PARAMETERS model definition option to specify the speed of light in the cavity medium.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-9
1st
Enter the word RADIATION.
11-15
2nd
View factor calculation flag (IRADFL).

Set to 0 to calculate viewfactors once using the direct integration method.
The RADIATING CAVITY model definition option defines the cavity. This
procedure is only available for axisymmetric cavities. The emissivity is
defined with other material data through the ISOTROPIC,
ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.
Set to 1 to read viewfactors from a file created by the direct integration
approach. The emissivity is defined with other material data through the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.
Set to 2 to read view factor file created by Marc Mentat using the Monte
Carlo method. They are read from a file jid.vfs. This procedure also
requires the use of the VIEW FACTOR model definition option. The
emissivity is defined with other material data through the ISOTROPIC,
ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.
Set to 3 to calculate viewfactors by the hemi-cube projection method, and
the view factor file will be in ascii format. The CAVITY DEFINITION
option defines the cavity. The thermal radiation calculation is only active
if the RAD-CAVITY option indicates that the cavity is used in a boundary
condition, and the LOADCASE option is used to indicate that the boundary
condition is active. The emissivity is defined either with other material
data through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options, or through
the EMISSIVITY (preferred) option.
RADIATION 136
Radiation Analysis
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Set to 4 to calculate viewfactors by the hemi-cube projection method, and
the view factor file will be in binary format. The CAVITY DEFINITION
option defines the cavity. The thermal radiation calculation is only active
if the RAD-CAVITY option indicates that the cavity is used in a boundary
condition, and the LOADCASE option is used to indicate that the boundary
condition is active. The emissivity is defined either with other material
data through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options, or through
the EMISSIVITY (preferred) option. Default is 0
16-20
3rd
Only used if IRADFL is 0 or 1. Enter the file number (IFILVF) for

viewfactors. Viewfactors are written if IRADFL = 0, and are read if
IRADFL = 1. When IRADFL = 0 and IFILVF = 0, the viewfactors are
not saved. Default is 0.
21-25
4th
Temperature unit flag.

Set to 0 to use offset temperature entered in PARAMETERS option.
(Default)
Set to 1 if user input is in degrees Celsius.
Set to 2 if user input is in degrees Kelvin.
Set to 3 if user input is in degrees Fahrenheit.
Caution: Do not enter temperatures in degrees Rankine.
26-35
5th
Enter the Stefan-Boltzmann constant in the correct units. Default is the

value given in PARAMETERS option, 5.67051 x 10-8W/m2K4.
For the direct integration approach.

36-40
6th
Number of divisions used in view factor calculation. Default is 3.
41-45
7th
Number of Gauss points used in each subdivision. Default is 3.
46-50
8th
Enter unit number for debug printout.
51-55
9th
Enter 4 for alternative (K4) method for calculation of view factors.
For the Monte Carlo approach (IRADFL=2) the 6th, 7th, 8th, and 9th fields are zero.
For the hemi-cube approach (IRADFL=3 or IRADFL=4).
36-40
6th
Enter the number of pixels (default is 500).
41-45
7th
Enter 1 to possibly re-evaluate the viewfactors based upon the motion of

the structure. Only available in a coupled analysis using the updated
Lagrange method, or in an analysis with ABLATION.
46-50
8th
For axisymmetric cavities, enter the number of divisions around

circumference. Default is 36.
51-55
9th
Not used; enter 0.
137 RADIATION
Radiation Analysis
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For either the Monte Carlo or hemi-cube method.

56-65
10th
Enter the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be used as a

cutoff. Viewfactors read in or calculated below this cutoff are ignored.
Default is 0.0001.
66-75
11th
Enter the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be treated

implicitly (contribute to operator matrix). View factor values smaller than
this cutoff are treated explicitly. Default is 0.01.
CAVITY 138
Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities
CAVITY
Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities
Description
This parameter governs the analysis of structures with internal cavities. When using the CAVITY
parameter, the FOLLOW FOR parameter is automatically switched on.
Note:
This capability is not available if the table input option is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word CAVITY.
11-15
2nd
Enter an upper bound to the number of cavities. Maximum is 1000.
16-20
3rd
Enter an upper bound to the number of segments in the cavity.
21-25
4th
Enter the number of nodes per segment.

Enter 2 for low-order 2-D elements.
Enter 3 for high-order 2-D elements.
Enter 3 or 4 for low-order 3-D elements.
Enter 6 or 8 for high-order 3-D elements.
Default is 8.
139 RBE
Rigid Body Elements
RBE
Rigid Body Elements
Description
This option can be used to define the number of degrees of freedom for a reference node used in the RBE2
or RBE3 model definition option. This might be necessary in cases where the number of degrees of
freedom for all other nodes in the structure is smaller than the required number of degrees of freedom for
the reference node. This, for example, happens if the RBE2 or RBE3 option is used in an analysis with
continuum elements only.
It can also be used to set special features of RBE2 and RBE3.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word RBE.
11-15
2nd
Enter 3 for a 2-D analysis.

Enter 6 for a 3-D analysis.
Note:
16-20
3rd
Values other than 3 or 6 are not allowed.
Enter 1 to use large displacement formulation of RBE2 based upon a fixed

coordinate system.
Enter 3 to deactivate automatic convergence test by the RBE2 module.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 to use large displacement formulation of RBE3 based on small

rotational increment assumption.
Enter 2 to activate non-normalized rotation constraint coefficient of RBE3.
MACHINING 140
NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis
MACHINING
NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis
Description
This parameter flags the capability to simulate the NC machining (that is, Metal Cutting or Material
Removing) processes. With this option invoked, the deactivation of elements can be done according to
the cutter path defined by either the APT source or CL files.
The DEACTIVATE model or history definition option must be used in order to apply this capability during
the course of analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-9
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word MACHINING.
141
Rezoning and Substructure Parameters
Chapt Rezoning and Substructure Parameters

er 2:
Para
meter
s
REZONING 142
Allow Rezoning
REZONING
Allow Rezoning
Description
This parameter is used to indicate that rezoning can occur during this run. During rezoning, it is possible
to add and/or delete elements and/or nodal points. If elements and/or nodal points are added, there should
be enough elements and nodes allocated with the SIZING parameter in the initial run. The REZONING
parameter can be used with all continuum displacement elements, shell elements 22, 75, 138, 139, and
140 and Herrmann elements 80 through 84 as well as elements 155 through 157.
If the second field is entered as 1 or 2, automatic remeshing followed by rezoning is activated. In this
case, use the ADAPTIVE parameter to define the upper-bound of the number of elements and nodes in the
mesh and the ADAPT GLOBAL history definition option to define the criteria in global remeshing.
Automatic remeshing with rezoning can only be used with the updated Lagrangian formulation, and with
continuum (displacement or Herrmann) element. Marc switches to updated Lagrangian framework if the
total Lagrangian formulation is specified in the input file. Global adaptive remeshing is available for
lower-order triangular, quadrilateral continuum elements in 2-D and lower-order tetrahedral, lower-order
triangular, or quadrilateral shell elements in 3-D.
Note:
If rezoning is to be performed in this analysis, this parameter must be included from the
very beginning. It cannot be added upon restart.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word REZONING.
11-15
2nd
Enter 0 for user supplied mesh for rezoning (default).

Enter 1 for 2-D automatic remeshing followed by rezoning.
Enter 2 for 3-D automatic remeshing followed by rezoning.
143 MNF
MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options
MNF
MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options
Description
This optional parameter allows the user to request that stress and/or strain modes be computed and
exported to the MNF. It also allows the user to pick the layer number for shell elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word MNF.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 to compute and export stress modes to MNF.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 to compute and export strain modes to MNF.
21-25
4th
Enter the shell layer:

0: continuum elements.
1: shell top layer.
2: shell middle layer.
3: shell bottom layer.
SUPER 144
Super Element Input
SUPER
Super Element Input
Description
This parameter allows the user to define an upper-bound to the number of degrees of freedom per node
when DMIGs are used to define superelements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-5
1st
Enter the word SUPER.
11-15
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
4th
Enter the maximum number of degrees of freedom per node number in

any super element.
145 USER
Create User-defined Element
USER
Description
You can define your own stiffness or mass matrix using this parameter and user subroutine USELEM to
specify equivalent nodal loads, stiffness matrix, mass matrix, stress recovery, and internal force. When
using this capability, the element type given on the CONNECTIVITY model definition option and the
ELEMENTS parameter is a negative number. This parameter can be used repeatedly to define different
element types.
For a thermo-mechanically coupled analysis, a user-defined element for the stress pass can be associated
with a regular Marc element or a user-defined element for the heat transfer pass. In the latter case, note
that USER parameter should be defined for all the user-defined stress elements first followed by USER
parameters for the associated heat transfer elements in the same order.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word USER.
11-15
2nd
Enter the element type; must be a negative number.
16-20
3rd
Number of degrees of freedom per node.
21-25
4th
Maximum number of stress quantities to be stored per integration point;

can be 0.
26-30
5th
Number of nodes per element; must be less than 101.
31-35
6th
Number of generalized strains; can be 0.
36-40
7th
Number of coordinates per node.
41-45
8th
Number of integration points per element; can be 0.
46-50
9th
Number of direct components of stress; can be 0.
51-55
10th
Number of shear components of stress; can be 0.
56-60
11th
Enter the element class based upon:
Conventional Marc Element Classes

0 = Pipe
8 = 3-D solid (brick, tet)
1 = Truss
9 = Fourier
2 = Shell
10 = Axisymmetric solid with twist
3 = Plate
11 = Axisymmetric shell
4 = Plane stress
12 = Open section beam
USER 146
Conventional Marc Element Classes

5 = Plane strain
13 = Closed section beam
6 = Generalized plane strain
14 = Membrane
7 = Axisymmetric solid
15 = Gap
61-65
12th
Heat transfer flag;

0 = Stress element
1 = Heat transfer element
66-70
13th
Associated heat transfer element if this is a stress element and the analysis
is coupled. This can be a positive normal Marc element type or another
negative user element type.
71-75
14th
Enter the topology class based upon:

Conventional Marc Topology Classes
11 = 2-node line (linear)
41 = 4-node tetrahedral (linear)
12 = 3-node line (quadratic)
42 = 5-node tetrahedral (4+1) (linear)
21 = 3-node triangle (linear)
43 = 10-node tetrahedral (quadratic)
22 = 4-node triangle (3+1) (linear+bubble)
51 = 6-node pentahedral
23 = 6-node triangle (quadratic)
52 = 15-node pentahedral
31 = 4-node quadrilateral (linear)
61 = 8-node hexahedral (linear)
32 = 5-node quadrilateral (4+1) Lagrange

multiplier)
62 = 9-node hexahedral (8+1) (linear + Lagrange

multiplier)
33 = 6-node quadrilateral
63 = 12-node hexahedral
34 = 8-node quadrilateral (quadratic serendipity)
64 = 20-node hexahedral (quadratic - serendipity)
35 = 9-node quadrilateral (8+1) (quadratic Lagrange)
147 USER
Additional Flags for Various Analyses
Chapt Additional Flags for Various Analyses

er 2:
Para
meter
s
CENTROID 148
State Storage at Centroid Only
CENTROID
State Storage at Centroid Only
Description
This parameter is used for calculation and storage of stress and strain (or, for heat transfer, temperature)
at the centroid of each element only.
The CENTROID parameter reduces the storage requirements, and the computational costs. However, it is
not recommended for nonlinear analysis because it reduces the accuracy of the solution. If this parameter
is used, the residual load correction should be switched off by using the NO LOADCOR parameter.
Note:
The POST option may be used to specify that output is at the CENTROID while insuring
an accurate analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word CENTROID.
149 ALL POINTS

State Storage at All Points
ALL POINTS
State Storage at All Points
Description
This parameter is used for calculation and storage of stress and strain (or, for heat transfer, temperature)
at all integration points of all elements. Output is obtained for each integration point of each element. For
the integration point locations of Marc elements, see Marc Volume B: Element Library.
If this parameter is switched off by the use of the CENTROID parameter, the state at each integration point
of the element is set equal to the value at the centroid of the element. This is not important in small
displacement elastic solutions and might not be significant where the mesh is very fine. However, the
utility of the sophisticated elements lies in the use of integration point data with relatively few elements.
Use of this parameter is recommended for any nonlinear analysis, particularly nonlinear shell and large
displacement analysis. If this parameter is turned off, the residual load correction should be switched off
(using the NO LOADCOR parameter) since an accurate stress distribution is necessary for this correction
to be effective. In general, use of this feature increases the run time; however, this parameter allows the
use of a coarser mesh, which can result in a lower overall cost for the analysis. Storage requirements are
also higher. This also can affect THERMAL LOADS or CHANGE STATE input requirements.
Note:
This parameter has the default value of on in the K2 and subsequent versions. This
parameter has the default value of off in all versions previous to K2.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the words ALL POINTS.
LOAD COR 150

Residual Load Correction
LOAD COR
Residual Load Correction
Description
This parameter is used to ensure that the nonlinear solution is always in equilibrium. In versions
subsequent to K2, this was the default option. It is recommended that the ALL POINTS parameter always
be used in conjunction with residual load correction. The residual correction depends on integrating
stress over the elements, and this can only be accurate if stresses are stored at all points.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the words LOAD COR.
151 NO LOADCOR
Suppression of Load Correction
NO LOADCOR
Suppression of Load Correction
Description
Residual load correction is automatically included for any analysis. This parameter is used to override
any automatic setting. This parameter should be the last parameter given before the END parameter.
Note:
Certain parameters (DYNAMIC and LARGE DISP) override this parameter and always turn
the load correction on. The use of this parameter should be limited to linear
elastic problems.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the words NO LOADCOR.
SCALE 152
Scaling to First Yield
SCALE
Scaling to First Yield
Description
This parameter causes scaling of the linear-elastic solution to first yield in the highest stressed element,
for small displacement elastic-plastic analysis where element properties are not temperature dependent.
Using this parameter causes all aspects of the initial solution (displacements, strains, stresses,
temperature changes, loads) to be scaled. Thus, subsequent incrementation is built onto the scaled
solution; for example, the PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT history definition set proportions the
scaled load.
Note:
This parameter cannot be used in dynamic, large disp, or coupled analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word SCALE.

This entry automatically switches on the load correction. This flag is
ignored if large displacement or dynamic analysis is flagged.
153 THERMAL
Thermal Stress Analysis
THERMAL
Thermal Stress Analysis
Description
This parameter specifies the use of thermal loading or temperature-dependent material properties in the
analysis. See THERMAL LOADS, CHANGE STATE, INITIAL TEMP, POINT TEMP, and TEMPERATURE
EFFECTS or TABLE model definitions in this document for more information.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word THERMAL.
ISTRESS 154
Define Initial Stress
ISTRESS
Description
This parameter allows you to input an initial set of stresses. It is your responsibility to input a
self-equilibrating set of stresses. These stresses should not produce any material nonlinearity. The
stresses are input through the UINSTR user subroutine or through the INIT STRESS model
definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word ISTRESS.
11-15
2nd
0: Initial stress in element coordinate system (Default)

1: Initial stress in preferred material coordinate system
155 LUMP
Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix
LUMP
Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix
Description
This parameter lumps the mass matrix (for dynamics) or specific heat matrix (for heat transfer) into a
diagonal matrix.
Note:
LUMP can also be used for acoustics. However, it tends to lower the eigenfrequencies.
Use of this parameter is not recommended for second order elements (8-node quadrilateral
or 20-node brick elements) or for shell type elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-4
1st
Enter the word LUMP.
5-10
2nd
If greater than or equal to zero, use lumped mass matrix.
11-15
3rd
If greater than zero, does not add mass to rotational degrees of freedom of
the following shell elements: 22, 75, 138, 139, 140.
APPBC 156
Application of Boundary Conditions
APPBC
Application of Boundary Conditions
Description
The APPBC parameter specifies that the application of boundary conditions is performed by row-column
elimination, forcing re-assembly if there are any nonzero applied displacements. If this option is not
included, boundary conditions are applied using the penalty method. The penalty factor is entered
through the PARAMETERS option.
This option has no effect when the CASI iterative solver is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word APPBC.
157 ACCUMULATE
Accumulation of Strain and Displacements
ACCUMULATE
Accumulation of Strain and Displacements
Description
This parameter reserves workspace for the storage of accumulated total strains, plastic strains, creep
strains, and total displacements. Such accumulated values can be used for purposes of extrapolation in
nonlinear creep and/or plasticity analysis. In particular, it can be used in analysis of cyclic loading
problems, where from one complete cycle the accumulated strains and displacements can be extrapolated
to cover multiple loading cycles.
Note:
This parameter must be used with extreme care. Because of the nature of extrapolation, the
results can only be considered to be an estimate of the values that would have otherwise
been obtained with complete analysis. After an extrapolation, the analysis can be continued
in the usual way. See the ACCUMULATE and EXTRAPOLATE options in the history
definition section of this manual for more information.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word ACCUMULATE.
ALIAS 158
Define Aliases
ALIAS
Define Aliases
Description
In many cases, you might wish to enter a different element type identification to the library element type
given on the ELEMENTS parameter when the mesh is read from the CONNECTIVITY model definition
set. A common example is the use of the same mesh for heat transfer and stress analysis. The library
element code on the ELEMENTS parameter must be changed, but you might not wish to change the
library code on the CONNECTIVITY option. This parameter defines the aliases corresponding to the
library element types in this analysis. For example, if a heat transfer analysis is to be done with 4-node,
axisymmetric quadrilateral (library code 40) but the mesh has been generated with element code type 10
(the corresponding stress analysis element) the alias is set up as 10 for library code type 40.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-5
1st
Enter the word ALIAS.
11-15
2nd
Number of aliases to be entered. More than one alias can be used for any
one element library code.
16-20
3rd
Alias for element library code (the type given on the CONNECTIVITY
option).
21-25
4th
Actual library code for the above alias (the type given on the ELEMENTS
parameter and the one to be used in the analysis).
Etc.
Note:
Alias correspondence pairs are continued in fields of I5 to column 75. Continuation blocks,
if needed, are given in 16I5 format.
159
Program Function and I/O Controls
Chapt Program Function and I/O Controls

er 2:
Para
meter
s
NEW 160
Use New Format
NEW
Use New Format
Description
This parameter can be used to switch from input in extended format to the default width or vice-versa.
Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW option is encountered.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word NEW.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input. This
overrides the EXTENDED parameter.
Enter 2 if the double width of the data fields is used for input.
161 TABLE
Indicate How Tables are to be used
TABLE
Indicate How Tables are to be used
Description
This option defines how many tables are included in the input data, and how are they to be used.
Tables may currently be used for defining nonlinear material behavior, and boundary conditions and
contact data.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-5
1st
Enter the word TABLE.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Enter 0 if old style input is used for:

FIXED DISP, etc.
POINT LOAD, etc.
DIST LOADS, etc.
FOUNDATION or FILMS option
Enter 2 if new style input is used for:

FIXED DISP, etc.
POINT LOAD, etc.
DIST LOADS, etc.
FOUNDATION or FILMS option
21-25
5th
Enter 0 if old style input is used for:

ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN,
FOAM, HYPOELASTIC, GENT, ARRUDBOYCE options.
Enter 1 if new style input is used for:

ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN,
FOAM, HYPOELASTIC, GENT, ARRUDBOYCE options.
26-30
6th
Enter 0 if old style input is used for CONTACT option.

Enter 1 if new style input is used for CONTACT option.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Enter 0 if a zero table reference value has to be set to one (default).

Enter 1 if a zero table reference value has to remain zero.
COMMENT 162
Define Comment
COMMENT
Define Comment
Description
The COMMENT parameter is used to enter informative comments. This parameter can be used as often
as desired within the model definition and history definition options. Use of this parameter does not affect
the analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word COMMENT.
11-80
2nd
User-entered comment.
Alternate Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-1
1st
Enter the $ character.
3-80
2nd
User-entered comment.
163 PRINT
Debug Printout
PRINT
Debug Printout
Description
This parameter allows printout of various items for debugging; however, the amount of output is
increased accordingly. Default is no check printout. Multiple print flags can be set using columns 11
to 80.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-5
1st
Enter the word PRINT.
11-80
2nd
Enter as many print codes as required.

Enter 1 for output of element stiffness matrices (this also prints out the
shell surface metric for doubly curved shells 4, 8, and 24), consistent mass
matrix, and equivalent nodal loads.
Caution: This produces significant output.
Enter 2 for output of the matrices used in tying. (See TYING, SERVO LINK,
UFORMS.)
Enter 3 to force the solution of a nonpositive definite matrix. This is only
recommended for the AUTO INCREMENT option to pass collapse points
in the collapse analysis. This can be entered on the CONTROL option.
Enter 5 to obtain additional information concerning gap convergence. In
contact analysis, set to 5 to obtain information concerning nodes touching
or separating from surfaces and also to print out the maximum residual and
reaction forces.
Enter 6 to obtain output of nodal value array during rezoning.
Enter 7 to obtain tying information in CONRAD GAP option and fluid
element numbers in CHANNEL option which is used to define fluid
channel input data in heat transfer analysis.
Enter 8 to obtain incremental displacements in local system in
contact problems.
Enter 9 to obtain latent heat output.
Enter 10 to obtain the stress-strain relation in the local coordinate system.
Enter 11 to obtain additional information on the interlaminar
stress calculation.
Enter 12 to output the right-hand side and solution vector.
Caution: This produces significant output.
PRINT 164
Debug Printout
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 13 to obtain additional information regarding CPU resources used.
Enter 14 to obtain information regarding the mesh adapting process.
Enter 15 to obtain additional information regarding surface
energy balances.
Enter 16 to obtain additional information regarding pyrolysis calculation.
Enter 17 to obtain additional information regarding creation
of streamlines.
Enter 18 to obtain information about rezoning when using ADAPT
GLOBAL option.
Enter 20 to obtain information regarding the evaluation of tables.

Enter 21 to obtain information about application of kinematic boundary
conditions when table input is used.
Enter 22 to obtain information about distributed loads, point loads, films,
foundations, and initial conditions when table input is used.
Enter 23 to obtain information about ablation deformation.
Enter 24 to print internal heat generated in coupled analysis.
Enter 25 to print additional information regarding remeshing
during ablation.
Enter 26 to print additional information regarding sink points.
Enter 27 to obtain reaction forces at tied nodes.
Enter 28 to obtain additional information about convective terms in heat
transfer and fluid analysis.
Enter 29 to obtain additional information on the internal created domains
(not supported yet).
Enter 30 to obtain information on cavity pressure loading.
Enter 31 to obtain information about the welding process. The total weld
heat input for each weld flux and the filler element creation history
are printed.
Enter 33 to obtain nodes and elements that are cut.
Enter 34 to print a description of what independent variables may be used
with a physical quantity.
Enter 35 to obtain detailed information on every call to a coupling region
API routine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines,
Chapter 12: Code Coupling Interface)
Enter 36 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has the least details).
165 PRINT
Debug Printout
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 37 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has more details).
Enter 38 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has the most details).
Enter 39 to obtain detailed information about memory allocation.
Enter 40 to obtain information about Marc-Adams integration.
Enter 42 to create a step on the post file containing the rezoned model
before the next increment of the analysis.
Enter 43 to obtain information about VCCT.
Enter 44 to obtain information during progressive failure.
Enter 46 to obtain information as to what subroutine caused the fatal error.
STOP 166
Exit following Workspace Allocation
STOP
Exit following Workspace Allocation
Description
For large problems, you might desire to see the exact sizing requirements for running a job without
actually executing the analysis. The insertion of this parameter causes Marc to exit normally following
workspace allocation. The solution space allocated is based on the optimized bandwidth if you request
the OPTIMIZE option in the model definition section. This is not the total memory required in the case of
the hardware provided solver (solver type 6), the CASI iterative solver (solver type 9), the Pardiso solver
(type 11), or the MUMPS solver (type 12).
Format
Format
Fixed
1-4
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word STOP.
167 NOTES
Print Notes and Updates
NOTES
Print Notes and Updates
Description
This parameter provides detailed, updated information about Marc (manual update, new program
features, etc.)
Format
Format
Fixed
1-5
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word NOTES.
INPUT TAPE 168

Specify Device for Model Definition Data
INPUT TAPE
Specify Device for Model Definition Data
Description
This parameter allows specification of a storage device which contains previously generated
CONNECTIVITY and COORDINATES model definition data.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the words INPUT TAPE.
11-15
2nd
Unit number for main input of coordinates and connectivity.

Default is unit 5. For larger problems, involving out-of-core options, you
should avoid using unit 2, 3, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 for mesh input.
169 ELSTO
Out-of-Core Storage of Elements
ELSTO
Out-of-Core Storage of Elements
Description
This parameter is used to save core storage for large problems. All element quantities, strains, stresses,
etc. are stored on an auxiliary storage device. If the number of words actually required is less than the
buffer specified below, this option is turned off by Marc.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word ELSTO.

This stores element arrays on unit 3.
11-15
2nd
Buffer size for out-of-core element storage.

The default is 40960 words. This buffer size is usually adequate unless
shell elements are used with a large number of layers.
OOC 170
Out-of-core Solver
OOC
Out-of-core Solver
Description
This parameter is used to indicate that the global stiffness matrix is assembled using auxiliary disk space
and will not reside in memory. This is available for solver types 0, 2, 4, 8, and 9 only. It can be used to
save memory. Additionally, for solver types 0 and 4, this parameter controls the decomposition of the
matrix. Normally, Marc automatically switches to the out-of-core solver only when it is unable to
dynamically allocate any more space, and the system is unable to fit into the real/virtual memory
available. For solver type 8, Marc automatically switches to the out-of-core assembly when there is
inadequate memory for the decomposition.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word OOC.
11-15
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 to further reduce memory requirements. Available only for solver

type 8. In this case, the memory needed for the nodal vectors will be partly
used by the direct solver. Furthermore, the memory for the direct solver
will be limited to almost the minimum needed by that solver. This will
reduce the memory but might increase the I/O time.
171 IBOOC
Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data
IBOOC
Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data
Description
During the Newton-Raphson iteration process, Marc makes a second copy of the solution space. Marc
normally does this in memory unless sufficient memory is not available; in which case, it uses auxiliary
disk space. This option can be used to force it to use disk space (file jobname.t29). This is often useful
for large problems when the sparse solver (type 0) or the multifront sparse solver (type 8) is used, as this
back-up copy is allocated before the decomposition memory is allocated. If the solver has insufficient
memory to perform its function, the job fails prematurely.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word IBOOC.
NO ECHO 172
Suppress Echo
NO ECHO
Suppress Echo
This parameter is used to limit echoing of certain input data to the output file during reading. Different
codes are used to suppress different things.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-7
1st
Enter the words NO ECHO.
11-80
2nd
Up to 19 codes in I5 or I10 format.

Enter 1 to suppress echo on node and element lists. Only one line and a
summary of the number of lines read are printed.
Enter 2 to suppress echo of boundary condition summary. Only the
number of boundary conditions is printed.
Enter 3 to suppress echo of NURBS data.
Enter 4 to suppress information about coordinate systems.
173 INCLUDE
Insert File into the Input File
INCLUDE
Description
Inserts an external file into the input file. The include statement may appear in either the parameter,
model definition, or history definition section. In Marc, an include file may reference another include
file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited to
240 characters.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word INCLUDE.
11-80
2nd
Physical filename.
If the file name is specified without a path, the file should be in the same
directory as the input file. If a path is given, the file should be in the path
relative to the current working directory. Also, note that the file name is
case sensitive and blanks should not be included in the name.


Chapter 2: Parameters
175 STATE VARS

Define Number of State Variables
STATE VARS
Define Number of State Variables
Description
This parameter allows consideration of state variables in addition to that of temperature. The number of
predefined state variables stored at each point of the structure can be increased from the default of one
(temperature for heat transfer and lubricant pressure for bearing analysis) by the use of this parameter. In
addition, additional storage can be allocated for user-defined global scalar quantities.
For more information, see THERMAL LOADS, INITIAL STATE, or CHANGE STATE model definition
data in this document and INITSV or NEWSV user subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and
Special Routines.
Note:
In bearing analysis, the first state variable equals the lubricant pressure. For this reason, the
number of state variables must be set to 2 if viscosity varies with temperature in this type
of analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the words STATE VARS.
11-15
2nd
Number of state variables to be stored per point.
16-20
3rd
Number of global variables to be stored.
DIST LOADS 176

Distributed Loads or Point Loads
DIST LOADS
Distributed Loads or Point Loads
Description
This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of different lists of distributed loads, the
maximum number of elements in any particular distributed load list, and the maximum number of nodes
with point loads applied.
This parameter is only necessary if the number of different lists of distributed loads, or the maximum
number of elements per list, or the number of point loads is increased in the history definition section.
Note:
This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST LOADS.
11-15
2nd
Maximum number of different lists of distributed loads. The default is 3.
16-20
3rd
Maximum number of elements in any particular distributed load list.
21-25
4th
Enter the maximum number of nodes with point loads applied.
177 FLUXES
Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes
FLUXES
Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes
Description
This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of different lists of distributed fluxes, the
maximum number of elements in a particular distributed flux list, and the maximum number of nodes
with point fluxes applied.
This parameter is only necessary unless the number of different lists of distributed fluxes, or the
maximum number of elements per list, or the number of point fluxes is increased in the history
definition section.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-6
1st
Enter the word FLUXES.
11-15
2nd
Maximum number of different lists of distributed fluxes. Default is 3.
16-20
3rd
Maximum number of elements in any particular distributed flux list.
21-25
4th
Enter the maximum number of nodes with point fluxes applied.
FILMS 178
Film Coefficients
FILMS
Film Coefficients
Description
This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of elements that have films. This parameter
is only needed if the number of elements with films is increased in the history definition section.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word FILMS.
11-15
2nd
Maximum number of elements that have films.
179 RESTRICTOR
Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis
RESTRICTOR
Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis
Description
This parameter must be included to allow the use of restrictors in lubrication analysis. See the
RESTRICTOR model definition option section of this document for more information.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word RESTRICTOR.
11-15
2nd
Number of element surfaces for which restrictor conditions are imposed.
WELDING 180
Welding Analysis
WELDING
Welding Analysis
Description
This parameter can be used to define the maximum number of weld fluxes in the model and other related
maximum quantities for welding processes. This parameter is recommended, in general, for any welding
analysis, but is particularly required if the number of weld fluxes, weld paths, weld fillers and other
related quantities are increased in the history definition section.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word WELDING.
11-15
2nd
Enter an upper bound to the number of welding heat sources.
16-20
3rd
Enter an upper bound to the number of elements associated with any weld
heat source.
21-25
4th
Enter an upper bound to the number of weld paths.
26-30
5th
Enter an upper bound to the number of weld fillers.
31-35
6th
Enter an upper bound to the number of elements associated with any

weld filler.
36-40
7th
Enter an upper bound to the number of curves associated with any weld
path. This is set to 1 by the program if left undefined.
41-45
8th
Enter an upper bound to the number of points associated with any weld
path curve. This is set to 2 by the program is left undefined.
181 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

Specify Maximum Number of Boundary Conditions to be Defined
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
Specify Maximum Number of Boundary

Conditions to be Defined
Description
This option allows the user to specify the maximum number of boundary conditions (FIXED DISP., etc.,
DIST LOADS, etc., POINT LOAD, etc., FILMS or FOUNDATION) labels to be given. If all boundary
conditions are specified before the END OPTION, this is not necessary. This is only necessary if the table
driven style input is used for defining boundary conditions.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word BOUNDARY.
11-15
2nd
Enter the maximum number of boundary condition ids.
SHELL SECT 182

Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness
SHELL SECT
Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness
Description
By default, all the shell and beam-in-a-plane elements in Marc use a Simpson rule for integration through
the cross section. This numerical integration allows any material behavior at each layer; for example, the
yielding of a nonlinear elastic-plastic shell can be followed through the section, from a fully elastic to a
fully plastic section. The density of integration points through the thickness is chosen with this parameter.
For purely linear material behavior, 1 point (the minimum) is required for exact integration across the
section. For most nonlinear problems, 7 points are sufficient to describe the nonlinear material response
exactly. For extremely nonlinear response, such as elastic-plastic dynamic problems, 11 points might be
needed. The default if this parameter is not used is 11 points.
If the COMPOSITE option is used for a group of elements, it controls the number of layers used, and the
integration is performed using the trapezoidal rule. This option (4th field) may be used to control the
procedure which can improve computational performance but limit materials selection.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the words SHELL SECT.
11-15
2nd
Number of points across the section for Simpson rule integration of

stresses. The default is 11; minimum is 1. Must be an odd number.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 if you are going to perform your own integration through the
shell/beam thickness. This requires you to input a generalized stress-strain
law through the GENSTR user subroutine.
21-25
4th
Enter the default method for integrating through the thickness of

composite shell elements. If a value is given on the COMPOSITE option,
it will be used for that particular material.
Enter 1 (default) for conventional procedure, which supports all material
behavior available for composite elements.
Enter 2 if stiffness is to be fast-integrated through the thickness based
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements and
computational costs for elastic shells. Thermal strains and temperature
dependent properties are not supported.
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements and
computational costs for elastic shells. This procedure uses more memory
and computational time than method 2.
183 TSHEAR
Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185
TSHEAR
Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185
Description
The default distribution of transverse shear strain through the thickness for thick shell element types 22,
75, and 140, and for thick beam 45, is a constant. With the inclusion of the TSHEAR parameter, a more
parabolic beam-like distribution derived from a strength-of-materials approach is used. This distribution
is exact for beam 45 but is only approximate for shells 22, 75, or 140 since it is based on the assumption
that the stresses in perpendicular directions are independent of each other.
For unstacked solid shell element, type 185, and 3D composite brick elements, type 149 and 150, the
inclusion of the TSHEAR parameter results in an improved transverse shear distribution. For solid shell
elements, if not used as a composite material, the shear correction factor should be entered in the
GEOMETRY option.
The interlaminar shear is printed only if the PRINT ELEMENT option is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word TSHEAR.
TIE 184
Define Tying Data
TIE
Define Tying Data
Description
This allocates storage for tying data. See TYING and SERVO LINK model definition options in Chapter
3 of this manual. Also see the UFORMSN user subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and
Special Routines.
This parameter is necessary only if TYING CHANGE is used to increase the number of constraints.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word TIE.
11-15
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
4th
Maximum number of retained nodes plus one involved in any tying type
or servo link constraint.
26-30
5th
Not used; enter 0.
185 MPC-CHECK
Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter
MPC-CHECK
Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter
Description
This parameter allows the user to specify the amount of checking and ordering done by the program
during the application of multi-point constraints arising from the model definition options: CONTACT,
CYCLIC SYMMETRY, INSERT, RBE2, RBE3, SERVO LINK, and TYING.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the words MPC-CHECK.
11-15
2nd
1: Apply the MPCs in the default order:

1. MPCs obtained from SERVO LINK option.
2. MPCs obtained from INSERT option.
3. MPCs obtained from TYING, RBE2, or RBE3 options (the actual
order follows from the order of these options in the model
definition block of the data file).
4. MPCs obtained from CYCLIC SYMMETRY option.
5. MPCs obtained from CONTACT option.
Print a warning message if a tied degree of freedom is being used by a
subsequent MPC.
2: Same as 1, but instead of warning, a fatal error message is printed and
the analysis will stop with exit 2011.
3: Try to rearrange the MPCs in such a way that a tied degree of freedom
will not be used in a subsequent MPC. If this reordering cannot
successfully be completed, print a fatal error message and stop the
analysis with exit 2011.
If the MPC-CHECK parameter is not present in the input file:
For Version 10 or earlier, default is 1.
For Version 11, default is 3.
AUTOMSET 186
Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes
AUTOMSET
Description
Without this option, a tied degree of freedom cannot be used as a tied degree of freedom in other tying
constraints nor can it be used as a fixed degree of freedom in a single point constraint (for example,
FIXED DISP/FIXED TEMPERATURE).
When this option is used, the above is allowed as long as the number of constraints is not larger than the
number of degrees of freedom. The program re-writes the tying constraint equation so that one of the
retained degrees of freedom becomes the tied degree of freedom.
If this option is activated, the MPC-CHECK parameter is ignored.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
1-10
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word AUTOMSET.
Examples
Example 1
X displacement of node 3 is tied to X displacements of node 1 and node 2:
Ux(3) = 0.5 * Ux(1) + 0.5 * Ux(2)
X displacement of node 3 is fixed to be 0.1:
Ux(3) = 0.1
Without the AUTOMSET option, this is not allowed; with the AUTOMSET option, these two constraints
are rewritten as:
Ux(1) = 2*Ux(3) - Ux(2)
Ux(3) = 0.1
Example 2
X displacement of node 3 is tied to X displacement of node 1 and node 2:
Ux(3) = 0.5 * Ux(1) + 0.5 * Ux(2)
X displacement of node 3 are tied to X displacement of node 4:
Ux(3) = Ux(4)
X displacement of node 3 is fixed to be 0.1:
Ux(3) = 0.1
187 AUTOMSET
Without the AUTOMSET parameter, this is not allowed; with the AUTOMSET parameter, these two
constraints are rewritten as:
Ux(1) = 2*Ux(3) - Ux(2)
Ux(4) = Ux(3)
Ux(3)=0.1
The parameter is effective for constraints generated by the following options:
TYING
SERVO LINK
RBE2
RBE3
RROD
CONRAD GAP
It is not active for constraints generated by the following options:

INSERT
CONTACT
INERTIA RELIEF
AUTOSPC 188
Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes
AUTOSPC
Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes
Description
The AUTOSPC option applies a constraint to multiple degrees of freedom to eliminate rigid body modes
in the structure. This procedure can only be used with the direct solvers type 0, 4, and 8.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word AUTOSPC.
189 IO-DEACTIVATE
Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out
Chap
IO-DEACTIVATE
Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out
Description
This parameter will result in the simulation continuing even if an element goes inside-out due to large
deformation or material instability. The element that has gone inside-out will be deactivated from the
model. This option is intended for use with damage models where the reduced stiffness of the element
may result in these difficulties. It should be used with caution in the simulation, and it should be
recognized that this will result in a decrease in mass in the system.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word IO-DEACT.

Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements
Chapt Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements

er 2:
Para
meter
s
191 BEAM SECT

Beam Section Definition
BEAM SECT
Description
This parameter is used to define the sectional properties of beam sections used in the analysis. The format
and exact data entered depends upon which elements are used. Formats for all available Marc beam
elements are shown below. This parameter must be included if element 13, 77, or 79 is used, if 14, 25,
31, 76, or 78 is used with a noncircular section, or if element 52 or 98 is used with a nonprismatic section
or if element 52 or 98 is used with numerical section integration. See Marc Volume B: Element Library
for more information about individual elements.
If used, the BEAM SECT parameter must directly follow the SIZING and ELEMENTS parameters. Each
beam section used in the analysis must then be described. A LAST statement must follow the last beam
section description to complete the BEAM SECT parameter definition.
There are four methods in this option to define the beam cross section properties:
a. For thin section open and closed beams
b. Elastic non-integrated element types 31, 52, and 98
c. Numerically integrated standard solid section
d. Numerically integrated non-standard solid section
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For all beam elements, use the 1st and last data blocks described below.
1st data block
1-10
1st
Enter the words BEAM SECT.
.
.
(Include all beam section definitions here.)
.
Last data block
1-10
1st
Enter the word LAST.
Method A
For elements 13, 14, 25, and 76 to 79, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, 5a to define each beam section:
2a data block
1-10
1st
Descriptive title of beam section.
BEAM SECT 192

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3a data block for elements 13, 14, 25, and 76 - 79

1-5
1st
Number of branches used to input section.
6-10
2nd
Number of divisions in first branch. Must be an even number.
11-15
3rd
Number of divisions in second branch. Must be an even number.
Etc.
Etc.
Etc.
Note that a beam section consisting of one straight branch has no stiffness against rotation along the
branch direction.
Data blocks 4a and 5a are given one pair per branch. (X, Y, and S are coordinates on the cross-section
face.) See Marc Volume B: Element Library.
Note that a branch with zero thickness does not contribute to the stiffness but is used to ensure that the
branches form a connected path for open section beams.
4a data block
1-10
1st
X-Coordinate of beginning of branch.
11-20
2nd
Y-Coordinate of beginning of branch.
21-30
3rd
DX/DS at beginning of branch.
31-40
4th
DY/DS at beginning of branch.
41-50
5th
X-Coordinate of end of branch.
51-60
6th
Y-Coordinate of end of branch.
61-70
7th
DX/DS at end of branch.
71-80
8th
DY/DS at end of branch.
5a data block
1-10
1st
Length of branch.
11-20
2nd
Thickness of beginning branch.
21-30
3rd
Thickness of end branch. Default to thickness at beginning if left zero.
Method B
For elastic non-integrated element types 31, 52, or 98, use data blocks 2b and 3b formats to define each
beam section.
2b data block
1-10
1st
Descriptive title of section.
3b data block for element type 31, 52, or 98

1-5
1st
Enter 0.
6-15
2nd
Area of cross section A.
16-25
3rd
Ixx Moment of inertia about local x-axis.
193 BEAM SECT

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-35
4th
Iyy Moment of inertia about local y-axis.
36-45
5th
K Torsional stiffness factor. The torsional stiffness is calculated as

EK
--------------------21 +
46-55
6th
A xs
Effective transverse shear area in x-direction (only applies to element
31 and 98). Default A xs = A.
56-65
7th
Effective transverse shear area in y-direction (only applies to element

31 and 98).
Default A ys = A.
A ys
Method C
For elements 52 and 98 using the standard numerically integrated sections, use data blocks 2c, 3c, 4c,
and 5c to define the beam section:
2c data block
1-10
1st
3c data block
1-5
1st
Enter 0 for the standard cross-section shapes (i.e., elliptical, rectangular,

trapezoidal, or hexagonal).
6-15
2nd
Enter N sec t for the cross-section type. The negative value indicates the
section is numerically integrated. The value is entered as a real number.
16-25
3rd
N sec t
= -1 for an elliptical section
N sec t
= -2 for a rectangular section
N sec t
= -3 for a trapezoidal section
N sec t
= -4 for a hexagonal section
Enter a, the first dimension defining the cross section.

if N sec t = -1: a is the diameter of the circle or the length of the ellispe in
local x.
if N sec t = -2: a is the length of the square or the rectangle in local x.
if N sec t = -3: a is the width of the trapezoid in local x on minus local y side.
if N sec t = -4: a is the width of the hexagon in local x at y = 0.
BEAM SECT 194

Format
Fixed
26-35
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
F
Enter b, the second dimension defining the cross-section. The default is a

when blank or zero.
if N sec t = -1: b is the height of the ellipse in local y.
if N sec t = -2: b is the height of the rectangle in local y.
if N sec t = -3: b is the height of the trapezoid in local y.
if N sec t = -4: b is the height of the hexagon in local y.
36-45
5th
Enter c, the third dimension defining the cross section. The default is zero
when blank.
if N sec t = -1: c is not used. Leave blank or enter 0.
if N sec t = -2: c is not used. Leave blank or enter 0.
if N sec t = -3: c is the width of the trapezoid in local x on the plus local
y side.
if N sec t = -4: c is the width of the hexagon in local x on either local y side.
4c data block
1-5
1st
For an elliptical section, enter the number of subdivisions in radial

direction. The default is 3.
For a rectangular or trapezoidal section, enter the order of the integration
rule used in local x-direction. If the number is positive and odd, a Simpson
rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes rule is
used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is 5 and
the order cannot be larger than 10.
For a hexagonal section, enter the order of the integration rule used in local
x-direction over each trapezoidal half. If the number is positive and odd, a
Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes
rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is
5 and the order cannot be larger than 10.
6-10
2nd
For an elliptical section, enter the number of subdivisions in

circumferential direction of a 90 sector. The default is 2.
For a rectangular or trapezoidal section, enter the order of the integration
rule used in local y-direction. If the number is positive and odd, a Simpson
rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes rule is
used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is what
was entered in the first field and the order cannot be larger than 10.
195 BEAM SECT

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For a hexagonal section, enter the order of the integration rule used in local
y-direction over each trapezoidal half. If the number is positive and odd, a
half the order in x-direction plus 1 and the order cannot be larger than 10.
For non-Gauss rules, the points in the top row of the lower trapezoid
coinciding with the points in the bottom row of the upper trapezoid (i.e.,
the points coinciding at y = 0) are merged together.
11-15
3rd
Enter one if the section is to be treated as a pre-integrated section. The

default, when blank or zero, is not to treat it as a pre-integrated section and
use numerical integration throughout the analysis. If a one is entered in
this field, the input in the 1st and the 2nd field of this data block is ignored.
16-20
4th
Not used; leave blank or enter 0.
21-30
5th
Enter the normal stiffness factor f 1 .
31-40
6th
Enter the bending stiffness factor f 2 for bending about local x.
41-50
7th
Enter the bending stiffness factor f 3 for bending about local y.
61-70
8th
Enter the shear stiffness factor f 4 for shear in local x.
71-80
9th
Enter the shear stiffness factor f 5 for shear in local y.
51-60
10th
Enter the torsional stiffness factor f 6 .
Stiffness factors default to 1 when left blank or entered as 0.

Entered stiffness factors must be positive
5c data block
1-10
1st
For a uniform change in cross section, enter the effective Poissons ratio.
The default is zero when left blank. This datum is not used at this time and
its value will be ignored.
Not more than 100 integration points can exist in any cross section. Note that pre-integrated sections do
not allow746+5 stress and strain output in section integration points; only generalized stresses and
strains can be requested for output.
Method D
For elements 52 and 98 using the more general numerically integrated sections that use quadrilateral
segments as building blocks, use data blocks 2d, 3d, 4d, and 5d to define the beam section.
2d data block
1-10
1st
BEAM SECT 196

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3d data block
1-5
1st
Enter N seg , the negative of the number of quadrilateral shaped segments.

The negative number indicates the section is solid.
6-10
2nd
Enter the order of the integration rule used for each quadrilateral shaped
segment in parametric -direction. If the number is positive and odd, a
5 and the order cannot be larger than 10.
11-15
3rd
Enter the order of the integration rule used for each quadrilateral shaped
segment in parametric -direction. If the number is positive and odd, a
the same rule and order as in parametric -direction and the order cannot
be larger than 10.
16-20
4th
Enter a one if the section is to be treated as a pre-integrated section. The

default, when blank or zero, is not to treat it as a pre-integrated section and
use numerical integration throughout the analysis. If a 1 is entered in this
field, the input in the 2nd and the 3rd field of this data block is ignored.
21-30
5th
Enter the normal stiffness factor f 1 .
31-40
6th
Enter the bending stiffness factor f 2 for bending about local x.
41-50
7th
Enter the bending stiffness factor f 3 for bending about local y.
61-70
8th
Enter the shear stiffness factor f 4 for shear in local x.
71-80
9th
Enter the shear stiffness factor f 5 for shear in local y.
51-60
10th
Enter the torsional stiffness factor f 6 .
Stiffness factors default to 1 when left blank or entered as 0.

Entered stiffness factors must be positive
Enter the 4d data block N seg times as follows (i.e., one data block for each quadrilateral segment.
4d data block
1-10
1st
x-coordinate of the first corner of the segment.
11-20
2nd
y-coordinate of the first corner of the segment.
21-30
3rd
x-coordinate of the second corner of the segment.
31-40
4th
y-coordinate of the second corner of the segment.
41-50
5th
x-coordinate of the third corner of the segment.
197 BEAM SECT

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
y-coordinate of the third corner of the segment.
61-70
7th
x-coordinate of the fourth corner of the segment.
71-80
8th
y-coordinate of the fourth corner of the segment.
The corners are given in counterclockwise order with respect to the local x-y axis.
5d data block
1-10
1st
For a uniform change in cross section, enter the effective Poissons ratio.
Default is zero when left blank. This data is not used at this time and its
value will be ignored.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 to have the principal axis associated with the largest area moment
of inertia to be aligned with the local x-axis.
Enter 2 to have the principal axis associated with the smallest area moment
of inertia to be aligned with the local x-axis.
Enter 3 to have the x-axis of the coordinate system for which the section
is being defined to be aligned with the local x-axis is given in the
GEOMETRY option.
Default is 3 when left blank or zero.
16-25
3rd
Enter the x-coordinate of a point that, when projected, lies on the positive
side of the local x-axis. If the principal moments of inertia are equal, this
defines the x-coordinate of a point on the positive local x-axis. This
coordinate defaults to X cg + 1 , where X cg is the x-coordinate of the center
of gravity of the section in the coordinate system in which the section was
entered. The default is used when this field is blank or zero or when the
user point coincides with the center of gravity.
26-35
4th
Enter the y-coordinate of a point that, when projected, lies on the positive
side of the local x-axis. If the principal moments of inertia are equal, this
defines the y-coordinate of a point on the positive local x-axis. This
coordinate defaults to Y cg , where Y cg is the y-coordinate of the center of
gravity of the section in the coordinate system in which the section was
entered. The default is used when this field is blank or zero or when the
user point coincides with the center of gravity.
Not more than 100 integration points can exist in any cross section. Note that pre-integrated sections do
not allow stress and strain output in section integration points; only generalized stresses and strains can
be requested for output. A section not pre-integrated cannot have more than 100 segments; using single
point integration each. For pre-integrated sections, there is no limit on the number of segments.
Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List
Model Definition Options List
Model Definition Option
Page
ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
1270
ACOUSTIC
1271
ACTUATOR
297
ADAPT GLOBAL
263
ADAPTIVE
255
ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical)
768
ANISOTROPIC (Thermal)
1136
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1236
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)
1218
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
761
1133
ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input)
786
ARRUDBOYCE
790
ATTACH EDGE
290
ATTACH FACE
291
ATTACH NODE
288
AXITO3D
537
Page
B2GG, B2PP
383
BACKTOSUBS
385
B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic)
1389
B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic)
1356
BLOCKS
216
BOUNDARY
220
BSQUEAL
375
BUCKLE INCREMENT
CASE COMBIN
CAVITY DEFINITION
1041
396
1159
CAVITY
532
CFAST
344
CHANGE PORE
990
CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input)
988
CHANGE STATE
566
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input)
562
CHANNEL
COEFFICIENT
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input)
1154
389
1138
919
COHESIVE
1140
COHESIVE
922
COIL CURRENT
COMPOSITE
1334
913
CONM1
1030
CONM2
1036
CONN FILL
237
CONN GENER
238
CONNECT
226
CONNECTIVITY
235
CONRAD GAP
1153
CONSTRAINT
223
CONTACT (2-D)
646
CONTACT NODE
718
Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List 200
Page
CONTACT TABLE
703
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES
694
CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)
632
659
CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic)
1393
CONTROL (Fluid)
1418
CONTROL (Fluid-Solid)
1421
CONTROL (Heat Transfer)
1150
CONTROL (Hydrodynamic)
1249
CONTROL (Magnetostatic)
1362
CONTROL (Mechanical)
482
CONUDS
494
CONVERT
1152
COORD SYSTEM
301
COORDINATES
241
CORNERING AXIS
COUPLING REGION
529
1397
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input)
874
CRACK DATA
876
CREEP (with TABLE Input)
999
CREEP
1002
CURE RATE
1169
CURE SHRINKAGE
1175
CURVES
275
CWELD
349
CYCLIC SYMMETRY
310
CYLINDRICAL
252
DAMAGE
905
DAMPING
1018
DEACT GLUE
719
DEACTIVATE
392
DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type)
217
DEFINE (Sets)
232
DELAMINATION
601
Page
DENSITY EFFECTS
953
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS
474
DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS
480
DESIGN OBJECTIVE
471
DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS
478
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS
476
DESIGN VARIABLES
472
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic)
1376
DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic)
1285
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric)
1308
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1373
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic)
1282
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
1305
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic)
1372
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating)
1205
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic)
1330
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1369
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
1202
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1327
DIST FLUXES
1059
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input)
1056
DIST LOADS
506
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input)
501
DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1227
DIST SOURCES (Acoustic)
1264
DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
1261
DMIG
378
DMIG-OUT
370
ELEMENT SORT
465
EMISSIVITY
1162
EMWINDING
1336
END OPTION
1427
ERROR ESTIMATE
393
EXCLUDE
720
Page
FACE IDS
511
FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input)
877
FAIL DATA
891
FILMS
1053
FILMS (with TABLE Input)
1049
FIXED ACCE
1028
FIXED DISP (Fluid)
1401
FIXED DISP (Mechanical)
499
FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
495
FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic)
1276
FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
1273
FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic)
1320
FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1318
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic)
1367
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic)
1280
FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic)
1325
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric)
1304
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1364
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
1278
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1322
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
1301
FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic)
1259
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
1256
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1225
FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input)
1044
FIXED TEMPERATURE
1047
FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid)
1403
FIXED VELOCITY
1406
FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
1209
FIXED VOLTAGE
1211
FLOW LINE
427
FLUID DRAG
530
FLUID SOLID
1020
FOAM (with TABLE Input)
813
FOAM
817
Page
FORCDT
586
FORMING LIMIT
833
FOUNDATION
590
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input)
587
FOURIER
591
FXORD
244
GAP DATA
912
GASKET
820
GENERATE
229
GENT (with TABLE Input)
793
GENT
797
GEOMETRY
292
GLK
541
GLOBALLOCAL
542
GRAIN SIZE
903
GRID FORCE
452
HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input)
523
HOLD NODES
525
HYPERMESH
438
HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input)
772
HYPOELASTIC
774
INCLUDE
243
INERTIA RELIEF
526
INIT CURE (with TABLE Input)
1172
INIT CURE
1174
INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input)
546
INIT STRESS
548
INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer)
1194
INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input)
1021
INITIAL DISP
1024
INITIAL FICTIVE (with TABLE Input)
570
INITIAL FICTIVE
572
Page
INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input)
979
INITIAL PC
981
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input)
552
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN
554
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input)
983
INITIAL PORE
985
INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input)
969
INITIAL POROSITY
971
INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1223
INITIAL PYROLYSIS
1192
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input)

INITIAL STATE
556
559
INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer)
1122
INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress)
580
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer)

INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress)
1119
578
INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input)
1025
INITIAL VEL
1027
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input)
974
INITIAL VOID RATIO
976
INSERT
330
IRM
429
ISLAND REMOVAL
603
ISOTROPIC (Acoustic)
1269
ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)
1382
ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic)
1296
ISOTROPIC (Fluid)
1410
ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer)
1126
ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic)
1252
ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)
1349
ISOTROPIC (Stress)
745
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
1268
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1232
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)
1212
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity)
1289
Page
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1380
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
1295
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid)
1408
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)
1250
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability)
1343
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1341
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress)

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
J-INTEGRAL
JOULE
K2GG, K2PP
LATENT HEAT
737
1124
593
1201
381
1141
LOADCASE
423
LORENZI
594
M2GG, M2PP
382
MANY TYPES
218
MAP TEMP
574
MAPPER
222
MASSES
1029
MATERIAL DATA
902
MATUDS
493
MERGE
224
MERGE SELECTIVE
225
MESH2D
215
MIXTURE
916
MNF UNITS
386
MODAL INCREMENT
1039
MOONEY (with TABLE Input)
776
MOONEY
782
MPCOUT
377
Page
NEW
231
NLELAST
807
NO ELEM SORT
467
NO NODE SORT
470
NO PRINT
447
NO PRINT CONTACT
451
NO PRINT SPRING
449
NO SUMMARY
464
NODAL THICKNESS
296
NODE CIRCLE
247
NODE FILL
248
NODE GENER
249
NODE MERGE
250
NODE SORT
468
OGDEN (with TABLE Input)
800
OGDEN
804
OPTIMIZE
402
ORIENTATION
935
ORTHO TEMP (Structural)
850
ORTHO TEMP (Thermal)
1145
ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical)
1299
ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)
1387
ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)
1354
ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical)
757
ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal)
1131
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1234
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)
1214
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity)
1291
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1384
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
1297
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability)
1345
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1350
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
751
1128
Page
P2G
384
PARAMETERS
489
PBUSH
336
PERMANENT (Electromagnetic)
1391
PERMANENT (Magnetostatic)
1360
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1358
PFAST
347
PHI-COEFFICIENTS
1007
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric)
1315
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
1312
PIN CODE
329
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric)
1311
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
1286
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
1309
POINT CHARGE
1288
POINT CURRENT (Joule)
1208
POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic)
1333
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
1206
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1331
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1377
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE
1379
POINT FLUX
1063
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input)
1060
POINT LOAD
520
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input)
516
POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1230
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic)
1267
POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
1265
POINT TEMP
584
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input)
582
POINTS
274
POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input)
972
POST
404
POWDER (with TABLE input)
943
POWDER
949
Page
PRE STATE
533
PRESS FILM
996
PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input)
993
PRINT CHOICE
440
PRINT CONTACT
450
PRINT ELEMENT
442
PRINT NODE
445
PRINT SPRING
PRINT STREAMLINE
448
1198
PRINT VMASS
454
PRTCONNECT
227
PSHELL
925
PWELD
357
QVECT (with TABLE Input)
1064
RAD-CAVITY
1157
RADIATING CAVITY
1156
RBE2
323
RBE3
325
REAUTO
455
REBAR
928
RECEDING SURFACE
1189
REGION (Fluid)
1396
RELATIVE DENSITY (with TABLE Input)
956
RELATIVE DENSITY
958
RESPONSE SPECTRUM
1038
RESTART LAST
460
RESTART
457
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input)
1246
RESTRICTOR
1248
ROTATION A
528
RROD
328
Page
SDRC
435
SERVO LINK
321
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input)
864
SHAPE MEMORY
870
SHELL TRANSFORMATION
308
SHIFT FUNCTION
1014
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input)
1054
SOIL (with TABLE Input)
959
SOIL
965
SOLVER
398
SPECIFIC WEIGHT
982
SPECIFIED NODES
221
SPLINE
710
SPRINGS
332
START NUMBER
219
STIFSCALE
STRAIN RATE (Fluid)
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties)
STREAM DEFINITION
388
1412
831
1196
STRING
286
SUMMARY
463
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications)
367
SUPERELEM
365
SURFACE ENERGY
1183
SURFACES
280
SWLDPRM
359
SYMMETRY
228
TABLE
823
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal)
1415
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress)
843
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer)
1142
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic)
1253
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress)

THERMAL CONTACT (2-D)
838
1093
Page
1110
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)
1085
1099
THERMAL LOADS
576
THERMO-PORE
1178
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input)
1243
THICKNESS
1245
THROAT
1191
TIME-TEMP
TRACK STREAMLINE
860
1199
TRACK
426
TRANSFORMATION
298
TYING
313
UDUMP
462
UFCONN
240
UFRICTION
715
UFXORD
251
UHTCOEF
716
UHTCON
717
UMOTION
714
USDATA
394
UTRANFORM
309
VCCT
597
VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer)
1167
VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic)
1241
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer)
1165
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)
1239
VIEW FACTOR
1155
VISCEL EXP
1016
VISCELFOAM
1013
VISCELMOON
1011
VISCELOGDEN
1012
VISCELORTH
1009

VISCELPROP
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input)
WEAR
Page
1008
977
721
WELD FILL
1082
WELD FLUX
1072
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input)
1068
WELD PATH
1076
WORK HARD
835
WRITE
254
Chapter 3: Model Definition Options

MESH2D
Mesh Definition
Program Control
Mechanical Analysis
Contact
Material Properties
Rate Effects
Dynamic Analysis
Joule Heating Analysis
Diffusion Analysis
Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis
Acoustic Analysis
1272
Piezoelectric Analysis
1300
Electromagnetic Analysis
Fluid Analysis
214
230
395
481
604
723
997
1017
1200
1222
1255
1394
1317
1363
1238
The model definition input consists of a series of optional blocks of data. These blocks define the
geometry of the mesh, material properties, boundary conditions, and analysis controls.
These options are read in by activating the respective option with an alphanumeric code word
(a keyword), followed by sets of data. In this document, both fixed format and free input are described.
This code word is given in capital letters at the top of each block of data in the following section. An END
OPTION is used to signify the end of all the model definition input data. Note that each option can be
exercised more than once.
In general, there is no specific order required in reading the options; however, you should be aware that
the same option flags can appear in different blocks and that the last data read controls that flag. The
exceptions are as follows:
1. If the FXORD or UFXORD option is used, it must come after the COORDINATES option when it
uses data read in the COORDINATES option;
2. If postprocessor and restart files are being used, the results are order dependent. See the POST
option for more details.
3. If the MESH2D option is used, it must follow the END parameter. If the MESH2D option is used
to write a mesh file containing connectivity, coordinates and optional boundary conditions, the
file needs to be read in sequential order. The CONNECTIVITY option must appear before the
COORDINATES option followed by BOUNDARY conditions if stored on mesh file. Other options
can be in any sequence and the above options can be repeated in any sequence to read data from
other files or data input.
Information given in the last option overwrites any previous information, thus facilitating any minor
corrections to the data. Any option not needed should be left out.
Chapter 3: Model Definition Options 214

MESH2D
MESH2D
Two-dimensional Mesh Generator
This two-dimensional mesh generator generates a mesh composed of either triangular or quadrilateral
elements. The results of the mesh generation are output on a specified file. This file can then be used as
input for Marc. A detailed description of the capabilities of the MESH2D generation is contained in Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information.
The call to the mesh generation feature is initialized by a block with MESH2D in the first six columns.
This is followed by a series of optional sets of blocks; each of which has an alphanumeric keyword. The
keywords are:
BLOCKS (Required as first set)
DEFINE
MANY TYPES
START NUMBER
BOUNDARY
SPECIFIED NODES
MAPPER
CONSTRAINT
MERGE
MERGE SELECTIVE
CONNECT
PRTCONNECT
SYMMETRY
GENERATE
BLOCKS must be the first set input. GENERATE must terminate the mesh generation. BLOCKS defines the
parameters and the working space for the mesh generation. GENERATE tells Marc to start generating the
mesh, and then returns control to Marc. You should note that the generated mesh is written out on the
specified file and must be read in from this file using the appropriate model definition data options
(CONNECTIVITY and COORDINATES) described in a following section before plotting or optimization
of the mesh can proceed.
When using the MESH2D option, divide the geometry into simpler regions called blocks. Marc meshes
each block into nodes and elements, and finally combines the blocks to form the complete mesh.
The MESH2D option can be used more than once in an analysis. Simply place the second group to be
included after the previous GENERATE.
215 MESH2D
Define a Two-dimensional Mesh
MESH2D
Define a Two-dimensional Mesh
Description
This option starts the call to the two-dimensional mesh generation feature. This data must follow the END
of the parameters.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-6
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word MESH2D.
BLOCKS 216
Define Working Size
BLOCKS
Define Working Size
This option is required and must follow MESH2D.

Description
This option defines the parameters and the sizes of the working space for mesh generation.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word BLOCKS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of blocks.
6-10
2nd
Number of principal boundary nodes defining the geometry of all blocks.

Note that principal nodes should be continuous in their numbering.
11-15
3rd
Code number of element type for use with Marc series of programs.
16-20
4th
Set to 1 for generation of 4-node quadrilateral elements.

Set to 0 for triangles.
Set to 2 for 8-node quads.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Local file on which the output is written; to be used by the Marc series
of programs.
Not used. Enter 0.
Number of times the mesh is repeated due to use of the

SYMMETRY option.
36-40
8th
Maximum number of degrees of freedom constrained during mesh

generation. Default is 100.
41-45
9th
Number of degrees of freedom for each node. The default is two degrees
of freedom.
46-50
10th
Maximum number of nodes on symmetry axis. Default is 50.
51-55
11th
Maximum number of connections of any blocks. Default is 10.
217 DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type)

Define Block Type
Define Block Type
Description
This option allows the block type and the nodal number of the boundary points to be specified.
Note:
Marc always generates node connections in a counterclockwise direction. See Marc

Volume A: Theory and User Information for correct specification of boundary node number
order when a distributed load has to be applied to any surface of the block.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word DEFINE.
2nd data block

One per block.
1-5
1st
Type of block: 1, 2, 3, or 4.
6-10
2nd
Number of intervals in the first direction (P1 - P2). Number of increments

between the first and second boundary nodes.
11-15
3rd
Number of intervals in the second direction (P2 - P3). M=N for a type 3
triangular block.
Number of increments between second and third boundary nodes.
16-20
4th
First boundary node number defining the block.
21-25
5th
Second boundary node number defining the block.
26-30
6th
Third boundary node number defining the block.
31-35
7th
Fourth boundary node number defining the block.
Continue until necessary boundary nodes have been defined. A maximum

of 12 is possible and these must follow the order defined in Marc Volume
A: Theory and User Information.
Etc.
MANY TYPES 218

Define Multiple Elements
MANY TYPES
Define Multiple Elements
Description
This option allows you to specify different element types per block. Default is that all elements are of the
same type specified in the BLOCKS option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words MANY TYPES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Element type block 1.
6-10
2nd
Element type block 2.

Etc. for all blocks.
Continuations (more than 16 blocks) are given in Format 16I5.
219 START NUMBER

Specify Starting Element
START NUMBER
Specify Starting Element
Description
This option allows you to give a lowest element number and node number for this MESH2D sequence.
This option can be used more than once; for example, if MESH2D is used more than one time in a single
run. Default is that Marc starts generation with element 1 and node 1.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Enter
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words START NUMBER.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Starting node number.
6-10
2nd
Starting element number.
BOUNDARY 220
Define Boundary Nodes
BOUNDARY
Define Boundary Nodes
Description
This allows the coordinates of the boundary nodes to be read in.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the word BOUNDARY.
2nd data block

Boundary node coordinates, one per node; NNO series.
1-5
1st
Boundary node number.
6-15
2nd
First (X or Z) coordinate.
16-25
3rd
Second (Y or R) coordinate.
221 SPECIFIED NODES

Specify Node Coordinates
SPECIFIED NODES
Specify Node Coordinates
Description
This option allows the coordinates of certain nodes of the generated mesh to be specified.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
Enter the words SPECIFIED NODES.
Number of sets of nodal points coordinates to be specified,

(maximum 100).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block

One per specified node.
1-10
1st
First coordinate of a specified nodal point.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of a specified nodal point.
MAPPER 222
Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D
MAPPER
Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D
Description
This option invokes the MAP2D user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special
Routines) for boundary node coordinate generation or modification. It is used when it is more convenient
to program the boundary node coordinates rather than reading them in.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word MAPPER.

This invokes the MAP2D user subroutine. If the coordinates input on the
BOUNDARY parameter are to be modified, this option must follow the
BOUNDARY parameter.
223 CONSTRAINT
Generate Boundary Condition Constraints
CONSTRAINT
Generate Boundary Condition Constraints
Description
This feature allows boundary conditions to be generated for a particular degree of freedom for all the
nodal points on one side of a block. At the present time, there is no method available for setting boundary
conditions on those nodes generated via the SYMMETRY option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CONSTRAINT.
Number of sides to be constrained.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Number of the block to be constrained.
6-10
2nd
Number of the side to be constrained.
11-15
3rd
Degree of freedom to be constrained.
16-25
4th
Displacement value to be given to the constrained degree of freedom.
MERGE (Model Definition) 224

Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes
MERGE (Model Definition)
Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes
Description
This allows a minimum distance between nodes to be specified. Any nodes separated by less than the
minimum distance is automatically merged into a single node.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the word MERGE.
Separation distance below which nodes are merged together.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
225 MERGE SELECTIVE

Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block
MERGE SELECTIVE
Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block
Description
This option, used in conjunction with the CONNECT option, allows you to define which nodes are to be
merged in mesh blocks that border each other. This is especially useful if gaps are to be defined between
the blocks.
As with the MERGE option, you specify a minimum distance and a list of block numbers in which nodes
are to be merged. Nodes which are separated by less than the minimum distance specified are considered
duplicates, and merged into a single node if they lie within the same or connected blocks. Nodes located
within the specified minimum distance on unconnected blocks (those disconnected using the CONNECT
option) are not merged.
For more information about connecting blocks, see the description of the CONNECT option in
this document.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
Enter the words MERGE SELECTIVE.
Enter the number of sets of data to be used to enter merge distance and
block numbers.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the minimum separation distance.
4th data block

Enter a list of block numbers.
CONNECT 226
Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks
CONNECT
Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks
Description
This option is used to connect or disconnect two blocks during the generation of the final mesh. Default
is that two blocks are connected if they join the same boundary points in the DEFINE option. It is
especially useful to disconnect two blocks if gaps are to be defined in between the blocks. The MERGE
SELECTIVE option must be used in combination with this option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word CONNECT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of block connections to specify.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of 3rd data block; defaults to data input.
3rd data block

One per continuation.
1-5
1st
First connected block.
6-10
2nd
Second connected block.
11-15
3rd
Set to 0 to connect the two blocks; set to 1 to disconnect the two blocks.
227 PRTCONNECT
Print Out Block Connections
PRTCONNECT
Print Out Block Connections
Description
This option gives a printout of the current BLOCKS connection information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PRTCONNECT.
SYMMETRY 228
Define Axis of Symmetry
SYMMETRY
Define Axis of Symmetry
Description
This allows symmetry axes to be defined so that further mesh blocks can be generated by reflection about
the axes. Be sure that enough space is allocated in the BLOCKS option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the word SYMMETRY.
Number of symmetric axes.
2nd data block

1-5
21st
3rd data block

One per symmetry axis.
1-10
1st
First coordinate of a point on the axis of symmetry.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of a point on the axis of symmetry.
21-30
3rd
First component of a vector along the axis of symmetry.
31-40
4th
Second component of a vector along the axis of symmetry.
229 GENERATE
End of Mesh Generation Data
GENERATE
End of Mesh Generation Data
Description
This signifies the end of the mesh generation data and instructs Marc to proceed with the mesh
generation. When the mesh has been generated, Marc proceeds to the next option found in the model
definition options. If you wish to stop without proceeding to plotting or analysis, a blank block should
immediately follow the GENERATE option. This causes Marc to stop on an illegal data exit. Provisions
should be made to save the mesh on permanent file by appropriate control blocks if only mesh generation
is desired.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the word GENERATE.

Mesh Definition
Chapt Mesh Definition

er 3: This section describes the geometry input required to describe the object to be analyzed. The finite
mesh can be generated using MESH2D, Mentat, Patran, or some other preprocessor. The element
Mode element
topology and coordinates can be processed using a variety of options. This final set of connectivity and
coordinates can be written to an auxiliary file through the WRITE option. Additional geometric quantities
l
can be input through the GEOMETRY or NODAL THICKNESS options; see Marc Volume B: Element
Defini Library for the data required for particular element types. The ROTATION A option is used to give the axis
for the calculation of centrifugal loads. The degrees of freedom associated with nodes can be transformed
tion
from their natural system (see Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition for each particular
Optio element) to a user-defined local system. Kinematic constraints can be imposed between degrees of
freedom using either the TYING or SERVO LINK option. Finally, springs can be defined using the
ns
SPRINGS option.
The NEW parameter can be used to specify a change in format.
231 NEW (Model Definition)

Use New Format
NEW (Model Definition)
Use New Format
Description
This option can be used to switch from input with extended format to the default width or vice-versa.
Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW option is encountered. This option
must not appear embedded inside any model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word NEW.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input. This
overrides the EXTENDED parameter.
DEFINE (Sets) 232

Define Sets
DEFINE (Sets)
Define Sets
Description
This option allows you to define a setname and to associate members to the set. These sets can be used
wherever a list of items is requested. Multiple numbers of sets can be used by repeating this model
definition block. In defining the members of a set, any of the conventions in the Input of List Items in
Chapter 1 Introduction can be used. A previously defined set can be used to describe a set. If the input
version is 10 or greater, the set can be 32 characters in length.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word DEFINE.
The rest of this data block is free format beginning with the third field.
11-20
2nd
Enter the type of set:

ELEMENT set of elements
ELSQ
set of elements (unsorted)
NODE
set of nodes
NDSQ
set of nodes (unsorted)
INT
set of integration points
LAYER
set of beam or shell layers
DOF
set of degrees of freedom (unsorted)
INCS
set of increment numbers
POINT
set of points
CURVE
set of curves
SURFACE set of surfaces

BODY
set of body numbers
EDGE
set of element: edge pairs
FACE
set of element: face pairs
EDGEMT
set of element: edge pairs. Edge number given using

Marc Mentat convention.
FACEMT
set of element: face pairs. Face number given using Marc

Mentat convention.
233 DEFINE (Sets)

Define Sets
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
ORNSUR
set of surface: orientation, where the orientation is given

in Marc convention
1 top surface
2 bottom surface.
ORNCUR
set of curve: orientation, where the orientation is given in

Marc convention:
1 top surface
2 bottom surface.
MNORSU
set of surface: orientation, where the orientation is given

in Marc Mentat convention:
0 top surface
1 bottom surface.
MNORCU set of curve: orientation, where the orientation is given in

Marc Mentat convention:
0 top surface
1 bottom surface.
ELNODE
21-30
3rd
set of element relative_node pairs. For example,

relative_node is 1 or 2 for 2-node beam element.
Enter the word SET. (This is optional.)

Enter the word OSET for an open set (see Note 4).
31-62
4th
Enter the name of the set.
2nd data block

1-80
Notes:
1st
Enter a list of items that are of the type defined to be members of the set
whose name is given.
(1) A setname cannot be used in a list unless it has been previously defined.
(2) For unsorted set types DOF, ELSQ, and NDSQ, the verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT
cannot be used in the list of items.
(3) EDGE, EDGEMT, FACE, FACEMT, ORNSUR, MNORSU, ORNCUR, MNORCU can only be
used with the table input format.
(4) When an open set is requested, nodes or elements not defined elsewhere are not
automatically created.
(5) If this option is used to define domains associated with the DDM procedure, the name
of the set should be DOMAINi where i is the domain number.
DEFINE (Sets) 234

Define Sets
Example
The example below defines a set to be called WALL consisting of nodes 1, 3, 5, 7, 19.
DEFINE NODE SET WALL
1 TO 20 BY 2
The example below defines a set to be called LOADIT consisting of edge 2 of elements 1, 3, 5, 7, ... 19.
DEFINE EDGE SET LOADIT
1:2 TO 20:2 BY 2
235 CONNECTIVITY
Specify Element Connectivity
CONNECTIVITY
Description
This series gives the element connectivity; for example, the nodal points for each element. Data can be
input from data or an external file by exercising the appropriate option. For two-dimensional elements,
the nodal points must be given in a counterclockwise sequence. Several blocks of connectivity data can
be input. For example, one block can be read in from file while additional ones are read from data blocks,
each block starting with the word CONNECTIVITY.
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the element type (second field, 3rd data block) should be a stress
type element if both a structural and thermal analysis is required. If a heat transfer element type is given,
the element is considered rigid in the stress analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the word CONNECTIVITY.
In many cases, when the whole mesh is in a file, just CONNECTIVITY and a blank should be included
here and the INPUT TAPE parameter must be used.
2nd data block
1-5
1st
Number of elements to be read in this option (optional); defaults to total

number of elements in the mesh.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of connectivity; defaults to unit number
specified on the INPUT TAPE parameter.
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 to suppress printing of element connectivity list during

this option.
3rd data block

Element connectivity array. This data block is repeated once for each element given in data block 2.
1-5
1st
Element number.
6-10
2nd
Element type or alias (see ALIAS parameter).
11-15
3rd
Nodal point.
CONNECTIVITY 236
Format
Fixed
16-20
21-25
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Nodal point.
Repeat until all nodes of the element have been defined. The required
ordering of the nodes is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
Continuation for elements with more than 14 nodes/element (for example,
library element 21, 35, 57, etc.) is in format 16I5.
237 CONN FILL

Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator
CONN FILL
Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator
Description
This option completes the filling of connectivity lists by generating midside nodes in between the corner
nodes provided. At the same time, it generates coordinates for the new node created. The coordinates are
formed by averaging the coordinates of the end nodes of the respective side on the connectivity list. It is
used for converting linear displacement elements to quadratic displacement elements. The option works
for 4-node quadrilaterals and 8-node bricks. You must remember to turn on the bandwidth optimization
option after using this option and before an analysis.
Note:
This does not calculate the coordinates correctly if going from element 4 to element 22
or 24.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words CONN FILL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the starting node number for the midside nodes.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to set the node count to the maximum node number used in
this option.
11-15
3rd
Give the start of the element list for this option.

Default is 1.
16-20
4th
Give the end of the element list for this option. Default is number of
elements specified in the analysis.
CONN GENER 238

Copy Element Connectivity Data
CONN GENER
Description
This input performs the function of an incremental mesh generator by copying the pattern of the
connectivity data for previously defined elements. If the new elements are to be connected to the
master elements, a common node A needs to be given. The position of node A in the connectivity list of
the new element and its position in the connectivity list of the master element needs to be given. Marc
then numbers all the other nodes in the new element by making the algebraic difference between the
numbers of all the nodes in the new element the same as that of the corresponding nodes in the element
being copied.
This option copies the connectivity from a series of elements defined by a starting and end element
number and uses it to calculate the connectivity for a new series of elements. The new series of elements
is defined by the input of a starting and end element number. When the list of the elements being copied
from is ended, the recently generated elements will take its place as the elements to be copied from. This
is repeated until the list defined for the new elements is exhausted.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words CONN GENER.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of the first element for which the connectivity is being generated.
6-10
2nd
Number of the last element for which the connectivity is being generated.
All the elements between the first and last element will be generated.
11-15
3rd
Number of the first element used as a master.
16-20
4th
Number of the last element used as a master.
21-25
5th
Give the position of node A in the connectivity list of the generated

element. Node A can belong to a master element. If there is no common
node between the generated and the master elements, enter 1.
26-30
6th
Give the position of node A in the connectivity list of the master element.
If there is no common node, enter 1.
239 CONN GENER

Format
Fixed
31-35
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 for decrease of 1 element per series of master elements.

Enter 2 for decrease of 2 elements per series of master elements. The two
element decrease is restricted to use with three-node triangular elements.
36-40
8th
This entry is only required if there is no common node between the

generated and master elements. This defines an increment to each of the
nodes in the master element which then gives the connectivity list of the
generated element.
UFCONN 240
Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine
UFCONN
Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine
Description
This option calls the UFCONN user subroutine to generate or modify element connectivity (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.) The option can be repeated as often as necessary.
This option must follow the CONNECTIVITY option. The user subroutine is called as soon as this option
is encountered.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Dat
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word UFCONN.
2nd data block

Enter a list of elements for which the UFCONN user subroutine is called.
241 COORDINATES
Enter Node Coordinates
COORDINATES
Description
This option defines the coordinates of each nodal point. The nodal data can be input in several blocks.
The latest data input for a particular nodal point is used. Like the element connectivity data, this data can
be input from an external file since this coordinate data can be automatically generated by a mesh
generator. Local corrections can be made to the generated mesh by input of the modified nodal
coordinates from data blocks.
Usually for the general shell elements (4, 8, and 24), the FXORD option and the UFXORD user subroutine
can help with input of coordinates.
In Marc, the nodes need not be numbered sequentially.
In most cases, when all the coordinates are input by file, just the coordinates and a blank are required here
and the INPUT TAPE parameter must be used.
If the COORD SYSTEM, CYLINDRICAL, or FXORD options are used, the coordinate positions entered
here are with respect to coordinate system entered in these options.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the word COORDINATES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the maximum number of coordinate directions to be read in per

node; defaults to the number of coordinates per node. Repeated
COORDINATES blocks need not have the same value in this field.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of nodal points read-in in this option; (optional) default
to the number of nodes in the mesh.
11-15
3rd
Enter the unit number for input of coordinates; defaults to the file number
specified on the INPUT TAPE parameter.
16-20
4th
Set to 1 to suppress print-out of nodal coordinate list during this

option input.
3rd data block

One data line per nodal point.
1-5
1st
Nodal point number.
6-15
2nd
Coordinate 1.
16-25
3rd
Coordinate 2.
COORDINATES 242
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-35
4th
Coordinate 3.
36-45
5th
Coordinate 4.
Etc.
Etc.
See library element description in Marc Volume B: Element Library for the
definition of coordinates for a particular element.
Input 6 coordinates per data line; continuation data lines in format 6E10.5.
243 INCLUDE (Model Definition)

INCLUDE (Model Definition)
Description
file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited to
240 characters.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-80
2nd
Physical filename.
case sensitive and blanks should not be included in the name.
FXORD 244
Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates
FXORD
SHELL COORDINATE GENERATION OPTION

Description
This option is used to generate coordinates for Elements 4, 8, or 24. (Refer to Marc Volume B: Element
Library and Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for further information on the use of this
block). This can be used for mapping of certain types of standard shell geometries such as cylinders,
spheres, etc. It can also be used to transform cylindrical coordinates into Cartesian coordinates.
The CYLINDRICAL or COORD SYSTEM options are more powerful for cylindrical coordinates.
Note that when a continuous surface has a line of discontinuity in 1 or 2 (the surface coordinate) such
as a complete cylinder has at = 0 and 360, two nodes must be placed at each nodal location on the
line to allow the distinct coordinate input, and tying type 100 used to join degrees of freedom. In general,
different surfaces coming together must also use the intersecting shell tyings.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the word FXORD.
11-12
2nd
Enter the word NO if coordinates after FXORD are not to be printed out.
Number of sets of shell geometry specifications to be input.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Data blocks 3, 4, 5, and 6 are provided once for each consecutive series of nodes with a different shell
geometry specification.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Identification number of surface type. See Table 3-1 and Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information.
6-10
2nd
First node of this series.
11-15
3rd
Last node of this series.
16-20
4th
Set to 1 if local (x,y,z) set in which surface is defined must be transformed

to the global (x,y,z) set. If so, data blocks 4, 5 and 6 must be input to define
the transformation. If not, data blocks 4, 5 and 6 are omitted.
245 FXORD
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of the origin of the local (x,y,z) system in which the shell surface
is generated.
1-10
1st
Global x-coordinate origin.
11-20
2nd
Global y-coordinate origin.
21-30
3rd
Global z-coordinate origin.
5th data block

Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on the positive x-axis of the local system.
1-10
1st
Global x-coordinate of the point.
11-20
2nd
Global y-coordinate of the point.
21-30
3rd
Global z-coordinate of the point.
6th data block

Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on, or near to, the positive y-axis of the local system. This
point defines the local (x,y) plane in the global system.
1-10
1st
Global x-coordinate of the point.
11-20
2nd
Global y-coordinate of the point.
21-30
3rd
Global z-coordinate of the point.
Table 3-1 describes the1,2 directions for the FXORD option contained in Marc.
FXORD 246
Table 3-1
Input to FXORD
Nodal Data Input
(See Marc Volume A:
Input
Code
Type
User Information
Surface
Description
General Surface
Surface
x3=x3(x1, x2)
All units are length measure,

unless specified otherwise
All 11 Coords. for El. 8
All 14 Coords. for El. 4
2
x 3 x 3 x 3
x 1 x 2 x 3 -------- -------- ----------------x 1 x 2 x 1 x 2
Surface
Coordinates
used in
program
(1, 2)
1, 2,
NonCartesian
Coordinate
s
YES
first two input

x1, x2
YES
YES
(last coordinate only needed for

element type 4)
2
Axisymmetric shell
(about x3 axis)
R
R ------
(in radians)
dR
length------- in ------------------units
d
radians
General Cylinder
dx 1 dx 2
s x 3 x 1 x 2 -------- -------ds ds
s, x3
NO
Circular Cylinder
q, x3, R: in degrees
NO
(about x3 axis)
R at 1st node only
R, , x3
(R, in length
measure)
Flat Plate x3=0
x1, x2
x1, x2
NO
Curved Pipe
, r, R: , in degrees
r and R at 1st node only
r, , R,
(both in length
measure)
YES
(elbow)
7
Cylindrical
r, , x3
x1, x2, x3
NO
Spherical
r, ,
x1, x2, x3
NO
247 NODE CIRCLE

Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs
NODE CIRCLE
Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs
Description
This option generates the coordinates of a series of nodes which lie on a circular arc. The coordinates of
the first node on the arc must be previously given. The circle must lie in the x-y plane.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NODE CIRCLE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Node number of the first node on the arc.
6-10
2nd
Total number of nodes on arc.
11-15
3rd
First increment in series of node numbers to be generated.
16-20
4th
Second increment in series of node numbers to be generated. Entry of

the second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is
used for 8 node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is
entered in this field.
21-25
5th
Scaling of angle between each pair of nodes as a percentage. A default of

100 percent is used.
26-35
6th
Number of degrees between the first pair of nodes.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
First coordinate of the center of the circle.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of the center of the circle.
NODE FILL 248

Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation
NODE FILL
Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation
Description
This option performs the function of an incremental mesh generator for nodes. It achieves this by
interpolation. In its simplest form, it takes the coordinates defined by two end nodes and divides the line
between them into a specified number of equally spaced nodes. Additional data can be input to vary the
distances between the generated nodes in a geometric ratio. This option is often used with the UFXORD
user subroutine to obtain a warped curve in space.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NODE FILL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of the first node in the series. The coordinate data for this node
must have been previously defined.
6-10
2nd
Number of the last node in the series. The coordinate data for this node
must have been previously defined.
11-15
3rd
Node number increments to be taken in the above list.
16-20
4th
Second increment in series of node numbers to be generated. Entry of the

second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is used for
8-node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is entered in this
field.
21-25
5th
Scaling of the distances between successive nodes as a percentage. A

default of 100 percent is used.
26-30
6th
Number of times that the series will be repeated. You should ensure that
all starting and ending nodes in the series have been defined previously.
This repeat feature defaults to 1 series.
31-35
7th
Print flag is set equal to 1, nodal coordinate printout is omitted. If set equal
to 2, only the generated coordinates are printed. If set equal to 0 or left
blank, all coordinates are printed.
36-40
8th
Increment in first and last nodes in the series if the series is repeated more
than once. Defaults so that the next series will start from the node after the
last node in the preceding series.
249 NODE GENER

Generate Node Coordinates
NODE GENER
Generate Node Coordinates
Description
This option performs the function of an incremental mesh generator for nodes. It is used when elements
such as the quadratic 8-node elements require different spacing in successive nodal rows. It achieves this
by using a list of nodes as the master pattern. It then creates a new set of nodes by giving the new set of
nodes the same coordinate spacing as the list of nodes. Additional optional data allows the spacing to be
changed as a percentage of the spacing between the nodes. When the list of nodes is used up, the newly
generated nodes takes its place on the list and the process is repeated until the number of nodes to be
generated has been completed.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NODE GENER.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of the first node for which coordinates are being generated. This
coordinate data for this node must have been previously defined).
6-10
2nd
Number of the last node in the series. (This coordinate data for this node
must have been previously defined.)
11-15
3rd
Number of the first node used as a master.
16-20
4th
Number of the last node used as a master.
21-25
5th
Increment in the node numbers of the two node series above. A default
value of 1 is used.
26-30
6th
Second increment in series of node numbers to be generated. Entry of the

second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is used for
8-node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is entered in this
field.
31-35
7th
Scaling of distance between each pair of nodes as a percentage. A default

of 100 percent is used.
36-40
8th
Enter 1 for decrease of 1 node per series of master nodes. Default is 0.

Enter 2 for a decrease of 2 nodes per series.
41-45
9th
Print flag if set equal to 1, nodal coordinate printout is omitted.

If set equal to 2, only the generated coordinates are printed.
If set equal to 0 or left blank, all coordinates are printed.
NODE MERGE 250

Merge Duplicate Nodes
NODE MERGE
Merge Duplicate Nodes
Description
This option searches through all the nodes and merges all nodes which are closer to each other than a
minimum-specified distance. The default minimum distance is 0.001
The merge provision only alters the node numbers defined by the COORDINATES and CONNECTIVITY
options. Loading and boundary conditions must be applied to the new node numbers after nodal merge.
The node merge command cannot be used with shells or beam elements.
The WRITE option can be used to save the new mesh.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NODE MERGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 to set the node count to the minimum number found after the use
of this option.
6-10
2nd
Set to starting node number or nodal merge.

Default is 1.
11-15
3rd
Set to last node number for nodal merge. Default to total number of nodes
specified in SIZING parameter.
16-25
4th
Separation distance below which nodes will be merged together.
26-30
5th
Set to 1 to suppress printout of new connectivity.
251 UFXORD
Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine
UFXORD
Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine
Description
This block invokes the call to the UFXORD user subroutine to generate or modify nodal coordinates (see
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines). The block can be repeated as often as
necessary. This option must follow the COORDINATES option.
If the nodes are specified in the CYLINDRICAL or COORD SYSTEM options, the coordinates defined in
the user subroutine are with respect to the local coordinate system.
The user subroutine is called as soon as this option is encountered.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word UFXORD.
2nd data block

Enter a list of nodes for which the UFXORD user subroutine is called.
CYLINDRICAL 252
Define Cylindrical Coordinate System
CYLINDRICAL
Description
This option allows for the input of a cylindrical coordinate system such that both the nodal input and
output of a group of nodal points are treated in this cylindrical coordinate system. For nodes listed in this
option, nodal input (that is, COORDINATES, POINT LOAD, FIXED DISP, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL VEL,
etc.) and nodal output (that is, incremental and total displacements, etc.) are to be given in the cylindrical
coordinate system defined here.
Note:
All coordinate systems defined with this option are based upon the original model and they
are not updated during the analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CYLINDRICAL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of cylindrical coordinate data (required for this option).
6-10
2nd
Unit number for reading data. Defaults to input deck.
11-15
3rd
Enter nonzero integer to suppress printing of generated rectangular

coordinates and nodal transformations after the END OPTION option.
Repeat data blocks 3, 4, 5, and 6 once for each data set.

3rd data block coordinates of origin
1-10
1st
Enter x coordinate (with respect to global Cartesian coordinates) of point

defining origin of cylindrical coordinate system.
11-20
2nd
Enter y coordinate of origin.
21-30
3rd
Enter z coordinate of origin.
4th data block coordinates of point 1

1-10
1st
Enter x coordinate (with respect to global Cartesian coordinates) of point

such that vector from origin to this point defines the z axis of cylindrical
coordinate system.
11-20
2nd
Enter y coordinate of z axis point.
21-30
3rd
Enter z coordinate of z axis point.
253 CYLINDRICAL
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Note:
If the calculated direction cosines of the local Z-axis are zero,

they are reset to (0., 0., 1.). This is the default for
two-dimensional cylindrical coordinates.
5th data block coordinates of point 2

1-10
1st
Enter x-coordinate (with respect to global Cartesian coordinates) of a

point such that a vector from the origin to this point defines the axis from
which is measured in planes perpendicular to the z-axis.
11-20
2nd
Enter y-coordinate of this point.
21-30
3rd
Enter z-coordinate of this point.

Note:
If the calculated direction cosines of the local X-axis are zero,

they are reset to (1., 0., 0.).
Point 1
Origin
Y
X Point 2
6th data block

Enter a list of nodes using this cylindrical coordinate system. Marc
assumes that the coordinates of these nodes are given in cylindrical
coordinates with respect to the cylindrical axes defined in data blocks 3,
4 and 5. Coordinates are entered as r, theta, z, where theta is in degrees.
Marc also calculates nodal transformations for these nodes such that
all nodal input and output is given with respect to the cylindrical
coordinate system attached to these nodes.
WRITE 254
Write Connectivity and Coordinates
WRITE
Write Connectivity and Coordinates
Description
This option allows you to write the final connectivity and coordinates to an auxiliary file. The values
written are those after all internal mesh generations (MESH2D, FXORD or incremental generators) and
all external (UFXORD, UFCONN) transformations have been performed. The coordinates are output in
the global system, not in the local coordinate system specified in either the CYLINDRICAL or COORD
SYSTEM options. All node numbers are in the user system; that is, nonoptimized.
Note:
The connectivity and coordinates data are written to the auxiliary file in the format (default
or extended) based on the last related valid option (see the EXTENDED parameter as well
as the NEW (model and history definition options).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word WRITE.
11-15
2nd
Enter the unit number to write to. Default is unit 1.
255 ADAPTIVE
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis
ADAPTIVE
Description
This model definition set controls the error criteria for local adaptive meshing. The ADAPTIVE parameter
must also be included.
The capability can be used for lower-order elements, 3-node triangular solids and shells, 4-node
quadrilateral solids and shells, 4-node tetrahedrals, 8-node hexahedral elements, and the 8-node
solid-shell elements. Local adaptive meshing cannot be used with the triangular and tetrahedral
Herrmann elements, type 155 - 157.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the word ADAPTIVE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of criteria to use.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read data, defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter the frequency to perform adaptive meshing, default is

every increment.
16-20
4th
Enter the unit number to which the adaptive mesh data will be written.
21-25
5th
Enter 1 for ignoring attach information when an element edge or face

which is attached to a curve or surface is subdivided. By default, the new
nodes are projected to the curve or surface.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated in pairs for each criteria selected.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the criteria type:

1: Mean Strain Energy
Subdivide element if:
element strain energy > f1 * total strain
energy/NUMEL
f2 to f6 is not used
ADAPTIVE 256
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2: Zienkiewicz-Zhu Error Criterion
The error norm is defined as
dV
----------------------------------------------------------2
2
dV + dV
2
E E dV
----------------------------------------------------------2
2
E dV + E E dV
2
or
The stress error and strain energy errors are

X =
dV
and Y = E E dV
2
The allowable element stress error is

AES = f2 * X/NUMEL + f3 * X * f1//NUMEL
The allowable element strain energy error is
AEE = f4 * Y/NUMEL + f5 * X * f1//NUMEL
where
NUMEL is the number of elements in the mesh.
If f2, f3, f4, f5 are input as zero, f2 = 1.0.
If stress error testing is to be performed, f1 0
and f2 and/or f3 0, f4 = 0, f5 = 0.
The element will be subdivided when:
> f1 and Xel > AES.
If strain energy error testing is to be performed,
f1 0 and f2 = 0, f3 = 0, f4 0, and/or f5 0.
> f1 and Yel > AEE
The default is f2 = 1.0 if f2, f3, f4, f5 are input
as 0.0.
It is advisable that f2 + f3 1 or f4 + f5 1.0.
3: Stress Discontinuity (not yet implemented)
257 ADAPTIVE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4: Node within Box
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes:
f1 < x < f2 and f3 < y < f4 and f5 < z < f6
The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be
automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of
the 3rd data block.
-4: Node location within box
Subdivision criteria is the same as Type 4.
If all nodes of element leave the box, the subdivided elements are
merged together.
the 3rd data block.
5: Node in Contact
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes is in contact or
belongs to a segment which is contacted
f1 to f6 are not used, enter 0 or blank
6: Aspect Ratio (not yet implemented)
7: Skewness Ratio (not yet implemented)
8: Thermal Gradient (used for heat transfer and coupled analysis)
gradient > maximum gradient * f1
or gradient > f2
and temperature > f3 (if given)
typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)
9: Equivalent stress, strain
von Mises stress > f1 * maximum von
Mises stress
or
ADAPTIVE 258
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
von Mises stress > f2
Equivalent strain > f3 * maximum equivalent strain
or
Equivalent strain > f4
Equivalent plastic strain > f5 maximum equivalent plastic strain
or
Equivalent plastic strain > f6
Equivalent creep strain > f7*maximum equivalent creep strain
or
Equivalent creep strain > f8.
10: User subroutine UADAP
user/maximum user > f1 or user > f2
user is defined in user subroutine UADAP
11: Previously Defined Mesh
Use the refined mesh from a previous analysis as the starting point
to this analysis.
(see 4th data block).
12. Zienkiewicz-Zhu plastic strain error criterion:
2
p 2
* dV
= ------------------------------------------------------------p2
p* p 2
dV + dV
p
The plastic strain error is:

A =
p*
p 2
dV
The allowable element plastic strain error is AEPS = f2 *

A/NUMEL + f3 * A * f1//NUMEL
The element will be subdivided when: > f1 and Ae > AEPS.
259 ADAPTIVE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
13. Zienkiewicz-Zhu creep strain error criterion:
c 2
* dV
------------------------------------------------------------c2
c* c 2
dV + dV
c
The creep strain error is:

B =
c*
c 2
dV
The allowable element creep strain error is AECS = f2 * B/NUMEL

+ f3 * B * f1//NUMEL
> f1 and Bel > AECS.
14: Pressure Gradient (used only for diffusion analysis)
or gradient > f2
and pressure > f3 (if given)
15: Electrical Potential Gradient (used only for electrostatic analysis)
or gradient > f2
and potential > f3 (if given)
16: Magnetic Potential Gradient (used only for magnetostatic analysis)
or gradient > f2
and potential > f3 (if given)
17. Elements in cutter path. This criterion can only be used for analysis
of NC Machining problems.
ADAPTIVE 260
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
18. Angle between shell elements.
Subdivide element if the change in the angle between neighboring
shell elements is larger than f1.
19: Node location within a Cylindrical Region
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes is in the region
defined by a cylinder:
f1 = radius
f2 = x-coordinate of first point on axis
f3 = y-coordinate of first point on axis
f4 = z-coordinate of first point on axis
f5 = x-coordinate of second point on axis
f6 = y-coordinate of second point on axis
f7 = z-coordinate of second point on axis
the 3rd data block.
-19: Node location within a Cylindrical Region
If all nodes of element leave the cylinder, the subdivided elements
are merged together.
The coordinates of the cylinder may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the cylinder
may be automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th
fields of the 3rd data block.
20: Node location within a Spherical Region
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes:
f1 = radius
f2 = x-coordinate of center
f3 = y-coordinate of center
f4 = z-coordinate of center
261 ADAPTIVE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
the 3rd data block.
-20: Node location within Spherical Region
If all nodes of element leave the sphere, the subdivided elements
are merged together.
The coordinates of the sphere may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the sphere may
be automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields
of the 3rd data block.
6-10
2nd
Enter the maximum number of levels to adapt an element.
11-15
3rd
Enter 3 for box associated with criteria 4 or -4 to automatically

follow weld pool.
16-20
4th
Enter the weld flux ID specified in the WELD FLUX option.
21-25
5th
Not used.
26-30
6th
Not used.
31-63
7th
Enter the name of the element set that will use this criteria. Default
is to apply the adaptive criteria to all elements.
Fields 3 and 4 are currently only used for the NODE IN BOX criterion in conjunction with a welding
analysis. Weld pool dimensions should be specified in the WELD FLUX option. Box dimensions
specified in the 4th data block below are not used.
4th data block (except for criteria type 11)
1-10
1st
First parameter f1
11-20
2nd
Second parameter f2
21-30
3rd
Third parameter f3
31-40
4th
Fourth parameter f4
41-50
5th
Fifth parameter f5
ADAPTIVE 262
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
Sixth parameter f6
61-70
7th
Seventh parameter f7
71-80
8th
Eighth parameter f8.
4th data block (criteria type 11)

Include the data file written by the previous analysis (the unit number was specified on the second
data block).
263 ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing
ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing
Description
This model definition set provides control parameters used for the global adaptive remeshing. The
REZONING parameter must also be included in the parameter section.
The ADAPT GLOBAL model definition option can also be used to support boundary conditions assigned
to the remeshing body for 2-D, 3-D solid (tetrahedral) and 3-D shell. When applying boundary
conditions, the new table style input format is preferred.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the words ADAPT GLOBAL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of bodies to be remeshed.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read data; defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Not used.
The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated as a set for each body to be remeshed.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter 2 for Advancing Front 2-D quad or mixed mesher.

Enter 3 for Delaunay 2-D mesher.
Enter 4 for 2-D Overlay mesher.
Enter 5 for 3-D Overlay Hexahedral mesher.
Enter 6 for Delaunay 3-D tetrahedral mesher.
Enter 7 for Relax mesh generator.
Enter 8 for Stretch mesh generator.
Enter 9 for Shave mesh generator.
Enter 10 for quadtree mesher. (Simufact externally supplied)
Enter 11 for MD Patran 3-D tetrahedral meshers.
Enter 12 for triangular shell mesh generator.
Enter 18 for reading new mesh from .mesh file.
Note:
jobid_b*.mesh file name is expected where * is the

remeshing body number and jobid is the job name.
ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) 264

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 19 for quadrilateral shell mesh generator.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to remesh body (default).

Enter 2 if first relax mesh; if that fails, do full remeshing.
Enter 3 if relax mesh only.
11-15
3rd
Enter the body to be remeshed (default = 1).
16-20
4th
Enter the element type; default is to previous element type.

Note:
This element type must also be specified on the

ELEMENTS parameter.
21-25
5th
Enter the number of criteria.
26-30
6h
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Echo mode for Overlay Hexahedral Meshing

0 Default; no message print out.
1 Some message print out.
100 Prints out more messages and saves all the meshing input files. For
details about these files, see Appendix I: 3-D Remeshing Files.
Repeat the 4th block for each criteria (5th field, 3rd data block).
4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter 1 if increment frequency is used.

Enter 2 if element distortion is used (2-D only).
Enter 3 if angle based.
Enter 4 if aspect ratio based.
Enter 5 if strain change.
Enter 6 if penetration based.
Enter 7 if force remeshing at next opportunity.
Enter 8 if recession distance based.
6-10
2nd
Enter the frequency in increments if criteria 1.
11-20
3rd
For criteria 3, enter maximum change in angle from the reference angle
for quadrilaterals. Default is 40. The reference angle is the angle of the
current mesh without deformation. For 3-D analysis, enter minimum
volume ratio for hexahedral element. Default is 0.1.
For criteria 4, enter the maximum aspect ratio allowed. Default is 10.0.
For criteria 5, enter maximum change of equivalent strain allowed before
remeshing occurs.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Default is 0.4.
For criteria 6, enter the penetration limit; default is 2*contact tolerance.
For criteria 8, enter the maximum element side reduction fraction before
remeshing occurs.
If current length divided by the original length < tolerance, remeshing
will occur.
21-30
4th
for triangles. Default is 40. The reference angle is the angle of the current
mesh without deformation.
For 3-D analysis, enter minimum volume ratio for tetrahedral element.
Default is 0.1.
For criteria 8, enter the total amount of recession before remeshing occurs.
5th data block

Two-dimensional Advancing Front All Quadrilateral or Mixed Mesher - Mesher type = 2
1-5
1st
Enter 0 for all quadrilateral mesh.

Enter 1 for mixed quadrilateral/triangular mesh.
Enter 2 for all triangular mesh.
6-15
2nd
Enter the target element size.
16-25
3rd
Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments. (Default = 120)
26-30
4th
Target number of elements after remeshing; default means no such

control.
If both the 2nd and 4th fields are default, the number of elements in the
previous mesh are used.
31-35
5th
Curvature outline control.

Enter number of divisions of line segments to fit a curvature circle.
Default = 36.
Enter -1 to obtain uniform outline points.
36-45
6th
Outline smoothing ratio range 0 - 1.0; default = 0.8.
46-55
7th
Minimum target element size; default = 1/3*target element size.
56-65
8th
Percentage of change allowed for the new number of elements created.

Default means no such control. Total of five remeshing trials will be used
to create the mesh to meet the requirement. Not to be used for the
remeshing with the automatic stop-and-restart option.
66-75
9th
Not used; enter 0.
76-80
10th
Number of local refinement boxes.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

Two-dimensional Delaunay Triangular Mesher - Mesher type = 3
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments (default 120).
26-30
4th

control.
31-35
5th

Default = 36.
36-45
6th
Outline smoothing ratio range 0-1.0; default = 0.8.
46-55
7th
56-65
8th

66-75
9th
Not used; enter 0.
76-80
10th
5th data block

Two-dimensional Overlay Quadrilateral Mesher - Mesher type = 4
1-10
1st
Enter the element target length.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined one level

if necessary.
Enter 2 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined two levels
if necessary.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 if elements in the interior can be merged together. Four elements

at a time will be merged.
21-25
4th

control.
26-30
5th
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
6th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
7th
Not used; enter 0.
51-60
8th

5th data block

Three-dimensional Delaunay Tetrahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 6
1-10
1st
Enter target atom size (A).
11-20
2nd
Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0).

A value of 1 means that all element edges between elements not in the
same plane will be considered a hard edge.
21-30
3rd
Minimum edge length.
31-40
4th
Minimum edge angle.
41-50
5th
Gap distance.
51-55
6th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
7th
Enter 1 for volume control.
5th data block

Relax Mesh Generator - Mesher type = 7
1-5
1st
Enter the number of relaxes to be performed.
6-10
2nd
Enter the global direction to relax in, default is all directions.
11-20
3rd
Enter the sweep distance, nodes closer than this distance will be swept
together.
5th data block

Stretch Generator - Mesher type = 8
1-5
1st
Enter the first corner node number, if zero, then the second field gives the
streamline region that is used to define the stretching orientation.
6-10
2nd
Enter the node increment in first direction, or the streamline

region number.
11-15
3rd
Enter number of nodes in first direction.

Enter the contact body which if nodes contact, they should not be
adjusted, if zero all nodes will be adjusted.
16-20
4th
Enter the node increment in second direction.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Enter the number of nodes in second direction.
26-30
6th
Enter the node increment in third direction (3-D only).
31-35
7th
Enter the number of nodes in third direction (3-D only).
5th data block

Shave Mesh Generator - Mesher type = 9
This 5th data block is not required.
5th data block
Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 11
1-10
1st
Enter target element edge length.
11-20
2nd
Minimum element edge length; default 1/3 of the element edge length.
21-30
3rd
Feature vertex angle; default 100.
31-40
4th
Feature edge angle; default 60.
41-50
5th
Interior coarsening factor; default 1.5 times.
51-55
6th
Number of local refinement boxes; default = 0.
56-60
7th
Enter 1 for volume control; default = 1.
61-65
8th
Curvature refinement control. Enter number of division to fit a curvature

cycle. Default = 0 (no such control).
66-70
9th
Enter number of elements in the target mesh.

Default = 0 (no such control).
71-80
10th
Enter maximum element edge length.

Default = 3*element edge length.
5th data block

Three-dimensional Triangular Shell Mesher - Mesher type = 12
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-55
6th
56-60
7th
Not used; enter 0.
61-65
8th


Format
Fixed
66-70
Free
9th
Data
Entry Entry
I

71-80
10th

5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-55
6th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
7th
Not used; enter 0.
61-65
8th
Not used; enter 0.
66-70
9th

71-80
10th

5th data block

Reading .mesh file - Mesher type = 18
1-10
1st
Enter mesh file type. Default = 3.

Enter 1 for mesh file in .t18 format
Enter 2 for mesh file in .feb format
Enter 3 for mesh file in .dat format (Marc input format)
5th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 5
1-10
1st
Enter target atom size (Ax). For cylindrical grid, Ar.
11-20
2nd
Enter target atom size (Ay). For cylindrical grid, A.
21-30
3rd
Enter target atom size (Az).
31-40
4th
Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0). A value of 1 means
that all element edges between elements not in the same plane will be
considered a hard edge.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
Minimum edge length. If an edge length is less than this value, it will not
be considered as a hard edge.
51-60
6th
Minimum edge angle. If the angle between element faces is less than this
value, the common edge will not be considered as a hard edge.
61-70
7th
Gap distance.
71-75
8th
The template file name is specified on the 9th data block.

Enter 1 if grid-based template
Enter 2 if mesh-based template.
Enter 3 if kernel-based template.
76-80
9th
6th data block

Two-dimensional Advancing Front or Delaunay Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]
Repeat for each box (6th field, 5th data block)
1-5
1st
Enter refinement level.
6-10
2nd
Enter the refinement type:

0 = refinement in box.
11-15
3rd
Body ID 1. If not zero, corner 1 will be attached to this rigid body.
16-20
4th
Body ID 2. If not zero, corner 2 will be attached to this rigid body.
21-30
5th
Enter x coordinate of corner 1.
31-40
6th
Enter y coordinate of corner 1.
41-50
8th
51-60
9th
6th data block

Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
Body ID 1. If not 0, corner 1 will be attached to this rigid body.
16-20
4th
21-30
5th
31-40
6th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
7th
Enter z coordinate of corner 1.
51-60
8th
61-70
9th
71-80
10th
6th data block

Two-dimensional Quadtree Mesher or 3-D Hexahedral Mesher
1-5
1st
Number of boxes used for element refinement; entered on 10th series.
6-10
2nd
Enter number of levels to coarsen (merge) the interior elements.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter 0 for no wedge elements

Enter 1 to allow wedge elements.
Enter to split hexahedral elements.
31-35
7th
Enter 1 to perform shuffle after mesh is snapped to contact surface

(default).
Enter 2 to avoid shuffle.
36-40
8th
Enter 1 for Coons projection in meshing phase. This improves the

accuracy, but increases the cost.
41-45
9th
Number of shakes. Default is 10.
46-50
10th
Number of tries. Default is 5.
51-55
11th
Type of enhancement.
56-60
12th
Edge detection:
Enter 0 to detect new edges and use contact data.
Enter 1 to use contact data only.
Enter 2 to detect new edges.
Enter 3 to not use edge information.
Enter 4 to use previously detected edges, new edges, and contact
information.
Enter 5 to use contact data and previous edges.
Enter 6 to use user edges previously detected and new edges.
Enter 7 to use previous edge information only.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher only
1-5
1st
Grid type:
Enter 1 for Cartesian (default).
Enter 2 for cylindrical.
Enter 3 for user defined.
6-10
2nd
For cylindrical grid:

Enter 1 for axis aligned with x-direction.
Enter 2 for axis aligned with y-direction.
Enter 3 for axis aligned with z-direction.
11-15
3rd
Maximum allowed refinement levels.
16-20
4th
First user-defined integer parameter.
21-25
5th
Second user-defined integer parameter.
26-30
6th
Third user-defined integer parameter.
8th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only [Version 11 only]
1-10
1st
For cylindrical grid, enter the angle of the part.
11-20
2nd
Enter the geometric refinement tolerance.
21-30
3rd
Enter the surface curvature tolerance.
31-40
4th
First user-defined real parameter.
41-50
5th
Second user-defined real parameter.
51-60
6th
Third user-defined real parameter.
9th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only And Template-based Mesh Requested
1-32
1st
Enter the template name.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]
One can either specify that refinement is in a box based upon coordinate positions or between
two bodies.
Repeat for each box (1st field, 6th data block)
1-5
1st
Enter the refinement level.
6-10
2nd

0 = refinement in the box.
1 = minimum number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
2 = minimum number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
3 = minimum number of elements in z-direction between bodies.
4 = exact number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
5 = exact number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
6 = exact number of elements in z-direction between bodies.
11-15
3rd
Body ID 1. If refinement is in the box, corner 1 is attached to this

rigid body
16-20
4th

rigid body
21-30
5th
31-40
6th
41-50
7th
51-60
8th
61-70
9th
71-80
10th
POINTS 274
Define Geometric Points
POINTS
Define Geometric Points
Description
These geometrical entities are used with the ADAPTIVE, ADAPT GLOBAL, or for prescribing boundary
conditions. Finite elements entities are associated with these geometric entities using the ATTACH NODE
options. The use of POINTS with these options has the following consequences:
1. ADAPT GLOBAL, ATTACH NODE
If a node is attached to a point entity, then this point is considered a hard point. Upon remeshing,
a new node will always be located at this point. This facilitates the application of fixed
displacements, point loads, etc.
2. ATTACH NODE and all nodal based boundary conditions
If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the point,
then all nodes attached to the point will have the boundary condition applied.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word POINTS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of points to be defined.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read geometric information, defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to suppress printout of point data.
3rd data block (Repeat for each point)

1-5
1st
Point identifier
6-15
2nd
X-coordinate of point.
16-25
3rd
Y-coordinate of point.
26-35
4th
Z-coordinate of point.
275 CURVES
Define Geometric Curves
CURVES
Description
or ATTACH EDGE options. The use of CURVES with these options has the following consequences:
1. ADAPTIVE, ATTACH NODE, ATTACH EDGE, ELASTIC
If the nodes of an element edge (2-D) are attached to a curve then if this element is subdivided,
the newly created node will be placed on the curve. If ATTACH NODE or ATTACH EDGE are not
used, the newly created nodes are placed midway between the original nodes of this edge (face).
2. ATTACH EDGE and all boundary condition options
Distributed loads, foundations, and films may be applied to curves. All finite elements that have
edges attached to these curves will be appropriately loaded.
If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the curve,
then all nodes that are attached to the curve will have the boundary condition applied.
4. ADAPT GLOBAL
If boundary conditions are applied to a curve, then, when a new mesh is created using ADAPT
GLOBAL, the edges are reattached to the curves automatically and the boundary conditions are
correctly applied.
5. CAVITY
The CAVITY option may use curves defined here as symmetry surfaces.
You can either directly enter the coordinates/dimensions of the curves or define geometric point entities
and then reference these point entities using negative curve types. In the following pages, this is called
relational input and is available for 2-D Polylines, Circular Arc, Circle, 2-D NURBS (internally
generated). This is the preferred input style.
Orientation
A curve has an orientation associated with it. This has three consequences:
1. If a table has an independent value of arc length and elements are attached to this curve. The
arc length is a monotonically increasing function which has a value of zero at the beginning of
the curve.
CURVES 276
2. If an axisymmetric shell or 2-D beam is attached to the curve, and a distributed boundary
condition is applied to the curve, then
for mechanical loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is in the direction opposite to the normal,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is in the direction of the normal.
for thermal loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is a flux added to the first degree of freedom,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is a flux added to the last degree of freedom.
3. A radiating cavity has an orientation based upon the normal to the surface.
The normal to a curve is based upon the right-hand rule relative to the direction of the curve.
When specifying the top and bottom surfaces of a curve, the following format is used in the ATTACH
EDGE, DIST LOADS, FILMS, FOUNDATION, EMISSIVITY, and CAVITY options.
Marc
Mentat
top
bottom
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word CURVES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of curves to be defined.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read geometric information; defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to suppress printout of curve data.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Curve identifier
6-10
2nd
Enter the curve type:

1: 3-D Polyline
2: 2-D Circular Arc
3: 2-D Circle
4: 2-D NURBS Curve (full description)
277 CURVES
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5: 2-D NURBS Curve (internally generate)
6: 3-D Trimming Curve
If the curve type is a negative number, it uses relational input format.
A. CURVE TYPE 1 FOR 3-D POLYLINE

For nonrelational input, use data block series 4a and 5a. For relational input, use data block 4b.
4a data block
1-5
1st
Number of points on polyline.
5a data block (nonrelational input)

Enter the coordinate points, one per line.
1-10
1st
X-coordinate.
11-20
2nd
Y-coordinate.
21-30
3rd
Z-coordinate.
5b data block (relational input)

Enter a list of point identifiers making up the polyline.
B. CURVE TYPE 2 FOR 2-D CIRCULAR ARC (in x-y plane)
1-10
1st
X-coordinate of starting point.
11-20
2nd
Y-coordinate of starting point.
21-30
3rd
X-coordinate of ending point.
31-30
4th
Y-coordinate of ending point.
41-50
5th
X-coordinate of center.
51-60
6th
Y-coordinate of center.
61-70
7th
Radius.

1-5
1st
Enter point identifier of starting point.
6-10
2nd
Enter point identifier of ending point.
11-15
3rd
Enter point identifier of center.
C. CURVE TYPE 3 FOR 2-D CIRCLE (in x-y plane)

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Radius.
CURVES 278
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

1-5
1st
Enter point identifier of center.
6-10
2nd
Enter point identifier of point whose first coordinate is the radius.
D. CURVE TYPE 4 FOR 2-D NURBS - FULL DESCRIPTION

4th data block
1-5
1st
Number of control points (NPU).
6-10
2nd
Order of NURBS (NOU).
5th data block

Enter NPU homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.
6th data block
Enter (NPU plus NOU) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.
Enter the physical coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (3 coordinates). There should
be NPU lines.
1-10
1st
X-coordinate of control point.
11-20
2nd
Y-coordinate of control point.
21-30
3rd
Z-coordinate of control point.

Enter NPU point identifiers in I5 format (16 per line); use as many lines as necessary.
E. CURVE TYPE 5 FOR 2-D NURBS - INTERNALLY GENERATED
For nonrelational input, use data block series 4a and 5a. For relational input, use data block 4b
4a data block
1-5
1st
Number of control points (NPU); minimum number is four.
5a data block
Enter the physical coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (3 coordinates). There should
be NPU lines.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
4b data block
Enter a list of control point identifiers; minimum number is four.
279 CURVES
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
F. CURVE TYPE 6 FOR 3-D TRIMMNG CURVE

4th data block
1-5
1st
Number of control points (NPU).
6-10
2nd
Order of NURBS (NOU).
5th data block

Enter NPU homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.
6th data block
Enter (NPU plus NOU) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.
Enter the physical parametric and coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (5 coordinates).
There should be NPU lines.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
30-40
4th
Enter first parametric coordinate with respect to the surface that this curve
trims.
41-50
5th
Enter second parametric coordinate.

For point identifiers and parametric coordinates with respect to the surface that this curve trims. There
should be NPU lines.
1-5
1st
Enter point identifier.
6-15
2nd
Enter first parametric coordinate with respect to the surface that this
curve trims.
SURFACES 280
Define Geometrical Surfaces
SURFACES
Description
or ATTACH FACE options. The use of CURVES with these options has the following consequences:
1. ADAPTIVE, ATTACH NODE, ATTACH FACE, ELASTIC
If the nodes of an element face (3-D) are attached to a surface then if this element is subdivided,
the newly created node will be placed on the surface. If ATTACH NODE or ATTACH FACE are
not used, the newly created nodes are placed midway between the original nodes of this face.
2. ATTACH FACE and all boundary condition options
Distributed loads, foundations, and films may be applied to surfaces. All finite elements that have
faces attached to these surfaces will be appropriately loaded.
If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the surface,
then all nodes that are attached to the surface will have the boundary condition applied.
4. The CAVITY option may use surfaces defined here to define symmetry surfaces.
You can either directly enter the coordinates/dimensions of the surfaces or define geometric point entities
and then reference these point entities, use negative surface types. In the following pages, this is called
relational input and is available for Plane, Sphere, Cylinder, 3-D NURBS (internally generated), and
Polysurface. This is the preferred input style.
Orientation
A curve has an orientation associated with it. This has three consequences:
1. If a table has an independent value of arc length and elements are attached to this curve. The arc
length is a monotonically increasing function which has a value of zero at the beginning of the
curve.
2. If an axisymmetric shell or 2-D beam is attached to the curve, and a distributed boundary
condition is applied to the curve, then
for mechanical loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is in the direction opposite to the normal,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is in the direction of the normal.
for thermal loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is a flux added to the first DOF,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is a flux added to the last DOF.
3. A radiating cavity has an orientation based upon the normal to the surface.
281 SURFACES
The normal to a curve is based upon the right hand rule relative to the direction of the curve.
When specifying the top and bottom surfaces of a curve, the following format is used in the ATTACH
FACE, DIST LOADS, FILMS, FOUNDATION, EMISSIVITY, and CAVITY options.
Marc
Mentat
top
bottom
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word SURFACES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of surfaces to be defined.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read geometric information; defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to suppress printout of surface data.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Surface identifier
6-10
2nd
Enter the surface type:

1: Plane
2: Sphere
3: Cylinder
4: NURBS Surface (full description)
5: NURBS Surface (internally generate)
6: 3-D Polysurface
If the surface type is a negative number, it uses relational input format.
A. SURFACE TYPE 1 FOR PLANE

Enter coordinates at four points; one point per line.
1-10
1st
X-coordinate.
11-20
2nd
Y-coordinate.
21-30
3rd
Z-coordinate.
SURFACES 282
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

1-5
1st
Enter the first point identifier.
6-10
2nd
Enter the second point identifier.
11-15
3rd
Enter the third point identifier.
16-20
4th
Enter the fourth point identifier.
B. SURFACE TYPE 2 FOR SPHERE

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Z-coordinate of center.
31-40
4th
Radius.

1-5
1st
Enter the point identifier of the center.
6-10
2nd
Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius.
C. SURFACE TYPE 3 FOR CYLINDER/CONE

1-10
1st
X-coordinate of starting point on axis.
11-20
2nd
Y-coordinate of starting point on axis.
21-30
3rd
Z-coordinate of starting point on axis.
31-40
4th
Radius at starting point.
41-50
5th
X-coordinate of ending point on axis.
51-60
6th
Y-coordinate of ending point on axis.
61-70
7th
Z-coordinate of ending point on axis.
71-80
8th
Radius at ending point.

1-5
1st
Enter the point identifier of the starting point on the axis.
6-10
2nd
Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius at
the start point.
11-15
3rd
Enter the point identifier of the endpoint on the axis.
16-20
4th
Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius at
the endpoint.
283 SURFACES
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
D. SURFACE TYPE 4 FOR 3-D NURBS FULL DESCRIPTION

4th data block
1-5
1st
Number of control points in first direction (NPU).
6-10
2nd
Order of NURBS in first direction (NOU).
11-15
3rd
Number of control points in second direction (NPV).
16-20
4th
Order of NURBS in second direction (NOV).
21-25
5th
Enter the number of trimming curves (NTRIM).
5th data block

Enter NPU times NPV homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as
necessary. The homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.
6th data block
Enter (NPU plus NOU) plus (NPV plus NOV) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many
lines as necessary. The components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.
Enter the physical coordinates of NPU times NPV control points 1 control point per line
(3 coordinates). There should be NPU times NPV lines.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Enter NPU times NPV point identifiers of the control points in I5 format
(16 per line); use as many lines as necessary.
8th data block
Enter NTRIM curve identifiers in I5 format (16 per line); use as many
lines as necessary. Note these curves should have previously defined
using the CURVES model definition option with a curve type of six.
E. SURFACE TYPE 5 FOR 3-D NURBS INTERNALLY GENERATED
4th data block
1-5
1st
Number of control points in first direction (NPU).

Minimum is 4.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Number of control points in second direction (NPV).

Minimum is 4.
SURFACES 284
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

Enter the physical coordinates of NPU times NPV control points 1 control point per line
(3 coordinates). There should be NPU times NPV lines.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Enter NPV lists of control point identifiers. Each list must have
NPU points.
F. SURFACE TYPE 6 FOR 3-D POLYSURFACE
For 3-D polysurface, use the 4a, 5a, and 6a data blocks for nonrelational input.
For 3-D polysurface, use the 4b and 5b data blocks for relational input.
4a data block
1-5
1st
Number of Polygons.
6-10
2nd
Number of Polygon vertices.
5a data block
The 5a data block is repeated for each polygon.
1-5
1st
Polygon ID.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
First vertex ID.
16-20
4th
Second vertex ID.
21-25
5th
Third vertex ID.
26-30
6th
Fourth vertex ID (if zero, then polygon is a triangle).
6a data block
The 6a data block is repeated for each vertex point.
1-5
1st
Vertex ID.
6-15
2nd
Enter the X-coordinate of vertex.
16-25
3rd
Enter the Y-coordinate of vertex.
26-35
4th
Enter the Z-coordinate of vertex.
Number of polygons.
4b data block
1-5
1st
285 SURFACES
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5b data block
The 5b data block is repeated for each polygon.
1-5
1st
Polygon ID.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Enter point identifier for first vertex of polygon.
16-20
4th
Enter point identifier for second vertex of polygon.
21-25
5th
Enter point identifier for third vertex of polygon.
26-30
6th
Enter point identifier for fourth vertex of polygon.

If zero, this polygon is a triangle.
STRING 286
Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation
STRING
The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the
TABLE parameter to activate this input option.
Description
This option allows the user to associates a number of curves together, in a fixed order so that a continuous
arc length may be created. This arc length could be used as an independent variable in the TABLE option.
Note that the curves themselves do not need to match coordinates at their endpoints. The STRING option
indicates that they are topologically continuous.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word STRING.
Enter the number of strings.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated for each string.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the string ID.
Enter a list of curves in the string. List must be in correct order.
4th data block

1-80
1st
List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.

As an example; given three parts with six curves, the string option could be used.
287 STRING
String
2,
1,
1,3,5,
2,
2,4,6,
For the outer surface (string number 1), the cap has a radius r = 1.0, so for points along curve 1, the
arc length goes from 0. to 1.5708, along curve 3 from 1.5708 to 2.5708, and along curve 5 from 2.5708
to 3.0707.
ATTACH NODE 288

Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces
ATTACH NODE
Description
This option allows you to attach nodes to a point, curve, or surface. This option is used for ADAPTIVE
meshing and/or application of boundary conditions. When used in conjunction with adaptive mesh
analysis, if two points on an edge of an element are attached to a curve or surface, any new points created
by the adaptive procedure are placed on the curve. This improves the geometric modeling.
Note:
In the case of Updated Lagrange or if no surface is defined, the new nodes are placed
midway between the previous nodes.
When used with boundary conditions if a nodal load (POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc.) is applied to a
point/curve/surface, the nodes attached to this point/curve/surface will all receive this same load.
If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a
point/curve/surface, the nodes attached to this point/curve/surface will be constrained to satisfy
this condition.
To utilize this option for the application of boundary conditions, the table driven boundary condition
input must be used. See the TABLE parameter on how to activate this input option.
Note that nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of the
nodes attached to the curve have local systems, the user may need to exercise caution.
A node can be attached to as many as three surfaces; any additional surfaces are ignored.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ATTACH NODE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of data sets.
6-10
2nd
Repeat the third and possibly the fourth data block as often as necessary. You can enter a point ID, curve
ID, or a surface ID on the 3rd data block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the node number if a zero is entered, the 4th data block will be used.
6-10
2nd
Enter a point ID.
289 ATTACH NODE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
Enter a curve ID.
16-20
4th
Enter a surface ID.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes which are attached to this curve or surface.
ATTACH EDGE 290

Define the Element Edges which are attached to Curves
ATTACH EDGE
Define the Element Edges which are attached to Curves
Description
This option allows you to attach an element edge to a curve. This option is used in conjunction with the
CURVES option.
To utilize this option, the table driven boundary condition input must be used. See the TABLE parameter
on how to activate this input option.
curve, the nodes which define the edge that are attached to the curve will all receive this same load.
If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a curve, the
nodes which define the edges that are attached to the curve will be constrained to satisfy this condition.
When a distributed load (DIST LOADS, DIST FLUXES, etc.) is applied to a curve, the distributed load
will be applied to the element edges attached the curve.
Note:
Nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of
the nodes which define edges that are attached to the curve have local systems, the user
may need to exercise caution.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ATTACH EDGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter 0, if face given using Marc convention.

Enter 1, if face given using Marc Mentat convention.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter curve identifier.
Enter a list of element: edge pairs which are attached to this curve.
4th data block

1-80
1st
291 ATTACH FACE

Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces
ATTACH FACE
Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces
Description
This option allows you to attach an element face to a surface. This option is used in conjunction with the
SURFACES option.
To utilize this option, the table driven boundary condition input must be used. See the TABLE parameter
on how to activate this input option.
surface, the nodes which define the faces that are attached to the surface will all receive this same load.
If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a surface,
the nodes which define the faces that are attached to the surface will be constrained to satisfy
this condition.
When a distributed load (DIST LOADS, DIST FLUXES, etc.) is applied to a surface, the distributed load
will be applied to the element faces attached the surface.
Note that nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of
the nodes which define faces that are attached to the surface have local systems, the user may need to
exercise caution.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ATTACH FACE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter 0, if face given using Marc convention.

Enter 1, if face given using Marc Mentat convention.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter surface identifier.
Enter a list of element: face pairs which are attached to this surface.
4th data block

1-80
1st
GEOMETRY 292
Specify Geometrical Data
GEOMETRY
Description
The element geometry is specified in distinct sets. The information required varies from one element type
to another. As a rule, the thickness of shell elements is given in the first defined variable (EGEOM1). The
geometry for a particular element can be defined repeatedly and only the last data is used. This feature is
designed for local variations of geometric data.
The GEOMETRY option is unnecessary if the element description does not require either EGEOM1,
EGEOM2, or EGEOM3. (See Marc Volume B: Element Library).
Notes:
The NODAL THICKNESS model definition option can also be used for the input of
beam/shell thickness.
For beam elements, the eighth data variable (EGEOM8) is used to indicate the use of offsets,
pin codes, and coordinate system to define local x-axis. Activating this flag requires the
input of additional data blocks (4 and/or 5a).
For shell elements, the eighth data variable (EGEOM8) is used to indicate shell offsets.
Activating this flag requires the input of the 5b data block.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the word GEOMETRY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of distinct sets of element geometries to be input (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of geometry defaults to input.
3rd data block

Element geometries. The 3rd through 6th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.
1-10
1st
EGEOM1
11-20
2nd
EGEOM2
21-30
3rd
EGEOM3
31-40
4th
EGEOM4
41-50
5th
EGEOM5
51-60
6th
EGEOM6
61-70
7th
EGEOM7
293 GEOMETRY
Format
Fixed
71-80
Free
8th
Data
Entry Entry
F
EGEOM8
For beam and shells, EGEOM8 is the negative of the sum of three numbers
= -(ioffset + iorien + ipin)
ioffset
0 no offsets.
1 offsets with beams; include the 5a data block.
2 offsets with shells; include the 5b data block.
iorien
0 conventional definition of local beam orientation,

beam axis given in 4th through 6th field in global
system.
10 the local beam orientation is given with respect to the
coordinate system of the first beam node.
ipin
0 no pin codes are used.

100 pin codes are used; include the 4th data block.
Notes:
iorien and ipin are only valid for beam elements.
See library element descriptions in Quick Reference of Marc Volume B:

Element Library for the meaning of EGEOM1, etc. for each element type.
4th data block
Necessary only if ipin = 100
1-5
1st
Enter the pin code associated with the first node of the beam.
6-10
2nd
Enter the pin code associated with the second node of the beam.
The degrees of freedom are defined in the elements coordinate system and
the pin flags are applied at the offset ends of the beam.
The pin code is a packed integer of up to five unique integers 1 through 6
with no embedded blanks.
5a data block
Necessary only if ioffset = 1
1-10
1st
X component of offset vector at beam node 1
11-20
2nd
Y component of offset vector at beam node 1
21-30
3rd
Z component of offset vector at beam node 1
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
GEOMETRY 294
Format
Fixed
61-65
66-70
71-75
Free
7th
8th
9th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Interpolation flag for higher-order beams

0
no interpolation of offset vector for midside node (Offset

vector at midside node set to 0.).
linear interpolation of offset vector for midside node
Coordinate system flag for offset vector at beam node 1

0
vector in global coordinate system.
vector in element coordinate system.
vector along associated shell normal at node.
vector in local coordinate system at node 1.

0
vector in global coordinate system
vector in element coordinate system.
vector along associated shell normal at node.
vector in local coordinate system at node 2.
5b data block
1-10
1st
Offset magnitude at corner node 1
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-45
5th
Interpolation flag for higher-order shells
46-50
6th
no interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes.
linear interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes
Constant Offset flag

0
offset magnitude is variable. Four data fields are used to

specify offset magnitudes at corner nodes.
offset magnitude is constant. First data field is used to specify

offset magnitudes at corner nodes.
6th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above geometry is applied.
295 GEOMETRY
Notes:
For elements 7, 10, 11, and 19, enter 1 in the EGEOM2 field to activate the constant dilatation
option. This improves the behavior of the element for nearly incompressible analysis. See
Marc Volume B: Element Library for further details.
For elements 3, 7, and 11, enter 1 in the EGEOM3 field to activate the assumed strain
formulation. This improves the element bending behavior. This is an alternative to the
ASSUMED STRAIN parameter.
For elements 109 and 110, the penalty factor used to add the constraint for the vector
potential (Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information) to the set of equations for
magnetostatic calculations can be set in the EGEOM2 field.
In 3-D magnetostatic analyses, a penalty factor can be set which controls an extra
constraint in the vector potential formulation (Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information). Use EGEOM7 for linear elements (109, 110, 181, and 204) and EGEOM8 for
quadratic elements (182, 205, and 206).
For element 185, enter a value greater than 0 and less than 1 in the EGEOM5 field to scale
down the transverse shear modulus for homogenous material (a common value is 5/6).
Beam offset capability is possible for elements 5, 14, 25, 36, 45, 52, 65, 76, 77, 78, 79, 98.
Enter -1 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4a data block. See Marc
Volume B: Element Library for further details.
The components of the local x-axis for beam elements are entered in the EGEOM4-EGEOM6
fields. These components can be entered in the global Cartesian coordinate system
(default) or in a local coordinate system. In the latter case, the local coordinate system used
to define the beam x-axis is flagged through the EGEOM8 field and is taken to be the
coordinate system defined at the first nodal point of the beam element using the
TRANSFORMATION, CYLINDRICAL, or COORD SYSTEM options. Enter -10 or -11 in the
EGEOM8 field to indicate that the fields EGEOM4-EGEOM6 are in the local coordinate system.
If EGEOM8 is -11, it further indicates that the beam elements are offset and that the nodal
offset vectors are provided via the 4a data block.
Shell offset capability is possible for elements 1, 22, 50, 75, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 138, 139,
140. Enter -2 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4b data block. See Marc
NODAL THICKNESS 296

Define Nodal Thickness
NODAL THICKNESS
Define Nodal Thickness
Description
This option allows you to specify beam or shell thicknesses on a nodal basis. Interpolation to the element
integration points is automatically taken care of using the element displacement shape functions as
discussed for each element in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
Notes:
If you specify element thicknesses for an element using the GEOMETRY model definition
option, that data is used instead of the NODAL THICKNESS data input here. Also note that
for composite elements, if you give the actual layer thicknesses, the sum of these layer
thicknesses overrides both GEOMETRY data and NODAL THICKNESS data. If you input
percentages of total thickness in the COMPOSITE data, then GEOMETRY data (or, if no
GEOMETRY, then NODAL THICKNESS data from this option) is used.
Since the NODAL THICKNESS option allows input of only one thickness per node,
thickness discontinuities must be input using GEOMETRY.
See Marc Volume B: Element Library for elements which use nodal thicknesses.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NODAL THICKNESS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of data sets used to input nodal thickness values. The UTHICK
user subroutine can be used for modifying NODAL THICKNESS values.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of nodal thicknesses. Defaults to

input deck.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter nodal thickness value
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes associated with the nodal thickness given above.
297 ACTUATOR
Define the Length of the Actuator Link
ACTUATOR
Description
This option can be used in conjunction with the truss element type 9 to simulate an actuator. This is often
used in mechanism analyses to allow the prescription of the relative distance between two points. This
option should be used with the LARGE DISP parameter whenever large rotations of the actuator or large
displacements are anticipated.
The original length of the actuator is given in the fourth field of the GEOMETRY option. The actuator is
treated as an elastic link.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ACTUATOR.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of actuators (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of actuator data.

Defaults to input.
3rd data block

Repeat for each actuator to be modified.
1-5
1st
Enter the element number
6-15
2nd
Enter the new length of the actuator.
16-20
3rd
Enter the table ID for the length of the actuator.
TRANSFORMATION 298
Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation
TRANSFORMATION
Description
This option defines nodal coordinates for calculation of a direction cosine matrix, which is then used for
transforming the global degrees of freedom of a specified node to a new local coordinate system.
This block can be used to set up local coordinate systems at a number of flagged nodes, for application
of boundary conditions in a transformed system, or for printout purposes. Five points should be noted:
1. The displacements and loads or reactions are output in the transformed system at such nodes.
2. The transformation is done on all Cartesian displacements. Thus, for the shell elements, the
derivative degrees of freedom become the derivative of the transformed displacements with
respect to the original surface coordinate system.
3. Transformations are assumed to be orthogonal.
4. All kinematic conditions such as boundary conditions, initial displacements, initial velocity and
ties at that node must be input in the transformed system.
5. All concentrated nodal loads must be applied in the transformed system.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-14
1st
Enter the word TRANSFORMATION.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of distinct sets of transformations data to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of transformation data, defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to suppress printout of transformation data.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th
Node number. Enter 0 to read a list of nodes. See 4th data block.
Global coordinates of a first point A such that the vector from this point
to the node is direction 1 of the local coordinate system. (See Figure 3-1a.)
299 TRANSFORMATION
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
36-45
5th
46-55
6th
56-66
7th
Global coordinates of a second point, such that this point, the first point,
and the node define the 1-2 plane of the local coordinate system.
Direction 2 of the local coordinate system will be constructed
perpendicular to direction 1 such that this second point has a positive 2
coordinate in the local 1-2 plane.
See Figure 3-1b Three-dimensional Analysis). Direction 3 of the
local coordinate system is given by a cross product of direction 1 with
direction 2.
4th data block

Include only if the first field in the 3rd data block is 0.
Enter a list of nodes for which the above transformation is applied.
Note that for elements in a plane (for example,; 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 15,
16, 17, 19, etc.) only the first two coordinates of the first point (cols. 6-15
and 16-25) need be supplied.
See Figure 3-1.
TRANSFORMATION 300
TRANSFORMATION
1,
Local 1
Local 2
N,xA,yA,xB,yB
Point B
Node N
Point A
X
(a) Two-dimensional Analysis
Plane defined by Node N,
Point A, and Point B
TRANSFORMATION
1,
N,xA,yA,zA,xB,yB,zB
Point B
Local 2
Local 1
Node N
Y
Local 3 (= Local 1 x Local 2)
Point A
X
(b) Three-dimensional Analysis
Figure 3-1
Transformation Option
301 COORD SYSTEM

Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom
COORD SYSTEM
Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and

Degrees of Freedom
Description
This option allows you to specify that the coordinates of a node are with respect to a local coordinate
system. This is consistent with the CP identification number on the MD Nastran GRID Bulk Data Entry.
This option also allows you to specify the nodal coordinate system of the degrees of freedom. This is
consistent with the CD identification number on the MD Nastran GRID Bulk Data Entry. The coordinate
systems defined here are similar to the MD Nastran CORD1R, CORD1C, CORD1S, CORD2R, CORD2C,
and CORD2S options. Note that the data entered here should not be changed upon restart. Similar to the
use of the TRANSFORMATION option, the following points should be noted:
1. The displacements and loads or reactions are output in the transformed system at such nodes.
2. The transformation is done on all Cartesian displacements. Thus, for the shell elements, the
derivative degrees of freedom become the derivative of the transformed displacements with
respect to the original surface coordinate system.
3. All kinematic conditions such as fixed displacement, initial displacements, initial velocity and ties
at that node must be input in the transformed system.
4. All concentrated nodal loads must be applied in the transformed system.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words COORD SYSTEM.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of coordinate systems (not required).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number of read data; defaults to input file.
Enter coordinate system type:
3rd data block

1-6
1st
CORD1C
CORD1R
CORD1S
CORD2C
CORD2R
CORD2S
COORD SYSTEM 302

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 if coordinates defined are with respect to the coordinate system.

Enter 0 if coordinate data is not transformed based on this
coordinate system.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 if degrees of freedom are to be transformed based upon this

coordinate system.
Enter 0 if degrees of freedom are not to be transformed.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 if transformation is to be updated based upon the deformation of

nodes G1A, G2A, and G3A for coordinate systems CORD1C, CORD1R,
and CORD1S.
This option should only be used with table-driven boundary conditions.
Repeat 4a and 7th data block for each CORD1:coordinate system.

4a data block
Used if coordinate system type is CORD1C, CORD1R, or CORD1S; see Remarks.
1-5
1st
Enter coordinate system identification number; must be unique. Same as

MD Nastran CIDA.
6-10
2nd
Enter first node number ID; same as MD Nastran G1A.
11-15
3rd
Enter second node number ID; same as MD Nastran G2A.
16-20
4th
Enter third node number ID; same as MD Nastran G3A.
Repeat 4b, 5th, 6th, and 7th data block for each CORD2:coordinate system
4b data block
Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S; see Remarks.
1-5
1st
Enter coordinate system identification number; must be unique. Same as

MD Nastran CID.
6-10
2nd
Enter the coordinate system that points given below are with respect to.
Default is the global coordinate system. This is the same as MD
Nastran RID.
5th data block

Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S.
1-10
1st
First coordinate of point A.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of point A.
21-30
3rd
Third coordinate of point A.
31-40
4th
First coordinate of point B.
41-50
5th
Second coordinate of point B.
51-60
6th
Third coordinate of point B.
303 COORD SYSTEM

Format
Fixed
Data
Entry Entry
Free
6th data block

Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S.
1-10
1st
First coordinate of point C.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of point C.
21-30
3rd
Third coordinate of point C.
7th data block

Enter a list of node numbers to which this system is to be applied.
Remarks
CORD1C
z
uz
G2
G3
u
P
G1
ur
R
Figure 3-2
CORDIC Definition
1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the coordinate
system being defined. The first point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis, and the third lies
in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not
coincident.
2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-2) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , Z) where
is measured in degrees.
3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are dependent on the location of P as shown above
by u r u u z .
4. It is recommended that points on the z-axis only have their z-displacement directions defined in
this coordinate system.
COORD SYSTEM 304

CORD1R
z
uz
G2
P
G3
uy
G1
ux
y
X
Figure 3-3
CORD1R Definition
1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the coordinate
in the x-z plane. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not coincident.
2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-3) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).
3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by u x u u u z .
CORD1S
z
G2
ur
P
G3
G1
x
y
Figure 3-4
CORD1S Definition
1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with a definition that does not involve the coordinate
in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not
coincident.
2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-4) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , ) where
and are measured in degrees.
305 COORD SYSTEM

by u r u u .
CORD2C
z
uz
u
P
C
A
ur
Figure 3-5
CORD2C Definition
1. The three points [(A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), (C1, C2, C3)] must be unique and noncolinear.
Noncolinearity is checked by the geometry processor. The first point defines the origin. The
second point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin.
The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
2. If RID is zero or blank, the basic coordinate system is used.
3. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-5) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , Z), where
is measured in degrees.
by u r u u z .
COORD SYSTEM 306

CORD2R
z
uz
uy
C
A
ux
y
X
Figure 3-6
CORD2R Definition
second defines the direction of the z-axis. The third point defines a vector which, with the z-axis,
defines the x-z plane. The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
3. The location of a grid point (P in the Figure 3-6) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).
4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown by u x u y u z .
CORD2S
z
B
ur
C
A
x
y
Figure 3-7
CORD2S Definition
second point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin.
The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
307 COORD SYSTEM

3. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-7) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , ), where
and are measured in degrees.
4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by u r u u .
5. It is recommended that points on the z-axis not have their displacement directions defined in this
coordinate system.
SHELL TRANSFORMATION 308

Define Shell Transformation
Define Shell Transformation
Description
This option allows you to transform the global degrees of freedom of (doubly curved) shells or beams to
local degrees of freedom. It facilitates the input of boundary conditions, point loads and bending
moments. A more detailed description of this capability is given in Marc Volume A: User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-20
1st
Enter the words SHELL TRANSFORMATION.
Number of data sets to be input (optional).
Unit number from which input is to be read (defaults to input).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Transformation type (see Marc Volume A: User Information).

Transformation type 1 is used for beam elements 15, 16, and 17.
Transformation types 2 to 4 are used for shell elements 4, 8 and 24.
6-15
2nd
First component of t vector in surface1 - 2 coordinate system. Only

needed for transformation types 2 and 4.
16-25
3rd
Second component of t vector in surface1 - 2 coordinate system. Only

needed for transformation types 2 and 4.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above displacements are applied.
309 UTRANFORM
Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS
UTRANFORM
Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS
Description
This option allows you to transfer the global degrees of freedom to local degrees of freedom. This is done
through the UTRANS user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note:
This option should not be used on boundary nodes which can come into contact with rigid
surfaces in a contact analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-9
1st
Enter the word UTRANFORM.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of data sets to be input.
6-10
2nd
Unit number from which input is to be read.

Defaults to input.
The 3rd data block is entered once for each data set.
3rd data block
Enter list of node numbers to which user transformations are applied.
CYCLIC SYMMETRY 310

Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure
CYCLIC SYMMETRY
Description
This option is used to define data for a structure possessing cyclic symmetry, which means that the
geometry and the loading vary periodically around a symmetry axis. This type of structure can be
effectively analyzed by modeling only one section and applying the proper multipoint constraint
equations to account for the cyclic symmetry. By defining the symmetry axis and the sector angle, the
Marc program sets up the constraint equations automatically. Additionally, the rigid body rotation around
the symmetry axis can be automatically suppressed.
Note:
Cyclic Symmetry is:

a. valid for only the continuum elements. However, the presence of beams and shells is
allowed, but there is no connection of shells to shells, so the shell part can, for example,
be a turbine blade and the volume part can be a turbine rotor. The blade is connected
to the rotor and if there are 20 blades, 1/20 of the rotor is modeled and one complete
blade.
b. valid for nonlinear static analysis including remeshing as well as coupled analysis.
c. invalid for pure heat transfer.
d. valid for all analysis involving contact. This option can be combined with the
CONTACT option. In this case, both sides of the cyclic symmetry sectors need to
belong to the same contact body.
Note:
If used with contact and the element is not in a contact body, it is not
detected as being on a symmetry surface.
e. valid also for: eigenvalue analysis such as buckling or modal analysis, harmonic
analysis, and transient dynamic analysis. However, there are restrictions in the case of
modal analysis which are described in more detail in Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information, Chapter 9, Cyclic Symmetry.
f. valid only if used in a non-contact analysis with a mixture of element types. If a
combination of beam, shell, linear continuum and/or quadratic continuum elements is
present and contact is not used in the model, exit 61 is issued. To overcome this
problem, two different contact bodies must be defined: one consisting of only the
linear continuum elements and one consisting of only the quadratic continuum
elements. Shell and/or beam elements do not have to be a part of any contact body (see
a. above). Only the elements belonging to the cyclically symmetric sector need to be
in a contact body. In order to prevent unwanted contact items (CPU due to unneeded
contact search, unwanted contacting nodes, etc.), turn off the normal Marc contact
calculations by defining an empty contact table. In this case, both sides of every cyclic
symmetry sector should belong to the same body, so that it is impossible to model one
side with linear continuum elements and the other side of the sector with quadratic
continuum elements.
311 CYCLIC SYMMETRY

Note (cont.): g. When using CYCLIC SYMMETRY in 3-D, tetrahedral elements must be used if the
body is to be remeshed.
h. If used with the SPLINE option, the ' continuity is not applied between across the
symmetry planes.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words CYCLIC SYMMETRY.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
First component of the direction cosine of symmetry axis.
11-20
2nd
Second component of the direction cosine of symmetry axis.
21-30
3rd
Third component of the direction cosine of symmetry axis.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
X-coordinate of point on symmetry axis.
11-20
2nd
Y-coordinate of point on symmetry axis.
21-30
3rd
Z-coordinate of point on symmetry axis.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Cyclic angle (in degrees).
11-20
2nd
Cyclic Symmetry Tolerance. Default is 0.5 times of the minimum

element size.
Enter:
5th data block

1-5
1st
-1 To automatically suppress rigid body mode.

This automatic suppression is applied to a single node only. So if
there are multiple unconnected groups of elements having a rigid
body rotation around the axis of symmetry, it is the users
responsibility to define a sufficient number of kinematic boundary
conditions.
0 To have no suppression.
>0 To suppress at node number given.
CYCLIC SYMMETRY 312

Format
Fixed
6-10
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Linearization flag; to be used if a cyclic symmetric structure consists of

quadratic elements:
1 The outer boundary of the structure is described based on the
corner nodes only. Multipoint constraints due to cyclic symmetry
are not assigned to midside nodes. Instead, they are linearly tied
to the corresponding corner nodes.
-1 The outer boundary of the structure is described using a quadratic
field. Due to cyclic symmetry, full quadratic multipoint
constraints are set up; they are assigned both to corner and
midside nodes.
The default value is 1.
11-15
3rd
Procedure used to impose the cyclic symmetry constraints:

0 Multipoint constraint equations (default).
1 Augmented Lagrangians.
16-20
4th
Augmentation method (used only if the 3rd field of this data block is 1):
0 No augmentation (default).
1 Augmentation procedure based on a constant penetration field for
linear elements and a bi-linear field for quadratic elements.
2 Augmentation procedure based on a constant penetration field.
3 Augmentation procedure based on a bi-linear penetration field.
21-30
5th
Penalty factor (only used if the 3rd field of this data block is 1).
31-40
6th
Penetration distance beyond which the augmentation procedure is applied

(only used if the 3rd field of this data block is 1).
313 TYING
Define Tying Constraints
TYING
Description
This option is used to define homogeneous constraints. Constraints are defined by specifying a tied node
and one or more associated retained nodes. Further details are provided in Marc Volume A: User
Information. Special types of tying can be obtained using the UFORMSN user subroutine (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
A rigid link for either small deformation or large deformation can be implemented by using tying type
80 or using RBE2.
To obtain tying constraint based on updated current coordinates, add 1000 to tying type code. For tying
type associated with user derived tying (UFORMSN), subtract 1000 from tying type code.
Tying type 100 may be used to constrain all degrees of freedom of one node to another node. This may
be used for heat transfer shells as well.
In a coupled thermal-mechanical analysis during the heat transfer subincrements, tying type 1 is used for
all tying types except 31, 32, 33, 34, and 69.
It is possible to have a tying constraint equation to be active for only selective passes in a
multiphysics analysis.
A tying constraint always consists of a tied node (removed from the system) and one or more retained
nodes (which remain in the system). Each tying constraint is specified by a series of two data blocks (data
blocks 3 and 3a).
If a sequence of similar tying types must be specified, a list of nodes for tied nodes (3b) and
corresponding retained nodes (3c - 3d) must be given.
If the constraint equations utilize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK
parameter should be invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the word TYING.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of constraint equations to be read (optional).
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of tying data. Defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to suppress printout of tying data.
TYING 314
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

Data blocks 3 and 3a or 3 and 3b, 3c, 3d, are given once for each constraint equation set.
1-5
1st
Enter the code for tying type. See Table 3-2 and Marc Volume A: User
Information for definition of default types and user-defined routines.
6-10
2nd
Enter 0 to indicate a list of nodes to be tied will be defined in data block

3b.
Enter a node number to indicate an individual node to be tied.
11-15
3rd
Number of retained nodes for this tying type. If a standard Marc tying type
is used this does not need to be entered.
16-20
4th
Enter a 0 if tying type is available for all passes in multiphysics analysis.

Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be active
using:
1 stress pass.
2 heat pass.
4 electrical pass in Joule analysis.
5 diffusion pass.
6 electrostatic pass
7 - Magnetostatic pass
8 - Electromagnetic pass
For example, 24 means tie is active only in heat and electrical pass, but is
not active in structural pass.
3a data block
If the number of a node is entered in the second field of the 3rd data block (above), use data block 3a
to list the retained nodes.
1-80
1st
Sequence of retained nodes for constraint in (16I5) format, etc.
3b data block
If no tied node is entered in the second field of the 3rd data block (that is, 0 is entered), use data blocks
3b, 3c, and 3d to enter a list of nodes to be tied.
Enter an unsorted list of nodes to be tied.
3c data block
Enter an unsorted list of nodes which will be the first retained nodes
associated with tied nodes given in data block 3b.
315 TYING
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3d data block
Same as 3c except second retained nodes, etc.
Note:
Table 3-2
List verbs EXCEPT, INTERSECT and sorted node sets are illegal
in these lists.
Summary of Standard Tying Types
Tying
Code
Number of
Retained Nodes
Purpose
I < NDEG
Tie the Ith degree of freedom

at the tied node to the Ith
degree of freedom at the
retained node
100
Tie all degrees of freedom at

the tied node to the
corresponding degrees of
freedom at the retained node
23
Tie axisymmetric solid node

to axisymmetric-shell
(element
type 1) node
15 Number of retained
nodes is 1 less than
the number of shell
nodes in the z-r plane
of the section
Remarks
Both tied and retained nodes

must be transformed to local
system. TRANSFORMATION
option must be invoked. (See
Marc Volume A: User
Information, Table 9-17)
Special tying types for pipe

bend element 17 to remove
rigid body modes (see
Volume B: Element Library)
16 Number of shell nodes Special tying types for pipe

in the z-r plane of the bend element 17 to remove
section
rigid body modes (see
Volume B: Element Library)
17
Special tying types for pipe

bend element 17 to couple
bend section into pipe line
(see Volume B: Element
Library)
Caution: TRANSFORMATION MUST NOT BE USED AT NODES INVOLVED IN TYING

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
TYING 316
Table 3-2
Summary of Standard Tying Types (continued)
Tying
Code
Number of
Retained Nodes
18
Purpose
Remarks
Joining together the

boundaries of intersecting
shell, element type 4, 8, or 24.
Fully moment carrying joint.
Tied node is also second

retained node. Neither node can
be transformed (see Marc
Volume A: User Information,
Table 9-15)
28
Joining intersecting shells,

element type 4, 8, or 24.
Pinned joint.

retained node (see Marc Volume
A: User Information,
Table 9-15)
19
Use beam element 13 as a

stiffener on shell elements 4
or 8. Tied node is beam node:
First retained node
is shell node, second is beam
node again. Beam node
should be on, or close to, the
normal to the shell at the shell
node.
20
Create an extra node in a shell Always use after tying type 21.
type 8 element tied to the
interpolation function of the
shell. Use in conjunction with
tying type 21 to tie a beam
element 13 or a stiffener
across a shell element.
21
Same as type 19, but tying

beam to an interpolated shell
node not as a vertex of an
element element type 8
only. Must be followed by
type 20 to tie the interpolated
shell node into the shell
mesh.
Must be followed by a tying

type 20.

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
317 TYING
Table 3-2
Tying
Code
Number of
Retained Nodes
Purpose
Remarks
24
Join intersecting shells or

beams, element type 15-17.

retained node. Neither node can
be transformed. Tying is
necessary only when there is a
large angle between the two
plates.
25
Join solid mesh to shell or

beam (type 15 or 16).

retained node.
26
Join solid mesh to

axisymmetric shell (type 1 or
89).
Similar to 23, but no

transformation needed. Tied
node is also second to retained
node.
27
Join Fourier solid to Fourier

shell (type 90).

retained node.
31
Refine mesh of first order

(linear displacement)
elements in 2-D.
Tie interior nodes on refined

side to corner nodes on coarse
side.
32
Refine mesh of second order

(quadratic displacement)
elements in 2-D.

side to the edge of an element
on the coarse side.
33
Refine mesh of 8-node bricks Tie interior node on the refined

side to the 4 corner nodes of an
element face on the coarse side.
The retained nodes must be
entered in the same or opposite
order as they occur in the
element connectivity.
34
Refine mesh of 20-node

bricks

side to the 8 (4 corner, 4
midside) nodes of an element
on the coarse side. The retained
nodes must be entered in the
same or opposite order as they
occur in the

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
TYING 318
Table 3-2
Tying
Code
Number of
Retained Nodes
44 2 is 2-D or
axisymmetric
lower-order element
edge
Purpose
Rigidly tie a node with
displacements and rotations
to a surface patch. This is
internally used for CWELD
and CFAST option.
Remarks
The number of retained nodes
is required. This tying type
fully supports large
deformation/rotations. No
transformations are required.
3 is 2-D or
axisymmetric
higher-order
element edge
3 if 3-D lower-order
triangular face
4 if 3-D lower-order
quadrilateral face
6 if 3-D higher-order
triangular face
8 if 3-D higher-order
quadrilateral face
52
Pin joint for beam types 14,

25, or 52.
53
Fully moment carrying joint

for beam types 14, 25, or 52.
13
Joining two elements type 13 Tied node is also the second

under an arbitrary angle.
retained node.
Fully moment carrying joint.
>100
Generate several tyings

of type
< NDEG.
Tying code is the first degree of

freedom multiplied by 100
added to the last degree of
freedom; that is, 209 means tie
2nd to 9th d.o.f. at tied node to
resp. 2nd and 9th degrees of
freedom at retained node.

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
319 TYING
Table 3-2
Tying
Code
Number of
Retained Nodes
Purpose
Remarks
69
Joint for creating gaps or

overlaps between two parts
of a model either by
prescribing the total force on
the nodes on either side of the
gap or overlap or by
prescribing the size of the gap
or overlap.
The second retained node is the

control node of the tying. The
force on this node is equal to the
total force on the tied nodes of
all tyings that share this control
node. The displacement of the
node is equal to size of the gap
or overlap between the parts. In
non-mechanical passes, the
tying reduces to tying type 100
between the tied and the first
retained node.
80
Form a rigid link between

tied node and retained node.
This works for either small or
large deformation. If a rigid
region is to be modeled, use
multiple ties of type 80, with
the tied node of each link
being a different node, and
use the same common node
as the retained node.
The second retained node is an

extra node which contains the
rigid body rotation. Therefore,
it may not be connected to any
elements in a model.
85
Tying of temperatures
between shell and solid
elements in heat transfer
analysis
(linear/quadratic/new
composite temperature
distribution in the thickness
direction of shell elements).
Tied node is the shell node and

two retained nodes are nodes of
the solid element. Order of the
retained nodes follows the shell
node degrees of freedom. The
assumption here is that the shell
and brick have the
same thickness.

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
TYING 320
Table 3-2
Tying
Code
Number of
Retained Nodes
Purpose
Remarks
86
between shell and solid
element in heat transfer
analysis (quadratic/new
distribution in the thickness
direction of shell element).
Tied node is the shell node and

three retained nodes are nodes
of the solid element. Order of
the retained nodes follows shell
node degrees of freedom. Tied
node should not have linear
temperature distribution. The
assumption here is that the shell
and brick have the
same thickness.
87
between two shell elements
in a heat transfer analysis
(linear/quadratic/new
distribution).
Tied and retained nodes are

shell nodes. The tied node
should have more or equal
number of degree of freedom
than the retained node. The
assumption here is that the tied
shell and retained shell have
equal thickness.

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.
321 SERVO LINK

Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints
SERVO LINK
Description
This option uses homogeneous linear constraint capability (TYING) to input simple constraints of
the form:
ut = a1 ur1 + a2 ur2 + . . .
where ut is a degree of freedom to be constrained.
ur1, ur2 etc., are the other retained degrees of freedom in this structure.
a1, a2 etc., are constants provided in this option.
For more information, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. Note that more complex
constraints can be entered via the TYING model definition set and the UFORMSN user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words SERVO LINK.
11-15
2nd
Number of servo links to be entered below; defaults to number given on

the TIE parameter.
16-20
3rd
Enter unit number for input of servo links. Defaults to input.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 if the 4th data block is being used to define in which pass of a
multiphysics analysis the servo link should be active.
Data blocks 2, 3, and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each servo link.
2nd data block
1-5
1st
Number of retained nodes (must not exceed the value given in the TIE
parameter, fourth field).
6-10
2nd
Tied degree of freedom, at tied node.
11-15
3rd
Tied node.
16-20
4th
First retained degree of freedom at first retained node.
21-25
5th
First retained node.
SERVO LINK 322

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
Second retained degree of freedom at second retained node.
31-35
7th
Second retained node.

Etc. (Continuation data in 16I5 format).
3rd data block

One set of this data block goes with each set from data block 2.
1-10
1st
Numerical constant a1 joining tied and first retained variables.
11-20
2nd
Numerical constant a2 joining tied and second retained variables

Etc.
4th data block

Needed only if 4th entry on the 1st data block is set to 1.
1-5
1st
Enter 0 if servo link is active for all passes in multiphysics analysis

(default).
Enter a packed number indicating which passes the servo link should be
active using:
1 stress pass.
2 heat pass.
5 diffusion pass.
6 electrostatic pass.
For example, 24 means servo link is active only in heat and electrical pass,
but is not active in structural pass.
323 RBE2
Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element
RBE2
Description
The RBE2 option defines a rigid kinematic link between a single retained node with dependent degrees
of freedom specified at an arbitrary number of tied nodes. The distance between the tied nodes to the
retained node must be greater than zero.
To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP parameter. If the updated Lagrange
option is set, then the large rotation formulation is automatically used. If all degrees of freedom of the
tied nodes are tied, then RBE2 simulates rigid body motion. This is similar with tying 80. But RBE2 is
more general than tying 80. For example, when the rotations are not tied, then RBE2 simulates spherical
link or it can be used to simulate slider connection. The degrees of freedom of the tied nodes are
co-rotated with the rotation of the retained node.
For more information, see Marc Volume A: User and Theory Information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word RBE2.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of distinct sets of RBE2 to be input.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of RBE2; defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Retained (reference) node. This node has 3 degrees of freedom in 2-D

(two translations and one rotation about the global z-axis) and six degrees
of freedom in 3-D (three translations and three rotations). Note that this
may require the use of the RBE parameter.
6-10
2nd
Packed list of degrees of freedom of tied nodes to be constrained. If, for

example, the first and the third degree of freedom must be constrained,
enter 13. Put blank or zero if all translational and rotational degrees of
freedom are constrained.
11-15
3rd
Number of tied nodes.
RBE2 324
Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be
active using:
1 stress pass.
2 heat pass.
5 diffusion pass.
6 electrostatic pass.
21-25
5th
RBE2 ID; default equals 0.
4a data block
Sequence of tied nodes in (1615) format.
325 RBE3
RBE3
Description
The RBE3 option defines the motion at a reference node as the weighted average of the motion at a set
of other nodes. The distance between the reference node to the retained nodes must be greater than zero.
This option is a powerful tool to distribute applied loads in a model. Forces and moments applied to
reference nodes are distributed to a set of independent degrees of freedom based on the RBE3 geometry
and local weighting factors.
By defaults, the reference node is considered as a tied node. It is also possible to specify the subset of the
retained nodes as tied nodes. In this case, the total number of degrees of freedom specified for every tied
node must be the same as the degrees of freedom specified for the reference node. In this way, it possible
to use the reference node as tied node for other tyings. If the choice of the tied nodes is not done properly,
a singularity may occur during the internal manipulation of the tying matrix, user should modify their
input file.
To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP parameter. If the updated Lagrange
option is set, then large rotation formulation is automatically used. The degrees of freedom of the
reference node are not co-rotated.
The constrained degrees of freedom of all retained nodes on an RBE3 option must be adequate to define
its rigid body motion, otherwise, A-matrix is singular and an error message is issued. It is recommended,
that for most applications, only the translation components be used for the degrees of freedom of the
retained nodes. An exception is the case where the retained nodes are colinear. A rotation component may
then be added to one node to stabilize its associated rigid body mode.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word RBE3.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of distinct sets of RBE3 to be input.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of RBE3; defaults to input.
RBE3 326
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Reference node. This node has three degrees of freedom in 2-D (two
translations and one rotation about the global z-axis) and six degrees of
freedom in 3-D (three translations and three rotations). Note that this may
require the use of the RBE parameter.
6-10
2nd
Packed list of degrees of freedom of tied node to be constrained. If (e.g.

the first and the third degree of freedom must be constrained) enter 13. Put
blank or zero if all translational and rotational degrees of freedom are
constrained.
11-15
3rd
Number of different weighting factors.
16-20
4th
Number of user-defined MSETS, maximum is eight. This indicates that a

subset of retained nodes entered on the 5th data block are also tied nodes
given on the 6th data block.
21-25
5th

Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be
active using:
1 stress pass.
2 heat pass.
5 diffusion pass.
6 electrostatic pass
4th data block

The 4th and 5th data blocks are repeated as pairs, one for each weighting factor.
1-10
1st
Weighting factor.
11-15
2nd
Packed list of degrees of freedom belonging to the weighting factor.
16-20
4th
Enter the number of tied nodes with this weighting factor. The nodes are
entered in the 5th data block.
5th data block

Sequence of retained nodes in (1615) format.
327 RBE3
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

Required only if 4th field of 3rd data block is nonzero. The listed tied nodes must be a subset of the
retained nodes. The total number of tied degrees of freedom must be the same as the number of degrees
of freedom specified for the reference node.
1-5
1st
The first tied node number.
6-10
2nd
Packed list of degrees of freedom belonging to the first tied node.
11-15
3rd
The second tied node number.
16-20
4th
Packed list of degrees of freedom belonging to the second tied node.
etc.
RROD 328
Rigid 2-node Constraint
RROD
Rigid 2-node Constraint
Description
This option defines a 2-noded rigid constraint that has the similar characteristics as the MD Nastran
RROD element. The constraint is applied using equation elimination like tying or servolinks. The link
must have finite length and may undergo large rotations.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word RROD.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of rigid links (not required).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number (defaults to the standard input).
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the ID of this link.
6-10
2nd
Enter the first node ID.
11-15
3rd
Enter the second node ID.
16-20
4th
Enter component number of one and only one dependent translational

degree of freedom in the global coordinate system (MD Nastran CMA).
21-25
5th
Enter component number of one and only one dependent translational

degree of freedom in the global coordinate system (MD Nastran CMB).
Note:
Either CMA or CMB must be nonzero, but not both.
329 PIN CODE

Define Pin Code for Beam Element
PIN CODE
Define Pin Code for Beam Element
Description
The PIN CODE option is used to remove connections between the node and selected degrees-of-freedom
of the beam. The degrees of freedom are defined in the elements coordinate system and the pin codes
are applied at the offset end of the beam.
By default, a new internal node is generated for every pinned node, and constraints are setup between
these two nodes. When FEATURE, 6901 is activated, Marc condenses out the pinned degrees of freedoms
instead of creating a new node.
To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP, LARGE STRAIN, or
UPDATE parameter.
Note:
The degrees of freedom listed in the 3rd data block are with respect to an element
coordinate system defined by the beam cross section axis.
Format
Format
Fixe
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PIN CODE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of distinct sets of PIN CODE to be input.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of PIN CODE; defaults to input.
Packed list of degrees of freedom to be flagged. For example, when the

first and the third degree of freedom are to remain free (unconstrained),
enter 13.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
4th data block

List of element:node pairs. For example, 100:1 means the first node of
element ID 100. The node value must be 1 or 2. For 3-node beam
elements, only the end nodes can be flagged with pin code.
INSERT 330
Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted
INSERT
3
Model
Definiti
on
Option
s
Description
This option allows the definition of host bodies and lists of elements or nodes to be inserted in the host
bodies. The degrees of freedom of the nodes in the inserted node list or element list are automatically tied
using the corresponding degrees of freedom of the nodes in host body elements based on their
isoparametric location in the elements.
This option can be used to place reinforcing cords or rods, such as 2-D rebar membrane elements, into
solid elements.
This option can be used to apply point loads in some specific locations other than element nodes. It also
can be used to link two different meshes.
After local adaptive meshing or global meshing, the constraint equation is reformulated. In this way, one
can apply a point load in a region and it will continue to be applied in the correct location after remeshing.
If a node to be inserted is also a node of a host body element, no tying is applied to the node.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word INSERT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of data sets to be read in (optional).
6-10
2nd
Unit numbers for input; defaults to standard input (unit 5).
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are given for each data set.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
INSERT data set ID.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if a list of elements to be inserted; default is 0 - a list of nodes to

be inserted.
11-20
3rd
Exterior tolerance. A node is considered within a host element if the

distance between the element and the node is smaller than the tolerance
times average edge length of the element, unless the node is actually
inside another host element. Default is 0.05.
21-25
4th
Enter a 0 if a list of elements defines the host body.

Enter a 1 if a list of contact bodies defines the host body.
331 INSERT
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry
4th data block

Enter a list of elements or contact bodies which define the host body.
5th data block
If the second field of the 3rd data block is 1, enter a list of elements to
be inserted.
Otherwise, enter a list of nodes to be inserted.
SPRINGS 332
Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)
SPRINGS
Description
This data set is used to input any linear or nonlinear springs. For dynamic analysis, a dashpot capability
is offered as well. The spring can be used for mechanical, thermal, and electrical analysis. Note that for
input files that have the VERSION,10 or later parameter, two data blocks are needed to define each linear
or nonlinear spring.
The force in a linear mechanical spring/dashpot is given by:
F = K u 2 u 1 + C u 2 u 1
where K is the spring stiffness, C is the damping coefficient, u 2 is the displacement of the degree of
freedom at the second end of the spring (third and fourth fields), and u 1 is the displacement of the degree
of freedom at the first end of the spring (first and second fields).
During heat transfer or electrical analysis (regular heat transfer analysis, Joule heating analysis, or
the thermal part of a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis), the spring acts like a link. The dashpot is
not active.
During a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis, springs can act in only the stress part (only 5th field of the
2nd data block is nonzero), or can act in only the thermal part (only 8th field of the 2nd data block is
nonzero), or in both stress and thermal parts (both 5th and 8th fields of the 2nd data block are nonzero).
In the last case, care should be taken to ensure that the degrees of freedom specified are uniformly valid
for both the stress and thermal parts of the coupled run.
If the degrees of freedom are specified as zero for a mechanical run, the spring acts along the line joining
the two nodes. This line direction is updated during an incremental stress analysis only if large
displacement is flagged. If the thermal conduction or electrical conduction is specified for a true direction
spring, the associated degrees of freedom for the spring are assumed as one.
If the second node is specified as zero, the spring is assumed to be fixed to ground along the specified
degree of freedom. The displacement of the ground along the specified degree of freedom is assumed to
be zero. In the thermal part, the temperature of the ground is assumed to be zero. In the electrical part,
the voltage of the ground is assumed to be zero.
Note that for degree of freedom springs, the spring force is positive if the displacement of node 2 along
the specified degree of freedom is greater than the displacement of node 1 along the specified degree of
freedom. Note also that for degree of freedom springs, if user nodal transformations are used for one or
both nodes, the spring force is calculated based on the local transformed degree of freedom. For springs
connected to the ground, the displacement of node 2 along the appropriate degree of freedom is always
zero. For true direction springs, the spring force is positive if the spring is in tension and negative if the
spring is in compression and is independent of any nodal transformations.
333 SPRINGS
For a nonlinear spring/dashpot (mechanical, thermal or electrical analysis), the spring stiffness can be
specified in one of three ways:
a. Nonlinear Spring Force: This is defined using the TABLE parameter and TABLE model
definition option. The spring force computed from the multi-variate table is scaled by the
corresponding reference value provided in the 5th, 6th, 8th or 9th field of the 2nd data block.
The gradient of the table is internally calculated and used for the spring stiffness. To facilitate
the gradient calculation, the spring force needs to be specified as a function of: relative
displacement for mechanical springs (type 38), relative velocity for dashpots (type 22),
relative temperature for thermal links (type 12), relative voltage for electrical links (type 31).
In addition, the spring force can be optionally varied as a function of: time (type 1),
normalized time (type 2), increment number (type 3), or normalized increment number (type
4). In thermo-mechanical coupled analysis, the mechanical spring force and damping force
can also be specified as a function of the average temperature of the spring (type 12). In Jouleheating analysis, the electrical conduction can also be specified as a function of the average
temperature of the spring (type 12). If the value of any independent variable falls beyond its
minimum or maximum value in the table, the last force value associated with that independent
variable is used by default and can be linearly extrapolated by the user if desired. For more
general nonlinearities, option (c) (USPRNG) can be used independently or in conjunction
with option (a).
b. Nonlinear Spring Stiffness: This is defined using the TABLE parameter and TABLE model
definition option. The stiffness value computed from the multi-variate table is scaled by the
corresponding reference value provided in the 5th, 6th, 8th or 9th field of the 2nd data block.
The stiffness can be varied as a function of time (type 1), normalized time (type 2), increment
number (type 3), or normalized increment number (type 4). The spring stiffness can also be
varied as a function of relative displacement for mechanical springs (type 38), relative
velocity for dashpots (type 22), relative temperature for thermal links (type 12), relative
voltage for electrical links (type 31). In thermo-mechanical coupled analysis, the mechanical
spring stiffness and dashpot damping can also be specified as a function of the average
temperature of the spring (type 12). In Joule heating analysis, the electrical conduction can
also be specified as a function of the average temperature of the spring (type 12). If the value
of any independent variable falls beyond its minimum or maximum value in the table, the last
stiffness value associated with that independent variable is used by default and can be linearly
extrapolated by the user if desired. For more general nonlinearities, option (c) (USPRNG) can
be used independently or in conjunction with option (b).
c. The nonlinear spring stiffness can also be specified with the USPRNG user subroutine with
the general relation:
F = F u 2 u 1 u 2 u 1
See Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for details.
SPRINGS 334
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word SPRINGS.
2nd data block

Enter one data block per spring/dashpot.
1-5
1st
Node to which first end of spring/dashpot will be attached.
6-10
2nd
Degree of freedom at above node to which spring/dashpot will

be attached.
Enter 0 for a spring/dashpot acting in the direction from the first to the
second node (this also requires a 0 on the 4th field).
11-15
3rd
Node to which other end of spring/dashpot will be attached.

Enter 0 if the spring goes from the first end to the ground.
16-20
4th
Degree of freedom at above node to which spring will be attached.

Enter 0 if the spring goes from the first end to the ground.
Enter 0 for a spring/dashpot acting in the direction from the first to the
second node (this also requires a 0 on the 2nd field).
21-30
5th
Reference stiffness of spring or scale factor to force versus displacement

table.
31-40
6th
Reference damping coefficient of dashpot or scale factor to force versus

relative velocity table (for dynamic analysis only).
41-50
7th
Initial force in spring.
51-60
8th
Reference thermal conduction of link or scale factor to flux versus relative

temperature table.
61-70
9th
Reference electrical conduction of link or scale factor to electrical flux

versus relative voltage table.
71-75
10th
Spring ID
76-80
11th
Numerical Stabilizer Flag
335 SPRINGS
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

Only required if input version is 10 or greater.
Enter one data block per spring/dashpot
1-5
1st
Table ID for nonlinear mechanical stiffness.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for nonlinear dashpot damping.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for nonlinear thermal conduction.
16-20
4th
Table ID for nonlinear electrical conduction.
21-25
5th
-1 mechanical stiffness is obtained from gradient values. Force versus

relative displacement table is entered.
1 mechanical stiffness is obtained from direct values. Stiffness versus
relative table is entered.
26-30
6th
-1 dashpot damping is obtained from gradient values. Force versus

relative velocity table is entered.
1 dashpot damping is obtained from direct values. Damping coefficient
versus relative velocity is entered.
31-35
7th
-1 thermal conduction is obtained from gradient values. Flux versus

relative temperature table is entered.
1 thermal conduction is obtained from direct values. Thermal
conduction versus temperature table is entered.
36-40
8th
-1 electrical conduction is obtained from gradient values. Electrical flux

versus relative voltage table is entered.
1 electrical conduction is obtained from direct values. Electrical
conductivity versus voltage table is entered.
PBUSH 336
Input Data for Cbush Elements
PBUSH
Description
This data set is used to input all relevant data for cbush elements (2-D - type 194 and 3-D - type 195).
The definition of the cbush coordinate system, cbush nodal offsets and coefficients for stiffness,
damping, mass, stress and strain recovery, thermal and electrical behavior can be provided through these
data blocks. The connectivity for the cbush elements are specified through the CONNECTIVITY model
definition option.
Some details for each of the data specifications are provided herein. The reader is referred to Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 9 for more details.
Cbush Coordinate System
Options are provided to define the local cbush coordinate system along the element, in the global
coordinate system or in a user-defined coordinate system.
For the element coordinate system, the x axis is defined along the element length and forms a
perpendicular triad with the local y and z axes. For 3-D cbush elements, an extra node or an orientation
vector is specified to define the local y-z plane. For large displacement analysis, this local coordinate
system attached to the element is constantly updated.
Alternately, the element coordinate system can be defined along global Cartesian coordinates or in a usercoordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM model definition option. In these options, the
coordinate system remains fixed through the analysis and is not updated for large displacement analysis.
Cbush Nodal Offsets
Options are provided for locating an offset point along the cbush element axis, in the global coordinate
system, or in a user-defined coordinate system. In the first option, the offset point is located along the
line joining the two end nodes of the cbush element. The distance of the offset point along this line from
the first end node is user defined. Alternately, the offset point position can be defined in the global
Cartesian coordinate system or in a user-coordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM model
definition option.
For all options, the offset vectors from each cbush end node are internally calculated, and for large
displacement analysis, these offset vectors are updated based on the respective rotations at each end node.
Cbush Properties
Mechanical stiffness and damping properties are defined in the local cbush coordinate system. Stiffness
properties can be specified in coefficient form or through force-displacement curves. Damping properties
are specified as nominal damping either in coefficient form or force-velocity curves, and structural
damping in the form of coefficients. For 2-D cbush elements, up to three coefficients can be specified
and for 3-D cbush elements, up to six coefficients can be specified.
337 PBUSH
The force in a linear mechanical cbush element is given by:

F = K u 2 u 1 + C u 2 u 1
where F is the force vector in the local coordinate system of the cbush element, K is a diagonal
matrix of the cbush stiffness coefficients, C is a diagonal matrix of the cbush damping coefficients,
u 2 is the vector of displacement degrees of freedom in the local cbush coordinate system at the second
end of the cbush, and u 1 is the vector of displacement degrees of freedom in the local cbush coordinate
system at the first end of the cbush. C includes the contributions of nominal damping, structural
damping, and stiffness proportional damping. If the second node is specified as zero, the cbush element
is assumed to be fixed to ground with all the ground degrees of freedom taken as zero.
Note that for cbush elements defined in the global coordinate or user-coordinate system, the cbush force
for a particular degree of freedom is positive if the displacements of node 2 along the specified degrees
of freedom is greater than the displacement of node 1 along the specified degrees of freedom. For cbush
elements defined in the element coordinate system, the cbush force is positive if the cbush is in tension
and negative if the cbush is in compression.
Field Analysis
During heat transfer or electrical analysis (regular heat transfer analysis, Joule heating analysis, or the
thermal part of a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis), the cbush element acts like a link. The dashpot
is not active. For the ground cbush element in the thermal part, the temperature of the ground is assumed
to be zero and in the electrical part, the voltage of the ground is assumed to be zero.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the word PBUSH.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of distinct sets of PBUSH entries.
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of PBUSH data (default to standard input).
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to suppress printout.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter PBUSH ID.
6-10
2nd
Method to enter cbush spring behavior (default = 0).

Enter 0 if no stiffness.
Enter 1 if stiffness is entered in coefficient form.
Enter 2 if stiffness is specified via force-displacement tables.
PBUSH 338
Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Method to enter cbush damping behavior (default=0).

Enter 0 for no damping.
Enter 1 if nominal damping is entered in coefficient form.
Enter 2 if nominal damping is specified via force-velocity tables.
Enter 3 if structural damping coefficients are entered.
Enter 4 if both nominal damping and structural damping are specified in
coefficient form.
Enter 5 if nominal damping is specified via force-velocity tables and
structural damping is entered in coefficient form.
16-20
4th
Enter node ID G0 (default 0).
21-25
5th
Enter Coordinate System ID CID.

Enter -1 if element coordinate system is used. For 3-D, either G0 or Xi can
be used to define the local y-z plane.
Enter 0 if global coordinate system is to be used.
Enter > 0 if user-defined coordinate system given via COORD SYSTEM
option is to be used.
26-35
6th
Enter X1.
36-45
7th
Enter X2.
46-55
8th
Enter X3.
Note:
The local y-z plane for each 3-D cbush element are defined through either G0 or Xi. Xi are
the components of an orientation vector measured from the first end-node GA in the
displacement coordinate system at node GA. Node ID G0 is an alternate method to supply
this orientation vector. The G0 method supersedes the Xi method. The orientation vector is
measured from end GA to G0.
To use either of them, CID (field 5) should be set to -1.
of G0 or Xi
CID 0
supersedes any definition
4th data block

1-5
1st
Enter Offset Coordinate System ID (OCID)

Enter -2 if no offsets are to be provided.
Enter -1 if offset point is located on the line joining the two nodes. The
value of offset is provided by the 2nd field.
339 PBUSH
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 0 if offset point coordinates in fields 3 - 5 are given in the global
coordinate system.
Enter > 0 if offset point coordinates in fields 3 - 5 are given in a userdefined coordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM option.
6 - 15
2nd
Enter the value of S for the location of the cbush spring-dashpot along the
line joining the two end-nodes.
16-25
3rd
Enter S1
26-35
4th
Enter S2
36-45
5th
Enter S3
Notes:
The value of S defined in field 2 is used with OCID = -1 in field 1. 0 S 1 . S is

measured from end GA. (1-S) is the distance from end GB.
Si in fields 3 - 5 are used with OCID 0 in field 1. They refer to the components of the
vector measured from the origin to the offset point.
OCID = -2 is set when no offsets are to be provided. It is commonly used when only the
local x stiffness is defined along the cbush element and effectively behaves like a
true-direction spring. This is also the equivalent of the CBUSH1D element in
MD Nastran.
Enter 5th and 6th data blocks if field 2 of 3rd data block (method to enter stiffness) is 1.
5th data block
1-10
1st
Enter reference stiffness in the first direction.
11-20
2nd
Enter reference stiffness in the second direction.
21-30
3rd
Enter reference stiffness in the third direction.
31-40
4th
Enter reference stiffness in the fourth direction.
41-50
5th
Enter reference stiffness in the fifth direction.
51-60
6th
Enter reference stiffness in the sixth direction.
6th data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the first direction.
6-10
2nd
Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the second direction.
11-15
3rd
Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the third direction.
16-20
4th
Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the fourth direction.
21-25
5th
Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the fifth direction.
26-30
6th
Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the sixth direction.
PBUSH 340
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 7th and 8th data blocks if field 2 of the 3rd data block (method to enter stiffness) is 2.
7th data block
1-10
1st
Enter reference force in the first direction.
11-20
2nd
Enter reference force in the second direction.
21-30
3rd
Enter reference force in the third direction.
31-40
4th
Enter reference force in fourth direction.
41-50
5th
Enter reference force in fifth direction.
51-60
6th
Enter reference force in sixth direction.
8th data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the first direction.
6-10
2nd
Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the

second direction.
11-15
3rd

third direction.
16-20
4th

fourth direction.
21-25
5th
Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the fifth direction.
26-30
6th

sixth direction.
Notes:
Up to six coefficients and table IDs can be provided in data blocks 5 - 8. Note that for
the tables referenced in data blocks 6 and 8, the stiffness or force can be a function of up
to four independent variables. For data block 8, a mandatory independent variable type is
displacement. Other independent variables in the tables referenced by data blocks 6 or 8
can be time, normalized time, increment number, normalized increment number, x, y, z
original and current position coordinates, frequency (for harmonic analysis), temperature.
For 3-D cbush elements, the first three directions refer to x, y and z translations while the
4 - 6 directions refer to x, y and z rotations. For 2-D cbush elements, the first two
directions refer to x and y translations while the 3rd direction refers to z rotation.
Enter 9th and 10th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 1 or 4.
9th data block
1-10
1st
Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in first direction.
11-20
2nd
Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the second direction
21-30
3rd
Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the third direction.
341 PBUSH
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the fourth direction.
41-50
5th
Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the fifth direction.
51-60
6th
Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the sixth direction.
10th data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the first direction.
6-10
2nd
Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the second direction.
11-15
3rd
Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the third direction.
16-20
4th
Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the fourth direction.
21-25
5th
Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the fifth direction.
26-30
6th
Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the sixth direction.
Enter 11th and 12th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 2 or 5.
11th data block
1-10
1st
Enter reference force in the first direction.
11-20
2nd
Enter reference force in the second direction.
21-30
3rd
Enter reference force in the third direction.
31-40
4th
Enter reference force in the fourth direction.
41-50
5th
Enter reference force in the fifth direction.
51-60
6th
Enter reference force in the sixth direction.
12th data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
first direction.
6-10
2nd
second direction.
11-15
3rd
third direction.
16-20
4th
fourth direction.
21-25
5th
fifth direction.
26-30
6th
sixth direction.
PBUSH 342
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 13th and 14th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 3, 4 or 5.
13th data block
1-10
1st
Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the first direction.
11-20
2nd
Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the second direction.
21-30
3rd
Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the third direction.
31-40
4th
Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the fourth direction.
41-50
5th
Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the fifth direction.
51-60
6th
Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the sixth direction.
14th data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the first direction.
6-10
2nd
Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the second direction.
11-15
3rd
Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the third direction.
16-20
4th
Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the fourth direction.
21-25
5th
Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the fifth direction.
26-30
6th
Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the sixth direction.
Notes:
Up to six coefficients and tables can be provided in data blocks 9- 14. These coefficients
and associated table IDs are used for transient dynamic analysis. Data blocks 9, 10, 13,
and 14 can also be used for harmonic analysis with complex-valued damping. Note that
for the tables referenced in data blocks 10, 12, and 14, the damping coefficient or force
can be a function of up to four independent variables. For data block 12, a mandatory
independent variable type is velocity. Other independent variables in the tables
referenced by data blocks 10, 12, or 14 can be time, normalized time, increment number,
normalized increment number, x, y, z position coordinates, frequency (for harmonic
analysis), temperature.
For 3-D cbush elements, the first three directions refer to x, y and z translations while the
four - six directions refer to x, y and z rotations. For 2-D cbush elements, the first two
directions refer to x and y translations while the third direction refers to z rotation.
15th data block

1-10
1st
Enter stress recovery coefficient for the translational components

(default = 0).
11-20
2nd
Enter stress recovery components for the rotational components (default

= 0).
21-30
3rd
Enter strain recovery coefficient for the translational components

(default = 0).
31-40
4th
Enter strain recovery coefficients for the rotational components

(default = 0).
343 PBUSH
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
Enter lumped translational mass.
51-60
6th
Enter lumped rotational mass.
Note:
Fields 5 and 6 refer to the lumped mass values at each end-node. They are used for
dynamic/harmonic analysis.
Enter 16th and 17th data blocks only for analyses where heat transfer plays a role (e.g., thermal
analysis, thermo-mechanical coupled, Joule heating, etc.)
16th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the thermal conduction coefficient.
11-20
2nd
Enter the electrical resistance coefficient.
17th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the thermal conduction coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the electrical resistance coefficient.
18th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with this PBUSH ID.
CFAST 344
Shell Patch Fastener Connection
CFAST
Description
The CFAST option defines a flexible connection between two surface patches. The surfaces may be either
shell elements or faces of continuum elements in 3-D applications and truss, beam, axisymmetric shell
elements or edges of continuum elements in 2-D applications. The PFAST option is used in conjunction
with the CFAST option to define the characteristics of the connection which behaves like a generalized
spring. This option internally creates a bushing element (element type 194 or 195 for 2-D or 3-D analysis,
respectively) and a set of tyings to connect the bushing nodes to the parts of the structure that are to
be connected. For more information about the geometric definition of the flexible connector, see Marc
Volume A, Chapter 9, Mesh Independent Connection Methods.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CFAST.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of CFAST data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input; defaults to input file.
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 to suppress printout.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the value of identifier of CFAST. Leave blank to allow internally

created identifier.
6-15
2nd
Enter the method of connection as one of PROP or ELEM.
16-20
3rd
Enter the value of the property identifier of a PFAST entry.
21-25
4th
Enter the value of GS, the node number of the CFAST location.
If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 7, 8, and 9.
GS is ignored if GA in field 5 and GB in field 6 are both nonzero.
26-30
5th
Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CFAST.

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A.
If not blank and GB in field 6 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.
31-35
6th
Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CFAST.

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.
If not blank and GA in field 5 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.
345 CFAST
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
36-45
7th
Enter XS, the x-coordinate of the approximate CFAST location.
46-55
8th
Enter YS, the y-coordinate of the approximate CFAST location.
56-65
9th
Enter ZS, the z-coordinate of the approximate CFAST location.
66-75
10th
Enter the name of the CFAST. This name is only used for output purposes.
If left blank, a default name is given as cf followed by the order number
of the CFAST in the input sequence left-padded with zeros to obtain a
ten-character string.
For the PROP method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5
1st
Not used.
6-10
2nd
Not used.
5th data block

1-32
1st
Enter the set name of SetA containing the items to search from for the first
patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto an element from this set, and
all the elements comprising the patch are automatically selected from the
set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set entered in the 2nd
field of this data block, but the search procedure is facilitated if it is.
33-64
2nd
Enter the set name of SetB containing the items to search from for the
second patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto an element from this
set, and all the elements comprising the patch are automatically selected
from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set entered
in the 1st field of this data block, but the search procedure is facilitated
if it is.
For the ELEM method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the element number identifying the first patch.

For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 3rd field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto
this element/face, and the elements comprising the patch are
automatically selected. GS or GA must have a projection onto this
element/face.
6-10
2nd
Enter the element number identifying the second patch.

For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 4th field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto
this element/face, and the elements comprising the patch are
automatically selected. GS or GB must have a projection onto this
element/face.
CFAST 346
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 1st field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell
elements).
16-20
4th
Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 2nd field
elements).
Enter the set name of SetA containing the items to search from for the first
patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto the master element specified
in the 1st field of the 4th data block and all further elements comprising
the patch are automatically selected from the set.
5th data block

1-32
1st
This entry is required for continuum elements, but is not required for
shells.
33-64
2nd
Enter the set name of SetB containing the items to search from for the
second patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto the master element
specified in the 2nd field of the 4th data block and all further elements
comprising the patch are automatically selected from the set.
This entry is required for continuum elements, but is not required for
shells.
347 PFAST
CFAST Fastener Property
PFAST
Description
Defines the CFAST fastener property values.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PFAST.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of PFAST data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input file.
11-15
3rd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the PFAST property identification number.
6-15
2nd
Enter the diameter of the fastener.
16-20
3rd
Specify the element stiffness coordinate system.

Enter -1 to use element connectivity to define x-axis. Value in 4th field
is ignored.
Enter 0 to use global x-axis as the element x-axis (default).
Enter n to use the x-axis of the users defined coordinate system to define
the element x-axis.
30-35
4th
Define if the coordinate system in the 3rd field is absolute or relative.

Enter 0 for relative (default). The element y- and z-axis is determined
internally. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information.
Enter 1 for absolute. It is only valid when the value in the 3rd field is
greater than -1. The selected coordinate system is used for the element.
36-45
5th
Enter the mass of the fastener.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the reference stiffness value in direction 1.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Enter the reference rotational stiffness value in direction 1.
PFAST 348
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
Enter the reference rotational stiffness value in direction 2.
51-60
6th
Enter the reference rotational stiffness value in direction 3
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the stiffness value in direction 1.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the rotational stiffness value in direction 1.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
6th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the reference damping value in direction 1.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Enter the reference rotational damping value in direction 1.
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the damping value in direction 1
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the rotational damping value in direction 1.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
349 CWELD
Weld or Fastener Element Connection
CWELD
Description
This option allows the CWELD connector information to be specified. A and B refer to the two surfaces
(shell elements or solid element faces), that are to be connected by the CWELD. Patch-to-patch
connections can be shell-to-shell, shell-to-solid, and solid-to-solid. Point-to-patch connections can be
point-to-shell or point-to-solid. For each CWELD connection, a complete set of data is entered. The first
data block contains:
EWID, METHOD, PWID, MCID, BTYPE, TTYPE, , WGHT, IPROJ, CWNAME
EWID is the connector beam element number and it may be left blank. In that case, Marc
automatically generates the element, but its end nodes GA and GB can still be entered. If GA
and/or GB are not specified, Marc automatically generates the missing nodes as well. If EWID is
not blank, the element may be defined in the CONNECTIVITY option, but this is not required. If
it is not defined in the CONNECTIVITY option, the nodes GA and/or GB are automatically
generated if they were left blank. If the element is defined in the CONNECTVITY option, its
definition must be made after the CWELD option in order to take effect. In that case, the element
is redefined in terms of its type and its nodes. METHOD defines the connection method and is
one of PARTPAT, ELPAT, ELEMID, GRIDID, or ALIGN. PWID is the identification number
of a corresponding PWELD property entry. BTYPE is the beam element type used for the
connector element. The orientation of the beam cross section is computed by using the
GEOMETRY or PWELD input data. Alternatively the orientation of the beam cross section can be
specified by MCID, the identification number of a coordinate system defined in the
COORD SYSTEM option. The value is the angle over which the beam cross section is rotated
about the beam axis to obtain its final orientation. TTYPE specifies the connection type for the
auxiliary nodes. WGHT is the exponent used in computing distance weight factors for RBE3
constraints. IPROJ is a flag to control the projection of auxiliary nodes to their respective
patches. CWNAME is an optional CWELD name (character string) used only in the output file to
reference the CWELD.
Depending on the connection method, one or more data blocks follow.
For PARTPAT, they contain: GS, SetA, SetB, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS
For ELPAT, they contain: GS, SHIDA, SHIDB, GA, GB, XY, YS, ZS, FaceA, FaceB, SetA,
SetB
For ELEMID, they contain: GS, SHIDA, SHIDB, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS, FaceA, FaceB
For GRIDID, they contain: GS, SPTYP, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS followed by GA1...GA8,
GB1...GB8 where SPTYP defines the surface patch type on both sides of the weld and can be
QQ, TT, QT, TQ, Q, or T and GAi are the nodes of patch A and GBi are the nodes of patch B.
For ALIGN, they contain: GA, GB. No additional data is needed.
For all methods, the pairing surface patch information is required, which identifies the master patches
and, in addition, for the indirect connection methods, the regions from where to select the secondary
patches. It is possible to have point connections on either side when the master patch information for that
CWELD 350
side is omitted (i.e., the SetA or SetB for PARTPAT, the SHIDA or SHIDB for ELPAT and ELMID or
the GA1..GA8 or GB1..GB8 for GRIDID is left blank). It is not possible to make point connections to
automatically generated nodes. The node GS is the approximate CWELD location node or CWELD
reference node. If GS is blank, the coordinates may be entered directly through XS, YS, and ZS and a
GS-node is automatically created. If GA and GB are both entered explicitly, the GS input is ignored;
otherwise, the GS input is used for the projection onto the surfaces on each side of the CWELD to
determine the end locations of the beam. If GS is ignored, GA and GB are projected onto their respective
surfaces. If GS and GA are not specified but GB is, then GB is used as GS. If GS and GB are not specified,
but GA is, then GA is used as GS. If GS, GA, and GB are not specified, then the coordinates XS, YS, ZS
are used. If GS is specified and maximally one of the GA or GB, then GS is used for the projections on
both sides and GA or GB are ignored for this purpose. If one side of the connector makes a point
connection and the connector node for that side has been left blank and the GS-node has been specified,
the point connection is made to the GS-node and the GS-node is projected onto the opposite side to
determine the location of the other connector node. If the node on the opposite side also makes a point
connection, the node for that side must have been specified. SHIDA and SHIDB are element numbers
defining master patches. For solid elements, face information must be entered as well to fully identify the
patch. For shell elements, the face information is not required. Face identifiers for FaceA and FaceB
follow the definitions specified in the FACE IDS option described in Marc Volume C: Program Input.
Valid set types specifying the sets SetA and SetB with patches to search from when finding the
projections are element and face sets for shell elements in 3-D models, face sets for continuum elements
in 3-D models, element and edge sets for truss, beam and axisymmetric shell elements in 2-D models and
edge sets for continuum elements in 2-D models. Below faces should be understood as edges when
entering the data for a 2-D model.
For more information about the geometric definition of the flexible connector, see Marc Volume A,
Chapter 9, Mesh Independent Connection Methods.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CWELD.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of CWELD data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 to suppress printing of the CWELD data during this option.
Enter the element number (EWID) of the connector element between the
patches.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Leave blank when the automatic element generation is used.
351 CWELD
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6-15
2nd
Enter the method of connection as one of PARTPAT, ELPAT, ELEMID,

GRIDID, ALIGN.
16-20
3rd
Enter the value of PWID, the property identifier of a PWELD entry.
30-35
4th
Enter the value of MCID, the identification number of a coordinate system

defined in the COORD SYSTEM option to define the orientation of the
beam cross section. Leave blank or enter 0 if the automatic procedure is
to be used.
36-40
5th
Enter the value for BTYPE (the Marc beam element type to be used for the
connection). Default is 98 in a 3-D and 5 in a 2-D analysis when EWID is
blank or the element type used on the CONNECTIVITY input when EWID
is not blank.
41-45
6th
Enter the value for TTYPE (the type of constraint used to connect the
auxiliary nodes in the CWELD).
Enter 0 (default) for RBE3 constraints.
Enter 44 for Kirchhoff constraints.
Enter 80 for combined RBE2 and RBE3 constraints.
46-55
7th
Enter the value for , the angle over which to rotate the cross section
about the beam axis to obtain its final orientation.
56-65
8th
Enter the value for WGHT, the RBE3 distance weighting exponent.
Defaults to the value given on the SWLDPRM input.
66-70
9th
Enter the value for IPROJ.

Enter 0 (default) if the auxiliary nodes should not be relocated.to their
projections on the finite element model.
Enter 1 to have the auxiliary nodes relocated to their projections on the
finite element model.
71-80
10th
Enter the name of the CWELD. This name is only used for output
purposes.
If left blank, a default name will be given as cw followed by the order
number of the CWELD in the input sequence left-padded with zeros to
obtain a ten-character string.
For the PARTPAT method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate CWELD
location.
CWELD 352
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter zero.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD.

If not blank and GB in field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.
21-25
5th
Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD.

If not blank and GA in field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.
26-35
6th
Enter XS, the x-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.
36-45
7th
Enter YS, the y-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.
46-55
8th
Enter ZS, the z-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.
Enter the setname of SetA containing the patches to search from for side
A of the connection. The GS or GA node is projected onto a patch from
this set and all further patches involved in the connection are
automatically selected from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint
with the set entered in the 2nd field of this data block, but the search
procedure is facilitated if it is.
5th data block

1-32
1st
If left blank, a point connection is assumed on this side.

33-64
2nd
Enter the setname of SetB containing the patches to search from for side
B of the connection. The GS or GB node is projected onto a patch from this
set and all further patches involved in the connection are automatically
selected from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set
entered in the 1st field of this data block, but the search procedure is
facilitated if it is.
If left blank, a point connection is assumed on this side.
For the ELPAT method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5
1st
location.
6-10
2nd
Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side A of

the connection.
353 CWELD
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GA node will be projected
onto this patch.
If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.
11-15
3rd
Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side B of

the connection
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 10 field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GB node will be projected
onto this patch.
16-20
4th

If not blank and GB on field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.
21-25
5th

If not blank and GA on field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.
26-35
6th
36-45
7th
46-55
8th
56-60
9th
elements).
61-65
10th
Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 3rd field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for
shell elements).
Enter the setname of SetA containing the patches to search from for side
A of the connection. The GS or GA node is projected onto the master patch
specified in the 2nd field of the 4th data block and all further patches
involved in the connection are automatically selected from the set.
5th data block

1-32
1st
If the master patch is a shell element, this field can be left blank and all
shell elements in the model are considered.
If the master patch is the face of a continuum element, a face set is
required here.
CWELD 354
Format
Fixed
33-64
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the setname of SetB containing the patches to search from for side
B of the connection. The GS or GB node is projected onto the master patch
specified in the 3rd field of the 4th data block and all further patches
involved in the connection are automatically selected from the set.
If the master patch is a shell element, this field can be left blank and all
shell elements in the model are considered.
If the master patch is the face of a continuum element, a face set is
required here.
For the ELEMID method, enter the 4th data block as follows:
4th data block
1-5
1st
location. If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8.
GS is ignored if GA on field 4 and GB on field 5 are both nonzero.
6-10
2nd
Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side A of

the connection.
data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GA node is projected onto
this patch.
11-15
3rd
Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side B of

the connection.
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 10th field of
this data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GB node is projected
onto this patch.
16-20
4th

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A
21-25
5th

26-35
6th
36-45
7th
46-55
8th
355 CWELD
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
56-60
9th
elements).
61-65
10th
Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 3rd field
elements).
For the GRIDID method, enter the 4th, 5th and 6th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate cweld
location.
If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8. GS is
ignored if GA on field 4 and GB on field 5 are both nonzero.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD. If blank, GS is used
for the projection on side A.
21-25
5th
Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD. If blank, GS is
used for the projection on side B.
26-35
6th
36-45
7th
46-55
8th
56-65
9th
Enter the value of SPTYP defining the surface patch combination being
connected as one of QQ, TT, QT, TQ, Q, or T.
This field is optional and may be left blank.
5th data block

If this data block is blank, a point connection is assumed on side A.
1-5
1st
Enter the node number GA1.
6-10
2nd
Enter the node number GA2.
11-15
3rd
Repeat until all nodes of the patch on side A have been defined. A patch
can have up to 8 nodes.
CWELD 356
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

If this data block is blank, a point connection is assumed on side B.
1-5
1st
Enter the node number GB1.
6-10
2nd
Enter the node number GB2.
11-15
3rd
Repeat until all nodes of the patch on side B have been defined. A patch
can have up to 8 nodes.
For the ALIGN method, enter the 4th data block as follows:
4th data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD. May be blank if the
element is entered through the CONNECTIVITY option.
21-25
5th
Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD. May be blank if
the element is entered through the CONNECTIVITY option.
357 PWELD
Connector Element Property
PWELD
Description
The properties of the cweld connector element are entered through the PWELD option. The geometrical
properties of the connector element between the two patches may also be entered here instead of entering
them through the GEOMETRY option. The PWELD option contains the following information:
PWID, D, MID, LDMIN, LDMAX, WTYPE
EGEOM1, EGEOM2, ..., EGEOM8
The first line defines the general CWELD characteristics. If the second field on the first line (D) is
nonzero, it represents the characteristic diameter (3-D analysis) or thickness (2-D analysis) of the
CWELD that will be used to compute the positions of the auxiliary nodes. It also defines the cross-section
properties if no further geometric data is supplied. PWID is the PWELD identifier referenced on the
CWELD option. LDMIN and LDMAX are the minimum and maximum length to diameter ratios of the
CWELD. WTYPE defines the connection type as either a general connection or a spotweld connection.
MID is a material identification number.
The second line defines the geometrical properties of the element in the same way they are defined in the
GEOMETRY option for the particular element type. The data required for each element type can be found
in Marc Volume B: Element Library. This second line is always required even when the characteristic
dimension (diameter or thickness) D has been defined and no further data is needed. In that case, it should
be left blank (or contain zeros only) and in 3-D models, the cross section will be circular with diameter
D or in 2-D models, the cross section will be rectangular with thickness D and unit width. If the
characteristic dimension D on the first line is zero and the first field on the second line is nonzero, a
characteristic dimension will be estimated from the geometric properties. If the first field on the second
line is zero, a nonzero value for D is required on the first line when using a method that generates auxiliary
nodes and patches for its connections because it is currently not possible to estimate a characteristic
diameter from BEAM SECT data. If the EGEOM4, EGEOM5, and EGEOM6 fields are all blank or zero, the
local directions of the connector element are determined by one of the two procedures outlined in the
Connector Orientation section of Marc Volume A: Theory and User information; otherwise, these values
are used to define the local directions. In the latter case, it is possible to use a coordinate system defined
at the first node of the element, but it is not possible to offset its nodes. If the geometrical properties are
defined in both the PWELD and GEOMETRY options for the same connector element, the properties
defined in the PWELD option are used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PWELD.
PWELD 358
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of PWELD data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the value for PWID, the PWELD identification number.
6-15
2nd
Enter the characteristic dimension D of the CWELD. If blank or zero,

Marc will make an estimate if the cross-section data are not entered
through the BEAM SECT parameter.
In a 3-D analysis, D is the characteristic diameter.
In a 2-D analysis, D is the characteristic thickness and the section will
have a unit width.
16-20
3rd
Enter the value for MID; a material identification number to assign the
material properties.
21-30
4th
Enter the value of LDMIN; the smallest ratio of length to diameter for
stiffness calculation
Default is DLDMIN, which defaults to 0.2 if not specified on the
SWLDPRM option.
31-40
5th
Enter the value of LDMAX, the largest ratio of length to diameter for
stiffness calculation.
Default is DLDMAX, which defaults to 5.0 if not specified on the
SWLDPRM option.
41-50
6th
Enter the value for WTYPE, the type of connection as SPOT for a spotweld
connector or leave blank for a general connector.
4th data block

1-10
1st
EGEOM1
11-20
2nd
EGEOM2
21-30
3rd
EGEOM3
31-40
4th
EGEOM4
41-50
5th
EGEOM5
51-60
6th
EGEOM6
61-70
7th
EGEOM7
71-80
8th
EGEOM8
359 SWLDPRM
Parameters for CWELD Connectors
SWLDPRM
Description
A number of global parameters that control the behavior of CWELD and CFAST connections and their
output to the jobid.out file can be entered through this model definition option. These parameters and
their descriptions are summarized in Table 3-3.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SWLDPRM.
Enter the name of the first parameter.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
11-
2nd
3rd
4th
E or I Enter the value for the first parameter.

A
Enter the name of the second parameter.
E or I Enter the value for the second parameter.
A maximum of four parameter,value pairs can be entered per line, but it may also be less. The
parameter,value pairs can appear in any order. A parameter and its value cannot occur in different lines;
they must appear on the same line. At least one pair is required per line. The second data block can be
repeated as many times as desired. If a parameter is defined more than once, the last assigned value is the
active value.
Table 3-3
Name
SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions
Type
Default
Description
CHKRUN
Integer > 0
(0 or 1)
This parameter is available in MD Nastran but has no

meaning in Marc and is ignored.
GSMOVE
Integer > 0
Maximum number of times GS is moved in case a

complete projection of all points has not been found.
NREDIA
0 < Integer < 4
Maximum number of times the characteristic diameter

D is reduced in half in case a complete projection of all
points has not been found.
SWLDPRM 360
Table 3-3
Name
PRTSW
SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions (continued)
Type
0 < Integer < 4
Default
0
Description
Parameter to control the CWELD/CFAST diagnostic
output to the Marc output file (jobid.out).
0 = no diagnostic output
1 = print errors only
2 = print errors and warnings only
3 = print projection diagnostics with no tying details
4 = print all diagnostics
GSPROJ
-90 < Real < 90
20.0
Maximum angle allowed between the normal vectors of

master patch A and master patch B. The connection will
not be generated if the angle between these two normal
vectors is greater than the value of GSPROJ. If GSPROJ
is negative, the program will always accept the
connection and will only issue a warning if the angle is
larger than |GSPROJ| (see Figure 9-62 in Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information).
GSCURV
-90 < Real < 90
20.0
Maximum angle allowed between the normal vectors of

a patch to which an auxiliary node projects and its
corresponding auxiliary and master patches. It provides
a measure to monitor the curvature of a surface and to
recognize patches that belong to, for example, stiffeners.
A connection is not generated if the angle between the
normal vectors is greater than 90-GSCURV meaning
that the patches are almost normal to each other. In that
case, the patch is rejected and the search proceeds to the
next patch in the list. If the angle is between zero and
GSCURV, no message is displayed. If the angle is between
GSCURV and 90-GSCURV, a large angle warning is
displayed. The following three tests are performed in the
order given below when GSCURV is positive:
If 0 < angle < GSCURV => OK
If GSCURVE < angle < 90-GSCURV => trigger a warning.
If angle > 90-GSCURV => reject.
Note that the warning condition is never triggered when
GSCURV > 45 as it is overruled by the reject condition.
If GSCURV is negative, the projection is always accepted
and a warning is issued when the angle is larger than
|GSCURV| (see Figure 9-62 in Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information)
361 SWLDPRM
Table 3-3
Name
Type
Default
Description
GSTOL
Real
0.0
Maximum allowable distance of the node GS to its

projection on a patch. IF GSTOL is positive, the distance
is relative to the characteristic CWELD/CFAST diameter
D, (the tolerance is GSTOL*D). If GSTOL is negative, the
distance is absolute (i.e., the tolerance is -GSTOL). If GS
is used for the projection together with one of the
methods PARTPAT/PROP or ELPAT/ELEM, an error is
issued if the distance is too large. If GA and GB are used
for the projection or if one of the ELEMID or GRIDID
methods is used, the test only issues a warning if the
distance is too large. If GSTOL is zero, any distance
is accepted.
PROJTOL
0.0 < Real < 0.2 0.0
Tolerance to accept the projected point GA or GB if the

computed coordinates of the projection point lie outside
the patch boundary, but are located within
PROJTOL*(dimension of the patch).
ACTVTOL
Integer > 0
Parameter controlling the behavior of PROJTOL for the

different CWELD/CFAST connection methods. This
parameter is entered as an integer and is converted to a
four-character string. If its value is less than 1000, the
string is prepended with zeros. The first character (from
the left) controls the behavior when the PARTPAT/PROP
method is used. The second controls the behavior when
the ELPAT/ELEM method is used. The third controls the
behavior when the ELEMID method is used and the
fourth controls the behavior when the GRIDID method is
used. For ALIGN, the PROJTOL tolerance has no
significance. Each digit d i in the string can have the
Integer < 2211
1111
value 0 or 1 or 2, where the value 2 only has significance

for the ELPAT/ELEM or PARTPAT/PROP methods. The
values have the following meaning:
0 = PROJTOL is completely deactivated
SWLDPRM 362
Table 3-3
Name
Type
Default
Description
1 = PROJTOL is activated for ELEMID and GRIDID,
PROJTOL is activated in initial projections for
ELPAT/ELEM, PROJTOL is only activated over free
edges of the patch in auxiliary projections for
ELPAT/ELEM, and in initial and auxiliary
projections for PARTPAT/PROP. Free edges have
no neighbors within the set that defines the
complete surface.
ACTVTOL
(cont)
2 = PROJTOL is always activated

CWSETS
Integer > 0
(0 or 1)
Parameter to control the automatic creation of four

element sets with the elements involved in the
CWELD/CFAST connections.
0 = the sets are not created
1 = four sets are created automatically:
fastener_all_beams_inc000, the set
containing all connector beam elements.
fastener_all_faces_sidea_inc0000,
the set containing all elements with patches on side
A of the connection.
fastener_all_faces_sideb_inc0000,
the set containing all elements with patches on side
B of the connection.
fastener_all_warnings_inc0000, the set
containing all elements involved in CWELD/CFAST
warning messages.
Defining sets with any of these names must be avoided
and are considered an error.
MAXEXP
Integer > 0
Parameter to control the maximum number of

expansions in the search for projections of the auxiliary
nodes. First, the master patch is tried. If no projection is
found on the master patch, a first expansion is made
including all neighboring patches of the master patch. If
no projection is found on any of the new patches, a
second expansion is made including all neighbors of the
patches tried so far. This process continues until the
number of expansions exceeds MAXEXP. Two patches are
neighbors if they share at least one node in their
connectivities.
DLDMIN
Real > 0.0
0.2
Default value for LDMIN; the smallest ratio of length to

characteristic diameter.
363 SWLDPRM
Table 3-3
Name
Type
Default
Description
DLDMAX
Real > 0.0
5.0
Default value for LDMAX; the largest ratio of length to

characteristic diameter.
MAXITR
Integer > 0
25
The maximum number of iterations allowed in the

iteration process for finding the projection on a patch.
EPSITR
Real > 0.0
1.0E-5
Tolerance to terminate the iteration process for finding

the projection on a patch. If the parametric coordinate
change in an iteration is less than EPSITR, the projection
is accepted as converged.
DELMAX
Real > 0.0
0.1
Maximum allowable parametric coordinate change

during the iteration process for finding the projection on
a patch. At first DELMAX is not activated (i.e., the
parametric coordinate change is not limited during the
iteration process). The parameter is only activated when
the full Newton Raphson iteration process for a
projection did not converge. In that case, the iteration
process is restarted with DELMAX activated.
CWSPOT
0 < Integer < 3
Parameter to choose the method for modifying the

beam length.
1 = scale the stiffness of the beam
2 = reposition the end nodes of the beam
3 = reposition the auxiliary patch nodes and the end
nodes of the beam.
RBE3WT
Real
0.0
Default RBE3 distance weighting exponent.

The weight factor for each retained node in a RBE3
1
involved in a CWELD/CFAST connection is: f i = ---n
di
where
fi
is the weighting factor for retained node i.
di
is the distance from the tied node to retained node i
is the weighting exponent RBE3WT.
Negative values for RBE3WT are not recommended,

since they result in heavier weighting for nodes further
away. The default results in uniform weighting
fi = 1 .
SWLDPRM 364
Table 3-3
Name
BOXING
Type
Default
-1 < Integer < 1 0
Description
Parameter to control the boxing algorithm used to speed
up the search for master patches when connection
method PARTPAT/PROP is used.
-1 =The boxing algorithm is always deactivated
0 = The boxing algorithm may or may not be activated
depending on the number of elements in the sets.
1 = The boxing algorithm is always activated
365 SUPERELEM (Model Definition)

Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface
SUPERELEM
(Model Definition)
Description
This option triggers Marc to perform the Craig-Bampton method of Component Mode Synthesis and
generate a Modal Neutral File (MNF) that can be uploaded into MD Adams models to represent flexible
components. The option allows direct definition of the boundary or interface degrees of freedom. The
option also allows automatic definition of interface degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact
with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint
analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are not known a priori. It also allows the specification
of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The
two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies are consolidated into one node with six degrees of
freedom before exporting to the MNF.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SUPERELEM.
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to generate MNF.
2nd data block
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs. Data blocks 3a and 4a may be repeated if needed.
A. List of Interface Degrees of Freedom.
3a data block
1-80
1st
Enter a list of degrees of freedom.
1st
Enter a list of interface nodes.
4a data block
1-80
B. List of Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of all nodes in contact with
these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.
3b data block
1-5
1st
Enter -1.
1st
Enter a list of rigid contact bodies.
4b data block
1-80
SUPERELEM (Model Definition) 366

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
C. List of Load-controlled Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of the control
nodes of these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.
3c data block
1-5
1st
Enter -2.
1st
Enter a list of load-controlled rigid contact bodies.
4c data block
1-80
367 SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition)

Create DMIG of Substructure
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model

Definition)
Description
This option allows the creation of a DMIG file containing the stiffness associated with the degrees of
freedom specified here. This DMIG may be subsequently read into Marc or Nastran. The option allows
direct definition of the degrees of freedom. The option also allows automatic definition of interface
degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful
for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are
not known a priori. It also allows the specification of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes
of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies
are consolidated into one node with six degrees of freedom before exporting to the DMIG.
This option can only occur once in the analysis. However, it may be used in either the model definition
or the load increment section.
The DMIG will be written to file jidname_dmigst_inc, where:
jidname
is the job name
inc
is the increment number
Note:
If a node is subsequently going to be transformed, all degrees of freedom of all nodes must
be specified here.
This option may only be used with direct solution techniques.

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
2nd data block
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition) 368

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 to create a DMIG file.

Enter 3 to create a DMIGB file.
DMIGB uses a different output format, which results in a smaller file
(about one third of the size of a DMIG file). When a DMIGB file is
included in a Marc analysis, the program uses a column-wise storage
instead of a full in-core matrix storage. This memory reduction can be
important for large DMIG files. The DMIGB format can be used only
as input for a Marc analysis; it can not be used in a Nastran analysis.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter 0 if all stiffness terms written to DMIG.

Enter 1 if terms less than xf K 1 are filtered out.
Enter 2 if terms less than xf are filtered out.
31-40
7th
Enter the value used for filtering xf ; default = 1.e-8.
41-50
8th
Enter the name of the matrix; default is KAAX which is limited to

eight characters.
A.
List of Interface Degrees of Freedom.
3a data block
1-80
1st
1st
4a data block
1-80
3b data block
1-5
1st
Enter -1.
1st
4b data block
1-80
369 SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3c data block
1-5
1st
Enter -2.
1st
4c data block
1-80
DMIG-OUT (Model Definition) 370

Output Control of Matrices
DMIG-OUT (Model Definition)
Description
This option allows you to control the output of matrices into DMIG format. These matrices may then be
read in using the DMIG option and activated using either the B2GG, B2PP, K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP,
and P2G options within Marc or within MD Nastran. To output the substructure matrix, use the
SUPERELEM option. In the case of element matrix, they can either be written in the Marc global
(MSC.Nastran Basic) or a local coordinate system. Both symmetric and nonsymmetric matrices are
supported. Note that the scalar factor associated with the STIFSCALE option is not applied to the element
matrices. This option may be repeated in each loadcase.
The files created associated with element matrices have the names jidname_dmigXX_inc, where:
Jidname
is the job ID name
XX
is the suffix associated with the matrix type
ST
stiffness matrix
DF
differential stiffness matrix
MS
mass matrix
DM
damping matrix
CO
conductivity matrix
SP
specific heat matrix
Inc
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word DMIG-OUT.
The 2nd and 3rd, 4th and 5th, 6th and 7th, 8th and 9th, 10th and 11th, 12th and 13th data blocks are
entered as pairs as required.
2nd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the word STIFFNESS.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 for element matrices.

Enter 2 for global matrix.
Enter 3 for element and global matrices.
371 DMIG-OUT (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Frequency to write (default is every increment).

Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.
Enter -2 to switch off writing DMIG output.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 to output in Marc global (MSC.Nastran basic) (default).

Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is
always written in transformed system.
26-30
5th
Control of which element matrices are to be written. If only the global

matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.
Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).
Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.
Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.
Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.
31-35
6th
Enter 0 to output global stiffness in untied state.

Enter 1 to output global stiffness in tied state.
36-45
7th
Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Stiffness values below this

46-50
8th
Enter 1 if DMIG name is to be unique for each element matrix written to

the DMIG file. (default)
Enter 2 is all element matrices share the same name.
3rd data block

Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.
1-80
Enter a list of elements or bodies.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIFF MATRIX.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th


Format
Fixed
26-30
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I

31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
7th

5th data block

1-80
6th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words MASS MATRIX.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th

26-30
5th

31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
7th
Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Mass values below this

373 DMIG-OUT (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-80
8th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DAMPING MATRIX.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th
Enter 1 to output in Marc global, Nastran basic (default).

26-30
5th

31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
7th
Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Damping values below this

9th data block

1-80
10th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CONDUCTIVITY.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th

Format
Fixed
26-30
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I

31-35
6th
Enter 0 to output global conductivity in untied state.

Enter 1 to output global conductivity in tied state.
36-45
7th
Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Conductivity values below

this value will be ignored.
11th data block

1-80
12th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SPECIFIC.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th
26-30
5th

31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
7th
Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Specific heat values below

13th data block

1-80
375 BSQUEAL
Specify Data for Output of Matrices used in Brake Squeal Analysis
BSQUEAL
Description
This option allows the user to define inputs necessary for brake squeal analysis or general perturbation
complex eigenvalue analysis. Marc writes out normal contact stiffness and frictional stiffness in DMIG
format for normal contact (nonglued) interfaces. This data is used by Nastran in a complex
eigenvalue analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word BSQUEAL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of pairs of Master-Slave for normal stiffness and frictional

stiffness output in DMIG format.
6-10
2nd
If set to 1, write at increment 1 (before actual nonlinear analysis) (default).

If set to 2, write after last increment (after nonlinear analysis).
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 for conventional brake squeal based upon rotating axis (default).
Set to 2 for calculation based on conventional sliding contact.
16-20
4th
Enter unit number of read data. Default is standard input (5).
The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated for each set of contact body pairs.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
First contact flexible body ID.
6-10
2nd
Second contact flexible body ID.
11-20
3rd
Enter the friction coefficient.

If 0, the friction coefficient is obtained from the CONTACT TABLE option
21-25
4th
Enter the table ID for the friction coefficient (only if value is given for
friction coefficient).
26-35
5th
Average stiffness per unit area (F/L3).
36-40
6th
Table ID of defining temperature-dependent average stiffness per unit

area.
Independent value is temperature only.
41-45
7th
Rotation ID associated with first flexible body ID.

If 0, the rotation axis is given on 4th data block
BSQUEAL 376
Format
Fixed
46-50
Free
8th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Rotation ID associated with second flexible body ID.

If 0, the second rotation axis is given on 5th data block
51-55
9th
Enter 0 if vector of stiffness and friction at tied node is the same as at

retained (default)
Enter 1 if vector of stiffness and friction at tied node is tangential at
the node.
56-60
10th
Enter 1 if using the UBSQUEAL user subroutine.
4th data block

1-10
1st
X-coordinate of center of rotation axis.
11-20
2nd
Y-coordinate of center of rotation axis.
21-30
3rd
Z-coordinate of center of rotation axis.
31-40
4th
For brake squeal, enter x-component of direction cosine of rotation axis.

For general contact, enter x-component of sliding direction cosine.
41-50
5th
For brake squeal, enter y-component of direction cosine of rotation axis.

For general contact, enter y-component of sliding direction cosine.
51-60
6th
For brake squeal, enter z-component of direction cosine of rotation axis.

For general contact, enter z-component of sliding direction cosine.
For general contact, leave the 5th data block blank.

For brake squeal, if there is only one axis, leave the 5th data block blank.
5th data block
1-10
1st
X-coordinate of center of second rotation axis.
11-20
2nd
Y-coordinate of center of second rotation axis.
21-30
3rd
Z-coordinate of center of second rotation axis.
31-40
4th
Enter x-component of direction cosine of second rotation axis.
41-50
5th
Enter y-component of direction cosine of second rotation axis.
51-60
6th
Enter z-component of direction cosine of second rotation axis.
377 MPCOUT (Model Definition)

Output Control of Tying Matrices (MPC Entries) for all Glued Contacts
MPCOUT (Model Output Control of Tying Matrices (MPC Entries) for all
Glued Contacts
Definition)
Description
This option allows the user to output tying matrices of all glued contacts in Nastran MPC format.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word MCPOUT.
Frequency to output tying matrix:
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 1 to write out in every increment (default).

Enter 2 to output only in the end of load case.
Enter 3 to switch off writing.
DMIG 378
Direct Matrix Input
DMIG
Direct Matrix Input
Description
This option is compatible with MD Nastran and allows the direct input of matrices at nodal points. It
permits matrices generated with either product to be entered into Marc.
The matrix is defined by a single header entry and one or more column entries. A column entry is required
for each column with nonzero element.
The matrix may only be used for real symmetric or nonsymmetric stiffness matrices, real mass matrices,
or for load matrices. The matrices are not activated unless a K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP, or P2G model
or history definition option is used.
It is advisable to have K2GG, M2GG, etc. placed before the DMIG in the input file.
Note:
This option must be in fixed format using the MD.Nastran conversion of ten fields per line
of width 8 or 16.
Header Entry Format

1
DMIG
NAME
"0"
IFO
TIN
TOUT
POLAR
G1
C1
10
NCOL
Column Entry Format

DMIG
NAME
GJ
CJ
G2
C2
A2
B2
DMIG
STIF
DMIG
STIF
27
2.5+10
A1
B1
3.+5
3.+3
1.0
0.
- etc. -
Example
4
2
0.
50
379 DMIG
Direct Matrix Input
Field
Contents
NAME
Name of the matrix. See Remark 1.(One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of
which is alphabetic.) The name is case sensitive.
IFO
Form of matrix input. IFO = 6 must be specified for matrices selected by the K2GG,
M2GG and B2GG options. (Integer)
1 = Square
9 or 2 = Rectangular
6 = Symmetric
TIN
Type of matrix being input: (Integer)

1 = Real, single precision (One field is used per element.)
2 = Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)
3 = Complex, single precision (Two fields are used per element.) (not available)
4 = Complex, double precision (Two fields are used per element.) (not available)
TOUT
Type of matrix created (not used; enter 0).
POLAR
Input format of Ai, Bi. (Integer=blank or 0 indicates real, imaginary format; Integer > 0
indicates amplitude, phase format.)
NCOL
Number of columns in a rectangular matrix. Used only for IFO = 9. See Remarks 5 and 6
(Integer > 0)
GJ
Node identification number for column index. (Integer > 0)
CJ
Degree of freedom number for node point GJ. (1 < Integer < 6;)
Gi
Node identification number for row index. (Integer > 0)
Ci
Degree of freedom number for Gi for a grid point. (1<CJ < 6)
Ai, Bi
Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the matrix is
real (TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)
Remarks
1. Matrices may also be selected for all simulations by K2GG = NAME and M2GG = NAME.
2. The header entry containing IFO, TIN, and TOUT is required. Each nonnull column is started
with a GJ, CJ pair. The entries for each row of that column follows. Only nonzero terms need be
entered. The terms may be input in arbitrary order. A GJ, CJ pair may be entered more than once,
but input of an element of the matrix more than once produces a fatal message.
3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer 0.
4. For symmetric matrices (IFO = 6), a given off-diagonal element may be input either below or
above the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a fatal message is issued
if an element is input both below and above the diagonal.
DMIG 380
Direct Matrix Input
5. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and IFO = 9. The
number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all rectangular DMIG matrices
is always the number of nodal points.) The GJ term is used for the column index. The CJ term is
ignored.
6. If NCOL is not used for rectangular matrices, it is taken to be the maximum number of degrees of
freedom per node.
7. The matrix names must be unique among all DMIGs.
8. TIN should be set consistent with the number of decimal digits required to read the input data
adequately. For a single-precision specification on a short-word machine, the input is truncated
after about eight decimal digits, even when more digits are present in a double-field format. If
more digits are needed, a double precision specification should be used instead. However, note
that a double precision specification requires a D type exponent even for terms that do not need
an exponent. For example, unity may be input as 1.0 in single precision, but the longer form 1.0D0
is required for double precision.
Note:
In Marc, all matrices are stored as double precision.
381 K2GG, K2PP (Model Definition)

Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix
K2GG, K2PP (Model Definition)
Description
This option activates or deactivates a stiffness matrix defined by the DMIG option.
This option should be in the input file before the matrix is read in by the DMIG option.
Note:
If transformation or rigid body rotations of the stiffness matrix are to occur, all degrees of
freedom of the nodes must appear on the DMIG file.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word K2GG or K2PP.
11-20
2nd
Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.
21-25
3rd
Enter 0 or 1 to activate matrix.

Enter -1 to deactivate matrix.
26-35
4th
Enter scale factor; default is 1.0.
36-40
5th
Not used; enter 0.
41-45
6th
Enter 0 to suppress the transformation to the stiffness matrix although a

transformation has been applied to the node (default - this implies that the
stiffness matrix used is provided in the transformed system).
Enter 1 to apply transformations to the stiffness matrix.
46-50
7th
Enter first node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.
51-55
8th
Enter second node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.
56-60
9th
Enter third node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.
Remarks
1. DMIG matrices are not used unless selected.
2. Terms are added to the stiffness matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. A scale factor may be applied to the stiffness matrix specified here or to all stiffness matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CK2 entry.
4. If a transformation is to be applied to the stiffness matrix, the DMIG must contain all of the
degrees of freedom associated with the node to which the transformation is applied.
5. Large rotation DMIG is based upon the node numbers given in the 7th, 8th, and 9th fields. If only
the 7th field is used, then the rotation is based upon the rotation degrees of freedom of this node.
If all these nodes are specified, then a triad is formed, and the rotation of this triad is used.
M2GG, M2PP (Model Definition) 382

Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix
M2GG, M2PP (Model Definition)
Description
This option activates or deactivates a mass matrix defined by the DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixe
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word M2GG or M2PP.
11-20
2nd
21-25
3rd

26-35
4th
Remarks
2. Terms are added to the mass matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain a 6.
4. M2GG input must either be in consistent mass units or the COEFFICIENT model definition option,
CM2 entry may be used.
383 B2GG, B2PP (Model Definition)

Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix
B2GG, B2PP (Model Definition)
Description
This option activates or deactivates a damping matrix for dynamic or harmonic analysis defined by the
DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word B2GG or B2PP.
11-20
2nd
21-25
3rd

26-35
4th
Remarks
2. Terms are added to the damping matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain the integer 6.
4. A scale factor may be applied to the damping matrix specified here or to all damping matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CB2 entry.
P2G (Model Definition) 384

Selects Direction Input Load Vector
P2G (Model Definition)
Description
This option activates or deactivates a load vector defined by the DMIG option. This load vector may be
scaled by referencing a table which is a function of time.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word P2G.
11-20
2nd
21-25
3rd
Enter 0 or 1 to activate the load vector.

Enter -1 to deactivate the load vector.
26-30
4th
31-35
5th
Enter a table ID.
Remarks
1. Terms are added to the load matrix before any constraints are applied.
2. The matrix must be rectangular in form (i.e., field 4 on DMIG entry - IFO -must contain the integer
9).
3. A scale factor may be applied to the vector specified here or to all vectors via the COEFFICIENT
model definition option entry.
385 BACKTOSUBS (Model Definition)

Recover Substructure Output
BACKTOSUBS (Model Definition)
Recover Substructure Output
Description
This option allows you to perform a displacement and stress calculation for the substructure. It can be
followed by output control options, such as PRINT ELEMENT, PRINT CHOICE, POST, etc.
The file containing the displacements of the external nodes is given using the -sid option when the job
is submitted.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word BACKTOSUBS.
MNF UNITS 386

MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units
MNF UNITS
Description
This option defines the units used to define the model. If this option is not included, default is SI units
(kilogram, meter, second, Newton). This option is only used for creating the MNF file.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word MNF UNITS.
Enter mass unit:
2nd data block

1-5
1st
1: kilogram
2: pound mass
3: slug
4: gram
5: ounce mass
6: kpound mass
7: megagram
8: dozen slug
6-10
2nd
Enter length unit:

1: kilometer
2: meter
3: centimeter
4: millimeter
5: mile
6: foot
7: inch
11-15
3rd
Enter time unit:

1: hour
2: minute
3: second
4: millisecond
387 MNF UNITS

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter force unit:

1: newton
2: pound force
3: kilogram force
4: ounce force
5: dyne
6: kNewton
7: kpound force
STIFSCALE 388
Define Stiffness Scaling Factor
STIFSCALE
Define Stiffness Scaling Factor
Description
This option allows the contributions of an element stiffness and mass matrix to be scaled before including
them into the global stiffness matrix. The distributed loads associated with the element are also scaled.
Note that this is a scalar multiple; no transformation occurs.
Caution:
If you use this option, you must define the scale factor for all elements; the default is zero.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word STIFSCALE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sets to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number from which the following data is read. Defaults
to input.
Enter scaling factor.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
4th data block

Enter a list of elements for which the above scaling is applied.
389 COEFFICIENT
Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices
COEFFICIENT
Description
This option allows you to put in global coefficients that can be used to either define or scale matrices. It
allows compatibility with MD Nastran PARAM of the same names that are used here.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word COEFFICIENT.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the value of ALPHA1 mass coefficient of Rayleigh Damping

(default=0.0). If the DAMPING model definition option is included, the
value entered here is ignored.
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of ALPHA2 stiffness coefficient of Rayleigh Damping

(default=0.0). If the DAMPING model definition option is included, the
value entered here is ignored.
21-30
3rd
Enter the value of CB1, factor applied to spring damping matrix. Default
is 1.0
31-40
4th
Enter the value of CB2, factor applied to damping DMIG, default is 0.0
unless, B2GG references DMIG.
41-50
5th
Enter the value of CK1, factor applied to element stiffness matrix, and
springs. Default is 1.0
51-60
6th
Enter the value of CK2, factor applied to Stiffness DMIG; default is 0.0
unless, K2GG references DMIG.
61-70
7th
Enter the value of CK3, factor applied to stiffness matrix from user
element (USELEM user subroutine). Default =1.0
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID for ALPHA1.
6-10
2nd
Enter table ID for ALPHA2.
11-15
3rd
Enter table ID for CB1.
16-20
4th
Enter table ID for CB2.
21-25
5th
Enter table ID for CK1.
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
COEFFICIENT 390
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the value of CM1 factor applied to element mass matrix, and mass
points. Default is 1.0
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of CM2, factor applied to Mass DMIG; default is 0.0
unless M2GG references DMIG.
21-30
3rd
Enter the value of CM3, factor applied to use-defined element mass

matrix. Default is 1.0
31-40
4th
Enter the value of CP1, factor applied to external loads, this is only
allowed if the ELASTIC parameter is included. Caution should be
exercised if the load is due to centrifugal effects, as this reflects a scaling
of the mass, not the rotational speed.
41-50
5th
Enter the value of CP2, factor applied to load DMIG; default is 0.0 unless
P2G references DMIG.
51-60
6th
Enter the value of CP3, factor applied to external load associated with
user-defined elements. Default is 1.0
61-70
7th
Enter the value of G, uniform structural coefficient in the formulation of

dynamic problems. Default is 0.0
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID for CM1.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Enter table ID for CP1.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Enter table ID for G.
6th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the value of W3, coefficient in damping matrix; default is 0.0,

indicating do not include term.
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of W4, coefficient in damping matrix; default is 0.0,

indicating do not include term.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID for W3.
6-10
2nd
Enter table ID for W4.
391 COEFFICIENT
Remarks
1. If the DAMPING model definition option is used to specify different damping coefficients based
upon the element number, it is assumed to be active for all elements, and ALPHA1, ALPHA2, and
CB1 coefficients are ignored.
2. If the STIFSCALE model definition option is used to specify scale factors based upon the element
number, it is assumed to be active for all elements and the CK1, CK3, CM1, CM3, CP1, and CP3
coefficients are ignored.
DEACTIVATE (Model Definition) 392

Deactivate Elements
DEACTIVATE (Model Definition)
Deactivate Elements
Description
This option allows you to deactivate elements during the course of an analysis, which can be useful to
model ablation or excavation. By default, after the elements are deactivated, they demonstrate zero
stresses and strains on the post file. However, internally, they retain the stress state in effect at the time
of deactivation and this state can be postprocessed or printed at any time. At a later stage in the analysis,
the elements can again be activated with the ACTIVATE history definition option. As an alternative, you
can use the UACTIVE user subroutine. The stress state is restored on the post file when the elements are
reactivated. If this is not desirable, the stress/strain states can be permanently set to zero at deactivation
by using the additional command line option STRESS/STRAIN.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word DEACTIVATE.
11-20
2nd
Enter the word STRESS to set the stresses to zero.
21-30
3rd
Enter the word STRAIN to set the strains to zero.
31-40
4th
Enter the word POST to update the post file geometry so deactivated
elements are not shown.
41-50
5th
Enter the word NOPO to not update the post file geometry; the deactivated
elements are shown.
2nd data block

1-80
1st
Enter the list of elements to be deactivated at this time.
393 ERROR ESTIMATE

Create Error Estimation
ERROR ESTIMATE
Create Error Estimation
Description
You can request that Marc give information regarding the error associated with the finite element
discretization. There are two measures; the first evaluates the stress discontinuity between elements. A
large value implies that the stresses gradients are not accurately represented in the finite element mesh.
In a classical linear elastic solution, this could be resolved by choosing quadratic elements over linear
elements or refining the mesh.
The second error measure examines geometric distortion in the model. It first examines the aspect ratios
and warpage of the elements and in subsequent increments measures how much these ratios change. This
measure can be used to indicate if the original mesh is good and whether, at a later time, rezoning
is required.
The evaluation of the stress error measure is moderately expensive. The evaluation of the geometric error
measure is very inexpensive.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ERROR ESTIMATE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 1 if the stress measure is to be evaluated.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if the geometric measure is to be evaluated.
USDATA 394
Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization
USDATA
Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization
Description
This option invokes the call to the USDATA user subroutine for the initialization of user variables. These
variables (data) are stored in a common block USDACM that can be used in other user subroutines. This
option also provides for the definition of the amount of memory for the data in the common block in
REAL*4 words. If this memory is specified as nonzero, the data is automatically saved on the restart file
for use in subsequent analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word USDATA.
11-15
2nd
Enter the number of REAL*4 words needed for the data stored in
common block USDAM via the USDATA user subroutine.
395
Program Control
Chapt Program Control

er 3: This section of the document describes various program control options. The information in this section
relevant to all types of analyses (mechanical, heat, Joule, bearing, acoustic, electrostatic,
Mode ismagnetostatic,
and electromagnetic). In particular, the CASE COMBIN option allows you to combine
separate load cases obtained from elastic analyses. The SOLVER option is used to control the solution
l
procedure of the linearized equations. The default is the direct solvers; as an alternative, the iterative
Defini solver can be chosen. The OPTIMIZE option is very important to minimize the computational cost of the
analysis, as the cost of analysis is proportional to the square of the size of the bandwidth. (Options POST,
tion
PRINT CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, PRINT SPRING, PRINT CONTACT, PRINT NODE, NODE SORT,
Optio SUMMARY, ELEM SORT, and UDUMP all control the amount and method that you can obtain the
resultant quantities.) The RESTART option is important for all nonlinear analysis or for postprocessing
ns
with Marc. As the solution to nonlinear problems is obtained using the incremental technique, the
RESTART option is used to stop the analysis (checkpoint) and then continue it at some later time.
The REAUTO option is used to overwrite previously defined control values upon restarting an analysis.
The POST option is used to control the database that is used by Marc Mentat and MD Patran
for postprocessing.
CASE COMBIN 396

Combine Load Cases
CASE COMBIN
Combine Load Cases
Description
This option allows you to combine different load cases for an elastic analysis. Each load case must be
stored on a RESTART file and then combined with other cases as a scalar multiple (LAMBDA) of itself.
All output element variables and nodal variables are combined.
This option can be used only in conjunction with the ELASTIC parameter. A new restart file of the
resulting combination is written as increment 0 if it is requested.
The use of the CASE COMBIN option precludes the addition of any further load cases in the same run.
Cases can only be combined from restart files.
This option can be used to perform the superposition of the results of a Fourier analysis at certain
locations around the circumference. The positions for which superposition is requested can be either
equally spaced or specified by you.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the words CASE COMBIN.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of load cases to be read in and combined.
6-10
2nd
Number of stations for superposition of Fourier analysis. If input as a

positive number the stations are equally spaced around the circumference
starting at = 0. If preceded by a minus sign, the - values are read from
data lines.
3rd data block

Only used for Fourier result superposition and if the second integer on the 2nd data block is negative.
1-10
1st
Value of in degrees for first printout station.
11-20
2nd
Value of in degrees for second printout station.

Continuation data is in Format 8E10.0.
397 CASE COMBIN

Combine Load Cases
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

The 4th data block is repeated for each load case.
1-5
1st
Increment number on restart file to be read for this load case.
6-10
2nd
Input file number for restart file to be read. Default is Unit 9.
11-20
3rd
LAMBDA Scalar multiplication factor to be used with this load case.

Default is 1.0.
SOLVER (Model Definition) 398

Specify Direct or Iterative Solver
SOLVER (Model Definition)
Description
This option defines the solver to be used in the analysis. You can specify either the direct or iterative
solver. The choice of whether the in-core or out-of-core procedure is used is automatically determined
by Marc, based upon the amount of workspace required and the amount of memory that can be allocated.
You can also select whether a symmetric or nonsymmetric solver is used. Additionally, you can specify
if the solution of a nonpositive definite system is to be obtained.
For DDM, an out-of-core procedure is only available for solver type 8. As a convenience, it is necessary
to specify the control parameters for the decoupled pre-conditioner only in the first domain file.
When the iterative solver, type 2 or type 9, is chosen, additional parameters must be defined which are
used to control the accuracy.
Notes:It is not recommended to use the iterative solver type 2 for beam or shell models, because these
problems are ill conditioned, resulting in a large number of iterations. For a well-conditioned
system, the number of iterations should be less than the square root of the total number of degrees
of freedom in the system.
You control the maximum number of iterations allowed. If this is a positive number, Marc stops
if this is exceeded. If this is a negative number, Marc prints a warning and continues to the next
Newton-Raphson iteration or increment.
The Pardiso solver can only be used on shared memory computers.
The MUMPS solver can be used on either shared memory or distributed memory computers.
Solver types 6, 10, and 11 are not available on all hardware platforms. If the solver type is not
supported, solver type 8 is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
1st data block
1-10
1st
2nd data block
1-5
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word SOLVER.
Solver Type, enter:

0 for profile direct solver.
2 for sparse iterative.
4 for sparse direct solver
6 for hardware provided direct sparse solver
8 for multifrontal direct sparse solver.
399 SOLVER (Model Definition)

9 for CASI iterative solver.

10 for mixed direct/iterative solver.
11 for Pardiso parallel direct solver.
12 for MUMPS parallel direct solver
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 for solving a nonsymmetric system. Only available for solver

types 0, 8, 11 and 12. (Not supported for DDM.)
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if the solution of nonpositive definite system is to be obtained.
16-20
4th
Enter the solution procedure (0, 1, 2) when using DDM.

Solver Type
Procedure
D/I
N/A
D/I
11
12
I/I
D/I
I/I
N/A
Full K
D/I
I/I
Full K
Full K
Full K
Full K
I/I
Full K
Full K
I/I
D/I
D/I
D/I
I/I
D/I
D/I
where D/I means do a direct solve in the domains and an iterative solution
between the domains.
where I/I means do an iterative solution in the domains and an iterative
solution between the domains.
where Full K means form a complete stiffness matrix and use the parallel
direct solution.
21-25
5th
Maximum number of iterations in inter-domain iterative solver (default

is 500)
26-30
6th
Size of domain overlap for parallel CASI solver, default is 2. A negative

number turns off the overlap.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Enter, in millions, the number of four-byte words to be used by solver type

6, 8, or 10 before going out-of-core. Default is the same behavior as for
other solvers. For solver type 6, this option is only available on SGI. For
solver type 8 or 10, it is available on all platforms.
41-45
9th
Not used; enter 0.
46-50
10th
Used for parallel CASI solver to input coarse preconditioner type.

Enter 0 to use coarse preconditioner (default).
Enter -1 to not use coarse preconditioner.
51-55
11th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
12th
Not used; enter 0.
61-65
13th
Not used; enter 0.
SOLVER (Model Definition) 400

66-70
14th
Enter 1 to activate AUTOSPC when singularity occurs. This is only

applicable to the direct solvers except types 11 and 12.
Enter -1 to deactivate AUTOSPC.
71-75
15th
Not used; enter 0.
76-80
16th
For parallel CASI solver

Enter 1 for domain pre-conditioner (default)
Enter 2 for global preconditioner (uses more memory).
The 3rd data block is only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9 (CASI). It may
also be used with the solver type 10.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter maximum number of conjugate-gradient iterations. Default is 1000.

For solver type 10, set to 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if the previous solution is to be used as the initial trial solution.
11-15
3rd
Solver type 2:
Enter 3 for diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 4 for scaled-diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 5 for incomplete Cholesky preconditioner.
Solver type 9:
Enter 0 for CASI Primal Preconditioner.
Enter 1 for CASI Standard Preconditioner.
Solver type 10:
Enter 0; not used.
The 4th data block is only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9 (CASI). It may
also be used with solver type 10 if the 3rd data block is also entered. It may be used with DDM if the
inter-domain iterative solver is used (pre-conditioner type 0 or 3) in the 4th field of the 2nd data block.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter tolerance on conjugate gradient convergence for stress analysis.

The default for solver type 2 is 1.e-3.
When using the multifrontal direct sparse solver, one can specify the number of threads when submitting
a job by using the nthread command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nthread ntx
where ntx is the number of threads.
401 SOLVER (Model Definition)

When using the Pardiso solver, one needs to specify the number of threads when submitting a job by
using the nthread command line option. As an example, one would use:
When using the MUMPS parallel solver, one needs to specify the number of processors when submitting
a job by using the nsolver command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nsolver nsx
where nsx is the number of processors.

It is also possible to use the MUMPS parallel solver in a distributed environment over several processors;
each of which has multiple CPUs/cores. One would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nsolver nsx -nthread ntx.
where ntx should be defined as the total numbers of processors.

When using the Pardiso solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:
SOLVER
11
Additionally, one needs to specify the number of threads when submitting a job by using the nthread
command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx -nthread ntx
where ndx is the number of domains and ntx is the number of threads. The default number of threads is
equal to the number of domains.
When using the MUMPS parallel solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:
SOLVER
12
Additionally, one needs to specify the number of processors when submitting a job by using the nsolver
run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx -nsolver nsx
where nsx is the number of processors. If the nsolver option is not given, then nsx = ndx.
When using the CASI iterative solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:
SOLVER
9
run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx
OPTIMIZE 402
Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers
OPTIMIZE
Description
This option allows a choice of bandwidth optimizers to be invoked and is used to reduce computer costs
in larger problems. Note that this option creates an internal node numbering different from your node
numbering, but that all data input and output is in your node numbering system.
In addition, you can output the obtained correspondence table for later use. This correspondence table
can then be read in subsequent analyses.
In a deformable contact analysis, the bandwidth is re-optimized when the contact conditions change.
Note:
Gap elements can change the internal node numbers. This can result in a non-optimal node
numbering system.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the word OPTIMIZE.
11-15
2nd
Enter:
2 Cuthill-McKee algorithm.
5 Read externally supplied correspondence table from unit specified in
the fifth field.
9 Sloan Algorithm (default).
10 Minimum Degree Algorithm (only available for sparse direct solver
- Solver Type 4).
11 Metis Nested Dissection Algorithm (only available for Multifrontal
Direct Sparse Solver - Solver Type 8 or 10).
Note:
If sparse direct solver is used, the minimum degree

Algorithm is used by default.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 to have optimized mesh (elements then nodes) written to a file.

(Not available for optimizer 11.)
21-25
4th
Unit number of optimized mesh file. Only used if the third field is set to
1. Default is 18 if left blank.
403 OPTIMIZE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
5th
Unit number of correspondence table. If the second field is not equal to 5

the correspondence table is written to this unit. If the second field is 5 then
the correspondence table is read from this unit. (Not available for
optimizer 11.)
31-35
6th
Print flag for correspondence table.

Set to 1 to suppress print out (default).
Set to 2 to print table.
0
Special treatment of nodes with LM for R-P Flow and gap elements
for all analysis types (default).
Special treatment for all nodes with LM, all analysis types.
No special treatment for nodes with LM.
Option 2 Cuthill-McKee
2nd data block
1-5
1st
Number of different numbering schemes to be tried. Usually less than 20.
Option 5 User-specified Correspondence Table

2nd data block
1st
Internal node numbers, continuation in 16I5 format on logical unit

number given in the fifth field of data block 1.
Option 9 Sloan Algorithm

No continuation data.
Option 10 Minimum Degree Algorithms
Option 11 Metis Nested Dissection Algorithms
POST (Model Definition) 404

Create File for Postprocessing
POST (Model Definition)
Description
This option creates a postprocessor file for time-history or variable versus variable plots using Marc
Mentat or your own postprocessing. In the latter case, the file is accessed via the utility PLDUMP given
in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
You have two possibilities for the post file in association with restarted runs:
a. If the POST option follows the RESTART option, Marc first copies the previous post file onto
the new post file (up to the restart increment), thus providing a continuous post file from the
beginning of the analysis. The old post file is closed after it has been read. It is important that
the POST option of the restart job requests the same post variables to be written to the post
file as requested in the previous data file. Otherwise, loss of data or I/O errors can occur.
b. If the POST option precedes the RESTART option, the new post file contains only those
increments analyzed in the current run.
One or the other options should be chosen if (B) is used, a continuous post file is not created, so that
(A) cannot subsequently be used for this analysis unless you combine the files with your own program.
Note:
In a modal or buckling analysis in addition to POST option, the RECOVER history

definition option must be used for storing eigenvectors on post file.
Element data is written to the post file for each integration point of a continuum element or for the
integration points on the layer requested; unless, either the CENTROID parameter is used or the average
value is requested via the 14th field.
Note:
The stresses/strains are generally engineering stresses/strains in an analysis involving only

small deformations. In a geometrically nonlinear analysis, if the total Lagrangian
formulation is used, the stresses and the strains are the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress and
the Green-Lagrange strains, respectively. You can always request to output Cauchy stresses
(post code 41-47 and 341) in the post file. If the updated Lagrangian formulation is used in
the large deformation analysis, the stresses and the strains are generally Cauchy stresses
and the logarithmic strains, respectively.
405 POST (Model Definition)

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-4
1st
Enter the word POST.
Number of element variables to be written on the file (optional)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
For heat transfer, by default, the temperatures are written to a post file.
Enter -1 to suppresses this.
6-10
2nd
Unit number on which to open the new binary post file (jid.t16).
Defaults to unit 16 if left blank. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.
11-15
3rd
Unit number on which to open the previous binary post file (rid.t16)
for a restarted run. Defaults to unit 17 if left blank. Note that all data from
this file (up to the restart increment) is copied to the new file upon restart,
so that the post file is continuous from the start of the analysis, provided
the POST option follows the RESTART option.
16-20
4th
Set to 0 for binary post file.

Set to 1 for formatted post file.
Set to 2 for both binary and formatted post file.
21-25
5th
Set to 2 to generate a single post file in DDM runs. Defaults to multiple

post files.
26-30
6th
Unit number on which to open the new formatted post file (jid.t19).
Defaults to unit 19. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.
31-35
7th
Unit number on which to open the previous formatted post file for a restart
run. Defaults to unit 20. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.
36-40
8th
Set to 1 to convert restart file to post file with no analysis. Increments to be

converted are given in the third and eleventh field of RESTART model
definition section.
41-45
9th
Number of increments between writing of post data. Defaults to write post

file every increment.
46-50
10th
Number of user-defined post vectors.

Vector is defined UPOSTV in user subroutine. This field is only used for
7- and 8-style post files.
51-55
11th
Enter 7 to generate Marc K7 style post file.

Enter 8 to generate Marc 8 (not released) style post file.
Enter 9 to generate MSC.Marc 2000 style post file.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 12 to generate MSC.Marc 2005 style post file (default).
Enter 13 to generate MSC.Marc 2005r3 style post file.
56-60
12th
This field can be used for debugging purposes in a stress analysis:

Enter 0 if no iterative data is needed.
Enter 1 to get the iterative displacements.
Enter 2 to get the iterative displacements and reaction/residual forces.
Enter 3 to get the iterative displacements, reaction/residual forces and the
touched bodies in a contact analysis.
The iterative data is written as subincremental data.
Note:
61-65
13th
The use of this option can generate a huge post file since the
post data is written for every iteration.
Only for MSC.Marc 2000 and higher style post file.

Enter the total number of nodal post codes (including user-defined nodal
post codes).
If a 0 is entered a default set of nodal data is written on the post file,
depending on the analysis type.
If a -1 is entered, no nodal data is written.
Note:
66-70
14th
Displacements are not automatically written in the custom post

file unless explicitly chosen. Besides the chosen quantities, if
the deformation also needs to be visualized then the
displacements also need to be chosen as nodal quantities.
Enter 1 if per element only the average element integration point data
should be written on the post file. This might considerably reduce the size
of the post file, but some significant information might be lost.
The default is 0 where the element data is written on the post file for all
available integration points.
71-75
15th
Enter 1 if automatically generated extra nodes associated with element

types 80-84 and 155-157 do not appear on the post file.
The default is 0, where all the available nodes are written on the post file.
76-80
16th
Enter 1 to exclude forces caused by glued contact from the contact normal
and friction forces.
The default is 0 where the contact normal and friction forces also contain
the contributions due to glued contact.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Data blocks 3 and 4 are used for input of variables to be written on the post file. For 8- and lower style
post files, only element data can be selected and the nodal data is written by default. For 9- and higher
style post files, both element and nodal data can be selected. This data block is repeated for all selected
element variables, and, for 9- and higher style post files, all selected nodal variables.
3rd data block (POST Version 13)
Use for defining element post codes.
1-10
1st
Enter the word ELEMENT.
11-15
2nd
Enter an element post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-4.
16-20
3rd
Enter the layer number for shell elements or continuum composite

elements.
For post codes 471 and 481, enter the global identification number of the
rebar layer
21-68
4th
Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use
in postprocessing.
3rd data block (POST Version 12 and earlier)

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the layer number for shell elements or continuum composite

elements.
rebar layer
11-35
3rd
Enter a 24-character label associated with this post code for use in
postprocessing.
4th data block

Use for defining nodal post codes.
1-10
1st
Enter the word NODAL.
11-15
2nd
Enter a nodal post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-5.
16-63
3rd
Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use
in postprocessing.
Data blocks 5, 6, and 7 are used for post file version 13 or higher to select elements and nodes to be
written on the post file. They are all optional. If none of the block is present, all elements are written in
the post file.
5a data block
1-10
1st
Enter the words SELECT ELEMENT
Enter a list of elements to be written to post file.
5b data block
1-80
1st

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6a data block
1-10
1st
Enter the words SELECT BODY
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if all elements of the selected contact body are placed on post file
(default)
Enter 2 if only the elements on the exterior surface are placed on the post
file.
6b data block
1-80
Enter a list of contact bodies, for which the elements are to be written to
post file.
For the 7th data block, these nodes are in addition to nodes based upon element selection; typically, it
would be used for nodes not associated with elements.
7a data block
1-10
1st
Enter the words SELECT NODE
Enter a list of nodes to be written to post file.
7b data block
1-80

Table 3-4
Element Post Codes
Codes
Description
1-6
Components of strain. For rigid-perfectly plastic flow problems, components of strain rate
Equivalent plastic strain (integral of equivalent plastic strain rate). For rigid-perfectly
plastic flow problems, equivalent plastic strain rate
Equivalent creep strain (integral of equivalent creep strain rate)
Total temperature
10
Increment of temperature
11-16
Components of stress
17
Equivalent von Mises stress
18
Mean normal stress (tensile positive) for Mohr-Coulomb
19
User-defined variable via the PLOTV user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines.
20
Thickness of element
21-26
Components of plastic strain
27
Equivalent plastic strain. =
28
Plastic strain rate
29
Total value of second state variable
30
Forming Limit Parameter: FLP = calculated major engineering strain/maximum major

engineering strain
31-36
Components of creep strain
37
Equivalent creep strain. =
38
Total swelling strain (from the VSWELL user subroutine)
39
Total value of third state variable
41-46
Components of Cauchy stress
47
Equivalent Cauchy stress
48
Strain energy density
49
Thickness strain for plane stress: Mooney or Ogden material
51-56
Real components of harmonic stress
57
Equivalent real harmonic stress
58
Elastic strain energy density
59
Equivalent stress/yield stress
60
Equivalent stress/yield stress (at current temperatures)
2
--- ijp ijp
3
2
--- ijc ijc
3

Table 3-4
Element Post Codes (continued)
Codes
Description
61-66
Imaginary components of harmonic stress
67
Equivalent imaginary harmonic stress
68
Plastic strain energy density
69
Current volume if the updated Lagrange procedure is used.
71-76
Components of thermal strain
78
Original volume
79
Grain size
80
Damage indicator for Cockroft-Latham, Oyane, and Principal Stress criteria, and criteria
using the UDAMAGE_INDICATOR user subroutine.
81-86
Components of cracking strain (only for stress analysis)
91-107
Failure indices associated with failure criteria
108-109
Interlaminar shear for thick composite shells (TSHEAR parameter must be present)
110
Interlaminar shear bond index for thick composite shells (only available if TSHEAR
parameter is present and Allowable Shear Bond Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the
COMPOSITE option) = max(Interlaminar shear components given by post codes 108 and
109)/SB
111-116
Components of stress in preferred coordinate system defined by the ORIENTATION option
121-126
Elastic strain
127
Equivalent elastic strain
128
Major engineering strain
129
Minor engineering strain
175
Equivalent viscoplastic strain rate (powder material)
176
Relative density (powder material) (Total volumetric strain based)
177
Void volume fraction (damage model)
178
Lemaitre damage factor
179
Lemaitre relative damage
189
Fictive temperature for Narayanaswamy Shift Function for thermal rheologically simple
viscoelastic material
<0
241
Gasket Pressure
242
Gasket Closure
243
Plastic Gasket Closure

Table 3-4
Codes
Description
244
Exponential powder parameter ()
245
Exponential powder parameter (x)
246
Current relative density based upon plastic volumetric strain.
251
Global components of Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1
254
Global components of Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1
257
Interlaminar shear bond index for composite solids (only available if Allowable Shear Bond
Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the COMPOSITE option) = magnitude of interlaminar
shear vector calculated by post code 254/SB
261
Beam axis (required if beam moment plots are created with Marc Mentat). Orientation axis
of CBUSH/CFAST elements 194 and 195.
264
Axial Force (for beam elements)
265
Moment Mxx (for beam elements)
266
Moment Myy (for beam elements)
267
Shear Force Vxz (for beam elements)
268
Shear Force Vyz (for beam elements)
269
Torque (for beam elements)
270
Bimoment (for beam elements)
301
Total strains tensor
311
Stress tensor
321
Plastic strain tensor
331
Creep strain tensor
341
Cauchy stress tensor
351
Real harmonic stress tensor
361
Imaginary harmonic stress tensor
371
Thermal strain tensor
381
Cracking strain tensor
391
Stresses in preferred direction tensor
401
Elastic strain tensor
411
Stress in global coordinate system tensor
421
Elastic strain in global coordinate system tensor
431
Plastic strain in global coordinate system tensor
441
Creep strain in global coordinate system tensor

Table 3-4
Codes
Description
451
Velocity strains (for fluids)
461
Elastic strain in preferred direction tensor
471
Global components of the rebar stresses in the undeformed configuration

(Second Piola-Kirchhoff). See Marc Volume B: Element Library for details.
481
Global components of the rebar stress in the deformed configuration (Cauchy). See Marc
Volume B: Element Library for details.
487
Rebar angle.
491
Stress-based error estimates
492
Strain-based error estimates
493
Plastic strain-based error estimates
494
Creep strain-based error estimates
501
Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element
Library for details.
511
Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element Library
for details.
531
Volume fraction of Martensite
541
Phase transformation strain tensor
547
Equivalent Phase Transformation strain

PH =
eq
548
Equivalent TWIN Strain

TWIN =
eq
549
2 3 ijTWIN ijTWIN
Equivalent TRIP Strain in the forward transformation

TRIP =
eq
551
2 3 ijPH ijPH
2 3 ijTRIP ijTRIP
Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Multiphase Aggregate:

PL =
eq
2 3 ijPL ijPL
552
Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Austenite
553
Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Martensite
557
Yield Stress of Multiphase Aggregate
601-617
Strength ratios based upon FAIL DATA failure modes.
621
Real Harmonic Strain Tensor

Table 3-4
Codes
Description
627
Equivalent Real Harmonic Strain
631
Imaginary Harmonic Strain Tensor
637
Equivalent Imaginary Harmonic Strain
641
Real Harmonic Curvature Tensor (for shell elements)
651
Imaginary Harmonic Curvature Tensor (for shell elements)
661
Real Harmonic Moment Tensor (for shell elements)
671
Imaginary Harmonic Moment Tensor (for shell elements)
681
Logarithmic Strain Tensor (for continuum elements)
691
Element Orientation Vector 1
694
697
Layer Orientation Angle
704
Real Harmonic Axial Force (for beam elements)
705
Real Harmonic Moment Mxx (for beam elements)
706
Real Harmonic Moment Myy (for beam elements)
707
Real Harmonic Shear Force Vxz (for beam elements)
708
Real Harmonic Shear Force Vyz (for beam elements)
709
Real Harmonic Torque (for beam elements)
710
Real Harmonic Bimoment (for beam elements)
714
Imaginary Component of Harmonic Axial Force (for beam elements)
715
Imaginary Component of Harmonic Moment Mxx (for beam elements)
716
Imaginary Component of Harmonic Moment Myy (for beam elements)
717
Imaginary Component of Harmonic Shear Force Vxz (for beam elements)
718
Imaginary Harmonic Shear Force Vyz (for beam elements)
719
Imaginary Harmonic Torque (for beam elements)
720
Imaginary Harmonic Bimoment (for beam elements)
721
Cauchy Stress Tensor in Preferred Coordinate System
731
Curvature Tensor (for shell elements)
741
Moment Tensor (for shell elements)

Table 3-4
Codes
Description
Post Codes for Heat Transfer Analysis

9 or 180
Total temperature
181-183
Components of temperature gradient T
184-186
Components of flux
271
Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysised solid (model C) or nonhomogeneous density
272
Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysis gas (model C)
273
Volumetric Mass density of liquid (model C)
274
(Pyrolysis model B or C)
275
276
277
278
279
g w
280
mg
281
s p
(Pyrolysis model C only)
282
s l
283
s c
eff
eff
Pyrolysis Volumetric Mass density of water vapor
Post Codes for Bearing Analysis

190
Pressure
191-193
Components of pressure gradient
194-196
Mass flux vector
Post Codes for Joule Heating Analysis

87
Voltage
88
Current density (per unit of cross-sectional area)
89
Thermal energy density (from electric current)
197-199
Components of electric potential gradient
577-579
Components of current density
Post Codes for Acoustic Analysis

190
Pressure
191-193

Table 3-4
Codes
Description
Post Codes for Electrostatic Analysis

130
Electric potential (V)
561-563
Components of electric field intensity (E)
564-566
Components of electric displacement (D)
Post Codes for Magnetostatic Analysis

140
Magnetic potential (2-D analysis only) (Az)
570
Lamination loss
571-573
Components of magnetic induction (B)
574-576
Components of magnetic field intensity (H)
Post Codes for Magnetostatic Thermal Analysis

89
Thermal energy density (from electric current and lamination loss)
570
Lamination loss
Post Codes for Transient Electromagnetic Analysis

561-563
564-566
567-569
Components of Lorentz force (force per unit volume)
571-573
574-576
577-579
Components of current density (J)
Post Codes for Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis

131-133
Real components of electric field intensity (E)
134-136
Real components of electric displacement (D)
137-139
Real components of Lorentz force (force per unit volume)
141-143
Real components of magnetic induction (B)
144-146
Real components of magnetic field intensity (H)
147-149
Real components of current density (J)
151-153
Imaginary components of electric field intensity (E)
154-156
Imaginary components of electric displacement (D)
157-159
Imaginary components of Lorentz force (force per unit volume)

Table 3-4
Codes
Description
161-163
Imaginary components of magnetic induction (B)
164-166
Imaginary components of magnetic field intensity (H)
167-169
Imaginary components of current density (J)
Post Codes for Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)

561-563
564-566
Post Codes for Harmonic Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)

131-133
134-136
151-153
154-156
Post Codes for Soil Analysis

171
Porosity
172
Void ratio
173
Pore pressure
174
Preconsolidation pressure
Post Codes for Cure and Cure Shrinkage Analysis

285
Degree of cure
286
Total cure reaction heat
287
Degree of cure shrinkage
288
Volumetric cure shrinkage of resin
289-294
Cure shrinkage strain components in global coordinate system
295-300
Cure shrinkage strain components in preferred coordinate system
581-586
Cure shrinkage strain tensor in global coordinate system
591-596
Cure shrinkage strain tensor in preferred coordinate system
Notes:
For heat transfer, code 9 is used for all heat transfer elements.
When using shells in heat transfer, it is important to enter a code for each layer in
chronological order if post file is to be correctly read by the INITIAL STATE or CHANGE
STATE options.

Note that you do not need to select nodal values (that is, displacement, velocities and
accelerations, and temperature for a heat transfer run) as these are automatically written to
the post file.
Eigenmodes (dynamic analysis) and eigenvectors (buckling analysis) are written to
the post file only if indicated by the RECOVER or MODAL
INCREMENT/BUCKLE INCREMENT option.
Layered quantities for beams, shells, composite shells, composite solids, and
rebar quantities.
For many post codes, a layer number is required, and is conventionally one to the last layer
number in the element. Layer 1 is the top layer, layer 2 is the next layer, etc. for shells,
composite shells, bricks, or rebar elements. In many shell applications, the number of
layers in different elements is not the same. Two alternative mechanisms may be used to
specify the layer number:
I.The user can specify the following layer codes:
15000 - top layer
10000 - bottom layer
5000 - middle layer
If the number of layers in a shell is an even number, it will use (nlayer +1)/2 where
nlayer is the number of layers.
II.If the user specifies the layer ID for the composite elements, then the user must specify
the layer ID. This is useful in ply drop-off simulations.
Note that post codes 91-107 refer to failure indices for different failure criteria and post
codes 601-617 refer to associated strength ratios. More than 17 quantities are allowed in
the analysis but only the first 17 quantities are available for postprocessing. For example.
if three failure criteria (say, max. stress, Hoffman and Puck) are flagged, post codes 9197/601-607 would contain the six indices/ratios associated with maximum stress, post code
98 / 608 would contain the one index / ratio associated with Hoffman and post codes 99103 / 609-613 would contain the five indices / ratios associated with Puck criterion.

Post codes 691 and 694 provide access to the first and second orientation vectors
respectively. These vectors depict the alignment of the material coordinate system at the
element level with respect to the global cartesian system. They are available for elements
that are either composites, or using materials that are orthotropic/anisotropic / requiring the
HOOKLW ANELAS user subroutines, or using the ORIENTATION option to identify the
material coordinate system. Note that these element orientation vectors are averaged across
all integration points of the element and presented as a single set of vectors at the element
centroid. They are always calculated on the current element geometry and any layer IDs
associated with post codes 691 and 694 are ignored. Note also that while the normal usage
of these post vectors is in conjunction with the ORIENTATION option, if no special material
orientation is provided, then they can also be used to obtain the element coordinate system
for orthotropic materials, composites, etc. For composites, post code 697 provides access
to the fiber angle in any layer. If used without any associated layer id, post code 697
provides access to all layer angles. Else, the user can obtain the angle for a specific layer L
by using 697,L as the post code. Note that if there are no composite elements, post code
697 is ignored. The orientation vectors on the post file are available for visualization in
Marc Mentat. Either element orientations or layer orientations can be plotted. Note that for
layer orientation vectors to be available for a set of layers, the associated layer orientation
angle should be available on the post file through post code 697.
For post codes 411, 421, 431, and 441, global quantities for shell elements are reported for
as many layers as requested and the same layer numbering system is used as for regular
shell quantities. Layer 1 is the top surface; layer 2 is the next surface, etc. This convention
is followed from MSC.Marc 2000 on.
Caution has to be exercised in interpreting the results when strain and/or stress tensors are
requested for beam and shell elements:
1. For most elements in this category (elastic beam elements 31, 52, 98 are exceptions),
stress tensors (post codes 311, 351, 361) or their associated component values (post
codes 11-16, 51-56, 61-66) and total strain tensor (post code 301) or its associated
component values (post codes 1-6) can be requested with or without an associated layer
number. When no layer number is requested, the generalized strains (stretches, shear
strains) are reported for the strain post values and generalized stresses (axial force,
shear forces) are reported for the stress post values. Generalized curvature strains and
generalized moments can be requested through post codes 641 and 651 for shells and
numerically integrated beams. Note that for shell elements, the generalized stresses are
forces per unit length. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a definition of the
generalized strain and stress output for each element type. When a layer number is
used, the actual strain and stress components at the requested layer are reported. Layer
number are ignored for post codes 641 and 651.

2. For conventional (non-numerically integrated) elastic beams (types 31, 52, 98), there
are no layers - so only the generalized strains and stresses are reported for these
elements. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a definition of the generalized
strain and stress output for each element type. Equivalent quantities are not computed
for these element types since they do not make physical sense. The thermal strain tensor
(post code 371) or its associated components (post codes 71-76) are available.
3. For other stress tensors (post codes 341, 391, 411) and strain tensors (post codes 321,
331, 371, 381, 401, 421, 431, 441, 461), there are no generalized values and they can
only be requested for a particular layer. If no layer number is provided by the user, by
default, the tensors are reported for layer number 1. Numerically integrated solidsection beam elements (type 52 or 98) have layer numbers and from a postprocessing
perspective behave as open or closed section beams or shells.

Table 3-5
Nodal Post Codes
Code
1 Displacement
2 Rotation
3 External Force
4 External Moment
5 Reaction Force
6 Reaction Moment
7 Fluid Velocity
8 Fluid Pressure
9 External Fluid Force
10 Reaction Fluid Force
11 Sound Pressure
12 External Sound Source
13 Reaction Sound Source
14 Temperature
15 External Heat Flux
16 Reaction Heat Flux
17 Electric Potential
18 External Electric Charge
19 Reaction Electric Charge
20 Magnetic Potential
21 External Electric Current
22 Reaction Electric Current
23 Pore Pressure
24 External Mass Flux
25 Reaction Mass Flux
26 Bearing Pressure
27 Bearing Force
28 Velocity
29 Rotational Velocity
30 Acceleration
31 Rotational Acceleration
32 Modal Mass
Description

Table 3-5
Nodal Post Codes (continued)
Code
33 Rotational Modal Mass
34 Contact Normal Stress
35 Contact Normal Force
36 Contact Friction Stress
37 Contact Friction Force
38 Contact Status
39 Contact Touched Body
40 Herrmann Variable
41 solid (Pyrolysis Model B only)
42 M g (Pyrolysis Model B or C)
43 s p (Pyrolysis Model B only)
44 s l (Pyrolysis Model B only)
46 Tying Force
47 Coulomb Force
48 Tying Moment
49 Generalized Nodal Stress
50 Generalized Nodal Strain
51 Inertia Relief Load
52 Inertia Relief Moment
53 J-Integral
54 Stress Intensity, Mode I
55 Stress Intensity, Mode II
56 Stress Intensity, Mode III
57 Energy Release
58 Energy Release Rate I
59 Energy Release Rate II
60 Energy Release Rate III
61 Crack Growth Direction
62 Crack System Local X
63 Crack System Local Y
64 Crack System Local Z
Description

Table 3-5
Code
Description
65 Near Contact Distance

66 Breaking Index (Normal)
67 Breaking Index (Tangential)
68 Breaking Index
69 Delamination Index (Normal)
70 Delamination Index Tangential)
71 Delamination Index
72 Recession
73 Glue Deactivation Status
74 VCCT Failure Index
75 Remesh displacement (relative displacement between two models on the post file)
76 Lorentz Force
77 Wear Index
78 Wear Rate
<0 User-defined nodal quantity via the UPSTNO user subroutine.
Note: The contact status (code 38) can have the following values:
0 if a node is neither in contact nor has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
0.5 if a node is in near contact.
1 if a node is in true contact.
2 if a node has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
The Touched Body (code 39) and the Near Contact Distance (code 65) are not available for
segment-to-segment contact.
423 LOADCASE (Model Definition)

Define Loadcase
LOADCASE (Model Definition)
Define Loadcase
Description
This option is used to specify the boundary conditions and initial conditions that are active in this
loadcase. This is used to activate or deactivate FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc., DIST LOADS,
DIST FLUXES, etc., POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc., FOUNDATION, FILMS, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL
VEL, INITIAL TEMP, etc. Boundary conditions not explicitly activated are deactivated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word LOADCASE.
11-32
2nd
Enter the name of the loadcase (no blanks).
Enter the number of labels. This is required.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block (Repeat as many times as specified on 2nd data block.)
1-32
1st
Enter the boundary condition or initial condition label.
33-40
2nd
Enter flag to control application of this boundary condition.

This is applicable to FIXED DISP, DIST LOADS, POINT TEMP, and
CHANGE STATE only.
If a time dependent table (independent variable types 1,2,3,4) is applied to
this boundary condition, this flag is ignored and the table is used to control
the temporal variations.
Enter 0 if load is applied instantaneously,
or if boundary condition has been previously activated, it
remains constant (default).
Enter 1 if point load, distributed load or kinematic load is to be
linearly changed from current magnitude to prescribed
magnitude,
or point temp is to be linearly changed from initial temp to
prescribed magnitude,
or change state is to be linearly changed from initial state
to prescribed state.
LOADCASE (Model Definition) 424

Define Loadcase
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
linearly changed from zero to prescribed magnitude,
If the boundary condition is not included in a subsequent
loadcase: point load, distributed load or kinematic load is
linearly reduced in magnitude to zero,
point temperature is linearly changed to the
initial temperature,
change state is linearly changed to the initial state.
loadcase:
point load, distributed load is linearly reduced in
magnitude to zero,
kinematic displacements are to be instantaneously
removed, and the previous reaction force is linearly
reduced to zero,
Enter -1 or -2 load is removed gradually.
point load, distributed load or kinematic load is linearly
reduced in magnitude to zero,
Enter -3 load is removed gradually,
425 LOADCASE (Model Definition)

Define Loadcase
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
magnitude to zero,
reduced to zero,
point temperature is linearly ramped to the
initial temperatures,
change state is linearly ramped to the initial state.
Enter -4 Load is removed instantaneously,
point load, distributed load is instantaneously reduced to
zero,
reduced to zero,
point temperature is instantaneously changed to the initial
temperature,
change state is instantaneously changed to the
initial state.
When POINT TEMP is used, the initial temperatures are
prescribed in the INITIAL TEMP option.
When CHANGE STATE is used, the initial temperatures
are prescribed in the CHANGE STATE option.
TRACK 426
Enter a List of Points to be Tracked
TRACK
Enter a List of Points to be Tracked
Description
The analysis program creates a file containing information regarding the motion of a material particle
which is at the coordinate position of the node in the undeformed state. This file is then used by the
graphical user interface to visualize the motion of the point. It is also possible to track the material
behavior (equivalent stress and equivalent plastic strain). This can be used for time history plots. This
information is written to a file, jid.trk.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the work TRACK.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of nodal lists. Default is 1.
6-10
2nd
Unit number to read list of nodes. Defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 0 if no quantities are to be tracked.

Enter 1 to track equivalent stress and equivalent plastic strain.
Enter -1 if quantities specified in the 3rd data block are to be tracked.
16-20
4th
Enter the body number which contains these nodes. This is optional, but
it does speed up the calculation.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word QUANTITY.
11-15
2nd
Enter the element post code of the quantity to be tracked (see Table 3-4 in
the POST option description).
16-40
3rd
Enter a 24 character label associated with this quantity for use

in postprocessing.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to be tracked.
427 FLOW LINE

Define a Flow Line Grid
FLOW LINE
Description
This option allows you to define a grid (possibly independent of the original mesh) which is tracked
during the analysis. This information is written to the post file. This facilitates viewing the motion of the
material particles.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-9
1st
Enter the words FLOW LINE.
Enter 1 if original mesh is used as a grid (default).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 2 if Cartesian grid is used.

Enter 3 if flow line file is used. See Appendix G Flow Line File Format: for
the format of the .flw file.
Enter 4 if circular grid is used for 2-D analysis only. The initial diameter
will be 80% of the grid size specified in the 3rd data block.
6-10
2nd
Enter the body number to be flow lined.

Default is body 1.
Enter -1 to put flow lines on all bodies.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Number of segments used to draw flow line.

Default =
5 for original mesh grid
= 100 for Cartesian grid

=
50 for circular grid
3rd data block

Required if a Cartesian or circular grid is used, Option 2 or 4.
1-5
1st
Enter 0 if Marc is to position grid.

Enter 1 if grid is to pass through a point specified in the 8th, 9th, or
10th field.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of grid atoms in the x-direction.
FLOW LINE 428

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
Enter the number of grid atoms in the y-direction.
16-20
4th
Enter the number of grid atoms in the z-direction.
21-30
5th
Enter the grid spacing in the x-direction.
31-40
6th
Enter the grid spacing in the y-direction.
41-50
7th
Enter the grid spacing in the z-direction.
51-60
8th
Enter the x-coordinate of the reference point.
61-70
9th
Enter the y-coordinate of the reference point.
71-80
10th
Enter the z-coordinate of the reference point.
3rd data block

Required if flow line file is used, Option 3.
1-80
1st
Enter the flow line file name.
429 IRM
Intergraph Interface
IRM
Description
This option allows you to generate an IRM file which is compatible with Intergraph. Two types of
quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses, strains, etc.)
can either be component values or invariant values or both. They are each an average value within the
element. The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points and a weighted average
is calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam and/or shell elements. If the
IRM option is used simultaneously with either or both of the SDRC and HYPERMESH options, internally the
program treats the data in a cumulative manner. For example, if stresses are requested for the Intergraph file
and creep strains are requested for the SDRC Universal file, both quantities are output into both files. The
Intergraph results file is named jid.g.
Note:
When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the Hypermesh results file, the
invariant element quantities are automatically written into the Intergraph results file.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data
block
1-4
1st
Enter the word IRM.
11-15
2nd
Enter the unit number to which to write file; default is 39.
16-20
3rd
Frequency to write out file (default to every increment).
If no element data is required, skip to the 4th data block.

2nd data block
1-10
1st
Repeat 3rd data block as often as required.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter:
1
for stresses.
for total generalized strains.
for creep strains.
for thermal strains.
for plastic strains.
IRM 430
Format
Fixed
6-10
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
for strain energy.
for von Mises equivalent stress divided by the yield stress.
for failure indices.
Enter a layer number if shell elements.

If the value in the first field is a 2, enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Enter 0 for component values.

Enter 1 for invariants.
Enter 2 for component and invariant values.
Note:
When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the

Hypermesh results file, the invariant element quantities are
automatically written into the Intergraph results file.
If no nodal data is required, skip to the next model definition point.

4th data block
1-8
1st
Repeat 5th data block as often as required

5th data block
1-5
1st
Enter:
1 for displacements.
2 for velocities.
4 for reaction forces.
5 for temperatures.
6 for generalized stresses.
7 for generalized strains.
8 for top/middle/bottom layer stresses.
9 for top/middle/bottom elastic strains.
10 for top/middle/bottom plastic strains.
11 for top/middle/bottom creep strains.
13 for eigenmodes.
14 for harmonic displacements and reactions.
Note:
If shell elements are not included in the model, specifying 8, 9,

10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component.
431 IRM
Internals of IRM files

Element Data
CAT = ELEM
TYPE - A.B.C.D where A = S for stress
E for total strain
C for creep strain
T for thermal strain
P for plastic strain
B = C for component
I for invariant
C = 1 for 1st component
2 for 2nd component
3 for 3rd component
4 for 4th component
5 for 5th component
6 for 6th component
or
C = 1 for lowest principal
2 for intermediate principal
3 for highest principal
4 for Von Mises Intensity
5 for mean normal (hydrostatic)
6 for Tresca
D=
layer number
If strain energy is requested, then:

TYPE A.D where
A = ETT for total strain energy density

ETI for incremental strain energy density
EET for total elastic strain energy density
EEI for incremental elastic strain energy density
EPT for total plastic strain energy density
EPI for incremental plastic strain energy density
D = layer number
IRM 432
If stress/yield stress is requested, then:

TYPE A.D where
A = SYI for stress/original yield stress

SYT for stress/yield stress at current temperature
D = layer number
If failure indexes are requested, then:

TYPE A.B.D where
A = FL
B = 1 to 6
D = layer number
Nodal Data
CAT = NODE
TYPE = A.B.C.
A= D
for displacement
for velocity
for acceleration
for reactions
for eigenmode
for magnitude of harmonic displacement
for phase of harmonic displacement
for magnitude of harmonic reaction
for phase of harmonic reaction
TEMP
for temperatures
GSC
for generalized stress components
GSI
for generalized stress invariants
GNC
for generalized strain components
GNI
for generalized strain invariants
TSC
for stress components, top layer
TSI
for stress invariants, top layer
MSC
for stress components, middle layer
MSI
for stress invariants, middle layer
BSC
for stress components, bottom layer
BSI
for stress invariants, bottom layer
433 IRM
TEC
for elastic strain components, top layer
TEI
for elastic strain invariants, top layer
MEC
for elastic strain components, middle layer
MEI
for elastic strain invariants, middle layer
BEC
for elastic strain components, bottom layer
BEI
for elastic strain invariants, bottom layer
TPC
for plastic strain components, top layer
TPI
for plastic strain invariants, top layer
MPC
for plastic strain components, mid layer
MPI
for plastic strain invariants, mid layer
BPC
for plastic strain components, bottom layer
BPI
for plastic strain invariants, bottom layer
TCC
for creep strain components, top layer
TCI
for creep strain invariants, top layer
MCC
for creep strain components, mid layer
MCI
for creep strain invariants, mid layer
BCC
for creep strain components, bottom layer
BCI
for creep strain invariants, bottom layer
B= X
for the X direction
for the Y direction
for the Z direction
THX
for rotation about X
THY
for rotation about Y
THZ
for rotation about Z
Skipped if A is not D, V, A or R
C = 1 for 1st component
2 for 2nd component
3 for 3rd component
4 for 4th component
5 for 5th component
6 for 6th component
IRM 434
Skipped if A is D, V, A, or R
I=
1 for minimum principle value

2 for intermediate principle value
3 for maximum principle value
4 for von Mises intensity
5 for dilatational value
6 for Tresca intensity
435 SDRC
SDRC I-DEAS Interface
SDRC
Description
This option allows you to generate a Universal file which is compatible with the SDRC I-DEAS program.
Two types of quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses,
strains, etc.) written into the Universal file are only the component values. Once the Universal file is read
into I-DEAS, the invariants are computed internally. They are each an average value within the element.
The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points and a weighted average is
calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam and/or shell elements. If the
SDRC option is used simultaneously with either or both of the IRM and HYPERMESH options, internally the
program treats the data in a cumulative manner. For example, if stresses are requested for the SDRC Universal
file and creep strains are requested for the Hypermesh results file, both quantities are output into both files.
The SDRC Universal file is named jid.unv.
In addition, if the SDRC Universal file is required, the element results can be output as element or
nodal variables. To output the element variables, use ELEMENT. To output the nodal variables, use
ELEMENT NODE.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-4
1st
Enter the word SDRC.
11-15
2nd
Enter the unit number to which to write file; default is 40.
16-20
3rd
Frequency to write out file (default to every increment).

Enter either the 2a data block or 2b data block.
2a data block
1-10
1st
Enter the word ELEMENT NODE.
2a data block
1-10
1st
SDRC 436
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter:
1 for stresses.
2 for total strains.
3 for creep strains.
4 for thermal strains.
5 for plastic strains.
6 for strain energy.
7 for von Mises equivalent stress divided by the yield stress.
8 for failure indices.
6-10
2nd
If layer number equals zero, total generalized strain is output.

4th data block
1-8
1st
Repeat 5th data block as often as required

5th data block
1-5
1st
Enter:
2 for velocities.
3 for acceleration.
5 for temperatures.
437 SDRC
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
13 for eigenmodes.
14 for harmonic displacements and reactions.
Note:
If shell elements are not included in the model, specifying

8, 9, 10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component.
HYPERMESH 438
HyperMesh Interface
HYPERMESH
HyperMesh Interface
Description
This option allows you to generate a results file which is compatible with HyperMesh. Two types of
quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses, strains, etc.)
written into the results file are both the component values and the invariant values. They are each an
average value within the element. The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points
and a weighted average is calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam
and/or shell elements. For writing of eigenmodes into the HYPERMESH results file, the Marc data file
should contain either the MODAL INCREMENT or the BUCKLE INCREMENT model definition option, as
appropriate, together with the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter. Do not use related history definition
options MODAL SHAPE, BUCKLE, or RECOVER. If the HYPERMESH option is used simultaneously with
either or both of the IRM and SDRC options, internally the program treats the data in a cumulative manner.
For example, if stresses are requested for the SDRC Universal file and creep strains are requested for the
Hypermesh results file, both quantities are output into both files. The HyperMesh results file is named
jid.hmr.
Note:
When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the HyperMesh results file, the
invariant element quantities are automatically written into the Intergraph results file.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-4
1st
Enter the word HYPERMESH.
11-15
2nd
Leave blank.
16-20
3rd
Frequency to write out file.

2nd data block
1-10
1st

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter:
1 for stresses.
2 for total generalized strains.
3 for creep strains.
439 HYPERMESH
HyperMesh Interface
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4 for thermal strains.
5 for plastic strains.
6 for strain energy.
7 for von Mises equivalent stress divided by the yield stress.
8 for failure indices.
6-10
2nd
If the value in the first field is a 2, enter 0.

4th data block
1-8
1st
Repeat 5th data block as often as required.

5th data block
1-5
1st
Enter:
2 for velocities.
3 for acceleration.
5 for temperatures.
13 for eigenmodesa.
Note:
If shell elements are not included in the model, specifying 8, 9,

10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component
For writing of eigenmodes into the HYPERMESH results file, the Marc data file should contain either the
MODAL INCREMENT or the BUCKLE INCREMENT model definition option, as appropriate, together with
the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter. Do not use related history definition options MODAL SHAPE,
BUCKLE, or RECOVER.
PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition) 440

Specify Output
PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition)
Specify Output
Description
This option allows you the control of the output from Marc. The data given here remains in control until
a subsequent PRINT CHOICE set is inserted such a set can be included with either the model definition
or with history definition data set. See also PRINT ELEMENT and PRINT NODE.
The default values print all elements and all nodes. Element quantities are printed at each integration
point or at the centroid only, depending on whether the CENTROID parameter is used. For shells,
only the extreme fibers are output, plus layers where the inelastic strains or state variables are nonzero.
For beams, fibers with inelastic strains or nonzero state variables are printed. In addition, section forces
are given for these elements. This option also allows debug output of certain items. The default is no
debug printout.
All of the above defaults are reset by the PRINT CHOICE option.
The PRINT CHOICE option has no effect on the post processor file.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words PRINT CHOICE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of first and last element numbers to be printed (maximum

10).
6-10
2nd
Number of sets of first and last node numbers to be printed

(maximum 10).
11-15
3rd
Number of integration points to be printed in each element (not used if

CENTROID is flagged).
16-20
4th
Number of layers to be printed. This is for beams and shells only and
overrides the default described above.
21-25
5th
Increments between printout. Default is print every increment.
26-30
6th
Enter 1 for complex nodal quantities to be output as magnitude and phase,

otherwise real and imaginary components are given.
31-35
7th
Debug print flag. Enter a nonzero value and use data block 7.
36-40
8th
Log file flag. Enter unit number to which log file is to be written.
441 PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition)

Specify Output
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

Include only if the first field of 2nd data block is not zero.
1-5
1st
First element in first set.
6-10
2nd
Last element in first set.
11-15
3rd
First element in second set.
16-20
4th
Last element in second set.
Etc.
5th
Etc. in I5 format.
4th data block

Include only if the second field of 2nd data block is not zero.
1-5
1st
First node in first set.
6-10
2nd
Last node in first set.
11-15
3rd
First node in second set.
16-20
4th
Last node in second set.
Etc.
5th
Etc. in I5 format.
5th data block

Include only if the third field of 2nd data block is not zero.
I
Enter the list of integration points to be printed in (16I5) format (number

of entries given in third field of data block 2). This is only used if
CENTROID is not flagged. Be careful with analyses with several different
element types.
6th data block

Include only if the fourth field of 2nd data block is not zero.
I
Enter the list of shell or beam fibers to be printed in (16I5) format. This
overrides Marc default, so you should be careful to not unintentionally
suppress plasticity or creep printout.
7th data block

Include only if the seventh field of 2nd data block is not zero
1-5
1st
16I5
Enter debug print flags. See the PRINT parameter.
PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) 442

Specify Elements to be Included in Output
PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) Specify Elements to be Included in Output

Description
This option allows you to choose which elements, and what quantities associated with an element are to
be printed. If you do not specify NODE on the first data line, these values are at the integration points.
This option can be used to print response quantities for the first 28 integration points of any element. This
suffices for all elements, except continuum composite elements (types 149 - 154, 175 - 180) which can
have as many as 2040 integration points. For print-outs at integration point numbers greater than 28 for
continuum composite elements, use PRINT CHOICE. If you specify the word NODE, these values are the
extrapolated nodal values. This extrapolation is currently not available for rebar elements, composite
continuum elements, semi-infinite elements, or cavity elements.
Note:
This option revokes any NO PRINT that precedes it. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by
PRINT ELEMENT and not followed by PRINT NODE results in the selected element
printout and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE with a blank node list to suppress
node output.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words PRINT ELEMENT.
11-20
2nd
Enter the word NODE (optional).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets to be given below (optional).
6-10
2nd
Increment between printout. Default is print every increment.
11-15
3rd
File unit to which output is to be written. Defaults to standard output,

unit 6.
Data blocks 3, 4, and, if necessary, 5 and 6 are given once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-80
1st
Enter one or more of the following:

STRAIN
output total strain.
STRESS
output total stress.
PLASTIC
output plastic strain.
CREEP
output creep, swelling and viscoelastic strain.
THERMAL output thermal strain
443 PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
CREEP
THERMAL
output thermal strain
ENERGY
output of strain energy densities:

total strain energy
incremental total strain energy
total elastic strain energy
incremental elastic strain energy
incremental plastic strain energy
CRACK
output of cracking strain.
CAUCHY
output Cauchy stress.
STATE
output state variables.
PREFER
output stresses in preferred system.
ELECTRIC
output electric field and electric flux.
MAGNETIC output magnetic field and magnetic flux.

CURRENT
output current.
ALL
output of all of the above.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements to be printed.
Note:
To suppress all element print-out, enter a blank list for the list
of elements.
5th data block

If the NODE option is not specified on the 1st data block, enter a list of
integration points to be printed.
If the NODE option is specified on the 1 data block, enter a list of node
positions based upon the CONNECTIVITY option. These node positions
range from one to the maximum number of nodes per element.
PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) 444

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

Enter a list of layers to be printed. This is only necessary if there are either
thin walled beam, shell, rebar, solid composite elements in the mesh, (that
is, element types 1, 4, 5, 8, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 22, 23, 24, 25, 45,46, 47,
48, 49, 50, 72, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 98, 138, 139, 140,
142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 165, 166,
167, 168, 169, 170, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180).
It is also necessary to include this data block if there are beam element
types 52 or 98 and they are used with integrated solid cross sections.
445 PRINT NODE (Model Definition)

Specify Nodes to be Included in Output
PRINT NODE (Model Definition)
Description
This option allows you to choose which nodes and what nodal quantities are to be printed.
Note:
PRINT NODE and not followed by PRINT ELEMENT results in the selected nodal output
and full element output. Use PRINT ELEMENT with a blank element list to suppress
element printout.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words PRINT NODE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
File unit to which output is to be written, default to standard output, unit 6.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-80
1st

INCR
output incremental displacement or potentials
TOTA
output total displacement or potentials
VELO
output velocity
ACCE
output acceleration
LOAD
output total applied load
REAC
output reaction/residual force
TEMP
output temperature
FLUX
output flux
Note:
MODE
Fluxes are only available if the parameter HEAT, 0,

0, 2 is used.
output eigenvector (modal or buckle)
STRESS output average generalized stresses at nodes
PRINT NODE (Model Definition) 446

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
VOLT
output voltage (Joule analysis)
PRES
output pressure (bearing analysis)
COOR
output coordinates (for rezoning)
INER
output inertia relief load (for interia relief analysis)
ALL
output all relevant quantities
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to be printed.
Note:
To suppress all nodal printout, enter a blank list for the list of nodes. The average nodal
generalized stresses are obtained via an extrapolation and averaging procedure. If there is
a geometric or material discontinuity at a node, this value is not correct unless either double
nodes are used with kinematic tying, or you control which elements are to be averaged
using the PRINT ELEMENT feature.
447 NO PRINT (Model Definition)

Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output
NO PRINT (Model Definition)
Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output
Description
This option suppresses element and nodal output.
Note:
This option is revoked by using either the PRINT CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, or PRINT
NODE options. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by a PRINT ELEMENT, for example, results
in element and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE or PRINT ELEMENT with blank node
or element lists to suppress all node or element output.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO PRINT.
PRINT SPRING (Model Definition) 448

Controls the Print Out of Springs
PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)

Description
This option controls the output for selected springs.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PRINT SPRING.
2nd data block

Enter a list of springs to be printed
449 NO PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)

Deactivates the Printing of All Springs
NO PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)
Description
This options suppresses the output of spring results.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word NO PRINT SPRING.
PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition) 450

Prints the Contact Body Summary
PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition)
Description
This option ensures that the summary of contact information for each body is printed to the output file
even if the NO PRINT option is activated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words PRINT CONTACT.
451 NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition)

Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout
NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition) Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout
Description
This option deactivates the output of the summary of contact information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO PRINT CONTACT.
GRID FORCE (Model Definition) 452

Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level
GRID FORCE (Model Definition)
Description
This option allows the user to output the contributions to the nodal force at either an element level or a
nodal level. This is useful when constructing a free body diagram of part of the structure. The Marc for
grid force balance is with respect to the global coordinate system. In Marc, the following contributions
are considered:
On an element level, the grid force balance is based upon the
Internal forces
Distributed Loads
Foundation Forces
Reaction Force
On a nodal basis, it is much more complete and includes
Internal Forces
Distributed + Point Forces
Foundation Forces
Spring Forces
Contact Normal Forces
Contact Friction Forces
Tying/MPC Forces
Inertia Forces
Damping Forces
DMIG Forces
Reaction Force
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word GRID FORCE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Frequency (increments) between writing out the grid forces (default to

every increment).
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if force output is based upon elements.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if force output is based upon nodes.
16-20
4th
Enter 0 if grid force output is to be written to standard output (default).

Enter 1 if grid force output is to be written to file jid.grd.
21-25
5th
Enter the number of times that grid force should be output in a load case;
if 1 is entered, the output will occur at the last increment of the load case.
453 GRID FORCE (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd and 4th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the words SELECT ELEMENT.
4th data block

1-80
Enter a list of elements for which grid force output will be done
5th and 6th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)
5th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the words SELECT BODY.
6th data block

1-80
Enter a list of contact bodies; grid force on an element level will be given
for elements in these bodies.
7th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the words SELECT NODE.
8th data block

1-80
Enter a list of nodes for which forces will be output on a nodal basis.
PRINT VMASS (Model Definition) 454

Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies
PRINT VMASS (Model Definition) Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies
Description
This option allows you to obtain printed output of element volumes, masses, costs and strain energies.
Options are provided for you to print the total quantities for each group of elements and the quantities for
each element in the group or the total quantities for each group of elements only.
In order to have correct mass computations, mass density for each element must be entered through one
of the material options. In order to have the correct cost, the cost per unit mass or the cost per unit volume
must be defined through the ISOTROPIC/ORTHOTROPIC option. The total strain energy and the plastic
strain energy, if applicable, are printed. Note that volumes and masses for some special elements (for
example, gap element, semi-infinite element, etc.) is not be computed. These quantities can be written on
either standard output file unit 6, or your specified unit.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the words PRINT VMASS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets to be given below.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 for option to print only total volumes, masses, costs, and strain
energy for groups of elements. Default is 0.
11-15
3rd
File unit to which output is to be written; default to standard output, unit 6.
Either data block 3a or 3b may be used

3a data block
3b data block
Enter the negative of deformable body number (only one body number per
data block).
455 REAUTO
Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis
REAUTO
Description
Used for changing conditions on restart of a problem in an autoloading sequence, dynamics, creep, or
heat transfer.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word REAUTO.

This entry allows a reset of various parameters during restart. It can be
used to override previously set values in the middle of automatic load
incrementation. These values are originally set in the AUTO CREEP,
AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, DYNAMIC CHANGE, or
TRANSIENT. Only the nonzero values set here are used. For AUTO LOAD,
only the 3rd, 4th, and 5th fields are used; set other fields to 0.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Time step size. The value should only be set in dynamic problems.
11-20
2nd
End value of time for this set of boundary conditions.
21-25
3rd
Total number of time steps in this set of boundary conditions or, for AUTO
LOAD, number of equal load increments. To immediately complete
previous set of load history data, set to 1.
26-30
4th
Not used, enter 0.
31-35
5th
Reassembly interval for mass and stiffness matrices; for linear problems,
set equal to the value given in the third field.
36-40
6th
Desired number of recycles for the AUTO INCREMENT option.
41-50
7th
Maximum step size in AUTO INCREMENT option.
51-60
8th
Current percentage of total load to be applied (AUTO TIME or AUTO

INCREMENT).
61-65
9th
Enter 1 to force remeshing immediately after restart. The meshing

parameters based upon the ADAPT GLOBAL option, before the END
OPTION, are used.
Enter 2 to force remeshing immediately after restart and user will provide
mesh file in jid_b*.mesh file in the format of a .t18 file.
mesh file in jid_b*.mesh file in the format of a .feb file.
REAUTO 456
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
the mesh file in jid_b*.mesh in the format of a standard Marc data file.
66-70
Notes:
10th
Enter 1 to force recalculation of radiation viewfactors immediately after

restart.
* is the remeshing body number.

When using REAUTO to read mesh files, you need to prepare mesh files for all defined
remeshing bodies.
Use ADAPT GLOBAL to read mesh files immediately after the restart. With this option, you
can select the remeshing body.
457 RESTART
Set Flags for Restart
RESTART
Description
This option sets up the flags for the restart files; both for the input of a previous restart file and for output
of a restart file from the current analysis. When the ELASTIC parameter is included, always restart at
increment 0.
The following points should be noted concerning the RESTART option.
A restart write frequency must be specified when a restart file is to be output. The analysis can
then be restarted from any increment at which restart has been written.
The restart file contains only those increments written during the current part of the analysis. The
restart file is not continuous because of the large volume of data that can be involved. If it were
written on the same file, the input/output time would be increased and also you might overflow
the file storage in large problems.
At restart, the data governing the increments (or increment set) next to be analyzed must follow
the END OPTION as incremental input data. Any file input, such as a file of temperature
increments describing a thermal history, must be skipped forward by you to the appropriate
point; that is, to the beginning of the increment of the new part of the analysis.
During any option set for a series of increments (AUTO CREEP, DYNAMIC CHANGE, AUTO
INCREMENT, AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, AUTO THERM CREEP, TRANSIENT), restart can be
effected and control parameters changed. Marc then continues to the end of the part of the
analysis specified by the option. You have the option to terminate such a part of the analysis
prematurely through the use of restart with the REAUTO option.
The RESTART INCREMENT history definition option can be used to modify parameters defined
in this option, or terminate the writing of a restart file.

The RESTART LAST option can be used to save only the last converged increment or to
periodically write restart data to individual files.

The old restart file is closed after it has been read.
The input data describing the problem is not saved, and therefore must be read in with each restart. This
should include the model geometry including CONNECTIVITY and the COORDINATES material
properties contact data and boundary conditions. Additional tables may be added, or they can have
additional data added. The RESTART option specifies restart parameters; for example, input/output files,
restart increment, and intervals at which restarts are to be written.
RESTART 458
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word RESTART.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 to write out restart data on a file. Set to 2 to read restart data from
a file (that is, to restart a problem). Set to 3 to restart a problem and
continue writing restart data for subsequent restart.
6-10
2nd
Number of increments between writing of restart data. For example, to

write every three increments, set the second field to 3. This data is only
used if the first field is set to 1 or 3. Defaults to 1 if left blank.
11-15
3rd
Enter the increment at which the restarted problem run begins. Only used
if the first field of this data block is set to 2 or 3. The number here should
be the number given in the message:
RESTART DATA AT INCREMENT
i on TAPE j
which appears on the output of the previous run of the problem at the point
where the restart is desired.
Note:
The problem can only be restarted at such points. The frequency

of such points is determined by the data in columns 6 through
10 of this data block in the previous run of the problem.
A restarted run should, in principle, have the same parameters
as the original run. Only those parameters can be changed
which do not affect the storage allocation within Marc.
16-20
4th
Logical unit number for output of restart data; default logical unit number
is 8 if nothing is given here and the RESTART option is specified in the
parameters. Note that this file must be specified in the main program.
21-25
5th
Logical unit number for input of restart data from previous run; default is
9 if nothing is given here. Specify file in main program.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Not used; enter 0.
41-45
9th
Not used; enter 0.
46-50
10th
Set to 1 to print out increment specified in the third field through

increment specified in the eleventh field. The job does not do any analysis.
This is to, for example, allow you to recover increments suppressed by
PRINT CHOICE.
459 RESTART
Format
Data
Entry Entry
Fixed
Free
51-55
11th
Set to last increment on restart file to be read. This is used in conjunction

with the tenth field above or the eighth field of the POST option.
56-60
12th
Enter the subincrement at which the restart problem begins. Defaults to

zero. This can be used to postprocess either eigenvectors or harmonics.
61-65
13th
Enter the last subincrement to be read. This is used in conjunction with the
tenth field above or the eighth field of the POST option.
RESTART LAST 460

Use Condensed Restart File
RESTART LAST
Description
This option sets up the flags for a condensed restart file where only the last converged increment or some
specific increment is saved. It can also be used to write a restart file on separate files at a
specified frequency.
The input data describing the problem is not saved, and therefore must be read in with each restart. This
should include the model geometry including CONNECTIVITY and the COORDINATES material
properties contact data and boundary conditions. Additional tables may be added, or they can have
additional data added. The RESTART option specifies restart parameters; for example, input/output files,
restart increment, and intervals at which restarts are to be written.
Notes: Upon writing, the last converged increment is written to the restart file. Upon reading, this
increment is subsequently read in and the analysis continues. The restart file is closed after it
has been read. The REAUTO option can be used to terminate any multi-increment history
definition block.
The restart file name to store data at the last increment or at the end of analysis is jid.t08
by default. This file is overwritten when it is used. The file name to store data at specific
increment or increment intervals or at the end of each loadcase is jid.i_n.t08, n being the
increment number.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the word RESTART LAST.
Set to 1 to write out last increment of restart data on a file.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter -1 to write out the last increment at the end of each loadcase and at
the end of the analysis.
Set to 2 to read restart data from a file (that is, to restart a problem).
Set to 3 to restart a problem and write out the last increment of restart data
for subsequent restart.
Enter -3 to restart a problem and write out the last increment at the end of
each loadcase and at the end of the analysis.
6-10
2nd
Logical unit number for output of restart data; default unit number is 8 if
nothing is given here.
461 RESTART LAST

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Logical unit number for input of restart data from previous run; default is
9 if nothing is given here.
Enter frequency to write restart to individual files. The files will be named
jid_i_nn.t08 (where nn is the current increment).
If the number here is less than zero, its positive number is the specific
increment to write out the restart file. This option works when the first
field is set to -1 or -3.
UDUMP 462
Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing
UDUMP
Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing
Description
This option allows you to specify which nodes and elements can be referenced for postprocessing
through user subroutines. Nodal quantities are accessed through subroutine IMPD, element quantities are
accessed through the ELEVAR user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special
Routines). During harmonic subincrements, the ELEVEC user subroutine is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the word UDUMP.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
First element, defaults to 1.
6-10
2nd
Last element, defaults to last element in mesh.
11-15
3rd
First node, defaults to 1.
16-20
4th
Last node, defaults to last node in mesh.
463 SUMMARY (Model Definition)

Create Summary Report
SUMMARY (Model Definition)
Description
This option produces a summary of the results of the increment and outputs them in a report format. This
option is in effect until a NO SUMMARY option is encountered. The summary consists of the maximum
and minimum of temperatures, stresses, strains, plastic strains, creep strains, displacements, velocities,
accelerations and reaction forces. The option also produces a detailed accounting of both the memory
usage and timing information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SUMMARY.
11-15
2nd
Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output,
unit 6.
16-20
3rd
Enter the increment frequency of summary, default is every increment.
NO SUMMARY (Model Definition) 464

Do Not Create Summary
NO SUMMARY (Model Definition)
Do Not Create Summary
Description
This option turns off the summary feature. The default is off unless the SUMMARY option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO SUMMARY.
465 ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition)

Sort Element Results
ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition)
Description
This option allows various element quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This
option is in effect until a NO ELEM SORT option is encountered. This option allows you to sort either in
ascending or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute
value. A range can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ELEM SORT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block, as given

below, defines each sort.
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number to read sort data.
11-15
3rd
Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output, unit
6.
16-20
4th
Enter the increment frequency, default is every increment.
3rd data block

The 3rd data block is repeated once for each sort.
1-5
1st
Enter code indicating type of quantity to be sorted (see Table 3-6).
6-10
2nd
Enter 0 for sort in descending order. Enter 1 for sort in ascending order.
Default is 0; sort in descending order.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value.

Enter 0 for sort by absolute value. Default is 0; sort by absolute value.
16-20
4th
Enter number of items to be included in sorted list.
21-25
5th
Enter lowest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.
26-30
6th
Enter highest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last

element in mesh.
ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition) 466

Table 3-6
Element Sort Codes
Code
Description
Code
Description
1 first stress
28 fourth plastic strain
2 second stress
29 fifth plastic strain
3 third stress
30 sixth plastic strain
4 fourth stress
31 equivalent plastic strain
5 fifth stress
32 mean plastic strain
6 sixth stress
33 Tresca plastic strain
7 equivalent stress
34 first principal plastic strain
8 mean stress
35 second principal plastic strain
9 Tresca stress
36 third principal plastic strain
10 first principal stress
37 first creep strain
11 second principal stress
38 second creep strain
12 third principal stress
39 third creep strain
13 first strain
40 fourth creep strain
14 second strain
41 fifth creep strain
15 third strain
42 sixth creep strain
16 fourth strain
43 equivalent creep strain
17 fifth strain
44 mean creep strain
18 sixth strain
45 Tresca creep strain
19 equivalent strain
46 first principal creep strain
20 mean strain
47 second principal creep strain
21 Tresca strain
48 third principal creep strain
22 first principal strain
49 temperature
23 second principal strain
61 voltage
24 third principal strain
73 first gradient
25 first plastic strain
74 second gradient
26 second plastic strain
75 third gradient
27 third plastic strain
467 NO ELEM SORT (Model Definition)

Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element
NO ELEM SORT (Model Definition)
Description
This option turns off the ELEM SORT feature. The default is off unless the ELEM SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO ELEM SORT.
NODE SORT (Model Definition) 468

Sort Nodal Results
NODE SORT (Model Definition)
Sort Nodal Results
Description
This option allows various nodal quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This option
is in effect until a NO NODE SORT is encountered. NODE SORT allows you to sort either in ascending
or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute value. A range
can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NODE SORT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block as given

below defines each sort.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6.
16-20
4th
3rd data block

The 3rd data block is entered once for each sort.
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Default is 0, sort in descending value.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value. Enter 0 for sort by absolute value.
Default is 0, sort by absolute value.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Enter lowest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.
26-30
6th
Enter highest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last node in

mesh.
469 NODE SORT (Model Definition)

Sort Nodal Results
Table 3-7
Code
Node Sort Codes

Meaning
1-12 sort code I
Result
Results in the Ith component of the incremental displacement to
be sorted.
13-34 sort code I +12
Results in the Ith component of the total displacement to be sorted.
25-36 sort code I + 24
Results in the Ith component of the velocity to be sorted.
Results in the Ith component of the acceleration to be sorted.
Results in the nodal temperature to be sorted.
Results in the Ith component of the reaction force to be sorted.
Results in the Ith component of the contact force to be sorted.
101 101
Sort on magnitude of incremental displacement.
102 102
Sort on magnitude of total displacement.
103 103
Sort on magnitude of velocity.
104 104
Sort on magnitude of acceleration.
105 105
Sort on magnitude of temperature.
106 106
Sort on magnitude of reaction force.
107 107
Sort on magnitude of contact force.
NO NODE SORT (Model Definition) 470

Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes
NO NODE SORT (Model Definition)
Description
This option negates the NODE SORT option. The default is off unless the NODE SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO NODE SORT.
471 DESIGN OBJECTIVE

Define Objective Function to be Optimized
DESIGN OBJECTIVE
Define Objective Function to be Optimized
Description
This option defines the objective function for the optimization process. It is not needed for a pure
sensitivity analysis run. If it is specified for a pure sensitivity analysis run, the gradient of the objective
function is also computed. Currently, the only option is to minimize the objective function.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-16
1st
Enter the words DESIGN OBJECTIVE.
Enter one of the following:
2nd data block

N/A
1st
MATERIAL VOLUME
MATERIAL MASS
MATERIAL COST
USER DEFINED
Note:
For MATERIAL MASS, the mass density, and for MATERIAL

COST, the material unit cost should be defined with the
material data (for example, see ISOTROPIC)
For USER DEFINED, you need to modify the user subroutine
uobjfn.f. This routine is self-explanatory together with an
example.
DESIGN VARIABLES 472

Define Variable Design Parameters
DESIGN VARIABLES
Description
This option defines the design variables. If a sensitivity analysis is required, the derivative of the response
with respect to each design variable and the element contributions to the response are reported. If an
optimization analysis is performed, then the design variables are modified to optimize the objective
function. The option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
Enter the words DESIGN VARIABLES.
Data blocks 2 through 5 are repeated

for each design variable.
2nd data block
N/A
1st
Enter design variable set ID (optional). In general, this is not the same as
design variable numbers assigned by Marc and defined in the output.
N/A
2nd
Enter, as appropriate, one of the words GEOMETRY, MATERIAL, or

COMPOSITE.
N/A
3rd
For GEOMETRY, enter one of the following:

CTHIC
constant thickness over element
AREA
cross-sectional area
IXX
moment of inertia Ixx
IYY
moment of inertia Iyy
BMHEI
beam height
BMWID beam width

RADIU
radius
WLLTH
wall thickness
For MATERIAL, enter one of the following:

YNGMD Youngs modulus (isotropy)
YNG11
Youngs modulus E11
YNG22
Youngs modulus E22
YNG33
Youngs modulus E33
473 DESIGN VARIABLES

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
POISR
Poissons ratio (isotropy)
PSR12
Poissons ratio 12
PSR23
Poissons ratio 23
PSR31
Poissons ratio 31
SHR12
Shear modulus G12
SHR23
Shear modulus G23
SHR31
Shear modulue G31
MASSD
Mass density
For COMPOSITE, enter one of the following:
N/A
4th
LYRTH
layer thickness (the layer thickness option needs to be

selected in the 3rd field of the 3rd data block under the
COMPOSITE model definition option.)
PLYAN
ply angle
Enter related composite group number if applicable.
3rd data block

N/A
1st
Enter lower bound for value of variable.
N/A
2nd
Enter upper bound for value of variable.
4th data block

N/A
1st
LINKED or UNLINKED.
N/A
2nd

ELEMENTS, MATERIALS, or LAYERS, depending on the second field
in the 2nd data block.
5th data block

N/A
Enter a list of elements if the second field of the 4th data block is
ELEMENTS.
Enter a list of material IDs if second field of the 4th data block is
MATERIALS.
Enter a list of layer numbers if second field of the 4th data block is
LAYERS.
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS 474

Define Limits on Displacement Response
Define Limits on
Displacement Response
Description
This option is used to specify displacement constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization
process. The option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the words DESIGN DISPLACEMENT.
Data blocks 2 through 7 are repeated for each displacement constraint group.
2nd data block
N/A
1st
Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE where needed;
for example, ABSOLUTE TRANSL1):
TRANSL1
translation parallel to first axis
TRANSL2
translation parallel to second axis
TRANSL3
translation parallel to third axis
ROTATN1
rotation about first axis
ROTATN2
rotation about second axis
ROTATN3
rotation about third axis
RESTRAN
resultant translation
RESROTA
resultant rotation
DIRTRAN
translation along a vector
DIRROTA
rotation about a vector
DIRLTRA
relative translation along a vector
DIRLROT
relative rotation about a vector
RLTRAN1
relative translation 1 (first axis)
RLTRAN2
relative translation 2 (second axis)
RLTRAN3
relative translation 3 (third axis)
RLROTA1
relative rotation 1 (first axis)
RLROTA2
relative rotation 2 (second axis)
RLROTA3
relative rotation 3 (third axis)
475 DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS

Define Limits on Displacement Response
Format
Fixed
N/A
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter either:
< (for less than or equal to)
or
> (for greater than or equal to)
N/A
3rd
Enter the bound with the correct sign
The 3rd data block is only used if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is DIRTRAN, DIRROTA,
DIRLTRA, DIRLROT; otherwise, it is skipped.
3rd data block
N/A
1st
Enter first component of vector.
N/A
2nd
Enter second component of vector.
N/A
3rd
Enter third component of vector.

Note:
Marc extracts the direction cosines.
4th data block

N/A
1st
Enter the words LOAD CASES.
Enter a list of load cases for which this constraint is prescribed.
Enter the word NODES.
5th data block

N/A
6th data block
N/A
1st
7th data block

N/A
If first field of 2nd data block does not begin with RL, enter the list of
constrained nodes.
If first field of 2nd data block begins with RL, enter the first and second
node numbers which are constrained relative to one another.
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS 476

Define Limits on Stress Response
Description
This option is used to specify stress constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization process. The
option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words DESIGN STRESS.
Data blocks 2 through 7 are repeated

for each stress constraint group.
2nd data block
N/A
1st
Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE where needed;
for example, ABSOLUTE STRESS1):
STRESS1
STRESS2
The stress components as defined for each
element separately in Marc Volume B: Element
Library (see below for generalized stresses).
STRESS3
STRESS4
STRESS5
STRESS6
VOMSTRS
von Mises equivalent stress
OSHSTRS
octahedral shear stress
MAPSTRS
maximum absolute principal stress
PRSTRS1
algebraically highest (first) principal stress
PRSTRS2
second principal stress
PRSTRS3
third principal stress
TRESTRS
Tresca equivalent stress
STRESSV
normal stress along a vector
SHSTRSP
maximum shear stress on a plane
477 DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
GENSTS1
GENSTS9
N/A
2nd
generalized stresses
1 through 9
obtained by integration through thickness of
layered elements as defined in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.
Enter either:
or
N/A
3rd
Enter the bound with the correct sign.
The 3rd data block is only used if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is STRESSV or SHSTRSP;
otherwise, it is skipped.
3rd data block
N/A
1st
Enter first component of vector.
N/A
2nd
Enter second component of vector.
N/A
3rd
Enter third component of vector.

Note:
Marc extracts the direction cosines.
4th data block

N/A
1str
5th data block

N/A
6th data block

N/A
1st
7th data block

N/A
Enter the list of constrained elements.
DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS 478

Define Limits on Strain Response
Description
This option is used to specify strain constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization analysis. The
option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words DESIGN STRAIN.
Data blocks 2 through 6 are repeated for each constraint group.

2nd data block
N/A
1st
Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE if needed; for
example, ABSOLUTE STRAIN1):
STRAIN1
STRAIN2
STRAIN3
STRAIN4
The strain components as defined

for each element separately in
Marc Volume B: Element Library.
STRAIN5
STRAIN6
VOMSTRN von Mises equivalent strain
MAPSTRN maximum absolute principal strain
N/A
2nd
PRSTRN1
algebraically highest (first) principal strain
PRSTRN2
second principal strain
PRSTRN3
third principal strain
TRESTRN
Tresca equivalent strain
Enter:
or
N/A
3rd
Enter the bound with the correct sign.
3rd data block

N/A
1st
479 DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

N/A
5th data block

N/A
1st
6th data block

N/A
Enter the list of constrained elements.
DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS 480

Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response
Define Limits on
Eigenfrequency Response
Description
This option is used to specify free vibration frequency constraints for a design sensitivity or design
optimization case. The option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-16
1st
Enter the words DESIGN FREQUENCY.
Data blocks 2 though 4 are repeated for each constraint group.

2nd data block
N/A
N/A
1st
2nd
Enter one of the following words:

FRQCYCL
frequency in cycles per unit time
FRQRADS
frequency in radians per unit time
FGPCYCL
difference or gap in frequency between any two modes to

be prescribed; in cycles per unit time
FGPRADS
difference or gap in frequency between any two modes to

be prescribed; in radians per unit time
Enter either:
or
N/A
3rd
Enter the bound. This is always positive.
Enter the word FREQUENCIES.
3rd data block

N/A
1st
4th data block

N/A
1st
If the constraint is on the frequencies of modes, enter a list of constrained

mode numbers.
If the constraint is on the difference between the frequencies of two modes,
enter the numbers of the two modes.
481
Mechanical Analysis
Chapt Mechanical Analysis

er 3: This section is the first of four sections describing the input format for mechanical analysis. This section
analysis controls and boundary conditions. The three subsequent sections concentrate on
Mode describes
material properties, rate effects, and dynamic analysis.
l
The CONTROL option is required in all nonlinear analysis. It governs the number of increments and the
Defini accuracy associated with the analysis. This section also discusses the procedures for J-integral calculation
in fracture mechanics.
tion
The boundary conditions available for performing mechanical analysis are:
Optio
Kinematic constraints of either zero or specified displacements.
ns
Surface, volumetric or nodal loads.
Thermal loads.
Foundation support.
Surface contact.
These boundary conditions can be specified using a variety of techniques. The boundary conditions
when given here in the model definition sections represent the total quantities to be applied in the
zeroth increment. Mechanical loads are scaled if the SCALE parameter is included so that the model is
at impending yield. Note that thermal loads are not scaled. In addition, as the zeroth increment is
treated as linear elastic, the applied boundary conditions should not produce either material or
geometry nonlinearities.
CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) 482

Control Option for Stress Analysis
CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) Control Option for Stress Analysis

Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for nonlinear
analysis. For heat transfer analysis, see the CONTROL (Heat Transfer) history definition option in
Chapter 4, History Definition Options.
For coupled thermal-stress analysis, data block 6 must be used.
For coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, data block 7 must be used.
For nonlinear static analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
They do not appear on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word CONTROL.
11-20
2nd
Enter the word STRUCTURAL. (required in a multiphysics analysis)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Maximum number of load steps/increments in this run. Default is 9999.

This is a cumulative number and is usually used to stop the run when
restart is being used. If an ELASTIC parameter is included, this field is
ignored and all load cases are analyzed.
6-10
2nd
Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment for

plasticity, or other tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 3. This
should usually be increased to 10 for rigid-plastic flow option.
If a negative number is entered, Marc does a maximum of the absolute
value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is
given and Marc proceeds to the next increment. This is not recommended.
11-15
3rd
Minimum number of recycles during an increment for plasticity or other

tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 0.
Note:
This data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all
subsequent increments.
Caution: This value is overwritten by the PROPORTIONAL

INCREMENT option.
16-20
4th
Flag for convergence testing.

0 or left blank Convergence is achieved when residuals satisfy
the criterion.
483 CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1 Convergence is achieved when displacements satisfy
the criterion.
2 Convergence is achieved when strain energy satisfies
the criteria.
4 Convergence is achieved when either residual or
displacement satisfies the criterion.
5 Convergence is achieved when both residual and
Notes:
Testing on relative displacements or strain energy always

requires at least one iteration. If nonlinear analysis is done
with the CENTROID parameter, the residuals are not
calculated and testing is always done on displacements.
Nonlinear analysis with the CENTROID parameter is not
recommended.
If the fields are set as 0, 1, or 2, only the 3rd data block is
needed.
If the fields are set as 4 or 5, the 3a data block is also
needed. In this case, the 3rd data block is set for residual
testing and 3a data block is set for displacements
check only.
21-25
5th
Flag to specify relative or absolute error tolerance and whether checking

is on component values or magnitude of vector.
Enter imag+irel where:
Irel = 0
Testing is done on relative error.
Irel = 1
Testing is done on absolute value.
Irel = 2
Testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or

incremental displacements are below minimum value, in
which case absolute tolerances testing is used.
Imag = 0
Component value
Imag = 10
Component values
Imag = 20
Use magnitude of vector
This entry is consistently used for displacements, rotations, forces, and

moment testing.
26-30
6th
Iterative procedure flag.

1 Full Newton-Raphson (default).
2 Modified Newton-Raphson (no reassembly
during iteration).

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3 Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification (see
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information).
8 Secant method.
31-35
7th
Nonpositive definite flag.

If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system is forced.
Note:
With use of gap and Herrmann elements, the matrix always is

nonpositive definite and this entry has no significance.
36-40
8th
No longer used; enter 0.
41-45
9th
To print convergence control messages to log file, enter 1.
46-50
10th
Control on initial stress stiffness.

0 Normal-full contribution.
1 For Mooney material, reduce contribution of hydrostatic
pressure on initial stress stiffness according to:
initial = f r p I
where initial is the stress tensor used in the initial stress

stiffness matrix, is the current stress tensor, f r is entered
through the PARAMETERS option, p is the hydrostatic
pressure and I I is a unit tensor.
2 No initial stress stiffness.
3 Use stress at beginning of increment, not last iteration.
4 Results in the inclusion of only the positive stresses in the
initial stress stiffness during the equilibrium iteration.
Besides faster convergence, this leads to a stable analysis
of very thin shell structures.
51-55
11th
Control parameter:
0 Do not allow switching of convergence testing between
residuals and displacements.
1 Allow switching of convergence testing between residual
and displacements if reaction forces or displacements
become extremely small. For more details, see Marc
Note:
Set this parameter to 0 if any kind of absolute value testing is

being used.

Format
Data
Entry Entry
Fixed
Free
56-60
12th
Assembly flag. If set to 1, the stiffness matrix is assembled each iteration.

Note that this switches off the modified Newton-Raphson procedure if
chosen in the sixth field of this data block.
61-65
13th
For some material models, such as damage, cracking, and Chaboche,

there is an inner iteration loop to insure accuracy. The maximum number
of iterations allowed can be set here.
Default is 50.
3rd data block

Include if residual testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 0, 4, or 5.
1-10
1st
If relative residual checking:

Maximum allowable value of maximum residual force divided by
maximum reaction force.
Default is 0.10.
11-20
2nd

Maximum allowable value of maximum residual moment divided by
maximum reaction moment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on
residual moment occurs.
21-30
3rd

Minimum reaction force, if reaction force is less than this value, checking
is bypassed or absolute testing is performed.
31-40
4th

Minimum moment: if moment is less than this value, checking is
bypassed or absolute testing is performed.
41-50
5th
If absolute residual testing:

Maximum value of residual force.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual force takes place.
51-60
6th

Maximum value of residual moment.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual moments
takes place.
If absolute displacement testing, maximum value of rotation increment.
Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking or rotations take place.
61-70
7th
Rigid Link Rotation Tolerance:

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Maximum allowable value of the change in rotation increment at the
retained nodes of RBE2, rigid link (tying type 80) or beam-shell offset
nodes. Default is 0.001 radians.
Notes:
If the 4th field of the 2nd data block is 4 or 5, the rigid link rotation tolerance entered in
the 4th data block circumvents the corresponding value in the 3rd data block.
The rigid link rotation tolerance if left at 0, is reset to 0.001 radians by the Marc solver to
ensure backward compatibility for RBE2.Theare two ways to by-pass the link
rotation check: the rigid link rotation tolerance can be set to a negative number, or the
rigid link rotation tolerance can be left as 0.0 with an additional FEATURE,5701 added to
the parameter section of the input.
4th data block

Include if displacement testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 1, 4, or 5.
1-10
Maximum allowable value of the change in displacement increment

divided by the displacement increment.
Default is 0.10.
11-20
2nd
Maximum allowable value of the change in rotational increment divided

by the rotational increment.
Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on change in rotational
increment occurs.
21-30
3rd
Minimum displacement, if displacement increment is less than this value,

checking is bypassed or absolute testing is performed.
31-40
4th
Minimum rotation: if rotation increment is less than this value, checking

is bypassed.
41-50
5th
Maximum value of displacement increment.

Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on displacements takes place.
51-60
6th
Maximum value of rotation increment.

Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on rotations takes place.
61-70
7th

Notes:

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

Include if energy testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 2.
1-10
1st
Maximum allowable value of the change is energy increment.

Default is 0.1.
6th data block

Only necessary for coupled thermal-mechanical analysis and the first data block does not have the word
STRUCTURAL.
1-10
1st
Maximum nodal temperature change allowed. Used to control automatic

time step scheme for heat transfer.
Default value of 20.
11-20
2nd
Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are reevaluated and matrices reassembled.
21-30
3rd
Maximum error in temperature estimate used for property evaluation.

This control provides a recycling capability to improve accuracy in highly
nonlinear heat-transfer problems (for example, latent heat, radiation
boundary conditions).
Default is 0, which bypasses this test. Set to maximum temperature error
which is considered acceptable.
Note:
Only the temperature estimate error (3rd field) is checked for

the TRANSIENT NON AUTO fixed stepping procedure. All three
fields are checked for the transient adaptive stepping procedure.
None of the three fields are checked for the auto step adaptive
stepping procedure.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th
Maximum change of xsi,p allowed in pyrolysis calculation. Used to

control automatic time step scheme.
51-60
6th
Maximum change of xsi,v allowed in pyrolysis calculation. Used to

61-70
7th
Maximum change of xsi,c allowed in pyrolysis calculation. Used to

71-80
8th
Maximum change in surface displacement per time step due to recession.

This is used to control the time step for the TRANSIENT option.
7th data block

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Only necessary for coupled electrostatic structural analysis and the first data block does not have the
word STRUCTURAL.
1-10
1st
Maximum allowed relative error in residual charge.
11-20
2nd
Maximum allowed absolute error in residual charge.
489 PARAMETERS (Model Definition)

Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis
PARAMETERS (Model Definition)Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Description
There are many parameters that are used in the finite element calculations. These parameters can be
customized for your particular application. Some of these constants can be entered in other input blocks
as well. The last nonzero value is used for the calculation.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PARAMETERS.
Enter the scale factor which, when multiplied with the incremental strain,
is used to predict the incremental strain in the next increment.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Default is 1.0.
11-20
2nd
Enter the multiplier used to calculate the penalty factor to impose

boundary conditions. The penalty factor is this multiplier times the
maximum diagonal value of the operator matrix. Default multiplier is
1 x 109. If the APPBC parameter is used, this option is not used.
21-30
3rd
Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in rigid plastic

analysis for plane strain, axisymmetric, or solid analysis when
displacement elements are used.
Default is 100.
31-40
4th
Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in fluid analysis

when displacement elements are used.
Default is 1 x 106.
41-50
5th
Beta parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmark-beta

procedure.
Default is 0.25.
51-60
6th
Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmarkbeta procedure.

Default is 0.50.
61-70
7th
Gamma1 parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step

Houbolt procedure.
Default is 1.5.
PARAMETERS (Model Definition) 490

Format
Fixed
71-80
Free
8th
Data
Entry Entry
E
Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step

Houbolt procedure.
Default is -0.5.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the angle at which a node separates from a convex corner or

becomes stuck in a concave corner for two-dimensional contact.
Default is 8.625.
11-20
2nd

becomes stuck in a concave corner for three-dimensional contact.
Default is 20.0.
21-30
3rd
Enter the initial strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.

Default is 1 x 10-4.
31-40
4th
Enter the cutoff strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.

41-50
5th
Enter the fraction of the hydrostatic pressure that is subtracted from the
stress tensor in the initial stress calculation. See the tenth field of the
CONTROL option.
Default is 1.0
51-60
6th
Enter the factor used to calculate the drilling mode for shell elements type
22, 75, 138, 139, and 140.
Default is 0.0001.
61-70
7th
Enter the scale factor to the initial incremental displacements estimate for
the increment after a rezoning increment. The default value is 1.0, which
usually improves friction convergence, but may result in an inside-out
element.
4th data block (Optional)

1-10
1st
Universal gas constant (R). Default is 8.314 J mol-1K-1.
11-20
2nd
Offset temperature between user units and absolute temperature.

Default is 273.15; that is, user input in Centigrade.
If user temperature is in Kelvin (K) or Rankine (R), enter a negative value.
The offset temperature is then set to zero.
21-30
3rd
Thermal Properties Evaluation Weight.

Default is 0.5
491 PARAMETERS (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
31-40
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
E
Surface projection factor for single step Houbolt.

Default is 0.0.
41-50
5th
Stefan Boltzmann Constant.

Default is 5.67051 x 10-8 W/m2K4.
51-60
6th
Planks second constant.

Default is 14387.69 MK.
61-70
7th
Speed of light in a vacuum.

Default is 2.9979 x 1014 M/s
71-80
8th
Maximum change in the incremental displacement in a Newton-Raphson

iteration.
Default is 1 x 1030.

1-10
1st
Initial friction stiffness (only for friction models 6 and 7). This stiffness
will be used during the first cycle of an increment to define the friction
stiffness matrix in cases where a touching node has a zero normal force
and the amount of sliding does not exceed the elastic sticking limit.
If set to zero, Marc will estimate the initial friction stiffness based on
the initial average stiffness of the contact body to which the touching
node belongs.
11-20
2nd
Specifies the minimum value that indicates a singularity if a direct solver

is used. If a zero is given, that this value is set internally by Marc and
depends on the solver being used.
21-30
3rd
Specify the maximum change in temperature per iteration in radiation

simulations. This is useful to stabilize the solution. The default is 100.
31-40
4th
Enter parameter alphaf for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.

Note that the value of alphaf defined here may be overruled by defining
the spectral radius on the 6th field.
41-50
5th
Enter parameter alpham for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.

Note that the value of alpham defined here may be overruled by defining
PARAMETERS (Model Definition) 492

Format
Fixed
51-60
Free
6th
Data
Entry Entry
E
Define the spectral radius S for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.
The following conventions apply:
0 S 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and alphaf and alpham
are calculated based upon the spectral radius according to

alphaf = - S /(1+ S ) and alpham = (1-2 S )/(1+ S )
S = 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and neither alphaf nor
alpham will be changed
S = 2 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and the values of alphaf
and alpham will be optimized for a dynamic contact analysis
and alpham will be optimized for an analysis without dynamic
contact
S = 4 : use the values of alphaf and alpham as entered on the 4th
and 5th field

61-70
7th
RBE3 conditioning number. If the conditioning number is greater than

this value, the RBE3 is probably singular and a warning message is
printed. If the value is negative, the analysis is stopped. Default is 1 x 106.

1-10
1st
Lowest temperature for elastic temperature dependent material check.
11-20
2nd
Highest temperature for elastic temperature dependent material check.
21-30
3rd
Permeability of vacuum.
Default is 0 = 1.25664 10 6 Hm 1
31-40
4th
Permittivity of vacuum.
Default is 0 = 8.85419 10 12 Fm 1
41-50
5th
Limit angle for segment-to-segment contact. If the angle between the

normal vectors of two segments is smaller than this limit angle, then these
segments will not come into contact. Default value is 120 degrees.
493 MATUDS
Provide Additional Data for Material User Subroutines
MATUDS
Provide Additional Data for Material User Subroutines
Description
This option is used to define a material user subroutine to be associated with a material ID and to pass
additional data into the user subroutine. This will activate the call to the md_ version of the user
subroutine. See Volume D for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Type Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word MATUDS.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the user subroutine name.
11-15
2nd
Enter the material ID, if zero, the user specified subroutine will be used
for all materials for which it is applicable.
16-20
3rd
Enter the value of IOPT
21-25
4th
Enter the number of auxiliary integer data
26-30
5th
Enter the number of auxiliary real data
31-35
6th
Enter the number of auxiliary character data
36-40
7th
Print out flag

Set to 0 to not print auxiliary data (default)
Set to 1 to print out auxiliary data
3rd data block

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 16 integers per line
1-5
1st
First auxiliary integer data
4th data block

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 reals per line
1-10
1st
First auxiliary real data
5th data block

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 character strings per line
1-10
1st
First auxiliary character string ,etc
CONUDS 494
Provide Additional Data for Contact User Subroutines
CONUDS
Provide Additional Data for Contact User Subroutines
Description
This option is used to define a contact user subroutine to be associated with a contact body and to pass
additional data into the user subroutine. This will activate the call to the md_ version of the user
subroutine. See Volume D for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Type Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CONUDS.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the user subroutine name.
11-15
2nd
Enter the contact body ID, if zero, the user specified subroutine will be
used for all contact bodies for which it is applicable.
16-20
3rd
Enter the value of IOPT
21-25
4th
Enter the number of auxiliary integer data
26-30
5th
Enter the number of auxiliary real data
31-35
6th
Enter the number of auxiliary character data
36-40
7th
Print out flag

Set to 0 to not print auxiliary data (default)
Set to 1 to print out auxiliary data
3rd data block

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 16 integers per line
1-5
1st
First auxiliary integer data
4th data block

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 reals per line
1-10
1st
First auxiliary real data
5th data block

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 character strings per line
1-10
1st
First auxiliary character string ,etc
495 FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)

Define Fixed Displacement
Description
This data block defines potential fixed displacements, including the magnitude, degrees of freedom and
applied locations, and associates it with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition is activated
or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The boundary conditions are
specified either by giving the kinematic displacement, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of
nodal numbers or a list of surfaces. The prescribed displacements are with respect to the degrees of
freedom associated with the element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system
using either the TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or
UTRANFORM options.
The FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter
nonuniform time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Note:
In static analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to remove
all rigid body modes.
It is advised that boundary conditions not be placed on nodes which might come into
contact. Using a symmetry rigid body is preferred.
Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the
non-table driven input instead.
Further detail is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. See Marc Volume B: Element
Library, for a definition of the degrees of freedom for each element type.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FIXED DISP.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of boundary condition data to be read (optional).
6-10
2nd
Unit number to read data default is the standard input file.
Data blocks 3 through 10 are repeated for each set.
FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) 496

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of geometric types used to define boundary condition,

default is 1. See 9th and 10th data blocks.
6-10
2nd
Enter 0 if no user subroutine required.

Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines are required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Enter 0 if real value given.

Enter 1 if complex value given as real and imaginary numbers.
Enter 2 if complex value given as magnitude and phase.
16-20
4th
Enter the Fourier series number associated with prescribed displacement,

enter 0 if no Fourier series.
21-25
5th
Enter a 0 if total displacements are to be given (default).

Enter a 1 if incremental displacements relative to the position at the
beginning of this loadcase are to be given.
26-30
6th
Not used.
31-63
7th
Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label
will be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.
If a real displacement is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 are used.

If a complex harmonic displacement is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or
the magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.
4th data block - Magnitudes
1-10
1st
Prescribed displacement for first degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data

block 8.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified.
5th data block - Table IDs

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the first degree of freedom listed.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the second degree of freedom listed.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the third degree of freedom listed.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.
497 FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block - Imaginary Component or Phase Angle

1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of displacement or the phase of the first

degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed imaginary component of displacement or the phase of the

second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed imaginary component of displacement or the phase of the third

7th data block - Table IDs for Imaginary Component or Phase Angle
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the first degree
of freedom listed.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second
degree of freedom listed.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the third degree
of freedom listed.
8th data block

Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed
displacements are prescribed.
Note:
The 9th and 10th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd
data block, 1st field.
9th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the geometry type:

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
3: Volume/Region/Body IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
11: Element-Edges IDs
12: Element-Faces IDs
13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention
14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention
FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) 498

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions
are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the
9th data block.
499 FIXED DISP (Mechanical)

The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven
input style.
Description
This data defines the fixed displacement that each specified degree of freedom must take during the first
and subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the DISP CHANGE option. The boundary
conditions are specified either by giving the kinematic displacement and a list of degrees of freedom and
a list of nodal numbers or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation
(MESH2D). The prescribed displacements are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the
element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the
TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
This field is set to nonzero to flag input of boundary conditions set during
mesh generation (MESH2D). If this field is activated, no further data is
required in this option.
11-15
3rd
Unit number used for MESH2D option.

Note:
The boundary conditions are stored after the connectivity and

coordinate data on this file, so that the model definition data
must be arranged accordingly.
For each set of boundary conditions use the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks.
FIXED DISP (Mechanical) 500

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3a data block
Use only if not Fourier Analysis.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

block 4.
21-30
3rd

A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified. The third
data block is read as 8E10.3.
3b data block
Use for Fourier analysis only.
1-5
1st
Enter the series number associated with this boundary condition.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data block

4.
26-35
4th
36-45
5th
Prescribed displacement for fourth degree of freedom listed in data block

4.
46-55
6th
Prescribed displacement for fifth degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
4th data block

Note:
5th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above boundary conditions are applied.
501 DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Define Distributed Loads
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) Define Distributed Loads
Description
This data block defines potential distributed loads applied to the model, including the magnitude, type of
load and location, and associates this with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition will be
activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The FORCEM user
subroutine can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads, or the TABLE model definition
option may be used.
The distributed loads entered here are total loads. If no time-dependent tables are referenced and the
ramping options in the LOADCASE model or history definition option are not used, the distributed load
will be instantaneously applied in the loadcase.
When used with global adaptive meshing, if the load is applied to a curve or a surface where element
edges or faces are attached, the load is correctly applied after remeshing.
For more information on pressure cavity loading, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information,
Chapter 9, Pressure Cavity Loading.
Note:
If distributed load is applied on the bottom of a shell, the sign of the load is reversed, that
is, a positive load is now in the direction of the normal to the surface.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of distributed loads to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of distributed load data, defaults to input.
The 3rd through 9th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 502

Format
Fixed
6-10
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter 1 if the FORCEM user subroutine required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Enter the Fourier series number associated with the load, enter 0 if no
Fourier series.
21-25
5th
Enter the value of ibody_cavity.

ibody_cavity = icavity * 10000 + icavity_type * 1000 + ibody
where
ibody_cavit is the cavity-modified value for the distributed load type.
y
icavity is the cavity ID.
icavity_type is the cavity load type:
0: cavity is closed.
1: cavity is loaded with an applied pressure.
2: cavity is loaded with an applied mass.
9: cavity load is defined by the UCAV user subroutine.
ibody is the original value for the distributed load type (see library
element description in Marc Volume B: Element Library.)
26-30
6th
Enter 1 to exclude applied load when the edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is fully
in contact.
31-63
7th
If a real distributed load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 are used.

If a complex harmonic distributed load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component
or the magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed load.

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first
coordinate direction.
11-20
2nd
For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the load in second

21-30
3rd
For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the load in third coordinate direction.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the load. For load type 21 or 102 to 113,
enter the table ID associated with the load in the first direction.
6-10
2nd
For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID associated with the load
in the second direction.
11-15
3rd
For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID associated with the load
in the third direction.
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of load or phase angle.
11-20
2nd
For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the imaginary component of load in
second coordinate direction.
21-30
3rd
For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the imaginary component of load in
third coordinate direction.
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase.
6-10
2nd
For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID for imaginary component
or phase in second direction.
11-15
3rd
For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID for imaginary component
or phase in third direction.
8th data block

If geometry type is element IDs (1) use either the first field or the second and third field.
If geometry type is volume (3), surface (4), or curve (5) use the second field only.
1-5
1st
Enter the distributed load type based upon element library description in
6-10
2nd
Enter the distributed load type based upon:

1: Normal pressure
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 504

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2: Shear stress in 1st tangent direction
3: Shear stress in 2nd tangent direction
4: Volumetric in x-direction
5: Volumetric in y-direction
6: Volumetric in z-direction
7: force/length in beams x-direction
8: force/length in beams y-direction
9: force/length in beams z-direction
11: Wave loading
13: Force/length on edge of shell on midplane; perpendicular to
edge
14: Force/length on edge of shell on midplane; tangent to the
edge; positive is from node 1 to node 1+1
15: Force/length on edge of shell; perpendicular to shell, for
example, -v3 direction
21: General traction
100 + jaxis: Centrifugal based upon entering 2, in radians/time
101: Inelastic heat generation
102: Gravity
103 + jaxis: Coriolis based upon entering 2, in radians/time
104 + jaxis: Centrifugal based upon entering (cycles/time)
105 + jaxis: Coriolis based upon entering (cycles/time)
106: Uniform body load (force per unit volume)
107: Nonuniform body load (force per unit volume)
110: Uniform beam load (force per unit length)
111: Nonuniform beam load (force per unit length)
112: Uniform load per unit area
113: Nonuniform load per unit area
Note:
11-15
3rd
For problems with more than one rotation axes, jaxis equals the
rotation ID times a thousand.
Enter the face ID.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9th data block

1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
15: Cavity ID
16: Surface ID: orientation ID
17: Curve ID: orientation ID
18: Surface ID: orientation ID - Mentat convention
19: Curve ID: orientation ID - Mentat convention
10th data block

1-80

9th data block.
DIST LOADS (Model Definition) 506

DIST LOADS (Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This block of data allows pressure (surface and volumetric) loads to be specified. These values are
incremental values per increment if a fixed time-step procedure is used or the total change over the
loadcase if an adaptive time-step procedure is used or the total value of the load if the ELASTIC parameter
is used. User subroutine FORCEM can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads.
Note:
If FOLLOW FOR is included in the input file with DIST LOADS, the input about type of
load, magnitude etc. (data blocks 3 and 4) needs to be consistent in the model and history
definition options.
If FEATURE,10101 is used, then the pressure on an edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is applied, unless all nodes
of that edge or face are in contact with another body. If separation occurs, the distributed load is reapplied
to the surface. This feature internally turns on FOLLOW FOR.
For most distributed load types, one enters a load per unit length (on beams or shell edges) or a load per
unit area. There are a few exceptions listed below:
Load Type
100
Centrifugal
Enter 2 ( in radians/time)
102
Gravity
Enter three values (Force/mass)
103
Centrifugal and Coriolis
104
Centrifugal
Enter ( in cycles/time)
105
106
Uniform Volumetric load
Enter three values force/volume
107
Nonuniform Volumetric load
110
Uniform load per unit length
Enter three values force/length
111
Nonuniform load per unit length
112
Uniform load per unit area
Enter three values force/area
113
Nonuniform load per unit area
General traction
-10 to -21
507 DIST LOADS (Model Definition)

Table 3-8
CID Load Types (Not Table Driven Input)
IBODY
Specify Traction on Edge or Face
User Subroutine
-10
No
-11
Yes
-12
No
-13
Yes
-14
No
-15
Yes
-16
No
-17
Yes
-18
No
-19
Yes
-20
No
-21
Yes
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3a data block
Use if conventional Marc input, not Fourier, not applied to a cavity, and not Nastran PLOAD4 style.
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of load. See library element description in

For problems with more than one rotation axes, add the rotation axis ID
times a thousand.
6-15
2nd

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-25
3rd
For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in
second coordinate direction
26-35
4th
For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in third
coordinate direction
36-40
5th
Distributed load index (optional). (Distributed load index is to be used in

the FORCEM user subroutine.)
3b data block
Use if distributed load is applied to cavity and not Fourier. The CAVITY parameter and CAVITY model
definition option is also required.
1-5
1st

where
ibody_cavity is the cavity-modified value for the distributed load type.
ibody is the original value for the distributed load type (see
library element description in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.)
6-15
2nd
If icavity_type = 1, enter incremental pressure.

If icavity_type = 2, enter incremental mass.
16-25
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
26-35
4th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
5th

41-45
6th
Enter -1 if the cavity load is not active.
509 DIST LOADS (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3c data block
Use if Fourier Analysis.
1-5
1st

times a thousand.
6-15
2nd
Enter the series number associated with this load.
16-25
3rd

26-35
4th
36-40
5th
3d data block
Use if Nastran PLOAD4 style input.
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of load plus 200. See library element
description in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
6-15
2nd
Enter P1, the magnitude of load at node 1 of face or edge.
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th
36-45
5th
Enter P4, the magnitude of load at node 4 of face or edge. Not required if
a triangular face.
46-55
6th
Enter first component of direction of load.
56-65
7th
Enter second component of direction of load.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
66-75
8th
Enter third component of direction of load.
76-80
9th
If positive, distributed load index (optional). (Distributed load index is to

be used in the FORCEM user subroutine.) If the direction of the load is
given with respect to a COORD SYSTEM option, then enter the negative
of the coordinate system ID.
Notes:
If the direction of the load is not defined, then the conventional Marc direction is used.
If the direction of the load is defined, then it is fixed and not updated even if the FOLLOW
FOR parameter is activated.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed loads.
511 FACE IDS

Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations
FACE IDS
Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source,

Films, and Foundations
1-D 2-Node Elements

y
FACE ID
NODES
12
FACE ID
NODES
123
2
1
1-D 3-Node Elements

3
2
1

4
Load shown on FACE ID 1
FACE ID
NODES
12
23
34
41
FACE IDS 512


7
FACE ID
NODES
152
263
374
481
2-D 3-Node Triangle

3
FACE ID
NODES
12
23
31
FACE ID
NODES
142
253
361
2-D 6-Node Triangle

3
3-D 3-Node Shell

z
1
y
x
FACE ID
NODES
123
(top)
132
(bottom)
513 FACE IDS

3-D 4-Node Shell/Membrane

4
FACE ID
NODES
1234
(top)
1432
(bottom)
3-D 6-Node Shell

3
FACE ID
NODES
123456
(top)
132654
(bottom)
3-D 8-Node Shell

4
FACE ID
NODES
12345678
(top)
14328765
(bottom)

4
3
1
2
FACE ID
NODES
124
234
314
123
FACE IDS 514


6
4
FACE ID
NODES
1254
2365
3 1 4 6
132
456
1
2

3
15
6
NODES
1
2
3
4
5
1 2 5 4 7 14 10 13
2 3 6 5 8 15 11 14
3 1 4 6 9 13 12 15
321879
4 5 6 10 11 12
11
12
14
13
4
FACE ID
10
3-D 8-Node Brick

8
5
6
4
FACE ID
NODES
1265
2376
3487
4158
1234
6587
515 FACE IDS


4
10
FACE ID
NODES
1 2 4 5 09 08
2 3 4 6 10 09
3 1 4 7 08 10
1 2 3 5 06 07
9
7
6
1
5
2
3-D 20-Node Brick

8
16
15
7
5
20
13
14
19
17
4
12
11
18
3
9
10
2
FACE ID
NODES
1 2 6 5 09 18 13 17
2 3 7 6 10 19 14 18
3 4 8 7 11 20 15 19
4 1 5 8 12 17 16 20
1 2 3 4 09 10 11 12
6 5 8 7 13 16 15 14
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 516

Define Nodal Point Loads
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)Define Nodal Point Loads
Description
This data block defines potential point loads, including the magnitude and location of application and
associates this with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition will be activated or deactivated
using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. Point loads can be specified as fixed direction
loads or follower loads. The prescribed forces are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with
the element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the
TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.
The point loads entered here are total loads. If no time-dependent tables are referenced and the ramping
options in the LOADCASE model or history definition option are not used, the point load will be
instantaneously applied in the loadcase.
The FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter
nonuniform time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Notes:
The fourth field of the FOLLOW FOR parameter should be set to 1 when follower force
point loads are used in the model. The follower load is only supported through the mesh
based automated option wherein the nodal loads are specified in vector form and the initial
load orientation with respect to the mesh is maintained as the structure deforms. The
follower force option is not available for fourier loads or harmonic loads. Also, the
follower force capability is not supported for point loads specified through the FORCDT
user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT LOAD.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sets of point loads to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point load data, defaults to input.
517 POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 3rd through 8th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDT user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Enter the Fourier series number associated with the nodal load; enter 0 if
no Fourier series.
21-25
5th
Enter 0 for fixed direction load.

Enter -1 for automated follower force
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
will be referenced by the LOADCASE option.
If a real point load is to be defined, data blocks 3 and 4 are used.

If a complex harmonic point load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or the
magnitude; and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.
4th data block
Real magnitude.
1-10
1st
Nodal load associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Nodal load associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Nodal load associated with third degree of freedom.
31-40
4th
Nodal load associated with fourth degree of freedom.
41-50
5th
Nodal load associated with fifth degree of freedom.
51-60
6th
Nodal load associated with sixth degree of freedom.
5th data block - Table ID for Real Magnitude

1-5
1st
Table ID associated with the first degree of freedom.
6-10
2nd
Table ID associated with the second degree of freedom.
11-15
3rd
Table ID associated with the third degree of freedom.
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 518

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Table ID associated with the fourth degree of freedom.
21-25
5th
Table ID associated with the fifth degree of freedom.
26-30
6th
Table ID associated with the sixth degree of freedom.
1-10
1st
Imaginary component/phase associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Imaginary component/phase associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Imaginary component/phase associated with third degree of freedom.
31-40
4th
Imaginary component/phase associated with fourth degree of freedom.
41-50
5th
Imaginary component/phase associated with fifth degree of freedom.
51-60
6th
Imaginary component/phase associated with sixth degree of freedom.
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for first degree
of freedom.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for second degree
of freedom.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for third degree
of freedom.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for fourth degree
of freedom.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for fifth degree
of freedom.
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for sixth degree
of freedom.
The 8th and 9th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data
block, 1st field.
8th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
519 POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9th data block

8th data block.
POINT LOAD (Model Definition) 520

POINT LOAD (Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This block of data allows nodal point loads to be specified. The nodal loads can be specified as fixed
direction loads or follower loads. For the fixed direction loads, the nodal forces are always specified in
vector form. For the follower loads, two options are possible: Option 1 is the MD Nastran style Follower
Force wherein the magnitudes of the nodal force and moment are specified and the direction is
independently specified using 2 or 4 nodes. Option 2 is the Mesh Based Automated Follower Force
wherein the nodal loads are specified in vector form and the initial load orientation with respect to the
mesh is maintained as the structure deforms. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
These values are incremental values unless the ELASTIC parameter is used or the 3rd field of the
FOLLOW FOR parameter is set to 1, in which case they are total loads. When specified in the form of a
load vector, the prescribed forces are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the element,
unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the TRANSFORMATION,
COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.
Notes:
Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes with point loads on the DIST
LOADS parameter.
loads are used in the model. When this global parameter for follower force point loads is
turned on, the 5th data block is mandatory. The follower force option is not valid for fourier
loads or harmonic loads. Also, the follower force capability is not supported for point
loads specified through user subroutine FORCDT.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point load data, defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to signal existence of more than one point load on the same node.
The loads are summed in this case.
521 POINT LOAD (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3a data block
Use if not Fourier Analysis.
1-10
1st

Nodal force magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.
11-20
2nd

Nodal moment magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Nodal load associated with seventh degree of freedom.
71-80
8th
Nodal load associated with eighth degree of freedom.
Continuation data is necessary, must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data is needed if more than
eight degrees of freedom per node in analysis.
Notes:
The nodal load vector is valid for fixed direction force or for automated follower force.
Only the first two fields are used for the MD Nastran style follower force.
3b data block
Use only if Fourier Analysis.
1-5
1st
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th
36-45
5th
46-55
6th
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes having the point load given above.
POINT LOAD (Model Definition) 522

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

Used only when 4th field of FOLLOW FOR parameter is 1.
For the Nastran style follower force, enter as many lines as there are nodes in the 4th data block.
1-5
1st
0 = Fixed direction force

-1 = Automated follower force
First node for Nastran style follower force
6-10
2nd
Second node for Nastran style follower force
11-15
3rd
Third node for Nastran style follower force
16-20
4th
Fourth node for Nastran style follower force
523 HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input)

Neglect Incremental Displacement
Description
This model definition option indicates that the incremental displacement of the indicated nodes is to be
neglected. This allows you to apply a load or displacement on the structure to generate a stress in the body
without the displacements changing. In this way, an initial stress field may be generated. This option
cannot be used with the multiplicative (FeFp) plasticity formulation (PLASTICITY, 5).
At the end of the increment, this option is automatically deactivated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words HOLD NODES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input) 524

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

block 8.
21-30
3rd


1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

Note:
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
8th data block

7th data block.
525 HOLD NODES

HOLD NODES
Description
This model definition option indicates that the incremental displacement of the indicated nodes is to be
neglected. This allows you to apply a load or displacement on the structure to generate a stress in the body
without the displacements changing. In this way, an initial stress field may be generated. This option
cannot be used with the multiplicative (FeFp) plasticity formulation (PLASTICITY, 5).
At the end of the increment, this option is automatically deactivated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words HOLD NODES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read the data from.
Enter a list of nodes for which the displacements will not be updated in
this increment.
3rd data block

1-80
1st
4th data block

1-80
1st
INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition) 526

Define Inertia Relief
INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition)
Description
This option defines the parameters necessary for conducting an inertia relief analysis. The parameters are
used to evaluate the Rigid Body Modes of the system. Once the modes are evaluated, the program
evaluates the inertia relief load vector which balances the external load vector acting on the system. For
more details of these procedures, you are referred to Inertia Relief in Chapter 5 in the Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information manual.
When inertia relief is no longer active in a current loadcase, an option can be provided to remove or retain
inertia relief loads from previous loadcases.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INERTIA RELIEF.
Flag for Rigid Body Mode evaluation method:
2nd data block

1-5
1st
0 - Inertia Relief is not active in current loadcase

3 - Support Method
6-10
2nd
Flag to retain/remove previous Inertia Relief Loading:

1 - retain load
-1 - remove load immediately (default)
-2 - remove load gradually
11-15
Note:
3rd
Number of Lines containing Support degree of freedom information

(default 1)
Field 2 of data block 2 is only used if inertia relief is not active in the current loadcase (i.e.,
Field 1 of data block 2 is 0). Also, data block 3 is not necessary in this case.
Data block 3 is repeated as many times as specified in the 2nd data block, 3rd field.
3rd data block
Use only if 1st field of 2nd data block is 3 (Support Method)
1-5
1st
Node ID 1.
6-10
2nd
Degree of Freedom ID 1.
11-15
3rd
Node ID 2.
16-20
4th
527 INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Node ID 3.
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Node ID 4.
36-40
8th
41-5
1st
Node ID 5.
46-10
2nd
51-55
3rd
Node ID 6.
56-60
4th
61-65
5th
Node ID 7.
66-70
6th
71-75
15th
Node ID 8.
76-80
16th
Note:
The degrees of freedom in fields 2, 4, etc. of data block 3 refer to the nodal degrees of
freedom that define the rigid body motion (r-constraint set). The associated nodes are defined
in fields 1,3, etc. The degrees of freedom that form part of the r-constraint set at any
particular node can be specified in combined form (e.g., 123, 135, etc.). If all degrees of
freedom at node N are to be part of this set, simply specify a negative number in the
associated degrees of freedom field.
ROTATION A 528
Define Rotational Axis
ROTATION A
Define Rotational Axis
Description
This option defines the rotation axis for centrifugal and/or Coriolis loading or for the STEADY STATE
rolling option. This option is also used for steady state rolling analyses. The rotational speed is entered
though the DIST LOADS option. Using an IBODY=100 or 104 results in centrifugal loading, using an
IBODY=103 or 105 results in both centrifugal and Coriolis loading.
If multiple rotation axis are supported for centrifugal and Coriolis loads, this all data blocks should
be repeated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ROTATION A.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-35
4th
Direction cosines of the axis of rotation.

Enter rotation axis ID; default is 1.
Alternative input: The rotation axis will be along a line from the first node entered to the second
node entered.
36-40
5th
Enter the node number the axis passes through.
41-45
6th
Enter the second node the rotation axis passes through; not necessary for
2-D problems because the axis is always normal to the plane.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
Global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on the axis of rotation.
Velocity of the point on the axis of rotation, used for Coriolis

loading only.
529 CORNERING AXIS

Define Cornering Axis in Steady State Rolling Analysis
CORNERING AXIS
Define Cornering Axis in Steady State Rolling Analysis
Description
This option defines the cornering axis for steady state rolling analysis. The cornering velocity is defined
via the SS-ROLLING history definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CORNERING.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
First direction cosine of the cornering axis.
11-20
2nd
Second direction cosine of the cornering axis.
21-30
3rd
Third direction cosine of the cornering axis.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
x coordinate of a point on the cornering axis.
11-20
2nd
y coordinate of a point on the cornering axis.
21-30
3rd
z coordinate of a point on the cornering axis.
FLUID DRAG 530

Define Fluid Drag
FLUID DRAG
Define Fluid Drag
Description
This option defines parameters required for the evaluation of drag loads and buoyancy loads on beam
type structures immersed in a fluid. The drag forces are defined by Morisons equation. In static analyses,
the fluid velocity is constant and defined here. In dynamic analyses, an additional contribution is added
due to wave effects.
Note:
In two dimensional analyses, the y-axis is considered vertically up, current is required only
in x and y directions and the first direction cosine is either a one or minus one. In three
dimensional analyses, the z-axis is considered vertically up.
Those elements which require fluid drag must be indicated on the DIST LOADS option
using a load type of 11. If an element is above the fluid surface, no drag or buoyancy
is included.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FLUID DRAG.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the elevation of the sea bed.
11-20
2nd
Enter the surface elevation of the fluid outside the pipe.
21-30
3rd
Enter the surface elevation of the fluid inside the pipe.
31-40
4th
Enter the gravity constant.
41-50
5th
Enter mass density of fluid outside pipe.
51-60
6th
Enter mass density of fluid inside pipe.
61-70
7th
Enter the drag coefficient.
71-80
8th
Enter the inertia coefficient.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Current in x-direction.
11-20
2nd
Current in y-direction.
21-30
3rd
Current in z-direction.
531 FLUID DRAG

Define Fluid Drag
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
Gradient of x-current with elevation.
41-50
5th
Gradient of y-current with elevation.
51-60
6th
Gradient of x-current with elevation.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Wave height.
11-20
2nd
Wave period.
21-30
3rd
Wave phase.
31-40
4th
First direction cosine in horizontal plane of wave front.
41-50
5th
Second direction cosine in horizontal plane of wave front.
CAVITY 532
Define Constants and Reference Values for Structures with Internal Cavities
CAVITY
Define Constants and Reference Values for Structures with

Internal Cavities
Description
This option allows you to enter the ambient pressure and ideal gas law exponent for structural analyses
involving internal cavities. It also allows you to enter the reference gas pressure, temperature, and density
for each cavity. When using the CAVITY option, the CAVITY parameter must also be included. (See Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information.)
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CAVITY.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Ambient pressure. Default is 0.0.
11-20
2nd
Ideal gas law exponent. Default is 1.0.
Data block 3 is repeated for each cavity

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Cavity ID.
6-15
2nd
Gas reference pressure.
16-25
3rd
Gas reference temperature.
26-35
4th
Gas reference density.
36-40
5th
Cavity sign convention; used for shell and membrane elements:

Set to 1 (default) if the signs of the cavity pressure and a positive element
pressure are the same.
Set to -1 if the signs of the cavity pressure and a positive element pressure
are opposite.
Note:
The elements defining the cavity must be aligned.
533 PRE STATE

Transfer History Data from Previous Analysis to the Current Analysis as the Initial State
PRE STATE
Transfer History Data from Previous Analysis to the Current

Analysis as the Initial State
Description
In a general multi-stage analysis, previous analysis results are often required as the initial state for the
new analysis. The PRE STATE option includes the capability of the existing AXITO3D option to allow
the transfer of data in a result file to the new analysis. This capability includes data transfer from a 2-D
axisymmetric analysis to a 3-D analysis, from a 2-D plane strain analysis to a 3-D analysis, or simply
data transfer to the same type of analysis. If, in the previous analysis, there are multiple deformable
contact bodies, the PRE STATE option allows the user to specify which contact bodies in the previous
analysis need the data transfer, by providing a list of contact body names. The PRE STATE option
replaces the existing AXITO3D option.
In order to have a correct data transfer, the following should be observed:
1. Correct data in the previous result file:
For large strain metal plasticity, this would include at least stress (post code 311) and equivalent
plastic strain (post code 7). For plasticity procedure using multiplicative elastic-plastic
decomposition, total strain tensor (post code 301) and plastic strain tensor (post code 321) are
required. For updated Lagrange rubber elasticity, strain (post code 301) and stress (post code 311)
are needed. For an analysis involving temperature, thermal strain (post code 371) and temperature
(post code 9) are required. Creep strain (post code 331) and equivalent creep strain (post code 37),
velocity and acceleration are needed for a creep and dynamic analysis, respectively.
Nodal displacement can be transferred as well as nodal velocity and acceleration but it should be
consistent with the previous model. If the current model is created based on the original mesh in
the previous model, nodal displacement should be included in the transfer. If the current model is
created based on the final mesh, such as in the case of global remeshing, the nodal displacement
should not be included in the transfer. By default, if total Lagrange procedure is used in the current
model, nodal displacement is transferred. Therefore, in this case, it is important to create the
model based on the initial mesh in the previous model.
Nodal temperature is transferred by default in the thermal-mechanical coupled analysis. If the
temperature at the integration points is required in the current model but not stored in the previous
result file, nodal temperature is used instead.
2. Compatible analysis types
In the current release, only 2-D plane strain to 3-D model and 2-D axisymmetric to 3-D model are
supported in the 2-D to 3-D transfer. 2-D to 2-D and 3-D to 3-D transfer are based on the same
mesh model. Not all the element types are supported in the analysis with the PRE STATE option
as stated below.
3. Compatible element types
It is important to select the correct element types compatible with the previous model for a 2-D to
3-D transfer. For the same element type transfer, not all the element types are supported.
PRE STATE 534

For axisymmetric to 3-D transfer, supported element types are:

10 -> 7
20 -> 7
82 -> 84
83 -> 84
28 -> 21
67 -> 21
33 -> 35
66 -> 35
55 -> 57
59 -> 61
48 -> 23
142 -> 23
144 -> 146
145 -> 146
For 2-D plane strain to 3-D solid elements, supported elements types are:
11 -> 7
80 -> 84
19 -> 7
81 -> 84
27 -> 21
32 -> 35
29 -> 21
34 -> 35
For 2-D to 2-D and 3-D to 3-D transfer, the following element types are tested and supported:
7, 157, 10, 11, 19, 20
4. Compatible PRE STATE models and mesh numbering
During the PRE STATE history data transfer, a list of contact bodies is transferred from a result
file. If this is not a 2-D to 3-D conversion, the elemental data and nodal data are copied to the
current model providing the elements and nodes within the bodies are matched. Element and
nodal numbering sequence within the bodies should be continuous and in the same order although
the numbers may not be the same. For 2-D to 3-D transfer, the mesh expansion is based on the
method that Marc Mentat uses that is, each base element in 2-D is expanded with number of
repetitions in z-direction or around x axis in the axisymmetric to 3-D case. The element
numbering follows each element expansion. If the new mesh in 3-D is not generated in such
manner, the data transfer will be incorrect. For axisymmetric to 3-D, if MD Patran is used to
generate the 3-D mesh, this can be specified in the input.
535 PRE STATE

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PRE STATE
Analysis Type in the previous model
2nd data block

1-5
1st
= 1 plane stress (not supported)

= 2 plane strain
= 3 axisymmetric
= 4 3-D
6-10
2nd
Analysis Type in the current model

= 1 plane stress (not supported)
= 2 plane strain
= 3 axisymmetric
= 4 3-D
11-15
3rd
Enter the number of repetitions in 3-D expansion direction. Used only for
axisymmetric to 3-D or plane strain to 3-D transfer. Default = 0.
16-20
4th
Increment to read from post file.

-1 The last increment on the post file.
-2 Input the time to read the post file at 3rd data block.
21-25
5th
Unit number from which the post file is read. Defaults to unit 24 for a
formatted post file and to unit 25 for a binary post file.
26-30
6th
Enter 0 for binary post file.

Enter 1 for formatted post file.
31-35
7th
Enter 1 to move stress tensor (post code 311).
36-40
8th
Enter 1 to move equivalent plastic strain (post code 7).
41-45
9th
Enter 1 to move temperatures (post code 9 or 180).
46-50
10th
Enter 1 to move strain tensor (post code 301).
51-55
11th
Enter 1 to move plastic strain tensor (post code 321).
56-60
12th
Enter 1 to move thermal strain tensor (post code 371).
61-65
13th
Enter 1 to move creep strain tensor (post code 331).
66-70
14th
Enter 1 to move equivalent creep strain (post code 37).
PRE STATE 536

Format
Fixed
Free
71-75
15th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 to move displacements, (as well as velocity and acceleration in a

dynamic analysis).
If total Lagrangian formulation is used in the analysis, the number is set
to 1 by Marc. Displacements are always moved. In this case, the mesh of
the data transfer body in the new model must be generated based on the
undeformed model.
Enter 0 if the new mesh is generated based on the deformed mesh in the
previous model and the updated Lagrange is used in the analysis.
Enter 1 to move displacements If the new mesh is generated based on the
initial configuration in the previous model.
76-80
16th
Enter 0 if the standard Marc Mentat numbering is used (default).

Enter 1 if the position based mapping is required.
The 3rd data block is needed only if the 4th field of the 2nd data block is -2.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the time to read the post file.
4th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of contact bodies in data transfer. Default = 0, in this

case all the elements in the previous model are transferred.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 for rigid body rotation (not supported).
The 5th data block is required only when the first field of 4th data block is not zero. Repeat 5th data
block for all contact names defined in the first field of the 4th data block.
5th data block
1-24
1st
Enter contact body name in the previous model for data transfer.
537 AXITO3D (Model Definition)

Transfer Data from Axisymmetric Analysis to 3-D Analysis
AXITO3D (Model Definition) Transfer Data from Axisymmetric Analysis to 3-D Analysis
Description
In certain cases, it is possible to begin a numerical simulation using a 2-D axisymmetric model, even
though the final problem is fully 3-D. Splitting the simulation in an axisymmetric and a 3-D part might
be advantageous because of considerable computational savings, provided that there is an efficient data
transfer from the axisymmetric to the 3-D model. The AXITO3D option is used in the input file of the 3D problem to import results of an axisymmetric analysis into a 3-D analysis. Since the results from the
axisymmetric analysis are imported from the post file, care must be taken to write the appropriate data
on the post file during the axisymmetric analysis. For example, for large strain metal plasticity, this would
include at least stress (post code 311) and equivalent plastic strain (post code 7). For updated Lagrange
rubber elasticity, strain (post code 301) and stress (post code 311) are needed. For an analysis involving
temperature, thermal strain (post code 371) and temperature (post code 9) are required. Creep strain (post
code 331) and equivalent creep strain (post code 37), velocity and acceleration are needed for a creep and
dynamic analysis, respectively. The AXITO3D option can be used for most quadrilateral axisymmetric
continuum elements. The following table shows the correlation between element types.
Axisymmetric
3-D Solid
10
20
82
84
83
84
28
21
67
21
33
35
66
35
55
57
59
61
48
23
142
23
144
146
145
146
166
147
167
147
169
148
170
148
AXITO3D (Model Definition) 538

The external applied load and displacement boundary conditions are transferred from the axisymmetric
analysis to 3-D analysis using the table curve shift feature in Marc Mentat.
This option cannot be used for beams, composites, and triangular elements.
There are three steps required to perform these types of analysis using Marc Mentat.
1. Perform axisymmetric analysis:
a. Create axisymmetric model using Marc Mentat.
b. Save the created model; for example, into stage_axi.mud.
c. Run axisymmetric model and keep post file (stage_axi_job1.t16 or
stage_axi_job1.t19).
2. Create 3-D model using Marc Mentat.
a. Open axisymmetric model stage_axi.mud.
b. Expand axisymmetric mesh to 3-D model via:
MESH GENERATIONEXPANDAXSYMMETRIC MODEL TO 3D and move the rigid
surfaces, if any, to the deformed configuration.

c. Define data transfer parameters via:
INITIAL CONDITIONSMECHANICALAXSYMMETRIC-3D
d. Add additional model data such as contact surfaces if necessary.

e. Save the created model with a different name to avoid overwriting the existing
stage_axi.mud; for example, into stage_3d.mud.
3. Run 3-D model.
Note:
(1) In the axisymmetric model, the node and element numbering have to start at 1 and have
to be consecutive.
(2) If a 3-D analysis is run outside of Marc Mentat, use the -pid command line option to
read in a post file of axisymmetric analysis. For example, to submit a 3-D analysis, use
the command:
marc -j stage_3d_job1 -pid stage_axi_job1
(3) If remeshing/rezoning steps are performed in the axisymmetric analysis, the original
mesh in the model is replaced by a new mesh. The 3-D analysis starts based on the
deformed configuration.
To replace step 2-a above, do the following:
i. Open post file stage_axi.t16 (or stage_axi.t19)
ii. Position to the desired increment.
iii. Rezone.
iv. Save the model to stage_3d.mud.
v. Close post file.
vi. Open stage_3d.mud.
539 AXITO3D (Model Definition)

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word AXITO3D.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Not used.
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd
Enter the number of repetitions in direction.
16-20
4th
Increment to read off post file.

-1
The last increment on the post file of an axisymmetric job (default).
-2
Input the time to read the post file at 3rd data block.
21-25
5th
Unit number from which the post file is read. Defaults to unit 24 for a
formatted post file and to unit 25 for a binary post file.
26-30
6th
Enter 0 for binary post file.

Enter 1 for formatted post file.
31-35
7th
Enter 1 to move stress tensor (post code S).
36-40
8th
Enter 1 to move equivalent plastic strain (post code 7).
41-45
9th
Enter 1 to move temperatures (post code 9 or 180).
46-50
10th
Enter 1 to move strain tensor (post code 301).
51-55
11th
Enter 1 to move plastic strain tensor (post code 321).
56-60
12th
Enter 1 to move thermal strain tensor (post code 371).
61-65
13th
Enter 1 to move creep strain tensor (post code 331).
66-70
14th
Enter 1 to move equivalent creep strain (post code 37).
71-75
15th
Enter 1 to move displacements, (as well as velocity and acceleration in a

dynamic analysis).
If total Lagrangian formulation is used in the analysis, the number is set to
1 by Marc. Displacements are always moved. In this case, the 3-D mesh
must be generated based on the undeformed axisymmetric mesh.
If updated Lagrange is used in the analysis, enter 0 if the 3-D mesh is
generated based on the deformed axisymmetric mesh. If the 3-D mesh is
generated based on the original axisymmetric mesh, enter 1 to move
displacements.
76-80
16th
Enter 1 if the 3-D mesh is not generated by Mentat.
AXITO3D (Model Definition) 540

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 3rd data block is needed only if the 4th field of the 2nd data block is -2.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the time to read the post file.
541 GLK
Generation of Global Local File
GLK
Generation of Global Local File
Description
This option is to generate a GLK file for a further local analysis in a structural zooming analysis. This is
required only if global remeshing exists in the job.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word GLK.
Enter the increment interval used to output results into GLK file.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
GLOBALLOCAL 542
Structural Zooming Analysis
GLOBALLOCAL
Description
This option defines control parameters and a list of local nodes connecting to the global model in a
structural zooming analysis.
In order to achieve a better evaluation of the local gradients in the solution, a re-analysis of the model
with some local variations may be needed. These variations may be due to changes in model geometry
or in the finite element mesh. However, in cases that these local changes have negligible influence on the
solution a certain distance away from the changes, it is computationally more efficient to model only the
local changes and the vicinity affected. This can be accomplished by applying the existing loads and/or
boundary conditions in the local model along with properly defined kinematic conditions to the local
boundaries connecting to the global model.
A typical Marc structural zooming analysis contains two steps:
1. Global run to obtain global results and a post file containing these results.
2. Local run to define kinematic boundary conditions in the local model and to obtain refined results
in the local model.
This procedure can be repeated as many times as desired. Any local analysis can be the global analysis
of a subsequent refinement analysis.
The GLOBALLOCAL option is used in the input of the local run to define the list of nodes connecting to
the global model. Marc calculates the deformation (temperature) history of these nodes based on their
locations in the global model and on the solution of the global analysis. The obtained deformation
(temperature) history is then applied to the nodes as prescribed kinematic boundary conditions. The
detailed steps include:
a. Reading in the GLOBALLOCAL option to get the list of connecting nodes.
b. Reading in the global model (element types, node coordinates, element connectivity,
thickness if shell elements) and solution of the model from the previously generated post file
of the global run.
c. Finding the locations of local connecting nodes in the global model (the element each node is
associated with and its isoparametric location within the element).
d. Calculating the deformation (temperature) of each connecting node for every increment
available in the global post file based on its location in the global elements associated using
the interpolation techniques, and store the deformation (temperature) history in the format of
time-dependant tables.
e. Applying the deformation (temperature) history of the connecting nodes to the local model as
prescribed kinematic boundary conditions.
All the above steps are performed automatically inside Marc once the GLOBALLOCAL option is used in
the input file of the local run.
543 GLOBALLOCAL
Factors to Consider in Global Analysis

In the global analysis, it is a good idea to write the entire global model into the post file. The post file
should contain, at least, nodal displacements for mechanical analyses or nodal temperatures for heat
transfer analysis, or both for thermal-mechanical coupled analyses. If there are shell elements in the
model, the shell thickness at each integration point (i.e., post code 20) should also be written into the post
file. In order to form an accurate deformation (temperature) history of the connecting nodes in the local
run, it is recommended that the results of all increments be put onto the post file. Smaller increment size
(therefore, more increments) in the post file leads to a more accurate deformation (temperature) history
of connecting nodes.
The time scale in the global analysis must be the same as that of local analysis. It is recommended that
the time range used in the local run 0 t local be equal to or less than the time range in the global run
0 t global ; i.e., t loca l t global . If t loca l t global , the extrapolation option defined in the 4th field of the 2nd
data block of the GLOBALLOCAL option can be used.
Element Types Supported
The global to local modeling can be used in the following four cases:
Global Model
Local Model
2-D Solid
2-D Solid
3-D Solid
3-D Solid
3-D Shell/Membrane
3-D Shell/Membrane
3-D Shell/Membrane
3-D Solid
Limitations
The local run must be based on a single, continuous global post file. Therefore, if restart had been
employed during the global analysis, a complete post file for the global analysis must be properly
generated. This is also true if the global analysis is performed with DDM.
Adaptive remeshing can be used in global but not in local runs.
The element types not supported includes all rebar element types, all 1-D element types (truss, beam
axisymmetric shell), all special element types (gap, semi-infinite ) and nonconventional shell types
(type 4, 8, 24, 49, 68, and 72).
In the current release, the feature does not support magnetostatic, fluid-solid or harmonic analysis.
Note:
If the local analysis is run outside of Mentat, use the -pid command line option to read in
the post file of global analysis. For example, to submit a local analysis, use the command
line:
marc -j local_model -pid global_model
GLOBALLOCAL 544
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the word GLOBALLOCAL.
Enter the number of geometry types.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
(see the 3rd and the 4th data block). Default is 1.

5-10
2nd
= 0 if read in a binary global post file

= 1 if read in a formatted global post file.
11-15
3rd
Exterior tolerance; used to find the associated global element for a

connecting node. Default is 0.05.
A connecting node is considered within a global element if the distance
between the node and the element is smaller than the tolerance times the
corresponding element edge length, unless the node is actually inside
another global element.
16-20
4th
= 0 exit if the local run time range exceeds the global post file time range.
= 1 use end value if the local run time range exceeds the global post file
time range.
= 2 use extrapolation if the local run time range exceeds the global post
file time range.
26-35
5th
Timeshift. Global results will be taken at Local time + Timeshift. Default

ID 0.d0. Timeshift cannot be negative.
36-40
6th
Enter 0 to use post file to input global results (default).

Enter 1 to use GLK file to input global results. This is required only if
global remeshing exists in global job.
To generate a GLK file, GLK model definition option needs to be used in
global job.
2a data block
1-80
1st
Enter the name of GLK file if the 6th field of the 2nd data block is 1.
545 GLOBALLOCAL
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 1st
field of the 2nd data block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the geometry types

2: Nodes
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
Default is 2.
4th data block

Enter the list of geometry entities, which must all be of the type prescribed
in the 3rd data block.
INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input) 546

Description
This option allows you to define initial stresses and associate them with an initial condition name. These
initial conditions will be activated using the LOADCASE model definition option. It is your responsibility
to input a self-equilibrating set of stresses. These stresses should not produce any material nonlinearity.
As an alternative, the UINSTR user subroutine can be used.
To obtain the initial stress from the calculated value of a previous analysis, use the PRE STATE option.
Notes:
It is not recommended to use the CENTROID parameter with initial stresses because the
residual load cannot be accurately calculated.
For shells and beams, these are the real physical stress, not the generalized stresses.
The stresses entered should be in the element coordinate system and not the preferred
material coordinate system.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INIT STRESS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of initial stress data to be entered (optional)
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of initial stress data.

Defaults to input file.
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are repeated once for each data set. The components of stress are given
in the order described for each element type in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the number of geometry types used to define this initial condition,
default is 1. See the 6th and 7th data blocks.
6-10
2nd
Enter 0 if no user subroutine is required.

Enter 1 if the UINSTR user subroutine is used.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
547 INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the unique label associated with this initial condition. This label will
be referenced by the LOADCASE option.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the first component of stress.
11-20
2nd
Enter the second component of stress.
21-30
3rd
Enter the third component of stress.
31-40
4th
Enter the fourth component of stress.
41-50
5th
Enter the fifth component of stress.
51-60
6th
Enter the sixth component of stress.
61-70
7th
Enter the seventh component of stress.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID associated with the first component of stress.
6-10
2nd
Table ID associated with the second component of stress.
11-15
3rd
Table ID associated with the third component of stress.
16-20
4th
Table ID associated with the fourth component of stress.
21-25
5th
Table ID associated with the fifth component of stress.
26-30
6th
Table ID associated with the sixth component of stress.
31-35
7th
Table ID associated with the seventh component of stress.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data block,
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 - Element IDs
3 - Volume/Region/Body IDs
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above initial conditions are
applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the
6th data block.
INIT STRESS 548

INIT STRESS
input style.
Description
Option A allows the user to enter initial stresses into the model. It is the users responsibility to input a
self-equilibrating set of stresses. These stresses should not produce any material nonlinearity. As an
alternative, the UINSTR user subroutine can be used.
For analysis that involves the machining capability of Marc, there exists another option (Option B) to
input the initial stress. Option B allows users to have the initial stress data stored in a data file. The data
file is in ASCII text format.
Notes:
It is not recommended to use the CENTROID parameter with initial stresses because the
residual load cannot be accurately calculated.
For shells and beams, these are the real physical stress, not the generalized stresses.
The stresses entered should be in the element coordinate system and not the preferred
material coordinate system.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INIT STRESS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of initial stress data to be entered (optional)
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of initial stress data.

10-15
3rd
Enter 1 if there exists initial stress data stored in an ASCII data file.
(Default is set to 0.)
Note:
This option only works in combination with the MACHINING

parameter. In the current version of Marc, the only element
types supported are: 7, 117, and 134.
The 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th (and, if necessary, 7th) data blocks are repeated once for each data set. The
components of stress are given in the order described for each element type in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.
549 INIT STRESS

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Option A
Option A is only necessary if the third field of the 2nd data block is set to 0. In this case, the 3rd, 4th,
5th, and 6th data blocks are repeated once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Enter a list of elements for which initial stress prescribed above is applied.
4th data block

1-80
1st
5th data block

Only necessary if CENTROID parameter is not used.
1-80
1st
Enter a list of integration points for which the initial stresses are applied.
6th data block

Only necessary for shell or beam analysis.
1-80
1st
Enter a list of layers for which the initial stress is prescribed.
Option B
Option B is necessary only if the third field of the 2nd data block is set to 1. In this case, the 3rd, 4th,
5th, 6th, and 7th data blocks are repeated once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter 0 if the residual stress data is not defined by a text data file.
Enter 1 to 3 if the stress data is given in a separate text data file.
6-80
2nd
if stresses are defined in one direction only (1-D space).
if stresses are defined in 2-D space.
if stresses are defined in 3-D space.
Enter the name of text file that contains the initial stress data if the first
field is set to 1, 2, or 3.
4th data block (If the first field of the 3rd data block is set to 0.)
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
INIT STRESS 550

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
4th data block (If the first field of the 3rd data block is set to 1, 2, or 3.)
1-10
1st
Enter the first component of base vector, V1.
11-20
2nd
Enter the second component of base vector, V1.
21-30
3rd
Enter the third component of base vector, V1.
31-40
4th
Enter the first component of base vector, V2.
41-50
5th
Enter the second component of base vector, V2.
51-60
6th
Enter the third component of base vector, V2.

Note:
In case of 1-D or 2-D, the primary axes are V1 and V2; if 3-D,
the primary axes are V1, V2, and V3. Here, V3 is defined by the
cross product of V1 and V2.
5th data block

1-80
1st
Enter a list of elements for which initial stress prescribed above is applied.
6th data block

Only necessary if CENTROID parameter is not used.
1-80
1st
Enter a list of integration points for which the initial stresses are applied.
7th data block

1-80
1st
Enter a list of layers for which the initial stress is prescribed.
ASCII Text Data Format

This ASCII text data format is used in a separate text file as defined by input Option B when the first
field of the 3rd data block is set as nonzero.
1st data block
1st
Enter the total number of points (optional).
551 INIT STRESS

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1st
First coordinate of starting point of the coordinate system defined in the

ASCII text file.
2nd
Second coordinate of starting point of the coordinate system defined in the

ASCII text file.
3rd
Third coordinate of starting point of the coordinate system defined in the

ASCII text file.
3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each point till the end of the file.
3rd data block
1st
Enter the first coordinate component of the point.
2nd
Enter the second coordinate component of the point.
3rd
Enter the third coordinate component of the point.
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
4th data block
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input) 552

Define Initial Strain
Description
This option allows you to define potential initial plastic strains, and associate them with an initial
condition name. The initial condition is activated using the LOADCASE model definition option.
Occasionally, in metal forming analysis, it is required to define the previous amount of equivalent plastic
strain. This history dependent variable represents the amount of plastic deformation that the model was
subjected to, and is used in the work (strain) hardening model.
Initial Plastic Strain may be used in three different ways with the new table input format.
Method 1 is when data is directly input. While not explicitly stated, the data can always be a function of
a table, where the independent variables are, e.g., positioned to allow a nonhomogeneous field.
Method 2 is based upon reading the plastic strain from a post file created in a previous stress analysis.
Method 3 is using INITPL user subroutine to define initial plastic strain variables.
1. Read the range of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding value.
2. Read the initial values from a step of the post output file from a previous analysis with Marc. With
this option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file elements with the elements in the
current analysis. Any spatial interpolation must be provided separately by you.
3. Read the initial values through the INITPL user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INIT PLASTIC STRAIN.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of initial plastic stain data to be entered (optional)
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of initial plastic stain data.

553 INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Not used: enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter the method:

3 - use binary post file
5 - use ASCII post file
6 - use data lines (default)
7 - use the INITPL user subroutine.
11-15
3rd
If method 3 or 5, enter the step number to read.

If method 6, enter the number of geometric types used to define this
boundary condition.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Enter unique label associated with this initial condition. This label will be
referenced by the LOADCASE option.
4th data block (Used only if method = 6 or 7)

1-10
1st
Enter the first magnitude of the initial equivalent plastic strain.

1-5
1st
Table ID associated with the initial equivalent plastic strain.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd field of the
2nd data block (only used if method = 6 or 7).
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 - Element IDs
7th data block

1-80
applied. The geometric entities must all be al the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN 554

Define Initial Plastic Strain
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define potential initial plastic strains. and associate them with an initial
Occasionally, in metal forming analysis, it is required to define the previous amount of equivalent plastic
strain. This history dependent variable represents the amount of plastic deformation that the model was
subjected to, and is used in the work (strain) hardening model.
Four ways of specifying the initial equivalent plastic strain values are shown below:
Read the range of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding value.
Read the initial values through user subroutine INITPL.
Read the initial values from a step of the post output file from a previous analysis with Marc.
With this option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file elements with the elements
in the current analysis. Any spatial interpolation must be provided separately by you.
Read a list of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding value.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Not used, enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to initialize the equivalent plastic strain via the 3rd and 4th data
blocks below. In this case, the third field must also be defined.
Enter 2 to initialize the equivalent plastic strain via the INITPL user
subroutine. This subroutine is now called in a loop over all elements in
the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the initial values of the equivalent plastic strain from the
post file written by a previous analysis. In this case, the fourth and fifth
field must also be defined.
Enter 4 to initialize the equivalent plastic strain via the 5th, 6th, 7th, and
8th data blocks shown below. See also the third field on this block.
555 INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 1 or 4. Then this entry gives the
number of pairs of data blocks in series 3 and 4 or in series 5, 6, 7 8 used
to input the equivalent plastic strain. Defaults to 1.
16-20
4th
Only used if the second field is set to 3. Then this entry defines the unit
number from which the post file information from the previous run is to
be read.
21-25
5th
Only used if the second field is set to 3. In that case, this entry defines the
step number of the previous analysis.
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Set to 1 if option 3 is used, and a formatted post file is used.
36-40
8th
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 2. Set to 1 to suppress printout

of equivalent plastic strains values that are initialized in INITPL.
Not used, enter 0.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are only input if the second field above is set to 1. In that case, the number of sets
is equal to the number given in the third field above.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
First element with this value.
6-10
2nd
Last element with this value.
11-15
3rd
First integration point with this value.
16-20
4th
Last integration point with this value.
21-25
5th
First layer of cross-section point with this value.
26-30
6th
Last layer or cross-section point with this value can only be bigger than 1
for beam or shell elements.
Initial value of the equivalent plastic strain for the above range of points.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 are only input if the second field above is set to 4. In that case, the number
of sets is equal to the number given in the third field above.
5th data block
1-10
1st
Initial value of the equivalent plastic strain at zeroth increment.
6th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above value is applied.
7th data block
This data block is not necessary if the CENTROID parameter is used.
Enter a list of integration points to which the above value is applied.
8th data block
This data block is only necessary if there are either beams or shells in the mesh.
Enter a list of layer points to which the above value is applied.
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input) 556

Initialize State Variables
Description
This option allows you to define potential initial state variables and associate them with an initial
The number of state variables per integration point is defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default
is one, with temperature always being the first state variable at an integration point. If more than one state
variable per integration point has been assigned, this option can be used repeatedly to initialize all the
state variables. The default value of state variables not initialized is zero.
INITIAL STATE may be used in three different ways with the new table input format. Method 1 is when
data is directly input and not read from a post file. While not explicitly stated, the data can always be a
function of a table, where the independent variables are position to allow a nonhomogeneous field. They
may also be a function of time, but will be evaluated at time equals zero.
Method 2 is based upon reading the state variable from a post file created in a previously generated heat
transfer analysis.
1. The initial value is the value entered here including the evaluation of the table.
2. The initial state variable is obtained by reading in a single increment from the post file. Only a
single increment is read in.
3. The INITSV user subroutine is used to define the initial state variables.
Notes:
The Fourier series number is not applicable to the methods where the initial
conditions are read from the post file. The Fourier series number is not
supported in this version.
Initial temperature values read in by this option are assumed to define the
stress-free temperature field. Temperature changes which cause thermal
strains are read in through the CHANGE STATE options.
In a coupled analysis, the temperatures are not independent state variables
and the INITIAL TEMP option must be used.
557 INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input)

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL STATE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data (not required).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read data.
Enter the state variable identifier
3rd data block

1-5
1st
(1 for temperature).
Enter -1 if multiple state variables are read from a post file. In this case,
the 8th data block is also required.
6-10
2nd
Enter the method:

5 - use ASCII post file
7 - use the INITSV user subroutine.
11-15
3rd

boundary condition.
16-20
4th
Enter the Fourier Series Number
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used, enter 0.
31-35
7th
Enter boundary condition label.

1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of the initial state variable.
5th data block (User only if method = 6 or 7)

1-10
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the initial state variable.
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input) 558

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated for as many geometric types as specified in the in the third
field of the 2nd data block (only used if method = 6 or 7).
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 - Element IDs
3 - Volume/Region/Body ID
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above initial condition are
applied. All the geometric entities must be of the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
The 8th data block is required only if multiple state variables are read from a post file if the first field
of the 3rd data block is -1.
8th data block
1-80
Enter a list of state variables.
559 INITIAL STATE

INITIAL STATE
input style.
Description
This option provides various ways of initializing the state variables throughout the model. The number
of state variables per integration point is defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default is one, with
temperature always being the first state variable at an integration point. If more than one state variable
per integration point has been assigned, this option can be used repeatedly to initialize all the state
variables. The default value of state variables not initialized is zero.
Four ways of providing the state variable initial values are shown below:
Read the range of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding state
variable value.
Read the initial values through the INITSV user subroutine.
Read the initial values from a step of the binary or formatted post output file from a previous
heat transfer analysis with Marc. This technique is most common for thermal stress analysis to
initialize temperature (the first state variable at any point). With this option, Marc assumes direct
correspondence of the post file elements with the elements in the current analysis. Any spatial
interpolation must be provided separately by you.
Read a list of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding state variable value.
Note:
Initial temperature values read in by this option are assumed to define the stress-free
temperature field. Temperature changes which cause thermal strains are read in
through the CHANGE STATE or AUTO THERM options.
In a coupled analysis, the temperatures are not independent state variables and the
INITIAL TEMP option must be used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL STATE.
INITIAL STATE 560

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the state variable IDentifier for the state variable being set (1,2,etc.).
1=temperature. If more than one state variable is being used, the STATE
VARS parameter must be included.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to initialize the state variable via the 3rd and 4th data block below.
See also the third field on this data block.
Enter 2 to initialize the state variable via the INITSV user subroutine. This
subroutine is now called in a loop over all elements in the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the file values of the state variable from the post file
written by a previous heat transfer analysis. In this case, the fourth and
fifth fields must also be defined.
Enter 4 to initialize the state variable via the 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8th data
blocks as given below. Also, see the third field on this data block.
11-15
3rd
number of pairs of data blocks in series 3 and 4 or in series 5, 6, 7, and 8
used to input the state variable.
16-20
4th
number from which the post file information from the previous heat
transfer run is to be read. Defaults to unit 24 for a formatted post file and
to unit 25 for a binary post file.
21-25
5th
Only used if the second field is set to 3. In that case, this entry defines the
increment number on the heat transfer run post file to be used as the
definition of the initial state variable values.
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Set to 1 if option 3 is used, and a formatted post file is used.
36-40
8th

of state variable values that are initialized in the INITSV user subroutine.
41-45
9th
Enter the post code number to be read into this state variable, default is 9
(temperature).
Not used, enter 0.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Last element with the value.
561 INITIAL STATE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
First layer of cross section point with this value.
26-30
6th
Last layer or cross section point with this value can only be bigger than 1
Initial value of this state variable for the above range of points.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Data blocks 5, 6, 7 and 8 are only input if the second field above is set to 4. In that case, the number of
sets is equal to the number given in the third field above.
5th data block
1-10
1st
New total value of this state variable for the points given below at the start
of the zeroth increment.
6th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above state variable is applied.
7th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above state variable is
applied.
8th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above state variable is applied.
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 562

Redefine State Variables
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model

Definition)
Description
This option allows you to potentially define the state variables. and associate them with a boundary
condition name. The boundary condition is activated using the LOADCASE model or history definition
option. State variables are initialized in the INITIAL STATE model definition set. The number of state
variables per point is defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default is one, with temperature always
being the first state variable at a point. If more than one state variable per point has been assigned, this
option can be used repeatedly to change the values of all state variables. The default value is no change
if this option is not used.
CHANGE STATE may be used in several different ways with the new table input format. Methods 1 to 4
discuss behavior when data is directly input and not read from a post file. While not explicitly stated, the
data can always be a function of a table, where the independent variables are position to allow a
nonhomogeneous field. They may be a function of time as described below.
Methods 5-7 are based upon reading the state variable from a post file created in a previously generated
heat transfer analysis.
1. Change the state variable in a loadcase with a single increment typically in conjunction with
AUTO LOAD and a single increment.
The state variable takes the value entered here including all table effects.
2. Change the state variable over multiple increments of fixed time step, typically used with AUTO
LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, or TRANSIENT NON AUTO; in the later case, the state variable is
not the first one (temperature). In this case, the state variable will either:
a. Immediately take the value given here, if there is no table of time, and the ramp parameter is
not activated on the LOADCASE model or history definition option.
b. Linearly ramp the state variable from the value given at the beginning of the loadcase to the
value at the end of the loadcase, if the ramp parameter is set on the LOADCASE model or
history definition option. Note the values may include tables that are functions of time. They
will be evaluated twice, at the beginning and end of loadcase.
c. A general variation based upon a state variable that is a function of time.
563 CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

3. Change the state variable over multiple increments using a variable time step procedure typically
used with AUTO STEP or TRANSIENT; in the later case, the state variable is not the first one
(temperature). In this case, the state variable will either:
a. Immediately take the value given here, if there is no table of time and the ramp parameter is
not activated on the LOADCASE model or history definition option.
b. Linearly ramp the state variable from the value given at the beginning of the loadcase to the
value at the end of the loadcase, if the ramp parameter is set on the LOADCASE model or
history definition option. Note the values may include tables that are functions of time. They
will be evaluated twice: at the beginning and at the end of loadcase.
c. A general variation based upon a state variable that is a function of time.
4. Change the state variable over multiple increments using a variable time step procedure where
increment is based upon change in temperature, typically used with AUTO THERM.
The state variable entered here may include a table reference, but the table should not be a
function of time. This procedure should not be used with the ramp procedure. The difference in
the temperature is determined, and if this is greater than the amount specified the loadcase will be
divided into multiple increments.
5. Change the state variable by reading in a single increment from the post file. This is typically done
using AUTO LOAD, and a single step. The 5th field of the 2nd line is one. If the time increment is
not provided, the program will use the time associated with the heat transfer analysis.
6. Change the state variable in a multiple number of steps, each of which is associated to an
increment in the heat transfer analysis. This is typically done using AUTO LOAD, and the number
of increments equals the number of increments to be read, which is the same as the 5th field of
the 2nd line.
7. Change the state variable by reading in a series of increments from a previously generated heat
transfer job, and either dividing or consolidating the thermal increments based upon a maximum
allowed change in the state variable. Used in conjunction with the AUTO THERM option.
8. Change the state variable by reading in a single increment from the post file, but apply the change
in state variable over multiple increments based upon a user-defined criteria specified in the
AUTO STEP option. The 5th field of the 2nd data block should be a -1.
9. Change the state variable by reading in a series of increments from the post file, and either
dividing or consolidating the thermal increments based upon a user-defined criteria specified in
the AUTO STEP option. In this case, the 5th field of the 2nd data block is not used and enough
increments are read to satisfy the time period defined on the AUTO STEP option.
10. The NEWSV user subroutine is used to define the new state variables.
The Fourier series number is not applicable to the methods where the initial conditions are read from the
post file. The Fourier series number is not supported in this version.
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 564

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words CHANGE STATE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the state variable identifier (1 for temperature).
3rd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the method:

5 - user ASCII post file
6 - use data blocks (default)
7 - use user subroutine.
11-15
3rd
If method 3 or 5, enter the first step number to read.

If method 6 or 7, enter the number of geometric types used to define this
boundary condition.
16-20
4th
Enter the Fourier Series Number.
21-25
5th
For CHANGE STATE and method 3 or 5, enter the number of increments

to be read in from post file in conjunction with AUTO THERM.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th

1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of the new state variable.
11-20
2nd
Enter the magnitude of the state variable at the beginning of the loadcase.
This is required only if the ramp procedure is used.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the new state variable.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the state variable at the beginning of the
loadcase. This is required only if the ramp procedure is used.
565 CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated for as many geometric types as specified in the third field of
the 3rd data block (used only if method = 6 or 7).
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 - Element IDs
3 - Volume/Region/Body ID.
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above new state variables
are applied. All the geometric entities must be of the type prescribed in the
6th data block.
of the 3rd data block is -1.
8th data block
1-80
CHANGE STATE (Model Definition) 566

CHANGE STATE (Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This option provides various ways of changing the state variables throughout the model. State variables
are initialized in the INITIAL STATE model definition set. The number of state variables per point is
defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default is one, with temperature always being the first state
variable at a point. If more than one state variable per point has been assigned, this option can be used
repeatedly to change the values of all state variables. The default value is no change if this option is not
used. In this option, the values of the state variable at the end of the current increment are read in. When
the temperature is being defined, the following points should be noted:
For history following analysis, the thermal strains are based on temperature change during
this step.
For elastic re-analysis (ELASTIC parameter) the thermal strains are always based on temperature
change between the initial, stress free temperature field and the values read in here.
The AUTO LOAD option is available for specifying a time-varying history of state variables. The
value of the total state variable at the end of each increment is specified.
The AUTO THERM option is available for automatic control of a nonlinear (elastic-plastic)
temperature loaded stress problem, to be used in conjunction with this option.

The THERMAL LOADS option can be used as an alternative to input the change of temperature.
Either incremental or total temperatures can be specified using this option.

The AUTO THERM CREEP option is available for automatic control of a thermally loaded
elastic-plastic-creep problem, to be used in conjunction with this option.

The AUTO STEP option is available for automatic control of a nonlinear thermally loaded
problem, to be used in conjunction with this option. Time steps based on default recycling
criteria and/or user-defined physical criteria are used to determine appropriate state
variable increments.
Four ways of changing any state variable through CHANGE STATE are possible:
Read a range of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding state variable value
for the end of the current step.

Read the state variable values for the end of the current step through the NEWSV
user subroutine.
567 CHANGE STATE (Model Definition)

Read the state variable values for the end of the current step from a named step of the post file
output from a previous heat transfer analysis with Marc. With this option, Marc assumes direct
interpolation must be provided separately by the user. Providing state variables through the
thermal post file is currently supported for AUTO LOAD, AUTO THERM, AUTO THERM CREEP
and AUTO STEP. It is not supported other adaptive stepping procedures.
For AUTO LOAD, a one-to-one correspondence between the thermal increments on the post
file and the mechanical increments is assumed between the user-defined starting and ending
post increments.
For AUTO THERM or AUTO THERM CREEP, based on the user-defined allowable
temperature change, the thermal increments on the post file can be subdivided into many
mechanical increments.
For AUTO STEP, thermal values on the post file are used to determine interpolated values of
state variables for the mechanical run. The interpolation is based on how the current
mechanical loadcase time compares with the times read in from the thermal post file. Use of
a state variable criterion to control the temperature increment is optional. The starting
increment to be read in from the thermal post file (5th field of the 2nd data block) is userdefined. The number of sets of input to be read in (6th field of the 2nd data block) is
not supported for AUTO STEP. Instead, the thermal information is read till the mechanical
loadcase time or the thermal post file is completed. The post file is rewound and read from the
beginning at the start of each loadcase or at any time a cutback is used by the AUTO STEP
algorithm to reduce the current time step.
Read a list of elements, integration points, and layers and a corresponding state variable value.
It should be noted that the end of the current step is interpreted as the end of the current increment for
fixed stepping procedures (AUTO LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, CREEP INCREMENT) and as the end of
the loadcase for adaptive stepping procedures (AUTO STEP, AUTO THERM, AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO
CREEP).
Note:
Using this option, total state variable values are input. From Marc 2001 onwards, the
incremental change in the state variables is reset to 0 before each new increment if the
AUTO LOAD option is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
CHANGE STATE (Model Definition) 568

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the state variable identifier for the state variable being changed
(1,2,3,etc.) 1 = temperature. If more than one state variable is being used,
the STATE VARS parameter must be included.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to change the state variable via the 3rd and 4th data blocks below.
In this case, the third field must also be defined, and the sixth field if the
AUTO THERM option is in use.
Enter 2 to change the state variable via the NEWSV user subroutine. This
subroutine is now called in a loop on all the elements in the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the new values of the state variable from a post file written
by a previous heat transfer analysis. In this case, the fourth and fifth field
must be defined, and the sixth field if the AUTO THERM option is in use.
Enter 4 to change the state variable via data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 below.
11-15
3rd
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 1 or 4. In that case, this entry
gives the number of data blocks set in data blocks 3 and 4 used to input
the new value of the state variable (optional).
16-20
4th
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. Then. this entry defines the
unit number from which the post file information from the previous heat
transfer run is read. Defaults to unit 24 for a formatted post file, and to unit
25 for a binary post file.
21-25
5th
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. In that case, this entry defines
the step number on the heat transfer run post file to be read as the definition
of the new value of the state variable at the end of the current step. This
is currently only supported for AUTO LOAD, AUTO THERM, and
AUTO STEP.
26-30
6th
Only used if the AUTO LOAD or AUTO THERM options are in use. Give
the number of sets of input to be read to define the temperature history.
Not used for AUTO STEP.
31-35
7th
Enter 1 if formatted post file is used.
36-40
8th
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 2.

Set to 1 to suppress printout of state variable values that are defined
in NEWSV.
41-45
9th
Enter the post code number to be read into this state variable; default is 9
(temperature).
569 CHANGE STATE (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Last integration point with this value (11-15 and 16-20 can only be bigger
than 1 if ALL POINTS parameter is used).
21-25
5th
First layer or cross-section point with this value.
26-30
6th
Last layer or cross-section point with this value (21-25 and 26-30 can
only be bigger than 1 for beam or shell elements).
New value of this state variable for the above range of points at the end of
the current step.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block
1-10
1st
6th data block

7th data block
applied.
8th data block
of the 2nd data block is -1.
9th data block
1-80
INITIAL FICTIVE (with TABLE Input) 570

Initialize Fictive Temperature
Description
This option allows you to define potential initial fictive temperatures and associate them with an initial
condition name. The initial condition is activated using the LOADCASE model definition option. This
option must be activated on the SHIFT FUNCTION option. The default value of the fictive temperature
is zero.
INITIAL FICTIVE may be used in two different ways with the new table input format. Method 1 is when
data is directly input and not read from a post file. While not explicitly stated, the data can always be a
function of a table, where the independent variables are position to allow a nonhomogeneous field. They
may also be a function of time, but will be evaluated at time equals zero.
Method 2 uses the INITFTMP user subroutine to define the initial fictive temperatures.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL FICTIVE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter the method:

7 - use the INITFTMP user subroutine.
11-15
3rd

boundary condition.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used, enter 0.
31-62
7th
571 INITIAL FICTIVE (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of the initial fictive temperature.

1-10
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the initial fictive temperature.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated for as many geometric types as specified in the in the third
field of the 2nd data block (only used if method = 6 or 7).
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 - Element IDs
3 - Volume/Region/Body ID
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above initial condition are
applied. All the geometric entities must be of the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
INITIAL FICTIVE 572

INITIAL FICTIVE
input style.
Description
This option provides various ways of initializing the fictive temperature used by the Narayanaswamy
Shift Function for viscoelastic material throughout the model. This option must be activated on the SHIFT
FUNCTION option. The default value of the fictive temperature is zero.
Three ways of providing the fictive temperature initial values are shown below:
Read the range of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding state
variable value.
Read the initial values through the INITFTMP user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL FICTIVE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to initialize the fictive temperature via the 3rd and 4th data block
below. See also the third field on this data block.
Enter 2 to initialize the fictive temperature via the INITFTMP user
subroutine. This subroutine is now called in a loop over all elements in the
mesh.
Enter 4 to initialize the fictive temperature via the 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8th
data blocks as given below. Also, see the third field on this data block.
11-15
3rd
number of pairs of data blocks in series 3 and 4 or in series 5, 6, 7, and 8
used to input the state variable.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
573 INITIAL FICTIVE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
Not used, enter 0.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th

of fictive temperature values that are initialized in the INITFTMP user
subroutine.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Initial value of this fictive temperature for the above range of points.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block
1-10
1st
Initial value of the fictive temperature for the points given below at the
start of the zero increment.
6th data block

7th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above fictive temperature
is applied.
8th data block
MAP TEMP 574

Map Temperatures from Different Meshes to Current Model
MAP TEMP
This option allows a temperature history obtained from a previous heat transfer simulation to be used in
the current structural analysis even though the meshes are dissimilar. In the cases where the meshes are
identical the INITIAL STATE and CHANGE STATE options should be used.
Notes:
1 This option should not be used in a coupled thermal-mechanical analysis.

2 The heat transfer analysis should not have included the ADAPTIVE or GLOBAL ADAPT
options.
3 If the heat transfer analysis used DDM for parallelization a single post file should have
been created.
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Type Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word MAP TEMP
Enter the number of geometry types (see the 3rd and 4th data blocks). The
element/nodal temperature associated with the defined geometry entities
will be calculated through the data mapping.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
The default (enter 0 or leave blank) calculates the temperature of the entire
model. In this case, the 3rd and 4th data blocks are not needed.
6-10
2nd
Enter a 1 for using a formatted post file

Enter a 0 for using a binary post file
11-20
3rd
Enter the tolerance before a node in the current mesh is considered to be

outside the original mesh. Default is 0.05.
21-25
4th
Control the behavior if time in current analysis exceeds the time in heat
transfer analysis.
Enter 1, final values of temperature from heat transfer analysis will be
used.
Enter 2, temperatures will be extrapolated based upon the final rate of
change of temperatures
Enter a 3 is structural analysis is to be stopped.
26-30
5th
Enter the time shift between structural and heat transfer simulation. Time
used from transient heat transfer run = current structural time plus offset
time.
575 MAP TEMP

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Type Entry
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the first
field of the 2nd data block. If a zero is entered, the 3rd and 4th data blocks are not required.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the geometry types:

1
Elements (default)
Nodes
Surfaces
Curves
Points
-1 Nodes excluded from the current model for data mapping.

4th data block
Enter the list of geometry entities which must include all of the types
prescribed in the 3rd data block.
THERMAL LOADS (Model Definition) 576

Input Temperature Data
THERMAL LOADS (Model Definition)
input style. This option is not available with the table driven input.
Description
This option allows input of temperature and other state variables (see STATE VARS parameter).
You can specify either a uniform or nonuniform change in temperature (or other state variables). If a
nonuniform change is desired, the change of every state variable at every layer of every integration point
of every element must be specified. In this case, Marc calls user subroutine CREDE for every element in
the mesh.
CREDE already exists in the standard version of Marc with coding to read data in loops over integration
points, layers and state variables, as illustrated below:

NSTRES
NEQST
NSTATS
READ VARIABLE DATA
NSTRES = Maximum number of integration points per elements

NEQST = Maximum number of layers per element
NSTATS = Maximum number of state variables
The data to be read should be put in the 4th data block of this option. For particular elements with less
than the maximum number of integration points or layers, dummy values should be input when the
integration point or layer number exceed the appropriate range. See the description of CREDE in Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for other necessary information.
If temperature (state variable) data is on a file, this file can be read from CREDE. However, if temperature
data is on a post file from a Marc heat transfer analysis that uses the same mesh, the CHANGE STATE
option provides a much simpler method for reading temperature data.
If the Fourier decomposition method is being used to analyze an arbitrarily loaded axisymmetric
structure, the THERMAL LOADS option must be invoked separately for each Fourier series term that has
temperatures (state variables) associated with it. If there is no variation of these variables in the
circumferential direction, only the 0th term of the series should be specified.
577 THERMAL LOADS (Model Definition)

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words THERMAL LOADS.
Enter 1 if uniform incremental temperature (state variable) is applied to

all elements.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 2 if nonuniform incremental temperature (state variable) is read via

the CREDE user subroutine.
Enter 3 if nonuniform total temperature (state variable) is read via the
CREDE user subroutine.
6-10
2nd
If a Fourier analysis; the Fourier term with which this loading is

associated.
If the first field of data block 2 is 1, enter the uniform increments in

temperature and any additional state variables are applied to all elements.
Include only if the first field of data block 2 is 2 or 3, and using the default
CREDE user subroutine. Temperature and state variable data to be read in
by CREDE. All data blocks should contain 8 values, do not start a new
data block for each element.
3rd data block

1-80
1st
4th data block

1-80
1st
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress) 578

Define Initial Temperatures
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal

Stress)
Description
This option allows you to define initial temperatures at nodal points for thermal stress problems. This
option allows you to define the magnitude and the location and associate them with an initial condition
name. The initial condition is activated by the LOADCASE model definition option. For heat transfer
analyses, see INITIAL TEMP for heat transfer.
Note:
For shell analyses, a uniform temperature is used through the thickness direction.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INITIAL TEMP.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of prescribed temperatures (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of prescribed temperatures data, defaults to

input.
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are entered as pairs.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the USINC user subroutine is used.
11-15
3rd
Flag to indicate that initial conditions are read from previously generated
post file. Set to 1.
16-20
4th
Only nonzero if the third field is set to 1. Then. this entry defines the unit
579 INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress)

Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter step number to be read.

If -1 is entered, the last step of the post file is used.
26-30
6th
Enter 1 if a formatted post file is used.
31-63
7th
If data is read from post file, the 4th through 7th blocks may be skipped.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of the initial temperature.
Enter the table ID associated with the geometric variation in initial

temperature.
5th data block

1-5
1st
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

2 - Node IDs
7th data block

1-80
6th data block.
INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress) 580

input style.
Description
This option provides initial temperatures at nodal points for thermal stress problems. For heat transfer
analyses, see INITIAL TEMP for heat transfer.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter -1 if the USINC user subroutine is used. In this case, data blocks 3
and 4 are not used.
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of prescribed temperatures data, defaults

to input.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th

26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Enter 1 if the whole model has a default temperature given in the next field
and only nodes not having this default temperature are given in the 3rd
and 4th data blocks.
41-50
9th
Default temperature for all nodes in the model.
581 INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Data blocks 3 and 4 are given in NSET pairs, only if the flag in the third field is not equal to 1.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Initial temperature.
4th data block

Enter list of nodes for which the above initial temperature is applied.
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 582

Define Point Temperatures
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input - Model

Definition)
Description
This option allows you to define temperatures at nodal points for an uncoupled thermal stress problem
and associate them with a boundary condition name. The boundary condition will be activated or
deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT TEMP.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of prescribed temperatures data; defaults

to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
Flag to indicate that temperatures are read from previously generated post
file. Set to 1.
16-20
4th
Only nonzero if the third field is set to 1. Then, this entry defines the unit
number from which the post file information is read.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-63
7th
583 POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of the temperature.
Enter the table ID associated with the temperature.
5th data block

1-5
1st
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

2 - Node IDs
7th data block

1-80
applied. the geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
POINT TEMP (Model Definition) 584

POINT TEMP (Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This option defines temperatures at the end of the increment at nodal points for an uncoupled thermal
stress problem.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter -1 if the USINC user subroutine is used. In this case, the 3rd and 4th
data blocks are not used.
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of prescribed temperatures data; defaults to

input.
11-15
3rd
file. Set to 1.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Enter 1 if the whole model has a default temperature given in the next field
and only nodes not having this default temperature are given in the 3rd
and 4th data blocks.
41-50
9th
Default temperature for all nodes in the model.
585 POINT TEMP (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Data blocks 3 and 4 are given in NSET pairs, only if the flag in the third field is not equal to 1.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Temperatures at the end of the increment.
4th data block

FORCDT 586
Input Displacement or Load Histories
FORCDT
Input Displacement or Load Histories
Description
This option specifies the nodes for which the FORCDT user subroutine is called when not using the table
driven input (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines). The FORCDT user subroutine
can be used to prescribe the kinematic displacements and point loads. To prescribe
displacements/temperatures, they must also be defined in FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.
When using the table driven input format, the use of the FORCDT user subroutine is activated on the
FIXED DISP, etc. or POINT LOAD model definition options.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
Enter the word FORCDT.
11-15
Enter the number of lists to be given below.

Default is 1.
2nd data block

The 2nd data block is entered once for each data set.
1-80
1st
List of nodes for which the FORCDT user subroutine is used.
587 FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Input Elastic Foundation Data
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model

Definition)
Description
This option defines a foundation, including the magnitude and application location and associates it with
a boundary condition name (see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information). The foundation will be
activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model definition option. A foundation damping may be
applied for dynamic or harmonic analyses. Nonlinear foundations are available via user subroutine
UFOUND (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines) or via use of the TABLE option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word FOUNDATION.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data blocks to be used to input the lists of element and
foundation stiffnesses (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of foundation data, defaults to input.
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each list.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the USPRNG user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 588

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Foundation stiffness per unit surface area (or per unit length for beam
elements).
11-20
2nd
Foundation damping per unit surface area or per unit length for
beam elements.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID to be associated with the foundation stiffness.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID to be associated with the foundation damping.
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1: Normal stiffness
2: Shear stiffness in 1st tangent direction
3: Shear stiffness in 2nd tangent direction
4: Volumetric in x-direction
5: Volumetric in y-direction
6: Volumetric in z-direction
7: Stiffness/length in x-direction for beams
8: Stiffness/length in y-direction for beams
9: Stiffness/length in z-direction for beams
11-15
3rd
Enter the face ID.
589 FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
FOUNDATION (Model Definition) 590

FOUNDATION (Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This option allows the specification of elements and associated foundation stiffness to be used with the
elastic foundation option (see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information). Nonlinear foundations are
available via the USPRNG user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of foundation data. Defaults to input.
3rd data block

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each list.
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of elastic foundation; this is the same

parameter as used in the DIST LOADS option. See Marc Volume B:
Element Library for a description of the possible distributed load types for
each element type in Marc.
6-15
2nd
Spring stiffness per unit surface area (or per unit length for
beam elements).
4th data block

1-80
1st
Enter a list of elements to which the above foundation is applied.
591 FOURIER
Describe Fourier Coefficients
FOURIER
Description
This option is used to describe all the Fourier coefficients for each series used. The FOURIER parameter
must be included. If the Fourier coefficients of a series are known, they can be input directly. The
function F() to be expanded into a Fourier series can be described by an arbitrary number of pairs of
data [, F()]. The starting location ( = 0) as well as the ending location ( = 360) must be included.
They can have different values F(). The function F() can also be described via a UFOUR user
subroutine for an arbitrary number of stations around the circumference.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-9
1st
Enter the word FOURIER.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of Fourier series for which coefficients are input via data blocks.
6-10
2nd
Number of Fourier series for which the coefficients are calculated from
user input [, F()]. The description of F() is given via data blocks. The
number of coefficients to be calculated depends on the number of Fourier
harmonics specified on the parameter data block.
11-15
3rd
Number of Fourier series for which the function F() is determined by a

user subroutine. The details on the UFOUR user subroutine are found in
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
3rd data block

Only included if the first parameter of the 2nd data block is nonzero. This series is repeated for each
Fourier expansion for which coefficients are input via data blocks.
1-5
1st
Number of coefficients to be read for this series.
6-15
2nd
Fourier coefficients a0, a 1, b1, . . . an, bn,. Continuation data is in format

8E10.0.
The following group is included only if the second parameter of the 2nd data block is nonzero. This
group is repeated for each F() function.
4th data block
1-5
1st
Number of [, F()] pairs to be read in for this function.
FOURIER 592
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

Four pairs of [, F()] per data block. Continuation data is in format
8E10.0
1-10
1st
Value in degrees of first station.
11-20
2nd
F() value for first station.
21-30
3rd
Value in degrees of second station.
31-40
4th
F() value for second station (etc.)
593 J-INTEGRAL
Define Path for J-Integral Estimation
J-INTEGRAL
Define Path for J-Integral Estimation
Description
This option gives an estimation of the J-Integral for a crack configuration, based on differential stiffness
technique. The technique is based upon moving nodes around the crack tip by a small distance and
estimating the energy change. This model definition set is used to input the list of nodes to be moved, and
the direction and size of those motions. Usually, the motion is 10 times smaller than the crack element
size. Marc prints out the change in strain energy, which must then be divided by the change in crack
surface area to obtain the J-Integral.
Note:
For each evaluation the first list must contain the crack tip. The CENTROID parameter
should not be used in conjunction with this option. With second order elements, we suggest
the use of 1/4 point elements at the crack tip.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word J-INTEGRAL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of lists in this path.
6-10
2nd
Logical unit number for reading this data.

Defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as paris, one for each list.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Motion of these nodes in the 1st coordinate direction.
11-20
2nd
Motion in the second coordinate direction, etc. in (8E10) format. (Provide

enough data to define the motion in each coordinate direction).
Note:
The motion of the midsize nodes should be proportional to their

position along the sides of the elements.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to be moved.
LORENZI 594
Define Path for Modified J-Integral
LORENZI
Description
This option gives an estimation of the J-Integral for a crack configuration using the domain integration
method (a similar method is the deLorenzi method). The domain integration method has the advantage
that it can also be used for problems with thermal behavior and for dynamic analysis. This procedure is
only available for continuum elements. Only the nodes defining the crack front (crack tip in two
dimensions) need to be defined. Marc automatically finds integrations paths according to the format
below. The complete J-Integral is evaluated and printed. For the case of linear elastic material with no
external loads on the crack faces, the program automatically separates mode I, mode II, and mode III (3D only) stress intensity factors from the J-Integral.
For more information, see Marc Volume A, Theory and User Information, Chapter 5, Structural
Procedure Library, Numerical Evaluation of the J-integral.
Note:
The CENTROID parameter should not be used in conjunction with this option. With second
order elements, we suggest the use of 1/4 point elements at the crack tip.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word LORENZI.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Not used.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read the data.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 for new input format.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of cracks (optional).
6-10
2nd
0 = no mode separation
1 = mode separation is activated. Default.
Data blocks 4 through 7 are repeated for each crack.
595 LORENZI
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-5
1st
Enter input style of rigid regions.

1 = direct input of nodes and/or elements.
2 = automatic search based on topology (default)
3 = automatic search based on geometry.
6-25
2nd
Crack name.
5th data block

Enter a node path defining the crack front (for 2-D, the node at the
crack tip).
Direct Input
5a data block
1-5
1st
Number of rigid regions for this crack.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if crack is at a symmetry plane.
Data block 6a is repeated for each rigid region.

6a data block
Enter a list of nodes for the rigid region.
7a data block
1-10
1st
First component of shift vector.
11-20
2nd
Second component of shift vector.
21-30
3rd
Third component of shift vector (only for 3-D).
Topology Search
5b data block
1-5
1st
Number of rigid regions for each crack tip node
6-10
2nd
Shift vector (2-D); normal to crack face (3-D)

0 = entered values
1 = automatic determination (default)
11-20
3rd
Enter the tolerance for multiple nodes at the crack tip (default = 0.0).
6b data block (included only if second parameter of data block 5b is equal to 0)

1-10
1st
First component of shift vector (2-D); first component of the normal to

crack face (3-D).
11-20
2nd
Second component of shift vector (2-D); second component of the normal

to crack face (3-D).
21-30
3rd
Third component of the normal to crack face (3-D only).
LORENZI 596
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Geometry Search
5c data block
1-5
1st
Number of rigid regions for each crack tip node.
6-10
2nd
Shift vector (2-D); normal to crack face (3-D)

0 = entered values
1 = automatic determination (default)
11-20
3rd
Enter the tolerance for multiple nodes at the crack tip (default = 0.0).
6c data block (included only if second parameter of data block 5b is equal to 0)

1-10
1st
First component of shift vector (2-D); first component of the normal to

crack face (3-D).
11-20
2nd
Second component of shift vector (2-D); second component of the normal

to crack face (3-D).
21-30
3rd
Third component of the normal to crack face(3-D only)
Data block 7c is repeated for each rigid region.

7c data block
1-10
1st
Enter radius of rigid region to be found.
11-20
2nd
Enter relative length of cylinder for path search (3-D only).
597 VCCT
Virtual Crack Closure Technique
VCCT
Description
This option defines that the virtual crack closure technique is to be used for evaluating energy
release rates.
The user defines the node (in 2-D or for shells) or nodes (in 3-D) that define each crack.The supported
elements are lower- and higher-order 2-D solids and 3-D shells, lower- and higher-order 3-D hexahedral
solids, and lower order 3-D tetrahedral solids. For 3-D solids, it is important that a regular mesh around
the crack front is used. See Volume A for details.
Multiple cracks can be defined and results are obtained for each crack separately. Each crack consists of
a crack tip node in 2-D for shells and a list of nodes along the crack front for 3-D solids. Shell elements
can be used for defining a 2-D style line crack and also be connected to the face of another shell or 3-D
solid to form a 3-D style surface crack. These different cases are automatically identified.
For crack propagation, there are two modes of growth: fatigue and direct. For fatigue style, the user
specifies a load sequence time period. During the load sequence, the largest energy release rate and the
corresponding estimated crack growth direction is recorded. At the end of the load sequence, the crack
is grown using the specified method. For direct growth, the crack grows as soon as the crack growth
criterion is fulfilled. Note that Gc and the respective mode specific limits can be made a function of the
accumulated crack growth length to model a crack growth resistance behavior.
Crack opening or propagation may be modeled using three techniques. In the first method, the body in
which the crack is located is remeshed based upon the criteria defined in the ADAPT GLOBAL option and
the crack is extended by the user specified length. This is currently available for planar and axisymmetric
models only. In the second method, the uncracked area is represented by elements with double nodes and
ties, RBE2 or RROD or by elements that are glued together via CONTACT TABLE with TABLES. In the
third method, the crack grows along element edges or faces. New nodes are automatically inserted and
the element connectivity at one side of the crack is changed in order to expand the crack. See Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 5: Structural Procedure Library, Fracture Mechanics
and Numerical Evaluation of the Energy Release Rate with the VCCT Method for details.
The settings for a crack can be modified in the history section and after restart. Also, a crack can be
activated or deactivated for these cases. The check for an existing crack is done by matching the name of
the crack, as given in the 4th data block. The settings will change only when a new VCCT option is
encountered.
VCCT 598
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the word VCCT.
Enter the number of cracks.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
The 3rd through 8th data blocks are repeated for each crack. If crack propagation is specified, also read
data blocks 6 through 8.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Flag for activating or deactivating an existing crack.

0 leave as is
1 activate
2 deactivate
6-10
2nd
Specification of crack propagation

0 no crack propagation
1 fatigue style crack propagation
2 direct crack propagation
4th data block

1-20
1st
Enter the name of the crack. Must be unique for each crack.
5th data block

Enter an unsorted list of nodes defining the crack front. For 2-D and shells,
this will be a single node.
If crack propagation is specified (2nd field of 3rd data block equal to 1 or 2), enter data blocks 6
through 8.
6th data block
1-5
1st
Specification of crack growth

1 remeshing
2 release user tyings or glued contact
3 break up mesh at edges or faces
599 VCCT
Format
Fixed
6-10
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Specification of method used for the crack growth direction

1 maximum hoop stress criterion (default)
2 along pure mode with largest GiGic where i is mode I, II or III
3 always along mode I
4 along given vector; for this case read data block 9
11-15
3rd
Specification of crack growth increment for fatigue.

1 fixed increment or via user subroutine
2 Paris law
16-20
4th
Crack growth criterion

1 Total G > Gc (default)
2 GI > GIc or GII > GIIc or GIII > GIIIc
G
3 Power law mixed mode criterion -------I-
G Ic
n1
G II n 2
G III n 3
+ ---------- + ------------ 1
G IIc
G IIIc
4 Reeder mixed mode criterion

G I + G II + G III
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
n
+
G
G
G III G II + G III n 1
II
III 1
+ G IIIc G IIc ------------------------ --------------------------------------

G Ic + G IIc G Ic ------------------------------------- G I + G II + G III
G II + G III G + G + G
I
II
III
If fatigue crack propagation is specified (2nd field of 3rd data block equal to 1)
7a data block
1-10
1st
Crack growth increment. If the option of releasing tyings or glued contact

is used, the length of the released element edge is used. Ignored for growth
defined by Paris law
11-20
2nd
Time period for fatigue load sequence.
21-30
3rd
Paris law energy release rate threshold Gth.
31-40
4th
Paris law parameter C.
41-50
5th
Paris law parameter m.
51-60
6th
Minimum growth increment.
If direct crack propagation is specified (2nd field of 3rd data block equal to 2)
7b data block
1-10
1st
Crack growth increment. If the option of releasing tyings or glued contact

or breaking up element edges is used, the length of the released element
edge is used.
11-20
2nd
Crack growth resistance Gc for total G.
VCCT 600
Format
Fixed
Free
21-30
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
E
Crack growth resistance for mode I, GIc.

Defaults to Gc
31-40
4th
Crack growth resistance for mode II, GIc.

Defaults to Gc
41-50
5th
Crack growth resistance for mode III, GIIIc.

Defaults to Gc
51-60
6th
Exponent n1 for mixed mode methods, default 2.0
51-60
7th
Exponent n2 for mixed mode method 1, default 2.0
51-60
8th
Exponent n3 for mixed mode method 1, default 2.0
8th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for scaling of the first value given in the 7th data block. For old
style input (not table driven), these are ignored.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for scaling of the second value.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for scaling of the third value.
16-20
4th
Table ID for scaling of the forth value.
21-25
5th
Table ID for scaling of the fifth value.
26-30
6th
Table ID for scaling of the sixth value (fatigue only).
If crack growth direction vector is specified (crack growth direction option equal to 4)
9th data block
1-10
1st
x component of crack growth direction vector
11-20
2nd
y component of crack growth direction vector
21-30
3rd
z component of crack growth direction vector
601 DELAMINATION
Determines When to Split Mesh
DELAMINATION
Description
This option defines a delamination, or in other words a mesh split. A stress criterion is used for
determining if the mesh should split. The split can either be done in the interface between two regions or
within a region. The criterion used is
-----n-
Sn
t
+ ----- 1
St
n
Here n is the normal stress, t is the tangential stress, S n is the allowable normal stress given below, S t
the allowable tangential stress given below and m and n are the exponents given below. The region can
be defined as a material, a composite group, or a pshell
For the option of splitting between regions, the normal direction is perpendicular to the region interface.
The stress tensor of the nodal extrapolated stresses is transformed into this system.
For the option of splitting within a region, the system is given by the respective element edges in 2-D and
faces in 3-D.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word DELAMIN.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets (required).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number. Defaults to input file.
Data block 3 through 5 are repeated for each data set.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the first region ID. The type of region is given in the fifth field.
6-10
2nd
Enter the second region ID; note that if this is the same as first region, then
delamination within region. The type of region is given in the sixth field.
11-15
3rd
Enter the delamination type:

0 calculate delamination index and split mesh if necessary (default)
1 only calculate a delamination index for post processing
16-20
4th
Enter the material ID of a cohesive material. If specified, cohesive

elements using this material will be inserted when the mesh breaks up.
Not available for shell and membrane elements.
DELAMINATION 602
Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter type for the first region:

0 material (default). Enter material ID in the first field.
1 composite. Enter composite group number in the first field.
2 pshell. Enter pshell property ID in the first field.
26-30
6th
Enter type for the second region:

0 material (default). Enter material ID in the second field.
1 composite. Enter composite group number in the second field.
2 pshell. Enter pshell property ID in the second field.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Allowable normal stress
11-20
2nd
Allowable tangential stress
21-30
3rd
m exponent for normal stress (default 2.0)
31-40
4th
n exponent for tangential stress (default 2.0)
If table input is used

5th data block
1-5
1st
Table ID for allowable normal stress
6-10
2nd
Table ID for allowable tangential stress
11-15
3rd
Table ID for m
16-20
4th
Table ID for n
The delamination criteria is based upon n na n + t ta m 1
603 ISLAND REMOVAL

Deactivate Islands of Connected Elements
ISLAND REMOVAL
Deactivate Islands of Connected Elements
Description
This option subdivides the mesh into islands of connected regions. If the number of elements in an island
is less than or equal to a specified number, then all elements of this island are deactivated. This check is
performed after element deactivation has taken place where the deactivation can be due to model input
(DEACTIVATE option), the UACTIVE user subroutine, or through material damage or failure. Two
elements are considered connected if they share a node for line elements, an edge for 2-D elements, or a
face for 3-D solid elements. This option us useful for cases where we would get unconnected elements
or regions of elements after the neighboring elements have been deactivated. There is no check
performed to see if the island to be deactivated has enough boundary conditions. Only the number of
elements in the island is used for determining if the elements should be deactivated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ISLAND REM
Enter the number of elements to use as a limit for element deactivation. If

the number of elements in an island is less than or equal to this number,
then all elements of this island are deactivated.
2nd data block

1-10
1st

Contact
Chapt Contact
er 3: This section describes surface geometry definition, motion definition, and friction description in two- and
contact applications. The basic philosophy behind these applications is the existence
Mode three-dimensional
of one or more bodies that may or may not come into contact with one another, or even contact with
themselves during an analysis. As far as the contact is concerned, it is the surface associated with the
l
body that plays a role.
Defini
Some bodies can be deformable, others can be rigid. However, deformable surfaces must always be
tion
declared in the input file before any rigid surface.
Optio
Deformable and Rigid Surfaces
ns
Marc
Volume
C:
Program
Input
A deformable surface is simply defined by the set of elements that constitute the body to which it is
associated. When a node of another body or the same body (in self contact) comes into contact with a
deformable surface, information regarding the contacted surface is obtained. This is based upon the
coordinates of the nodes on the face of the element or the coordinates and an averaged normal if the
SPLINE option is used. This can improve the accuracy of the solution.
A rigid surface does not deform. There are two modes to describe the geometric profile of a rigid surface.
In the first, labeled the PieceWise Linear approach (PWL), the profile is defined by sets of geometrical
data which can be comprised of straight lines, circles and splines, ruled surfaces, surfaces of revolution
and patches, etc. These sets have to be given in a proper sequence around the rigid body they define, even
if it is not necessary that the full enclosure be defined.
In the second method, labeled Analytical, the geometric profile is defined by prescribing 2-D NURBS
curves, 3-D NURBS surfaces, or exact quadratic descriptions. Using this method, the surface is divided
into line segments or patches; this is used for visualization (K6 style post file) or by the searching
algorithm. The contact condition is based on the true surface geometry. This method is more accurate for
curved surfaces, and might reduce the number of iterations, especially if friction is present.
In coupled thermal-stress contact, it is possible to have a surface defined strictly by thermal elements with
a rigid body motion applied to it.
Motion of Surfaces
Deformable surfaces can move either because of contact with other surfaces, or because of directly
applied displacement boundary conditions or loads.
To each surface, we associate a point (center of rotation) that can be anywhere in space. A translative
velocity and a rotational velocity around that point define the instantaneous motion of the surface. These
velocities are integrated forward in time to define the motion of the surfaces. It is also possible to directly
prescribe the location of the rigid body. As an alternative, you can prescribe a force or torque to the rigid
body. The force is applied with the POINT LOAD option.
The CONTACT model definition option can be used for the input of constant rigid body motions which
do not change with time during the analysis. However, changes in rigid body motion (time dependent

Contact
motion) can be simulated either by the load history option MOTION CHANGE or by the MOTION user
subroutine activated through the UMOTION model definition option.
For more information on the motion of bodies, see Marc Volume A, Chapter 8, Contact, Motion of Bodies.
Cautions
It is recommended that whenever several deformable bodies are present, the OPTIMIZE option be
exercised. In static analysis, it is also necessary to artificially connect (for instance, by very low stiffness
springs) deformable bodies that during an analysis might be completely separated from other deformable
bodies and have no kinematic boundary conditions applied to them. This is to avoid rigid body motion.
When the debug printout parameter PRINT is used in a contact analysis, IDEV = 5 or 8, it produces
information on when any node on the boundary comes into contact or separates from any surface. It
also produces information on whether a contact node is fixed to a surface or is free to slide along it. In
addition to the information printed with IDEV = 5, when IDEV = 8 is entered, the incremental
displacement and the reaction forces for those nodes in contact with rigid surfaces are printed in a local
coordinate system.
The CONTACT option creates ties between nodes which come into contact with another deformable
body. If a node can come into contact with another deformable body or with a load controlled rigid body,
one should avoid using these nodes as tied nodes in TYING, SERVO LINK, RBE2, or RBE3.
There are three implied loops in this block of data: the outermost loop is over the number of surfaces; the
next loop is over the number of sets of geometrical data for each surface; and the innermost loop is over
the number of points comprised in each set. In case of deformable surfaces, the two inner loops reduce
to the list of elements.
Control Variables and Option Flags

The variable RVCNST (3rd data block, 1st field) depends on the selected friction model:
1. For the relative velocity based arctangent model it allows the system to self-adaptively search for
sticking zones. RVCNST should be a relative sliding velocity very small compared to the typical
sliding velocities in the model, but not so small that it would be overcome by changes between
iterations. It is suggested you use values between 10-1 and 10-2 times a typical relative surface
velocity. Marc default is 1.0.
2. For the stick-slip model, RVCNST indicates the slip to stick transition region, indicating a relative
displacement magnitude in the direction of the friction force which is still accepted by the
program. Its value should be small compared to a typical element length. The default value in
Marc is 1.0e-6.
3. For the bilinear model, RVCNST is the relative displacement below which elastic stick is
simulated. The default value is automatically determined by Marc, based on the dimensions of the
elements in the deformable contact bodies.

Contact
The variable ERROR (3rd data block, 2nd field) determines the tolerance for contact. A too small
tolerance might provoke too many increment splits or iterations. A too coarse tolerance produces
unrealistic behavior. If left blank, the code calculates ERROR as the smallest nonzero element dimension
divided by 20 or the shell thickness divided by 4. If there are splines in surface definitions, a value should
be entered. (See SPLINE definition.)
The user can control the type of friction in a contact analysis (2nd data block, 4th field). Either a friction
(shear friction or Coulomb friction) or a frictionless condition can be assumed in the analysis. The
friction behavior can be based on a continuous velocity based model, a true-stick-slip model or a bilinear
displacement based model with an elastic sticking region.
The computation of Coulomb friction in a contact problem can be based on either nodal stresses or nodal
forces (2nd data block, 5th field).
When shell or beam elements are in the body, it uses the nodal force based friction model. This is also
true for the stick-slip friction model and the bilinear model.
Contact/Penetration
In a contact analysis, the constraints imposed are to insure that penetration does not occur. Historically,
the user can specify one of three different procedures to be used (2nd data block, 7th field). The first
procedure, called Increment Splitting, is not recommended anymore. The two remaining are called
Iterative Penetration Checking Procedure and Time Step Reduction Procedure.
The Iterative Penetration Checking Procedure is recommended for most contact analyses. It may
effectively add contact constraints during the Newton-Raphson iterations by scaling the iterative
displacement vector of an iteration and bringing new nodes into contact at the start of the next iteration.
In this sense, one is iterating on both global equilibrium and contact simultaneously. This procedure is
always used when beam-beam contact is invoked. It is automatically used for quasi-static problems using
AUTO STEP.
The Time Step Reduction Procedure is recommended for dynamic contact analyses using an adaptive
time stepping procedure. When this procedure is active, the time step of an increment may be reduced to
make sure that nodes do not penetrate during the current increment, but instead are brought into contact
at the beginning of the next increment. It is automatically used for dynamic problems using AUTO STEP.
For more information on contact/penetration, see Marc Volume A, Chapter 8, Contact, Detection of
Contact.
Separation
A node separates from a body depending on whether the force or the stress exceeds a threshold value (3rd
data block, 5th field). It is possible to indicate whether the testing is based upon the force or the stress,
how the stress is calculated, and how the threshold is calculated (2nd data block, 12th field). This choice
has a significant influence on the accuracy and convergence of problems when:
a. the contact forces are low,
b. on rolling problems (where nodes periodically contact and separate), and
c. in connector problems.

Contact
It is recommended that a stress-based criterion is used, because it eliminates the numerical influence of
element sizes, and that either physically meaningful tolerances are specified or a relative tolerance is
entered. When quadratic contact is used, the separation criterion is always based upon a stress, which is
obtained by extrapolating, averaging, and transforming the stresses at the integration points. The default
separation threshold is:
the maximum residual force if separation is based upon nodal forces (the separation flag on the
CONTACT option is 0);
the maximum stress at reaction nodes times the convergence tolerance (given on the CONTROL
option) if separation is based on absolute stresses, where a stress is calculated as a nodal force
divided by a nodal area (the separation flag on the CONTACT option is 1);
10% of the maximum compressive stress for all the contacting nodes if separation is based on
any of the other methods (the separation flag on the CONTACT option is 2, 3 or 4).
For beam-to-beam contact, contact stresses cannot be calculated and separation can only be based on
nodal forces. Hence, if within one model both beam-to-beam contact and contact between continuum
elements occur and separation should be based on stresses, then it is recommended to enter the separation
threshold for beam-to-beam contact using a CONTACT TABLE. Otherwise, the default separation stress
would be used as a force to decide if beam-to-beam contact constraints should be released.
During each load increment, separations can occur. You can control the maximum number of nodal
separations allowed in each increment to reduce computational costs (2nd data block, 6th field).
During the analysis, a node may come into contact and separate within the same increment. This may be
due to either the nonlinear motions or due to small contact forces/stresses that are developed. This often
leads to oscillations in the contact status which leads to multiple iterations and higher computational
costs. This behavior may be controlled using the flag on the 2nd data block, 9th field. This chattering
behavior is automatically suppressed for explicit dynamics.
For more information on separation, see Marc Volume A, Chapter 8, Contact, Separation.
Optional Heat Transfer Data

In a coupled thermal-stress-contact analysis, a film coefficient is needed for calculating heat transfer from
any other surface that contacts the current surface (deformable-to-rigid, or deformable-to-deformable).
If the surface is modeled as a rigid surface, the rigid surface temperature is also needed for the analysis.
In addition, both a film coefficient and an ambient temperature must be given for the simulation of heat
transfer between the surface and surrounding environment.
If the near thermal contact option is invoked using CONTACT TABLE, it is also possible to have
transmission of heat when bodies are close to one another. The thermal fluxes have components of
convection and radiation. This requires input of the distance that is considered to be close and
additional thermal parameters. Unlike the error tolerance, it is not possible for the program to determine
a default value.
For more information on coupled contact analysis, see Marc Volume A, Chapter 8, Contact, Coupled.

Contact
Optional Electrical Data (Joule Heating Analysis)

In Joule heating or coupled thermal-structural-electrical problems, current may be transmitted between
contact bodies. This current is assumed to be continuous (that is, no electrical arcing). This requires
additional data analogous to the heat transfer data.
For more information on Joule heating, see Marc Volume A, Chapter 8, Contact, Joule Heating.
Time Step Control

The automatic contact procedure is controlled by the time step. This is used to determine the motion of
rigid surfaces and to control the splitting of increments if penetration occurs. Even in a quasi-static
analysis, a time step must be defined by you. Several procedures can be used to enter this data.
The AUTO LOAD and TIME STEP history definition options can be used to define several time
steps, each of the same magnitude.

The DYNAMIC CHANGE or TRANSIENT NON AUTO history definition options can be used to
define a time period which is divided into equal time steps.

With the AUTO STEP or AUTO INCREMENT history definition option, you define a total time
period which is divided into variable size time steps.
Dynamic Contact - Impact

The automatic contact procedure can also be used in dynamic analyses to model impact problems. This
can be used with the implicit Newmark-beta, single step Houbolt, generalized alpha operator, or the
explicit central difference operator. The DYNAMIC parameter is used to control the choice. When the
implicit operator is used, either the DYNAMIC CHANGE or AUTO STEP option can be used to control the
time step. When the central difference procedure is used, the DYNAMIC CHANGE option should be used,
and the time step must be less than the stability limit. The stability limit is automatically calculated by
Marc.
Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces

In a two-dimensional problem, the rigid surfaces can be represented by any of or a combination of the
following geometric entities: (1) straight line segments (ITYPE = 1), (2) circular arcs (ITYPE = 2),
and (3) spline (ITYPE = 3). The variable ITYPE defines the type of the geometric entities to be used
for a rigid surface.
Note that the normal vector of the geometric entities (line segments, circular arc, and the spline) always
points into the rigid-body. The normal vector direction is determined from the direction of the geometric
entity, following a right-handed rule. Care must be taken in entering the coordinates (x, y) data, in a
correct direction, for rigid-surfaces.

Contact
Line Segments
When option ITYPE = 1 is chosen, the number NPOINT and the coordinates (x, y) of (NPOINT) points
must be entered for the definition of the rigid surface. Marc automatically creates a rigid surface
consisting of (NPOINT -1) linear segments for the contact problem. A two-dimensional rigid surface
consisted of line segments is shown in Figure 3-1.
This entity supports analytic description/procedure.
Start point
1
Rigid body
3
4
Figure 3-1
End point
6
Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Line Segment, ITYPE = 1)
Circular Arc
When ITYPE = 2 is chosen, one circular segment is created by Marc. There are five different methods
available to define a circular arc in two dimensions. Each method requires four data blocks with the
following type of data:
Starting Point of Arc
(SP)
Ending Point of Arc
(EP)
Center of Circle
(C)
Radius of Circle
(R)
Tangent Angles
(TA)
Swept Angle
(SA)
Number of Subdivisions (NS)

Clearly, not all of this information is required for each method. Table 3-9 describes which data is
required. The default number of subdivisions is 10. If the analytical approach is used, the number of
subdivisions does not influence the accuracy, but is only used for visualization purposes.

Contact
Table 3-9
Data Required for Circular Arc Input

Method
Data Block
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
EP
EP
EP
EP
blank
TA1, TA2
R, NS
R, NS
R, NS
R, NS
SA, NS
Notes:
For methods 1 and 3, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the surface side.
A negative radius means the center of the circle is on the outside.
For method 2, the first coordinate of the center is taken into account, determining whether
the center is above (>0) or below (<0) the segment defined by the end points.
For planar problems, SP, EP and C are X, Y data.
For axisymmetric problems, SP, EP and C are Z, R data.
For methods 0, 1 and 2, if R is zero, it is calculated as distance from the center to the
starting point.
This entity supports analytical description/procedure.

A two-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3.
Start point
1
End point
Center
+
Radius
Note:
Figure 3-2
For additional circular arc definitions, see Figure 3-3
Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc, ITYPE = 2, METHOD = 0)

Contact
EP
EP
SP
SP
Method 0 Positive R
Method 1 Negative R
EP
TA2
SP
SA
SP
TA1
Method 3 Positive R
Figure 3-3
Method 4 Positive R
Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc)
Spline
When ITYPE = 3 is chosen, Marc creates a spline by passing from the second point through to the
second to last point entered. The first and the last points entered are used to define the tangents at the
beginning and end of the spline. If a nonanalytical approach is used, then the spline is internally split into
linear segments in such a way that the maximum difference between any of them and the spline is less
than the contact tolerance ERROR. This operation is done before the automatic tolerance calculation;
therefore, a value for ERROR must be entered whenever a spline is used. Figure 3-4 shows a twodimensional rigid surface defined by a spline.

Contact
End point
Note: the normal vector is pointed into the rigid body.
5
4
Rigid body
Start point
Figure 3-4
Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Spline, ITYPE = 3)
This entity supports analytical description/procedure if only one spline is used in a particular rigid body.
Three-dimensional Rigid Surfaces

In a three-dimensional problem, the rigid surfaces are represented by any of or a combination of the
following three-dimensional surface entities:
Surface Entity Type
Ruled surface
Surface of revolution
Bezier surface
4-node patch
Poly-surface
NURB
Cylinder
Sphere
Type Identification (ITYPE)

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
The variable ITYPE defines the type of surface entity to be used for a rigid surface. Since most of the
three-dimensional surfaces can be easily and adequately represented by a finite element mesh of 4-node
plate (patch) elements, the option ITYPE = 7 is a very convenient way of representing threedimensional rigid surfaces. Both the connectivities and the coordinates of the 4-node patches can
be generated using Marc Mentat, or entered through the DIGEOM user subroutine.
The three-dimensional surface entities mentioned above, except 4-node patches, can in turn be generated
from three-dimensional geometric entities. Available three-dimensional geometric entities are:
Geometric Entity Type
Straight line segment
3-D circular arc
Spline
Bezier Curve
Poly line
Type Identification (JTYPE)

1
2
3
4
5

Contact
The variable JTYPE defines the type of geometric entities to be used for the generation of
three-dimensional rigid surfaces.
For the (PWL) approach, note that all geometrical data in 3-D space is reduced to 4-node patches. The
four nodes will probably not be on the same plane. The error in the approximation is determined by the
number of subdivisions of the defined surfaces. Note that the normal to a patch is defined by the righthand rule, based on the sequence in which the four points are entered.
Ruled Surface (ITYPE = 4)
When ITYPE = 4 is chosen, a ruled surface is created by Marc based on the input of two surface
generators, defined by straight line segment (JTYPE = 1), 3-D circular arc (JTYPE = 2), spline
(JTYPE = 3) or Bezier curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface generator is not a 3-D circular arc, the
number NPOINT1 (NPOINT2) and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT1 (NPOINT2) points must
be entered for the definition of the surface generators. In case the surface generator is a 3-D circular arc,
a method (METH) must be selected for the definition of the circular arc. A 3-D circular arc is defined by
four points. In addition, the number of subdivisions, NDIV1, along the first (surface generator) and the
NDIV2 along the second (from the first surface generator to second surface generator) direction must
also be entered. For a (PWL) approach, Marc creates (NDIV1) x (NDIV2) 4-node patches automatically
to represent the prescribed ruled surface. For analytical approach, (NDIV1 + 1) x (NDIV2 + 1) points
are created and a NURB surface is general which passes exactly through these points. The accuracy in
general is controlled by the number of points. Figure 3-5 shows a typical ruled surface.
Surface of Revolution (ITYPE = 5)
When ITYPE = 5 is chosen, a surface of revolution is created by Marc based on the input of one surface
generator, defined by straight line segment (JTYPE = 1), 3-D circular arc (JTYPE = 2), spline
(JTYPE = 3) or Bezier curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface generator is not a 3-D circular arc, the
number NPOINT and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT points must be entered for the definition
of the surface generator. In case the surface generator is a 3-D circular arc, a method (METH) must be
selected for the definition of the circular arc. A 3-D circular arc is defined by four points. In addition, the
number of subdivisions NDIV1 along the surface generator and NDIV2 along the second
(circumferential) direction must also be entered.
Marc then creates (NDIV1 x NDIV2) four-node patches automatically, to represent the prescribed
surface of revolution. The axis of revolution is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of two points in space,
and an angle of rotation from the initial position is also needed for the definition of the surface of
revolution. A positive rotation is about the axis formed from point 1 to point 2. Figure 3-6 shows a typical
surface of revolution.

Contact
Start point
End point
2
2nd Geometric entity
Start point
1
End point
1st Geometric entity
1: first direction
2: second direction
: normal direction into the rigid body
z
y
x
NDIV2 = 3
NDIV1 = 4
NDIV1 = number of divisions in the first direction
NDIV2 = number of divisions in the second direction
Figure 3-5
Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Ruled Surface, ITYPE = 4)

Contact
Axis of revolution defined

by the coordinates of
points 1 and 2
Start point
Surface generation
(initial position)
1
2
Point 1
Angle of
rotation
End point
Point 2
z
1: First direction
2: Second direction
Figure 3-6
: Normal direction into the rigid body (see Figure 3-8)
Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Surface of Revolution, ITYPE = 5)
Bezier Surface (ITYPE = 6)

When ITYPE = 6 is chosen, a Bezier surface is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of NPOINT1 x
NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered along the first direction and then repeated
NPOINT2 times to fill through the second direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 have to be
at least equal to 4. Number of subdivisions (NDIV1, NDIV2) entered has to be equal or greater than
NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 for Bezier surface. (NPOINT1-1) x (NPOINT2-1) 4-node patches are
created by Marc for the definition of a Bezier surface. Figure 3-7 shows a typical Bezier surface. It can
be treated as an analytical surface, an exact conversion to NURBS is performed.
Four-node patches (ITYPE = 7)
When ITYPE = 7 is chosen, you enter directly all the 4-node patches that comprise this surface. They
are entered following the same format Marc would use to read the connectivities and coordinates of a
mesh of 3-D 4-node elements (element type 18 or 75). In this way, a finite element preprocessor can be
used to create surfaces. Alternatively, this data can be entered via the user subroutine DIGEOM, further
permitting you to read by yourself from any data you have access to. Figure 3-8 shows a typical 4-node
patch surface. It cannot be used as an analytical surface.

Contact
r13
r23
r22
r03
r33
r32
r12
r21
r11
r31
NPOINT2 = 4
NDIV2 = 4
r02
2
r20
r01
r10
r30
1
r00
NPOINT1 = 4
NDIV1 = 4
x
1: First direction
2: Second direction
h: Normal direction into the rigid body (see Figure 3-8)
Figure 3-7
Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface, ITYPE = 6)

Contact
Number of patches = 12
Number of nodes = 20
Nodal coordinates can be entered
using user subroutine DIGEOM
12
y
x
13
7
8
1
12
Rigid body
13
2
12
13
1
Rigid body
8
1: First direction
2: Second direction
: Normal vector (right-hand rule) into the rigid body

Figure 3-8
Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch, ITYPE = 7)
Both the value of ERROR and BIAS can also be specified on the CONTACT TABLE option for a specific
combination of bodies. A BIAS of zero will be used for glued contact and contact with a symmetry
body even if a nonzero value is specified on the third data block, unless it is specified via the CONTACT
TABLE option.
Poly-surface (ITYPE = 8)
When ITYPE = 8 is chosen, a poly-surface is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of NPOINT1 x
NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered along the first direction and then repeated
NPOINT2 times to fill through the second direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 have to be
at least equal to 4 for a poly-surface and there is no need to divide it. A typical poly-surface is shown in
Figure 3-9.
In a three-dimensional contact problem, as in a two-dimensional situation, the surface generators can
be represented in a variety of ways. It can be treated as an analytical surface. Approximate conversion
to NURBS.

Contact
53
54
52
43
51
55
44
42
45
34
33
41
35
32
NPOINT2 = 5
24
23
31
25
22
2
21
z
12
y
14
13
11
15
1
NPOINT1 = 5
x
1: First direction
2: Second direction
: Normal direction into the rigid body

Figure 3-9
Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Poly Surface, ITYPE = 8)
Nonuniform Rational Bspline Surface, NURBS (ITYPE = 9)

When ITYPE = 9 is chosen, a NURBS is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of
NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points, NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 homogeneous coordinates and
(NPOINT1+NORDER1) + (NPOINT2+NORDER2) normalized knot vectors. If only the control points
are entered, the interpolation scheme is used such that the surface passes through all of control points.
The homogeneous coordinates and knot vectors are calculated by Marc. NPOINTS and NPOINT2 have
to be at least equal to 3 for the interpolation scheme. A typical NURBS is shown in Figure 3-10.

Contact
+10
+8
+6
+9
+7
+5
+4
+2
+3
Z
Y
+1
Figure 3-10
Nonuniform Rational Bspline Surface, NURBS (ITYPE = 9)
Cylinder (Cone) Surface (ITYPE = 10)

When ITYPE = 10 is chosen, a cylinder is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of the center, C1, with
radius, R1, in top face and the coordinate (x, y, z) of center, C2, with radius, R2, in bottom face. The
normal vector of cylinder is inwards. If a negative value of R1 is entered, the normal vector is outwards.
A typical cylinder is shown in Figure 3-11.

Contact
R1
C1
R2
C2
Y
Z
Figure 3-11
Cylinder (Cone) Surface (ITYPE = 10)
Sphere Surface (ITYPE = 11)

When ITYPE = 11 is chosen, a sphere is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of the center, C1, with
radius, R1. The normal vector of sphere is inwards. If a negative value of R1 is entered, the normal vector
is outwards. A typical sphere is shown in Figure 3-12.

Contact
R1
C1
Figure 3-12
Sphere Surface (ITYPE = 11)
3-D Circular Arc

When JTYPE = 2 is chosen, a circular arc is created by Marc. There are three different methods
(Table 3-10) available to define a circular arc in three dimensions. Each method requires four data blocks,
with the following type of data:
Starting point of arc
(SP)
Ending point of arc
(EP)
Enter of circle
(C)
Radius of circle
(R)
Swept angle
(SA)
Swept angle flag
(SAF)
Middle point
(MP)
Arbitrary point (lying in plane of circle)
(AP)

Contact
Table 3-10
Defining Circular Arcs

Method
Data Block
SP
SP
SP
EP
MP
AP
EP
SAF
SA
Notes:
For Method 1, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the surface side. A
negative radius means the center of the circle is on the outside.
For Method 2, a SAF that is positive means an angle less than 180, a negative value an
angle greater than 180.
For Method 3, the starting point, arbitrary point and center define the plane in which the
circular arc lies.
SP, EP, C, MP and AP are X, Y, Z data.
For an arc with 180 degrees, either Method 1 or Method 2 is recommended.
A three-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in Figure 3-13.

EP
EP
MP
SA
SP
SP
SP
Method 0
Method 1
AP
Method 2
Figure 3-13
Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc)
Spline
When JTYPE = 3 is chosen, the spline passes by all NPOINT declared, and has zero curvature at the
ends (enter at least 4 points).
Bezier curve
When JTYPE = 4 is chosen, a Bezier curve is defined by NPOINT control points (enter at least
4 points).

Contact
Poly-line
When JTYPE = 5 is chosen, a poly-line defined by NPOINT control points.
Selective Contact Surfaces

In both the two- and three-dimensional contact problems, contact is always detected between nodes on
the surface of a deformable body and the geometrical profile of another surface. There are two modes of
the order in which a node checks contact with other bodies - so called single-sided contact and doublesided contact. The default version is the double-sided contact procedure.
In the single-sided contact procedure, by default, the nodes on a lower numbered body can come into
contact with equally or higher numbered surfaces. For instance, the boundary nodes of body number 1
are checked against the surface profiles of bodies 1, 2, 3, .... The boundary nodes of body number 2,
however, are only checked against surface profiles of bodies 2, 3, ... It is possible, therefore, that due to
surface discretization, a node of body 2 slightly penetrates the surface of body 1. The order of contact
checking can be defined via the CONTACT TABLE option.
The double-sided contact option checks possible contact between any two surfaces (surface i is checked
for contact with surface j, and surface j is also checked for contact with surface i, where i, j = 1, 2, 3, ...,
total number of surfaces in the problem).
When defining contact bodies for a deformable-to-deformable analysis, it is important to define them in
the proper order. As a general rule, a body with a finer mesh should be defined before a body with a
coarser mesh. For problems involving adaptive meshing or automated remeshing, care must be taken to
satisfy this rule before as well as after the mesh change.
In addition, an option (CONTACT TABLE model definition and load incrementation options) is provided
to you for the selection of contact surfaces. Through this option, you can choose, for instance, the surface
no. 1 to be in contact with surfaces 3, 5, 6, 7, but not with surfaces 2 and 4. This option can repeatedly
be used during an analysis by specifying it in the history definition option.
You can further restrict the potential contact by using the CONTACT NODE or the EXCLUDE option.
User Subroutines
A number of user subroutines are available to you for two- and three-dimensional contact problems.
These are listed in Table 3-11.

Contact
Table 3-11
User Subroutines for Contact Problems
User
Subroutine
Option
Required
MOTION (2-D)
MOTION (3-D)
CONTACT (2-D),
CONTACT (3-D),
UMOTION
To define surface motion.
UFRIC
CONTACT (2-D),
CONTACT (3-D),
UFRICTION
To define friction data.
UFRICBBC
CONTACT (2-D)
CONTACT (3-D)
CONTACT TABLE
To define the separation force for beam-to-beam

contact.
UHTCOE
CONTACT (2-D),
CONTACT (3-D),
UHTCOEF
To define film coefficient and sink temperature.
UHTCON
CONTACT (2-D),
CONTACT (3-D),
UHTCON
To define film coefficient between

contact surfaces.
UVTCOE
JOULE
CONTACT (2-D)
CONTACT (3-D)
UHTCOEF
To define environment electrical film coefficient.
UVTCON
JOULE
CONTACT (2-D)
CONTACT (3-D)
UHTCON
To define contact electrical film coefficient.
UMDCOE
DIFFUSION
CONTACT
UHTCOEF
Definition of variable mass diffusion coefficients

and sink pressure on free surfaces.
UMDCON
DIFFUSION
CONTACT
UHTCON
Definition of variable mass diffusion coefficients

of surfaces that are in contact with other surfaces.
UMDNRC
DIFFUSION
UHTCON
CONTACT
CONTACT TABLE
Definition of mass diffusion coefficients between

surfaces almost in contact.
DIGEOM
CONTACT (2-D),
CONTACT (3-D)
To define coordinates of 4-node patches.
SEPFOR
CONTACT (2-D),
CONTACT (3-D)
To define the separation force.
Note:
Contents
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines manual provides more detailed
information on these subroutines.

Contact
Table 3-11
User
Subroutine
User Subroutines for Contact Problems (continued)

Option
Required
Contents
SEPFORBBC
CONTACT (2-D),
CONTACT (3-D)
CONTACT TABLE
To define the separation force for beam-to-beam

contact.
SEPSTR
CONTACT (2-D),
CONTACT (3-D)
To define the separation stress. Use with node-tosegment procedure.
SEPSTR_STS
CONTACT (2-D),
CONTACT (3-D)
To define the separation stress. Use with

segement-to-segment procedure.
Note:
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines manual provides more detailed
information on these subroutines.
Contact with Adaptive Meshing or Rezoning

In a contact (or any other) problem, the original mesh can be badly deteriorated during the analysis due
to excessive deformation. Rezoning of the deteriorated mesh generally allows the continuation of the
analysis to completion. This can be performed automatically using the ADAPT GLOBAL model definition
option or manually using the REZONING parameter, and the rezoning options CONNECTIVITY CHANGE
and COORDINATE CHANGE. When using the ADAPT GLOBAL option, this will be performed as often
as necessary. Note that in a contact problem, only the deformable surface definition can be changed. After
rezoning occurs, rigid surfaces must be kept the same and cannot be changed. The upper bound to the
number of nodes that lie on the periphery of any deformable body must be sufficiently high to account
for an increase in the number of nodes.
Spring-Back Analysis
In metal forming analysis, the spring-back condition is of great interest to engineers for the study of the
state of residual stresses in the workpiece. However, it is a difficult numerical problem and generally
requires a large number of load increments for a final solution. The RELEASE load incrementation option
allows the release (separation) of all the nodes in contact with a particular surface at the beginning of the
increment. A spring-back condition can be obtained in one load increment. Marc iterates the solution
within the increment automatically for an equilibrium solution.
Contact Tolerance
A node comes into contact with another body when it enters the contact tolerance zone. This area is
dependent upon the value of ERROR and BIAS entered on the third data block. When BIAS is zero, the
tolerance is equidistant from the actual surface as shown in Figure 3-14 (a); otherwise, the situation
shown in Figure 3-14 (b) is used. If a node would have moved past line B, then increment splitting would
occur if the fixed time step procedure is used and the increment splitting procedure is used.

Contact
ERROR
ERROR*(1-BIAS)
ERROR
ERROR*(1+BIAS)
B
(a) Equidistant Default
Figure 3-14
(b) Biased
Contact Tolerances
Corner Conditions
When a node slides along a surface composed of multiple segments, three conditions can occur based on
the angle that the segments make. This is true for both two-dimensional and three-dimensional problems.
The Figure 3-15 shows the two-dimensional case for simplicity. If the angle between the two segments is
between 180 - < < 180 + , the node smoothly slides between the segments. If the angle is such that
0 < < 180 - , the node sticks in the sharp concave corner. If the angle is such that > 180 + , the
node separates. The value of is 8.625 for two-dimensional problems and 20 for three-dimensional
problems. These values can be reset using the PARAMETERS option.
Smooth
Sharp Concave
Sharp Convex
Figure 3-15
Corner Conditions

Contact
Friction
There are several friction models available in Marc. The friction types, entered on the second line of the
CONTACT option, are as follows:
0
No friction
Shear friction: velocity based smoothing function
Coulomb friction: velocity based smoothing function
Shear friction for rolling: velocity based smoothing function
Coulomb friction for rolling: velocity based smoothing function
Stick-slip model: step function
Coulomb friction: displacement based bilinear function
Shear friction: displacement based bilinear function
More details on these models are presented in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. For model
types (1-4), you need to define both the friction constant and the value of RVCNST(C). This value is
used to smooth out the discontinuous behavior of friction. The value of RVCNST can be interpreted as
the value of the relative velocity when sliding occurs. A very small value results in a difficulty to
converge; while a very large value results in hardly any effect of friction. This is depicted in Figure 3-16.
-
Ft
1
C = 0.01
C = 0.1
C=1
C = 10
C = 100
10
vr
-10
-1
Figure 3-16
Stick-slip Approximation (Fn = 1)

Contact
Using the stick-slip friction model, type 5, three parameters (, , and e) are available to control the
numerical behavior. Here represents a tolerance on the frictional force before sliding occurs. The node
changes from stick to slip when
F t F n
So the difference between the static and the dynamic coefficient of friction is expressed by . Parameter
can be seen as the amount of relative displacement in the direction of the friction force to enforce the
friction condition to change from slip to stick. The tolerance on the convergence of the solution is given
by e. It is required that
Ft
1 e --------p- 1 + e
Ft
where F t p is the tangential force at the previous iteration. This is shown in Figure 3-17. The stick-slip
model automatically used the nodal based friction procedure.
Fn
Fn
Ft
2
2
ut
= 1.05 (default; can be user-defined)

= 1 x 10-6 (default; can be user-defined)
= 1 x 10-6 (fixed; so that 0)
e = 5 x 10-2 (default; can be user-defined)
Figure 3-17
Stick-slip Friction Parameters
Finally, the friction models 6 and 7 (see Figure 3-18 for the Coulomb model) offer two parameters to
control the numerical behavior: and e. The parameter can be seen as the slip threshold: as long as the
relative tangential displacement in a contact node is smaller than , there exists an elastic or stick
condition. Its default value is determined automatically by the program. Parameter e is used to control
the accuracy of the friction solution. A friction solution is considered to be converged if:
p
Ft Ft
-------------------------------e
p
Ft

Contact
where F pt is the total friction force of the previous iteration and i indicates a component of the friction
force vector.
Ft
F n
Figure 3-18
u t
Bilinear Friction Model
The shear friction model 7 works similar to type 6, but introduces a limit on the friction force if plasticity
is observed and is better suited to simulate; e.g., bulk forming processes. Both types 6 and 7 are always
based on nodal forces.
For more information on friction, see Marc Volume A, Chapter 8, Contact, Friction Modeling.
Segment-to-segment Contact
The segment-to-segment (STS) procedure incorporates two major changes to the implementation of
contact: (1) the detection of contact and (2) the enforcement of the constraints after contact is detected.
In this release, not all of the contact capabilities have been implemented and usage of certain options will
have no effect. All of the previously available capabilities are still available using the node-to-segment
(NTS) contact procedure which remains the default in this release.
The following paragraphs outline both the options that are available and potential change of behavior
utilizing STS and those options which are not available or have no influence.
The data blocks mentioned below refer to the 2-D Contact option with tables. Analogous data blocks
would be used for the other contact options.
Activation: The STS capability is activated by using the 2nd field of the 3rd data block (set to 1). Note
that this data block is only used if the Contact option version number is 2. This is the case for all input
files created by Mentat 2010 using the default input format.
Furthermore, for the 2010 release large relative sliding is not permitted for contact between deformable
bodies; therefore, the 1st field of the 3rd data block should also be 1. This restriction will be removed in
a subsequent release.

Contact
The user also has a choice on the augmentation procedure used to impose the contact constraints on the
3rd field of the 3rd data block. The default of no augmentation is generally recommended. This leads to
a cost effective solution, but may show a minimal amount of penetration inherent in the penalty method.
If the penetration is not acceptable, the augmentation procedure can be activated, which can be based on
a constant or bi-linear penetration field per contact segment. The augmentation procedure based on a bilinear field is not recommended for lower order elements. Note that the augmentation procedure only
affects contact between deformable bodies. If there is contact between a deformable and a rigid body, the
augmentation procedure is always applied.
When using the STS procedure, there are two additional optional entries on the 5th data block: 1st field
is the penalty factor and the 2nd field is the penetration distance beyond which the augmentation
procedure is activated. This data may also be set on a body-body basis using the 5th and 6th fields of the
8th data block of the CONTACT TABLE option.
When using the STS procedure, iterative penetration checking is always used, so the 7th field of the 2nd
data block has no influence. Also, the value used to reset the recycle counter upon separation, the 8th
field of the 2nd data block, is ignored.
The STS procedure is highly beneficial when using higher order elements. Whenever the STS procedure
is used, the 2nd data block, 14th field which controls the linearization flag associated with the midside
nodes should always be set to -1, so that the midside nodes will be included in the contact boundary
description.
Using the STS procedure, tyings or MPCs are not used, hence the 2nd data block 16th field is ignored.
The MPCOUT option will not output any contact constraints when using the STS procedure.
In this release, the STS procedure is only available for mechanical/structural simulations; hence, the
contact body type on the 8th field of the 6th data block should be a 1, 2 or 3. All data giving the thermal,
electrical, diffusion, magnetostatics, or harmonic behavior will be ignored. The near thermal contact
distance (DQNEAR) specified via the CONTACT TABLE (3rd data block, 3rd field) is also ignored.
Local adaptive mesh refinement and global adaptive meshing are not supported in this release with the
STS procedure.
Note:
It is not possible to switch from STS to NTS or vice versa during a simulation. If the
conventional NTS procedure is to be used, set the 3rd data block to blank, or use Contact
version 1.
Friction: For this release, friction is not supported with the STS procedure. Hence, if STS procedure is
activated, then the following entries are ignored:
3rd data block
4th field
definition of friction type
3rd data block
5th field
selection of nodal stress or nodal force based

friction.
4th data block
1st field
relative sliding velocity
4th data block
7th field
stick slip friction coefficient multiplier

Contact
4th data block
8th field
friction force tolerance.
9th data block
8th field
the friction coefficient
6th data block
2nd field of CONTACT TABLE
the friction coefficient
6th data block
4th field of CONTACT TABLE
the friction stress limit.
Shell Behavior: Shell elements are supported with the STS procedure. In order to accurately describe
contact between free edges of shells and other contact segments, the free edges are included in the contact
body description as contact segments. The 2nd data block, 10th field, controlling the inclusion of the
thickness in the contact body description, does not apply to the segments corresponding to the free edges.
This also applies to the boundary description flags on the 1st and 2nd field of the 5th data block of the
CONTACT TABLE option.
Beam elements: Contact with 3-D beam elements is not supported with the STS procedure. In 2-D, beam
elements are supported and their free ends are described by 2-point contact segments.
Separation: When the STS procedure is used, separation is based upon absolute stress based separation.
The 2nd data block, 12th field must be a 2. The default stress is zero; hence, for any tensile contact, stress
separation occurs. If this results in undesired separations, a non-zero threshold can be entered.
Single/Double sided contact: When using the STS procedure, all contact between deformable bodies is
double sided. Hence, the 3rd field of the 6th data block is ignored. The 8th field of the 3rd data block of
CONTACT TABLE is also ignored. Additionally, the entry regarding optimized contact is ignored.
The hard-soft ratio in the 6th data block, 7th field of the CONTACT TABLE option is also ignored.
Break Glue: The break glue option does not work with the STS procedure. The UBREAKGLUE user
subroutine is not active.
CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) 632

Define Two-dimensional Contact Surface
Description
This option allows for the input of 2-D contact surface definition (rigid or deformable) in contact
problems. It also allows you to input friction type, relative sliding velocity for sticking conditions,
contact tolerance, location of center of rotation, initial angular position of surface, velocity of center of
rotation, angular velocity, as well as friction coefficient. For coupled analysis, additional input is required
to define the thermal, electrical, and diffusion behavior if applicable. In acoustic-solid analysis, it also
allows for the input of reactive boundary conditions. Near thermal contact is only available with input
version 10 or greater.
Notes:
Always define deformable surfaces before rigid surfaces.

Always define acoustic bodies before structural bodies.
If the UMOTION option and MOTION user subroutine are used, velocity data can be skipped.
If the UFRICTION option and UFRIC user subroutine are used, friction data can be skipped, but the
friction type must be identified.
If, in a coupled thermal-stress-contact problem, the UHTCOEF option and UHTCOE user subroutine are
used, the film coefficient and sink temperature data of a free surface can be skipped.
If the UHTCON option and UHTCON user subroutine are used in a coupled thermal-stress-contact
problem, film coefficient data between surfaces in contact can be skipped.
The following data can be changed upon restart:
Friction type
Maximum number of separations
Suppression of splitting
4th field
6th field
7th field
2nd data line

2nd data line
2nd data line
Relative sliding velocity

Contact distance
Thermal close distance
Separation force
Bias factor
1st field
2nd field
3rd field
5th field
6th field
3rd data line

3rd data line
3rd data line
3rd data line
3rd data line
Note:
The CONTACT TABLE option offers the possibility to specify data per pair of contact
bodies. Data which can be entered through the CONTACT TABLE option is designated with
a red asterisk (*).
633 CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word CONTACT.
11-15
2nd
Enter the version number; default = 1.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of surfaces to be defined.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Friction type
0: No Friction (default)
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb Friction
3: Shear Friction for Rolling
4: Coulomb Friction for Rolling
5: Stick-slip Coulomb Friction
6: Bilinear Coulomb Friction
7: Bilinear Shear Friction
Friction is not supported for segment-to-segment contact.
21-25
5th
Enter 0 (default) for the calculation of Coulomb friction based on

nodal stress. This can only be activated for friction types 1 to 4. Friction
types 5 to 7 always use nodal force.
Enter 1 for the calculation of Coulomb friction based on nodal force
instead of nodal stress.
26-30
6th
Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. Default

is 9999. Not used for segment-to-segment contact.
31-35
7th
Enter 0 (default) to use the increment splitting procedure for the fixed time
step procedures (AUTO LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, TRANSIENT
NON AUTO).
Enter 1 for the suppression of the splitting of an increment in fixed time
step procedure. Enter 2 for adaptive time step procedure. Default is 0.
Enter 3 (preferred) to use contact procedure which does not require
increment splitting (iterative penetration checking procedure). For
segment-to-segment contact, the iterative penetration checking procedure
is the only supported option.

Format
Fixed
36-40
Free
8th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 0 (default) to reset NCYCLE=0 which does not result in the

initialization of the Newton-Raphson procedure.
Enter 3 to not reset NCYCLE=0 when separation occurs; this speeds up
the solution but might result in instabilities.
Not used for segment-to-segment contact.
41-45
9th
Control separations within an increment.

When 0 (default) is entered, if the force on a node is greater than the
separation force, the node separates and an iteration occurs.
When 1 is entered, if a node, which was in contact at the end of the
previous increment, has a force greater than the separation force, the node
does not separate in this increment, but separates at the beginning of the
next increment.
When 2 is entered, if a new node comes into contact during this increment,
it is not allowed to separate during this increment (prevents chattering).
When 3 is entered, both (1) and (2) above are in effect.
46-50
10th
Parameter governing normal direction/thickness contribution of shell

(ISH).
Enter 0
Check Node Contact with top and bottom surface; including

shell thickness
Enter 1
Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer
Enter 2
Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer and ignore
shell thickness
Enter -1 Nodes only come into contact with top layer

Enter -2 Nodes only come into contact with top layer and ignore shell
thickness
51-55
11th
Enter 0 (default) for full printout of the rigid surface geometry.

Enter 1 to reduce printout of surface definition.
56-60
12th
Separation flag. This flag controls the separation value entered on the 5th
field of the 3rd data block and may have the following values:
0: Separation is based on absolute nodal forces. If the contact
normal force on a node in contact exceeds the maximum
allowed, the node separates.
1: Separation is based on absolute nodal stresses where a nodal
stress is calculated as a force divided by an equivalent area. If
the contact normal stress on a node in contact exceeds the
maximum allowed, the node separates.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2: Separation is based on absolute nodal stresses, where a nodal
stress is determined by extrapolating and averaging integration
point values. If the contact normal stress on a node in contact
exceeds the maximum allowed, the node separates.
3: Separation is based on relative nodal stresses, where a nodal
fraction times the maximum contact normal stress, the
node separates.
exceeds the fraction times the maximum contact normal stress,
the node separates.
The default value is 0. Notice that for true quadratic contact, only stressbased separation (2 or 4) can be used.
For segment-to-segment contact, this field is neglected since separation is
always based on absolute nodal stresses.
61-65
13th
Not used; enter 0
66-70
14th
Linearization flag, to be used if a contact body consists of

quadratic elements:
1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described based on the
corner nodes only. In the contact area, the midside nodes are
linearly tied to the corresponding corner nodes. Midside nodes
cannot come into contact.
-1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described using a
quadratic field. If a node touches a quadratic segment, a full
quadratic multipoint constraint is set up. Both corner and
midside nodes can come into contact.
71-75
15th
76-80
16th

Enter 1 to get the tying information due to initial contact written into the
jid.t01 file. This file can be included in a second analysis, so that
(glued) contact conditions can be obtained without actually defining

contact bodies in the second analysis.
Enter 3 to write out the tying information due to contact each increment to
a file called jid.conmpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
Marc format is used.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
a file called jid.conmpc_xxx. The MD Nastran MPC format is used.
The 3rd data block is only required if the version number is 2 or greater.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter 0 for general contact (default).

Enter 1 for small sliding contact between deformable contact bodies.
6-10
2nd
Enter 0 for node-to-segment contact (default).

Enter 1 for segment-to-segment contact.
11-15
3rd
Augmentation method used in a segment-to-segment contact analysis.

0 no augmentation (default)
1 augmentation based on a constant penetration field for linear
elements and on a bilinear penetration field for quadratic
elements
2 augmentation based on a constant penetration field.
3 augmentation based on a bilinear penetration field.
4th data block

1-10
1st
For friction types 1, 2, 3, or 4 enter the relative sliding velocity between

bodies below which sticking is simulated (RVCNST).
Default = 1.0.
For friction type 5, enter the slip-to-stick transition region ();
Default is 1.e-6.
For friction types 6 and 7, enter the slip threshold (). Default = 0.0, which
means that the actual value is automatically determined.
11-20*
2nd
Distance below which a node is considered touching a body (ERROR).

Leave blank if you want Marc to calculate it. This number is also used to
divide splines. If splines are used, this must be defined.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Separation normal stress cutoff.

If 0 (default), there is no cutoff; otherwise for separation flags 2, 3, and 4
separation is not checked if the maximum normal stress is less than
this value.
41-50*
5th
Separation value. The physical meaning depends on the separation flag

entered on the 12th field of the 2nd data block.
For separation flag 0, enter the maximum tensile force. Defaults to
maximum residual force.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For separation flag 1, enter the maximum tensile stress.Defaults to the
maximum contact stress multiplied with the convergence tolerance set on
CONTROL option.
For separation flag 2, 3, and 4, enter the fraction to multiply the maximum
compressive stress with (default = 0.1).
Notice that the CONTACT TABLE option offers the possibility to define a
separation threshold per pair of contact bodies.
51-60*
6th
Contact tolerance BIAS factor. (0-0.99) Not used for glued contact and
contact with a symmetry body.
61-70
7th
For stick-slip model, enter the friction coefficient multiplier ().

Defaults to 1.05.
71-80
8th
For stick-slip model, enter the friction force tolerance (e).

Defaults to 0.05.
The 5th data block is only required if the version number is 2 or greater.
5th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Augmented Lagrange penalty factor; used by the segment-to-segment

contact algorithm only. The default is derived from the stiffness of the
deformable contact bodies and a characteristic length. For continuum
elements, the characteristic length is given by one half of the average
length of all the edges being part of the contact boundary. For shell
elements, the characteristic length is given by half of the average
thickness of all the shell elements being part of a contact body.
Penetration distance beyond which an augmentation will be applied; used
by the segment-to-segment contact algorithm only. The default is one
thousandth of the characteristic length (see 1st field of the 5th data block).
Data blocks 6 through 26 are repeated once for each body to be defined.
Numbering of Contact Bodies: When defining contact bodies for a deformable-to-deformable
analysis, it is important to define them in the proper order. As a general rule, a body with a finer mesh
should be defined before a body with a coarser mesh. For problems involving adaptive meshing or
automated remeshing, care must be taken to satisfy this rule before as well as after the mesh change.
Note:
The CONTACT TABLE option allow the contact body numbering to be either automatic or
user-defined.
6th data block

1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd
Number of sets of geometrical data to be input for this rigid body

(NETTY). Enter 0 if deformable body.

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
For deformable bodies, enter 0 if double-sided deformable-deformable

contact with default search order based upon body IDs.
For rigid surfaces, enter 1 if surface is a symmetry plane.
For deformable bodies, enter 1 if single-sided deformable-deformable
contact is used.
Note that, in this case, results are dependent upon the order in which
contact bodies are defined.
contact is used with automatic optimization of the contact constraint
equations. Notice that this can be overruled per contact body combination
by the CONTACT TABLE option. This is recommended for simulations
with global adaptive remeshing.
16-20
4th
When a node contacts multiple rigid bodies, it contributes a load to a body

with the load body being indeterminate.
Setting this field to 1 insures that all nodes contacting this body
contributes their load to this body. This only influences the load
summary table.
Enter -1 if a spring constrained rigid surface is used.
21-25
5th
For rigid bodies, enter 0 (default) if the piecewise linear representation

is used.
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if analytic form is to be used.
26-30
6th
Enter -1 if body is position controlled.

Enter 0 (default) if body is velocity controlled.
Enter a positive number if load controlled. The number entered is the node
number which has the displacement degrees of freedom of the body. The
user-defined coordinates of this node are ignored and replaced with the
coordinates of the center of rotation given in the 7th data block.
Note:
31-35
7th
In Mentat, the coordinates of this node are used to define the

center of rotation.
Enter a positive number if load controlled and rotations are allowed. The
number is the node number which has the rotation(s) of the body as
degrees of freedom. This node number should not be the same as the node
number given in the 6th field. The position of this node is at the center of
rotation given in the 5th data block.
The load controlled body node(s) may have FIXED DISP/POINT LOAD or
connections with environment/other structures using the
SPRINGS option.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Node 1 has x- and y-displacement as degree of freedom 1 and 2
Node 2 has z-rotation as degree of freedom 1
The first node of a load-controlled body use the TRANSFORMATION
or COORD SYSTEM option to allow for movement in user-defined
directions.
36-40
8th
Contact body type (optional):

1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
7: electromagnetic body.
41-64
9th
Contact body name (optional)
7th data block

1-10
1st
First coordinate of initial position of center of rotation.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of initial position of center of rotation.
21-30
3rd
Third coordinate of initial position of center of ratio.
31-40
4th
Initial Angular position.
41-50
5th
First component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 0.0
51-60
6th
Second component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 0.0
61-70
7th
Third component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 1.0
8th data block

1-10
1st
First component of approach velocity of center of rotation.
11-20
2nd
Second component of approach velocity of center of rotation.
21-30
3rd
Third component of approach velocity of center of rotation.
31-40
4th
Approach Angular velocity about local axis through center of rotation.
9th data block

1-10
1st
First component of velocity or target position of center of rotation.
11-20
2nd
Second component of velocity or target position of center of rotation.
21-30
3rd
Third component of velocity or target position of center of rotation.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
Angular velocity or angular position about local axis through center of

rotation.
41-50
5th
Growth factor of rigid surface in first coordinate direction.
51-60
6th
Growth factor of rigid surface in second coordinate direction.
61-70
7th
Growth factor of rigid surface in third coordinate direction.
71-80*
8th
Friction Coefficient.
10th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the first component of velocity, or target position of
center of rotation.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the second component of velocity, or target position
of center of rotation.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the third component of velocity, or target position of
center of rotation.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the angular velocity.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for growth factor in first coordinate direction.
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for growth factor in second coordinate direction.
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID for growth factor in third coordinate direction.
36-40*
8th
Enter the table ID for the friction coefficient.
Direction of spring:
10b data block

1-5
1st
Enter -1 if, when the reference point moves in the -x-direction, spring
elongation occurs.
Enter -2, if, when the reference point moves in the -y-direction, spring
elongation occurs.
The 11th data block is only necessary if heat transfer is included.
11th data block
1-10
1st
Heat Transfer coefficient (film) to environment (HCVE).
11-20
2nd
Environment sink temperature (TSINK).
21-30*
3rd
Contact heat transfer coefficient (HCT).
31-40
4th
Body temperature (TBODY). (Required for rigid body only.)
41-50*
5th
Enter the convection coefficient for near field behavior (HCV).
51-60*
6th
Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior (HNC).

Format
Data
Entry Entry
Fixed
Free
61-70*
7th
Enter the exponent associated with natural convection (BNC).
71-80*
8th
Enter the surface emissivity ( ) for radiation to the environment or near

thermal radiation.

12th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the heat transfer coefficient to environment (HCVE).
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the environment sink temperature (TSINK).
11-15*
3rd
Enter the table ID for the contact heat transfer coefficient (HCT).
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the body temperature (TBODY).
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for the convection coefficient for near field behavior
(HCV).
26-30*
6th
Enter the table ID for natural convection coefficient for near field behavior
(HNC).
31-35*
7th
Enter the table ID for the exponent associated with natural convection.
(BNC).
36-40*
8th
Enter the table ID for surface emissivity ( ) for radiation to the

environment or near thermal radiation.

13th data block
1-10*
1st
Enter the separation distance dependent heat transfer film coefficient

(HBL).
11-20*
2nd
Nonlinear convective heat transfer coefficient for near behavior. (HNL)
21-30*
3rd
Nonlinear convective heat transfer exponent for near behavior. (BNL)
31-40
4th
Nonlinear convective heat transfer coefficient to environment. (HNLE)
41-50
5th
Nonlinear convective heat transfer exponent to environment. (BNLE)
51-60
6th
Natural convective heat transfer coefficient to environment. (HNCE)
61-70
7th
Natural convective heat transfer exponent to environment. (BNCE)

14th data block
1-5*
1st
Enter the table ID associated with (HBL).
6-10*
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with (HNL).

Format
Data
Entry Entry
Fixed
Free
11-15*
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with (BNL).
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID associated with (HNLE).
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID associated with (BNLE).
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID associated with (HNCE).
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID associated with (BNCE).
The thermal flux can be described between two bodies A and B as follows:
1. If separation distance (s) is less than ERROR, bodies are in contact q = H CT T B T A .
2. If separation distance (s) is greater than ERROR, but less than DQNEAR , and DQNEAR is not
zero. DQNEAR must be defined via the CONTACT TABLE option.
q = H CV T A T B + H NC T A T B
B NC
+ H NL T A NL T B NL + T A T B
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T A T B
DQNEAR
DQNEAR
The last term is only included if HBL is not zero.

The Stefan Boltzmann constant ( ) is entered via the PARAMETERS model definition option.
Radiation is based upon the absolute temperatures using the offset temperature entered via the
PARAMETERS model definition option.
3. If separation distance S is greater than DQNEAR or ERROR if DQNEAR is not defined, then
convection and radiation to the environment occurs.
= H CVE T A T SINK + H NCE T A T SINK
B NCE
B NLE
+ H NLE T A
B NLE
T SINK + T A T SINK
The 15th data block is only necessary if Joule heating is included.

15th data block
1-10
1st
Electrical transfer coefficient to environment.
11-20
2nd
Environment sink voltage.
21-30*
3rd
Contact Electrical transfer coefficient.
31-40
4th
Body voltage (Required for rigid body only).
41-50*
5th
Electrical transfer coefficient for near field behavior.
51-60*
6th
Enter the separation distance dependent electrical transfer coefficient.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

16th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the electrical transfer coefficient to environment.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the sink voltage.
11-15*
3rd
Enter the table ID for the contact electrical transfer coefficient.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the body voltage.
21-25*
5th
Enter the table ID for the electrical transfer coefficient for near
field behavior.
26-30*
6th
Enter the table ID for the separation distance dependent electrical

transfer coefficient.
The 17th data block is only necessary for coupled mass diffusion.
17th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the mass flow rate coefficient to environment.
11-20
2nd
Enter the environment sink pressure (PSINK).
21-30*
3rd
Enter the contact mass flow rate coefficient.
31-40
4th
Enter the body pressure (required for rigid body only).
41-50*
5th
Enter the mass flow rate coefficient for near field behavior.
51-60*
6th
Enter separation distance dependent mass flow rate coefficient.
18th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the mass flow rate coefficient to environment.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the environment sink pressure (PSINK).
11-15*
3rd
Enter the table ID for the contact mass flow rate coefficient.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the body pressure.
21-25*
5th
Enter the table ID for the mass rate coefficient for near behavior.
26-30*
6th
Enter the table ID for the separation distance dependent mass flow
rate coefficient.
The 19st data block is only necessary for coupled magnetostatic.

19st data block
1-5
1st
Enter the multiplying factor for the Lamination Loss curve.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 20th data block is only necessary for coupled magnetostatic.

20th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the multiplying factor for the
Lamination Loss curve.
The 21st data block is only necessary for harmonic acoustic analysis.
21st data block
1-10
1st
1
----k1
reactive boundary coefficient.
11-20
2nd
1
----c1
The 22nd data block is only necessary for harmonic acoustic analysis.
22nd data block
1-5
1st
1
- reactive boundary coefficient.
Enter the table ID associated with ----
6-10
2nd
1
k1
c1
The 23rd through 26th data blocks are repeated for as many geometrical data as required (NETTY).
A. For 2-D Deformable Bodies
23a data block
1-80
1st
Enter a list of elements of which the body is comprised.
B. For 2-D Rigid Body (Line-Segment)

23b data block
1-5
1st
Enter 1 for straight line segments (ITYPE).
6-10
2nd
Number of points required to define polyline (NPOINT).
The 24b data block is repeated once for each point entered.
24b data block
1-10
1st
First coordinate of point.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of point.
C. For 2-D Rigid Body (Circular Arc)

23c data block
1-5
1st
Enter 2 for circular arc (ITYPE).
6-10
2nd
Method of describing circular arc (METHOD).

See Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 24c data block is repeated four times.

24c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
D. For 2-D Rigid Body (Spline)

23d data block
1-5
1st
Enter 3 for spline (ITYPE).
6-10
2nd
Number of points required to define spline (NPOINT).
The 24d data block is repeated for each point to be entered.

24d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
E. For 2-D Rigid Body (NURBS)

The 23e data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
23e data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
Number of control points (NPTU).
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
Number of subdivisions; default 50.
24e data block

1-10
1st
First coordinate of point
11-20
2nd
If interpolation scheme is used the following two data blocks are ignored.
The 25e data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
25e data block
1-10
1st
Homogeneous coordinate between 0 and 1.
The 26e data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
26e data block
1-10
1st
Component of knot vector between 0 and 1.
CONTACT (2-D) 646

Define 2-D Contact Surface
CONTACT (2-D)
input style.
Description
rotation, angular velocity, as well as friction coefficient. In acoustic-solid analysis, it also allows for the
input of reactive boundary conditions.
Notes:

If the UMOTION option and the MOTION user subroutine are used, velocity data can be skipped.
If the UFRICTION option and the UFRIC user subroutine are used, friction data can be skipped, but the
If, in a coupled thermal-stress-contact problem, the UHTCOEF option and the UHTCOE user subroutine
are used, the film coefficient and sink temperature data of a free surface can be skipped.
If the UHTCON option and the UHTCON user subroutine are used in a coupled thermal-stress-contact
Friction type
4th field
2nd data line
6th field
2nd data line
7th field
2nd data line
1st field
3rd data line
Contact distance
2nd field
3rd data line
Separation force
5th field
3rd data line
Bias factor
6th field
3rd data line
Note:
a red asterisk (*).
647 CONTACT (2-D)

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
11-15
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Friction type
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb Friction
21-25
5th

types 5 to 7 always used nodal force.
26-30
6th

31-35
7th
NON AUTO).
step procedure. Enter 2 for adaptive time step procedure.
CONTACT (2-D) 648

Format
Fixed
36-40
Free
8th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 0 (default) to reset NCYCLE = 0 which does not result in the

41-45
9th

next increment.
46-50
51-55
10th
11th

(ISH).
Enter 0

shell thickness
Enter 1
Enter 2
shell thickness
Enter -1
Nodes only come into contact with top layer
Enter -2
Nodes only come into contact with top layer and ignore
shell thickness
Enter 0 (default) for full print out of the rigid surface geometry.
649 CONTACT (2-D)

Format
Fixed
Free
56-60
12th
Data
Entry Entry
I
node separates.
the node separates.
61-65
13th
Not used; enter 0.
CONTACT (2-D) 650

Format
Fixed
Free
66-70
14th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Linearization flag, to be used if a contact body consists of quadratic

elements:
71-75
15th
Not used; enter 0.
76-80
16th
Enter 3 to write out the tying information due to contact each increment
to a file called jid.conmpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
to a file called jid.conmpc_xxx. The MD Nastran MPC format is used.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

Enter 1 for small displacement contact.
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd

elements
651 CONTACT (2-D)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st

Default = 1.0.
For friction type 5, enter the slip-to-stick transition region (); Default
is 10-6.
11-20*
2nd

21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th

this value.
41-50*
5th

CONTROL option.
51-60*
6th
61-70
7th

Defaults to 1.05
71-80
8th

Defaults to 0.05.
CONTACT (2-D) 652

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd

The 6th through the 20th data blocks are repeated once for each body to be defined.
Note:
user-defined.
6th data block

1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd

contact is used.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
653 CONTACT (2-D)

Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I

is used.
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if analytic form is to be used.
26-30
6th

Note:
31-35
7th

center of rotation.
SPRINGS option.
Both nodes of a load-controlled body may use the TRANSFORMATION or
COORD SYSTEM option to allow for movement in the user-defined
directions. Note also that it is not necessary for the user-defined directions
at the nodes to be identical to each other.
36-40
8th

1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
41-64
9th
CONTACT (2-D) 654

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Third coordinate of initial position of center of rotation.
31-40
4th
Initial angular position.
41-50
5th
First component direction cosine of local axis.

Default = 0.0.
51-60
6th
Second component direction cosine of local axis.

Default = 0.0.
61-70
7th
Third component direction cosine of local axis;

Default = 1.0.
8th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Approach angular velocity about local axis through center of rotation.
9th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

rotation.
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80*
8th
Friction coefficient.

11th data block
1-10
1st
Heat transfer coefficient (film) to environment ( H CVE ).
11-20
2nd
Environment sink temperature ( T SINK ).
21-30*
3rd
Contact heat transfer coefficient ( H CT ).
655 CONTACT (2-D)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
Body temperature ( T BODY ). (Required for rigid body only.)
41-50*
5th
Enter the convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H CV ).
51-60*
6th
Enter the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior ( H NC ).
61-70*
7th
Enter the exponent associated with natural convection ( B NC ).
71-80*
8th
Enter the surface emissivity for either near field behavior or radiation to
environment ( ).

12th data block
1-10*
1st

(HBL).
11-20*
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
1. If separation distances ( S ) is less than ERROR , bodies are in contact q = H CT T B T A .
2. If separation distance ( S ) is greater than ERROR , but less than DQNEAR , and DQNEAR is
defined in the CONTACT TABLE option.
B NC
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T A T B
DQNEAR
DQNEAR
The last term is included only when H BL is not zero.

B NCE
B NLE
+ H NLE T A
B NLE
T SINK + T A T SINK
CONTACT (2-D) 656

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 13th data block is only necessary for Joule heating.

13th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30*
3rd
Contact electrical transfer coefficient.
31-40
4th
Body voltage (required for rigid body only).
41-50*
5th
51-60*
6th
14th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50*
5th
51-60*
6th
The 15th data block is only necessary for coupled magnetostatic.

15th data block
1-10
1st
16th data block

The 16th data block is only necessary for harmonic acoustic analysis.
1-10
1st
1
----k1
11-20
2nd
1
----c1

The 17th through the 20th data blocks are repeated for each set of body entities (NSURGN).
17a data block
1-80
1st
657 CONTACT (2-D)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

17b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
18b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

17c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd


18c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

17d data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

18d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

17e data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
CONTACT (2-D) 658

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
18e data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
19e data block
1-10
1st
20e data block
1-10
1st

Description
rotation, angular velocity, as well as friction coefficient. For coupled analysis, additional input is required
to define the thermal, electrical, and diffusion behavior if applicable. In acoustic-solid analysis, it also
allows for the input of reactive boundary conditions. Near thermal contact is only available with input
version 10 or greater.
Notes:

If the UFRICTION option and the UFRIC user subroutine are used, friction data can be skipped, but the
Friction type
4th field
6th field
7th field
2nd data line

2nd data line
2nd data line

Contact distance
Separation force
Bias factor
1st field
2nd field
5th field
6th field
3rd data line

3rd data line
3rd data line
3rd data line
Note:
a red asterisk (*).

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
11-15
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Friction type
0: No Friction
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb Friction
21-25
5th

26-30
6th

31-35
7th
NON AUTO).

Format
Fixed
36-40
Free
8th
Data
Entry Entry
I

41-45
9th

next increment.
46-50
51-55
10th
11th

(ISH).
Enter 0

shell thickness
Enter 1
Enter 2
shell thickness
Enter -1
Nodes only come into contact with top layer
Enter -2
Nodes only come into contact with top layer and ignore shell
thickness
Enter 0 (default) for full print out of the rigid surface geometry.

Format
Fixed
Free
56-60
12th
Data
Entry Entry
I
node separates.
the node separates.
61-65
13th
Enter 1 to activate beam-to-beam contact.

Enter 1+100*FREQ to activate beam-to-beam contact and write Mentat
mfd-files with the given frequency that contain line segments connecting
the beam-to-beam contact locations of touching beam elements.

Format
Fixed
Free
66-70
14th
Data
Entry Entry
I

quadratic elements:
71-75
15th
76-80
16th
Not used; enter 0.


to a file called jid.conmpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
to a file called jid.conmpc_xxx. The MD Nastran MPC format is used.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd

elements
4th data block

Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
F

Default = 1.0.
Default is 1.e-6.
11-20*
2nd

Leave blank if you want Marc to calculate it.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th

this value.
41-50*
5th

CONTROL option.
51-60*
6th
61-70
7th

Defaults to 1.05
71-80
8th

Defaults to 0.05.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block
1-10
1st

11-20
2nd

Note:
user-defined.
6th data block

1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
For deformable bodies, enter 0 (default) if double-sided deformabledeformable contact with default search order based upon body IDs.
contact is used.

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I
When a node contacts multiple rigid bodies, it contributes a load to a body

with the load body being indeterminate.
Setting this field to 1 insures that all nodes contacting this body
contributes their load to this body. This only influences the load
summary table.
Enter -1 if a spring constrained rigid surface is used.
21-25
5th

is used.
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if analytic form is to be used. This is required if
trimmed NURBS are entered.
26-30
6th

Note:
31-35
7th

center of rotation.
connections with environment/ other structures using the
SPRINGS option.
Node 1 has x-, y-, and z-displacement as degrees of freedom 1, 2 and 3
Node 2 has x-,y-, and z-rotation as degrees of freedom 1, 2 and 3
The rotation is defined as: Rx.Ry.Rz

Format
Fixed
36-40
Free
8th
Data
Entry Entry
I

1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
41-64
9th
7th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
8th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
9th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

rotation.
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80*
8th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

1-5
1st
center of rotation.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the third component of velocity, or target position of
center of rotation.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40*
8th
Direction of spring:
10b data block

1-5
1st
Enter -1 if, when the reference point moves in the -x-direction, spring
elongation occurs.
Enter -2, if, when the reference point moves in the -y-direction, spring
elongation occurs.
Enter -3, if, when the reference point moves in the -z-direction, spring
elongation occurs.
11th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60*
6th
61-70*
7th
71-80*
8th
Enter the surface emissivity ( ) for radiation to the environment or near

thermal radiation.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

12th data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15*
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
(HCV).
26-30*
6th
Enter the table ID for natural convection coefficient for near field
behavior (HNC).
31-35*
7th
(BNC).
36-40*
8th
Enter the table ID for surface emissivity ( ) for radiation to the

environment or near thermal radiation.

13th data block
1-10*
1st

(HBL).
11-20*
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th

14th data block
1-5*
1st
6-10*
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with (HNL).
11-15*
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with (BNL).
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID associated with (HNLE).
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID associated with (BNLE).

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID associated with (HNCE).
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID associated with (BNCE).
zero. DQNEAR must be defined via the CONTACT TABLE option.
B NC
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T A T B
DQNEAR
DQNEAR

The Stefan Boltzmann constant ( ) is entered via the PARAMETERS model
definition option.
B NCE
B NLE
+ H NLE T A
B NLE
T SINK + T A T SINK

15th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50*
5th
51-60*
6th

16th data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15*
3rd
16-20
4th

Format
Data
Entry Entry
Fixed
Free
21-25*
5th
field behavior.
26-30*
6th

The 17th data block is only used if coupled mass diffusion.

17th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50*
5th
51-60*
6th

18th data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15*
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25*
5th
26-30*
6th
rate coefficient.
The 19th data block is only used if coupled magnetostatic.

19th data block
1-10
1st

20th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the multiplying factor for the
Lamination Loss curve.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 21st data block is only necessary for harmonic acoustic analysis.
21st data block
1-10
1st
1
----k1
11-20
2nd
1---c1
The 22nd data block is only necessary for harmonic acoustic analysis.
22nd data block
1-5
1st
1
6-10
2nd
1Enter the table ID associated with ---reactive boundary coefficient.
k1
c1
The 23rd through 30th data blocks are repeated for each set of body entities (NSURGN).
A. For 3-D Deformable Body
23a data block
1-80
1st
B. For 3-D Rigid Body (Ruled Surface)

23b data block
1-5
1st
Enter 4 for ruled surface (ITYPE).
6-10
2nd
Entity type of the first surface generator (child) of the surface, JTYPE1.
11-15
3rd
If JTYPE1 = 1, 3, 4, 5 enter number of point required to describe first

surface generator (NPOINT1).
If JTYPE1 = 2 method to describe the circular arc (METH).
16-20
4th
Entity type of the second surface generator (child) of the surface

(JPOINT2).
21-25
5th
If JTYPE1 = 1, 3, 4, 5 enter number of point required to describe second

26-30
6th
Number of subdivisions along first direction (NDIV1), (direction along

first and second surface generator).
31-35
7th
Number of subdivisions along second direction (NDIV2), (direction from

first surface generator to second surface generator).

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 24b data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for ruled surface.
24b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Third coordinate of point.
C. For 3-D Rigid Body (Surface of Revolution)

23c data block
1-5
1st
Enter 5 for surface of revolution (ITYPE).
6-10
2nd
Entity type of the surface generator.
11-15
3rd
If JTYPE1 = 1, 3, 4, 5 enter number of points required to describe the

generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2
Method to describe the circular arc (METH).
16-20
4th
Number of subdivisions along the first (surface generator) direction

(NDIV1).
21-25
5th
Number of subdivisions along the second (circumference)

direction (NDIV2).
The 24c data block is repeated NPOINT times for surface of revolution.
24c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
25c data block

1-10
1st
First coordinate of 1st point on the axis of revolution.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of 1st point on the axis of revolution.
21-30
3rd
Third coordinate of 1st point on the axis of revolution.
31-40
4th
First coordinate of 2nd point on the axis of revolution.
41-50
5th
Second coordinate of 2nd point on the axis of revolution.
51-60
6th
Third coordinate of 2nd point on the axis of revolution.
61-70
7th
Total angle (degree) of rotation (Initial position of the surface generator is

given on the 9th data block.)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
D. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface)

23d data block
1-5
1st
Enter 6 for Bezier surface (ITYPE).
6-10
2nd
Number of points along the first direction of surface (NPONT1).
11-15
3rd
Number of points along the second direction of surface (NPOINT2).
16-20
4th
Number of subdivisions along first direction (NDIV1).
21-25
5th
Number of subdivisions along second direction (NDIV2).
The 24d data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for Bezier surface.
24d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
E. For 3-D Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch)

23e data block
1-5
1st
Enter 7 for a surface consisting of 4-node patches (ITYPE).
6-10
2nd
Number of 4-node patches to be read (which makes the entire

surface) NSEG.
11-15
3rd
Number of points to be read (NPOINT).
16-20
4th
Unit number. Defaults to input. Set KUNIT = -1 if data entered via the
DIGEOM user subroutine.
21-25
5th
Set to 1 if patch data is to be printed.

Default: no printing.
The 24e data block is repeated NSEG times for patches not entered by means of user subroutines
(ITYPE = 7 and KUNIT not -1)
24e data block
1-5
1st
Patch number (not necessary, can be left blank).
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd
First point number of this patch.
16-20
4th
Second point number of this patch.
21-25
5th
Third point number of this patch.
26-30
6th
Fourth point number of this patch.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 25e data block is repeated NPOINT times for patches not entered by means number of user
subroutine (ITYPE = 7 and KUNIT not -1).
25e data block
1-5
1st
Point number.
6-15
2nd
First coordinate of this node.
16-25
3rd
Second coordinate of this node.
26-35
4th
Third coordinate of this node.
F. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Poly-Surface)

23f data block
1-5
1st
Enter 8 for polysurface (ITYPE).
6-10
2nd
Number of points along the first direction of surface (NPOINT1).
11-15
3rd
The 24f data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for poly-surfaces.
24f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
G. For 3-D Rigid Surface (NURBS)

23g data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
Number of control points along u-direction (NPTU).
11-15
3rd
Number of control points along v-direction (NPTV).
16-20
4th
Order along u-direction (NORU).
21-25
5th
Order along v-direction (NORV).
26-30
6th
Number of subdivisions along u-direction; default 50.
31-35
7th
Number of subdivisions along v-direction; default 50.
36-40
8th
Number of trimming curves.
The 24g data block is repeated (NPTU NPTV) for control points.
24g data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 25g data block is repeated (NPTU NPTV) for homogeneous coordinate.
25g data block
1-10
1st
Homogeneous coordinate (0 h 1).
The 26g data block is repeated (NPTU + NORU) + (NPTV + NORV) for knot vectors.
26g data block
1-10
1st
Knot vector(0 k 1).
For each trimming curve, data blocks 27g, 28g, 29g, and 30g.
27g data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
The 28g data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
28g data block
1-10
1st
First coordinate of point in isoparametric space.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of point in isoparametric space.
The 29g data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
29g data block
1-10
1st
The 30g data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
30g data block
1-10
1st
H. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Cylinder)

23h data block
1-5
1st
Enter 10 for Cylinder.
6-10
2nd
Number of subdivisions.
24h data block

1-10
1st
First coordinate of center point on top surface.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of center point on top surface.
21-30
3rd
Third coordinate of center point on top surface.
31-40
4th
Radius of top surface
41-50
5th
First coordinate of center point on bottom surface.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
Second coordinate of center point on bottom surface.
61-70
7th
Third coordinate of center point on bottom surface radius of bottom

surface.
71-80
8th
Radius of bottom surface.

Note:
If the radius is negative value in 4th field the normal of cylinder

is outward. Default is inward.
I. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Sphere)

23i data block
1-5
1st
Enter 11 for Sphere.
6-10
2nd
24i data block

1-10
1st
First coordinate of center point.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of center point.
21-30
3rd
Third coordinate of center point.
31-40
4th
Radius of sphere.
Note:
If the radius is negative value in 4th field, the normal of sphere

CONTACT (3-D) 678

Define Three-dimensional Contact Surface
CONTACT (3-D)
input style.
Description
problems. It also allows you to input friction type, relative sliding velocity for sticking condition, contact
tolerance, location of center of rotation, initial angular position of surface, velocity of center of rotation,
angular velocity, as well as friction coefficient. In acoustic-solid analysis it also allows for the input of
reactive boundary conditions.
Notes:

If the UFRICTION option and the UFRIC or UFRICBBC user subroutine are used, friction data can be
skipped, but the friction type must be identified.
If the 4-node patch option for the definition of rigid surface and the DIGEOM user subroutine are used,
the coordinates of the patches can be skipped.
Friction type
4th field
6th field
7th field
2nd data line

2nd data line
2nd data line

Contact distance
Separation force
Bias factor
1st field
2nd field
5th field
6th field
3rd data line

3rd data line
3rd data line
3rd data line
Frequency for writing beam-to-beam contact location mfd-files
13th field
2nd data line
Note:
a red asterisk (*).
679 CONTACT (3-D)

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
11-15
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Friction type:
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb Friction
21-25
5th

26-30
6th

CONTACT (3-D) 680

Format
Fixed
31-35
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
NON AUTO).
Enter 1 for the suppression of the splitting of an increment in fixed
time procedure.
Enter 2 for adaptive time stepping procedure.
36-40
8th

Enter 3 to not reset NCYCLE = 0; this speeds up the solution but might
result in instabilities (not relevant for iterative penetration check).
41-45
9th

When 1 is entered, if a node which was in contact at the end of the
previous increment has a force greater than the separation force, the node
next increment.
When 3 is entered, both (1) and (2) above is in effect.
46-50
10th

(ISH).
Enter 0 Check Node Contact with top and bottom surface; including
shell thickness
Enter 1 Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer
Enter 2 Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer and ignore
shell thickness
thickness
681 CONTACT (3-D)

Format
Fixed
Free
51-55
11th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 0 (default) for full printout of the rigid surface geometry.

56-60
12th
stress is calculated as a force divided by an equivalent area. If the
contact normal stress on a node in contact exceeds the maximum
stress is calculated as a force divided by an equivalent area. If the
contact normal stress on a node in contact exceeds the fraction
times the maximum contact normal stress, the node separates.
the node separates.
The default value is 0. Notice that for true quadratic contact, only
stress-based separation (2 or 4) can be used.
61-65
13th
Enter 1 to activate beam-to-beam contact.

Enter 1+100*FREQ to activate beam-to-beam contact and write Mentat
mfd-files with the given frequency that contain line segments connecting
the beam-to-beam contact locations of touching beam elements.
CONTACT (3-D) 682

Format
Fixed
Free
66-70
14th
Data
Entry Entry
I

quadratic elements:
71-75
15th
Not used; enter 0.
76-80
16th
a file called jid.conmpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd

elements
683 CONTACT (3-D)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st

Default is 1.0.
Default is 10-6.
11-20*
2nd

Leave it blank if you want Marc to calculate it.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th

this value.
41-50*
5th

CONTROL option.
51-60*
6th
61-70
7th

Defaults to 1.05
71-80
8th
For stick-slip model and bilinear models, enter the friction force tolerance (e).
Defaults to 0.05.
CONTACT (3-D) 684

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block
1-10
1st

elements, the characteristic length is given by half of the average thickness
of all the shell elements being part of a contact body.
11-20
2nd

Data blocks 6 through the 23 are repeated once for each body to be defined.
Note:
user-defined.
6th data block

1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd
Number of sets of body entities, NSURGN, to be input for this rigid body.
Enter 0 if deformable body.
11-15
3rd

For rigid bodies, enter 1 if body is a symmetry plane.
contact is used.
Note that in this case, results are dependent upon the order in which
with global adaptive meshing.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
685 CONTACT (3-D)

Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I

is used.
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if analytic form is to be used. This is required if
trimmed NURBS are entered.
26-30
6th

Note:
31-35
7th

center of rotation.
The load controlled body node(s) may have FIXED DISP/POINT LOAD
or connections with environment/other structures using the
SPRINGS option.
36-40
8th

1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
41-64
9th
CONTACT (3-D) 686

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
First component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 0.0.
51-60
6th
Second component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 0.0.
61-70
7th
Third component direction cosine of local axis; Default = 1.0.
8th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
9th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

rotation.
41-50
5th
Not used; enter 0.
51-60
6th
Not used; enter 0.
61-70
7th
Not used; enter 0.
71-80*
8th

10th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50*
5th
51-60*
6th
687 CONTACT (3-D)

Format
Data
Entry Entry
Fixed
Free
61-70*
7th
71-80*
8th
Enter the surface emissivity for either near field behavior or radiation
to environment ( ).

11th data block
1-10*
1st

(HBL).
11-20*
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
1. If separation distances ( S ) is less than ERROR , bodies are in contact q = H CT T B T A .
2. If separation distance ( S ) is greater than ERROR , but less than DQNEAR , and DQNEAR is
defined in the CONTACT TABLE option.
B NC
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T A T B
DQNEAR
DQNEAR
The last term is included only when H BL is not zero.

B NCE
B NLE
+ H NLE T A
B NLE
T SINK + T A T SINK
CONTACT (3-D) 688

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

12th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50*
5th
51-60*
6th

13th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30*
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50*
5th
51-60*
6th

14th data block
1-10
1st
15th data block
1-10
1st
1
----k1
11-20
2nd
1
----c1

The 16th through the 23rd data blocks are repeated for each set of body entities (NSURGN).
16a data block
1-80
1st
689 CONTACT (3-D)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

16b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th

(JPOINT2).
21-25
5th

26-30
6th

31-35
7th

17b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

16c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2
16-20
4th

(NDIV1).
21-25
5th
Number of subdivisions along the second (circumference) direction

(NDIV2).
CONTACT (3-D) 690

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
17c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
18c data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th


16d data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
17d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

16e data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Number of 4-node patches to be read (which makes the entire surface)

NSEG.
11-15
3rd
691 CONTACT (3-D)

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I
21-25
5th

17e data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
18e data block
1-5
1st
Point number.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th

16f data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
17f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
CONTACT (3-D) 692

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

16g data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
17g data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
18g data block
1-10
1st
19g data block
1-10
1st
Knot vector(0 k 1).
20g data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
21g data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
693 CONTACT (3-D)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
22g data block
1-10
1st
The 23g data block is repeated NPTU + NORU times for knot vectors.
23g data block
1-10
1st

16h data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
17h data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th

surface.
71-80
8th

Note:


16i data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
17i data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Radius of sphere.
Note:

CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (Model Definition) 694

Define Contact Table
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (Model Definition)
Description
This option overrides information provided on the CONTACT option to allow the user to give more
detailed information concerning the interaction of the bodies. In particular, this option allows you to
specify which bodies contact which other bodies, and what is their behavior after contact occurs.
If this option is not included, the default for contact analysis is that every body detects the possibility of
contact with all other bodies, and itself if it is a flexible body. When the CONTACT TABLE option is
entered, the default of detection for every body is overridden. Instead, you specify the relationship of
detection between bodies for contact. The touching body does not contact itself unless you request it. This
is useful for deactivating or activating bodies to either reduce computational costs, or because the
physical process (such as manufacturing) involves multiple stages with different body interactions.
Whenever the touched body is a flexible one, by default, the capability of double-sided contact is applied
between the contacting bodies. This can be switched off by selecting single-sided contact on the
CONTACT option or by setting the searching order in the CONTACT TABLE option. A positive value of
the interference closure implies that there is an overlap between the bodies; a negative value implies that
a gap exists.
In addition, you can invoke the glue option, delayed slide off a deformable body, and stress-free
initial contact.
In the glue option, when a node contacts a rigid body, the relative tangential displacement is zero. When
a node contacts a deformable body, all the translational degrees of freedom are tied.
By default, if a node slides off the boundary of a deformable body at a sharp corner by a distance more
than the contact tolerance, contact between the node and the contacted body is lost. By invoking the
delayed sliding off option, the tangential contact tolerance is increased by a user-defined value.
In any static contact analysis, a node contacting a body is projected onto the contacted segment of this
body. Due to inaccuracies in the finite element model, this might introduce undesired stress changes,
since an overlap or a gap between the node and the contacted segment will be closed. The option for
stress-free initial contact forces a change of the coordinates of a node contacting a deformable body, thus
avoiding the stress changes. In combination with the glue option, a similar effect can be obtained;
however, the overlap or gap remains.
The following control variables of contact between bodies can be modified throughout the table:
contact tolerance, separation threshold, friction coefficient, interference closure and contact heat
transfer and electrical coefficients. For an acoustic-solid analysis, you can also modify the reactive
boundary coefficients.
695 CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (Model Definition)

The near thermal contact option can only be invoked using the CONTACT TABLE option. In this case,
one must specify the distance at which near thermal contact occurs and the additional parameters to
control the thermal (and electrical) flux.
The previous value of those control variables is not overridden unless nonzero values are entered here.
For more information on the ordering of contact bodies, see Marc Volume A, Chapter 8, Contact,
Numbering of Contact Bodies.
Notes:
This option should be placed after the CONTACT option.

In a restart analysis, if these values are to be changed, use the REAUTO option and specify
the CONTACT TABLE after the END OPTION.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CONTACT TABLE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of bodies to be input.
6-10
2nd
Enter the version number for reading the CONTACT TABLE block.
Enter 2 if the 5th, 8th, 9th,16th, and 17th data blocks are to be read to
control contact, ungluing, and multiphysics. Default is 0.
The 3rd through the 22nd data blocks are entered once for each set of bodies to be input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the touching body number.
6-15
2nd
Enter the contact tolerance ( ERROR ).
16-25
3rd
Enter the distance below which near thermal or electrical contact behavior
occurs ( DQNEAR ). A 0 entered here indicates that near contact behavior
is not included.
26-35
4th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
5th
Not used; enter 0.
46-55
6th
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
56-65
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
F
Enter 0 (default) if there is no additional constraint on the tangential

displacement when contact occurs. No constraints are placed on rotational
degrees of freedom.
Enter 1 to insure that there is no relative tangential displacement when the
node comes into contact. A possible relative normal displacement might
originate from an initial gap or overlap between the node and the
contacted body, as the node will be projected onto the contacted body.
Enter 2 to insure that there is no relative tangential and normal
displacement when the node comes into contact. An existing initial gap or
overlap between the node and the contacted body is not removed, as the
node is not projected onto the contacted body.
Enter 3 to insure full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node
will be projected onto the contacted body.
will not be projected onto the contact body.
66-70
8th
Enter 0 (default) if search order is based upon first checking bodies with
lower body number versus bodies with higher body number.
Enter 1 to indicate that the searching order for deformable contact bodies
is from the touching body to the touched bodies on the 5th data block. This
might change the default order for deformable bodies, which is from
bodies with a lower number to bodies with a higher number.
Enter 2 to let the program decide which searching order is optimal for
deformable bodies. This order is set up such that searching is done starting
with the body having the smallest element edge. This option forces singlesided contact between the touching and touched bodies: searching is done
only from one body to another and not the other way around.
71-75
9th
Enter 0 (default) if during initial contact, a projection onto the contact

surface induces a stress.
Enter 1 to modify the coordinates of a node in contact with a deformable
body so that stress-free initial contact can be obtained.
Enter 2 to extend the tangential error tolerance at sharp corners of
deformable bodies to delay sliding off a contacted segment.
Enter 3 to have both 1 and 2 active.

Format
Fixed
Free
76-80
10th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Only relevant if the glue option is invoked and the separation force has not
been set.
Enter 0 (default) if a node should not separate.
Enter 1 to invoke the separation behavior procedure, as specified on the
12th field of the 2nd data block of the CONTACT option.
Enter 2 to invoke the breaking glue capability. A node will be released if
the break criterion is fulfilled. Then the node will do regular contact with
separation instead of being glued. The stress limits for this capability are
specified in the 8th data block below.
4th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the contact tolerance.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the near contact distance.
5th data block

Only required if version number is equal to 2.
1-5
1st
Enter the boundary description flag for the touching body (entered on the
3rd data block).
6-10
2nd
Enter the boundary description flag for the touched body (entered on the
22nd data block).
The boundary description flag is given by A+10*B+1000*C, where parameter A is related to

continuum elements in a body, parameter B is related to shell elements in a body and parameter C is
related to beam elements and/or shell edges in a body. The possible values of these parameters and their
meaning are:
A = 1:
the outside edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) of continuum elements are included in the
boundary description (default).
B = 1:
both top and bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B = 2:
only bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the

boundary description.
B = 3:
only bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the

B = 4:
only top faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.
B = 5:
only top faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary description.

Format
Fixed
Free
B = 6:
Data
Entry Entry
both top and bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the
The default value of B depends on the parameter governing the normal
direction/thickness contribution of shell elements as entered on the
CONTACT option.
Note:
The choice B = 6 for both bodies in a contact combination is only

meaningful for glued contact. If in such cases separation is allowed,
separated nodes will not come into contact anymore, unless a new
CONTACT TABLE is defined to reset the value of B.
C = 0:
neither beam elements nor shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C = 1:
beam elements are included in the boundary description (allowing for beam-tobeam contact).
C = 10:
shell edges are included in the boundary description.
C = 11:
both beam elements and shell edges are included in the boundary description.
If beam-to-beam contact is not activated on the CONTACT option, the default value
of C is 0, otherwise the default value is 1.
6th data block

Only required if a mechanical-displacement solution is obtained.
1-10
1st
Enter the contact separation threshold. The physical meaning of this

threshold (a force, a stress, or a fraction of the maximum contact normal
stress) depends on the separation flag entered on the 12th field of the 2nd
data block of the CONTACT option.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Enter the interference closure amount, normal to the contact surface.
31-40
4th
Enter the friction stress limit limit .

This entry is only used for friction type 6 (Coulomb friction using the
bilinear model). If the shear stress due to friction reaches this limit value,
then the applied friction force will be reduced so that the maximum
friction stress is given by min n , limit , with the friction coefficient
and n the contact normal stress. Default for this entry is 1.e20.
41-50
5th
Enter the contact tolerance BIAS factor (0-1). This value will overrule the
BIAS factor entered on the 6th field of the 3rd data block of the
CONTACT option if nonzero.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
Enter the delayed slide off distance (this entry is only used if delayed slide
off has been activated by the 9th entry of the 3rd data block). When using
the delayed slide off option, a node sliding on a segment will slide off this
segment only if it passes the node (2-D) or edge (3-D) at a sharp corner
over a distance larger than the delayed slide off distance. By default, the
delayed slide off distance is related to the dimensions of the contacted
segment by a 20 percent increase of its isoparametric domain.
61-70
7th
Enter the hard-soft ratio (this entry is only used if double-sided contact
with automatic constraint optimization is used, as defined on the 4th data
block of the CONTACT option). The hard-soft ratio can be used by the
program if there is a significant difference in the (average) stiffness of the
contact bodies (expressed by the trace of the initial stress-strain law). If
the ratio of the stiffnesses is larger than the hard-soft ratio, the nodes of
the softest body are the preferred slave nodes. By default, the hard-soft
ratio is 2.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the contact separation threshold.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the interface closure amount.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the friction stress limit.
8th data block

Only required if version number is equal to 2 and a mechanical displacement solution is obtained.
1-10
1st
Normal stress to break glued contact (SN).
11-20
2nd
Tangential stress to break glued contact (ST).
21-30
3rd
Enter exponent for breaking normal stress term (m). Default = 2.
31-40
4th
Enter exponent for breaking tangential stress term (n). Default = 2.

The glue breaks when N SN m + T ST n 1
41-50
5th

contact algorithm only.
51-60
6th

by the segment-to-segment contact algorithm only.
61-70
7th
Wear scale factor. Default is 1.0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with normal stress to break glued contact.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with tangential stress to break glued contact.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with exponent of normal stress term.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID associated with exponent of tangential stress term.
21-25
5th
Not used
26-30
6th
Not used
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID associated with wear scale factor.
10th data block

Only required if heat transfer is included.
1-10
1st
Enter the contact heat transfer coefficient. (HCT)
11-20
2nd
Enter the convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior. (HCV)
21-30
3rd
Enter the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for near

behavior. (HNC)
31-40
4th
Enter the exponent associated with the natural convection for near
behavior. (BNC)
41-50
5th
Enter the surface emissivity. ()
51-60
6th
Enter the separation distance dependent thermal convection

coefficient. (HBL)
61-70
7th
Nonlinear convective heat transfer coefficient for near behavior. (HCVNB)
71-80
8th
Nonlinear convective heat transfer exponent for near behavior. (BCVNB)
11th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the contact heat transfer coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the heat transfer coefficient for near behavior.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the exponent associated with the natural convection
for near behavior.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for the surface emissivity.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for the separation dependent thermal

convection coefficient.
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID associated with (HCVNB).
36-40
8th
Enter the table ID associated with (BCVNB).
12th data block

Only required for Joule heating.
1-10
1st
Enter the contact electrical coefficient (coupled Joule analysis only).
11-20
2nd
Enter the electrical transfer coefficient for near behavior.
21-30
3rd
13th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the contact electrical coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the electrical transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with the separation distance dependent

electrical transfer coefficient.
14th data block

Only required for coupled mass diffusion analysis.
1-10
1st
Enter the contact mass transfer coefficient).
11-20
2nd
Enter the mass transfer coefficient for near behavior.
21-30
3rd
Enter the separation distance dependent mass diffusion coefficient.
15th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the contact mass transfer coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the mass transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with the separation distance dependent mass
diffusion coefficient.
16th data block

Only required if version number is equal to 2 and electrostatic or piezoelectric analysis is included.
1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
17th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
18th data block

Only required if magnetostatic analysis is included.
1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
19th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
20th data block

Only required for harmonic acoustic analysis.
1-10
1st
1
Enter the ----
11-20
2nd
1
Enter the ----
k1
c1
21st data block

1-5
1st
1
Enter the table ID for the ---k1
6-10
2nd
1
Enter the table ID for the ---c1
22nd data block

Enter a list of touched bodies for which the touching body detects contact
with the parameters above.
703 CONTACT TABLE (Model Definition)

CONTACT TABLE (Model Definition)
input style.
Description
a gap exists.
initial contact.
CONTACT TABLE (Model Definition) 704

For more information on the ordering of contact bodies, see Marc Volume A, Chapter 8, Contact,
Numbering of Contact Bodies.
Notes:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter 2 if the 4th, 6th, and 10th data blocks are to be read to control
contact, ungluing, and multiphysics. Default is 0.
The 3rd through the 13th data blocks are entered once for each set of bodies to be input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
occurs ( DQNEAR ). A zero entered here indicates that near contact
behavior is not included.
26-35
4th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
5th
Not used; enter 0.
46-55
6th
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
56-65
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
F

degrees of freedom.
66-70
8th
71-75
9th
Enter 0 (default) if, during initial contact, a projection onto the contact

Format
Fixed
Free
76-80
10th
Data
Entry Entry
I
been set.
Enter 0 if a node should not separate (default).
4th data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block).
6-10
2nd
13th data block).

meaning are:
A=1:
B=1:
description.
B=2:
only bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=3:
only bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=4:
B=5:

Format
Fixed
Free
B=6:
Data
Entry Entry
both top and bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
direction/thickness contribution of shell elements as entered on the CONTACT
option.
Note:
The choice B=6 for both bodies in a contact combination is only

C=0:
C=1:
C=10:
C=11:
If beam-to-beam contact is not activated on the CONTACT option, the default
value of C is 0, otherwise the default value is 1.
5th data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Enter the interference closure amount; normal to the contact surface.
31-40
4th

41-50
5th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
ratio is 2.
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

41-50
5th

51-60
6th

61-70
7th
7th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the contact heat transfer coefficient ( H T ).
11-20
2nd
Enter the convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior ( H CV ).
21-30
3rd
Enter the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior
( H NC ).
31-40
4th
behavior ( B NC ).

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
Enter the surface emissivity ( ).
51-60
6th
Enter the separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient

( H BL ).
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
8th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Enter the separation distance dependent electrical coefficient.
9th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the contact mass transfer coefficient.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
10th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
12th data block

1-10
1st
1
Enter the ---k1
11-20
2nd
1
Enter the ---c1
13th data block

SPLINE (Model Definition) 710

Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body
SPLINE (Model Definition)
Description
In order to improve the accuracy for a deformable-deformable contact analysis, the outer surface of a
contacted body can be described based on a spline (2-D) or Coons surface (3-D) description. The
analytical surface is then used to calculate the normal to the deformable body and the closest point
projection of a contacting node.
In 2-D, for a contacted segment, a spline is created based on:
tangent at first and second point of segment
position of first and second point of segment
In 3-D, for a contacted segment, a Coons surface is created based on:
tangent vectors at corner points of segment
position of corner points of segment
zero twist vectors
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word SPLINE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of deformable bodies for which the spline description
must be applied.
6-10
2nd
Enter the increment frequency of writing the spline representation in Marc

Mentat model files, called jid_spline_inc.mfd, where inc is the
increment number. These files can be used to visualize the spline
description and can be merged to the post file during post processing.
Default is zero, so that no additional files are generated.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each deformable body with a spline description.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd
For 3-D analyses only: enter 1 to enforce C0-continuity at edges where the
normal vector to the outer contour of the structure shows a discontinuity
(also see the 4th data block below).
711 SPLINE (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to automatically determine nodes (2-D) or edges (3-D) where the

normal vector to the outer contour of the structure shows a discontinuity.
16-25
4th
Used only if the 3rd entry of this data block is set to 1: enter the threshold
angle to decide if there is a normal vector discontinuity between two
adjacent segments of the contact body defined in the first entry of this data
block. The threshold angle should be between 0 and 90 degrees; the
default value is 60 degrees.
26-30
5th
Only used if the contact body given on the first entry of this data block
consists of quadratic elements.
Enter 1 if the midside node coordinates have to be adjusted by projecting
the midside nodes on the analytical curve (2-D) or surface (3-D) obtained
by fitting a curve or surface through the given element coordinates.
Note:
This projection is done at the very beginning of the analysis and

may be useful if a curved contact body consists of quadratic
elements, but the midside nodes are located on the straight
edges between the corner nodes.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes defining nodes (2-D) or edges
(3-D) where the
Notes:
In 3-D, when there is a normal vector discontinuity at an

element edge, the corner nodes defining the edge must be
entered one after another.
If the automatic detection is activated using the 3rd data
block above, the nodes/edges with a normal vector
discontinuity found by the program will be added to the list
defined here.
As an example for the 2-D contact body below, (which is the second body in the model and the only body
for which the SPLINE option is active), based on user-defined normal vector discontinuities the SPLINE
option would be:
spline
1
2
1
14
27
40
SPLINE (Model Definition) 712

Finite Element Model
Spline Representation
Alternatively, using the automatic detection the input would be:

spline
1
2
0
60.000
As an example for the 3-D contact body below (which is the second body in the model and the only body
for which the SPLINE option is active), based on user-defined normal vector discontinuities the SPLINE
option would be:
spline
1
2
26
27
29
97
107 103
113
38
40
39
93
99
32
37
121
95
29
34
117
119
31
30
105
115
36
Finite Element Model
26
99
109
37
41
103
101
35
35
113
93
30
33
115
123
27
32
111
111
41
28
101
107
39
40
95
105
34
38
123
97
33
36
119
121
28
31
109
117
Coons Representation
c
c
c
c
713 SPLINE (Model Definition)

Alternatively, using the automatic detection the input would be:

spline
1
2
0
60.000
The effect of enforcing C0-continuity can be seen in the figures below.
C0-discontinuous
C0-continuous
UMOTION 714
Invoke User Subroutine to Prescribe Surface Motion
UMOTION
Invoke User Subroutine to Prescribe Surface Motion
Description
This option calls the MOTION user subroutine to define surface motions. See Marc Volume D: User
This option also calls the UGROWRIGID user subroutine to define a scale factor to be applied to the size
of the rigid bodies during the analysis as a function of time.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word UMOTION.
11-15
2nd
Enter a 2 if the UGROWRIGID user subroutine is to be called to grow

rigid bodies.
715 UFRICTION
Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface Friction Behavior
UFRICTION
Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface Friction Behavior
Description
This option calls the UFRIC user subroutine to define friction coefficients. If beam-to-beam contact is
activated, the option also calls the UFRICBBC user subroutine to define friction coefficients for
beam-to-beam contact (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note:
Use this option only in conjunction with the CONTACT option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-9
1st
Enter the word UFRICTION.
UHTCOEF 716
Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface/Environment Thermal Behavior
UHTCOEF
Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface/Environment

Thermal Behavior
Description
This option activates the calls to user subroutines in contact analyses to influence the behavior between
the surface and the environment. For heat transfer, the UHTCOE user subroutine may be used to define
heat transfer coefficients (film coefficients) and sink temperatures of a free surface subjected to
convective or radiative heat transfer. The UVTCOE user subroutine is used to define the analogous
quantities for electrical contact in a coupled Joule heating analysis. In a diffusion analysis, the UMDCOE
user subroutine is used to define the mass transfer coefficient and the environment pressure. (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note:
Use only in conjunction with the CONTACT option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
Enter the word UHTCOEF.
717 UHTCON
Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface to Surface Behavior
UHTCON
Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface to Surface Behavior
Description
This option activates the calls to user subroutines in contact analyses to influence the behavior between
surfaces. For heat transfer, the UHTCON user subroutine to define heat transfer coefficients (film
coefficients) between surfaces in contact. In Joule heating analysis, the UVTCON user subroutine is used
to define the analogous quantities for electrical contact.In a diffusion analysis, the UMDCON user
subroutine is used to define the analogous mass transfer coefficient (see Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note:
Use only in conjunction with the CONTACT option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word UHTCON.
CONTACT NODE (Model Definition) 718

Define Nodes for Surface Contact
CONTACT NODE (Model Definition)
Description
This option is used to define which nodes in a body might potentially contact other surfaces. This option
can be used to reduce the computational cost if a body has many exterior nodes and it is known for which
nodes contact might occur. If this option is not used, all exterior surface nodes are checked for contact.
Notes:
If this option is used and a node number is not explicitly listed, that node might penetrate
other bodies.
the CONTACT NODE option after the END OPTION.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words CONTACT NODE.
Enter the number of bodies for which exterior nodes are defined
Body number.
Enter a list of nodes that are potential contact nodes.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block

1-5
1st
4th data block

1-80
1st
719 DEACT GLUE (Model Definition)

Define Deact Glue for Nodes in Glued Contact
DEACT GLUE (Model Definition) Define Deact Glue for Nodes in Glued Contact
Description
This option is used to define nodes of a glued interface that should have regular contact instead of glued
contact. The option has no effect if defined for a contact body which is not in glued contact. If two bodies
are glued together, this option can be used to specify certain nodes that should not be glued, for example
to define an initial crack. Unless single sided contact is used, it is best to identify nodes of both sides of
the contact interface to make sure that the selected part is not glued. The deact glue only influences the
contacting node.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words DEACT GLUE.
Enter the number of bodies for which deact glue nodes are defined.
Body number.
Enter a list of nodes that should have regular contact.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block

1-5
1st
4th data block

1-80
1st
EXCLUDE (Model Definition) 720

Ignore Contact with Certain Regions
EXCLUDE (Model Definition)
Description
For certain contact problems, you might wish to influence the decision regarding the deformable segment
a node contacts. By means of the EXCLUDE option, you can specify a list of nodes defining segments to
be excluded from the contacted bodies.
Use the set name convention if ADAPT GLOBAL model definition is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word EXCLUDE.
Enter the number of deformable bodies for which the EXCLUDE option
must be applied.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated for each deformable body with the EXCLUDE option.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd
Enter 0 to define excluded segments using node numbers (default).

Enter 1 to give a element: edge or element: face set in Marc convention.
Enter 2 to give a element: edge or element: face set in Mentat convention.
Use 4 data block if 2nd field of 3rd data block = 0.

4th data block
Enter a list of nodes defining segments to be excluded from contacted
bodies.
Notes:
In 2-D, each segment must be defined by two nodes.

In 3-D, each segment must be defined by four nodes.
If, in a 3-D, a segment corresponds to a tetrahedral or a
collapsed hexahedral element, then the last two nodes of the
set of four should be identical.
Use 5th data block if 2nd field of 3rd data block = 1 or 2.

5th data block
1-32
1st
Enter an element edge or element face set name.
721 WEAR (Model Definition)

Input of Wear Definition
WEAR (Model Definition)
Description
This option is used for defining data for modeling mechanical wear. The wear is calculated for
deformable contact bodies as defined below. Three wear models are currently available for the
calculation of rate of wear w
K
w = ---- v rel
H
Archard base model
K
n
w = ---- m v rel
H
Archard model; Bayer exponential form

B
-----K
n
w = ---- m v rel e T
H
Archard model; exponential form with thermal activation
Here K is the wear coefficient, H is the material hardness, is the contact normal stress, and v rel is the
relative sliding velocity in the contact. In addition, the UWEARINDEX user subroutine is available for
defining the rate of wear. The total accumulated wear is available for postprocessing as nodal post code
77 Wear Index. This quantity has the unit of a distance and can be interpreted as the amount of element
removal in the direction to the surface. The rate of wear is available as a vector nodal post code 78 Wear
Rate. The wear can also be used for updating the geometry. For this case, the nodal points are moved in
the direction normal to the contact body. A scale factor can be given for the amount of nodal movement.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word WEAR.
Enter the number of wear definitions.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated for each wear definition.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the wear model:

1 - Archard
2 -.Archard model; Bayer exponential form
3 - Archard model; exponential form with thermal activation
4 - UWEARINDEX user subroutine
WEAR (Model Definition) 722

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6-10
2nd
Enter the contact body to which the wear is applied.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to activate updating of the geometry due to wear.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the wear coefficient.
11-20
2nd
Enter the material hardness.
21-30
3rd
Enter the stress exponent.
31-40
4th
Enter the velocity exponent.
41-40
5th
Enter the thermal activation constant B.
51-60
6th
Enter the scale factor for the geometry update (default is 1.0 if blank or 0
is given).
Only use for table driven input.

5th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the table for the wear coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table for the material hardness.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table for the stress exponent.
15-20
4th
Enter the table for the velocity exponent.
21-25
5th
Enter the table for the thermal activation constant B.

Material Properties
Chapt Material Properties

er 3: This section describes the material properties that can be associated with the model. These consist of both
the specification of the constitutive model used to describe the material behavior and the actual material
Mode data
necessary to represent the material.
l
The ISOTROPIC model definition option can be used for the input of simple engineering material
Defini properties, including the fluid density in fluid-solid interaction problems. Additional model definition
options such as ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN, ARRUDBOYCE, GENT, FOAM,
tion
and HYPOELASTIC, NLELAST, GASKET, SHAPE MEMORY, POWDER and SOIL are available for more
Optio complex material representations. When not using the table driven input, the STRAIN RATE option
allows the definition of a strain-rate dependent yield stress; the WORK HARD option allows the user to
ns
specify work hardening slopes for elastic-plastic behavior. Variations of material properties with
temperatures such as Youngs modulus, Poissons ratio, etc. can be entered through TEMPERATURE
EFFECTS, ORTHO TEMP, and TIME-TEMP options. When using the table driven input format, all these
behaviors can be defined with the TABLE input. Cracking data and failure criteria data can be entered
using CRACK DATA and FAIL DATA, respectively. Finally, the GAP DATA option can be used for the
input of gap width, frictional coefficient, etc. for the gap-friction element (element type 12 and 97).
In addition, the COMPOSITE model definition option allows you to input layer information for a
laminated composite material and the ORIENTATION option allows for the definition of the preferred
material directions. A material consisting of multiple components may be defined using the MIXTURE
option.
A brief description of the material models which Marc has the capability of representing is given below.
For additional details, refer to Marc Volume A: User Information.
A. Elastic Behavior
1. Isotropic Elastic Compressible Material This is a material represented by Hookes Law. This
material has a linear relation between stress and strain and its behavior is not path dependent. The
stress strain relations can be expressed as ij = ij kk + 2G ij
where, the Lame constant, and G, the shear modulus, can be expressed as:
= E/((1+)(1-2)) and G = E/2(1+)

E and are the familiar Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio, respectively, and can be specified
using the ISOTROPIC model definition option.
2. Orthotropic Elastic Compressible Material For an isotropic material, every plane is a plane of
symmetry and every direction is an axis of symmetry. An orthotropic material, however, has only
three mutually orthogonal planes of symmetry. With respect to a coordinate system parallel to
these planes, the constitutive law for this material is given by the following more general form of
Hookes Law:

Material Properties
11
22
33
=
12
23
31
21 31
1
-------- ------- -------E 11 E 22 E 33
32
12 1
-------- -------- -------E 11 E 22 E 33
13 23 1
-------- -------- -------E 11 E 22 E 33
1
--------G 12
1
--------G 23
1
--------G 31
11
22
33
12
23
31
Due to symmetry of this compliance matrix, E11 21 = E2212, E2232 = E33 23, and E3313 =
E11 31. Using these relations, a general orthotropic material has nine independent constants: E11,
E22, E33, 12, 23, 31, G12, G23, G31. These nine constants can be specified using the
ORTHOTROPIC option. Note that the inequalities E22 > 232 E33, E11 > 122 E22, and E33 > 312
E11 must be satisfied in order for the orthotropic material to be stable. This is checked by Marc.
3. Anisotropic Elastic Compressible Material This is a material represented by the generalized
Hooke's Law. This material has a linear relation between stress and strain and its behavior is not
path dependent. The stress-strain relation can be expressed as:
ij = Cijkl ekl.
All of the values of C can be specified using either the ANELAS or HOOKLW user subroutine. As
an alternative, the user can supply the compliance matrix in the HOOKLW user subroutine. The
ANISOTROPIC model definition option is used to direct Marc to call these user subroutines when
necessary.
4. Isotropic Incompressible Material Mooney-Rivlin form The nonlinear elastic material can be
represented by a certain class of strain energy functions. The form of this function is:
W = C10 (I1 -3) + C01 (I2 -3) + C11 (I1 -3)(I2 -3) + C20 (I1 -3)2 + C30 (I1 -3)3
where I1, I2 are the first and second invariants of the elastic strain. This strain energy function can
represent the Neo-Hookean materials (C01, C11, C20, and C30 are zero) or Mooney-Rivlin
materials (C11, C20, and C30 are zero). The material has a nonlinear relation between stress and
strain; hence, an incremental procedure must be performed. Alternative energy functions can be
specified via the UENERG user subroutine.
The stress-strain relations can be expressed as
W
ij = --------- .
ij
The constants are supplied by you through the MOONEY option. Note that this material model can
be used to represent large-strain elastic materials.

Material Properties
5. Isotropic Elastic Incompressible Material-Ogden Formulation - Another representation of

nonlinear elastic material is by the Ogden strain energy function. This model can be used to
represent large-strain behavior in elastic materials. For plane stress, displacement elements are
always used. The strain energy function is
W =
n= 1
Note:
-----n- J n 1 n + 2 n + 3 n 3 + 4.5K J 1 / 3 1 2
n
There are two modes for performing rubber (Mooney, Ogden, Arruda Boyce, Gent)
analysis for plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric, or solid analysis.
This mode is set on the ELASTICITY or LARGE STRAIN parameters. If the total
Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements, in this case, must be of the
Herrmann formulation. If the updated Lagrange formulation is invoked, the
elements can have a conventional displacement formulation.
6. Isotropic Incompressible Arruda-Boyce Model - An invariant based model simulating micromechanical behavior of rubber elasticity.
3
4
5
2
1
1
19
519
11
W = nk --- I 1 3 + ---------- I 9 + ------------------2- I 27 + ------------------3- I 81 + ------------------------4- I 243
1
2
20N 1
7000N
673750N
1050N
7. Isotropic Incompressible Gent Model - An invariant based model simulating micro-mechanical

behavior of rubber elasticity.
I1 3
E
W = --- I m 3 log 1 ---------------
6
I
m 3
8. Isotropic Elastic Foam Material - This nonlinear elastic material has the characteristic that it can
have both large strain deviatoric and volumetric behavior. The material model is used in
conjunction with the displacement elements. The strain energy function is
W =
n =1
-----n- 1 n + 2 n + 3 n 3 +
n
n =1
-----n 1 J n
Conventional displacement based elements are always used with the foam material model.
9. Generalized Isotropic Hyperelastic Materials - Generalized strain energy functions which include
the above mentioned Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, Gent models and foam model as
special cases can be defined using the UELASTOMER user subroutine. The MOONEY model
definition option directs Marc to call UELASTOMER for strain-invariant-based energy functions
with volumetric-deviatoric split. The OGDEN model definition option directs Marc to call
UELASTOMER for principal-stretch-based energy functions with volumetric-deviatoric split. The
FOAM model definition option activates UELASTOMER for generalized compressible foam
models of both the invariant-based and the principal-stretch-based.

Material Properties
10. General Anisotropic Nonlinear Elastic Material This can be represented by the hypoelastic
material model. The material has a nonlinear relation between stress and strain; hence, an
incremental procedure must be performed. The stress-strain relation can be expressed as
ij = C ijkl + g ij where Cijkl and gij are functions of elastic strain and temperature. The
HYPOELASTIC model definition option should be used to direct Marc to call the HYPELA2 user
subroutine when necessary or to define the hypoelastic material data.
11. Predefined Nonlinear Elastic Materials The NLELAST option may be used to specify that the
model has nonlinear material behavior of a type that has been implemented in Marc. These models
may be summarized as follows:
a. Nonlinear equivalent stress-equivalent strain representation
b. Youngs modulus function of strain invariants
c. Principal strain-based model
d. Linear elastic with tension/compression limits
e. Bi-modulus linear elastic with tension/compression limits
f. Orthotropic nonlinear
The table driven input method must be used with this option. For further details, see Marc Volume
A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 3: Data Entry, Table Driven Input.
B. Elastic-Plastic Behavior
Elastic-plastic material can be described using a variety of models. The differentiation between these
models is due to:
a. the inclusion or exclusion of elastic effects;
b. the yield function;
c. the flow rule, and
d. the hardening rule.
1. Rigid Plastic Material This is the only material model which excludes the elastic strains. The
capability is based on the iteration for the velocity field in an incompressible, non-Newtonian
fluid. The nonlinear stress-strain relation can be expressed as S ij = G ij . Note that as the
material is incompressible, a traction boundary condition must be specified; otherwise the stress
field is only known to an arbitrary hydrostatic pressure. Only the yield stress need be entered.
2. Elastic-Perfectly-Plastic Material This is a material which behaves elastically until it reaches the
yield stress. The material has no ability to support additional load (in a uniaxial sense) upon yield.
The material has a nonlinear relation between the stress rate and strain rate and is path dependent.
You need only specify the elastic constants and the yield stress. Marc uses the von Mises yield
function and the associated flow law.

Material Properties
3. Elastic-Plastic Isotropic-Hardening Material This is a model which behaves elastically until it

reaches the yield stress. After yielding the material strains or work hardens according to the
isotropic model. The yield surface uniformly expands in all directions with increasing equivalent
plastic strain. The additional information necessary to define the rate of growth of the yield
surface is prescribed through the WORK HARD or TABLE option.
Four new hardening models have been added for modeling the hardening behavior.
n
Power Law Model y = A o + + B

m n
Rate Power Law Model y = A + B
Kumar model = B 0 sinh 1 ---

A
1n
Q nRT
T T room

1 ---------------------------------
Johnson-Cook model y = A + B 1 + C ln --- T melt T room
0
m
4. Elastic-Plastic Kinematic-Hardening Material This is a material whose yield surface behavior

is governed by the kinematic hardening model. In this model, the yield surface translates in stress
space depending upon the change in plastic strain. The rate of translation is prescribed through
the WORK HARD or TABLE option. This option is set through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC
or ANISOTROPIC model definition option.
5. Elastic-Plastic Combined-Hardening Material This is a material whose yield surface behavior
is governed by a combination of both the isotropic and kinematic hardening models. That is, the
yield surface both expands in size and shifts in space. This behavior is given through the WORK
HARD or TABLE option. This option is set through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or
ANISOTROPIC model definition option.
6. Elastic-Plastic-ORNL Hardening This is a model whose yield surface is governed by the ORNL
constitutive theory. This model also allows plastic creep interaction. This option is set through the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC model definition option.
7. The Chaboche model is a combined isotropic/kinematic hardening model.
8. Anisotropic Yield Surface It is also possible to use the anisotropic yield function of Hill or
Barlat. For 3-D models, these yield surfaces are noncircular when observed in deviatoric stress
space. These anisotropic yield functions may be used in conjunction with isotropic, orthotropic,
or anisotropic elasticity. In addition, the yield function can be dependent upon the strain rate; this
can be specified by using the STRAIN RATE or TABLE option.
9. Elastic-Plastic Material with Mohr-Coulomb Yield Surface is a model which allows the
representation of materials in which the yield surface is dependent on the hydrostatic stress. It is
appropriate for modeling soils. The yield function dependence on the shear stress is given using
the WORK HARD or TABLE option; the dependence on the hydrostatic stress is given in the
ISOTROPIC option. This option is set through the ISOTROPIC model definition option.
10. The yield surface can also be modified based upon the Gurson model for void damage. In this
model, a modified von Mises criteria, with hydrostatic stress and void dependency, is used. The
DAMAGE option is used to activate this model.

Material Properties
11. A special viscoplastic model for powder materials can be entered through the POWDER option.
In this model, the material properties are also dependent on the relative density of the material.
These materials are always assumed to be isotropic.
12. A general viscoplastic option is available for materials that are modeled using unified creepplasticity rules. In this procedure, the elastic properties are defined in either the ISOTROPIC or
ORTHOTROPIC option and the inelastic properties are provided through the UVSCPL user
subroutine.
13. Superplastic material behavior can be modeled using Power Law and Rate Power Law defined in
ISOTROPIC model definition option.
C. Temperature Dependent Material Properties

All of the parameters (except density) necessary to represent the material properties can be given as a
function of temperature. These effects are specified using the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS, ORTHO
TEMP or TABLE option.
D. Relative Density Dependent Material Properties

In powder materials, the materials can be given as a function of the relative density where a relative
density of 1.0 implies a fully compacted material. This data is entered through the DENSITY EFFECTS
option.
E. Low Tension Material

In addition to using the ISOTROPIC model definition option for the input of Youngs modulus, Poissons
ratio, yield stress, etc., the CRACK DATA model definition option must be used for the specification of
critical cracking stress, tension-softening modulus, crushing strain and shear retention factor. These data
can be alternatively specified by the UCRACK and TENSOF user subroutines. Detailed discussion on low
tension material can be found in Marc Volume A: User Information.
F. Soil Materials
When performing a coupled fluid-soil analysis, the soil material can be modeled either as a linear elastic
material, a nonlinear elastic material or using the modified CAM-CLAY model.
G. Material Dependent Failure Criteria

Ten failure criteria are available in Marc. They are maximum stress, maximum strain, Tsai-Wu, Hoffman,
Hill, Puck, and three variations of the Hashin failure criteria. Detailed discussion on failure criteria can
be found in Marc Volume A: User Information. During each analysis, up to three fail criteria can be
selected; failure indices are calculated and printed for every integration point. The model definition
option FAIL DATA (or user subroutine UFAIL) is used for the input of failure criteria data.

Material Properties
H. Characterization of Gap Elements

The GAP DATA model definition option allows for the input of gap closure distance, gap elastic stiffness,
contact coefficient of friction and momentum ratio. Detailed discussion on gap elements (elements 12
and 97) can be found in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
I. Laminated Composite
A laminated composite is a material made of several thin layers of separate materials with different
material behavior, layer thicknesses, and orientations from one layer to the next. To model laminated
composite plates, shells, or beams with Marc, use the COMPOSITE option. In this option, three quantities
are specified on a layer-by-layer basis: material identification number, layer thickness, and ply angle. The
entire set of data (a composite group) is then associated with a list of elements. For each individual
layer, all of the above mentioned constitutive laws can be used with the exception of the low tension
material. The layer thickness can be constant or variable (in the case of variable total thickness elements),
and the ply angle can change from one layer to the next. The orientation of the 0 ply angle within each
element is defined in the ORIENTATION option. These elements are used in conjunction with shell
elements, composite continuum elements, or the solid shell element. For more information on the specific
assumptions employed by the COMPOSITE option, see Marc Volume A: User Information.
J. Material Preferred Direction

Every element type in Marc has a default orientation (that is, a default coordinate system) within which
element stress-strain calculations take place. This system is also assumed to be the coordinate system of
material symmetry. This is especially important for nonisotropic materials (orthotropic, anisotropic, or
composite materials). With the ORIENTATION option, you specify the orientation of the material axes of
symmetry (or the 0 ply angle line, if composite) in one of five different ways: 1) as a specific angle offset
from an element edge, 2) as a specific angle offset from the line created by two intersecting planes, 3) as
a particular coordinate system specified by user-supplied unit vectors, 4) by referencing a coordinate
system defined by the COORD SYSTEM option, or 5) as specified by the ORIENT user subroutine. For
more information on these options, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
K. Material Property (Element) Coordinate Systems in Marc

When defining material properties in Marc, you should be aware of the three coordinate systems used by
Marc. They are:
Global Coordinate System
The material data supplied in the ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC options are always considered to be
defined with respect to the material principal axes of symmetry.
For continuum problems (that is, those using 2-D or 3-D solid elements), this coordinate system is
aligned (by default) with the global xyz coordinate system. (For truss, beam and shell problems, see Marc
(or Local) Coordinate System.) This is not normally a problem for isotropic materials since every

Material Properties
direction is then a principal direction. For orthotropic materials, however, the material principal
coordinates are seldom aligned with the global coordinates. For this reason, a second coordinate system
is needed.
User-defined (or preferred) Coordinate System
If the material principal axes of symmetry are not aligned with the global coordinate system, a second
coordinate system is used. This is the user-defined preferred coordinate system. This coordinate system
is usually taken to be coincident with the material principal coordinates. The orientation of the preferred
coordinate system and, hence, of the material principal axes, is defined by the ORIENTATION option on
an element-by-element basis. In this way, you can completely define through the input file, the material
data and orientation of a general orthotropic material.
Marc (or Local) Coordinate System
For truss, beam, and shell problems, the material principal axes of symmetry are aligned (by default) with
special local element dependent coordinate systems. For example, for shell element 72, these local
coordinates are the v 1 v 2 v 3 surface coordinates so that material property data are assumed to begin with
respect to these v 1 v 2 v 3 coordinates. For isotropic materials, this is not normally a problem. For
orthotropic materials, the material principal axes cannot be aligned with the v 1 v 2 v 3 axes. As in
continuum problems, the ORIENTATION option is used to define a second set of preferred coordinates.
This allows you to arbitrarily orient orthotropic materials in shells with local coordinates.
Composite Shells
In composite shells, the orientation of the materials in each shell layer can vary from layer to layer. In
this case, the ORIENTATION option is used to locate the 00 ply angle direction in the shell surface. (If the
ORIENTATION option is omitted, the 00 ply angle direction coincides with the v 1 axis. See previous
section.) For each layer, additional ply angle offsets from this 00 ply angle direction are given in the
COMPOSITE option. This allows you to arbitrarily orient an arbitrary composite layup in shells with
local coordinates.
Numerical Procedure for LARGE STRAIN
Tables 3-12 and 3-13 use these keywords:
A
Additive strain rate decomposition
Multiplicative strain rate decomposition
TL
Total Lagrange
UL
Updated Lagrange
SS
Small Strain
LS
Large Strain (logarithmic)
GL
Green-Lagrange

Material Properties
Table 3-12
Influence of LARGE STRAIN, 1 on Numerical Procedure
Material Option
ISOTROPIC
Plane strain,
Axisymmetric,
Solid Displacement
Based
Plane strain,
Axisymmetri
c, Solid Herrmann
Based
UL - LS - A
TL - GL - A
TL -GL
ISOTROPIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
UL-LS-M
KINEMATIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
COMBINED
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
CHABOCHE
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
HILL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
BARLAT
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
LIN MOHRC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
PBL MOHRC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
BUY MOHRC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
ORNL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
GEN-PLAST
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
VISCO-PLAS
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
RIGID
SS (membranes)
SS-UL
SS-UL
IMPL-CREEP
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
ELASTIC
UL - LS - A
TL - GL - A
TL -GL
ISOTROPIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
KINEMATIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
COMBINED
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
HILL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
BARLAT
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
ORNL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
VISCO-PLAS
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
Suboption 1
ELASTIC
VON MISES
ORTHOTROPIC
VON MISES
Notes:
Suboption
2
Truss, Beam,
Plane stress,
Membrane,
Shell
If cracking requested on ISOTROPIC option, then it always uses UL-LS-A, and Herrmann elements are
not supported.
If Gurson damage model requested on DAMAGE then it always uses UL-LS-A, and Herrmann elements
are not supported

Material Properties
Table 3-12
Influence of LARGE STRAIN, 1 on Numerical Procedure (continued)

Plane strain,
Axisymmetric,
Solid Displacement
Based
Plane strain,
Axisymmetri
c, Solid Herrmann
Based
UL - LS - A
TL - GL - A
TL -GL
ISOTROPIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
KINEMATIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
COMBINED
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
HILL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
BARLAT
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
ORNL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
VISCO-PLAS
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
Nastran
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL-LS
Invariant
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL-LS
Principal strain
UL-LS
UL-LS
N/A
Linear elastic w /limit
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL-LS
Bi-modulus w/limit
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL-LS
orthotropic nonlin.
UL-LS
UL-LS
N/A
HYPOELASTIC
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL-LS
MOONEY
TL -GL
UL - LS
UL - LS
ARRUDA-BOYCE
TL -GL
UL - LS
UL - LS
GENT
TL -GL
UL - LS
UL - LS
OGDEN
TL -GL
UL - LS
UL - LS
Material Option
ANISOTROPIC
Suboption 1
ELASTIC
VON MISES
NLELAST
Notes:
Suboption
2
Truss, Beam,
Plane stress,
Membrane,
Shell
not supported.
are not supported

Material Properties
Table 3-12
Influence of LARGE STRAIN, 1 on Numerical Procedure (continued)
Material Option
Suboption 1
Suboption
2
Truss, Beam,
Plane stress,
Membrane,
Shell
Plane strain,
Axisymmetric,
Solid Displacement
Based
Plane strain,
Axisymmetri
c, Solid Herrmann
Based
FOAM
TL -GL
UL - LS
N/A
GASKET
N/A
UL - LS
N/A
SHAPE MEMORY THERMO-MECH
UL - LS -A
UL - LS -A
N/A
N/A
UL - LS -M
N/A
COMPOSITE
UL - LS - no finite
UL -LS
N/A
POWDER
N/A
UL -LS-A
N/A
SOIL
N/A
UL - LS - A
N/A
COHESIVE
N/A
UL-LS
N/A
GASKET
N/A
UL-LS
N/A
AURICCHIO
Notes:
not supported.
are not supported

Material Properties
Table 3-13
Influence LARGE STRAIN, 2 on Numerical Procedure
Material Option
ISOTROPIC
Suboption 1
ELASTIC
ORTHOTROIC
Plane strain, Plane strain,

Axisymmetr Axisymmetric,
ic, Solid Solid Displaceme
Herrmann
nt Based
Based
UL - LS - M
UL - LS - M
TL - GL
ISOTROPIC
UL - LS - M
UL - LS - M
UL-LS-M
KINEMATIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
COMBINED
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
CHABOCHE
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
HILL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
BARLAT
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
LIN MOHRC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
PBL MOHRC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
BUY MOHRC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
ORNL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
GEN-PLAST
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
VISCO-PLAS
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
RIGID
SS (membranes)
SS-UL
SS-UL
IMPL-CREEP
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
ELASTIC
UL - LS
UL - LS
TL - GL
ISOTROPIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
KINEMATIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
COMBINED
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
HILL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
BARLAT
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
ORNL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
VISCO-PLAS
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
VON MISES
VON MISES
Notes:
Suboption
2
Truss, Beam,
Plane stress,
Membrane,
Shell
not supported.
are not supported

Material Properties
Table 3-13
Influence LARGE STRAIN, 2 on Numerical Procedure (continued)
Material Option
ANISOTROPIC
Suboption 1
Suboption
2
ELASTIC
Truss, Beam,
Plane stress,
Membrane,
Shell

Herrmann
nt Based
Based
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
TL - GL
ISOTROPIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
KINEMATIC
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
COMBINED
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
HILL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
BARLAT
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
ORNL
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
VISCO-PLAS
UL - LS - A
UL - LS - A
N/A
Nastran
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL - LS
Invariant
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL - LS
Principal strain
UL-LS
UL-LS
N/A
Linear elastic w /limit
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL - LS
Bi-modulus w/limit
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL - LS
orthotropic nonlin.
UL-LS
UL-LS
N/A
HYPOELASTIC
UL-LS
UL-LS
UL-LS
MOONEY
TL -GL
UL-LS
UL-LS
ARRUDA-BOYCE
TL -GL
UL-LS
UL-LS
GENT
TL -GL
UL-LS
UL-LS
OGDEN
TL -GL
UL-LS
UL-LS
Notes:
not supported.
VON MISES
NLELAST
are not supported

Material Properties
Table 3-13
Influence LARGE STRAIN, 2 on Numerical Procedure (continued)
Material Option
Suboption 1
Suboption
2
Truss, Beam,
Plane stress,
Membrane,
Shell

Herrmann
nt Based
Based
FOAM
TL -GL
UL-LS
N/A
GASKET
N/A
UL - LS
N/A
SHAPE MEMORY THERMO-MECH
UL - LS -A
UL - LS -A
N/A
N/A
UL - LS -M
N/A
AURICCHIO
COMPOSITE
UL - LS - no finite UL-LS
N/A
POWDER
N/A
UL -LS-A
N/A
SOIL
N/A
UL - LS - A
N/A
COHESIVE
N/A
UL-LS
N/A
GASKET
N/A
UL-LS
N/A
Notes:
not supported.
are not supported
737 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress)

Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials
Stress)
Description
This option allows you to define material properties, a yield criterion, and a strain hardening law for an
isotropic material. You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Defaults for this option are von Mises yield criterion, isotropic strain hardening law (with a slope of 0.0),
and an equivalent yield stress of 1020. Therefore, the default is an elastic nonyielding isotropic material.
See Tables 3-12 and 3-13 to determine procedure used when the LARGE STRAIN parameter is invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ISOTROPIC.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of isotropic material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 15 are repeated as a set, once for each set of isotropic material defined.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.),for cross-referencing CREEP,

CRACK DATA, FAIL DATA, etc. and user subroutines.
6-15
2nd
Enter one of the following yield criteria:

ELASTIC
Purely elastic material
VON MISES
von Mises (Default)
HILL
Hills (1948) Yield.
BARLAT
Barlats (1991) Yield.
LIN MOHRC
Linear Mohr-Coulomb
PBL MOHRC
Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb
BUY MOHRC
Buyukozturk Concrete Model
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress) 738

Format
Fixed
16-25
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
NORM ORNL
Normal ORNL
CRMO ORNL
2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL
REVP ORNL
Reversed Plasticity ORNL
ARST ORNL
Full alpha reset ORNL.
GEN-PLAST
Generalized Plasticity Model
VISCO PLAS
Viscoplastic model through the UVSCPL

user subroutine
RIGID
Rigid-plastic material, no elasticity,

von Mises yield
IMPL CREEP
Implicit creep model, both plasticity and creep,

von Mises criterion.
GEN-ANIYLD
Generalized anisotropic yield surface via

UANISYLD user subroutine.
Enter one of the following hardening rules:

ISOTROPIC
Isotropic hardening (Default)
KINEMATIC
Kinematic hardening
COMBINED
Combined (isotropic/kinematic) hardening.
CHABOCHE
Nonlinear (in)viscid isotropic-kinematic

hardening.
POWER LAW
RATE POWER LAW

JOHNSON-COOK
KUMAR
For superplastic forming analyses (SPF), only POWER LAW is available

as hardening rule.
26-30
4th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
5th
Enter 1 to turn on concrete cracking.
36-40
6th
Enter 4 if Marc database is used for flow stress.

Enter 5 if MATILDA database is used.
Enter 6 if data read in SI-mm from input file.
Enter -6 if data read in SI-mm from database.
Enter 7 if data read in SI-m from input file.
Enter -7 if data read in SI-m from database.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 8 if data read in US from input file.
Enter -8 if data read in US from database.
41-45
7th
Number of viscoplastic parameters to be read through data block 11 or the

number of phases in this material.
46-57
8th
Enter the material name to cross-reference with material database.
4th data block

The data entered in the following blocks are the reference values that are used with tables or
are constants.
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus (Not required for RIGID).
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio (Not required for RIGID).
21-30
3rd
Mass density (stress analysis).
31-40
4th
Coefficient of thermal expansion.
41-50
5th
Equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress. (For Mohr-Coulomb behavior,

this is at zero hydrostatic stress. For implicit viscoplasticity, back stress.)
51-60
6th
For ORNL yield criteria, equivalent 10th cycle tensile yield stress. (For
Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, - parameter.)
For von Mises, Hill, and Barlat criteria with combined hardening, enter the
kinematic hardening fraction (F: 0 to 1) F = 0: Pure isotropic hardening,
F = 1: pure kinematic hardening, 0 < F < 1: combined hardening. This is
only available if the PLASTICITY,4 parameter is used.
For Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, - parameter.
For implicit creep, equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.
61-70
7th
Enter the cost per unit volume.
71-80
8th
Enter the cost per unit mass.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for Youngs modulus.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for Poissons ratio.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for mass density.
16-20
4th
Table ID for coefficient of thermal expansion.
21-25
5th
Table ID for equivalent tensile yield stress.
26-30
6th
Table ID for ORNL 10th cycle yield stress or Mohr Coulomb

- parameter.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6a data block
Necessary only for Hill and Barlats yield criteria.
1-10
1st
YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat)
11-20
2nd
YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat)
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
YRSHR1 (for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat)
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
YRSHR3 (for Hill)
6aa data block

Note:
In this release, table IDs are input but not used.
1-5
1st
Table ID for YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat)
6-10
2nd
Table ID for YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat)
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Table ID for YRSHR1 (for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat)
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Table ID for YRSHR3 (for Hill)
6b data block
The following blocks are only used for CHABOCHE hardening rule.
1-10
1st
R0 for isotropic hardening.
11-20
2nd
R for isotropic hardening (Q0 in case of using plastic-strain-range

memorization, see 6c data block)
21-30
3rd
b coefficient for isotropic hardening.
31-40
4th
C coefficient for kinematic hardening.
41-50
5th
coefficient for kinematic hardening.
51-60
6th
K value for viscosity model.
61-70
7th
n coefficient for viscosity model.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6bb data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for R0 for isotropic hardening.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for R for isotropic hardening (Q0 in case of using plastic-strainrange memorization).
11-15
3rd
Table ID for b coefficient for isotropic hardening.
16-20
4th
Table ID for C coefficient for kinematic hardening.
21-25
5th
Table ID for coefficient for kinematic hardening.
26-30
6th
Table ID for K value for viscosity model.
31-35
7th
Table ID for n coefficient for viscosity model.
6c data block
Necessary only for CHABOCHE hardening rule with plastic-strain-range memorization. Notice that if
no memorization is required, then provide a blank line.
1-10
1st
Qm coefficient for isotropic hardening.
11-20
2nd
coefficient for isotropic hardening.
21-30
3rd
coefficient to introduce progressive memory.
6cc data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for Qm coefficient for isotropic hardening.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for coefficient for isotropic hardening.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for coefficient to introduce progressive memory.
7th data block

Necessary only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis
1-10
1st
Thermal conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
Mass density (heat transfer analysis).
31-40
4th
Electrical resistance (Joule Analysis).
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
51-60
6th
Enter the enthalpy of formation.
61-70
7th
Enter the reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

Necessary only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
1-5
1st
Table ID for thermal conductivity.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for specific heat.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Table ID for electrical resistivity.
21-25
5th
Table ID for emissivity.
26-30
6th
Table ID for enthalpy of formation.
9th data block

Necessary only in a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis.
1-10
1st
Permittivity constant.
10th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for permittivity constant.
11th data block

The following blocks are only used if viscoplastic material and the seventh field of data block 3 is
entered. Enter a list of viscoplastic parameters, 8 fields per data line.
1-10
1st
Enter the first viscoplastic parameter
11-20
2nd
Enter the second viscoplastic parameter.
12a data block

The following two blocks (12a and 12b) are read in for Power Law or Rate Power Law model.
m

m n
Rate Power Law Model y = A + B 0

If the value is less than the minimum yield stress, the minimum yield stress is used.
1-10
1st
Enter coefficient A.
11-20
2nd
Enter exponent m.
21-30
3rd
Enter coefficient B.
31-40
4th
Enter exponent n.
41-50
5th
Enter 0 for the Rate Power Law Model or 0 for the Power Law Model.
If 0 is entered, 0
E
= ---
A
1
------------m1
and 0 = 0

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
12b data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the coefficient A.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the exponent m.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the coefficient B.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the exponent n.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for the 0 .
The following blocks (13a and 13b) are read in for Kumar model only.
= B 0 sinh
1n
Q nRT
----p-
e
A
B3
A is a constant or ln A = B 1 + B 2 p
B3
n is a constant or n = B 4 + B 5 p
The activation energy (Q) is specified in the MATERIAL DATA option.

The universal gas constant (R) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
13a data block
1-10
1st
Enter coefficient B0.
11-20
2nd
Enter coefficient A; if A = 0, then B1, B2, and B3 is used.
21-30
3rd
Enter B1.
31-40
4th
Enter B2.
41-50
5th
Enter B3.
51-55
6th
Enter the table ID for the coefficient B0.
56-60
7th
Enter the table ID for the coefficient A.
13b data block

1-10
1st
Enter coefficient n; if n = 0, then B4, B5, and B6 is used.
11-20
2nd
Enter B4.
21-30
3rd
Enter B5.
31-40
4th
Enter B6.
41-45
5th
Enter the table ID for the exponent n.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
14th data block

The following block is read in for the Johnson-Cook model.
T T room m
p
n
------------------------------- y = A + B p 1 + C ln --- - 1 T

melt T room
0
where T is the current temperature, T melt is the material melt temperature, and T room is the ambient
temperature. p is the effective plastic strain, p is the effective plastic strain rate and 0 is the reference
strain rate. A , B , C , n , and m are constants.
1-10
1st
Enter A.
11-20
2nd
Enter B.
21-30
3rd
Enter n.
31-40
4th
Enter C.
41-50
5th
Enter m (default is 1.0)
51-60
6th
Enter T melt .
61-70
7th
Enter T room .
71-80
8th
Enter 0 (default is 1.0s 1 ).
15th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with this material. (Do not enter
composite elements which use this material in its layers.)
745 ISOTROPIC (Stress)

ISOTROPIC (Stress)
input style.
Description
isotropic material. You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS
model definition.
Defaults for this option are von Mises yield criterion, isotropic strain hardening law (with a slope of 0.0
if the WORK HARD model definition is omitted), and an equivalent yield stress of 1020. Therefore, the
default is an elastic nonyielding isotropic material.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 12 are repeated as a set, once for each set of isotropic material defined.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.),for cross-referencing

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS and WORK HARD data.
6-15
2nd

ELASTIC
VON MISES
von Mises (Default)
HILL
Hills (1948) Yield.
BARLAT
LIN MOHRC
Linear Mohr-Coulomb
ISOTROPIC (Stress) 746

Format
Fixed
16-25
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
PBL MOHRC
BUY MOHRC
Buyukozturk Concrete Model
NORM ORNL
Normal ORNL
CRMO ORNL
2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL.
REVP ORNL
Reversed Plasticity ORNL.
ARST ORNL
GEN-PLAST
Generalized Plasticity Model.
VISCO PLAS
Viscoplastic model through the UVSCPL user

subroutine.
RIGID
Rigid-plastic material, no elasticity, von Mises

yield.
IMPL CREEP
Implicit creep model, both plasticity and creep,

von Mises criterion.
GEN-ANIYLD


ISOTROPIC
KINEMATIC
Kinematic hardening
COMBINED
CHABOCHE
Nonlinear (in)viscid isotropic-kinematic

hardening.
POWER LAW
RATE POWER LAW

JOHNSON-COOK
KUMAR
For superplastic forming analyses (SPF), only POWER LAW and RATE
POWER LAW are available as hardening rules.
26-30
4th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
5th
Enter 1 to turn on concrete cracking.
36-40
6th


Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-45
7th
Number of viscoplastic parameters to be read through the 8th data block.
46-55
8th
Enter the material name to cross-reference with material data base for
temperature dependent properties, strain rate, and work hardening effects.
4th data block

The data entered in the following blocks should be the values at the lowest temperature expected during
an analysis, not necessarily at the stress-free temperature.
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus (Not required for RIGID).
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio (Not required for RIGID).
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.

For Mohr-Coulomb behavior, this is at zero hydrostatic stress.
For implicit creep, back stress.
51-60
6th
For ORNL yield criteria, equivalent 10th cycle tensile yield stress.
For Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, - parameter.
For implicit creep, equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
5a data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
YRSHR3 (for Hill)
5b data block
1-10
1st
R0 for isotropic hardening.
11-20
2nd
R for isotropic hardening (Q0 in case of using plastic-strain-range

memorization, see 5c data block)
21-30
3rd
b coefficient for isotropic hardening.
31-40
4th
C coefficient for kinematic hardening.
41-50
5th
coefficient for kinematic hardening.
51-60
6th
K value for viscosity model.
61-70
7th
n coefficient for viscosity model.
5c data block
1-10
1st
Qm coefficient for isotropic hardening.
11-20
2nd
coefficient for isotropic hardening.
21-30
3rd
coefficient to introduce progressive memory.
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Resistivity (if Joule analysis)
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
7th data block

1-10
1st

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

The following blocks are only used if viscoplastic material and the seventh field of data block 3 is
greater than zero. Enter a list of viscoplastic parameters, 8 fields per data line.
1-10
1st
Enter the first viscoplastic parameter
11-20
2nd
Enter the second viscoplastic parameter.
9th data block

The following block is read in for Power Law or Rate Power Law model.
m

m n
Rate Power Law Model y = A + B 0

If the value is less than the minimum yield stress, the minimum yield stress is used.
1-10
1st
Enter coefficient A.
11-20
2nd
Enter exponent m.
21-30
3rd
Enter coefficient B.
31-40
4th
Enter exponent n.
41-50
5th
Enter 0 for the Rate Power Law Model or 0 for the Power Law Model.
If 0 is entered, 0
E
= ---
A
1
------------m1
and 0 = 0
The following blocks (10a and 10b) are read in for Kumar model only.
= B 0 sinh
1n
Q nRT
----p-
e
A
B3
A is a constant or ln A = B 1 + B 2 p
B3
n is a constant or n = B 4 + B 5 p
The activation energy (Q) is specified in the MATERIAL DATA option.

The universal gas constant (R) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
10a data block
1-10
1st
Enter coefficient B0.
11-20
2nd
Enter coefficient A; if A = 0, then B1, B2, and B3 is used.
21-30
3rd
Enter B1.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
Enter B2.
41-50
5th
Enter B3.
10b data block

1-10
1st
Enter coefficient n; if n = 0, then B4, B5, and B6 is used.
11-20
2nd
Enter B4.
21-30
3rd
Enter B5.
31-40
4th
Enter B6.
11th data block

The following block is read in for the Johnson-Cook model.
T T room m
p
n
------------------------------- y = A + B p 1 + C ln --- - 1 T

melt T room
0
where T is the current temperature, T melt is the material melt temperature, and T room is the ambient
temperature. p is the effective plastic strain, p is the effective plastic strain rate and 0 is the reference
strain rate. A , B , C , n , and m are constants.
1-10
1st
Enter A.
11-20
2nd
Enter B.
21-30
3rd
Enter n.
31-40
4th
Enter C.
41-50
5th
Enter m (default is 1.0)
51-60
6th
Enter T melt .
61-70
7th
Enter T room .
71-80
8th
Enter 0 (default is 1.0s 1 ).
12th data block

751 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)

Define Mechanical Data for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE

Input - Mechanical)
Description
orthotropic material. You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the TABLE model definition option.
Defaults for this option are von Mises yield criterion, isotropic strain hardening law (with a slope of 0, if
the WORK HARD model definition is omitted), and an equivalent yield stress of 1020. Therefore, the
default is an elastic nonyielding orthotropic material.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ORTHOTROPI.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of orthotropic material data to follow.
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 17 are entered as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.); for cross-referencing

CREEP, FAIL DATA, etc., and user subroutines.
6-15
2nd

ELASTIC
VON MISES
von Mises (Default)
HILL
Hills (1948) Yield.
BARLAT
NORM ORNL
Normal ORNL
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) 752

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
CRMO ORNL
2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL
REVP ORNL
ARST ORNL
Full alpha reset ORNL
VISCO PLAS

user subroutine.
GEN-ANIYLD Generalized anisotropic yield surface via UANISYLD

user subroutine.
16-25
3rd

ISOTROPIC
KINEMATIC
Kinematic hardening
COMBINED
26-30
4th
IANELS flag, enter 1 to call the ANELAS, HOOKLW ANPLAS, ANEXP,

ANKOND, and ORIENT user subroutines.
31-35
5th
Not used, enter 0.
36-40
6th

41-45
7th
Number of viscoplastic parameters to be read through data block 7b or the

number of phases in this material.
46-57
8th
Notes: Since all material properties in an orthotropic material are independent, it is your
responsibility to enter all the data required to match the dimension of the stress-strain law of
the elements listed for this material (See Marc Volume B: Element Library, if necessary). No
defaults for this data are provided by Marc.
The data entered in the following data lines are the reference values that are used with tables
or are constants.
These values are with respect to the user coordinate (1, 2, 3) system.
In a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, the electrostatic material model defaults to isotropic
electrostatic behavior.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
E11 Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
E22 Youngs modulus.
21-30
3rd
E33 Youngs modulus.
31-40
4th
12 Poissons ratio.
41-50
5th
23 Poissons ratio.
51-60
6th
31 Poissons ratio.
61-70
7th
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for E11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for E22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for E33.
16-20
4th
Table ID for 12.
21-25
5th
Table ID for 23.
26-30
6th
Table ID for 31.
31-35
7th
6th data block

1-10
1st
G12 Shear modulus.
11-20
2nd
G23 Shear modulus.
21-30
3rd
G31 Shear modulus.
31-40
4th
11 Coefficients of thermal expansion.
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
7th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for G12.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for G23.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for G31.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Table ID for 11.
21-25
5th
Table ID for 22.
26-30
6th
Table ID for 33.
8th data block

1-10
1st
Equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress. Default: 1020. (For implicit
viscoplasticity, back stress.)
11-20
2nd
For ORNL, 10th cycle equivalent yield stress.

21-30
3rd
YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat).
30-40
4th
YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat).
41-50
5th
YRDIR3 (for Hill) or C2 (for Barlat).
51-60
6th
YRSHR1(for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat).
61-70
7th
YRSHR2 (for Hill) or C6 (for Barlat).
71-80
8th
YRSHR3 (for Hill)
9th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for tensile yield stress.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for ORNL 10th cycle yield stress.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat).
16-20
4th
Table ID for YRDIR2 (for Hill) or C1 (for Barlat).
21-25
5th
Table ID for YRDIR3 (for Hill) or C2 (for Barlat).
26-30
6th
Table ID for YRSHR1 (for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat).
31-35
7th
Table ID for YRSHR2 (for Hill) or C6 (for Barlat).
36-40
8th
Table ID for YRSHR3 (for Hill).
10th data block

1-10
1st
K11 Thermal conductivities.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Specific heat
51-60
6th
R11 If Joule heating analysis, resistivity.
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
11th data block

Necessary only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis and the input format is 2 or greater.
1-5
1st
Table ID for K11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for K22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for K33.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Table ID for R11.
31-35
7th
Table ID for R22.
36-40
8th
Table ID for R33.
12th data block

Necessary only if coupled thermal-stress.
1-10
1st
Emissivity
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
13th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
2nd
Table ID for reference temperature of enthalpy of formation.
14th data block

Necessary only in a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis
1-10
1st
11 Electrical permittivity.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
15th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for 11 Electrical permittivity.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16th data block

The following data blocks are only required if viscoplastic material and the seventh field, data block 3,
is entered. Enter 8 fields per block.
1-10
1st
Enter first viscoplastic parameter.
11-20
2nd
Enter second viscoplastic parameter.
17th data block

757 ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical)

input style.
Description
orthotropic material. You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the ORTHO TEMP model definition.
Defaults for this option are von Mises yield criterion, isotropic strain hardening law (with a slope of 0. if
the WORK HARD model definition is omitted), and an equivalent yield stress of 1020. Therefore, the
default is an elastic nonyielding orthotropic material.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3-8 are entered as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.); for cross-referencing

ORTHO TEMP, WORK HARD data and user subroutines.
6-15
2nd

ELASTIC
VON MISES
von Mises (Default)
HILL
Hills (1948) Yield.
BARLAT
NORM ORNL
Normal ORNL
CRMO ORNL 2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL.
ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical) 758

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
REVP ORNL
Reversed Plasticity ORNL.
ARST ORNL
VISCO PLAS

user subroutine.
GEN-ANIYLD Generalized anisotropic yield surface via UANISYLD

user subroutine.
16-25
3rd

ISOTROPIC
KINEMATIC
Kinematic hardening
COMBINED
26-30
4th
IANELS flag, enter 1 to call the ANELAS, HOOKLW, ANPLAS, ANEXP,

ANKOND, and ORIENT user subroutines.
31-35
5th
Not used, enter 0.
36-40
6th
Not used, enter 0.
41-45
7th
Number of viscoplastic parameters to be read through data block 7b.
46-55
8th
temperature dependent properties, strain rate, and work hardening effects.
Notes: Since all material properties in an orthotropic material are independent, it is your
responsibility to enter all the data required to match the dimension of the stress-strain law of
the elements listed for this material (See Marc Volume B: Element Library, if necessary). No
The data entered in the following data lines should be the values at the lowest temperature
expected during an analysis, not necessarily at the stress-free temperature.
4th data block
1-10
1st
E11 Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
E22 Youngs modulus.
21-30
3rd
E33 Youngs modulus.
31-40
4th
12 Poissons ratio.
41-50
5th
23 Poissons ratio.
51-60
6th
31 Poissons ratio.
61-70
7th
759 ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
G12 Shear modulus.
11-20
2nd
G23 Shear modulus.
21-30
3rd
G31 Shear modulus.
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
6th data block

1-10
1st
Equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress. Default: 1020. (For implicit
viscoplasticity, back stress.)
11-20
2nd
For ORNL, 10th cycle equivalent yield stress.

21-30
3rd
30-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
YRSHR1(for Hill) or C3 (for Barlat)
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
YRSHR3 (for Hill)
7th data block

Necessary only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Specific heat
ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical) 760

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
R11 Resistivities (if Joule analysis).
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
7b data block
Necessary only if coupled and radiation analysis.
1-10
1st
Emissivity
7c data block
1-10
1st
11 Electric permittivity.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
7d data block
The following data block is only required if viscoplastic material and the seventh field, data block 3, is
entered. Enter 8 fields per block.
1-10
1st
Enter first viscoplastic parameter.
11-20
2nd
Enter second viscoplastic parameter.
Note:
Data block 7d is provided for possible future expansion. Implicit viscoplasticity (through the
UVSCPL user subroutine) or implicit creep is not currently supported for
orthotropic materials.
8th data block
composite elements which use this material in its layers.).
761 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)

Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis

Mechanical)
Description
A general temperature dependent orthotropic material model is available through the Marc input file by
the use of the ORTHOTROPIC and TABLE options. If a more general model is needed, you can supply
such a model through the ANELAS, HOOKLW, ANEXP, ANKOND, ANPLAS, or ORIENT user subroutines.
Two ways to request a call to these subroutines are shown below:
Use the flag (3rd data block, fourth field) on the ORTHOTROPIC option to modify the material
data entered there.

Use the ANISOTROPIC model definition option to call these subroutines.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ANISOTROPI.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of anisotropic material data sets to follow.
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are repeated as a set NSET times.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing CREEP,

FAIL DATA, etc., and user subroutines.
6-15
2nd

ELASTIC
VON MISES
von Mises (Default)
HILL
Hills (1948) Yield.
BARLAT
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) 762

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
NORM ORNL
Normal ORNL
CRMO ORNL
2-1.3 Cr-Mo ORNL
REVP ORNL
ARST ORNL
GEN-ANIYLD
16-25
26-30
3rd
4th


ISOTROPIC
KINEMATIC
Kinematic hardening
COMBINED
Enter 1 if the ANELAS, ANEXP, ANPLAS, and HOOKLW user subroutines

are to be called.
Enter 2 if the anisotropic stress strain law, etc., is to be entered in data
blocks (6th data block).
31-35
5th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
6th

41-45
7th
Not used; enter 0.
46-57
8th
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Equivalent (von Mises) yield stress.
21-30
3rd
If ORNL yielding, 10th cycle yield stress.

For von Mises, Hill, and Barlat criteria with combined hardening, enter
the kinematic hardening fraction (F: 0 to 1) F = 0: Pure isotropic
hardening, F = 1: pure kinematic hardening, 0 < F < 1: combined
hardening. This is only available if the PLASTICITY,4 parameter is used.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Specific Heat.
51-60
6th
Electrical resistance.
61-70
7th
Cost of material per unit volume (optional).
71-80
8th
Cost of material per unit mass (optional).
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Table ID for equivalent yield stress.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for ORNL 10th cycle yield.
16-20
4th
Table ID for mass density (heat transfer).
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Table ID for electrical resistance.
Data blocks 6a to 6ee are only required if the fourth field of the 3rd data block is 2.
6a data block
1-10
1st
C11
11-20
2nd
C12
21-30
3rd
C13
31-40
4th
C14
41-50
5th
C15
51-60
6th
C16
61-70
7th
C22
71-80
8th
C23
6aa data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for C11
6-10
2nd
Table ID for C12
11-15
3rd
Table ID for C13
16-20
4th
Table ID for C14
21-25
5th
Table ID for C15

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
Table ID for C16
31-35
7th
Table ID for C22
36-40
8th
Table ID for C23
6b data block
1-10
1st
C24
11-20
2nd
C25
21-30
3rd
C26
31-40
4th
C33
41-50
5th
C34
51-60
6th
C35
61-70
7th
C36
71-80
8th
C44
6bb data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for C24
6-10
2nd
Table ID for C25
11-15
3rd
Table ID for C26
16-20
4th
Table ID for C33
21-25
5th
Table ID for C34
26-30
6th
Table ID for C35
31-35
7th
Table ID for C36
36-40
8th
Table ID for C44
6c data block
1-10
1st
C45
11-20
2nd
C46
21-30
3rd
C55
31-40
4th
C56
41-50
5th
C66

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6cc data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for C45
6-10
2nd
Table ID for C46
11-15
3rd
Table ID for C55
16-20
4th
Table ID for C56
21-25
5th
Table ID for C66
Use only as many terms as are required for the element type chosen. All three (A, B, and C) blocks must
be used. For plane stress, only C11, C12, C13, C22, C24, C33 must be entered.
6d data block
1-10
1st
11
11-20
2nd
12
21-30
3rd
13
31-40
4th
22
41-50
5th
23
51-60
6th
33
6dd data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for 11
6-10
2nd
Table ID for 12
11-15
3rd
Table ID for 13
16-20
4th
Table ID for 22
21-25
5th
Table ID for 23
26-30
6th
Table ID for 33
6e data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
YRSHR3 (for Hill)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6ee data block

1-10
1st
Table ID for YRDIR1 (for Hill) or M (for Barlat)
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
Table ID for YRSHR3 (for Hill)
Data blocks 6f and 6ff are only required if the fourth field is a 2 in a coupled analysis.
6f data block
1-10
1st
K11
11-20
2nd
K12
21-30
3rd
K13
31-40
4th
K22
41-50
5th
K23
51-60
6th
K33
6ff data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for K11
6-10
2nd
Table ID for K12
11-15
3rd
Table ID for K13
16-20
4th
Table ID for K22
21-25
5th
Table ID for K23
26-30
6th
Table ID for K33
Data blocks 6g and 6gg are only required if the fourth field of the 3rd data block is a 2 and a Joule
heating analysis is being performed.
6g data block
1-10
1st
R11 Resistivity if Joule heating.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
6gg data block

1-5
1st
R11 Table IDs if Joule heating.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
R13 able IDs if Joule heating.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
7th data block

ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical) 768

input style.
Description
A general temperature dependent orthotropic material model is available through the Marc input file by
the use of the ORTHOTROPIC and ORTHO TEMP options. If a more general model is needed, you can
supply such a model through the ANELAS, HOOKLW, ANEXP, ANKOND, ANPLAS, or ORIENT user
subroutines.
Two ways to request a call to these subroutines are shown below:
Use the flag (3rd data block, fourth field) on the ORTHOTROPIC option to modify the material
data entered there.

Use the ANISOTROPIC model definition option to call these subroutines.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of anisotropic material data sets to follow.
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are repeated as a set NSET times.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing ORTHO

TEMP, WORK HARD data and user subroutines.
6-15
2nd

VON MISES
von Mises (Default)
HILL
Hills (1948) Yield.
BARLAT
NORM ORNL
Normal ORNL
769 ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical)

Format
Fixed
16-25
26-30
Free
3rd
4th
Data
Entry Entry
CRMO ORNL
2-1.3 Cr-Mo ORNL
REVP ORNL
ARST ORNL
GEN-ANIYLD


ISOTROPIC
KINEMATIC
Kinematic hardening
COMBINED
Enter 1 if the ANELAS, ANEXP, ANPLAS, and HOOKLW user subroutines

are to be called.
Enter 2 if the anisotropic stress strain law, etc., is to be entered in data
blocks (4a, 4b, 4c, 4d, 4e, 4f).
4th data block

1-10
1st
Mass density (stress analysis)
11-20
2nd
Equivalent (von Mises) yield stress
21-30
3rd
If ORNL yielding, 10th cycle yield stress.

For von Mises, Hill, and Barlat criteria with combined hardening, enter
the kinematic hardening fraction (F: 0 to 1) F = 0: Pure isotropic
hardening, F = 1: pure kinematic hardening, 0 < F < 1: combined
hardening. This is only available if the PLASTICITY,4 parameter is used.
31-40
4th
Mass density (heat transfer analysis)
41-50
5th
Specific Heat
51-60
6th
Leave blank.
61-70
7th
Cost of material per unit volume (optional).
71-80
8th
Cost of material per unit mass (optional).
Data blocks 4a, 4b, and 4c used to define anisotropic elastic stress strain relation. Data block 4a only
required if the fourth field is a 2.
4a data block
1-10
1st
C11
11-20
2nd
C12
21-30
3rd
C13
31-40
4th
C14
ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical) 770

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
C15
51-60
6th
C16
61-70
7th
C22
71-80
8th
C23
Data block 4b only required if the fourth field is a 2.

4b data block
1-10
1st
C24
11-20
2nd
C25
21-30
3rd
C26
31-40
4th
C33
41-50
5th
C34
51-60
6th
C35
61-70
7th
C36
71-80
8th
C44
Data block 4c only required if the fourth field is a 2

4c data block
1-10
1st
C45
11-20
2nd
C46
21-30
3rd
C55
31-40
4th
C56
41-50
5th
C66
Use only as many terms as are required for the element type chosen. All three blocks must be used. For
plane stress, only C11, C12, C13, C22, C24, C33 must be entered.
Data block 4d is only required if the fourth field is a 2. It defines the anisotropic thermal
expansion coefficients.
4d data block
1-10
1st
11
11-20
2nd
12
21-30
3rd
13
771 ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
22
41-50
5th
23
51-60
6th
33
Data block 4e is only required if the fourth field is a 2. It defines the anisotropic plasticity.
4e data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
YRSHR3 (for Hill)
Data block 4f required only if the fourth field is a 2 and heat transfer is included.
4f data block
1-10
1st
K11
11-20
2nd
K12
21-30
3rd
K13
31-40
4th
K22
41-50
5th
K23
51-60
6th
K33
Data block 4g required only if the fourth field is a 2 and Joule heating is included.
4g data block
1-10
1st
R11
11-20
2nd
R12
21-30
3rd
R13
31-40
4th
R22
41-50
5th
R23
51-60
6th
R33
5th data block

HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input) 772

Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials
Description
This option allows you to input data associated with Marcs hypoelastic material model. You must define
the material stress/strain law through the HYPELA2 user subroutine (or, for element type 52 or 98 without
using numerically integrated solid cross section, the UBEAM user subroutine).
For more information, see Marc Volume A, Theory and User Information, Chapter 7, Material Library,
Nonlinear Hypoelastic Material.
Note:
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults to isotropic heat
transfer behavior.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word HYPOELASTI.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of hypoelastic material data sets to follow.
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3, 4, 5, and 6 are repeated as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing CREEP,

etc., and user subroutines.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the ANEXP and ORIENT user subroutines.
11-15
3rd
Flag to use the HYPELA2 user subroutine.

Enter 1 to pass in deformation gradient (F) and rotation (R).
Enter 2 to pass in deformation gradient (F) and stretch ratios ().
Enter 3 to pass in F, R, and .
773 HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 13 to pass in F, R, and . Kinematic quantities are calculated at the
mid increment if the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used which results in
logarithmic strains.
end of the increment if the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
Enter the material name to cross-reference with material database for

temperature dependent properties, strain rate, and workhardening effects.
4th data block

1-10
1st
mass density (stress analysis).
11-20
2nd
coefficient of thermal expansion.
21-30
3rd
K thermal conductivity.
31-40
4th
Specific heat.
41-50
5th
Resistivity.
51-60
6th
mass density (heat transfer analysis).
61-70
7th
Emissivity.
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
6th data block

Enter a list of elements using this material model. (Do not enter composite
elements using this material in a layer.)
HYPOELASTIC 774
HYPOELASTIC
input style.
Description
This option allows you to input data associated with Marcs hypoelastic material model. You must define
the material stress/strain law through the HYPELA2 user subroutine (or, for element type 52 or 98 without
using numerically integrated solid cross section, the UBEAM user subroutine).
Nonlinear Hypoelastic Material.
Note:
transfer behavior.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word HYPOELASTI.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of hypoelastic material data sets to follow.
6-10
2nd
Data block 3, 4, 5 are repeated as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS data and user subroutines.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the ANEXP and ORIENT user subroutines.
11-15
3rd
Flag to use the HYPELA2 user subroutine.

Enter 1 to pass in deformation gradient (F) and rotation (R).
Enter 2 to pass in deformation gradient (F) and stretch ratios ().
Enter 3 to pass in F, R, and .
775 HYPOELASTIC
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
mid increment if the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used which results in
logarithmic strains.
end of the increment if the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used.
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
K thermal conductivity.
31-40
4th
Specific heat.
41-50
5th
Resistivity (if Joule analysis).
51-60
6th
mass density (heat transfer analysis).
61-70
7th
Emissivity.
5th data block

Enter a list of elements using this material model. (Do not enter composite
elements using this material in a layer.)
MOONEY (with TABLE Input) 776

Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for a Mooney-Rivlin rubber material based upon
strain invariants. The UMOONY user subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients.
The UENERG user subroutine can be used to enter a general strain energy function. If rate effects are also
present, the VISCELMOON model definition option can also be required. A list of elements can also be
associated with this material.
The conventional strain energy function is:
W = C 10 I 1 3 + C 01 I 2 3 + C 11 I 1 3 I 2 3 + C 20 I 1 3 2 + C 30 I 1 3 3 + U
An expanded complete fifth order expansion can be written as:

5
W =
C ij I 1 3 i I 2 3 j + U
i j = 1
where U = 9--- K J 1 2
2
A series form of the volumetric strain energy U to capture the nonlinear pressure-volumetric strain
relationship is also implemented and can be used by using a FEATURE,3402 parameter in the input. The
volumetric strain energy is expressed as:
J
U =
Di J 1 2
i =1
Notes:
For a Neo-Hookean material model, only C10 is needed.

For a Mooney/Rivlin material model, only C10 and C01 are needed.
For the full 3rd-order invariant model of Jamus, Green and Simpson, use all C10, C01, C11,
C20, C30.
The procedure used is defined on the LARGE DISP or LARGE STRAIN parameters. If the
Total Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements in this case must be of the Herrmann
formulation except for plane stress. If the Updated Lagrange formulation is used, either
Herrmann or displacement elements may be used. (Near-incompressibility is imposed by
using the mixed approach and condensing out the pressure degrees of freedom.) For plane
stress, displacement elements with Total Lagrange are always used.
777 MOONEY (with TABLE Input)

transfer behavior.
These material identifications cannot be referenced by any composite group.
The values C10, C01, C11, C20, and C30 can be redefined using the UMOONY
user subroutine.
Although a general strain energy function can be defined by using the UENERG user
subroutine, it is still required to define the elements associated with the material
identifier here.
The UELASTOMER user subroutine may be used to define a general material based upon
the strain invariants. It is always called when the updated Lagrange procedure is used.
In a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, the electrostatic material model defaults to
isotropic electrostatic behavior.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word MOONEY.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of data sets to follow.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for data input. Defaults to input file.
Data blocks 3 through 18 are repeated as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Data input mode - Enter 0.
16-20
4th
Enter 0 for maximum 5 coefficient Mooney-Rivlin model (default)

Enter 1 for 5th order Generalized Mooney-Rivlin model
21-32
5th
4th data block

1-10
1st
C10 Mooney-Rivlin constant.
11-20
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
C11 higher order constants
51-60
6th
C20 higher order constants.
61-70
7th
C30 higher order constants.
71-80
8th
bulk modulus.
If the bulk modulus=0, then it is evaluated as 1000*(C10+C01)

If the bulk modulus=-1 then the volumetric strain energy is based upon the
series expansion given in the 12th and 13th data block
5th data block
Only necessary for input format 2 or greater.
1-5
1st
Table ID for C10.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for C01.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Table ID for .
21-25
5th
Table ID for C11.
26-30
6th
Table ID for C20.
31-35
7th
Table ID for C30.
36-40
8th
Table ID for K.
6th data block

Only required if 5th order generalized Mooney option.
1-10
1st
C02 higher order constant
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
7th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for C02
6-10
2nd
Table ID for C21
11-15
3rd
Table ID for C12
16-20
4th
Table ID for C03

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
9th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for C40
6-10
2nd
Table ID for C31
11-15
3rd
Table ID for C22
16-20
4th
Table ID for C13
21-25
5th
Table ID for C04
10th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
11th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for C50
6-10
2nd
Table ID for C41
11-15
3rd
Table ID for C32
16-20
4th
Table ID for C23
21-25
5th
Table ID for C14
26-30
6th
Table ID for C05

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
12th data block

Only necessary for analysis with FEATURE,3402 parameter and user-specified bulk modulus of -1.0.
1-10
1st
D1
coefficient of the volumetric strain energy function.
11-20
2nd
D2
21-30
3rd
D3
31-40
4th
D4
41-50
5th
D5
13th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for D 1 .
6-10
2nd
Table ID for D 2 .
11-15
3rd
Table ID for D 3 .
16-20
4th
Table ID for D 4 .
21-25
5th
Table ID for D 5 .
14th data block

Only necessary in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
15th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
16th data block

Only necessary in a coupled electrostatic-stress analysis
1-10
1st

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
17th data block

1-5
1st
18th data block

Enter a list of element numbers associated with this particular
elastomeric material.
MOONEY 782
MOONEY
input style.
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for a Mooney-Rivlin rubber material based upon
strain invariants. The UMOONY user subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients.
The UENERG user subroutine can be used to enter a general strain energy function. If rate effects are also
present, the VISCELMOON model definition option can also be required. A list of elements can also be
The conventional strain energy function is:
W = C 10 I 1 3 + C 01 I 2 3 + C 11 I 1 3 I 2 3 + C 20 I 1 3 2 + C 30 I 1 3 3 + U
An expanded complete fifth order expansion can be written as:

5
W =
C ij I 1 3 i I 2 3 j + U
i j = 1
where U = 9--- K J 1 2
2
J
U =
Di J 1 2
i =1
Notes:
For a Neo-Hookean material model, only C10 is needed.

For a Mooney/Rivlin material model, only C10 and C01 are needed.
For the full third-order invariant model of James-Green-Simpson, use all C10, C01, C11,
C20, C30.
Total Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements in this case can be of the Herrmann
stress, displacement elements are always used.
783 MOONEY
transfer behavior
The values C10, C01, C11, C20, and C30 can be redefined using the UMOONY
user subroutine.
Although a general strain energy function can be defined by using the UENERG user
subroutine, it is still required to define the elements associated with the material
identifier here.
The UELASTOMER user subroutine may be used to define a general material based upon
the strain invariants. It is always called when the updated Lagrange procedure is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word MOONEY.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 11 are repeated as a set, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0
11-15
3rd
Data Input mode enter 0
16-20
4th
Enter 0 for maximum 5 coefficient Mooney-Rivlin model (default)

Enter 1 for 5th order Generalized Mooney-Rivlin model
21-32
5th
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
C11 higher order constant.
MOONEY 784
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
bulk modulus.
If the bulk modulus=0, then it is evaluated as 1000*(C10+C01)

If the bulk modulus=-1 then the volumetric strain energy is based upon the
series expansion given in the 8th data block
5th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
7th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
8th data block

1-10
1st
D1
11-20
2nd
D2
785 MOONEY
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
D3
31-40
4th
D4
41-50
5th
D5
9th data block

Only necessary in a coupled thermal-stress analysis
1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
10th data block

1-10
1st
11th data block

ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input) 786

Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for the Arruda-Boyce rubber material model. The
UARRBO user subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. If rate effects are also
present, the VISCELMOON model definition option may also be required. A list of elements can also be
The strain energy function is:
3
4
5
2
1
1
19
519
11
W = nk --- I 1 3 + ---------- I 9 + ------------------2- I 27 + ------------------3- I 81 + ------------------------4- I 243 + U
1
2
20N 1
7000N
673750N
1050N
where U = 9--- K J 1 2
2
J
U =
Di J 1 2
i =1
Notes:
This model is very sensitive to material instabilities. Positive, physical coefficients

are essential.
transfer behavior.
isotropic electrostatic behavior
787 ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input)


The values nk and N can be redefined using the UARRBO user subroutine.
For nk = 2C1 and N , one term Mooney-Rivlin (or Neo-Hookean) material model
can be recovered.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ARRUDBOYCE.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 12 are repeated as a set; once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Data Input Mode; enter 0
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-32
5th
4th data block

1-10
1st
nk
linear term where n is the chain density, k is the Boltzmann

constant, and is the temperature.
11-20
2nd
number of links between chemical crosslinks.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
bulk modulus; default is such that the material is

incompressible (enter -1 if a series form of volumetric free
energy is flagged in a FEATURE,3402 parameter).
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for rubber modulus (nk).
6-10
2nd
Table ID for N.
ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input) 788

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Table ID for bulk modulus.
6th data block

1-10
1st
D1
11-20
2nd
D2
21-30
3rd
D3
31-40
4th
D4
41-50
5th
D5
7th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for D 1 .
6-10
2nd
Table ID for D 2 .
11-15
3rd
Table ID for D 3 .
16-20
4th
Table ID for D 4 .
21-25
5th
Table ID for D 5 .
8th data block

1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Electrical resistivity.
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
9th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
789 ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

1-10
1st
11th data block

1-5
1st
12th data block

ARRUDBOYCE 790
ARRUDBOYCE
input style.
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for the Arruda-Boyce rubber material model. The
UARRBO user subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. If rate effects are also
present, the VISCELMOON model definition option may also be required. A list of elements can also be
3
4
5
2
1
1
19
519
11
W = nk --- I 1 3 + ---------- I 9 + ------------------2- I 27 + ------------------3- I 81 + ------------------------4- I 243 + U
1
2
20N 1
7000N
673750N
1050N
where U = 9--- K J 1 2
2
J
U =
Di J 1 2
i =1
Notes:
This model is very sensitive to material instabilities. Positive, physical coefficients

are essential.
transfer behavior.
The values nk and N can be redefined using the UARRBO user subroutine.
For nk = 2C1 and N , one term Mooney-Rivlin (or Neo-Hookean) material model
can be recovered.
791 ARRUDBOYCE
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ARRUDBOYCE.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
4th data block

1-10
1st
nk
linear term where n is the chain density, k is the Boltzmann

constant, and is the temperature.
11-20
2nd
number of statistical links of length in the chain between

chemical crosslinks.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
bulk modulus; default is such that the material is incompressible

(enter -1 if a series form of volumetric free energy is flagged in
a FEATURE,3402 parameter).
5th data block

1-10
1st
D1
11-20
2nd
D2
21-30
3rd
D3
31-40
4th
D4
41-50
5th
D5
6th data block

1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
ARRUDBOYCE 792
Format
Fixed
21-30
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
F

Note:
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model

defaults to isotropic heat transfer behavior.
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
7th data block

1-10
1st
8th data block

793 GENT (with TABLE Input)

Define Data for the Gent Model
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for the Gent rubber material model. The UGENT user
subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. If rate effects are also present, the
VISCELMOON model definition option can also be required. A list of elements can also be associated
with this material.
I 1*
E
W = ------ I m log 1 ----- + U
I m
6
where I 1* = I 1 3
where U = 9--- K J 1 2
2
J
U =
Di J 1 2
i =1
Notes:
Negative coefficients are nonphysical.

In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults of isotropic heat
transfer behavior.
The values E and Im can be redefined using the UGENT user subroutine.
GENT (with TABLE Input) 794

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words GENT.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Data Input mode; enter 0
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-32
5th
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
small strain tensile modulus.
31-40
4th
Im maximum value of first invariant (defines maximum stretch in the

chains). I m 3
41-50
5th

(enter -1 if a series form of volumetric free energy is flagged in a
FEATURE,3402 parameter).
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Table ID for small strain tensile modulus.
16-20
4th
Table ID for maximum value of first invariant.
21-25
5th
795 GENT (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-10
1st
D1
11-20
2nd
D2
21-30
3rd
D3
31-40
4th
D4
41-50
5th
D5
7th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for D 1 .
6-10
2nd
Table ID for D 2 .
11-15
3rd
Table ID for D 3 .
16-20
4th
Table ID for D 4 .
21-25
5th
Table ID for D 5 .
8th data block

1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
9th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
10th data block

1-10
1st
GENT (with TABLE Input) 796

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11th data block

1-5
1st
12th data block

797 GENT
GENT
input style.
Description
This option allows you to enter all the material data for the Gent rubber material model. The UGENT user
subroutine can be used to enter temperature dependent coefficients. If rate effects are also present, the
VISCELMOON model definition option can also be required. A list of elements can also be associated
with this material.
I 1*
E
W = ------ I m log 1 ----- + U
I m
6
where I 1* = I 1 3
where U = 9--- K J 1 2
2
J
U =
Di J 1 2
i =1
Notes:
Negative coefficients are nonphysical.

In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model defaults of isotropic heat
transfer behavior.
The values E and Im can be redefined using the UGENT user subroutine.
GENT 798
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words GENT.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
small strain tensile modulus.
31-40
4th
Im maximum value of first invariant (defines maximum stretch in the

chains). I m 3 .
41-50
5th

5th data block

1-10
1st
D1
11-20
2nd
D2
21-30
3rd
D3
31-40
4th
D4
41-50
5th
D5
6th data block

1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
799 GENT
Format
Fixed
21-30
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
F

Note:
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the thermal material model

defaults of isotropic heat transfer behavior.
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
7th data block

1-10
1st
8th data block

OGDEN (with TABLE Input) 800

Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model
OGDEN (with
TABLE Input)
Description
This option allows you to define the data associated with the Ogden model for incompressible and nearly
incompressible rubber material. The strain energy function for this model has the form:
N
W =
n =1
-----n- J n 1 n + 2 n + 3 n 3 + U
n
where U = 9--- K J 1 2
2
J
U =
Di J 1 2
i =1
This option can also be used to activate the general principal stretch based models through the
UELASTOMER and UOGDEN user subroutines.
Notes:
total Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements in this case can be of the Herrmann
formulation except for plane stress. If the updated Lagrange formulation is invoked, the
elements must be conventional displacement formulation. (Near-incompressibility is
imposed using mixed approach and condensing out pressure degrees of freedom.) For
plane stress, displacement elements are always used.
transfer behavior.
801 OGDEN (with TABLE Input)

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word OGDEN.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of Ogden material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the logical unit number for input. Defaults to input file.
Data blocks 3 through 13 are repeated for each data set.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the material identification.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of terms (N) that defines the strain energy function.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 for Ogden model (default).

Enter 3 for generalized principal stretch based model using the
UELASTOMER user subroutine.
16-20
4th
Data input mode; enter 0.
21-32
5th
4th data block

1-10
1st
K - bulk modulus; default is such that the material is incompressible

11-20
2nd
Enter the mass density.
21-30
3rd
Enter the coefficient of thermal expansion.
31-40
4th
Reference value of modulus .
41-50
5th
Reference value of exponent .
If the table IDs of the 4th and 5th fields of the 5th data block are zero, then the reference values ( , ,
) are not used and the 12th data block is used instead.
5th data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Table ID for modulus.
21-25
5th
Table ID for exponent.
OGDEN (with TABLE Input) 802

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-10
1st
D1
11-20
2nd
D2
21-30
3rd
D3
31-40
4th
D4
41-50
5th
D5
7th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for D 1 .
6-10
2nd
Table ID for D 2 .
11-15
3rd
Table ID for D 3 .
16-20
4th
Table ID for D 4 .
21-25
5th
Table ID for D 5 .
8th data block

1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
9th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
10th data block

1-10
1st
803 OGDEN (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11th data block

1-5
1st
Data block 12 is repeated once for each term specified in the 3rd data block. Not used if generalized
stretch based model. Not used if table based input is used and the table IDs given on the 5th data block
are nonzero.
12th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the modulus.
11-20
2nd
Enter the power.
13th data block

OGDEN 804
OGDEN
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define the data associated with the Ogden model for incompressible and nearly
incompressible rubber material. The strain energy function for this model has the form:
N
W =
n =1
-----n- J n 1 n + 2 n + 3 n 3 + U
n
where U = 9--- K J 1 2
2
J
U =
Di J 1 2
i =1
This option can also be used to activate the general principal stretch based models through the
Notes:
total Lagrange formulation is invoked, the elements in this case can be of the Herrmann
formulation except for plane stress. If the updated Lagrange formulation is invoked, the
elements must be conventional displacement formulation. (Near-incompressibility is
imposed using mixed approach and condensing out pressure degrees of freedom.) For
plane stress, displacement elements are always used.
transfer behavior.
The UELASTOMER user subroutine is only available in the updated Lagrange mode.
805 OGDEN
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word OGDEN.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of Ogden material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of terms (N) which define the strain energy function.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 for Ogden model (default).

Enter 3 for generalized principal stretch based model using the
4th data block

1-10
1st
K - bulk modulus; default is such that the material is incompressible

11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
5th data block

1-10
1st
D1
11-20
2nd
D2
21-30
3rd
D3
31-40
4th
D4
41-50
5th
D5
6th data block

1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
OGDEN 806
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
7th data block

1-10
1st
Data block 8 is repeated once for each term specified in the 3rd data block. Not used if generalized
stretch based model.
8th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the modulus.
11-20
2nd
Enter the power.
9th data block

807 NLELAST
Simplified Nonlinear Elastic Models Input
NLELAST
Description
This option allows for the input of simplified nonlinear elastic models, which do not have a well defined
strain energy function. It allows an easy way to represent behavior that is observed in tests. See Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information for further details.
Notes:
When used in conjunction with the LARGE DISP parameter, the table used to enter the
stress-strain data should be the second Piola Kirchhoff stress versus the Green
Lagrange strain.
When used in conjunction with LARGE DISP, UPDATE, and FINITE, or PLASTICITY,3, or
LARGE STRAIN, the stress-strain data should be the true (Cauchy) stress versus
logarithmic strain.
It is not recommended to represent materials when large strains are present.
The MD Nastran compatible model with Herrmann elements shows slow convergence;
conventional displacement elements should be used.
The principal strain-loaded model (3) and the orthotropic model (6) cannot be used with
Herrmann elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word NLELAST.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of distinct sets of NLELAST entries (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of NLELAST data (default to standard input).
Repeat 3rd through 18th data block for each NLELAST material defined.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the material ID.
6-10
2nd
Material model:
Enter 1 for Nastran compatible model.
Enter 2 for invariant based model.
Enter 3 for principal strain based model.
NLELAST 808
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 4 for linear elasticity with tension compression limits.
Enter 5 for bi-modulus linear elasticity with tension compression limits.
Enter 6 for orthotropic nonlinear elasticity based upon strains in local
direction.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if Bilateral model; i.e., both tension and compression data will be
used (default).
Enter 2 if only tension data will be used (Nastran pre-Version 64).
16-20
4th
Enter 1 to indicate constant Poissons ratio (default) (Nastran model).

Enter 2 to indicate constant bulk modulus (Nastran model).
21-25
5th
Enter 0 material has no limits on tension/compression behavior

(default).
Enter 1 to activate no/limited tension model.
Enter 2 to activate no/limited compression model.
Enter 3 to activate no/limited tension and/or compression model.
26-37
6th
Enter the material name to cross reference with material database.
4th data block

For models 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
1-10
1st
Model model 1or 3; enter the reference value to the stress-strain curve;
default=1.0.
For model 2, enter the reference Youngs modulus.
For model 4 or 5, enter the reference value of Youngs modulus for
tensile behavior.
11-20
2nd
Enter the Poissons ratio.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Enter the Shear modulus for material model 3.
51-60
6th
Tensile stress limit if 5th field of 3rd data block is 1 or 3.
61-70
7th
Compressive stress limit if 5th field of 3rd data block is 2 or 3.
5th data block

For models 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID used to describe stress-strain law.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for Poissons ratio.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for mass density.
809 NLELAST
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for coefficient of thermal expansion.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for the shear modulus for material model 3.
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for tensile stress limit.
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID for compressive stress limit.
6th data block

For model 5 only.
1-10
1st
For model 5; enter the reference value of Youngs modulus for

compressive behavior.
11-20
2nd
Enter the Poissons ratio for compressive behavior.
7th data block

For model 5 only,
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for Youngs modulus for compressive behavior.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for Poissons ratio for compressive behavior.
8th data block

For model 6 only.
1-10
1st
E 11
Reference value for Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
E 22
21-30
3rd
E 33
31-40
4th
12
Reference value for Poissons ratio.
41-50
5th
23
Reference value for Poissons ratio
51-60
6th
31
Reference value for Poissons ratio
61-70
7th
Mass density (stress analysis)
9th data block

For model 6 only.
1-5
1st
Table ID for E 11 .
6-10
2nd
Table ID for E 22 .
11-15
3rd
Table ID for E 33 .
16-20
4th
Table ID for 12 .
NLELAST 810
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Table ID for 23 .
26-30
6th
Table ID for 31 .
31-35
7th
Table ID for .
10th data block

For model 6 only.
1-10
1st
G 12
Reference value for shear modulus.
11-20
2nd
G 23
21-30
3rd
G 31
31-40
4th
11
41-50
5th
22
51-60
6th
33
11th data block

For model 6 only.
1-5
1st
Table ID for G 12 .
6-10
2nd
Table ID for G 23 .
11-15
3rd
Table ID for G 31 .
16-20
4th
Table ID for 11 .
21-25
5th
Table ID for 22 .
26-30
6th
Table ID for 33 .
12th data block

Only required in a coupled thermal-stress analysis models 1-5.
1-10
1st
Enter the thermal conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Enter the specific heat.
21-30
3rd
Enter the mass density (heat transfer analysis).
31-40
4th
Enter the electrical resistance (Joule Analysis).
41-50
5th
Enter the emissivity.
811 NLELAST
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
13th data block

Only required in a coupled thermal-stress analysis models 1-5.
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID used for thermal conductivity.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for specific heat.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for mass density.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for electrical resistance.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for emissivity.
14th data block

Only required for coupled thermal-stress analysis model 6.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Specific heat
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
15th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for K11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for K22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for K33.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Table ID for R11.
31-35
7th
Table ID for R22.
36-40
8th
Table ID for R33.
NLELAST 812
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16th data block

1-10
1st
Emissivity
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
17th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
2nd
18th data block

813 FOAM (with TABLE Input)

Define Data for Foam Material Model
Description
This option allows you to define the data associated with the foam model for highly compressible rubber
material. The foam model can be used for plane strain, axisymmetric, and solid elements using the
conventional displacement elements.
The strain energy function for this model has the form.
N
W =
n =1
Notes:
-----n- 1 n + 2 n + 3 n 3 +
n
n =1
-----n 1 J n
n
transfer behavior. The foam model is only available for continuum elements (plane strain,
axisymmetric, or solids) for Total Lagrange or Updated Lagrange.
The procedure used for the Foam formulation is defined on the LARGE DISP or LARGE
STRAIN parameters.
The use of the UELASTOMER user subroutine is only available in updated Lagrange mode.
Viscoelasticity may be included in the updated Lagrange mode using the VISCELFOAM
model definition option.
transfer behavior.
If the bulk modulus is entered, theni = 0 for all values of i.
If the bulk modulus is zero and all i are 0, then the material is treated as an
Ogden material.
FOAM (with TABLE Input) 814

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word FOAM.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of Foam material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of terms (N) that defines the strain energy function.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Flag for user-defined foam models:

= 0 no user-defined foam model (default).
= 1 energy function based on strain invariants.
= 2 energy function based on principal stretches.
= 3 energy function based on strain invariants and with the form of
deviatoric split.
= 4 energy function based on principal stretches and with the form of
deviatoric split
21-32
5th

temperature dependent properties, strain rate, and workhardening effects.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Enter reference value of modulus .
41-50
5th
Enter reference value of exponent .
51-60
6th
If the table IDs of the 4th, 5th, and 6th fields of the 5th data block are zero, then the reference values
( , , ) are not used and the 8th data block is used instead.
815 FOAM (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Table ID for modulus .
21-25
5th
Table ID for exponent .
26-30
6th
Table ID for exponent .
6th data block

1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
8th data block

1-10
1st
9th data block

1-5
1st
Data block 10 is repeated once for each term specified in the 3rd data block. Not used if the table based
input is used and the table IDs given on the 5th data block are nonzero.
FOAM (with TABLE Input) 816

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the modulus ( n ).
11-15
2nd
Enter the power for deviatoric behavior ( n ).
21-30
3rd
Enter the power for volumetric behavior ( n ).
11th data block

817 FOAM
FOAM
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define the data associated with the foam model for highly compressible rubber
material. The foam model can be used for plane strain, axisymmetric, and solid elements using the
conventional displacement elements.
The strain energy function for this model has the form.
N
W =
n =1
Notes:
-----n- 1 n + 2 n + 3 n 3 +
n
n =1
-----n 1 J n
n
transfer behavior. The foam model is only available for continuum elements (plane strain,
axisymmetric, or solids) for Total Lagrange or Updated Lagrange.
The procedure used for the Foam formulation is defined on the LARGE DISP or LARGE
STRAIN parameters.
The use of the UELASTOMER user subroutine is only available in updated Lagrange mode.
Viscoelasticity may be included in the updated Lagrange mode using the VISCELFOAM
transfer behavior.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word FOAM.
11-20
2nd
FOAM 818
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of Foam material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of terms (N) which define the strain energy function.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Flag for user-defined foam models:

= 0 no user-defined foam model (default).
= 1 energy function based on strain invariants.
= 2 energy function based on principal stretches.
= 3 energy function based on strain invariants and with the form of
deviatoric split.
= 4 energy function based on principal stretches and with the form of
deviatoric split
4th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Enter reference value of modulus .
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
5th data block

1-10
1st
Conductivity.
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
819 FOAM
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-10
1st
Data block 7 is repeated once for each term specified in the 3rd data block.
7th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the modulus (n).
11-15
2nd
Enter the power for deviatoric behavior (n).
21-30
3rd
Enter the power for volumetric behavior (n).
8th data block

GASKET 820
Define Material Data for Gasket Materials
GASKET
Description
This option allows you to specify the material properties for a gasket material, such as the loading and
unloading paths, the yield pressure, the transverse shear modulus and the membrane behavior of the
gasket (see Gasket in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information). The loading and unloading paths
should be defined using the TABLE option and must be given as a relation between the pressure on the
gasket and the gasket closure (variable type 37). The reference value of these tables is always 1. The
loading and unloading curves may also be a function of the temperature type (variable 12), and the
coordinates (variable types 5, 6, and 7). The yield pressure, tensile modulus, and transverse modulus can
be functions of the temperature and coordinates. The initial gap can only be a function of the coordinates.
The membrane behavior should be specified using the ISOTROPIC option.
Note:
This option can be used only with the lower-order solid composite element types 149, 151,
and 152.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word GASKET.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of gasket material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 7 are repeated as a set; once for each set of gasket material to be input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the gasket material identification number.
6-10
2nd
Enter the material identification number of the isotropic material to be

used for the membrane behavior of the gasket. In a coupled analysis, the
thermal properties are also associated with this material ID.
821 GASKET
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-5
1st
Enter gasket behavior type in the thickness direction. Currently only type
0 (elastic-plastic) is supported.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table identification number of the loading path of the gasket.
11-15
3rd
Enter the number of unloading paths to be read through data block 4a. If
a 0 is entered here, the gasket behavior will be fully elastic. Up to 10
unloading paths may be specified.
4a data block
Necessary only if the number of unloading paths entered in the 3rd field of the 4th data block
is nonzero.
1-5
1st
Enter the table identification number of the first unloading path of

the gasket.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table identification number of the second unloading path of the
gasket if present.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table identification number of the third unloading path of the
gasket if present.
16-20
4th
Enter the table identification number of the fourth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
21-25
5th
Enter the table identification number of the fifth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
26-30
6th
Enter the table identification number of the sixth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
31-35
7th
Enter the table identification number of the seventh unloading path of the
gasket if present.
36-40
8th
Enter the table identification number of the eighth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
41-45
9th
Enter the table identification number of the ninth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
46-50
10th
Enter the table identification number of the tenth unloading path of the
gasket if present.
5th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the yield pressure.
11-20
2nd
Enter the tensile modulus (pressure per unit length).
21-30
3rd
Enter the transverse shear modulus (force per unit area).
31-40
4th
Enter the initial gap.
GASKET 822
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table identification number associated with the yield pressure.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table identification number associated with the tensile modulus.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table identification number associated with the transverse shear
modulus.
16-20
4th
Enter the table identification number associated with the initial gap.
7th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with this material. The elements have
to be of lower-order solid composite type (element types 149, 151,
or 152).
823 TABLE
Define Table
TABLE
Define Table
Description
This option defines the data associated with a function or parametric input. These tables are referenced
when defining material properties, boundary conditions, contact, and springs. A quantity may be a
function of up to four independent variables. The function may be defined either in a piecewise linear
manner using a set of points or by a mathematical equation.
The value used in the analysis is the value of the evaluated table obtained by linear interpolation
multiplied by the reference value given in the input. If the reference value is entered as 0.0, it is taken as
1.0 and, hence, the table value is used (the eighth entry on the TABLE parameter option can be used to
bypass this switch from 0.0 to 1.0). The scaling by the reference value is useful when applying boundary
conditions. If the independent variable is out of range of the table, the user can specify whether the
function should be evaluated at the endpoint of the table or by extrapolation.
When an equation is defined, the value used in the analysis is the evaluation of the equation multiplied
by the reference value. If the reference value is entered as 0.0, it is taken as 1.0 and, hence, the equation
is not scaled (the eighth entry on the TABLE parameter option can be used to bypass this switch from 0.0
to 1.0).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word TABLE.
11-42
2nd
Enter the table name.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Table ID.
6-10
2nd
Number of independent variables.
11-15
3rd
Unit number to read data.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Enter method to read function:

0 one row at a time
1 one data point at a time
2 read X 1 , function pairs (only available if number of independent
variables is one).
3 a formula is used.
TABLE 824
Define Table
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the first independent variable type.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of X 1 data points (nw1).
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to not allow extrapolation of X 1 (default).

Enter 2 to allow extrapolation of X 1 .
16-20
4th
Enter the second independent variable type.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th

31-35
7th
Enter the third independent variable type.
36-40
8th
41-45
9th

46-50
10th
Enter the fourth independent variable type.
51-55
11th
56-60
12th

Independent Variable Type

1 time
2 normalized time
28 contact force F
29 contact body M
3 increment number
30 n (normal stress)
31 voltage
32 current
33 current radius 2
------------------------------------ (see THROAT)
4 normalized increment
5 x coordinate
6 y coordinate
55 normalized arc distance

56 distance to other contact surface
(near contact only)
57 term of series
58 hydrostatic stress
59 hydrostatic strain
60 B g p = m g p m .
radius of throat
7 z coordinate
34 p (pyrolysis damage).
61 B g w = m g w m .
35 w (water vapor fraction).
62 2nd state variable
36 c (coking damage).
63 3rd state variable
37 gasket closure distance
64 4th state variable
s = x2 + y2 + z2
9 angle
10 mode number
825 TABLE
Define Table
11
12
13
14
15
frequency
temperature
function
fourier
(equivalent plastic strain)
16
(equivalent strain rate)
17 B g = m m (normalized
mass flow rate).
18 arc length
19 relative density
(not available for shells)
20 (equivalent stress)
21 magnetic induction
22 velocity
23 particle diameter
24 x0 coordinate
25 y0 coordinate
26 z0 coordinate
27
s0 = x 20 + y 20 + z 20
38
39
40
41
42
displacement magnitude
stress rate
experimental data
porosity
void ratio
43 c
(equivalent creep strain rate)

44 minor principal total strain
65
66
67
68
69
5th state variable

loadcase number
degree of cure
magnetic field intensity
equivalent mechanical strain
70 1st strain invariant

71 2nd strain invariant
45 distance from neutral axis

72
(-t/2, +t/2)
46 normalized distance from neutral
73
axis (-1, +1)
47 local x-coordinate of layer point
74
for open or closed section beam
48 local y-coordinate of layer point
75
for open or closed section beam
49 1st isoparametric coordinate
76
(not available in this release)
50 2nd isoparametric coordinate
-1 to
(not available in this release)
-100
51 wavelength (used in spectral
radiation)
52 creep strain er
53 pressure or primary quantity in
diffusion
54 equivalent strain rate for
nonNewtonian viscosity
3rd strain invariant

any strain component
damage
accumulated crack growth
relative sliding velocity
parametric variable 1 to 100
Independent variable types (5, 6, 7) will have the following characteristics.

1. When used to evaluate material behavior, they will be original integration point coordinates
unless the updated Lagrange procedure is used.
2. When used to evaluate DIST LOADS, they will be the original integration point coordinates unless
the FOLLOW FOR parameter is used.
3. When used to evaluate boundary conditions FIXED DISP, etc. or POINT LOAD, etc., they will be
the original nodal coordinates unless the FOLLOW FOR parameter is used.
Independent variable types (24, 25, 26) have the same characteristics as (4, 5, 6) except the original nodal
coordinate will be used for FIXED DISP or POINT LOAD, regardless of whether the FOLLOW FOR
parameter is invoked.
Note:
If remeshing occurs, then original means the coordinates after the remeshing is done.
TABLE 826
Define Table
If the method to read the function is 0, use the 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8a data blocks.
If the method to read the function is 1, use the 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8b data blocks.
If the method to read the function is 2, use the 9th data block.
If the method to read the function is 3, use the 10th data block.
A mathematical formula may be either 80 characters or 160 characters long if EXTENDED input format
is used. The formula is defined in terms of independent variables V1, V2, V3, and/or V4, where the
meaning of those variables is based on the variable type defined in the 3rd data block.
The evaluation is based upon usual mathematical standards moving from left to right with the
conventional rules of the use of parentheses. The following mathematical symbols/operations are
available.
+
addition
subtraction
multiplication
division
exponential
factor
mod
In addition to V1, V2, V3, and V4, the following constants may be used in the equation:
pi
exponent
tz
offset temperature entered via PARAMETERS option
Activation energy entered via MATERIAL DATA option
Universal gas constant entered via PARAMETERS option
sb
Stefan Boltzman constant entered via PARAMETERS option
The following mathematical functions may be used in an equation:

cos
cosine (x)
x in radians
sin
sine (x)
x in radians
tan
tangent (x)
x in radians
dcos
cosine (x)
x in degrees
dsin
sine (x)
x in degrees
dtan
tangent (x)
x in degrees
827 TABLE
Define Table
acos
inverse cosine (x)
f in radians
asin
inverse sine (x)
f in radians
atan
inverse tangent (x)
f in radians
atan2
inverse tangent (x,y)
f in radians
dacos
inverse cosine (x)
f in degrees
dasin
inverse sine (x)
f in degrees
datan
inverse tangent (x)
f in degrees
datan2
inverse tangent (x,y)
f in degrees
log
log based 10
ln
natural log
exp
exponent
cosh
hyperbolic cosine
sinh
hyperbolic sine
tanh
hyperbolic tangent
acosh
inverse hyperbolic cosine
asinh
inverse hyperbolic sine
atanh
inverse hyperbolic tangent
sqrt
square root
rad
convert degrees to radians
deg
convert radians to degrees
abs
obtain absolute value
int
truncates the value to whole
frac
take the fractional value
max
takes the maximal value
min
takes the minimal value
mod
return the remainder of x, based on y

mod(x,y) = x - y * int (x/y)
Example 1
If a load on a cantilever has a linear dependence on x and a sinusoidal variation with time between 0 and
1 second, you would enter
A * V1 * sin 2. * pi * V2
where the first variable is type 5 (x-coordinate) and the second variable is type 1 (time).
TABLE 828
Define Table
Example 2
If the creep strain rate is described by the Dorn-Weertman relation

n Q RT
c = A e
,
the formula would be

A * V1^n * exp q R * V2
where V1, the first variable, is type 20 (equivalent stress) and V2, the second variable, is type 12
(temperature).
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 4th data block is used to give the values of the first independent variable. Enter nw1 values, 8
values per line. Repeat as necessary, the data points must be in ascending order. If the independent
variable is a parametric variable, this data block is not required. The value of the parametric variable is
1 to nw1 and is given on the output.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter first data point for first independent variable.
11-20
2nd
Enter second data point for first independent variable.
21-30
3rd
Enter third data point for first independent variable.
etc.
The 5th data block is used to give the values of the second independent variable. If there is only one
independent variable, skip to data line 8. Enter nw2 values, 8 values per line. Repeat as necessary, the
data points must be in ascending order. If the independent variable is a parametric variable, this data
block is not required. The value of the parametric variable is 1 to nw2, and is given on the output.
5th data block
1-10
1st
Enter first data point for second independent variable.
11-20
2nd
Enter second data point for second independent variable.
21-30
3rd
Enter third data point for second independent variable.
etc.
The 6th data block is used to give the values of the third independent variable. If there is only one
block is not required. The value of the parametric variable is 1 to nw3 and is given on the output.
6th data block
1-10
1st
Enter first data point for third independent variable.
11-20
2nd
Enter second data point for third independent variable.
829 TABLE
Define Table
Format
Fixed
Free
21-30
Data
Entry Entry
3rd
Enter third data point for third independent variable.
etc.
The 7th data block is used to give the values of the fourth independent variable. If there is only one
block is not required. The value of the parametric variable is 1 to nw4 and is given on the output.
7th data block
1-10
1st
Enter first data point for fourth independent variable.
11-20
2nd
Enter second data point for fourth independent variable.
21-30
3rd
Enter third data point for fourth independent variable.
etc.
8th data block
If the reading method is zero (5th field of line 2), the function is read by giving nw1 data points
(nw4*nw3*nw2) times. The program reads the data using the following method.
do k4=1, nw4
do k3=1, nw3
do k2=1, nw2
read nw1 values f(X1, K2, K3, K4)
enddo
enddo
enddo
The nw1 data are read in 8 per line using the following 7a block format
8a data block
1-10
1st
Enter first value of function.
11-20
2nd
Enter second value of function.
21-30
3rd
Enter third value of function.
etc.
TABLE 830
Define Table
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
If the reading method is one (5th field of line 2), the function is read one value at a time; hence,
nw1*nw2*nw3*nw4 lines.
do k4=1, nw4
do k3=1, nw3
do k2=1, nw2
do k1=1, nw1
read one values f(K1, K2, K3, K4)
enddo
enddo
enddo
enddo
The value is read using the 8b block format.
8b data block
1-10
1st
Enter value of function.
9th data block

Only used if read method = 2; enter nw1 line each with the value of independent variable and function.
If the independent variable is a parameter, enter the value of the function in the first field.
1-10
1st
Enter value of independent variable
11-20
2nd
Enter value of function.
Only used if read method = 3, enter a line with the formula.

10th data block
1-80
1st
Enter formula.
831 STRAIN RATE (Material Properties)

Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties) Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress
input style. If table driven input is provided, the strain rate dependence
should be defined in the table unless the Cowper-Symonds model is used.
For the Cowper-Symonds model, this option should be used.
Description
This option allows the definition of a strain rate dependent yield stress, for use in dynamic and flow (for
example, extrusion) problems. This can also be used in static analysis by entering a fictitious time using
the TIME STEP option. The zero strain rate yield stress is given on the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
and ANISOTROPIC options. This option must be repeated for each different material for which strain rate
data is necessary. The yield stress variation with strain rate is given using one of three options:
a. The breakpoints and slopes for a piecewise linear approximation to the yield stress strain rate
curve are given. The strain rate breakpoints should be in ascending order, or
b. The yield stress and stain rate data points lying on the yield stress, strain rate curve are input
directly. The data is entered in ascending order of strain rate. This method is flagged by
entering the word DATA on the first data block.
1P
c. The Cowper and Symonds model is used. The yield stress is scaled with a factor 1 + ---- .
C
Note that if multiple material models are used, they must all be expressed as piecewise linear,
or as Cowper and Symonds model.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the words STRAIN RATE.
13-80
2nd
Enter the word DATA to indicate that option B is being used.

Enter the word COWPER to indicate that the Cowper and Symonds model
is used.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
For option A, enter the number of slopes of yield versus strain rate curve.
For option B, enter the number of data points.
Not used for Cowper and Symonds model; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to ISOTROPIC,

ORTHOTROPIC, and ANISOTROPIC options.
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties) 832

Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress
Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Unit number for input of the set of this block.

Defaults to blocks.
3a data block
Data block 3a is used in conjunction with option A. The number of blocks in this series is equal to that
given in the first field of data block 2.
1-10
1st
Enter the slope of the yield versus strain rate curve.
11-20
2nd
Enter the strain rate value above which the above slope becomes
operational. Note, the first strain rate breakpoint must be zero.
3b data block
Data block 3b is used in conjunction with option B.
1-10
1st
Enter the value of the yield strength.
11-20
2nd
Enter the associated strain rate. Note that the first strain rate must be zero.
3c data block
Data block 3c is used in conjunction with option C.
1-10
1st
Enter the value of C.
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of P.
833 FORMING LIMIT

Forming Limit Properties
FORMING LIMIT
Description
This option defines the variation of forming limit properties with minor principal engineering. The curve
describing the relationship between minor principal engineering strain and forming limit is also called
Forming Limit Diagram (FLD). According to the forming limit values, Forming Limit Parameters (FLP)
are calculated based on the in-plane principal engineering strains and the FLD data input through this
FORMING LIMIT option. The FLP results can be postprocessed by specifying post code number 30.
There are three formats to describe the FLD curves:
1. Fitted function definition
2. Predicted function definition
3. TABLE definition
Note:
FLP is only available for shell/membrane elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FORMING LI.
Input option parameter.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
0. To input the FLD data as a fitted function (see Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information).
1. To input the FLD data by theory prediction.
2. To input the data by the TABLE option.
6-10
2nd
Number of FLD data points. Defaults to 9.
11-15
3rd
Material ID number.
16-20
4th
Input unit number. Defaults to standard input.
Option A
3a data block
1-10
1st
C0 First parameter of the FLD curve.
11-20
2nd
C1 Second parameter of the FLD curve.
FORMING LIMIT 834

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
C2 Third parameter of the FLD curve.
31-40
4th
C3 Fourth parameter of the FLD curve.
41-50
5th
C4 Fifth parameter of the FLD curve.
4a data block
1-10
1st
D1 Sixth parameter of the FLD curve.
11-20
2nd
D2 Seventh parameter of the FLD curve.
21-30
3rd
D3 Eighth parameter of the FLD curve.
31-40
4th
D4 Ninth parameter of the FLD curve.
Note:
C0, C1, C2, C3, C4, D1, D2, D3, D4 are the parameters defining the function of FLD curve;
refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details.
Option B
This data block is necessary when the first field of the 2nd data block equals to 1.
3b data block
1-10
1st
Strain-hardening exponent.
11-20
2nd
Thickness coefficient.
Note:
Strain-hardening exponent is the n value as defined in the power law form of strain-hardening
equation = k pn . The thickness coefficient is defined by the unit used in the model. For
example, if the shell thickness is defined by Inch, the thickness coefficient is 3.59. If the
shell thickness is defined by mm, the thickness coefficient is 0.141. Users should choose
the proper value according to the unit used in defining the shell thickness.
Option C
This data block is necessary when the first field of the 2nd data block equals to 2.
3c data block
1-5
1st
Enter the Table ID for the FLD data sets.
6-15
2nd
Reference value of forming limit diagram.
835 WORK HARD

Define Workhardening Data
WORK HARD
input style. When using table driven input, the table associated with the
yield stress should incorporate the effects of work(strain) hardening,
temperature, and rate effects.
Description
This option allows you to specify the material stress-strain relation for elastic-plastic behavior. Further
details on this option are given in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. The workhardening data
can be entered in one of three forms.
a. The breakpoints and slopes for a piecewise linear approximation to the stress-strain curves are
given. The piecewise linear curve is entered in ascending order of equivalent plastic strain.
b. The stress and plastic strain data points lying on the stress-strain curve are input directly. The
data is entered in ascending order of plastic strains. This method is flagged by entering the
word DATA on the WORK HARD option. These data points are used to calculate slope
breakpoint data.
c. By the WKSLP user subroutine. This routine is called for every integration point where
elastic-plastic behavior occurs. See Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines
for details. Note that if this option is used, it must be used for ALL material types.
This option must be repeated for each different material for which workhardening data is necessary.
Note:
When performing a small deformation analysis without the LARGE DISP or LARGE
STRAIN parameters, the work hard data should be given in terms of engineering stress and
engineering strain.
If a large displacement analysis is performed where the LARGE DISP parameter is included
but without either the LARGE STRAIN or UPDATE parameter, you should use the second
Piola-Kirchhoff stress and the Green Lagrange strain.
If either the LARGE STRAIN parameter is included, you should enter the work hard
information in terms of true stress and true strain.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-9
1st
Enter the words WORK HARD.
11-80
2nd
WORK HARD 836

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
For option A, enter number of slopes of the workhardening curve. For

option B, enter the number of data points. For option C, enter -1. For
implicit creep, this field is for data associated with the back stress.
6-10
2nd
This is the same in the first field except it is for the data associated with
the 10th cycle yield used in the ORNL constitutive theory. For implicit
creep, this field is for data associated with the yield stress.
11-15
3rd
Material type identification (1,2,3 etc.) for cross-referencing with the

ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, and ANISOTROPIC options.
16-20
4th
Enter unit number for input of workhardening data. Defaults to input file.
Data blocks 3a and 4a are used in conjunction with Option A.

3a data block
The number of blocks entered is equal to the number of slopes entered above.
Included only if the first field of 2nd data block > 0.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of the workhardening curve.
16-30
2nd
Enter the breakpoint when the slope becomes operative. The breakpoint
and slope data should be described in ascending order of the equivalent
plastic strain, the first slope starting at zero plastic strain.
Note:
The workhardening slope should be for a uniaxial tension

specimen, and is the change in stress per unit of plastic strain,
not per unit of total strain. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information.
For implicit creep, the slope-breakpoint data in data block 3a is
for the back stress versus creep strain.
4a data block
Included only if the first field of 2nd data line > 0. Then, number of blocks is equal to that number.
1-15
1st
Slope of 10th cycle workhardening curve (stress change per plastic strain
change).
16-30
2nd
Breakpoint when above slope becomes operative. First breakpoint should

be at zero plastic strain.
Note:

for the yield stress versus plastic strain.
Data blocks 3b and 4b are used in conjunction with Option B.
837 WORK HARD

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block
The number of blocks entered is equal to the number of data points entered above.
1-15
1st
Enter the equivalent stress.
16-30
2nd
Enter the equivalent plastic strain. The data should be described in

ascending order of equivalent plastic strain; the first data set starting at
zero plastic strain.
Note:
For implicit creep, the stress-strain data in data block 3b is for

the back stress versus equivalent creep strain.
4b data block
Included only if the first field of 2nd data line > 0. Then, number of data lines is equal to that number.
1-15
1st
Enter the equivalent stress associated with the 10th cycle work-hardening
curve.
16-30
2nd
Enter the equivalent plastic strain.

Note:
For implicit creep, the stress-strain data in data block 4b is for

the yield stress versus equivalent plastic strain.
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress) 838

Define Effects of Temperature
input style. If table driven input is used, material data should include
references to tables that provide temperature dependent behavior.
Description
This option defines the variation of material properties (Youngs modulus, yield stress, Poissons ratio,
and coefficient of thermal expansion) with temperature. The values read in through either the
ISOTROPIC or POWDER option are those at the lowest temperature specified. Properties are not defined
below the lowest temperature. The temperature dependency can be entered using one of the following
two options:
a. The variation of a particular property with temperature is specified as a piecewise linear curve.
Breakpoints must be given in ascending order of temperature.
b. The particular property value and temperature lying on the relevant curve are input directly.
Data points must be given in increasing order of temperature. This option is flagged by
entering the word DATA on the first data line.
Note:
For Mooney materials, the temperature dependence for C10 and C01 can be defined by
replacing C10 for Youngs modulus and C01 for Poissons ratio. The other constants
can be specified by utilizing the UMOONY user subroutine. For the Arruda-Boyce model,
the temperature dependence of nkT and N can be defined using the Youngs modulus and
Poissons ratio field, respectively. For the Gent model, the temperature dependence of E
(tension modulus) and Im (maximum invariant) can be defined in these fields, respectively.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the words TEMPERATURE EFFECTS.
21-80
2nd
Enter the word DATA to indicate that option B is used.
For option A, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, 5a, 6a, 7a and 8a. For option B, use data blocks 2b, 3b, 4b, 5b,
6b, 7b and 8b, below.
839 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Option A
2a data block
1-5
1st
Number of slopes of yield stress versus temperature curve.

For implicit creep, number of slopes of back stress versus
temperature curve.
6-10
2nd
Number of slopes of Youngs modulus versus temperature curve.
11-15
3rd
Number of slopes of Poissons ratio versus temperature curve
16-20
4th
Number of slopes for instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion

versus temperature.
21-25
5th
Number of slopes of 10th cycle yield stress versus temperature curve of

ORNL constitutive theory option, or for powder materials, number of
slopes of viscosity versus temperature.
For implicit creep, number of slopes of yield stress versus temperature
curve.
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Number of slopes of the workhardening versus temperature curve.

Material type identification (1,2,3,...) for cross-referencing the
ISOTROPIC option.
36-40
8th
Logical unit number for input of this set of data. Defaults to data lines.
3a data block
The number entered in the first field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines in data block 3.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of yield stress versus the temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Enter the temperature at which the above slope becomes operative.

Note:

for the back stress versus temperature.
4a data block
The number entered in the second field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in
data block 4.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of Youngs modulus versus the temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
5a data block
The number in the third field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 5.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of Poissons ratio versus the temperature curve.
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6a data block
The number in the fourth field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 6.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion.
16-30
2nd
Enter the temperature at which the above slope becomes operative. These
are instantaneous values.
7a data block
Slopes/breakpoints for 10th cycle yield or viscosity versus temperature curve. The number in the fifth
field of data block 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 7.
1-15
1st
Slope of 10th cycle yield or viscosity versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Temperature at which this slope becomes operative.

Note:

for the yield stress versus temperature.
8a data block
Slopes and breakpoints of the curve describing the ratio of the workhardening curve at temperature to
the workhardening curve at the first breakpoint of this set; that is, H p T o R T is the workhardening
slope at T given in terms of H p T o the workhardening slope at plastic strain p and the first
------- the slope of the ratio
breakpoint of this set, To, and R(T), the ratio parameter. In these data lines dR
dT
curve, is input.
The ratio R(T) is not dependent on p , only on T. The number in the sixth field of data block 2 defines
the number of lines required in data block 8.
1-15
1st
Slope of ratio of workhardening slope versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Temperature at which this slope becomes operative.
Number of data points on the yield stress versus temperature curve.
Option B
2b data block
1-5
1st
For implicit creep, number of data points of back stress versus

temperature curve.
6-10
2nd
Number of data points on the Youngs modulus versus temperature curve.
11-15
3rd
Number of data points on the Poissons ratio versus temperature curve.
16-20
4th
Number of data points on the instantaneous coefficient of thermal

expansion versus temperature.
841 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress)

Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Number of data points on the 10th cycle yield stress versus temperature
curve of ORNL constitutive theory option, or number of data points on the
viscosity versus temperature curve for powder materials.
For implicit creep, number of data points of yield stress versus
temperature curve.
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Number of data points on the workhardening versus temperature curve.

ISOTROPIC option.
36-40
8th
3b data block
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the yield stress.
16-30
2nd
Enter the associated temperature.

Note:
For implicit creep, the value in data block 3b is for the back
stress versus temperature.
4b data block
The number entered in the second field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in
data block 4.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the Youngs modulus.
16-30
2nd
5b data block
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the Poissonss ratio.
16-30
2nd
6b data block
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion.
16-30
2nd
7b data block
The number in the fifth field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 7.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the 10th cycle yield or viscosity.
16-30
2nd

Note:
For implicit creep, the value in data block 7b is for the yield
stress versus temperature.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8b data block
Data points on the curve describing the ratio of the workhardening curve at a given temperature to the
workhardening curve at the first temperature of this set; that is, H p T o R T is the workhardening
slope at plastic strain, p , and the first temperature of this set, T, and R(T), the ratio parameter.
The same temperature effects are applied for all values of p ; that is, the ratio R(T) is not dependent
on p , only on T. The number in the sixth field of data block 2 defines the number of data lines
required in data block 8.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the ratio of the workhardening slope vs. the temperature
curve, R(T).
16-30
2nd

Note:
In calculating a particular temperature dependent property,

Marc averages the value of this property at the start and at the
end of the increment. Also, a first order correction is made for
the effect of temperature change on the total elastic stresses
because of changes in material properties. Even in the elastic
case, you should not expect a simple calculation with property
values corresponding to the temperature at the end of the
increment. More details are given on the discussion of
temperature-dependent plasticity in Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
843 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress)

Temperature Effects in Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal- Temperature Effects in Coupled

Thermal-Stress Analysis
Stress)
Description
This option defines the variation of material properties (Youngs modulus, yield stress, Poissons ratio,
and coefficient of thermal expansion) with temperature. The values read in through either the
ISOTROPIC or POWDER options are those at the lowest temperature specified. Properties are not
defined below the lowest temperature. The temperature dependency can be entered using one of the
following two options:
Notes:
For Mooney materials, the temperature dependence for C10 and C01 can be defined by
replacing C10 for Youngs modulus and C01 for Poissons ratio. The other constants
can be specified by utilizing the UMOONY user subroutine. For the Arruda-Boyce model,
the temperature dependence of nkT and N can be defined using the Youngs modulus and
Poissons ratio field, respectively. For the Gent model, the temperature dependence of E
(tension modulus) and Im (maximum invariant) can be defined in these fields, respectively.
In calculating a particular temperature dependent property, Marc averages the value of this
property at the start and at the end of the increment. Also, a first order correction is made
for the effect of temperature change on the total elastic stresses because of changes in
material properties. Even in the elastic case, you should not expect a simple calculation
with property values corresponding to the temperature at the end of the increment. More
details are given on the discussion of temperature-dependent plasticity in Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information.
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress) 844

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
21-80
2nd
For Option A, use data blocks 2a and 13a. For Option B, use data blocks 2b through 13b, below.
Option A
2a data block
1-5
1st
Number of slopes of yield stress versus temperature curve.
6-10
2nd
Number of slopes of Youngs modulus versus temperature curve.
11-15
3rd
Number of slopes of Poissons ratio versus temperature curve.
16-20
4th
Number of slopes for instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion

versus temperature.
21-25
5th
Number of slopes of 10th cycle yield stress versus temperature curve of

ORNL constitutive theory option, or for powder materials, number of
slopes of viscosity versus temperature.
26-30
6th
Number of slopes of the workhardening versus temperature curve.
31-35
7th
Number of slopes of conductivity versus temperature curve
36-40
8th
Number of slopes of specific heat versus temperature curve.
41-45
9th
Number of latent heats to be entered.
46-50
10th
Number of slopes of resistivity versus temperature curve.
51-55
11th
Number of slopes of emissivity versus temperature curve.
56-60
12th

ISOTROPIC option.
61-55
13th
Logical unit number for input of this set of data. Defaults to blocks.
3a data block
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of yield stress versus the temperature curve.
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4a data block
The number entered in the second field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data
block 4.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of Youngs modulus versus the temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
5a data block
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of Poissons ratio versus the temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
6a data block
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion.
16-30
2nd
Enter the temperature at which the above slope becomes operative. These
are instantaneous values.
7a data block
Slopes/breakpoints for 10th cycle yield or viscosity versus temperature curve. The number in the fifth
field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data block 7.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of 10th cycle yield stress or viscosity versus temperature
curve.
16-30
2nd
Enter the temperature at which this slope becomes operative.
8a data block
Slopes and breakpoints of the curve describing the ratio of the workhardening curve at temperature to
the workhardening curve at the first breakpoint of this set; that is, H p T o R T is the workhardening
slope at T given in terms of H p T o the workhardening slope at plastic strain p and the first
------- the slope of the ratio
breakpoint of this set, To, and R(T), the ratio parameter. In these data lines dR
dT
curve, is input.
The ratio R(T) is not dependent on p , only on T. The number in the sixth field of data line 2 defines
the number of data lines required in data block 8.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of ratio of workhardening slope versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9a data block
Conductivity variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, seventh field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of conductivity versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
10a data block

Specific heat variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, eighth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of specific heat versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Temperature above which this slope becomes operative.
11a data block

Latent heat. Number of data lines given on data line 2, ninth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the latent heat.
16-30
2nd
Enter the solidus temperature (lower phase change limit).
31-45
3rd
Enter the liquidus temperature (upper phase change limit).
12a data block

Resistivity variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, eleventh field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of resistivity versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
13a data block

Emissivity variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, tenth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of emissivity versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Option B
2b data block
1-5
1st
Number of data points on the yield stress versus temperature curve.
6-10
2nd
Number of data points on the Youngs modulus versus temperature curve.
11-15
3rd
Number of data points on the Poissons ratio versus temperature curve.
16-20
4th
Number of data points on the instantaneous coefficient of thermal

expansion versus temperature.
21-25
5th
Number of data points on the 10th cycle yield stress versus temperature
curve of ORNL constitutive theory option, or number of data points on the
viscosity versus temperature curve for powder materials.
26-30
6th
Number of data points on the workhardening versus temperature curve.
31-35
7th
Number of data points on the conductivity versus temperature curve.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
36-40
8th
Number of data points on the specific heat versus temperature curve.
41-45
9th
46-50
10th
Number of data points on the resistivity versus temperature curve.
51-55
11th
Number of data points on the emissivity versus temperature curve.
56-60
12th

ISOTROPIC option.
61-65
13th
3b data block
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the yield stress.
16-30
2nd
4b data block
The number entered in the second field of data line 2 defines the number of data lines required in data
block 4.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the Youngs modulus.
16-30
2nd
5b data block
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the Poissonss ratio.
16-30
2nd
6b data block
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion.
16-30
2nd
7b data block
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the 10th cycle yield or viscosity.
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8b data block
Data points on the curve describing the ratio of the workhardening curve at a given temperature to the
workhardening curve at the first temperature of this set; that is, H p T o R T is the workhardening
slope at plastic strain, p , and the first temperature of this set, T, and R(T), the ratio parameter.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the ratio of the workhardening slope vs. the temperature
curve, R(T).
16-30
2nd

Note:
The same temperature effects are applied for all values of p ,

that is, the ratio R(T) is not dependent on p , only on T. The
number in the sixth field of data line 2 defines the number of
data lines required in data block 8.
9b data block
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the conductivity.
16-30
2nd
10b data block

1-15
1st
Enter the value of the specific heat.
16-30
2nd
11b data block

Latent heat. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, ninth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the latent heat.
16-30
2nd
31-45
3rd
12b data block

1-15
1st
Enter the value of the emissivity.
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
13b data block

Resistivity variation. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, eleventh field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of resistivity heat.
16-30
2nd

Note:

end of the increment. Also, a first order correction is made for
the effect of temperature change on the total elastic stresses
because of changes in material properties. Even in the elastic
case, you should not expect a simple calculation with property
values corresponding to the temperature at the end of the
increment. More details are given on the discussion of
temperature-dependent plasticity in Marc Volume A:
User Information.
ORTHO TEMP (Structural) 850

Define Temperature Effects for Orthotropic Materials
Description
This option defines the variation of all orthotropic material properties with temperature. Note that the
values read in through the ORTHOTROPIC model definition option are those at the lowest temperature
defined. Properties at temperatures below this temperature are defined to be equal to properties at this
temperature.
The variation of a particular property is defined as a piecewise linear curve. Two options are available to
define this curve.
a. Slope/breakpoint data in ascending order of temperature can be given.
b. Property value/temperature data in ascending order of temperature can be given. This option
is flagged by entering the word DATA after the string ORTHO TEMP on data block 1.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ORTHO TEMP.
12-15
2nd
Enter the word DATA to indicate that Option B defined above is to be used.
(There must be a space or comma between ORTHO TEMP and DATA.)
For Option A, use the 2a-22a data blocks. For Option B, use the 2b-22b data blocks.
Option A
2a data block
1-5
1st
Number of slopes of yield vs. temperature curve.
6-10
2nd
Number of slopes of E11 vs temperature curve.
11-15
3rd
Number of slopes of E22 vs temperature curve.

Enter -1 to have (E22 vs. temp.) (E11 vs. temp.).
16-20
4th
Number of slopes of E33 vs. temperature curve.

21-25
5th
Number of slopes of 12 vs. temperature curve.
851 ORTHO TEMP (Structural)

Format
Fixed
26-30
Free
6th
Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter -1 to have (23 vs. temp.) (12 vs. temp.).
31-35
7th

Enter -1 to have (31 vs. temp.) (12 vs. temp.)
36-40
8th
Number of slopes of G12 vs. temperature curve.
41-45
9th

Enter -1 to have (G23 vs. temp.) (G12 vs. temp.).
46-50
10th

51-55
11th
Number of slopes of11 vs. temperature curve.
56-60
12th

61-65
13th

66-70
14th
Number of slopes of the workhardening vs. temperature curve.
71-75
15th
Enter the material identification for this data set.
76-80
16th
Enter the unit number for input of this data. Defaults to input file.
3a data block
Include this data block only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
1-5
1st
Number of slopes of K11 vs. temperature curve.
6-10
2nd

Enter -1 to have (K22 vs. temp.) (K11 vs. temp.).
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Number of slopes of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
21-25
5th
Number of latent heats.
26-30
6th
Number of slopes of resistivity 11 versus temperature.
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
41-45
9th
Number of slopes of emissivity versus temperature.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, first field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of yield vs. temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Temperature at which above slope becomes operative.
5a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, second field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of E11 vs. temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
6a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
7a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, fourth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
8a data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, fifth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of 12 vs. temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
9a data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, sixth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
10a data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, seventh field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
11a data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, eighth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of G12 vs. temperature curve.

Format
Fixed
16-30
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
F
12a data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, ninth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
13a data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, tenth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
14a data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, eleventh field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
15a data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, twelfth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
16a data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2a, thirteenth field, or 0 if n=-1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
17a data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2a, fourteenth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of the ratio of work hardening slope vs. temperature.
16-30
2nd

Note:
To define the dependence of 10th cycle yield on temperature,

use the YIEL user subroutine.
The following data blocks are used only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
18a data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in the first field of the 3a data block.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of K11 vs. temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
19a data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the second field of the 3a data block, or 0 if
n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
20a data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the third field of the 3a data block, or 0 if
n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
21a data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in the fourth field of the 3a data block.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
22a data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in the fifth field of the 3a data block.
1-15
1st
Enter latent heat value.
16-30
2nd
Solidus temperature (lower phase change limit).
31-45
3rd
Liquidus temperature (upper phase change limit).
23a data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in the sixth field of the 3a data block.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of R 11 versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
24a data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the seventh field of the 3a data block or 0 if
n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
25a data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the seventh field of the 3a data block or 0 if
n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
26a data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in the ninth field of the 3a data block.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of emissivity.
16-30
2nd
Option B
2b data block
1-5
1st
Number of data points of yield.
6-10
2nd
Number of data points of E11 vs. temperature curve.
11-15
3rd
Number of data points of E22 vs. temperature curve. Enter -1 to have (E22
vs. temp.) (E11 vs. temp.).
16-20
4th
Number of data points of E33.

21-25
5th
Number of data points of 12.
26-30
6th
Number of data points of23.

31-35
7th

36-40
8th
Number of data points of G12.
41-45
9th

46-50
10th

51-55
11th
Number of data points of11.
56-60
12th


Format
Fixed
Free
61-65
13th
Data
Entry Entry
I

66-70
14th
Number of data points of the workhardening vs. temperature curve.
71-75
15th
Enter the material identification for this data set.
76-80
16th
Enter the unit number for input of this data. Defaults to input file.
3b data block
Include this data block only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
1-5
1st
Number of data points of K11
6-10
2nd
Number of data points of K22.

Enter -1 to have (K22 vs. temp.) (K11 vs. temperature).
11-15
3rd
Number of data points of K33.

Enter -1 to have (K33 vs. temp.) (K11 vs. temperature).
16-20
4th
Number of data points of specific heat
21-25
5th
4b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, first field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of yield stress.
16-30
2nd
5b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, second field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of E11.
16-30
2nd
6b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
7b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, fourth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, fifth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of 12.
16-30
2nd
9b data block
The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, sixth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of23.
16-30
2nd
10b data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, seventh field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
11b data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, eighth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of G12.
16-30
2nd
12b data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, ninth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
13b data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, tenth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
14b data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, eleventh field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
15b data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, twelfth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
16b data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 2b, thirteenth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
17b data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 2b, fourteenth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of work hardening slope.
16-30
2nd

Note:
To define the dependence of 10th cycle yield on temperature,

use the YIEL user subroutine.
The following five data blocks are used only in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
18b data block
The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 3b, first field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of K11.
16-30
2nd
19b data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 3b, second field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
20b data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in data block 3b, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
21b data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 3b, fourth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of specific heat.
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
22b data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in data block 3b, fifth field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
31-45
3rd
23b data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in the sixth field of the 3b data block.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
24b data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the seventh field of the 3b data block or 0 if
n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
25b data block

The number of data lines in this block is n, the number in the seventh field of the 3b data block or 0 if
n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
26b data block

The number of data lines in this block is the number in the ninth field of the 3b data block
1-15
1st
Enter the value of emissivity.
16-30
2nd
TIME-TEMP 860
Define Effects of Time/Temperature Transformation
TIME-TEMP
Description
This option provides you with the option of defining either mechanical or thermal (heat transfer)
properties as a function of both temperature and the rate at which the temperature changes. It can also be
used to describe the effects of phase transformations on these properties. You are reminded to include the
T-T-T parameter when invoking this option. If the material properties are strictly dependent on
temperature and not time as well, the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option should be used instead.
In performing a thermal-stress analysis, the mechanical properties, which can be defined as a function of
time-temperature-transformation (T-T-T), are the Youngs modulus, Poissons ratio, yield stress, work or
strain hardening rate, and thermal coefficient of expansion. The effects of volumetric change due to phase
transformation can be included through the definition of the thermal coefficient of expansion.
In performing a transient heat transfer analysis, the thermal properties, which can be defined as a function
of T-T-T, are the thermal conductivity and the specific heat per unit reference mass. Here, the effects of
heat or phase transformation can be included through the definition of the specific heat.
You are expected to have the test data for each property of each material group in a tabular form. For a
given cooling rate, the value of a property must be known at discrete points over a range of temperature.
There can be several sets of this data corresponding to measurements at several different cooling rates.
The cooling tests must be of a specific type known as Newton Cooling; for example, the temperature
change in the material is controlled such that
T(t) = A exp(-at) + B
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words TIME-TEMP.
Enter the total number of different material groups with time-temperaturetransformation dependent properties.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block

This data block is used to specify the minimum and maximum temperatures bracketing the range over
which the property values given below are meant to apply.
1-10
1st
Enter the value of the minimum temperature.
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of the maximum temperature.
861 TIME-TEMP
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Data blocks 4 through 8 are repeated for each material group.

4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the material group number whose properties are defined in the
following data block.
6-10
2nd
Enter the element number corresponding to the first element in a

consecutive list of elements for this material group.
11-15
3rd
Enter the element number corresponding to the last elements in a

consecutive list of elements for this material group.
5th data block

a) Stress Analysis
1-5
1st
Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the Youngs modulus for
this material group. If this number is preceded by a minus sign, all
properties for this material group are assigned the same number of cooling
rates. In this case, the remaining fields on this block need not be specified.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the Poissons ratio for this
material group.
11-15
3rd
Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the yield point for this
material group.
16-20
4th
Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the work hardening rate
for this material group.
21-25
5th
Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the coefficient of thermal
expansion for this material group.
b) Heat Transfer (Thermal) Analysis

1-5
1st
Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the thermal conductivity
for this material group.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of cooling rates used to define the specific heat per unit
reference mass for this material group.
TIME-TEMP 862
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

The coefficients associated with the definition of each cooling rate are specified in this data block. The
cooling rates are described by the formula
T(t) = Aij exp(-aij t) + Bij
where i refers to a particular cooling rate and j refers to a particular property
This data block is comprised of sets of blocks. There can be as many as five sets for a thermal-stress
analysis and a maximum of two sets for a heat transfer analysis corresponding to the maximum number
of properties which can be a function of time-temperature-transformation in each case. The number of
blocks in each set corresponds to the five (stress analysis) or two (heat transfer analysis) entries given
in the fifth data block. The order of the block sets is the same as for the entries on data block 5. On each
block, specify the coefficients for a particular rate. The order within each set must be from the fastest
to the slowest rate.
1-10
1st
Enter the value of the coefficient A in the above equation.
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of the coefficient a in the above equation.
21-30
3rd
Enter the value of the constant B in the above equation.
31-50
4th
If the number of cooling rates associated with each property is the same
and magnitude (that is, coefficients) of these rates is also the same, enter
a positive integer in this field on the first block (only) in this series. It is
then necessary to specify the coefficients of each cooling rate for only a
single property of the material group being used.
Specify the number of temperature points at which a property value is

specified for each cooling rate associated with a given property. If more
than sixteen cooling rates are being used, use additional blocks. The order
is from the fastest to the slowest cooling rate. Beginning on a new block
repeat this block set for each property. The order in which properties are
considered corresponds to the order specified in data block 5. (16I5)
7th data block

1-80
1st
If the number of temperature points is the same for all cooling rates of all
properties, enter this value in the first field preceded by a minus sign.
863 TIME-TEMP
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

The actual property values are defined in this data block. This series should be considered as a data
block. There are as many sub-blocks in it as there are properties with time-temperature-transformation
dependent effects for this material group. The order in which the property subblocks should be
specified is given in data blocks 5(a) or 5(b).
Each property sub-block can be considered as consisting of a series of block sets. The number of block
sets per sub-block corresponds to the number of cooling rates for the particular property in question.
These block sets are specified in the order of fastest to slowest cooling rate.
Each block set of a sub-block, corresponding to a given cooling rate for a given property, contains as
many blocks as there are temperature levels where a discrete value of the property is defined. The
property values must be defined in the order of increasing temperature levels.
1-10
1st
Enter the value of the material property for a particular cooling rate and
temperature level.
11-20
2nd
Enter the temperature level corresponding to the property value

defined above.
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input) 864

Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE

Input)
Description
This option allows you to define material properties used in conjunction with shape memory material
model. Two models are provided, a thermo-mechanical and a simplified mechanical (Auricchio) model.
Details of these models are provided in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 7,
Material Library, Thermo-Mechanical Shape Memory Model.
Notes:
The simplified mechanical model only supports ndi = 3 cases (3-D, plane-strain,
and axisymmetric elements). It does not support ndi = 1 and ndi = 2 (1-D and
plane-stress elements).
In the current release, the table IDs are not used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words SHAPE MEMO.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets Shape Memory material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 to 10 (thermo-mechanical model) or data blocks 3 to 6 (mechanical model) are repeated
as a set; once for each set of shape memory material defined.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Shape memory alloy model type:

0 or 1 Thermo-mechanical shape memory model.
2 Mechanical shape memory (Auricchio) model.
865 SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
Not used.
16-20
4th
Not used.
21-32
5th
Enter the material name.
Data blocks 4a, 5a, 6a, 7a, 8a, 9a, and 10a are associated with the thermo-mechanical model.
4a data block
Austenite Properties
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Mass density.
4aa data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Table ID for equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.
5a data block
Martensite Properties
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
5aa data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Table ID for equivalent (von Mises) tensile yield stress.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6a data block
Kinetics of Phase Transformation
eq
M s = M s0 + -------Cm
eq
M f = M f0 + -------Cm
eq
A s = A s0 + -------Ca
eq
A f = A f0 + -------Ca
1-10
1st
Martensite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( M s0 ).
11-20
2nd
Martensite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( M f0 ).
21-30
3rd
Slope of the stress-dependence of martensite start finish and start

temperatures ( C m ).
31-40
4th
Austenite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( A s0 ).
41-50
5th
Austenite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( A f0 ).
51-60
6th
Slope of the stress-dependence of austenite start finish and start

temperatures ( C a ).
6aa data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for martensite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( M s0 ).
6-10
2nd
Table ID for martensite finish temperature in the stress-free condition

( M f0 ).
11-15
3rd
Table ID for slope of the stress-dependence of martensite start finish and

start temperatures ( C m ).
16-20
4th
Table ID for austenite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( A s0 ).
21-25
5th
Table ID for austenite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( A f0 ).
26-30
6th
Table ID for slope of the stress-dependence of austenite start finish and

start temperatures ( C a ).

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7a data block
Transformation Strains
1-10
1st
T ).
Equivalent deviatoric transformation strain ( eq
11-20
2nd
Volumetric part of the transformation strain ( vT ).
21-30
3rd
g ).
Twinning stress ( eff
Twinning becomes operational when the equivalent stress reaches the

twinning stress.
7aa data block
1-5
1st
T ).
Table ID for equivalent deviatoric transformation strain ( eq
6-10
2nd
Table ID for volumetric part of the transformation strain ( vT ).
11-15
3rd
g ).
Table ID for twinning stress ( eff

twinning stress.
8a data block
Coefficient of function g
eq g b
eq g d
eq g f
eq
g -------- = 1 exp g a -------- + g c -------- + g e --------
g0
g0
g0
g0
1-10
1st
Coefficient g a .
11-20
2nd
Exponent g b .
21-30
3rd
Coefficient g c .
31-40
4th
Exponent g d .
41-50
5th
Coefficient g e .
51-60
6th
Exponent g f .
8aa data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for coefficient g a .
6-10
2nd
Table ID for exponent g b .
11-15
3rd
Table ID for coefficient g c .

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Table ID for exponent g d .
11-25
5th
Table ID for coefficient g e .
26-30
6th
Table ID for exponent g f .
9a data block
Coefficient of function g (continued)
1-10
1st
Stress level ( g 0 ) used to nondimensionalizing the stress in the function.
11-20
2nd
Maximum value of function g , ( g max ), if a cut off value is needed.
21-30
3rd
g
Stress at which the maximum value of g = g max is reached ( max
) if a cut
off value is needed (normalized with g 0 ).
31-40
4th
Initial martensite volume fraction (0 - 1). Default value = 0.0
9aa data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for stress level ( g 0 ) used to nondimensionalizing the stress in the

function.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum value of function g , ( g max ), if a cut off value is

needed.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for stress at which the maximum value of g = g max is reached

g
( max
) if a cut off value is needed (normalized with g 0 ).
16-20
4th
Table ID for initial martensite volume fraction (0 - 1). Default value = 0.0
Data blocks 4b and 5b are associated with Auricchios model.

4b data block
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus (Austenite phase)
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio (Austenite phase)
21-30
3rd
sAS
31-40
4th
fAS
41-50
5th
sSA
51-60
6th
fSA
61-70
7th
Mass density

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4bb data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for Youngs modulus (Austenite phase)
6-10
2nd
Table ID for Poissons ratio (Austenite phase)
11-15
3rd
Table ID for sAS
16-20
4th
Table ID for fAS
21-25
5th
Table ID for sSA
26-30
6th
Table ID for fSA
5b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Reference temperature used to measure stresses ( T o ).
31-40
4th
Slope of the stress-dependence for martensite ( C m ).
41-50
5th
Slope of the stress-dependence for austenite ( C a ).
51-60
6th
Youngs modulus of Martensite phase; if 0, defaults to Austenite phase.
61-70
7th
Poissons ratio of Martensite phase; if 0, defaults to Austenite phase.
5bb data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for L
6-10
2nd
Table ID for
11-15
3rd
Table ID for reference temperature used to measure stresses ( T o ).
16-20
4th
Table ID for slope of the stress-dependence for martensite ( C m ).
11-25
5th
Table ID for slope of the stress-dependence for austenite ( C a ).
26-30
6th
Table ID for Youngs modulus of Martensite phase.
31-35
7th
Table ID for Poissons ratio of Matensite phase.
SHAPE MEMORY 870

SHAPE MEMORY
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define material properties used in conjunction with shape memory material
model. Two models are provided, a thermo-mechanical and a simplified mechanical (Auricchio) model.
Material Library, Thermo-Mechanical Shape Memory Model.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words SHAPE MEMO.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets Shape Memory material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 to 10 (thermo-mechanical model) or data blocks 3 to 6 (mechanical model) are repeated
as a set; once for each set of shape memory material defined.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Shape memory alloy model type:

0 or 1 Thermo-mechanical shape memory model.
2 Mechanical shape memory (Auricchio) model.
11-15
3rd
Not used
16-20
4th
Not used
21-32
5th
871 SHAPE MEMORY

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Data blocks 4a through 10a are associated with the thermo-mechanical model.
4a data block
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Mass density
5a data block
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
6a data block
eq
M s = M s0 + -------Cm
eq
A s = A s0 + -------Ca
eq
M f = M f0 + -------Cm
eq
A f = A f0 + -------Ca
1-10
1st
Martensite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( M s0 ).
11-20
2nd
Martensite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( M f0 ).
21-30
3rd
Slope of the stress-dependence of martensite start finish and start

temperatures ( C m ).
31-40
4th
Austenite start temperature in the stress-free condition ( A s0 ).
41-50
5th
Austenite finish temperature in the stress-free condition ( A f0 ).
51-60
6th
Slope of the stress-dependence of austenite start finish and start

temperatures ( C a ).
SHAPE MEMORY 872

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7a data block
1-10
1st
T ).
Equivalent deviatoric transformation strain ( eq
11-20
2nd
Volumetric part of the transformation strain ( vT ).
21-30
3rd
g ).
Twinning stress ( eff

twinning stress.
8a data block
eq g b
eq g d
eq g f
eq
g -------- = 1 exp g a -------- + g c -------- + g e --------
g0
g0
g0
g0
1-10
1st
Coefficient g a .
11-20
2nd
Exponent g b .
21-30
3rd
Coefficient g c .
31-40
4th
Exponent g d .
41-50
5th
Coefficient g e .
51-60
6th
Exponent g f .
9a data block
1-10
1st
Stress level ( g 0 ) used to nondimensionalizing the stress in the function.
11-20
2nd
Maximum value of function g , ( g max ), if a cut off value is needed.
21-30
3rd
g
Stress at which the maximum value of g = g max is reached ( max
) if a cut
off value is needed (normalized with g 0 ).
31-40
4th
Initial martensite volume fraction (0 - 1). Default value = 0.0
10a data block

Enter a list of elements associated with this material.
873 SHAPE MEMORY

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Data blocks 4b through 6b are associated with Auricchios model.

4b data block
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus of Austenite phase
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio of Austenite phase
21-30
3rd
sAS
31-40
4th
fAS
41-50
5th
sSA
51-60
6th
fSA
61-70
7th
Mass Density
5b data block
1-10
1st
maximum strain obtained by detwinning. Default = 0.07.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Reference temperature used to measure stresses ( T o ).
31-40
4th
Slope of the stress-dependence for martensite ( C m ).
41-50
5th
Slope of the stress-dependence for austenite ( C a ).
51-60
6th
Youngs modulus of Martensite phase; if 0, defaults to Austenite phase.
61-70
7th
Poissons ratio of Martensite phase; if 0, defaults to Austenite phase.
6b data block
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input) 874

Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking
CRACK DATA (with TABLE

Input)
Description
This option inputs the uniaxial cracking data for a low tension (concrete) material. The standard material
properties, like Youngs modulus, Poissons ratio etc., are given in the ISOTROPIC option. Cross
reference is given by the material identification number. Cracking data can alternatively be specified by
the UCRACK, TENSOF, and USHRET user subroutines.
For more information, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 7, Material Library,
Low Tension Material.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CRACK DATA.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of distinct sets of cracking material properties to be

input (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of cracking data. Default to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated once for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material type identification (1, 2, 3, ...) for cross-referencing the

ISOTROPIC option.
6-15
2nd
Critical cracking stress.
16-25
3rd
Modulus for tension softening material. (If no value is entered, stress goes
to zero upon cracking.)
26-35
4th
Strain at which crushing of the material occurs. If this value is not

given, it is automatically set to some large value.
36-45
5th
Shear retention factor.
46-55
6th
Specimen length. If non-zero, this length (structural size) is used together

with a characteristic element length to modify the softening modulus in
order to reduce the mesh dependency of the solution (also see the
TENSOF user subroutine).
875 CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Table ID associated with critical cracking stress.
11-15
3rd
Table ID associated with tension softening modulus.
16-20
4th
Table ID associated with crushing strain.
21-25
5th
Table ID associated with shear retention factor.
26-30
6th
Table ID associated with specimen length.
CRACK DATA 876

CRACK DATA
input style.
Description
This option inputs the uniaxial cracking data for a low tension (concrete) material. The standard material
properties, like Youngs modulus, Poissons ratio etc., are given in the ISOTROPIC option. Cross
reference is given by the material identification number. Cracking data can alternatively be specified by
the UCRACK, TENSOF, and USHRET user subroutines.
For more information, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 7, Material Library,
Low Tension Material.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CRACK DATA.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of distinct sets of element properties to be input

(optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of cracking data. Default to input.
The 3rd data block is repeated once for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material type identification (1, 2, 3, ...) for cross-referencing the

ISOTROPIC option.
6-15
2nd
Critical cracking stress.
16-25
3rd
Modulus for tension softening material. (If no value is entered, stress goes
to zero upon cracking.)
26-35
4th
Strain at which crushing of the material occurs. If this value is not

given, it is automatically set to some large value.
36-45
5th
Shear retention factor.
46-55
6th
Specimen length. If nonzero, this length (structural size) is used together

with a characteristic element length to modify the softening modulus in
order to reduce the mesh dependency of the solution (see also user
subroutine TENSOF).
877 FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input)

Define Failure Criteria Data
Description
This option is used to define material dependent failure criteria data. Up to three failure criteria per
material can be specified. Failure indices are calculated and printed for every integration point at which
material dependent failure data exists. This option can also be used to invoke the progressive failure of a
material.
Material Dependent Failure Criteria.
The supported failure criteria types are:
MX STRESS
MX STRAIN
TSAI-WU
HOFFMAN
HILL
HASHIN
HASHIN-TAPE
HASHIN-FABRIC
PUCK
UFAIL
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FAIL DATA.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of materials with Marc calculated failure criteria. If

blank, Marc reads until no more failure criteria data are left.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for reading. Defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are repeated as a set, once for each material with Marc calculated failure
criteria, as described above.
FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input) 878

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Number of sets of failure criteria data for this material. No more than three
sets are allowed.
11-15
3rd
Flag to invoke the progressive failure option.

Enter 0 for no progressive failure analysis.
Enter 1 for the standard Marc method.
Enter 2 for gradual selective stiffness degradation.
Enter 3 for immediate selective stiffness degradation.
Note:
The UPROGFAIL user subroutine is only used for methods 2

or 3.
Data blocks 4 through 7 are entered for each set of failure criteria data. Data blocks 6 and 7 are not
required unless progressive failure option 2 or 3 is used.
For MX Stress:
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Enter the words MX STRESS.

X Maximum tensile stress in x-direction.
Xc Maximum absolute value of compressive stress in x-direction.
Y Maximum tensile stress in y-direction.
Yc Maximum absolute value of compressive stress in y-direction.
Z Maximum tensile stress in z-direction.
Zc Maximum absolute value of compressive stress in z-direction.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum tensile stress in x-direction.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for maximum compressive stress in x-direction.
16-20
4th
Table ID for maximum tensile stress in y-direction.
21-25
5th
Table ID for maximum compressive stress in y-direction.
26-30
6th
Table ID for maximum tensile stress in z-direction.
31-35
7th
Table ID for maximum compressive stress in z-direction.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
Sxy Maximum absolute value of shear stress in xy-plane.
11-20
2nd
Syz Maximum absolute value of shear stress in yz-plane.
21-30
3rd
Szx Maximum absolute value of shear stress in zx-plane.

Note:
Xc, Yc, and Zc default to the values of X, Y, and Z, respectively,

if left undefined.
5b data block
1-5
1st
Table ID for maximum shear stress in xy-plane.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum shear stress in yz-plane.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for maximum shear stress in zx-plane.
Data blocks 6 and 7 are entered only if the progressive failure option is 2 or 3.
6th data block
1-10
1st
a1 Residual stiffness fraction. For failure option 3, it is the fraction

of initial stiffness upon failure. For failure option 2, the stiffness
is not reduced more than this fraction. Defaults to 0.01.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 is failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to element

deactivation).
6-10
2nd
Set to 1 if failure in negative x-direction is critical.
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 if failure in positive y-direction is critical.
16-20
4th
Set to 1 if failure in negative y-direction is critical.
21-25
5th
Set to 1 if failure in positive z-direction is critical.
26-30
6th
Set to 1 if failure in negative z-direction is critical.
31-35
7th
Set to 1 if failure in xy-plane is critical.
36-40
8th
Set to 1 if failure in yz-plane is critical.
41-45
9th
Set to 1 if failure in zx-plane is critical.
Enter the words MX STRAIN.
For MX Strain:
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
x Maximum tensile strain in x-direction.

xc Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in x-direction.
y Maximum tensile strain in y-direction.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
yc Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in y-direction.

z Maximum tensile strain in z-direction.
zc Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in z-direction.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum tensile strain in x-direction.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for maximum compressive strain in x-direction.
16-20
4th
Table ID for maximum tensile strain in y-direction.
21-25
5th
Table ID for maximum compressive strain in y-direction.
26-30
6th
Table ID for maximum tensile strain in z-direction.
31-35
7th
Table ID for maximum compressive strain in z-direction.
5th data block

1-10
1st
xy Maximum absolute value of shear strain in xy-plane.
11-20
2nd
yz Maximum absolute value of shear strain in yz-plane.
21-30
3rd
zx Maximum absolute value of shear strain in zx-plane.
5b data block
1-5
1st
Table ID for maximum shear strain in xy-plane.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum shear strain in yz-plane.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for maximum shear strain in zx-plane.
6th data block
1-10
1st
a1 Residual stiffness faction. For failure option 3, it is the fraction

7th data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 is failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to

element deactivation).
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
41-45
9th
For Hoffman or Hill:

4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Enter either HOFFMAN or HILL.

Zc Maximum absolute value of compressive stress z-direction.
Note:

if left undefined for Hoffman. For Hill, Xc, Yc, and Zc are
assumed to be equal to X, Y, and Z respectively and are
not used.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
5th data block

1-10
1st
Sxy
Maximum absolute value of shear stress in xy-plane.
11-20
2nd
Syz
Maximum absolute value of shear stress in yz-plane.
21-30
3rd
Szx
Maximum absolute value of shear stress in zx-plane.
31-40
4th
Failure index. Default is 1.0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6th data block
1-10
1st

7th data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 if failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to element

deactivation).
Enter the word TSAI-WU.
For Tsai-Wu:
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
4th
61-70
5th

Note:

if left undefined.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Fxy Interactive strength tensor constant for the xy-plane.
61-60
6th
Fyz Interactive strength tensor constant for the yz-plane.
61-70
7th
Fzx Interactive strength tensor constant for the zx-plane.
Note:
Fxy should be such that
1
1
2 --------- --------F xy
XX c YY c
, etc.
5b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Table ID for Fxy.
26-30
6th
Table ID for Fyz.
31-35
7th
Table ID for Fzx.
6th data block
1-10
1st

7th data block

1-5
1st

deactivation).
Enter the word HASHIN.
For HASHIN:
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
X Maximum fiber tensile stress.

Xc Maximum fiber compressive stress.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Y Maximum matrix tensile stress.

Yc Note:
Maximum matrix compressive stress.

Xc and Yc default to the values of X and Y, respectively, if
left undefined.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum fiber tensile stress.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for maximum fiber compressive stress.
16-20
4th
Table ID for maximum matrix tensile stress.
21-25
5th
Table ID for maximum matrix compressive stress.
5th data block

1-10
1st
Sxy -
Maximum in-plane shear stress.
11-20
2nd
Syz -
Maximum transverse shear stress.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
5b data block
1-5
1st
Table ID for maximum in-plane shear stress.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum transverse shear stress.
6th data block
1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
a2 Factor for E2 reduction due to matrix compression failure. Takes

values between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where E2 is reduced
in the same way as for matrix tension. A value of 1.0 leads to no
E2 reduction due to matrix compression failure.
21-30
3rd
a3 Factor for G12 reduction relative to E2 reduction. Takes values

between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where G12 is reduced in the
same way as E2. A value of 1.0 leads to no G12 reduction.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
a4 Factor for E3 reduction due to fiber failure. Takes values between

0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where E3 is reduced in the same way
E1. A value of 1.0 leads to an E3 reduction due to E2 only. Values
between 0.0 and 1.0 lead to a mixture of degradation from matrix
and fiber failure.
41-50
5th
a5 Factor for G12 reduction from fiber failure. Takes values

between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where G12 reduces only due
to matrix failure. A value of 1.0 leads to a G12 reduction due to
only fiber failure. Values between 0.0 and 1.0 lead to a mixture
of degradation from matrix and fiber failure.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 if fiber tension failure is critical (leads to element deactivation).
6-10
2nd
Set to 1 if fiber compression failure is critical.
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 if matrix tension failure is critical.
16-20
4th
Set to 1 if matrix compression failure is critical.
Enter the word HASHIN-TAPE.
For HASHIN-TAPE
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Xc Maximum tape fiber compressive stress.
31-40
4th
Y Maximum tape cross fiber tensile stress.
41-50
5th
X Maximum tape fiber tensile stress.
Yc Maximum tape cross fiber compressive stress.

Note:

left undefined.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum tape fiber tensile stress.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for maximum tape fiber compressive stress.
16-20
4th
Table ID for maximum tape cross fiber tensile stress.
21-25
5th
Table ID for maximum tape cross fiber compressive stress.
5th data block

1-10
1st
Sxy Maximum in-plane shear stress.
11-20
2nd
Syz Maximum y-z transverse shear stress.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
Sxz Maximum x-z transverse shear stress.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
5b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum y-z transverse shear stress.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for maximum x-z transverse shear stress.
6th data block
1-10
1st

11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

31-40
4th

and fiber failure.
41-50
5th

7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For HASHIN-FABRIC
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Enter the word HASHIN-FABRIC.

X Maximum first fiber tensile stress.
Xc Maximum first fiber compressive stress.
Y Maximum second fiber tensile stress.
Yc Maximum second fiber compressive stress.
Z Maximum thickness tensile stress.
Zc Maximum thickness compressive stress.
Note:

if left undefined.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum first fiber tensile stress.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for maximum first fiber compressive stress.
16-20
4th
Table ID for maximum second fiber tensile stress.
21-25
5th
Table ID for maximum second fiber compressive stress.
26-30
6th
Table ID for maximum thickness tensile stress
31-35
7th
Table ID for maximum thickness compressive stress
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
5b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Table ID for maximum y-z transverse shear stress.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for maximum x-z transverse shear stress.
6th data block
1-10
1st


Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
S11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Enter the work PUCK.
For PUCK:
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Yc Maximum matrix compressive stress.
51-60
6th
S12 Maximum in-plane shear stress.

Note:

left undefined.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
5th data block

1-10
1st
p12C slope of fracture envelope, in-plane compression.
11-20
2nd
p12T slope of fracture envelope, in-plane tension. Defaults to p12C.
21-30
3rd
p23C slope of fracture envelope, transverse compression.
31-40
4th
p23T slope of fracture envelope, transverse tension. Not needed for

plane stress.
Defaults to p23C.
Note:
For plane stress, either p12C or p23C is given (and optionally

p12T). For this case the fracture angle is calculated analytically.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5b data block
1-5
1st
6th data block
1-10
1st

11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

31-40
4th

and fiber failure.
41-50
5th

7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Set to 1 if matrix compression mode B failure is critical.
21-25
5th
Set to 1 if matrix compression mode C failure is critical.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For UFAIL:
For UFAIL type failure criterion, enter only the word UFAIL in the 4th data block and leave all other
fields blank.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the word UFAIL.
There is not 5th data blocks for this option.

6th data block
1-10
1st

7th data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 if failure is critical (leads to element deactivation).
891 FAIL DATA

FAIL DATA
input style.
Description
This option is used to define material dependent failure criteria data. Up to three failure criteria per
material can be specified. Failure indices are calculated and printed for every integration point at which
material dependent failure data exists. This option can also be used to invoke the progressive failure of
a material.
Material Dependent Failure Criteria.
The supported failure criteria types are:
MX STRESS
MX STRAIN
TSAI-WU
HOFFMAN
HILL
HASHIN
HASHIN-TAPE
HASHIN-FABRIC
PUCK
UFAIL
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FAIL DATA.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of materials with Marc calculated failure criteria. If

blank, Marc reads until no more failure criteria data are left.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for reading. Defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are repeated as a set, once for each material with Marc calculated failure
criteria, as described above.
FAIL DATA 892

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Number of sets of failure criteria data for this material. No more than three
sets are allowed.
11-15
3rd
Flag to invoke the progressive failure option.

Enter 0 for no progressive failure analysis.
Enter 1 for the standard Marc method.
Enter 2 for gradual selective stiffness degradation.
Enter 3 for immediate selective stiffness degradation.
Note:
The UPROGFAIL user subroutine is only used for methods 2

or 3.
Data blocks 4 and 7 are entered as pairs, once for each set of failure criteria data.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are not required unless progressive failure option 2 or 3 is used.
For MX Stress:
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Enter the words MX STRESS.

5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Note:

if left undefined.
6th data block
1-10
1st

893 FAIL DATA

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 is failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to element

deactivation).
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
41-45
9th
Enter the words MX STRAIN.
For MX Strain:
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
zc Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in z-direction
x Maximum tensile strain in x-direction.

xc Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in x-direction.
y Maximum tensile strain in y-direction.
yc Maximum absolute value of compressive strain in y-direction.
z Maximum tensile strain in z-direction.
5th data block

1-10
1st
xy Maximum absolute value of shear strain in xy-plane.
11-20
2nd
yz Maximum absolute value of shear strain in yz-plane.
21-30
3rd
zx Maximum absolute value of shear strain in zx-plane.
6th data block
1-10
1st

7th data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 is failure in positive x-direction is critical (leads to

element deactivation).
6-10
2nd
FAIL DATA 894

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
41-45
9th
For Hoffman or Hill:

4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Enter either HOFFMAN or HILL.

Note:

if left undefined for Hoffman. For Hill, Xc, Yc and Zc are
assumed to be equal to X, Y, and Z respectively and are
not used.
5th data block

1-10
1st
Sxy
Maximum absolute value of shear stress in xy-plane.
11-20
2nd
Syz
Maximum absolute value of shear stress in yz-plane.
21-30
3rd
Szx
Maximum absolute value of shear stress in zx-plane.
31-40
4th
6th data block
1-10
1st

7th data block

1-5
1st

deactivation).
895 FAIL DATA

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For Tsai-Wu:
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Enter the word TSAI-WU.

Note:

if left undefined.
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Fxy Interactive strength tensor constant for the xy-plane.
61-60
6th
Fyz Interactive strength tensor constant for the yz-plane.
61-70
7th
Fzx Interactive strength tensor constant for the zx-plane.
Note:
Fxy should be such that
1
1
2 --------- --------F xy
XX c YY c
, etc.
6th data block
1-10
1st

7th data block

1-5
1st

deactivation).
Enter the word HASHIN.
For HASHIN:
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
FAIL DATA 896

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th

Note:
Xc and Yc default to the values of X and Y, respectively, if left

undefined.
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Syz Maximum transverse shear stress.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
6th data block
1-10
1st

11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

31-40
4th
a4 Factor for E3 reduction due to fiber failure. Takes values

between 0.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0 where E3 is reduced in the
same way E1. A value of 1.0 leads to an E3 reduction due to E2
only. Values between 0.0 and 1.0 lead to a mixture of
degradation from matrix and fiber failure.
41-50
5th

897 FAIL DATA

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Enter the word HASHIN-TAPE.
For HASHIN-TAPE
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Y Maximum tape cross fiber tensile stress.
41-50
5th
Yc Maximum cross fiber compressive stress.

Note:

undefined.
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
6th data block
1-10
1st

11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

FAIL DATA 898

Format
Fixed
31-40
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
F

41-50
5th
7th data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
For HASHIN-FABRIC
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Enter the word HASHIN-FABRIC.

X Maximum first fiber tensile stress.
Xc Maximum first fiber compressive stress.
Y Maximum second fiber tensile stress.
Yc Maximum second fiber compressive stress.
Z Maximum thickness tensile stress.
Zc Maximum thickness compressive stress.
Note:

if left undefined.
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
899 FAIL DATA

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block
1-10
1st

7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Enter the work PUCK.
For PUCK:
4th data block
1-10
1sT
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
S12 Maximum in-plane shear stress.

Note:

undefined.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
5th data block

1-10
1st
p12C slope of fracture envelope, in-plane compression.
11-20
2nd
p12T slope of fracture envelope, in-plane tension. Defaults to p12C.
FAIL DATA 900

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
p23C slope of fracture envelope, transverse compression.
31-40
4th
p23T slope of fracture envelope, transverse tension. Not needed for

plane stress.
Defaults to p23C.
Note:
For plane stress, either p12C or p23C is given (and optionally

p12T). For this case the fracture angle is calculated analytically.
5b data block
1-5
1st
6th data block
1-10
1st

11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

31-40
4th

41-50
5th

7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
901 FAIL DATA

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Set to 1 if matrix compression mode B failure is critical.
21-25
5th
Set to 1 if matrix compression mode C failure is critical.
For UFAIL:
For UFAIL type failure criteria, enter only the word UFAIL in the 4th data block and leave all other
fields blank.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the word UFAIL.
There is no 5th data block for this option.

6th data block
1-10
1st

7th data block

1-5
1st
Set to 1 if failure is critical (leads to element deactivation).
MATERIAL DATA 902

Define Additional Material Data Constants
MATERIAL DATA
Define Additional Material Data Constants
Description
This option allows you to enter additional material constants that may be required by constitutive laws,
damage models, grain size models, etc. Those fields explicitly mentioned are used by Marc models; the
other fields may be arbitrarily used and then passed to user subroutines.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words MATERIAL DATA.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets.
6-10
2nd
Enter the maximum number of material data values per material ID.
Defaults to 1.
Repeat 3rd and 4th data blocks in sets.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter material ID.
4th data block

If more than 8 constants, repeat 4th data block as necessary.
1-10
1st
Enter the Activation Energy.
11-20
2nd
Enter next constant.
etc.
Note:
The 2nd to 8th fields can be used by a smart user who wants to push material.
903 GRAIN SIZE

Define Grain Size Growth Model
GRAIN SIZE
Description
This option allows you to define a model to predict the grain size based upon the process history. The
grain size can be placed on the post file for viewing.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words GRAIN SIZE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input.

Repeat 3rd and 4th data blocks for each data set.
3rd data block
1-4
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the grain growth model.

Enter 1 for Yada model
Enter -1 for the UGRAIN user subroutine.
4th data block

For Yada model:
The grain size (g) is defined by:
if growth g = g 0
C2
if growth g = C 1
*e
C 3 Q R T
where
growth = C 4 e
C5 T
The activation energy (Q) is specified in the MATERIAL DATA option and the universal gas constant
(R) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
1-10
1st
Enter the initial grain size g0.
11-20
2nd
Enter the initial grain size C1.
GRAIN SIZE 904

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
905 DAMAGE
Define Properties for Damaging Materials
DAMAGE
Description
This option allows you to define a set of data for a specific material which includes a damage model. The
specific model and associated data can also be specified with this option.
Gurson Model
For elasto-plastic materials, the damage model is based on a Gurson model for the yield surface definition
for materials with voids:
q 2 kk
2
*
* 2
F = ----- + 2q 1 f cosh -------------- 1 + q 1 f = 0
y
2 y
Void nucleation and void growth are based on a model by Tvergaard and Needleman. Here, f * is
introduced to model the rapid decrease in load carrying capacity if void coalescence occurs:
f
f
= f
if f f c
fu fc
= f c + --------------- f f c
fF fc
if f f c
the nucleation can be either stress or strain controlled. The strain controlled nucleation is given by:
p
fN
1 m n
-
f nucleation = -------------- exp --- ------------------S
2
S 2
p
m
Additional data for the initial void volume fraction can be defined with the UVOID user subroutine. Other
nucleation models are allowed via the UVOIDN user subroutine.
Rubber Models
For elastomeric materials, the model is based on the undamaged strain energy function W multiplied
by a Kachanov damage factor, K . The damage capability is available for Ogden strain energy model
using the total Lagrange formulation as well as the Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, and general principal stretch
based model using the updated Lagrange formulation.
W = K W
Both continuous damage (Miehes formulation) as well as the discontinuous damage (Mullins effect)
can be modeled within an additive:
K = d
n =1
a
dn
exp ------ +
n
m =1
d m exp ------
m
N = 1 2
DAMAGE 906
or a multiplicative format:
K = d
n =1
+ n
d n exp --------------------
N = 1 2
if d has not been specified, it will be automatically calculated by Marc such that at zero values of and
, the Kachanov factor K = 1 .
Lemaitre Model
The Lemaitre damage model is a phenomenological approach to ductile damage in ferrous materials that
are subject to large plastic deformations as they occur in the manufacturing processes. The model is based
on the thermodynamic dissipation potential of the material where ductile damage is considered as a
specific energy that is released when macroscopic fracture occurs. The Lemaitre model may only be used
with continuum elements. Without going further into detail the mathematical derivation can be found in:
Lemaitre, J.: A Course on Damage Mechanics, 2nd Ed., Springer Verlag, Berlin, 1996. In the following
paragraphs, some basic formulas are given that serve for the calculation and the interpretation of the
damage values. The material parameters can be derived by uniaxial tensile tests for the assumed forming
conditions (strain rate, temperature). Some standard values are given in this context, more information
can be found in the mentioned literature.
The Lemaitre damage model calculates three damage values which have different meanings.
Macroscopic damage is characterized by plastic deformation that leads to pore growth, pore coalescence
and final rupture of the material matrix. The damage growth begins approximately after an equivalent
plastic strain threshold, d . This is the first material parameter to be defined in an experiment. For mild
steels, it is assumed to be between 0.1 and 0.2. The so-called absolute damage D represents the ductile
damage growth in the material. The incremental damage law is given as follows:
2
f
dD = -----------------------------------------2- d p , 0 D 1
2E S 1 D
where the triaxiality function f contains information about the state of stresses and is defined
as follows:
m
2
f = --- 1 + v + 3 1 2v 2 , = ------
3
is the von Mises stress, E the Youngs modulus, v the Poissons ratio, m the mean normal stress, D
the current integrated value of the absolute damage at that material point and d p the effective plastic
strain increment. For most steels, one can assume a maximum value of D from 0.15 to 0.4 at fracture.
Copper might even reach D = 0.9 . The more ductile the material, the higher D becomes. S is called the
damage resistance factor, a material parameter to be determined from tensile tests. S is from 1 to 8
according to the ductility of the material (1 low, 8 high). This parameter influences mostly the growth of
D and can also be determined by data correlation (for example, simulate the material test then derive the
correct material parameter).
907 DAMAGE
The critical damage D c is used to compare the ductile damage D with the state of the material; such
as, whether the actual conditions (stresses, strains, state of stresses, already reached damage, etc.) might
be critical for macroscopic failure:
2
U
2
D c = D 1c ------------------------- 1 D , 1 Dc 0
2
f
is the critical damage in the uniaxial loadcase, the third material parameter to be determined by
tensile tests. Most steels show a D 1c from 0.15 to 0.4. v is the ultimate stress during the tensile test
D 1c
(before necking begins). The lower D c , the more likely a material damage is. Note that D c behaves
contrary to D : D c = 1 for the safe material and low for possible damaged regions.
In fact the comparison between D and D c is necessary to identify critical forming zones: as long as D is
(much) lower than D c , the forming operation is safe. When D reaches D c , the damage probability tends
to be 100%. The comparison is done by the relative damage value D rel (reflected in the postprocessing):
D
D rel = ------ , 0 D rel 1
Dc
When D rel approaches 1 in a specific region, fracture is highly possible whereas small values indicate a
safe region.
Simplified Model
For elastic, elastic-plastic, or rigid-plastic materials, there is the option for you to define a simplified
damage model. You define the damage factor (df) in the UDAMAG user subroutine.
If model 9 is used, then:
p p
y = y T * 1.0 df
If model 10 is used, then:

p p
y = y T * 1.0 df
and
E = E T * 1.0 df
The normal data for a specific material are defined with the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, and WORK
HARD options. Cross-reference to this material is made with the material number.
For orthotropic materials, the Youngs moduli and the shear moduli are all scaled equally. These
simplified models may not be used with the FeFp elastic-plastic formulation, soil models, or in
conjunction with viscoelasticity.
DAMAGE 908
Cockroft-Latham Damage Indicator
Cockroft-Latham damage indicator does not affect the yield stress. It is a postprocessing value to indicate
a possible damage area. It can also be used to initiate crack by removing elements in the area.
max
- dt C
----------
where max is the maximum principal stress, is the effective von Mises stress and is the effective
plastic strain rate. C is material constant threshold for damage.
The Cockroft-Latham model may only be used with continuum elements.
Principal-tension Damage Indicator
This damage indicator does not affect the yield stress.

max
- dt C
----------
where max is the maximum principal stress and is the effective von Mises stress. C is material
constant threshold for damage.
This model may only be used with continuum elements.
Oyane Damage Indicator
m
- + B dt C
-----
Similar to Cockroft-Latham, Oyane damage indicates a possible damage area where m is the mean or
average stress, B and C are both material constants.
The Oyane model may only be used with continuum elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DAMAGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of distinct sets of material properties to be input

(optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the logical unit number for reading damage data. Defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if critically damaged elements should be removed from the post

file (valid only for Gurson Model).
909 DAMAGE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material type identification (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing to

ISOTROPIC or OGDEN options.
6-10
2nd
Damage Model:
0 Gurson Model, with no nucleation.
1 Gurson Model, with plastic-strain controlled nucleation.
2 Gurson Model, with stress controlled nucleation.
3 Gurson Model, with nucleation controlled by the UVOIDN
user subroutine.
4 Elastomeric damage model; additive decomposition of the
Kachanov factor.
5 Elastomeric damage model; multiplicative decomposition of
the Kachanov factor.
6 Elastomeric damage model controlled by the UELDAM user
subroutine.
7 or 8 Lemaitre damage model.
9 Simplified damage model.
10 Simplified model, damage applied to yield stress and Youngs
modulus.
11 Cockroft-Latham damage indicator.
12 Principal-tension damage indicator.
13 Oyane damage indicator.
11-20
3rd
Scalar factor at infinity ( d ); used only for rubber damage with additive
or multiplicative decomposition of the Kachanov factor.
21-25
4th
Number of auxiliary damage variables to be stored per integration point

for damage models 9 and 10.
4a data block
Use only if the method of void nucleation (shown above) is 0, 1, 2, or 3.
1-10
1st
First yield surface multiplier q1 (recommended is q1 = 1.5).
11-20
2nd
Second yield surface multiplier q2 (recommended is q2 = 1).
21-30
3rd
Initial void volume fraction.
DAMAGE 910
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
Critical void volume fraction. This value represents the value at which
coalescence of voids start (fc).
41-50
5th
Failure void volume fraction (fF). This is the value of the void volume
fraction at which the stiffness of the material has reduced to zero.
51-60
6th
If strain controlled, enter the mean strain for nucleation.

If stress controlled, enter the mean stress for nucleation.
Not needed if UVOIDN user subroutine is used.
61-70
7th
Standard deviation in nucleation relation (S).

71-80
8th
Volume fraction of void nucleating particles fN.

Note:
The presence of these blocks in the model definition option

automatically overwrites the yield criterion specified for a
specific material on the ISOTROPIC option. Currently, the
model can only be used for isotropic hardening materials.
4b data block
Use only for elastomeric damage model, additive decomposition, two term Prony series.
1-10
1st
First scalar factor, continuous damage ( d1 ).
11-20
2nd
First relaxation parameter, continuous damage (1).
21-30
3rd
Second scalar factor, continuous damage ( d2 ).
31-40
4th
Second relaxation parameter, continuous damage (2).
41-50
5th
First scalar factor, discontinuous damage ( d1 ).
51-60
6th
First relaxation parameter, discontinuous damage (1).
61-70
7th
Second scalar factor, discontinuous damage ( d2 ).
71-80
8th
Second relaxation parameter, discontinuous damage (2).
4c data block
Use only for elastomeric damage model, multiplicative decomposition, two term Prony Series.
1-10
1st
First scalar factor (d1).
11-20
2nd
First proportioning term (1).
21-30
3rd
First relaxation rate constant (1).
911 DAMAGE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
Second scalar factor (d2).
41-50
5th
Second proportioning term (2).
51-60
6th
Second relaxation rate constant (2).
4d data block
Used only for Lemaitre models, type 7 and 8.
1-10
1st
Critical uniaxial damage D 1c .
11-20
2nd
Corrected ultimate stress v .
21-30
3rd
Damage resistance factor S .
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th
Not used; enter 0.
51-60
6th
Plastic strain threshold before damage d .
4e data block
Used only for damage models type 11, 12, and 13.
1-10
1st
Damage threshold. Default 0.
11-20
2nd
Material constant (B) of Oyane damage model.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th
Not used; enter 0.
51-60
6th
Not used; enter 0.
61-70
7th
Not used; enter 0.
71-80
8th
Damage crack threshold (element removal).

Default 0 (no such control).
Note:
For damage models 11, 12, and 13, the UDAMAGE_INDICATOR user subroutine can be used
to implement different damage indicators not supported here.
GAP DATA 912

Define Data for Gap Elements
GAP DATA
Define Data for Gap Elements
Description
This option allows you to specify all of the data associated with gap elements (types 12 and 97).
These data include gap closure distance, gap elastic stiffness, contact coefficient of friction, and
momentum ratio.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words GAP DATA.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of gap data to be input.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for reading data. Defaults to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each set of gap data.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
For a fixed direction gap, enter the gap closure distance Ucl.
For a true distance gap, enter the minimum distance d between end points.
Note:
If d > 0, the two end points is never closer than a distance |d|
apart. If d < 0, the two end points are never farther apart than |d|.
11-20
2nd
, the contact coefficient of friction.
21-30
3rd
KGAP, the elastic stiffness of the closed gap in the contact direction.
Default: Gap is rigid when closed.
31-40
4th
KFRICTION, the elastic stiffness of the closed gap in the friction direction.
41-50
5th
User supplied momentum ratio for first gap node. Default: Marc
calculates this ratio internally.
51-60
6th
User supplied momentum ratio for fourth gap node. Default: Marc
61-65
7th
Enter 0 for fixed direction gap.

Enter 1 for true distance gap. Default is 0.
66-70
8th
Enter 0 if gap is open during increment 0.

Enter 1 if gap is closed during increment 0. Default is 0.
4th data block

Enter a list of gap elements to be associated with this set of gap data.
913 COMPOSITE
Define Properties for Laminated Composite Materials
COMPOSITE
Description
This option allows you to define the layer-by-layer material identifications, layer thicknesses, and
orientation angles for a laminated composite material and to associate this information with an element
number. Property data for each material identification is entered using the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
ANISOTROPIC, HYPOELASTIC, or NLELAST options.
If the fast-integrated option is used, the material behavior of each layer must be entered using only the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC options.
To specify a user-defined orientation, use the ORIENTATION option. Note that an input error results if
the COMPOSITE option is specified for nonlayered elements.
This option is available for shell, beams in a plane (type 16), composite solid (types 149-154, 175-180)
or solid shell (type 185) elements. It is not available for open and closed-section beam elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word COMPOSITE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of composite group data sets to follow.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input. Defaults to standard input (unit 5).
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to use the 4a data block (default).

Enter 2 to use the 4b data block, which allows specification of the ply ID.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Composite group number.
6-10
2nd
Number of layers in this group.
COMPOSITE 914
Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 0 to input actual layer thicknesses in the second field of the 4th data
block. (Default is 0; that is, the sum of the layer thicknesses overrides
thickness data entered in the GEOMETRY option. This option needs to be
used if performing design sensitivity analysis or design optimization.
Enter 1 to input percentage of total thickness in the second field of the 4th
data block. In this case, element thickness is entered using the
GEOMETRY option or the NODAL THICKNESS option.
If you are using the variable thickness capability for those elements which
have such an option, you must enter 1 here and then enter percentages of
total thickness in the second field of the 4th data block below.
If a continuum composite element (that is, element types 149-154,
175-180) is used, entering 1 to input the percentage of the total element
thickness is preferable. If 0 is entered, the actual layer thickness
is converted to the percentage of the total thickness by Marc.
16-25
4th
Enter position of user-defined reference plane. This is the value of the

local z-coordinate of the user-defined plane with respect to the geometric
midplane. Default is 0.
26-30
5th
Enter the method for integrating through the thickness of composite shell
elements. The default method is that given on the SHELL SECT
parameter, if no value is given there, then the default is method 1.
Enter 1 for conventional procedure, which supports all material behavior
available for composite elements.
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements
and computational costs for elastic shells. Thermal strains and
temperature dependent properties are not supported.
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements
and computational costs for elastic shells. This procedure uses more
memory and computational time than method 2.
31-40
Note:
6th
Enter the allowable bond shear stress. This in only used if the TSHEAR
parameter is activated. It may result in additional output and the usage of
post codes 110 and 257. Note that the allowable bond shear stress is
constant for all layer interfaces.
The user-defined reference plane value is only used to adjust layer positions relative to the
geometric midplane of a composite shell element. If the location of the geometric mid-plane
itself needs to be adjusted, use the shell offset option in the GEOMETRY option.
915 COMPOSITE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Either the 4a or 4b data block is repeated once for each layer defined in the 3rd data block.
4a data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number for this layer.
6-15
2nd
Actual layer thickness if default (0) is used in data block 3, Field 3

(above). If 1, percentage of total thickness.
16-25
3rd
Ply orientation angle in degrees. Location of principal material axes with

respect to element coordinate system measured positive about local zcoordinate, (that is, angle defining orientation of preferred frame w.r.t.
element frame). The element orientation is either defined in the
ORIENTATION option or defaults to the v1, v2, v3 system defined in
element type 75 in the Marc Volume B: Element Library.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Enter the ply layer ID.
6-10
2nd
Material identification number for this layer.
11-20
3rd
Actual layer thickness if default (0) is used in data block 3, Field 3

(above). If 1, percentage of total thickness.
21-30
4th
Ply orientation angle in degrees. Location of principal material axes with

respect to element coordinate system measured positive about local zcoordinate, (that is, angle defining orientation of preferred frame w.r.t.
element frame). The element orientation is either defined in the
ORIENTATION option or defaults to the v1, v2, v3 system defined in
element type 75 in the Marc Volume B: Element Library.
5th data block

Enter a list of elements to be associated with this particular
composite group.
MIXTURE 916
Define Constituents of Composite Material in Original and Potentially Damaged State
MIXTURE
Define Constituents of Composite Material in Original and

Potentially Damaged State
Description
This option allows one to create a new material that has multiple components in it. The material behavior
will be based upon a mixture of the individual components based upon the mixture rule. Several of
these mixture rules are only appropriate for linear elastic materials, but are still more than one finds in
text books because they will account for temperature dependent material properties. The most
sophisticated model (3) allows for the mixture of materials which undergo elastic-plastic behavior.
Notes:
1)If void ratio or porosity is defined, it applied to all components in a uniform manner.
2)Model types 1 and 2 only support linear elastic material.
3)Model type 3 can not include the following material laws in any of the components.
Thermo-pore
Gurson damage
Simplified damage models 9 and 10
Gasket material
Shape memory material
Soils
User defined generalized stress-strain law
ORNL
Rigid-Plastic
Grain size effects
Rubber material
Cohesive
4.) Rebar elements are not supported for type 3.

5.)Design sensitivity and design optimization is not supported for any of the models.
6.)PSHELL option is not supported for any of the models.
One restriction is that within a layer, if the components are orthotropic or anisotropic, the preferred
directions are aligned.
917 MIXTURE
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word MIXTURE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets.
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of components/phases.
11-15
3rd
Enter the mixture rule.

1 weighted average of material properties based upon volume
fraction (default) The components may be either elastic
isotropic or orthotropic.
2 weighted average of Hookes law based upon volume fraction.
The components may be either elastic isotropic, orthotropic or
anisotropic.
3 weighted average of nonlinear stress strain curve based upon
volume fraction
16-20
4th
Flag controlling averaging procedure for thermal expansion.

1 weighted average based upon volume fraction (default)
2 details later
21-25
5th
Not used, enter zero.
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-47
8th
Enter material name.
MIXTURE 918
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Data block 4 is repeated for each component

4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter material id of component.
6-10
2nd
11-20
3rd
Enter the fraction of this component, the sum of the fractions should
equal 1.0.
5th data block

Enter a list of elements for which this mixture of materials is applied. If
composite, then leave blank.
919 COHESIVE (with TABLE Input)

Define Material Data for Interface Elements
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for interface elements, which may be used to
simulate the onset or progress of delamination, and to associate these material properties with a list of
element numbers.
The cohesive material is defined using the cohesive energy (also called critical energy release rate),
which equals the area below the equivalent traction versus equivalent relative displacement curve. The
shape of this curve can be bilinear, exponential, or combined linear-exponential. Mixed mode
delamination is incorporated by converting the normal and shear components of the relative
displacements into an equivalent relative displacement. The data entered basically refers to the behavior
in the normal direction and differences between the behavior in normal and shear direction can be defined
using the shear-normal ratios for the maximum stress and the cohesive energy.
As an alternative to the standard bilinear, exponential or linear-exponential model, the user can also use
this option to trigger the call to the UCOHESIVE user subroutine.
Cohesive Zone Modeling.
Note:
The cohesive material model may only be used with interface elements type 186 - 193.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word COHESIVE.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of cohesive material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter 1
if extra data blocks 6 and 7 are used. This entry will be used for
all sets of cohesive material data defined below. Default is 0,
which means that the extra data blocks 6 and 7 are not used.
Data blocks 3 through 6 are repeated as a set, once for each set of cohesive material defined.
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input) 920

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

Enter 1 for the bilinear model (default).
Enter 2 for the exponential model.
Enter 3 for the combined linear-exponential model.
Enter -1 to define the cohesive material model via the UCOHESIVE
user subroutine
11-15
3rd
Enter 1
to deactivate the associated elements if the maximum damage in

all the element integration points has been reached. The
deactivated elements will remain on the post file.
Enter 2 to deactivate the associated elements if the maximum damage in

all the element integration points has been reached. Upon
deactivation, the elements are removed from the post file.
Default is 0, which implies that the elements will remain active
irrespective of the damage level.
16-20
4th
Enter 0 (default) if a secant matrix.

Enter 1 if a modified tangent matrix has to be used in the global NewtonRaphson iterative procedure. If the modified tangent matrix is
selected, one may need to force the solution of a nonpositive
definite system via the CONTROL option.
21-32
5th
Material name.
4th data block

The data entered in the following block are the reference values that are used with tables or
are constants.
1-10
1st
Cohesive energy.
11-20
2nd
Critical opening displacement.
21-30
3rd
Maximum opening displacement (linear model only).
31-40
4th
Shear-normal stress ratio (the ratio of the maximum stress in shear and the
maximum stress in tension). Default value is 1.
41-50
5th
Exponential decay factor (combined linear-exponential model only).

Default value is 1.
921 COHESIVE (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
Factor for viscous energy dissipation. Default is 0, which implies that

there is no viscous energy dissipation.
61-70
7th
Reference rate of relative displacement. This is only used if viscous energy

dissipation is activated using the 6th field of this data block. Default is 0,
which implies that the reference rate will automatically be calculated.
71-80
8th
Stiffening factor in compression. Default value is 1.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for the cohesive energy. The cohesive energy can be a function
of the first five state variables.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Not used; enter 0.
Data blocks 6 and 7 are only needed if the third field of the 2nd data block is set to 1.
6th data block
1-10
1st
Shear-normal energy ratio (the ratio of the cohesive energy in shear and
the cohesive energy in tension). Default value is 1.
Not used; enter 0.
7th data block

1-5
1st
8th data block

COHESIVE 922
Define Mechanical Data for Cohesive Materials
COHESIVE
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for interface elements, which may be used to
simulate the onset or progress of delamination, and to associate these material properties with a list of
element numbers.
The cohesive material is defined using the cohesive energy (also called critical energy release rate),
which equals the area below the equivalent traction versus equivalent relative displacement curve. The
shape of this curve can be bilinear, exponential, or combined linear-exponential. Mixed mode
delamination is incorporated by converting the normal and shear components of the relative
displacements into an equivalent relative displacement. The data entered basically refers to the behavior
in the normal direction and differences between the behavior in normal and shear direction can be defined
using the shear-normal ratios for the maximum stress and the cohesive energy
As an alternative to the standard linear, exponential, or linear-exponential model, the user can also utilize
this option to trigger the call to the UCOHESIVE user subroutine.
Cohesive Zone Modeling.
Note:
The cohesive material model may only be used with interface elements type 186 - 193.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of cohesive material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter 1
if an extra data block 5 is used. This entry will be used for all
sets of cohesive material data defined below. Default is 0,
which means that the extra data blocks 5 is not used.
Data blocks 3 through 6 are repeated as a set, once for each set of cohesive material defined.
923 COHESIVE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

Enter 1 for the bilinear model (default).
Enter 2 for the exponential model.
Enter 3 for the combined linear-exponential model.
Enter -1 to define the cohesive material model via the UCOHESIVE
user subroutine.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1
to deactivate the associated elements if the maximum damage

in all the element integration points has been reached. Upon
deactivation, the elements will remain on the post file.
Enter 2
to deactivate the associated elements if the maximum damage

in all the element integration points has been reached. Upon
deactivation, the elements will be removed from the post file.
Default is 0, which implies that the elements will remain active
irrespective of the damage level.
16-20
21-32
4th
5th
Enter 0
(default) if a secant matrix.
Enter 1
if a modified tangent matrix has to be used in the global

Newton-Raphson iterative procedure. If the modified tangent
matrix is selected, one may need to force the solution of a
nonpositive definite system via the CONTROL option.
Material name.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Cohesive energy.
11-20
2nd
Critical opening displacement.
21-30
3rd
Maximum opening displacement (linear model only).
31-40
4th
Shear-normal stress ratio (the ratio of the maximum stress in shear and the
maximum stress in tension). Default value is 1.
41-50
5th
Exponential decay factor (combined linear-exponential model only).

Default value is 1.
51-60
6th
Factor for viscous energy dissipation. Default is 0, which implies that

there is no viscous energy dissipation.
61-70
7th
Reference rate of relative displacement. This is only used if viscous

energy dissipation is activated using the 6th field of this data block.
Default is 0, which implies that the reference rate will automatically
be calculated.
71-80
8th
Stiffening factor in compression. Default value is 1.
COHESIVE 924
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Data block 5 is only needed if the third field of the 2nd data block is set to 1.
5th data block
1-10
1st
Shear-normal energy ratio (the ratio of the cohesive energy in shear and
the cohesive energy in tension). Default value is 1.
6th data block

925 PSHELL
Shell Element Property
PSHELL
Description
This option allows you to define the membrane, bending, transverse shear, and coupling properties of the
shell elements independently. This option supports isotropic linear elastic material and anisotropic linear
elastic materials. Use of PSHELL for nonlinear analysis is not recommended.
If MID1 = 0
membrane or membrane-bending coupling stiffness does not occur.
If MID2 = 0
bending, membrane-bending coupling, or transverse shear stiffness does not occur.
If MID3 = 0
transverse shear flexibility does not occur.
If MID4 = 0
membrane-bending coupling does not occur. This is true in normal cases. However,
MID4 is not zero if there is an offset of shell middle surface and/or if the material
distribution is not symmetric along the thickness.
Shell made of homogeneous materials can be modeled with PSHELL option by simply setting
MID1=MID2=MID3, and MID4=0 if there is no offset of shell middle surface. However, for
homogeneous shell structures, it is more efficient to use the standard shell technique, which is relatively
easy and inexpensive, generally more accurate, capable to deal with advanced materials.
PSHELL is based on the classical lamination theory (also known as equivalent stiffness method, see Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information for details). It is useful for shell structures with layered composite
materials, and gets particularly attractive when the number of composite layers becomes large. By using
the option the shell structures contain only one layer with smeared material properties. It is more efficient
because analysis of such smeared shell structures uses less computer time and storage space.
The smeared material properties are defined as
G dz
hG 1 =
h 2 G4 =
IG 2 =
z G dz
z 2 G dz
where G is the real material tangent connecting stress and strain tensors; h is the shell thickness;
I = h 3 12 ; G 1 , G 2 , and G 4 are the smeared material tangent matrices defined by MID1, MID2, and
MID4, respectively. The generalized stress-strain relations are then given as
f
=
m
hG 1 h 2 G 4
h 2 G 4 IG 2
where f , m , , and are the membrane and transverse shear forces, the bending moments, strains on the
middle surface of the shell, and curvatures, respectively.
PSHELL 926
in Marc contains both membrane and transverse shear parts. Unless users want to adjust transverse
shear stiffness, there is no need to define a new type of materials for it. Set MID3=MID1 to take into
account the transverse shear stiffness. Otherwise, set MID3=0.
G1
Generally G 1 , G 2 and G 4 can be described by ANISOTROPIC option. However, the tangent matrix
defined with ANISOTROPIC is a 6 x 6 matrix for fully 3D cases. The G 1 , G 2 , and G 4 calculated here are
5 x 5 matrices because the third stress component normal to the shell surfaces is zero. Marc requires that
all components in the third row and the third column of the 6 x 6 matrix defined in ANISOTROPIC option
are entered as zero if the material is used with PSHELL option.
In a transient analysis, the structural mass is calculated from the density using the membrane thickness
and membrane material properties. If MID1 = 0, then the density is obtained from the MID2 materials.
To take into account the effect of thermal expansion, the coefficients of thermal expansion defined by
MID1 and MID2 are used. Transverse shear and membrane-bending coupling are not affected.
Please note that, if either MID1, MID2, or MID3 is zero, some of diagonal terms in the tangent matrix
will be zero. This results in singular stiffness matrix. In this case, the program will automatically fill a
small nonzero numbers in these diagonal terms to overcome the problem.
PSHELL assumes the constant transverse shear strain distribution through the thickness. Therefore, any
input with TSHEAR parameter is ignored for the elements using PSHELL option.
In order to take into account the effect of thermal expansion, the temperature and the gradient of
temperature need to be defined. Temperature in Marc is automatically stored as the first state variable.
The state variable number used to store temperature gradient is defined in the 3rd data field of the 2nd
data block. See the STATE VARS parameter, and the INITIAL STATE and CHANGE STATE options
for details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PSHELL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of data sets to be read in.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input; defaults to standard input (unit 5).
11-15
3rd
State variable number used to store the gradient of temperature through

the shell thickness. Must be greater than 1. Otherwise, the temperature
gradient is zero.
927 PSHELL
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
PSHELL property identification number
6-10
2nd
MID1
Material identification number for membrane
11-20
3rd
Membrane thickness. Default is the thickness defined using

GEOMETRY option
21-25
4th
MID2
Material identification number for bending
26-35
5th
12I/T**3 Ratio of the actual bending moment of inertia of the shell (I)
to the bending moment of inertia of a homogeneous shell
(T**3/12). The default is 1.0.
36-40
6th
MID3
Material identification number for transverse shear
41-50
7th
TS/T
Ratio of transverse shear thickness TS to membrane

thickness of the shell (T). The default is 0.833333.
51-55
8th
MID4
Material identification number for

membrane-bending coupling.
56-65
9th
Nonstructural mass per unit area.
66-75
10th
Fiber distance for stress calculation. Default is on the middle surface.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements using this set of PSHELL data.
REBAR 928
Define Rebar Positions, Areas, and Orientations
REBAR
Description
This option defines the rebar positions, areas, and orientations. It can be used with the REBAR user
subroutine which allows more general rebar definitions at element integration point level. Any nonzero
value defined by the REBAR user subroutine overwrites the corresponding values defined this
REBAR option.
Rebar Layer Concept
Cord-reinforced composites are characterized by a group of reinforcing cords with arbitrary spatial
orientations embedded in various matrix materials. The different constituents may have different
mechanical properties. Two typical examples of the cord-reinforces composites are tires and cordreinforced concretes. In modeling such materials, the rebar technique is very useful.
The basic idea of rebar layer concept contains that (1) the reinforcing cords and the matrix materials of
the composites are represented independently by different types of elements along with different
constitutive models, (2) the reinforcing cords within the elements modeling these cords (the so-called
rebar elements) are assumed to be in the form of layers, and (3) the rebar elements are then embedded
into the matrix elements. The compatibility between the cord elements and the matrix elements is
enforced by either of the following two options.
1. Superimposing solid rebar elements on corresponding solid matrix elements using the same
A list of solid rebar elements is available (see element types 23, 46, 47, 48, 142, 143, 144, 145,
and 146). They are empty 4- or 8-node quadrilaterals (2-D) and 4- or 8-node hexahedrons (3-D).
You can place reinforcing cord layers within the elements. Each solid rebar element is then
superimposed on a solid matrix element. The two elements share the same space with the same
element connectivity (therefore, the same element nodes). The compatibility condition between
the reinforcements and the matrix materials is then automatically enforced.
2. Embed membrane rebar elements into solid matrix elements using the INSERT option.
A list of membrane rebar elements is available (see element types 147, 148, 165, 166, 167, 168,
169, and 170). They are empty 2- or 3-node line elements (2-D) and 4- or 8-node quadrilaterals
(3-D). You can place reinforcing cord layers within these empty elements. These elements are
then embedded into their corresponding solid elements representing the matrix materials.
Independent meshes can be used for the rebar membrane elements and the matrix elements. The
INSERT option is used to enforce the compatibility between two different meshes (see the
INSERT model definition option in this manual for details).
To model a single reinforcing member, truss elements (for example, element types 9, 51, and 65) can be
used with the INSERT option.
Option 1 does not introduce additional degrees of freedom because the rebar element shares the same
nodes as that of the corresponding matrix element.
929 REBAR
Option 2 may increase the node numbers because of the independent mesh of rebar membrane elements.
Though the degrees of freedom of these extra nodes are constrained by the INSERT option, it may still
be somewhat more expensive because the INSERT option can increase the bandwidth of the solution
matrix. The advantage of Option 2 is that it provides more flexibility in defining arbitrary rebar
orientations and in rebar element visualization.
Rebar Property Definition
For solid rebar element types (see element types 23, 46, 47, 48, 142, 143, 144, 145, and 146), Figure 3-1
illustrates a single rebar layer within an element. The shape of the rebar layer and its position within the
element can be defined by the Rebar Orientation Type of they layer and by the relative position of the
layer along the relevant element edges in thickness direction.
For membrane rebar element types (see element types 147, 148, 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, and 170), the
shape of a rebar layer and its spatial position are the same as those of the element containing the layer.
No input on the Rebar Orientation Type or on the relative position of the layer is needed.
The maximum number of reinforcing cord layers within a rebar element is 5. By adding more rebar
elements in the same spatial location with the same element connectivity, this limit can be extended to a
larger number.
For each rebar layer, the user is required to define cord material identification number, cross section area
of the cords, density of the cords, and an angle (defining spatial orientation of the cords). is the angle
between the cord and the projection of a predefined reference axis on the rebar layer plane. See Figure 3-2
for a description of the rebar angle of a single rebar layer.
A check list of the rebar properties generally required follows:
1. Material identification number.
2. Cross-section of the reinforcing cords.
3. Density of the reinforcing cords.
4. Angle between the cord and the projection of a predefined reference axis on the rebar layer plane.
5. Rebar Orientation Type (not needed for rebar membrane elements).
6. Relative position of the cord layer within the element (not needed for rebar membrane elements).
If the properties from items 2 to 6 do not change on the layer, only one set of properties are required.
Otherwise, set the 7th field of the 3rd data block to 2 for 2-D or 3 for 3-D and define these properties at
all relevant edges (or at corner nodes for rebar membrane elements. See Figure 3-1 for edge definition of
solid rebar elements.
In many cases, reinforcing cords can only support tensile force. That is the so-called micro-buckling
behavior of cords. Consideration of the behavior can be activated by entering a 1 in the 8th field of the 3rd
data block. Factor to reduce rebar compression stiffness is defined in the 9th field of the 3rd data block.
REBAR 930
2-D
Edge 2
4
2
1
Edge 1
Edge 2
1
1
2
1
Rebar Orientation Type 1
2
Edge 1
3-D
Edge 3
Edge 1
5
3
1
Edge 3
1
4
Edge 4
Edge 4
6
Edge 2
Edge 1
2
5
Edge 3
Edge 2
7
Edge 1
3
2
3
Edge 4
Figure 3-19
Description of a Single Rebar Layer Within an Element
Edge 2
931 REBAR
Direction Normal to the Rebar Layer
Reference Axis
Rebar Direction
-
Projection of Reference Axis
onto Rebar Layer Plane
y
x
Figure 3-20
Description of Rebar Orientation on a Single Rebar Layer
Rebar Pre- and Postprocessing
Marc creates a file named jid_rebar.mfd for rebar layer verification purposes if a 1 is entered in the
3rd field of the 2nd data block. All rebar layers and their orientations can be seen with the Marc Mentat
graphic user interface.
Directly plotting rebar results with the Marc Mentat graphic user interface can be confusing as there
could be multiple rebar layers within one element and different layers could have different spatial
orientations. It is recommended to use post codes 471 and 481 (see the POST model definition option for
a more detailed description) to output the stress tensors of specific rebar layers into the post file. In the
2nd field of the 3rd data block of the POST option is the global layer identification number which is
defined by the REBAR option in the 7th field of the 4th data block. The stress and the direction of rebar
can be viewed using the tensor plot option in the Marc Mentat graphic user interface to process the
principal values and directions of the rebar stress tensor. The only nonzero principal stress of the stress
tensor is the value of the rebar stress on the specific layer. The corresponding principal direction is the
rebar direction. Both the principal value and direction are averaged within an element.
The angle between rebar and the project of reference axis on rebar layer plane 90 90 , defined
at the 5th field of the 4th data block, changes with the deformation. This angle can be postprocessed with
post code 487.
REBAR 932
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the word REBAR.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of data sets to be read in.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input; defaults to standard input (unit 5).
11-15
3rd
Enter 1
to create a file named jid_rebar.mfd for rebar layer

verification purposes.
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are given for each data set.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Rebar data set ID.
6-10
2nd
Number of rebar layers to be read in. Maximum is 5.
11-15
3rd
Enter 2
if the considered structure is an axisymmetric expansion of

cylinders made of bias plies and the cords are nearly
inextensible relative to matrix materials. In this case, all
parameters below describe the cylinders from which the
considered structure was made. The rebar positions, areas, and
orientations for real structure is calculated by Marc.
When using cylinder expansion option in rebar data definition,
the reference axis needs to be the symmetric axis of the original
cylinder, and this needs to pass through the origin of the
coordinates.
Enter 3
In a 3-D axisymmetric structure with the x-axis (1,0,0) as the

axisymmetric axis and the reference axis, if the rebar layer is
vertical to (1,0,0), the program internally switches the reference
axis to (0,1,0).
16-25
4th
First direction cosine of reference axis.
26-35
5th
Second direction cosine of reference axis.
36-45
6th
Third direction cosine of reference axis.

The default reference axis is (1, 0, 0).
Notes:
Reference axis should not be perpendicular to rebar layer.

If AXITO3D option is used, the reference axis must be (1,0,0).
If the rebar layer is vertical to (1,0,0), the program internally
switches the reference axis to (0,1,0).
46-50
7th
Enter 0 (default) if no skew type of rebar layers are to be defined.
933 REBAR
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 2
for 2-D and for 2-D membrane elements (types 165 - 167).
Enter 3
for 3-D and for 3-D membrane elements (types 147 and 148).
Set to 0 if the third field of the third data block is 2.
to activate the micro-buckling behavior of rebar cords in
compression.
51-55
8th
Enter 1
56-65
9th
Factor used to reduce rebar stiffness in compression. Used only if a 1 is

entered in the 8th field of the data block. The default if 0.02.
Data block 4 is given for each rebar layer.

4th data block
1-5
1st
Material ID.
6-15
2nd
pr
----------- , relative position of the rebar layer at edge 1 (ratio of the distance
T
between the reference surface (edge) and the rebar layer to the distance
across the element); not used for membrane elements.
16-25
3rd
A, area of cross section of each rebar at edge 1.
26-35
4th
S, number of rebars per unit length in each layer at edge 1.

Equivalent thickness of the rebar layer is A S .
36-45
5th
Angle () between the rebar and the projection of the reference axis on
rebar layer plane [-90, 90] at edge 1. See Figure 3-2.
46-55
6th
Radius of the cylinder; only used when the third field of the 3rd data block
is 2.
56-60
7th
Enter the global identification number of the rebar layer. Use for
postprocessing only.
61-65
8th
Enter the rebar layer orientation type. Not used for membrane elements.
2-D
Enter 1
if this rebar layer is similar to the 1,2 and 3,4 edges of the
element; the thickness direction is from the 1,2 edge to 3,4
edge of the element.
Enter 2
if this rebar layer is similar to the 1,4 and 2,3 edges of the
element; the thickness direction is from the 1,4 edge to 2,3
edge of the element.
REBAR 934
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3-D
Enter 1
if this rebar layer is similar to the 1,2,3,4 and 5,6,7,8 faces of

the element; the thickness direction is from the 1,2,3,4 face to
5,6,7,8 face of the element.
Enter 2

the element; the thickness direction is from the 1,4,8,5 face to
Enter 3

the element, the thickness direction is from the 2,1,5,6 face to
5th data block is only needed when the 7th field of the third data block is not zero.
5th data block
1-10
1st
Relative position of the rebar layer at edge 2. Not used for membrane
elements.
11-20
2nd
Area of cross-section of rebar at edge 2.
21-30
3rd
Number of rebars per unit length at edge 2.
31-40
4th
Angle between the rebar and the projection of the reference axis on rebar
layer plane (-90,90) at edge 2.
6th and 7th data blocks are only needed when the 7th field of the third data block is 3.
6th data block
1-10
1st
elements.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
7th data block

1-10
1st
elements.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
8th data block

Enter a list of elements.
935 ORIENTATION
Define Orientation of Elements
ORIENTATION
Description
The ORIENTATION option is used to specify orientation angle data as follows:
1. Edge orientation types (EDGE i-j). For two-dimensional elements (both continuum and shells),
you choose a particular element edge with respect to which the preferred coordinates are
specified. With these types, the direction vector along the edge from the first to the second edge
node is projected onto the surface tangent plane (xy plane if continuum, or V 1 V 2 plane if shell) at
each integration point.
The first preferred direction is given by a rotation about the surface normal (z axis if continuum,
3
V
axis if shell) equal to the orientation angle. The third preferred direction is given by the surface
normal, and the second preferred direction is given by a cross product of the third and first
directions. See Figure 3-21.
2. Global intersecting plane types (ij PLANE). These types are also for two-dimensional elements.
Here, a particular global coordinate plane (selected by the orientation type) is intersected with the
surface tangent plane.
The first preferred direction is given by a rotation about the surface normal from this intersection
by an amount equal to the orientation angle. The third preferred direction is given by the surface
normal and the second direction by a cross product of the third and first. See Figure 3-22.
3. User-defined intersecting plane. These types are also for two-dimensional elements. Here, a
plane, defined by you, with one coordinate direction and a user-defined vector or by two userdefined vectors is intersected with the surface tangent plane.
The first preferred direction is given by a rotation about the surface normal from this intersection
by an amount equal to the orientation angle. The third preferred direction is given by the surface
normal and the second direction by a cross product of the third and first. See Figure 3-23.
4. Three-dimensional orientation types (3D ANISO). For three-dimensional elements, you directly
enter vectors in the first and second preferred directions. The third preferred direction is given by
a cross product of the first and second direction.
If a nonzero orientation angle is defined, the first and the second preferred directions are given by
a rotation of the two corresponding user vectors about the third direction. See Figure 3-24.
5. UORIENT orientation type. Here, you define the transformation matrix between global
coordinates (if continuum elements) or local coordinates (if beams, plates or shells) directly in the
ORIENT user subroutine.
6. UORIENT2 orientation type. Here, you define the preferred system directly in the ORIENT2 user
subroutine.
ORIENTATION 936
7. Three-dimensional local orientation (3D LOCAL). For hexahedral elements, a local element
system is used. This system can be rotated around the three local axes. The local system is defined
as follows. See Figure 3-25. The first preferred direction joins the centroids of faces 4-1-5-8 and
3-2-6-7. A second vector joins faces 1-2-6-5 and 4-3-7-8. The third preferred direction is given
by the cross product of the first preferred direction and this vector. The second preferred direction
is given by the cross product of the third and first preferred directions. This system is then rotated
around the three local axes by the three given angles.
8. Closest point on curve (CURVE). One or more NURBS curves are used for defining the preferred
system. A list of curves are given as input. These curves must be defined with the CURVES model
definition option and only the NURBS variant is allowed. Using the centroid of the element, the
closest point on any of the given curves is found. The first preferred direction is given by the
tangent vector at this point. For 2-D elements, the second preferred direction is given by the cross
product of the global z direction and the first preferred direction. For 3-D elements, this option is
only supported for solid shell elements and solid composite elements. The third preferred
direction is given by the thickness direction and the second preferred direction by the cross
product between the third and first preferred direction. The first preferred direction is recalculated
as the cross product between the second and third preferred directions to insure that we have an
orthogonal system.
Notes:
The ORIENTATION option is ignored for 1-D elements, gaps, pipe bend, shear panel and
cable elements.
The ORIENTATION option is ignored for 2-D continuum composite element types 151-154.
The preferred material orientation is obtained by rotating the element local coordinates on
an orientation angle about the direction normal to material layers. See the COMPOSITE
model definition option and Marc Volume B: Element Library for details.
The ORIENTATION option is turned on for composite elements. If no ORIENTATION data
is given for these elements, the default is no preferred orientation; that is, the default
material orientation of the element.
The ORIENTATION option UORIENT is turned on for particular material numbers if the
IANELS flag is set during data input (see ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC,
MOONEY and HYPOELASTIC options). You can override this default by entering your
own ORIENTATION option.
When visualizing the results, one can request that the generalized stresses and strains are
in either the element system or the preferred material coordinate system defined here.
For non 3-D continuum elements, such as 3-d shell, 2-D plane stress, 2-D plane and
axisymmetric without twist, the material directions allowed have to be the rotation around
the axis vertical to the element plane. Otherwise, the results will be incorrect.
937 ORIENTATION
n = Normal to surface
tangent plane
Node I
Integration point
Node J
Direction 1 of
preferred coordinate
system
Z
Element surface
Y
X
Figure 3-21
Edge I-J Orientation Type
= Orientation angle (positive

right-hand rotation about n)
= Ply angle (if COMPOSITE)
ORIENTATION 938
n - Normal to surface
tangent plane
Global ZX plane
Surface tangent
plane
Direction 1 of
system
Intersection of
two planes
Z
Y
X
Figure 3-22
ZX Plane Orientation Type
Element surface
= orientation angle (positive

= ply angle (if COMPOSITE)
939 ORIENTATION
n = Normal to surface
tangent plane
u = User-defined vector
Surface tangent
plane
global
X
Direction 1 of
system
Element surface
Z
Y
X
Figure 3-23
W = Orientation angle (positive

= ply angle (if COMPOSITE)
XU Plane Orientation Type
ORIENTATION 940
Direction 2 of preferred coordinate system

U2 = User vector 2
U3 = U1 x U2
Direction 1 of preferred coordinate system
U1 = User vector 1
Y
= Orientation angle
X
Figure 3-24
Three-dimensional ANISO Orientation Type
8
7
5
Figure 3-25
3D LOCAL Orientation Type
941 ORIENTATION
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ORIENTATION.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of orientation angle data sets to follow.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input. Defaults to input file.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each angle data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter one of the following to specify orientation angle type.

EDGE 1-2
EDGE 2-3
EDGE 3-4
EDGE 3-1
EDGE 4-1
XY PLANE
YZ PLANE
ZX PLANE
XU PLANE
YU PLANE
ZU PLANE
UU PLANE
UORIENT (activate user subroutine ORIENT)
3D ANISO
COORD SYS
3D LOCAL
CURVE
UORIENT2 (activate user subroutine ORIENT2)
11-20
2nd
Orientation angle.
For EDGE style orientations:

21-30
3rd
First component of user vector 1 in global coordinates.
31-40
4th
Second component of user vector 1 in global coordinates.
ORIENTATION 942
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
Third component of user vector 1 in global coordinates.
51-60
3rd
61-70
4th
71-80
5th
For XU PLANE, YU PLANE, ZU PLANE, UU PLANE, and 3-D ANISO, complete the following:
21-30
1st
31-40
2nd
41-50
3rd
component of user vector 1 with respect to global coordinates.
For UU PLANE and 3-D ANISO, complete the following:

51-60
4th
61-70
5th
71-80
6th
component of user vector 2 with respect to global coordinates.
For COORD SYS style orientation:

21-25
3rd
Enter the coordinate system ID from COORD SYSTEM option.
For 3D LOCAL, complete the following:

21-30
3rd
Rotation around local x axis
31-40
4th
Rotation around local y axis
41-50
5th
Rotation around local z axis
For CURVE, complete the following:

21-25
3rd
Enter 1 to flip the orientation of the curves.
3a data block
Enter a list of curves. Only for CURVE option.
4th data block
Enter a list of elements to be associated with this orientation angle.
943 POWDER (with TABLE input)

Define Powder Material Model
Description
This option allows you to input data associated with Marcs powder material model. The material
parameters can be entered here or through the UPOWDR user subroutine. The influences of temperature
and relative density are entered through the TABLE option. The data entered here is at the beginning of
the analysis; for example, at the temperatures given through the INITIAL STATE option and the relative
density given through the RELATIVE DENSITY option.
Two powder models, the Shima-Oyane and the exponential cap powder model are supported through
this option.
The yield function for the Shima powder material is:
p2 1 / 2
1 3
F = --- --- S ij S ij + -----2
y
2

where s is the deviatoric stresses and p is the hydrostatic stress. and are material properties which can
be expressed as:
b
b4
q4
= b1 + b2 3
= q1 + q2 3
where is the relative density.

This data is entered through this option. Additional details can be found in Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information., Chapter 7, Material Library, Powder Material.
Notes:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word POWDER.
11-20
2nd
POWDER (with TABLE input) 944

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of powder material data to be defined (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the logical unit number for data input. Defaults to input data file.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if powder coefficients do not have table IDs (default).

Enter 2 if powder coefficients have table IDs (include 9a and 11a or 9b
data blocks).
Data blocks 3 through 12 are repeated as sets for each powder material.
Data block 3, 4th entry (Cap Softening Flag) is used only for the Exponential Cap model.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd
Enter one of the following numbers

1 - Shima-Oyane powder model
2 - Exponential Cap model
16-20
4th
Cap Softening Flag (default is 0).

Set to 1 to allow cap softening.
21-32
5th
Compressive yield stress, Gamma (, Beta (, Viscosity and their respective table IDs are required
only for the Shima-Oyane.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio.
21-30
3rd
Mass density
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Compressive yield stress.
51-60
6th
Gamma (
61-70
7th
Beta
71-80
8th
Viscosity.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID for Youngs modulus.
6-10
2nd
Enter table ID for Poissons ratio.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Enter table ID for coefficient of thermal expansion.
21-25
5th
Enter table ID for compressive yield stress.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Enter table ID for viscosity.
The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
6th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
Mass density.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter table ID for thermal conductivity.
6-10
2nd
Enter table ID for specific heat.
11-15
3rd
Enter table ID for mass density.
8a through 11a data blocks are to be entered only for Shima-Oyane model.
8a data block
1-10
1st
q1
11-20
2nd
q2
21-30
3rd
q3
31-40
4th
q4
9a data block is only entered if the 3rd entry of the 2nd data block is 2.
9a data block
1-5
1st
Table ID for q1. (Currently not used).
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10a data block

1-10
1st
b1
11-20
2nd
b2
21-30
3rd
b3
31-40
4th
b4
11a data block is only entered if the 3rd entry of the 2nd data block is 2.
11a data block
1-5
1st
Table ID for b1. (Currently not used.)
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Data blocks 8b through 11b are to be entered only for Exponential Cap model.
Data block 8b entries 5 and 6 and data block 10b entries 7 and 8 should only be entered for specifying
a non-associative flow. Set to 0 for an associative flow.
8b data block
1-10
1st
A1
Shear failure parameter.

Set to -1 if you have experimental data which you
want to curve fit.
11-20
2nd
A2

Not needed if A1 is set to -1.
21-30
3rd
A3

31-40
4th
A4

41-50
5th
A2PF
A2 coefficient of flow function.
51-60
6th
A4PF
A4 coefficient of flow function.
61-70
7th
Kinematic Hardening Constant.
71-80
8th
Kinematic Hardening Shift.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9b data block
Only if 2nd data block entry 3 is a 2.
1-5
1st
Table ID for A1
Shear failure parameter. (Currently not used).
Table ID for curve fitting data I 1 vs J 2 if A1 is set to -1.

6-10
2nd
Table ID for A2
11-15
3rd
Table ID for A3
16-20
4th
Table ID for A4
21-25
5th
Table ID for A2PF A2 coefficient of flow function. (Currently not used).
26-30
6th
Table ID for A4PF A4 coefficient of flow function. (Currently not used).
31-35
7th
Table ID for H
Kinematic Hardening Constant. (Currently not used).
36-40
8th
Table ID for N
Kinematic Hardening Shift. (Currently not used).
10b data block

1-10
1st
Cap eccentricity.
11-20
2nd
X0
Cap initial position.
21-30
3rd
Vol. Plastic strain parameter.
31-40
4th
D1
41-50
5th
D2
51-60
6th
Strength Ratio.
61-70
7th
RPF
Cap eccentricity of flow function.
71-80
8th
SPF
Strength Ratio of flow function.
11b data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for R
Cap eccentricity. (Currently not used).
6-10
2nd
Table ID for X0
Cap initial position. (Currently not used).
11-15
3rd
Table ID for W
Vol. Plastic strain parameter. (Currently not used).
Table ID for curve fitting data X vs vp if A1 is set to -1.

16-20
4th
Table ID for D1
21-25
5th
Table ID for D2

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
Table ID for S
Strength Ratio. (Currently not used).
31-35
7th
Table ID for RPF
Cap eccentricity of flow function (Currently not

used).
36-40
8th
Table ID for SPF
Strength Ratio of flow function. (Currently not used).
12th data block

Enter a list of elements to be associated with this material definition.
949 POWDER
POWDER
input style.
Description
This option allows you to input data associated with Marcs powder material model. The material
parameters can be entered here or through the UPOWDR user subroutine. The influences of temperature
and relative density are entered through the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS and DENSITY EFFECTS
options. The data entered here is at the beginning of the analysis; for example, at the temperatures given
through the INITIAL STATE option and the relative density given through the RELATIVE DENSITY
option.
Two powder models, the Shima-Oyane and the exponential cap powder model are supported through
this option.
The yield function for the Shima powder material is:
p2 1 / 2
1 3
F = --- --- S ij S ij + -----2
y
2

where s is the deviatoric stresses and p is the hydrostatic stress. and are material properties which can
be expressed as:
b
b4
q4
= b1 + b2 3
= q1 + q2 3
where is the relative density.

User Information., Chapter 7, Material Library, Powder Material.
Notes:
POWDER 950
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word POWDER.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of powder material data to be defined (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the logical unit number for data input. Defaults to input data file.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if powder coefficients do not have table IDs (default)

Enter 2 if powder coefficients have table IDs (include 9a and 11a or 9b and
11b data blocks).
Data block 3, 4th entry (Cap Softening Flag) is used only for the Exponential Cap model.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd
Enter one of the following numbers:

1 - Shima-Oyane powder model
2 - Exponential Cap model
16-20
4th
Cap Softening Flag (0 is default).

Set to 1 to allow cap softening.
21-32
5th
Compressive yield stress, Gamma (, Beta (, and Viscosity are required only for the
Shima-Oyane model.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio.
21-30
3rd
Mass density.
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Compressive yield stress.
51-60
6th
Gamma (
61-70
7th
Beta
71-80
8th
Viscosity.
951 POWDER
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

The 5th data block is only required in a coupled thermal-stress analysis.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
Mass density.
6th data block

1-10
1st
q1
11-20
2nd
q2
21-30
3rd
q3
31-40
4th
q4
7th data block

1-10
1st
b1
11-20
2nd
b2
21-30
3rd
b3
31-40
4th
b4
Data blocks 6b and 7b are to be entered only for the Exponential Cap model.
6b data block
1-10
1st
A1
- Shear failure parameter.
11-20
2nd
A2
21-30
3rd
A3
31-40
4th
A4
41-50
5th
A2PF - A2 coefficient of flow function.
51-60
6th
A4PF - A4 coefficient of flow function.
61-70
7th
- Kinematic Hardening Constant.
71-80
8th
- Kinematic Hardening Shift.
7tb data block

1-10
1st
- Cap eccentricity.
11-20
2nd
X0
- Cap initial position.
21-30
3rd
- Vol. Plastic strain parameter.
31-40
4th
D1
41-50
5th
D2
POWDER 952
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
- Strength Ratio.
61-70
7th
RPF
- Cap eccentricity of flow function.
71-80
8th
SPF
- Strength Ratio of flow function.
8a data block
Enter a list of elements to be associated with this material definition.
953 DENSITY EFFECTS

Define Effects of Density on Powder Materials
DENSITY EFFECTS
input style. If table driven input is used, the POWDER option should
reference tables that provide temperature and density dependent behavior.
Description
This option defines the variation of powder material data with respect to the relative density. The base
values are those read in through the POWDER option at the initial state. The data in this option is used in
conjunction with the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option to give bilinear variations in the material
properties. The relative density can be entered using one of the following options:
a. The variation of a particular property relative to its base value with respect to the relative
density as a piecewise linear curve. Breakpoints must be given in ascending order of relative
density.
b. The particular value relative to its base value and with respect to the relative density lying on
the relevant curve are input directly. Data points must be given in increasing order of relative
density. This option is flagged by entering the word DATA on the first block.
Note:
In this option, relative density is the density relative to the fully compacted density having
the range (0-1). The relative Youngs modulus, Poissons ratio, relative conductivity, and
relative specific heat are their respective values relative to those given on the POWDER
option at the base temperature.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
Enter the words DENSITY EFFECTS.
16-80
2nd
OPTION A
2a data block
1-5
1st
Number of slopes of relative Youngs modulus versus relative

density curve.
6-10
2nd
Number of slopes of relative Poissons ratio versus relative density curve.
11-15
3rd
Number of slopes of relative Conductivity versus relative density curve

(coupled analysis only).
DENSITY EFFECTS 954

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Number of slopes of relative Specific Heat versus relative density curve

(coupled analysis only).
21-25
5th
Material type identification number for cross-reference with POWDER

3a data block
The number entered in the first field of data block 2a defines the number of blocks required in data
block 3a.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of relative Youngs modulus versus the relative density
curve.
16-30
2nd
Enter the relative density at which the above slope becomes operative.
4a data block
The number in the second field of data block 2a defines the number of blocks required in data block 4a.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of relative Poissons ratio versus the relative density curve.
16-30
2nd
5a data block
The number in the third field of data block 2a defines the number of blocks required in data block 5a.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of relative conductivity versus relative density.
16-30
2nd
6a data block
The number in the fourth field of data block 2a defines the number of blocks required in data block 6a.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of the relative specific heat versus relative density.
16-30
2nd
Relative density at which this slope becomes operative.
Option B
2b data block
1-5
1st
Number of data points on relative Youngs modulus versus relative

density curve.
6-10
2nd
Number of data points on relative Poisson ratio versus relative density

curve.
11-15
3rd
Number of data points on relative Conductivity versus relative density

curve (coupled analysis only).
16-20
4th
Number of data points on relative specific heat versus relative density

curve (coupled analysis only).
21-25
5th
Material type identification number for cross-reference with POWDER

955 DENSITY EFFECTS

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block
The number in the first field of data block 2b defines the number of blocks required in data block 3b.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the relative Youngs modulus.
16-30
2nd
Enter the associated relative density.
4b data block
The number in the second field of data block 2b defines the number of blocks required in data block 4b.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the relative Poissons ratio.
16-30
2nd
5b data block
The number in the third field of data block 2b defines the number of blocks required in data block 5b.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the relative conductivity.
16-30
2nd
6b data block
The number in the fourth field of data block 2b defines the number of blocks required in data block 6b.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the relative specific heat.
16-30
2nd
RELATIVE DENSITY (with TABLE Input) 956

Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or Coupled Thermal Stress Analysis
RELATIVE DENSITY (with TABLE

Input)
Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or

Coupled Thermal Stress Analysis
Description
This option allows you to define initial relative density in a powder material analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words RELATIVE D.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if the table input options is used.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of initial relative density data to be entered (optional)
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of relative density data.

3rd data block

1-5
1st
Not used: enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter the method:

11-15
3rd
Enter the number of geometric types used to define this boundary

condition.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Enter unique label associated with this initial condition. This label will be
Enter the first magnitude of the initial relative density.
Table ID associated with the initial relative density.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
957 RELATIVE DENSITY (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 - Element IDs
7th data block

1-80
data block.
RELATIVE DENSITY 958

RELATIVE DENSITY
Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or

Coupled Thermal Stress Analysis
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define initial relative density in a powder material analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words RELATIVE DENSITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets to be input with this option.
6-10
2nd
Enter the logical unit number of the data input. Defaults to input data file.
The 3rd, 4th and 5th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Initial relative density.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements to be associated with the above defined initial
relative density.
5th data block
Enter a list of integration points for which the defined initial relative
density is used.
6th data block
This data block is only necessary if there are either numerically integrated beams or shells in the mesh.
Enter a list of layer points for which the defined initial relative density is
used.
959 SOIL (with TABLE Input)

Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis
Description
This option allows you to define material data for soil analysis in conjunction with the PORE parameter.
It is assumed that the soil skeleton is composed of a collection of randomly oriented grains resulting in
effectively isotropic or orthotropic behavior. You must define here both the material properties of the soil
and the fluid. For additional details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SOIL.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data used to define the soil data.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number of input of soil data.

Defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing.
6-15
2nd
Enter one of the following soil models:

ELASTIC
linear elastic.
NON LINEAR
nonlinear elastic via HYPELA2.
CAMCLAY
Cam clay model.
VON MISES
von Mises
LIN MOHRC
Linear Mohr-Coulomb
PBL MOHRC
ORTHOTROPIC orthotropic elastic

EXPONENTIAL exponential cap model
16-25
3rd
Not used.
SOIL (with TABLE Input) 960

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
4rd
Enter 1 if anisotropic linear elastic model is used. Material properties

should be entered via the ANELAS or HOOKLW user subroutines.
31-35
5th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
6th
Enter 10 to allow cap softening for exponential cap model.
41-52
7th
The 4th through 11th data blocks are entered only if the second field of the third data block is
not orthotropic.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
Poissons ratio.
21-30
3rd
Mass density.
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Yield strength.
51-60
6th
For Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, parameter.
61-70
7th
Kf Bulk modulus of fluid.
71-80
8th
Dynamic viscosity of fluid.
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Table ID for yield strength.
26-30
6th
Table ID for Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, parameter.
31-35
7th
Table ID for bulk modulus of fluid.
36-40
8th
Table ID for the fluid viscosity.
6th data block

1-10
1st
Permeability of the soil.
11-20
2nd
For Cam clay, enter virgin compression ratio.
21-30
3rd
For Cam clay, enter recompression ratio.
31-40
4th
For Cam clay, enter slope of critical state line.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for permeability of the soil.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
Data blocks 8 through 11 are only required for the Exponential Cap Model. Entries 5 and 6 on data
blocks 8 and 9 should only be entered for specifying a non-associative flow. Set to 0 for an associative
flow.
8th data block
1-10
1st
A1
11-20
2nd
A2
21-30
3rd
A3
31-40
4th
A4
41-50
5th
A2PF
- A2 coefficient of flow function.
51-60
6th
A4PF
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
9th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for A1
6-10
2nd
Table ID for A2
11-15
3rd
Table ID for A3
16-20
4th
Table ID for A4
21-25
5th
Table ID for
A2PF
26-30
6th
Table ID for
A4PF
31-35
7th
Table ID for H
36-40
8th
Table ID for N
10th data block

1-10
1st
- Cap eccentricity.
11-20
2nd
X0
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
D1

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
D2
51-60
6th
- Strength Ratio.
61-70
7th
RPF
71-80
8th
SPF
11th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for R
- Cap eccentricity.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for X0
11-15
3rd
Table ID for W
16-20
4th
Table ID for D1
21-25
5th
Table ID for D2
26-30
6th
Table ID for S
- Strength Ratio.
31-35
7th
Table ID for RPF - Cap eccentricity of flow function
36-40
8th
Table ID for SPF - Strength Ratio of flow function.
Data blocks 12 through 17 are only required for the Orthotropic Model.
12th data block
1-10
1st
E11 Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
E22 Youngs modulus.
21-30
3rd
E33 Youngs modulus.
31-40
4th
12 Poissons ratio.
41-50
5th
23 Poissons ratio.
51-60
6th
31 Poissons ratio.
61-70
7th
13th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for E11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for E22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for E33.
16-20
4th
Table ID for 12.
21-25
5th
Table ID for 23.
26-30
6th
Table ID for 31.
31-35
7th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
14th data block

1-10
1st
G12 Shear modulus.
11-20
2nd
G23 Shear modulus.
21-30
3rd
G31 Shear modulus.
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
15th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for G12.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for G23.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for G31.
16-20
4th
Table ID for 11.
21-25
5th
Table ID for 22.
26-30
6th
Table ID for 33.
16th data block

1-10
1st
K11 Absolute permeability of the soil.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Fluid density.
51-60
6th
17th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for K11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for K22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for K33.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Table ID for .
21-25
5th
Table ID for f.
26-30
6th
Table ID for Kf.
18th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with this particular soil data.
965 SOIL
SOIL
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define material data for soil analysis in conjunction with the PORE parameter.
It is assumed that the soil skeleton is composed of a collection of randomly oriented grains resulting in
effectively isotropic behavior. You must define here both the material properties of the soil and the fluid.
For additional details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-4
1st
Enter the word SOIL.
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data used to define the soil data.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number of input of soil data.

Defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing.
6-15
2nd
Enter one of the following soil models:

ELASTIC
linear elastic.
NON LINEAR
nonlinear elastic via HYPELA2.
CAMCLAY
Cam clay model.
VON MISES
von Mises.
LIN MOHRC
Linear Mohr-Coulomb.
PLB MOHRC
Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb.
ORTHOTROPIC Orthotropic elastic.

EXPONENTIAL exponential cap model
16-25
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
SOIL 966
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
4th
Enter 1 if anisotropic linear elastic model is used. Material properties

should be entered via the ANELAS or HOOKLW user subroutines.
31-35
5th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
6th
Enter 10 to allow cap softening for exponential cap model.
41-52
7th
Data blocks 4 through 7 are entered only if the second field of the third data block is not orthotropic.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Youngs modulus of soil.
11-20
2nd
Poisson ratio of soil.
21-30
3rd
Mass density.
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Yield strength.
51-60
6th
For Mohr-Coulomb yield criteria, parameter.
61-70
7th
Bulk modulus of fluid.
71-80
8th
5th data block

1-10
1st
Permeability of the soil.
11-20
2nd
Virgin compression ratio.
21-30
3rd
Recompression ratio.
31-40
4th
Slope of critical state line.
Data blocks 6 and 7 are only required for the Exponential Cap Model. Entries 5 and 6 on data block 6
should only be entered for specifying a non-associative flow. Set to 0 for an associative flow.
6th data block
1-10
1st
A1
11-20
2nd
A2
21-30
3rd
A3
31-40
4th
A4
41-50
5th
A2PF
51-60
6th
A4PF
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
967 SOIL
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-10
1st
- Cap eccentricity.
11-20
2nd
X0
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
D1
41-50
5th
D2
51-60
6th
- Strength Ratio.
61-70
7th
RPF
71-80
8th
SPF
Data blocks 8 through 10 are only required for the Orthotropic Model.
8th data block
1-10
1st
E11 Youngs modulus.
11-20
2nd
E22 Youngs modulus.
21-30
3rd
E33 Youngs modulus.
31-40
4th
12 Poissons ratio.
41-50
5th
23 Poissons ratio.
51-60
6th
31 Poissons ratio.
61-70
7th
9th data block

1-10
1st
G12 Shear modulus.
11-20
2nd
G23 Shear modulus.
21-30
3rd
G31 Shear modulus.
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
10th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
SOIL 968
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
f Fluid density.
51-60
6th
11th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with this particular soil data.
969 INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input)

Define Initial Porosity
Description
This option provides the ability to define the initial porosity. The magnitude and location of the initial
porosity is associated with an initial condition name. The LOADCASE model definition option is used to
activate this data. For soil analysis, this will be changed during the analysis. For nonsoil analysis, the
porosity is an independent (state) variable that may be used in tables. You can either specify the porosity
or use the INITIAL VOID RATIO option to specify the void ratio.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL PR or INITIAL POROSITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the initial porosity.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number; defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of the initial porosity.
Enter the table ID associated with the initial porosity.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input) 970

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 Elements IDs
3 Volume/Region/Body IDs
7th data block

1-80
data block.
971 INITIAL POROSITY

INITIAL POROSITY
input style.
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the porosity. For nonsoil analysis, the porosity is an
independent (state) variable. You can either specify the porosity or use the INITIAL VOID RATIO option
to specify the void ratio.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL PR or INITIAL POROSITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the initial porosity.
6-10
2nd
The number of sets is equal to the number given in the first field above.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the initial porosity for the points given below at the start of
increment zero.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above porosity is to be applied.
5th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above porosity is to
be applied.
6th data block
This data block is necessary only when there are either beams or shells in the mesh.
Enter a list of layer points to which the above porosity is to be applied.
POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 972

Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis

POROSITY CHANGE (with
TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Description
This option provides the ability to define the material porosity in nonsoil model. The magnitude and
location of the porosity is associated with a boundary condition name. The LOADCASE model definition
option is used to activate this data. You can either specify the porosity or use the VOID CHANGE option
to specify the void ratio.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words POROSITY CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the porosity.
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of the porosity.
4th data block

1-10
1st
973 POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the porosity.
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 Elements IDs
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above porosity is applied.

the geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input) 974

Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with

TABLE Input)
Description
This option provides the ability to define the initial void ratio model. The magnitude and location of the
initial void ratio is associated with an initial condition name. The LOADCASE model definition is used
to activate this data. For soil analysis, the void ratio will change during the analysis. For nonsoil analysis,
the void ratio is an independent (state) variable that may be used in tables. You can either specify the void
ratio or use the INITIAL POROSITY option to specify the porosity.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL VOID.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the initial void ratio.
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of the initial void ratio.
4th data block

1-10
1st
975 INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the initial void ratio.
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 Elements IDs
7th data block

1-80
data block.
INITIAL VOID RATIO 976

INITIAL VOID RATIO
input style.
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the porosity throughout the soil analysis model. You can
either specify the void ratio or use the INITIAL POROSITY option to specify the porosity.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL VOID.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the initial void ratio.
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the initial void ratio for the points given below at the start of
increment zero.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above void ratio is to be applied.
5th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above void ratio is to
be applied.
6th data block
This data block is necessary only when there are either beams or shells in the mesh.
Enter a list of layer points to which the above void ratio is to be applied.
977 VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE

Input - Model Definition)
Description
This option provides the ability to define the void ratio in nonsoil analysis model. The magnitude and
location of the void ratio is associated with a boundary condition name. The LOADCASE model
definition option is used to activate this data. You can either specify the void ratio or use the POROSITY
CHANGE option to specify the porosity.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words VOID CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the void ratio.
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of the void ratio.
4th data block

1-10
1st
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 978

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the void ratio.
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 Elements IDs
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above void ratio is applied.
data block.
979 INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input)

Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure
Description
This option provides the ability to define the preconsolidation pressure throughout the model for
soil analysis when using the Cam-Clay model. The magnitude and location of the preconsolidation
pressure is associated with an initial condition name. The LOADCASE model definition is used to
activate this data.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL PC.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the

preconsolidation pressure.
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of the preconsolidation pressure.
Enter the table ID associated with the preconsolidation pressure.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input) 980

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 Elements IDs
7th data block

1-80
data block.
981 INITIAL PC
INITIAL PC
input style.
Description
This option provides the ability to define the preconsolidation pressure throughout the model for soil
analysis when using the Cam-Clay model.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL PC.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the

preconsolidation pressure.
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Initial value of the preconsolidation pressure for the points given below at
the start of the zeroth increment.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements for which the above data is to be applied.
5th data block
Enter a list of integration points for which the data is to be applied.
6th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above data is to be applied.
SPECIFIC WEIGHT 982

Define Specific Weight Constant for Soil Analysis
SPECIFIC WEIGHT
Define Specific Weight Constant for Soil Analysis
Description
This option allows you to enter the specific weight constant with respect to the global coordinate system
for soil analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words SPECIFIC WEIGHT.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Enter gravity constant in first coordinate direction.
11-20
2nd
Enter gravity constant in second coordinate direction.
21-30
3rd
Enter gravity constant in third coordinate direction.
983 INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input)

Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the pore pressure throughout the model for an uncoupled soil
analysis where the pore pressure is not calculated. In such cases, the 2nd field of the PORE parameter is
zero. These initial conditions will be activated using the LOADCASE model definition option. As an
alternative, the INITPO user subroutine can be used.
Initial Pore Pressure may be used in three different ways with the new table input format.
a table, where the independent variables are, e.g., position to allow a nonhomogeneous field.
Method 3 is using INITPO user subroutine to define initial plastic strain variables.
2. Read the initial values from a step of the post output file from a previous analysis with Marc. This
technique is most common for uncoupled soil analysis to initialize the pore pressure. With this
option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file elements with the elements in the
3. Read the initial values through the INITPO user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INITIAL PORE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of initial pore pressure data to be entered (optional)
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of initial pore pressure data.

INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input) 984

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter the method:

3 use binary post file
5 use ASCII post file
6 use data lines (default)
7 use the INITPO user subroutine.
11-15
3rd

boundary condition.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Enter the unique boundary condition label. This label will be referenced
by the LOADCASE option.

1-10
1st
Enter the initial pore pressure.

1-5
1st
Table ID associated with the initial pore pressure.
2nd data block (only used if method = 6 or 7).
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 Element IDs
3 Volume/Region/Body iDs
7th data block

1-80
data block.
985 INITIAL PORE

INITIAL PORE
input style.
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the pore pressure throughout the model for an uncoupled
soil analysis where the pore pressure is not calculated. In such cases, the 2nd field of the PORE parameter
is zero.
Four ways of providing the initial pore pressures are given below.
1. Read the range of elements, integration points and layers, and a corresponding pore pressure.
2. Read the initial values through the INITPO user subroutine.
3. Read the initial values from a step of the binary or formatted post output file from a previous pore
pressure analysis with Marc. This technique is most common for uncoupled soil analysis to
initialize the pore pressure. With this option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file
elements with the elements in the current analysis. Any spatial interpolation must be provided
separately by you.
4. Read a list of elements, integration points and layers and a corresponding pore pressure.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INITIAL PORE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 1.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to initialize the pore pressure via block 3 series below. See also the
third field on this data block.
Enter 2 to initialize the pore pressure via the INITPO user subroutine. This
subroutine is now called in a loop on all elements in the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the initial values of the pore pressure from the post file
written by a previous pore pressure analysis. In this case, the fourth and
fifth field must also be defined.
Enter 4 to initialize the pore pressure via data blocks 5, 6, 7 and 8 given
below. See also the third field on this data block.
INITIAL PORE 986

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3 or 4. Then, this entry gives the
number of pairs of blocks in series 3 and 4 or in series 5, 6, 7, 8 used to input
the pore pressure.
16-20
4th
number from which the post file information from the previous pore
pressure run is to be read.
21-25
5th
Only used if the second field is set to 3. In that case this entry defines the
step number on the pore pressure run post file to be used as the definition
of the initial pore pressure values.
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
If option 3 and a formatted post file, are used, enter 1.
36-40
8th
Not used; enter 0.
Enter 1 to suppress printout of pore pressure values that are initialized in

the INITPO user subroutine.
3rd data block
Data blocks 3 and 4 are only input if the second field above is set to 1. In that case, the number of blocks
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Initial value of the pore pressure for the above range of points.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block
1-10
1st
Initial pore pressure for the points given below at the start of the zeroth
increment.
6th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above pore pressure is to be applied.
987 INITIAL PORE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

Enter a list of integration points to which the above pore pressure is to
be applied.
8th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above pore pressure is to
be applied.
CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 988

Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
Description
This option provides the ability to initialize the pore pressure throughout the model for an uncoupled soil
analysis where the pore pressure is not calculated. The change in the pore pressure will be activated using
the LOADCASE model definition option. As an alternative, the NEWPO user subroutine can be used.
Initial Pore Pressure may be used in three different ways with the new table input format.
a table, where the independent variables are, e.g., position to allow a nonhomogeneous field.
Method 3 is using the NEWPO user subroutine to define initial plastic strain variables.
2. Read the initial values from a step of the post output file from a previous analysis with Marc. This
technique is most common for uncoupled soil analysis to initialize the pore pressure. With this
option, Marc assumes direct correspondence of the post file elements with the elements in the
3. Read the initial values through the NEWPO user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words CHANGE PORE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of pore pressure data to be entered (optional)
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of pore pressure data.

3rd data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter the method:
989 CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3 use binary post file
5 use ASCII post file
6 use data lines (default)
7 use the NEWPO user subroutine.
11-15
3rd

boundary condition.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Enter unique boundary condition label. This label will be referenced by

the LOADCASE option.
4th data block

Used only if method = 6 or 7.
1-10
1st
Enter the pore pressure.
5th data block

Used only if method = 6 or 7.
1-5
1st
Table ID associated with the pore pressure.
3rd data block (used only if method = 6 or 7).
6th data block
1-5
1st

1 Element IDs
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above pore pressure are
data block.
CHANGE PORE (Model Definition) 990

Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
CHANGE PORE (Model Definition) Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis
input style.
Description
This option provides various ways of changing the pore pressure throughout the model. This option is
only used in uncoupled soil analysis. In such cases, the 2nd field of the PORE parameter is zero.
Four ways of providing the pore pressures are given below.
1. Read a range of elements, integration points and layers, and corresponding pore pressures for the
end of the current step.
2. Read the pore pressure values for the end of the current step through the NEWPO user subroutine.
3. Read the pore pressure values for the end of the current step from a named step of the post file
output from a previous pore pressure analysis with Marc. With this option, Marc assumes direct
4. Read a list of elements, integration points and layers, and corresponding pore pressure.
Note:
On this option, total pore pressures are input.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 1.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to change the pore pressure via data block 3 below. In this case,
the third field must also be defined.
Enter 2 to change the pore pressure via the NEWPO user subroutine. This
subroutine is then called in a loop on all the elements in the mesh.
Enter 4 to change the pore pressure via data blocks 5, 6, 7 and 8 below.
991 CHANGE PORE (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
gives the number of block sets in series 3 and 4 used to input the new value
of the pore pressure (optional).
16-20
4th
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. Then, this entry defines the
unit number from which the post file information from the previous pore
pressure run is read.
21-25
5th
the step number on the pore pressure run post file to be read as the
definition of the new value of the pore pressure at the end of the
current step.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 1.
31-35
7th
36-40
8th

of pore pressure values that are defined in the NEWPO user subroutine.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are only input if the second field above set to 1. In that case, the number of block
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Last integration point with this value can only be bigger than 1 if the ALL
POINTS parameter is used.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Last layer or cross-section point with this value.
New value of the pore pressure for the above range of points at the end of
the current step.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block
1-10
1st
Pore pressure for the points given below at the end of the current
increment.
6th data block

CHANGE PORE (Model Definition) 992

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

Enter a list of integration points to which the above pore pressure is to be
applied.
8th data block
be applied.
993 PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input)

Define Pressure Film Boundary Conditions
Description
This option allows the input of pressure film boundary conditions applied on the surface of the model.
The user defines the pressure film coefficients and ambient pressures here. Nonuniform pressure film
coefficients or pressures can be specified via the UPRFILM user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines) or by using the TABLE model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the words PRESS FILM.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data used to input pressure films (optional).
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of pressure film data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 8 are entered for each film input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the number of geometric types used to define pressure film

boundary condition. See 7th and 8th data blocks.
6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the UPRFILM user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used, enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter -1 to exclude applied load when the edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is fully
in contact.
31-63
7th
PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input) 994

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Reference value of pressure film coefficient.
11-20
2nd
Reference value of ambient pressure (reference values can be modified by

the UPRFILM user subroutine).

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the pressure film coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the ambient pressure.
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1: Normal flow (bottom surface for shells)
10: Normal flow (top surface for shells)
11-15
3rd
Enter the face ID.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
13: Element-Edges IDs - Marc Mentat convention
14: Element-Faces IDs - Marc Mentat convention
995 PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
18: Surface ID: orientation ID - Marc Mentat convention
19: Curve ID: orientation ID - Marc Mentat convention.
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
PRESS FILM (Model Definition) 996

Define Pressure Film Coefficient Input
PRESS FILM (Model Definition)
Define Pressure Film Coefficient Input
input style.
Description
This option allows pressure film coefficients and associated ambient pressures to be input. Nonuniform
pressure films or ambient pressures can be specified via the UPRFILM user subroutine (see Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the words PRESS FILM.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data used to input pressure film (optional).
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of pressure film data, defaults to input.
1st
3rd
data
block
1-5
Face identification. Same as for the FLUX user subroutine see Marc
6-15
2nd
Reference value of pressure film coefficient.
16-25
3rd
Reference value of ambient pressure (reference values can be modified by

the UPRFILM user subroutine).
4th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above film data is applied.

Rate Effects
Chapt Rate Effects

er 3: This section describes the input of material behavior with rate effects. There are many models which
Mode exhibit this behavior and they can be numerically implemented in a variety of way.
Rate dependent yield stress is a particular type of rate effects. When used without any of the options
l
defined in this section, the strain is decomposed into an elastic increment - irreversible plastic increment
and
thermal increment.
Defini
The rate dependent yield models include:
tion
Optio
Model
Option
User Subroutine
ns
Piecewise linear
STRAIN RATE or TABLE
Marc
Volume
C:
Program
Input
Cowper Symonds
STRAIN RATE
General
ISOTROPIC/ORTHOTROPIC
Power Law
ISOTROPIC
Rate Power Law
ISOTROPIC
Kumar
ISOTROPIC
Johnson-Cook
ISOTROPIC
YIEL
Strain rate effects may also be included by the following models:
Behavior
Model
Elastic-Deviatoric
Creep*
Maxwell
Elastic-Deviatoric
Creep*
Kelvin
Implicit/
Explicit
Explicit
Parameter
CREEP,0
User
Model Definition Subroutine
CREEP
CRPLAW
(optional)
Explicit
CRPVIS
CREEP,0,1
or
VISCO ELAS
VSWELL
Elastic-Dilatational Maxwell
Explicit
CREEP,0
Elastic-Deviatoric
Creep
Maxwell
Implicit
CREEP,0,0,1
Viscoplasticity
Maxwell
Explicit
CREEP,1,0,0
CREEP
CRPLAW,
NASSOC,
ZERO. YIEL
Viscoplasticity**
Maxwell
Implicit
CREEP,0,0,1
ISOTROPIC
VISCO PLAS
UVSCPL
CREEP
UCRPLW
(optional)
* Can be combined with elastic-plastic behavior.

** Can only be used for plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric, and 3-D elements.

Rate Effects
Behavior
Model
Implicit/
Explicit
Parameter
User
Model Definition Subroutine
Isotropic
Small Strain
Viscoelasticity
Hereditary Implicit
Integral
ISOTROPIC
VISCELPROP
Orthotropic Small
Strain
Viscoelasticity
Hereditary Implicit
Integral
ORTHOTROPIC
Large Strain
Incompressible
Viscoelastic
(Mooney, Gent,
Arruda-Boyce)
Hereditary Implicit
Integral
VISCELMOON
Large Strain
Viscoelastic
(Ogden)
Hereditary Implicit
Integral
VISCELOGDEN
Large Strain
Viscoelastic Foam
Hereditary Implicit
Integral
VISCELFOAM
ThermalRheologically
Simple
Viscoelastic
Thermal Expansion
Implicit
HOOKVI
VISCELORTH
SHIFT FUNCTION
SHIFT FUNCTION
VISCEL EXP
* Can be combined with elastic-plastic behavior.

** Can only be used for plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric, and 3-D elements.
999 CREEP (with TABLE Input)

Define Creep Constitutive Data
Description
This option defines the parameters and material properties used in a creep analysis. The creep data can
be specified in either an exponent form or in a piecewise linear curve or an equation. Attention is drawn
to the existence of the CRPLAW user subroutine, which allows alternative forms of creep behavior to be
programmed indirectly. Further detail on creep is given in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special
Routines and Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. In addition, the CREEP parameter must be
included.
The three possible modes of input of creep constitutive data are:
1. Using a table or an equation to directly input the creep strain rate. In this case, the first four entries
of data block 2 are zero, and data block 3 is used to enter the table ID which may refer to an
equation. See Table option.
2. The dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent parameter can be given
directly in power law form by giving the appropriate exponent (as a floating-point number) in the
first field of blocks 4, 5, 6, or 7. The equivalent creep strain rate is
c
= A n c n T n nt n 1
Note that the time dependence is specified as a function of total equivalent creep strain. c = Atn
The power law form is indicated by setting the corresponding field on data block 2 to -1. The
multiplier A may have a table associated with it.
3. For a user-supplied creep law (using the CRPLAW subroutine, see Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines), set the first five fields of block 2 to 0.
Note:
The default numerical procedure for creep analysis is explicit. In case of Norton
creep, an alternative implicit procedure can be used. This should be set using the
CREEP parameter.
CREEP (with TABLE Input) 1000

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter -1 if creep strain rate is a function of the temperature raised to a

power. The exponent is given on the 4th data block.
6-10
2nd
Enter -1 if creep strain rate is a function of the equivalent stress raised to

a power. The exponent is given on the 5th data block.
11-15
3rd
Enter -1 if creep strain rate is a function of the creep strain raised to a

power. The exponent is given on the 6th data block.
16-20
4th
Enter -1 if the total creep strain is a function of the time raised to a power.
The exponent is given on the 7th data block.
21-35
5th
Enter the numerical constant in total creep strain relation. Set to zero if a
creep law is being supplied through the CRPLAW user subroutine.
36-50
6th
Not used; enter 0.
51-65
7th
Not used; enter 0.
66-70
8th
Enter the unit number for input of creep data, defaults to input.
71-75
9th
Material ID number.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
No used; enter zero.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Enter table ID associated with scalar multiplier A.
4th data block

Required only if 1st field, 2nd data block = -1.
1-15
1st
Enter the exponent of temperature in the exponential creep law.
4a data block
Required only if 2nd field, 2nd data block = -1.
1-15
1st
Enter the exponent of stress in the exponential creep law.
1001 CREEP (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

Required only if 3rd field, 2nd data block = -1.
1-15
1st
Enter the exponent of total equivalent creep strain in the exponential

creep law.
7th data block

Required only if 4th, 2nd data block = -1.
1-15
1st
Enter the exponent of time in the exponential creep law.
CREEP 1002
CREEP
input style.
Description
This option defines the parameters and material properties used in a creep analysis. The creep data can
be specified in either an exponent form or in a piecewise linear curve. Attention is drawn to the existence
of the CRPLAW user subroutine, which allows alternative forms of creep behavior to be programmed
indirectly. Further detail on creep is given in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines and
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. In addition, the CREEP parameter must be included.
The three possible modes of input of creep constitutive data are:
1. Express the dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent parameter through a
piecewise-linear relationship. The equivalent creep strain rate is then assumed to be a piecewise
linear approximation to
c
dk t
= A f g c h T ------------dt
Note that the function k relates total equivalent creep strain to time. Any of the functions f, g, h,
or k can be set to unity by setting the number of slopes to zero for that relation on the input data.
This is done using one of two methods. Note that these methods cannot be mixed for different
functions (f, g, h, k).
a. The slopes and breakpoints of the piecewise linear functions are given using data blocks 3a,
4a, 5a, and 6a. Note that the independent variable either , c, T, or t should be given in
ascending order. The format is as follows:
Column
Field
Entry
1-15
1st
Slope of curve.
16-30
2nd
Breakpoint at which slope begins with the number of blocks

describing each curve (up to a maximum of five) given in the
appropriate field on block 2 of this set.
b. The data points describing the curve of c are given directly using data blocks 3b, 4b, 5b, and
6b. This method is flagged by entering the word DATA on the CREEP option. These data
points are used to calculate slope breakpoint data. Note that the value of c at the lowest data
point should equal the value A. The format is as follows:
1003 CREEP
Column
Field
Entry
1-15
1st
Value of
16-30
2nd
Value of either , c, or T for data blocks 3b, 4b, 5b, or 6b
Column
Field
Entry
1-15
1st
Value of c
16-30
2nd
Value of t
2. The dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent parameter can be given
directly in power law form by giving the appropriate exponent (as a floating-point number) in the
first field of blocks 3, 4, 5, or 6. The equivalent creep strain rate is
c
= A n c n T n nt n 1
Note that the time dependence is specified as a function of total equivalent creep strain. c = Atn
The power law form is indicated by setting the corresponding field on data block 2 to -1.
3. For a user-supplied creep law (using the CRPLAW user subroutine, see Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines), set the first five fields of data block 2 to 0.
Note:
The default numerical procedure for creep analysis is explicit. In case of Norton
creep, an alternative implicit procedure can be used. This should be set using the
CREEP parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
11-80
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of blocks defining creep-strain rate versus temperature relation.
6-10
2nd
Number of blocks defining creep-strain rate versus equivalent

stress relation.
11-15
3rd
Number of blocks defining creep-strain rate versus equivalent

creep-strain curve.
16-20
4th
Number of blocks defining total creep-strain increment versus time curve.
CREEP 1004
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-35
5th
Enter the numerical constant in total creep strain relation. Set to zero if a
creep law is being supplied through the CRPLAW user subroutine.
36-50
6th
If the entry in the tenth field is 0, enter tolerance on the creep strain
increment relative to the elastic strain. Default = 0.50.
A higher value is likely to cause stability problems.
If the entry in the tenth field is 1, enter the maximum allowable creep
strain increment. Default is .01.
Note:
51-65
7th
Use of the AUTO CREEP option to input this value is preferred.
If the entry in the tenth field is 0, enter the tolerance on the stress change
per stress during creep.
Default is 0.10.
If the entry in the tenth field is 1, enter the maximum stress increment.
Default is 100. This control is included primarily for accuracy purposes.
Default value is adequate for creep laws of the type = an where 3 < n <
6. For lower values of n, tolerance can be increased; for higher values, it
should be decreased.
Note:
Use of the AUTO CREEP option to input this value is preferred.
66-70
8th
Enter the unit number for input of creep data, defaults to input.
71-75
9th
Material ID number.
76-80
10th
Enter 1 if absolute rather than relative testing is to be performed.
3a data block
Slope and breakpoint data for equivalent creep strain rate versus temperature curve. The number
entered in the first field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 3.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of the curve or the exponent of temperature in the

exponential creep law.
16-30
2nd
Enter the temperature above which the slope (above) becomes operative.
This entry is left blank for exponential creep law.
4a data block
Enter the slope and breakpoint data for equivalent creep strain rate versus equivalent total stress curve.
The number entered in the second field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required
in data block 4.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of the curve or the exponent of stress in the exponential
creep law.
16-30
2nd
Enter the equivalent total stress above which the slope becomes operative.
This entry is left blank for exponential creep law.
1005 CREEP
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5a data block
Slope and breakpoint data for equivalent creep strain rate versus total equivalent creep strain curve. The
number entered in the third field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data
block 5.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of the curve or the exponent of total equivalent creep strain
in the exponential creep law.
16-30
2nd
Enter the equivalent total creep strain above which the slope becomes
operative. This entry is left blank for exponential creep law.
6a data block
Slope and breakpoint data for total equivalent creep strain versus time curve. The number entered in
the fourth field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 6.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of the curve or the exponent of time in the exponential
creep law.
16-30
2nd
Enter the total time above which the slope becomes operative. This entry
is left blank for exponential creep law.
3b data block
Data points for the equivalent creep strain rate versus temperature curve. The number entered in the
first field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 3.
1-15
1st
Enter the equivalent creep strain rate or the exponent of temperature in the
16-30
2nd
Enter the associated temperature. This entry is left blank for exponential
creep law.
4b data block
Data points for the equivalent creep strain rate versus equivalent total stress curve. The number entered
in the second field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 4.
1-15
1st
Enter the equivalent creep strain rate or exponents of stress in the

16-30
2nd
Enter the associated equivalent total stress. This entry is left blank for
5b data block
Data points for the equivalent creep strain rate versus total equivalent creep strain curve. The number
entered in the third field of the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 5.
1-15
1st
Enter the equivalent creep strain rate or the exponent of total equivalent
creep strain in the exponential creep law.
16-30
2nd
Enter the associated total creep strain. This entry is left blank for
CREEP 1006
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6b data block
Data point for the equivalent creep strain versus time curve. The number entered in the fourth field of
the second data block defines the number of blocks required in data block 6.
1-15
1st
Enter the equivalent creep strain or the exponent of time in the exponential
creep law.
16-30
2nd
Enter the associated total time. This entry is left blank for exponential
creep law.
1007 PHI-COEFFICIENTS
Define Phi-Coefficients for Rubber Viscoelastic Model
PHI-COEFFICIENTS
Define Phi-Coefficients for Rubber Viscoelastic Model
Description
This option allows the input of phi function value vs. frequency for one out of the seven possible PHI
functions 0, 1, 2, 11, 12, 21, 22 . This option can be repeated up to seven times to completely
define the seven PHI functions. These PHI functions are used in a harmonic analysis with rubber
materials using the Mooney material model. This can be used only in the total Lagrange formulation. See
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more detail.
Note:
For symmetry of the relaxation data, 12 should equal 21.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words PHI-COEFFI.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of different frequencies per PHI function to be read in. If a

negative value is entered, the UPHI user subroutine is called to supply PHI
coefficients as a function of frequency for all PHI functions.
6-10
2nd
PHI function identifier.

= 1 for 0
= 2 for 1
= 3 for 2
= 4 for 11
= 5 for 12
= 6 for 21
= 7 for 22
11-15
3rd
Material type identifier.
3rd data block

Not used if the UPHI user subroutine is requested.
1-10
1st
Frequency in radians/time unit.
11-20
2nd
Real PHI coefficient.
21-30
3rd
Imaginary PHI coefficient.
VISCELPROP 1008
Define Properties for Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials
VISCELPROP
Define Properties for Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials
Description
This option is used to specify the time dependent part of the material behavior of a small strain
viscoelastic material. Here, only isotropic quantities can be specified. Note that the instantaneous moduli
for small-strain viscoelasticity are specified on the ISOTROPIC option. Orthotropic time-dependent
behavior can be specified using the VISCELORTH option.
Note:
Thermo-rheologically simple behavior is specified with the SHIFT FUNCTION option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word VISCELPROP.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of distinct sets of viscoelastic properties to be input.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of viscoelastic properties, default to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Material type identification number. This number is used for cross

reference with the ISOTROPIC, TEMPERATURE EFFECTS, and
SHIFT FUNCTION options.
6-10
2nd
Maximum number of terms in the Prony series expansion (maximum

value of either the deviatoric terms or the volumetric terms).
11-15
3rd
Number of terms in the Prony series expansion for deviatoric behavior.
16-20
4th
Number of terms in the Prony series expansion for volumetric behavior.
4th data block

Repeated for the maximum number of terms.
1-10
1st
Shear constant.
11-20
2nd
Relaxation time for deviatoric behavior.
21-30
3rd
Bulk constant.
31-40
4th
Relaxation time for volumetric behavior
1009 VISCELORTH
Define Properties for Viscoelastic Orthotropic Materials
VISCELORTH
Description
This option inputs the time dependent material data used in conjunction with the ORTHOTROPIC option
for viscoelastic materials. It can also be used to specify the anisotropic time dependent constants for an
anisotropic material exhibiting small strain viscoelastic behavior by use of the HOOKVI user subroutine.
The instantaneous elastic behavior is specified on the ORTHOTROPIC option.
Note:
Since the material properties for orthotropic materials are independent, it is your
responsibility to enter all required data. No defaults are provided by Marc.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word VISCELORTH.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of VISCELORTH data to read.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for reading data, defaults to input.
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks are entered as a set, once for each set of VISCELORTH data.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number for cross-referencing with

ORTHOTROPIC data.
6-10
2nd
Number of terms in the Prony series expansion (note that deviatoric and
volumetric behavior are treated together).
4th data block

1-10
1st
Time constant for this term in the Prony series expansion.
11-20
2nd
n
E xx
21-30
3rd
n
E yy
31-40
4th
n
E zz
41-50
5th
n
xy
51-60
6th
n
yz
61-70
7th
n
zx
VISCELORTH 1010
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
n
G xy
11-20
2nd
n
G yz
21-30
3rd
n
G zx
1011 VISCELMOON
Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials
VISCELMOON
Description
This option is used to input the time dependent data for a Mooney-Rivlin, Gent, or Arruda-Boyce
viscoelastic material. The instantaneous elastic behavior is specified using the MOONEY,
ARRUDBOYCE, or GENT model definition option, respectively.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word VISCELMOON.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of VISCELMOON data to read.
6-10
2nd
The 3rd data block is entered once for each set of VISCELMOON data.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material ID number for cross-referencing with the rate

independent properties.
6-10
2nd
The 4th data block is entered once for each term in the Prony series.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Multiplier for energy function.
11-20
2nd
Relaxation time.
VISCELOGDEN 1012
Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Ogden Materials
VISCELOGDEN
Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Ogden Materials
Description
This option is used to input the time dependent data for a Ogden viscoelastic material. The instantaneous
elastic behavior is specified using the OGDEN model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word VISCELOGDEN.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data to read.
6-10
2nd
The 3rd data block is entered once for each set of data.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material ID number for cross-referencing with the OGDEN option.
6-10
2nd
Maximum number of terms of either Prony series expansion.
11-15
3rd
Number of terms for deviatoric behavior.
16-20
4rd
Number of terms for dilatational behavior.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Multiplier for deviatoric energy function.
11-20
2nd
Deviatoric relaxation time.
21-30
3rd
Multiplier for dilatational energy function.
31-40
4rd
Dilatational relaxation time.
1013 VISCELFOAM
VISCELFOAM
Description
This option is used to input the time dependent data for a foam viscoelastic material. The instantaneous
elastic behavior is specified using either the FOAM model definition option or the UELASTOMER user
subroutine.
This option must be used with LARGE STRAIN; i.e., updated Lagrange formulation.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word VISCELFOAM.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of VISCELFOAM data to read.
6-10
2nd
The 3rd data block is entered once for each set of VISCELFOAM data.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material ID number for cross-referencing with the rate

independent properties.
6-10
2nd
4th data block
1-10
1st
Multiplier for energy function.
11-20
2nd
Relaxation time.
SHIFT FUNCTION 1014

Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple Viscoelastic Materials
SHIFT FUNCTION
Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple

Viscoelastic Materials
Description
This option allows you to define the shift function parameters for viscoelastic material groups that exhibit
thermo-rheologically simple behavior.
Note that for the Narayanaswamy model, the initial value of the fictive temperature for each term must
be specified as the second state variable via the INITIAL STATE option.
User Information., Chapter 7, Material Library, Thermo-Rheologically Simple Behavior.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SHIFT FUNCTION.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets used to define different shift functions.
6-10
2nd
Unit number from which the data block is read. Defaults to block input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material number for cross-referencing with the instantaneous and time

dependent viscoelastic properties.
6-10
2nd
Enter the code number denoting the shift function type:

1 = Williams-Landel-Ferry equation
2 = Power series expansion
3 = Narayanaswamy model
-N = any negative integer value denotes that the shift function is
specified in the user subroutine.
11-15
3rd
If the second field is 2, enter the number of coefficients in the power

series representation.
If the second field is 3, enter the number of terms in Prony
series expansion.
1015 SHIFT FUNCTION

Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple Viscoelastic Materials
Format
Fixed
16-25
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
E
Enter the reference or glass transition temperature Tg, for this

shift function.
For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the temperature for stress
relaxation data.
26-35
5th
For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the activation energy divided by the
gas constant Q/R.
36-45
6th
For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the fraction parameter.
46-55
7th
For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the temperature shift between your
temperature and absolute temperature for calculating fictitive
temperatures.
56-65
8th
For the Narayanaswamy model, enter the reference temperature for the
structural relaxation data.
66-70
9th
Enter 1 if initial fictive temperature is the same as initial temperature.

Enter 2 if initial fictive temperature is the reference temperature for the
structural relaxation data.
Enter 3 if initial fictive temperature is read from INITIAL FICTIVE option
(default).
If Williams-Landel-Ferry form, use the following data block.

4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the constant C1.
11-20
2nd
Enter the constant C2.
If power series expansion, use the following data block.

If shift function is defined in the TRSFAC user subroutine, the 4th data block is not required.
4th data block
1-80
1st
Enter the constants Co to Cm in increasing order of subscript, using

additional blocks if necessary to define all constants.
If Narayanaswamy model, use the 4th and 5th data blocks.

4th data block
1-80
1st
Enter the weighting factors Wg in increasing order of subscript. Use

additional blocks if necessary to define all constants. Note that the sum of
the weight factors must equal 1.0.
Enter the relaxation time i,ref in increasing order of subscript. Use

additional blocks if necessary to define all constants.
5th data block

1-80
1st
VISCEL EXP 1016

Viscoelastic Thermal Expansion
VISCEL EXP
Viscoelastic Thermal Expansion
Description
This option is used to define the thermal expansion behavior often observed in viscoelastic materials. It
is used in conjunction with the viscoelastic material models and the Narayanaswamy thermal
rheologically simple shift function. The fictive temperature is stored in the second state variable and can
be postprocessed by selecting post code 29.
User Information., Chapter 7, Material Library, Narayanaswamy.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words VISCEL EXP.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of materials to be defined.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Material number for cross-referencing with the instantaneous and time

dependent viscoelastic properties.
6-15
2nd
Enter the solid coefficient of thermal expansion, g .
16-25
3rd
Enter the liquid coefficient of thermal expansion, l .
1017
Dynamic Analysis
Chapt Dynamic Analysis

er 3: This section describes the data input required for dynamic analysis. There are several options available
specifying the initial conditions of the problem. The mass density of the object is specified through
Mode for
any of the material options. Marc uses this to calculate a consistent mass matrix, which can be converted
into a diagonal mass matrix by using the LUMP parameter. This is not recommended for either higherl
order elements or shells and beams. In addition, you can apply concentrated masses to particular degrees
Defini of freedom using options given in this section. Damping can be specified through either the DAMPING
or COEFFICIENT option. Note that stiffness damping should not be applied to either the multi-step
tion
Herrmann elements or the gap elements. Damping is not recommended when using the multi-step
Optio Houbolt operator as this method has significant internal damping. If you want to specify material
damping, choose another dynamic operator. If you want to specify material damping, choose another
ns
dynamic operator.Dashpots can be specified through either the SPRINGS, PBUSH, or PFAST option.
In addition, the FLUID SOLID option is included so that you can specify the interface between the fluid
and solid boundary.
If a response spectrum analysis is to be performed, the spectral density is provided through the
RESPONSE SPECTRUM option.
DAMPING 1018
Define Damping Factors
DAMPING
Description
This option allows the input of damping factors for use with the dynamic analysis options. Two damping
inputs are available depending on your choice of dynamic option. For modal superposition analysis, you
give the fraction of critical damping associated with each mode of the solution. For direct integration or
harmonic analysis, you input the factors weighting the mass and stiffness matrices to form the damping
matrix. In both cases, the damping matrix is assumed to be formed as a linear combination of the mass
and stiffness matrices of the system, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. There are two
styles for defining the damping coefficients for transient dynamics. In the first style, they are associated
with element numbers while the second style is based upon material ID. Using the second style, it is
possible to associate a table with the damping coefficients. This may be used to allow the coefficients to
be a function of the frequency in a harmonic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word DAMPING.
11-15
2nd
Method to read damping data for direct integration dynamics or

harmonics; default = 1.
Default; not used for modal analysis, the second data block is used.
Enter 1; damping is given on a element basis, data blocks 3, 4, and 5
are used.
Enter 2; damping is given based upon the material id, data blocks 3, 6,
and 7.
2nd data block

For dynamic type 1, transient analysis by modal superposition only.
1-10
1st
Fraction of critical damping for 1st mode.
11-20
2nd
Fraction of critical damping for 2nd mode.
Etc.
Etc.
Etc.
Etc.
3th data block

For direct integration (Newmark-beta, Houbolt, generalized alpha, or central difference) or harmonics.
1-5
1st
Number of damping sets (NDMPST) to be read in. Either the 4th and 5th
data blocks or the 6th and 7th data blocks are given in pairs
NDMPST times. Optional.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of the damping data, defaults to input.
1019 DAMPING
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Use 4th and 5th data blocks if method is 0 or 1 (1st data block, 2nd field).
1-10
1st
Multiplier () for mass matrix contribution to damping matrix.
11-20
2nd
Multiplier () for stiffness matrix contribution to damping matrix.
21-30
3rd
Multiplier () for numerical damping.
5th data block

1-5
1st
First element to have these damping values.
6-10
2nd
Last element to have these damping values.
6th data block

Use the 6th and 7th data blocks if input method is 2 (1st data block, 2nd field).
1-5
1st
6-15
2nd
Multiplier () for mass matrix contribution to damping matrix.
16-25
3rd
Multiplier () for stiffness matrix contribution to damping matrix.
26-35
4th
Multiplier () for numerical damping.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the mass matrix coefficient.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with the stiffness matrix coefficient.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID associated with the numerical damping coefficient.
In a dynamic analysis, the damping matrix is evaluated as:

t
C = M + + -------- K
In a harmonic analysis, the damping matrix is evaluated as:

2
C = M + + ------ K
FLUID SOLID 1020

Define Fluid-Solid Interface
FLUID SOLID
Define Fluid-Solid Interface
Description
This option is used with the added mass approach to fluid-solid problems. In such analysis, the fluid is
considered incompressible and inviscid. This model definition set is necessary to identify the element
faces in the solid which abut the fluid. Note that with this feature, the fluid density is entered on the
ISOTROPIC option in the Youngs modulus field for the fluid elements. The fluid region is modeled using
heat transfer elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the words FLUID SOLID.
2nd data block

One data line per solid/fluid interface pair for each abutting pair specify:
1-5
1st
Solid element number.
6-10
2nd
Solid element face number (as identified for distributed load option).
11-15
3rd
Fluid element number.
16-20
4th
Fluid element face number (as identified in distributed flux option).
1021 INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input)

Define Initial Displacements
Description
This option provides initial displacements for dynamic problems or a spatially varying interference fit in
contact analyses. The USINC user subroutine or the TABLE model definition can be used to enter spatially
varying initial conditions. The data specified here must be activated using the LOADCASE model
definition option.
To obtain the initial displacement from the calculated value of a previous analysis, use the
PRE STATE option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INITIAL DISP.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of initial displacements (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of initial displacement data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the number of geometric types used to define initial condition,

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the USINC user subroutine is required for this initial condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input) 1022

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Initial displacement in first degree of freedom or the interference fit

normal to the contact surface.
11-20
2nd
Initial displacement in second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Initial displacement in third degree of freedom.
31-40
4th
Initial displacement in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50
5th
Initial displacement in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60
6th
Initial displacement in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70
7th
Initial displacement in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80
8th
Initial displacement in eighth degree of freedom.
5th data block - Table ID

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Table ID associated with the seventh degree of freedom.
36-40
8th
Table ID associated with the eighth degree of freedom.
block, 1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
1023 INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 6th
data block.
INITIAL DISP 1024

INITIAL DISP
input style.
Description
This option provides initial displacements for dynamic problems or a spatially varying interference fit in
contact analyses.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INITIAL DISP.
Enter the number of sets of prescribed displacements (optional).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
If a -1 is entered, the USINC user subroutine is used for all nodes. Data
blocks 3 and 4 are not required.
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of prescribed displacement data, defaults to

input.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Initial displacement in first degree of freedom or the interference fit

normal to the contact surface.
11-20
2nd
Initial displacement in second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Initial displacement in third degree of freedom.
31-40
4th
Initial displacement in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50
5th
Initial displacement in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60
6th
Initial displacement in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70
7th
Initial displacement in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80
8th
Initial displacement in eighth degree of freedom.
Continuation data lines, if necessary, must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data lines are needed if
there are more than eight degrees of freedom per node in the analysis.
4th data block
Enter list of nodes for which the above initial displacements are applied.
1025 INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input)

Define Initial Velocity
Description
This option allows the input of initial velocity for dynamic problems. The data specified here must be
activated using the LOADCASE model definition option.
To obtain the initial displacement from the calculated value of a previous analysis, use the
PRE STATE option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INITIAL VEL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of initial velocity (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of initial velocity data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are entered as pairs; one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the USINC user subroutine required for this initial condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
4th data block

1-10
1st
Initial velocity in first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Initial velocity in second degree of freedom.
INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input) 1026

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
Initial velocity in third degree of freedom.
31-40
4th
Initial velocity in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50
5th
Initial velocity in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60
6th
Initial velocity in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70
7th
Initial velocity in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80
8th
Initial velocity in eighth degree of freedom.

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
6th data block

1-5
1st
1: Element IDs
2: Node IDs
3: Volume/Region/Body ids
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
data block.
1027 INITIAL VEL

INITIAL VEL
input style.
Description
This option allows the input of initial velocity for dynamic problems.
Format
Entry
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INITIAL VEL.
Enter the number of sets of prescribed velocity (optional).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter -1 if the USINC user subroutine is to be used for all nodes. In this
case, data blocks 3 and 4 are not used.
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of prescribed velocity data, defaults to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs; one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Initial velocity in first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Initial velocity in second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Initial velocity in third degree of freedom.
31-40
4th
Initial velocity in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50
5th
Initial velocity in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60
6th
Initial velocity in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70
7th
Initial velocity in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80
8th
Initial velocity in eighth degree of freedom.
Continuation data lines, if necessary, must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data lines are needed if
there are more than eight degrees of freedom per node in the analysis.
4th data block
Enter list of nodes for which the above initial velocities are applied.
FIXED ACCE 1028

Define Fixed Acceleration
FIXED ACCE
Define Fixed Acceleration
Description
This option defines the fixed accelerations that each specified degree of freedom must take during the
first and subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the ACC CHANGE option. This option
can only be used in dynamic analyses. It is usually used to prescribe base motion accelerations.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FIXED ACCE.
Number of sets of boundary condition data lines to be read (optional).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
For each set of boundary conditions, use the 3rd, 4th and 5th data blocks.
3d data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed acceleration for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed acceleration for second degree of freedom listed in data

block 4.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed acceleration for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
4th data block

Note:
5th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above accelerations are applied.
1029 MASSES
Define Concentrated Masses
MASSES
Define Concentrated Masses
Description
This option is used to input any concentrated masses for use with the dynamic analysis options. Each
concentrated mass is associated with a single degree of freedom.
Note:
Rotational degrees of freedom might have mass depending on the element types used in
the data.
In a coupled analysis, the lumped capacitance is the concentrated mass multiplied with the lumped
capacitance factor, if the lumped mass is given or is the lumped capacitance itself.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word MASSES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data used to enter mass points (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for reading mass point data. Defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Degree of freedom to which mass is applied.
6-15
2nd
Value of concentrated mass.
16-25
3rd
Value of concentrated damper.
26-35
4th
Lumped capacitance (factor).
36-40
5th
Table ID for concentrated mass.
41-45
6th
Table ID for concentrated damper.
46-50
7th
Table ID for lumped capacitance.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes having the above concentrated masses.
CONM1 1030
Define a General Concentrated Mass
CONM1
Description
Define a general concentrated mass to be applied to a node. Either a diagonal or a symmetric 6 x 6 mass
matrix may be defined with respect to a local coordinate system. This mass is used in dynamic or
harmonic analyses only. The TABLE option may be used in conjunction with this option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CONM1.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of distinct sets of CONM1 entries.
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of CONM1 data (default to standard input).
11-15
3rd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter Coordinate System ID (integer 0).
6-10
2nd
Enter method by which mass terms are specified.

1 = only diagonal masses specified on 4a 5a data blocks.
2 = full 6 x 6 mass specified on 4b 9b data blocks.
11-15
3rd
Enter method by which damping terms are specified.

1 = only diagonal damping specified on 10a 11a data blocks.
2 = full 6 x 6 damping specified on 10b 15b data blocks.
16-20
4th
Enter method by which capacitance terms are specified.

1 = thermal capacitance factor specified on data block 16a.
2 = thermal capacitance factor specified on data block 16b.
3 = absolute thermal capacitance specified on data block 16a.
4 = absolute thermal capacitance specified on data block 16b.
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 1, include the 4a and 5a data blocks.
4a data block
1-10
1st
M11
11-20
2nd
M22
21-30
3rd
M33
1031 CONM1
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
M44
41-50
5th
M55
51-60
6th
M66
5a data block
15
1st
Table ID for M11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for M22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for M33.
16-20
4th
Table ID for M44.
21-25
5th
Table ID for M55.
26-30
6th
Table ID for M66.
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 2; for 2-D simulation, include the 4b and 5b data blocks (see
Remark 2).
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 2; for 3-D simulation, include the 4b through 9b data blocks.
4b data block
1-10
1st
M11
11-20
2nd
M21
21-30
3rd
M22
31-40
4th
M31
41-50
5th
M32
51-60
6th
M33
61-70
7th
M41
5b data block
15
1st
Table ID for M11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for M21.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for M22.
16-20
4th
Table ID for M31.
21-25
5th
Table ID for M32.
26-30
6th
Table ID for M33.
31-35
7th
Table ID for M41.
6b data block
1-10
1st
M42
11-20
2nd
M43
CONM1 1032
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
M44
31-40
4th
M51
41-50
5th
M52
51-60
6th
M53
61-70
7th
M54
7b data block
15
1st
Table ID for M42.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for M43.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for M44.
16-20
4th
Table ID for M51.
21-25
5th
Table ID for M52.
26-30
6th
Table ID for M53.
31-35
7th
Table ID for M54.
8b data block
1-10
1st
M55
11-20
2nd
M61
21-30
3rd
M62
31-40
4th
M63
41-50
5th
M64
51-60
6th
M65
61-70
7th
M66
9b data block
15
1st
Table ID for M55.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for M61.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for M62.
16-20
4th
Table ID for M63.
21-25
5th
Table ID for M64.
26-30
6th
Table ID for M65.
31-35
7th
Table ID for M66.
If the 3rd field of the 3rd data block = 1, include the 10a and 11a data blocks.
1033 CONM1
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10a data block

1-10
1st
D11
11-20
2nd
D22
21-30
3rd
D33
31-40
4th
D44
41-50
5th
D55
51-60
6th
D66
11a data block

15
1st
Table ID for D11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for D22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for D33.
16-20
4th
Table ID for D44.
21-25
5th
Table ID for D55.
26-30
6th
Table ID for D66.
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 2; for 2-D simulation, include the 10b and 11b data blocks (see
Remark 2).
If the 2nd field of the 3rd data block = 2; for 3-D simulation, include the 10b through 15b data blocks.
10b data block
1-10
1st
D11
11-20
2nd
D21
21-30
3rd
D22
31-40
4th
D31
41-50
5th
D32
51-60
6th
D33
61-70
7th
D41
11b data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for D11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for D21.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for D22.
16-20
4th
Table ID for D31.
CONM1 1034
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Table ID for D32.
26-30
6th
Table ID for D33.
31-35
7th
Table ID for D41.
12b data block

1-10
1st
D42
11-20
2nd
D43
21-30
3rd
D44
31-40
4th
D51
41-50
5th
D52
51-60
6th
D53
61-70
7th
D54
13b data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for D42.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for D43.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for D44.
16-20
4th
Table ID for D51.
21-25
5th
Table ID for D52.
26-30
6th
Table ID for D53.
31-35
7th
Table ID for D54.
14b data block

1-10
1st
D55
11-20
2nd
D61
21-30
3rd
D62
31-40
4th
D63
41-50
5th
D64
51-60
6th
D65
61-70
7th
D66
15b data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for D55.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for D61.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for D62.
16-20
4th
Table ID for D63.
1035 CONM1
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Table ID for D64.
26-30
6th
Table ID for D65.
31-35
7th
Table ID for D66.
If the 4th field of the 3rd data block = 1 or 2, include the 16a data block.
16a data block
1-10
1st
CP (will be multiplied by M11).
11-15
2nd
Table ID for CP.
If the 4th field of the 3rd data block = 3 or 4, include the 16b data block.
16b data block
1-10
1st
MCP
11-15
2nd
Table ID for MCP.
17th data block

Enter a list of nodes.
Remarks
1. The COORD SYSTEM ID is an integer that is0. ID = 0 means that the mass and damping matrix
are defined in the global Cartesian system. ID 0 means that the mass matrix is in a user-defined
coordinate system with the same number.
2. For 2-D problems, if the diagonal form is specified, then only M11, M22, and M33 (if rotation
degree of freedom is included) are defined. If the full form is specified and there are no rotational
degrees of freedom, then M11, M21, and M22 are supported. If the full form is specified and there
are rotational degrees of freedom, then M11, M21, M22, M31, M32, and M33 are supported.
3. For heat transfer shells, CP11 is applied to all degrees of freedom through the thickness.
CONM2 1036
Define a Diagonal Mass/Moment of Inertia
CONM2
Description
Define a concentrated diagonal mass contribution and the mass moment of inertia with respect to a local
coordinate system. The mass is used in dynamic and harmonic analysis only. The TABLE option may be
used in conjunction with this option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CONM2.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of distinct sets of CONM2 entries.
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of CONM2 data (default to standard input).
11-15
3rd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter Coordinate System ID (integer -1).
6-15
2nd
Offset distance component X1.
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th
36-40
5th
Table ID for X1.
41-45
6th
Table ID for X2.
46-50
7th
Table ID for X3.
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
I11
21-30
3rd
I21
31-40
4th
I22
41-50
5th
I31
51-60
6th
I32
61-70
7th
I33
1037 CONM2
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for M.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for I11.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for I21.
16-20
4th
Table ID for I22.
21-25
5th
Table ID for I31.
26-30
6th
Table ID for I32.
31-35
7th
Table ID for I33.
6th data block

Enter a list of nodes.
Remarks
1. The COORD SYSTEM ID is an integer that is -1. ID = -1 or = 0 both mean that the mass
and moments of inertia defined in the 4th data block are in the global Cartesian coordinate system.
ID = -1 means that X1, X2, and X3 are the coordinates of the center of gravity in the global
Cartesian system. ID = 0 means that X1, X2, and X3 are the offset distances from the grid point
in the global Cartesian system. ID 0 means that the mass and moments of inertia defined in the
4th data block are in the user-defined coordinate system with the same ID. Also, X1, X2, and X3
are the offset distances from the grid point in the same user system.
2. In 2-D problems, M, I33, X1, and X2 alone will need to be entered.
RESPONSE SPECTRUM 1038

Define Density for Spectral Response
RESPONSE SPECTRUM
Define Density for Spectral Response
Description
This option allows you to define the response spectral density. Note that the RESPONSE parameter must
also be included. A spectrum response calculation is performed based on the last set of extracted modes
when a SPECTRUM history definition option is encountered.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-20
Enter the words RESPONSE SPECTRUM.
1-5
Enter the number of spectral density pairs (optional).
6-10
Enter the unit number to read data. Default is to input.
1-10
Enter the frequency in cycles per time unit.
11-20
Enter the displacement spectral response density.
2nd data block
3rd data block
1039 MODAL INCREMENT

Define Increments for Eigenvalue Extraction
MODAL INCREMENT
Description
This option allows you to specify at which increments an eigenvalue extraction is performed. It can be
used as either a replacement to the MODAL SHAPE history definition option or in conjunction with it.
This option allows you to extract modes within an AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, AUTO CREEP, or AUTO
INCREMENT period. Note that the increment numbers specified here cannot be changed upon restart.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-20
1st
Enter the words MODAL INCREMENT.
2a data block
Data block 2a is used if the inverse power sweep method is selected on the DYNAMIC parameter.
1-5
1st
Maximum number of iterations per mode in the power sweep. Maximum

number of iterations for all modes if subspace iteration is used. Default is
40.
6-15
2nd
Convergence tolerance. The power sweep terminates when the difference

between the eigenvalues in two consecutive sweeps divided by the
eigenvalue is less than the tolerance. Default is 0.0001.
16-25
3rd
Initial shift in cycles per time. The power shift is likely to start converging
to the eigenvalue closest to this value. Default is 0.
26-35
4th
Maximum frequency to be extracted in cycles per time. If this is left blank

or zero, the number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC parameter are
extracted. If this is nonzero, the extraction ends when this frequency is
exceeded or when the number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC
parameter is reached, whichever occurs first.
36-40
5th
Number of modes extracted per shift. This data field determines if auto
shifting occurs. If auto shift is not required, set equal to or greater than
number of modes requested on DYNAMIC parameter. Default is 5.
41-50
6th
Auto shift parameter. Marc determines the new shift point (in frequency
squared) as the highest frequency square plus this entry times the
difference between the highest and next highest distinct frequency
squared. Default is 1.0.
51-55
7th
Enter 1 if eigenvectors are to be written to the post file.
MODAL INCREMENT 1040

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2b data block
Data block 2b is used if the Lanczos method is selected on the DYNAMIC parameter.
1-10
1st
SHFMIN, lowest frequency of mode to be extracted (in cycles/time). This

is also the initial shift point. The shift point is SHFMINSHFMIN. If a
negative frequency is given, shift point is -SHFMINSHFMIN. This
cannot be changed upon restart.
11-20
2nd
SHFMAX, highest frequency of modes to be extracted. If set to 0,

NSNRM modes are extracted. If not set to zero, all modes between
SHFMIN and SHFMAX are extracted and NSNRM is not used. A Strum
sequence check is performed to calculate this number. This can be
changed upon restart.
21-25
3rd
NSNRM, number of requested modes. Only needed if SHFMAX is set

equal to 0. This can be increased upon restart.
26-30
4th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
5th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
6th
Enter 1 if eigenvectors are to be written to the post file.
3rd data block

Enter a list of increment numbers at which modes are to be extracted.
1041 BUCKLE INCREMENT

Define Increments for Buckling Analysis
BUCKLE INCREMENT
Description
This option allows you to specify at which increments a buckling analysis is performed. It can be used
as either a replacement to the BUCKLE history definition option or in conjunction with it. This option
allows you to extract modes within an AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, AUTO CREEP, or AUTO INCREMENT
period. Note that the increment numbers specified here cannot be changed upon restart.
Perturbation buckling should not be used with Fourier buckling.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-20
1st
Enter the words BUCKLE INCREMENT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Maximum number of iterations per mode in the power sweep. Default

is 40.
6-15
2nd

eigenvalue is less than the tolerance. Default is 0.0001.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 if Fourier Buckling is to be performed.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 if the eigenvectors are to be written to the post file.
26-30
5th
Enter 1 for automatic buckling perturbation.

Enter 2 for manual buckling perturbation.
31-35
6th
Enter buckling mode to be used in perturbation.

Enter negative number of modes if multiple modes are used
in perturbation.
36-45
7th
Enter the scale factor to be multiplied with the normalized buckle mode
and added to coordinates.
3rd data block

Used only with Fourier buckling.
Enter a list of Fourier harmonics at which to perform extractions.
Positive numbers are symmetric modes; negative numbers are
antisymmetric modes.
Data Block 3a is used only if sixth field of the 2nd data block is negative. Use one line for each mode
used for perturbation.
BUCKLE INCREMENT 1042

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3a data block
1-5
1st
Mode number.
6-15
2nd
Scale factor.
If automatic buckling perturbation, the fifth field on the 2nd data block equals one, do not enter the 4th
data block.
4th data block
Enter a list of increment numbers at which modes are to be extracted.
1043
Heat Transfer Analysis
Chapt Heat Transfer Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for heat transfer
The boundary conditions discussed in this section are also used for coupled thermalMode problems.
mechanical problems or coupled fluid-thermal problems. The ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, and
ANISOTROPIC options are used to define the conductivity, specific heat and density. If these material
l
properties are influenced with temperature, this variation can be prescribed by the TABLE,
Defini TEMPERATURE EFFECTS or ORTHO TEMP options. In problems where temperature effects are
important, a steady-state analysis performed in one increment requires recycling. A transient analysis
tion
recycles and reassembles based upon the tolerances given in the CONTROL option. The initial
Optio temperatures can be prescribed using INITIAL TEMP option. Surface, volumetric or nodal fluxes can be
prescribed and convective boundary conditions can be imposed through the FILMS option.
ns
In Heat Transfer Analysis, data for POINT FLUX, DIST FLUXES, and QVECT should be prescribed as
total rather than incremental quantity (as used in Mechanical Analysis). This specification is to be used
consistently for the heat transfer portion of analysis in coupled thermal-mechanical (thermal-solid), fluidthermal, and fluid-thermal-solid.
FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input) 1044

Define Fixed Temperature
Description
This option defines the temperature that each node must take. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the temperature and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of geometric entries. The
prescribed temperature is associated with a boundary condition name and is activated with the
LOADCASE history definition option. Note that unless heat transfer shell elements are used, there is only
one degree of freedom in a heat transfer analysis.
The FORCDT user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter nonuniform
time dependent boundary conditions.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the words FIXED TEMPERATURE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of boundary conditions to be read (optional).
6-10
2nd
Unit number to read data, default is the standard input file.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Maximum number of degrees of freedom specified on the 4th, 5th, and 6th
data blocks for heat transfer shells if the number of degrees of freedom is
greater than 8.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter a 1 if first prescribed temperature entered is to be applied for all DOF

of a heat transfer shell.
1045 FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
31-63
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
A
For conventional heat transfer element, only one degree of freedom is required.
For heat transfer shell elements, the 4th, 5th, and 6th data blocks are repeated to satisfy the maximum
number specified on the 4th field of the 3rd data block. A maximum of eight degrees of freedom per
data block.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed temperature for first degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed temperature for second degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed temperature for third degree of freedom listed in data block 6.

(See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal degrees
of freedom.)
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6th data block

temperatures are given.
Note:
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface ids
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
11 Element-Edges IDs
FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input) 1046

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

Enter a list of geometric entities for which the above boundary conditions
7th data block.
1047 FIXED TEMPERATURE

FIXED TEMPERATURE
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed temperature that each node must take during the first and subsequent
increments, unless it is further modified using the TEMP CHANGE option. The boundary conditions are
specified either by giving the temperature and a list of nodal numbers, or by the input of boundary
conditions generated during mesh generation (MESH2D).
Note:
The boundary conditions are stored after the connectivity and coordinate data on this file,
so that the model definitions must be arranged accordingly.
For each set of boundary conditions, use the 3a and 4a data blocks or the 3b, 4b, and 5b blocks.
(3a); (4a) For analyses which do not include heat transfer shell elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the words FIXED TEMPERATURE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
mesh generation (MESH2D). If this field is activated, no further data lines
are required in this option.
11-15
3rd
Unit number used for MESH2D option.
Use 3a,4a for analyses which do not include heat transfer shell elements.
3a data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed temperature.
4a data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above temperature is applied.
FIXED TEMPERATURE 1048

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block
Use 3b, 4b, and 5b for analyses which include heat transfer shell elements.
1-10
1st
Prescribed temperature for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed temperature for second degree of freedom listed in data block

4b.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed temperature for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
(See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal degrees of
freedom.)
4b data block
Note:
5b data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above boundary conditions are applied.
1049 FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Define Thermal Boundary Conditions
FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model

Definition)
Description
This option allows the input of convection, natural convection, radiation, and applied fluxes on the
surface of the model. The user defines the film coefficients, sink temperatures, and fluxes here.
Nonuniform films or sink temperatures can be obtained via the UFILM user subroutine (see Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines) or by using the TABLE model definition option. As an
alternative, the sink temperatures may be prescribed using the SINK POINTS option. This option may
also be used to specify a radiation to the environment.
The convective boundary condition is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated and
deactivated by the LOADCASE history definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data used to input film (optional).
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of film data, defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the number of geometric types used to define film boundary

condition. See 7th and 8th data blocks.
6-10
2nd
Enter the sum of FILMTYP + TEMTYP where:

FILMTYP = 0 if no user subroutine is required.
FILMTYP = 1 if the UFILM user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
FILMTYP = 4 if a control node is to be used.
FILMTYP = 6 if the environment temperature is a function of the
temperature of the control node.
FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1050

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
TEMTYP = 0 if temperature dependent convective coefficients based
upon temperature at the surface is used.
upon average of the temperature of the surface
temperature and the ambient temperature is used.
upon the ambient temperature is used.
Note:
The TEMPTYP 0 and 10 are opposite of the MD Nastran

convention, but are necessary to maintain backward
compatibility with Marc input files.
11-15
3rd
If FILMTYP = 4 or 6, enter the control node to be used.
16-20
4th
Enter 0 if environment temperature obtained from 4th data block.

Enter the group number containing the sink points which will be used to
obtain the environment temperature. If the sink points do not belong to any
group, enter 1.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter -1 to exclude applied load when the edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is fully
in contact.
31-63
7th
If a control node is used (see 4th field) or convection nodes are used (see 5th and 6th fields), the first
degree of freedom of this node will always be used even if this node is associated with a heat transfer
shell element.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Reference value of film coefficient.
11-20
2nd
Reference value of sink temperature (reference values can be modified by

the UFILM user subroutine). If convection is specified to a node(s), this
value is ignored.
21-30
3rd
Enter the magnitude of externally applied distributed flux.
31-40
4th
Reference value of the film coefficient for natural convection.
41-50
5th
Enter the exponent for natural convection.
51-60
6th
Enter the emissivity.
61-70
7th
Effective View factor (default = 1.0).
1051 FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

Table IDs
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the film coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the sink temperature.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with the distributed flux.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID associated with the natural convection.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID associated with the exponent for natural convection.
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for emissivity.
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID for view factor.
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

01: Normal flux (bottom surface for shells)
10: Normal flux (top surface for shells)
11-15
3rd
Enter the face ID.
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1052

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
19: Curve ID: orientation ID - Marc Mentat convention
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
1053 FILMS (Model Definition)

Define Convection Film Coefficient Input
FILMS (Model Definition)
Define Convection Film Coefficient Input
input style.
Description
This option allows film coefficients and associated sink temperatures to be input. Nonuniform films or
sink temperatures can be obtained via the FILM user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines
and Special Routines).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd

the FILM user subroutine).
26-30
4th
Film coefficient index (optional).
31-35
5th
Sink temperature index (optional). (Film coefficient and sink temperature

indices are to be used in the FILM user subroutine).
4th data block

SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1054

Define Sink Points
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Sink Points
Description
This option is used to define the temperature at arbitrary points in the environment. The radiative and
convective thermal fluxes as entered through the FILMS option are based upon these values. These
temperatures may change with time by using either the TABLE model definition option or the USINKPT
user subroutine. The program uses the closest eligible sink point to the surface integration point.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words SINK POINTS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sink point groups to be entered.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number used to read the sink points.
11-15
3rd
Enter a 1 to print out sink point data.
16-20
4th
Enter the number of real variables associated with sink point, default is 1
(temperature), maximum is 8.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word GROUP.
11-15
2nd
Enter the group number. Default is 1.
16-20
3rd
Enter a 1 if the USINKPT user subroutine is used.
Repeat data blocks 4 through 6 for each sink point in this group.
4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the sink point id. Only used for the USINKPT user subroutine;
otherwise could be zero.
6-15
2nd
Enter the first coordinate of sink point.
16-25
3rd
Enter the second coordinate of sink point.
26-35
4th
Enter the third coordinate of sink point.
1055 SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Define Sink Points
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the sink temperature.
11-20
2nd
Enter the second sink variable if the 2nd data block, 4th field is greater
than 1.
etc.
6th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the sink temperature.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the second sink variable if required.
etc.
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1056

Define Distributed Fluxes
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model

Definition)
Description
This option defines total distributed (surface and volumetric) fluxes by giving the magnitude, location,
and associating the information with a boundary condition name. Distributed fluxes are converted to
consistent nodal fluxes by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established convention
for the application of surface flux on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or the TABLE
model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent fluxes.
The applied flux is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition option.
Note:
If a distributed flux is applied on the bottom of a shell, the flux is applied to the highest
degrees of freedom of the shell.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST FLUXES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of distributed fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of distributed flux data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 8 are given for each set.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Enter the FLUXTYPE:

FLUXTYPE = 0 if no user subroutine is required.
FLUXTYPE = 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
1057 DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
FLUXTYPE = 4 if the distributed flux is dependent on a control node.
FLUXTYPE = 6 If the tables used to describe a temperature dependent
flux are based upon the temperature at the control node,
as opposed to the temperature at the surface integration
point.
11-15
3rd
If the FLUXTYPE = 4 or 6, enter the control node to be used.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
in contact.
31-63
7th
is referenced by the LOADCASE option.
Note:
If a control node is used (see 3rd field), the first degree of

freedom of this node will always be used even if this node is
associated with a heat transfer shell element.
4th data block (used if FLUXTYPE = 0, 1, or 4)

1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed fluxes.
5th data block (use if FLUXTYPE = 0, 1, or 4

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the distributed flux.
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

106: Volumetrix flux (per unit volume)
11-15
3rd
Enter the face ID or edge ID.
block, 1st field.
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1058

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
1059 DIST FLUXES (Model Definition)

DIST FLUXES (Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) fluxes to be specified. Distributed fluxes are
converted to consistent nodal fluxes by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface flux on a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be used
to input time and spatial dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block

1-5
1st
Also see distributed flux type 101 under the COUPLE

parameter definition.
6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Flux index (optional). (Flux index is to be used in the FLUX

user subroutine.)
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed fluxes.
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1060

Define Point Fluxes
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
Define Point Fluxes
Description
This option defines total nodal point fluxes by giving the magnitude, location, and associating the
information with a boundary condition name. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the TABLE model
definition option can be used for the time dependent fluxes.
The applied flux is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT FLUX.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of point fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point flux data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 7 are given in sets.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Enter the FLUXTYPE:

FLUXTYPE = 0 if no user subroutine is required.
FLUXTYPE = 1 if the FORCDT user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
FLUXTYPE = 4 if the point flux is dependent on a control node.
FLUXTYPE = 6 If the tables used to describe a temperature dependent
flux are based upon the temperature at the control node,
as opposed to the temperature at which the flux
is applied.
11-15
3rd
If the FLUXTYPE = 4 or 6, enter the control node to be used.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
1061 POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Define Point Fluxes
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter a 1 if first point flux is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of a

heat transfer shell.
31-63
7th
Notes:
If a control node is used (see 3rd field), the first degree of

freedom of this node will always be used even if this node is
If fluxes are applied to multiple degrees of freedom of a heat
transfer shell element, the control node will be applied to all
degrees of freedom.
For heat transfer shell elements having more than eight degrees of freedom, the 4th and 5th data blocks
are repeated as required, giving eight values per set.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Magnitude of point flux in first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point flux in second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point flux in third degree of freedom.
31-40
4th
Magnitude of point flux in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50
5th
Magnitude of point flux in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60
6th
Magnitude of point flux in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70
7th
Magnitude of point flux in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80
8th
Magnitude of point flux in eighth degree of freedom.
5th data block

Table IDs
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1062

Define Point Fluxes
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
block, 1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element ids
2: Nodes ids
3: Volume/Region/Body ids
4: Surface ids
5: Curve ids
6: Point ids
11: Element-Edges ids
12: Element-Faces ids
7th data block

1-80

6th data block.
1063 POINT FLUX (Model Definition)

Define Point Fluxes
POINT FLUX (Model Definition)
Define Point Fluxes
input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point fluxes to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for the time dependent fluxes. Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes with point fluxes on the
FLUXES parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point flux data; defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Magnitude of point flux.
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point flux for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point flux for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal sources are applied.
QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1064

Define Thermal Vector Flux Boundary Conditions
QVECT (with TABLE Input Model Definition)
Description
This option allows the input of thermal vector flux from a distant source into one or more elements.
Variations may be given by using either a control node, or using tables.
The thermal vector flux boundary condition is associated with a boundary condition name that is
activated and deactivated by the LOADCASE history definition option.
The absorption is defined via the EMISSIVITY option.
The total power into an element is given by:
P = A * e * n * Q0

P = A * e * n * Q0 * U cntr ln d

if no control node is given or
is the user-defined direction cosine.
if a control node is given.
is the normal to the surface
If the temperature of the radiant source is given, then all temperature dependent properties will be a
function of this temperature.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the word QVECT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data used to input vector flux (optional).
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of vector flux data; defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 8 are entered for each vector flux input.
1065 QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Enter the sum of VECFLUXTYPE + TEMTYP + ISIDE where:

VECFLUXTYPE = 0 if no user subroutine required.
VECFLUXTYPE = 1 if the UQVECT user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
VECFLUXTYPE = 4 if a control node is to be used.
VECFLUXTYPE = 6 if the table used to describe the temperature
dependent flux is based upon the temperature at the
control node.
TEMTYP=0
if temperature dependent absorption coefficients

based upon temperature at the surface.
TEMTYP=10
if temperature dependent absorption coefficients

based upon the average of the surface temperature
and the source temperature.
TEMTYP=20
if temperature dependent convective coefficients

based upon the source temperature.
If Q 0 > 0 then,
ISIDE=0
current default - means heat
11-15
3rd
will be added if e n < 0

will be subtracted if e n > 0

ISIDE=100
means heat will be added if e n < 0

no heat if e n > 0

ISIDE=200
means no heat if e n < 0

heat will be subtracted if e n > 0

ISIDE=300
means always add heat; this is the same as using
absolute value of e n

If VECFLUXTYPE =4 or 6, enter the control node to be used.
16-20
4th
Emissivity/Absorption ID.
The emissivity/Absorption ID is not required but if given, it reduces the
amount of memory required for the analysis.
QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1066

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used, enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used, enter 0.
31-63
7th
Note:
It a control node is used (see 3rd field), the first degree of

freedom of this node will be always be used even if this node is
4th data block

1-10
1st
Magnitude of the thermal flux into the face.
11-20
2nd
Temperature of the radiant source.
21-30
3rd
First direction cosine of thermal flux.
31-40
4th
Second direction cosine of thermal flux.
41-50
5th
Third direction cosine of thermal flux.

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the magnitude of the thermal flux.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the temperature of the radiant source.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for first direction cosine of thermal flux.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for second direction cosine of thermal flux.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for third direction cosine of thermal flux.
6th data block

If geometry type is element IDs (1), use either the first field or the second and third field.
If geometry type is volume (3), surface (4), or curve (5), use the second field only.
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

01 Flux (bottom surface for shells)
10 Flux (top surface for shells)
11-15
3rd
Enter the face ID.
block, 1st field.
1067 QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the geometry type

1: Element IDs, top side if shell element
4: Surface IDs, top side if shell element
5: Curve IDs, top side if shell element
11: Element-Edge IDs, top side if shell element
12: Element-Face ID, top side if shell element
13: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention, top side if
shell element
14: Element-Face IDs - Mentat convention, top side if
shell element.
21: Element IDs, bottom side if shell element
24: Surface IDs, bottom side if shell element
25: Curve IDs, bottom side if shell element
31: Element-Edge IDs, bottom side if shell element
32: Element-Face IDs, bottom side if shell element
33: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention, bottom
side if shell element
34: Element-Face IDs - Mentat convention, bottom
side if shell element.
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1068

Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source
Description
This option allows welding (surface and volumetric) fluxes to be specified. Two groups of parameters
are used in this option to specify the weld flux. The first group pertains to the initial location and motion
of the weld source and the second group pertains to the magnitude and shape of the weld source. The
distributed weld fluxes are converted to consistent nodal fluxes by Marc.
The default volumetric weld flux has a double ellipsoidal shape and is suitable for deep penetration
welding processes like laser welding and electron beam welding. The default surface weld flux has a disc
shape and is suitable for welding processes like arc welding. Arbitrary volumetric or surface flux values
at integration points along the weld path can be specified through the UWELDFLUX user subroutine.
Refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 6, Nonstructural Procedure Library, Weld
Flux for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words WELD FLUX.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are given for each set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Weld Flux Index (Index can be used in the UWELDFLUX user subroutine).
11-15
3rd
Weld Flux Type:

1 double ellipsoidal shaped volumetric weld flux.
2 disc shaped surface weld flux.
3 user subroutine defined weld flux.
16-20
4th
Weld Path Index.
1069 WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Weld Filler Index.
26-30
6th
Initial Position Flag:

0 Initial weld position is automatically taken as first point of associated
weld path.
1 Initial weld position is specified in the first three fields of the 4th data
block.
31-63
7th
4th data block

1-10
1st
X coordinate for initial position of weld flux.
11-20
2nd
Y coordinate for initial position of weld flux.
21-30
3rd
Z coordinate for initial position of weld flux.
31-40
4th
Local X offset from weld path.
41-50
5th
Local Y offset from weld path.
51-60
6th
Velocity of weld flux.
61-65
7th
Table ID for velocity.
Notes:
The initial position defined in fields 1, 2, and 3 of data block 4 is only used if the initial
position flag in the 6th field of the 3rd data block is nonzero. Also, the given initial weld
position should be along the associated weld path. Else, the program will terminate with
exit 20. The defined initial weld position is mandatory when the user subroutine
UWELDPATH is used to define the associated weld path. When the same weld flux is
specified in multiple loadcases, the initial weld position is only used for the starting
loadcase. For subsequent loadcases, the position at the end of the previous loadcase is
used as the starting position.
The X and Y offsets (fields 4 and 5 in data block 4) are defined in the local coordinate
system of the weld flux. They are 0 by default. The Y offset is along the arc direction and
the X offset is along the tangent direction. These offsets allow the flux to be located at a
specified distance from the associated weld path.
The table defining the weld velocity can be a function of time.
5th data block

1-10
1st
Power of weld flux.
11-20
2nd
Efficiency of weld flux.
21-30
3rd
Scale Factor for weld flux.
31-40
4th
Width of weld (for volumetric source).

Radius of weld (for surface source).
Fields 5 through 7 are only valid for the double ellipsoidal volumetric weld flux:
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1070

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
Depth of weld.
51-60
6th
Forward length of weld.
61-70
7th
Rear length of weld.
71-80
8th
Maximum distance from weld origin for nonzero flux
6th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for Weld Flux Power.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for Weld Flux Efficiency.
11-15
3rd
Scale Factor Flag:

0 Use automatic scale factor.
1 Use manually defined scale factor.
16-20
4th
Table ID for Weld Width/Radius.
21-25
5th
Table ID for Weld Depth.
26-30
6th
Table ID for Weld Forward Length.
31-35
7th
Table ID for Weld Rear Length.
36-40
8th
Table ID for Maximum Distance from Weld Origin
Notes:
The 5th and 6th data blocks are directly used for the ellipsoidal and disc shaped weld
fluxes. The flux values are defined directly for the user subroutine option. The weld
dimensions can still be entered in this case since they are useful for filler element
activation, adaptive meshing box definition, etc.
The scale factor in the 3rd field of the 5th data block can be manually specified or
automatically determined by the program. The scale factor flag in the 3rd field of the 6th
data block determines the usage. See Volume A for more details.
If the maximum distance from weld origin is not defined (left as 0), then the weld pool
dimensions are used to determine which elements receive the weld flux.
The tables defining the weld power, efficiency, weld width/radius, depth, forward and
rear lengths, and the maximum distance from weld origin can be a function of time or arc
length measured along the associated weld path.
1071 WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1:
Normal flux (bottom surface for shells)

11-15
3rd
block, 1st field.
8th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
9th data block

1-80

8th data block.
WELD FLUX (Model Definition) 1072

WELD FLUX (Model Definition)
Define Motion and Flux Parameters for

Weld Heat Source
input style.
Description
Flux for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of weld fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of weld flux data; defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Weld Flux Index (Index is to be used in the UWELDFLUX user

subroutine).
6-10
2nd
Weld Flux Type:

11-15
3rd
Weld Path Index.
16-20
4th
Weld Filler Index.
1073 WELD FLUX (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Parameter identifying the type of distributed flux. See library element

Note that the parameter in this field should be consistent with the weld
flux type specified in the 2nd field.
26-30
6th

0 Initial weld position is automatically taken as first point of
associated weld path.
1 Initial weld position is specified in the first three fields of the 4th
data block.
31-35
7th
Weld Flux Activation Flag

0 Weld Flux boundary condition is active in loadcase
1 Weld Flux boundary condition is inactive in loadcase
36-67
8th
Weld Flux Name (optional)
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-65
7th
Notes: The initial position defined in fields 1, 2, and 3 of data block 4 is only used if the initial
position should be along the associated weld path. Else, the program will terminate with exit
20. The defined initial weld position is mandatory when the UWELDPATH user subroutine is
used to define the associated weld path. When the same weld flux is specified in multiple
loadcases, the initial weld position is only used for the starting loadcase. For subsequent
loadcases, the position at the end of the previous loadcase is used as the starting position.
The X and Y offsets (fields 4 and 5 in data block 4) are defined in the local coordinate system
of the weld flux. They are 0 by default. The Y offset is along the arc direction and the X offset
is along the tangent direction. These offsets allow the flux to be located at a specified distance
from the associated weld path.
WELD FLUX (Model Definition) 1074

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
Power of weld flux.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

41-50
5th
Depth of weld.
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
Maximum distance from weld origin for nonzero flux.
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Scale Factor Flag:

16-20
4th
Fields 5 - 7 are only valid for the double ellipsoidal volumetric weld flux:
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
Table ID for maximum distance from weld origin.
Notes: The 5th and 6th data blocks are directly used for the ellipsoidal and disc shaped weld fluxes.
The flux values are defined directly for the user subroutine option. The weld dimensions can
still be entered in this case since they are useful for filler element activation, adaptive meshing
box definition, etc.
automatically determined by the program. The scale factor flag in the 3rd field of the 6th data
block determines the usage. See Volume A for more details.
1075 WELD FLUX (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The tables defining the weld power, efficiency, weld width/radius, depth, forward and rear
lengths, and maximum distance from weld origin can be a function of time or arc length
measured along the associated weld path.
7th data block
Enter a list of elements associated with the above weld flux.
WELD PATH (Model Definition) 1076

Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source
WELD PATH (Model Definition) Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source
Description
This option specifies the weld path to be followed by the weld flux. The orientation of the arc along the
path is also defined. The weld path can be specified through nodes or point coordinates of polyline curves
in the input file or through point coordinates in a separate text file, or through the UWELDPATH user
subroutine. The arc orientation can be specified through nodes, point coordinates of polyline curves,
vector components or Euler angles in the input file, point coordinates, vector components, or Euler angles
in a separate text file, or through the UWELDPATH user subroutine.
The specified path and arc orientation are used to define a moving local coordinate system. The Z axis
of the local coordinate system is along the weld path, the Y axis is along the arc orientation and the X
axis is along the tangent. X and Y axes that are perpendicular to each other and perpendicular to the given
weld path (Z axis) are constructed based on the information provided in this option. Refer to Marc Volume
A Theory and User Information, Chapter 6, Nonstructural Procedure Library, Weld Path for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words WELD PATH.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of weld paths to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of weld path data, defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Weld Path Index (Index is used for cross-referencing with the 3rd data
block of the WELD FLUX option)
6-10
2nd
Weld Path Type

1 Weld Path is specified through ordered list of nodes
2 Weld Path is specified through point coordinates of polyline curves.
4 Weld Path is specified through text file
5 Weld Path is specified through the UWELDPATH user subroutine.
11-15
3rd
Arc Orientation Type

1 Arc Orientation is specified through ordered list of nodes.
2 Arc Orientation is specified through point coordinates of
polyline curves.
3 Arc Orientation is specified through vector components.
1077 WELD PATH (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4 Arc Orientation is specified through Euler angles.
5 Arc Orientation is specified through the UWELDPATH
user subroutine.
16-20
4th
Number of curves used to define the Weld Path. This field is only valid
when Weld Path Type is 2.
21-25
5th
Path Interpolation flag 0 or 1.

0 Arc Orientation at first point of segment is used for whole segment.
1 Arc Orientation is linearly interpolated between first and last points
of segment.
26-30
6th
Not used.
31-62
7th
Weld Path Name (optional)
Notes: Weld Path Type 1 can only be used with Arc Orientation Types 1, 3, or 4.
Weld Path Type 2 can only be used with Arc Orientation Types 2, 3, or 4.
Weld Path Type 4 can only be used with Arc Orientation Type 2, 3, or 4. All quantities are
specified via separate text file in this case.
Weld Path Type 5 can only be used with Arc Orientation Type 5.
The 4th through 7th data blocks depend on the WELD PATH TYPE (2nd field of 3rd data block) and
ARC ORIENTATION TYPE (3rd field of 3rd data block). These data blocks are only needed for weld
path types 1, 2, and 4.
I. WELD PATH TYPE 1 (NODES)
4th data block
Enter an unsorted list of nodes or unsorted set of nodes (NDSQ) needed to
define the weld path.
A. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 1 (NODES)
5th data block

1-10
1st
Angle in degrees by which the ARC-TANGENT plane is rotated about

weld path (default is 0).
11-15
2nd
Table ID for Angle.
6th data block

define the weld orientation.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Notes: The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length along the weld path or a
function of the position coordinates along the weld path.
The arc vector is defined as the vector from the weld path node to the weld orientation node.
The number of nodes defining the weld orientation has to be either equal to 1 or equal to the
number of nodes defining the weld path. If only one node is used, the arc vector is defined as
the vector from the weld path node to that node always.
B. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 3 (VECTOR)
5th data block

1-10
1st
Component X of Arc Orientation Vector.
11-20
2nd
Component Y of Arc Orientation Vector.
21-30
3rd
Component Z of Arc Orientation Vector.
31-35
4th
Table ID for Component X.
36-40
5th
Table ID for Component Y.
41-45
6th
Table ID for Component Z.
Note:
The tables defining the arc orientation vector components can be a function of the arclength
along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along the weld path.
C. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 4 (EULER ANGLES)
5th data block

1-10
1st
Rotation of unit vector in X direction about global X axis.
11-20
2nd
Rotation of unit vector in X direction about global Y axis.
21-30
3rd
Rotation of unit vector in X direction about global Z axis.
31-35
4th
Table ID for Rotation about X.
36-40
5th
Table ID for Rotation about Y.
41-45
6th
Table ID for Rotation about Z.
Note:
All rotation values are specified in degrees. If all rotation values are 0, the arc orientation is
taken as <1,0,0>; i.e., unit vector in global X direction. Tables defining the Euler angles can
be a function of arclength along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along
the weld path.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
II. WELD PATH TYPE 2 (CURVES)

Start Loop over Number of Polyline Curves
Read Number of Points to define Polyline
(4th data block)
Start Loop over Number of Points to define Path Polyline

Read coordinates of each Weld Path Point
(5th data block)
End loop over Points

End loop over Polyline Curves
For Each Curve:

4th data block
1-5
1st
Weld Curve Type (polyline = 1).
6-10
2nd
Number of Points to Define Polyline.
For each point on the Weld Path Curve:

5th data block
1-10
1st
X coordinate of point.
11-20
2nd
Y coordinate of point.
21-30
3rd
Z coordinate of point.
A. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 2 (CURVES)

Read Angle for Rotation of Tangent-Arc Plane (6th data block)
Start Loop over Number of Points to define Arc Polyline
Read coordinates of each Weld Orientation Point (7th data block)
End Loop over Point
End Loop over Polyline Curves
For Each Curve:

6th data block
1-5
1st
Arc Curve Type (polyline = 1).
6-15
2nd
Angle in degrees by which Arc-Tangent plane is rotated about Weld Path

(default = 0).
16-20
3rd
Table ID for angle.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For each point on the Arc Orientation Curve:

7th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Notes: Only Polylines (Weld Curve Type = 1, Arc Curve Type = 1) are supported in the
current version.
The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length along the weld path or a
The number of points defining the arc orientation curve has to be equal to the number of points
defining the weld path curve.
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-35
4th
36-40
5th
41-45
6th
Note:
The tables defining the arc orientation vector components can be a function of the arc length
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-35
4th
36-40
5th
41-45
6th
Note:
taken as <1,0,0> i.e., unit vector in global X direction. Tables defining the euler angles can be
a function of arclength along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along the
weld path.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
III. WELD PATH TYPE 4 (Text File)

4th data block
Enter name of Text File containing Weld Path and Arc
Orientation Information.
Note:
Columns 1 - 3 of the text file contain weld path information. Columns 4 - 6 of the text file
contain arc orientation information. Depending on the arc orientation type (2, 3 or 4) specified
on the 3rd data block, columns 4 - 6 can contain point coordinates, vector components or Euler
angle values. The entry in each column is a real number of width 10. The columns can be in
free or fixed format with commas being used to separate the columns in the free format mode.
WELD FILL (Model Definition) 1082

Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements
WELD FILL (Model Definition)
Description
This option identifies the weld filler elements that are associated with a particular weld heat source. The
method by which the filler elements can potentially participate in the analysis is specified. Two methods
can be used: Quiet Element method and Deactivated Element Method.
In the Quiet Element Method, the filler elements are always part of the analysis. However, prior to their
physical creation, the filler elements are used with scaled down material properties. The regular material
properties are restored after the filler elements are physically created by the moving heat source. In the
Deactivated Element Method, the filler elements are deactivated at the outset and are automatically
activated only when they are physically created by the moving heat source.
Filler Bounding Box X, Y, and Z refer to dimensions in the local coordinate system attached to the
moving heat source. They are used to identify if filler elements are physically created during the welding
process. If these dimensions are not specified on the option (i.e., left at 0), they are related to weld pool
dimensions set on the WELD FLUX option:
Filler Bounding Box X in the Tangent direction = 1.5 x Weld Width
Filler Bounding Box Y in the Arc direction = 2 x Weld Width
Filler Bounding Box Z in the Arc Direction = Weld Pool Length
Filler for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words WELD FILL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of weld fillers to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Weld Filler Index (Index is used for cross-referencing with field 4 of the
3rd data block in the WELD FLUX option).
6-10
2nd
Initial Activation Flag

0 Quiet Element Method.
1 Deactivated Element Method.
1083 WELD FILL (Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Temperature Boundary Condition Flag

0 Nodal boundary conditions are applied
1 Nodal boundary conditions are not applied
16-25
4th
Melting Point Temperature
26-35
5th
Temperature Activation Time (0 by default)
36-45
6th
Material Property Scale Factor (1e-5 by default)
46-77
7th
Weld Filler Name (Optional)
Notes: The melting point temperature information in field 4 is only used if the boundary condition
flag in field 3 is 0. If nodal boundary conditions are not applied (3rd field = 1), weld fluxes
can be applied to the filler elements to ramp up the temperature. A user-specified thermal
activation time, specified in field 5, can also be used.
The thermal activation time serves two purposes: (1) It defines the time over which the
temperature boundary condition is ramped (only valid when field 3 is 0). Default is 0 which
means that the temperatures are applied instantaneously. For nonzero time values, the
temperatures of the active filler elements are linearly increased from the current value to the
specified temperature over the specified time step. (2) It defines the time during which the
filler elements only participate in the thermal pass and not in the mechanical pass (valid when
field 3 is 0 or 1). Default is 0 which means that if the filler elements are first created at
increment n, they only participate on the thermal side at increment n, and then participate in
both thermal and mechanical passes at increment n+1. For nonzero time values, the filler
elements remain thermally active over the specified time duration and become mechanically
active only after the time duration.
The property scale factor in field 6 is only used for the quiet element method.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Filler Bounding Box in X (weld width) direction
11-20
2nd
Filler Bounding Box in Y (weld depth) direction
21-30
3rd
Filler Bounding Box in +Z (forward path) direction
31-40
4th
Filler Bounding Box in -Z (rear path) direction
41-45
5th
Table ID for Filler Bounding Box X
46-50
6th
Table ID for Filler Bounding Box Y
51-55
7th
Table ID for Filler Bounding Box +Z
56-60
8th
Table ID for Filler Bounding Box -Z
Note:
The table IDs for the filler bounding boxes can be a function of time or arc length. The arc
length is measured along the weld path from the first point to the current position of the
weld source. If the bounding box dimensions are not specified, the weld pool dimensions are
used to define the box.
WELD FILL (Model Definition) 1084

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-80
Enter the list of filler elements
1085 THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)

Define Two-dimensional Thermal or Electrical Contact Conditions
Define Two-dimensional Thermal

or Electrical Contact Conditions
Description
This option allows for the input of 2-D thermal contact definition in heat transfer problems and the
definition of conducting bodies for electrostatic and Joule heating analysis. Near thermal contact is only
available if the input version is 10 or greater. THERMAL CONTACT should not be used in problems where
a mechanical-displacement solution is obtained as there is no checking for changes in contact; use the
CONTACT option instead.
Note:
Always define heat conduction thermal bodies before heat sink bodies.
If the UHTCOEF option and the UHTCOE user subroutine are used, the film coefficient and sink
temperature data of a free surface can be skipped.
If the UHTCON option and the UHTCON user subroutine are used, the film coefficient data between
surfaces in contact can be skipped.
DCONTACT
1st field
3rd data block
Bias factor
2nd field
3rd data block
T1
d
T2
If d DCONTACT , then contact

q = H CT T 2 T 1
if deformable-deformable
q = H CT T 2 T BODY
if rigid.
If DCONTACT d DQNEAR and DQNEAR is defined, the last term is only included if H BL is defined.
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) 1086

q = H CV T 2 T 1 + H NC T 2 T 1
B NC
+ f T 2 T 1
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T 1
DQNEAR
DQNEAR
If d DQNEAR
4
q = H CTVE T 2 T SINK + T 2 T SINK
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word THERMAL CONTACT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Upper bound to the number of nodes that lie on the periphery of any
deformable surface.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Linearization flag to be used if a contact body consists of quadratic

element:
1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described based on the corner
nodes only. In the contact area, the midside nodes are linearly tied
to the corresponding corner nodes. Midside nodes cannot come
into contact.
-1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described using a quadratic
field. If a node touches a quadratic segment, a full quadratic
multipoint constraint is set up. Both corner and midside nodes can
come into contact.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Distance below which a node is considered touching a body

(DCONTACT). Leave blank if you want Marc to calculate it. This number
is also used to divide splines. If splines are used, this must be defined.
11-20
2nd
Contact tolerance BIAS factor. (0-1)
Data blocks 4th through 20th are repeated once for each body to be defined.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd

(NETTY).
11-15
3rd
Enter 0 for double-sided contact with default search order based upon
body id.
contact is used.
For conducting bodies, enter 2 if double-sided contact is used with
automatic optimization of the contact constraint equations. Notice that
this can be overruled per contact body combination by the CONTACT
TABLE option.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Enter 1 if analytic form is to be used.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th

1: heat sink;
4: heat conduction body.
7: electromagnetic conducting body
41-64
9th
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th

Default = 0.0.

Format
Fixed
51-60
Free
6th
Data
Entry Entry
F

Default = 0.0.
61-70
7th
Third component direction cosine of local axis;

Default = 1.0.
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
7th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
8th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
9th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
Enter the surface emissivity for near field behavior ().

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
(HCV).
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for natural convection coefficient for near field behavior
(HNC).
31-35
7th
(BNC).
36-40
8th
Enter the table ID for the surface emissivity for near field behavior ().
11th data block (Only if heat transfer is included.)

1-10
1st

(HBL).
12th data block (Only if heat transfer is included.)

1-5
1st
2. If separation distance (s) is greater than ERROR, but less than DQNEAR , and DQNEAR is
not zero.
q = H CV T B T A + H NC T B T A
B NC
+ T B T A
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T B T A
DQNEAR
DQNEAR

3. If separation distance (s) is greater than DQNEAR , then convection to environment only.
4
q = H CVE T SINK T A + T SINK T A

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
13th data block

Only if Joule Heating is included.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
14th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
field behavior.
26-30
6th

15th data block

Only used if coupled mass diffusion.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
16th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
rate coefficient.
The 17th through 20th data blocks are repeated for as many geometrical data as required (NETTY).
17a data block

1-80
1st
17b data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 18th data block is repeated once for each point entered.
18b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
17c data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd


18c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
17d data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

18d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
17e data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
18e data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
19e data block
1-10
1st
20e data block
1-10
1st
1093 THERMAL CONTACT (2-D)

Define Two-dimensional Thermal

input style.
Description
Note:
DCONTACT
1st field
3rd data block
Bias factor
2nd field
3rd data block
T1
d
T2

q = H CT T 2 T 1
q = H CT T 2 T BODY
if rigid.
THERMAL CONTACT (2-D) 1094

q = H CV T 2 T 1 + T 2 T 1
B NC
+ f T 2 T 1
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T 1
DQNEAR
DQNEAR
If d DQNEAR
4
The distance below which near contact behavior occurs for thermal and electrical behavior (DQNEAR)
needs to be defined in the CONTACT TABLE and can be set for each interface separately.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
deformable surface.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Linearization flag to be used if a contact body consists of quadratic

element:
1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described based on the corner
nodes only. In the contact area, the midside nodes are linearly tied
to the corresponding corner nodes. Midside nodes cannot come
into contact.
-1: The outer boundary of a contact body is described using a quadratic
field. If a node touches a quadratic segment, a full quadratic
multipoint constraint is set up. Both corner and midside nodes can
come into contact.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
4th data block
1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
body id.
contact is used.
automatic optimization of the contact constraint equations. Notice that this
can be overruled per contact body combination by the CONTACT TABLE
option.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th

1: rigid body;
4: heat -rigid body.
7: electromagnetic conducting body.
41-64
9th
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Third component direction cosine of local axis. Default = 1.0.
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
7th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
The 8th and 9th data blocks are only necessary for heat transfer.
8th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
Enter the surface emissivity for near field behavior or radiation to

environment ( ).
Enter the separation distance dependent heat transfer file coefficient

( H BL ).
9th data block

1-10
1st

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th

11a data block
1-80
1st

11b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
12b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

11c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd


12c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

11d data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

12d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

11e data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
13e data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
14e data block
1-10
1st
15e data block
1-10
1st

Define Three-dimensional Thermal or Electrical Contact Conditions
Define Three-dimensional Thermal

Description
Note:
Always define heat conduction thermal bodies before heat sink bodies.
DCONTACT
1st field
3rd data block
Bias factor
2nd field
3rd data block
T1
d
T2

q = H CT T 2 T 1
q = H CT T 2 T BODY
if rigid.
q = H CV T 2 T 1 + H NC T 2 T 1
B NC
+ f T 2 T 1
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T 1
DQNEAR
DQNEAR

If d DQNEAR
4
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
deformable surface.
16-20
4th
3rd data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
Contact tolerance BIAS factor. (0-1)Data blocks 4 through 24 are repeated

once for each body to be defined.
4th data block

1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd

(NETTY).
11-15
3rd
body ID.
contact is used.
TABLE option.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th

1: heat sink;
4: heat conduction body.
7: electromagnetic conducting body.
41-64
9th
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Third component direction cosine of local axis; Default = 1.0.
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
7th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
8th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
Enter the surface emissivity for near field behavior ().
10th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for the convection coefficient for near field
behavior (HCV).
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for natural convection coefficient for near field
behavior (HNC).
31-35
7th
(BNC).
36-40
8th
Enter the table ID for the surface emissivity for near field behavior ().
11th data block

Only if heat transfer is included.
1-10
1st

(HBL).

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
12th data block

1-5
1st
zero.
q = H CV T B T A + H NC T B T A
B NC
+ T B T A
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T B T A
DQNEAR
DQNEAR

3. If separation distance (s) is greater than DQNEAR , then convection to environment only.
4
13th data block

Only if Joule heating is included.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
14th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for the electrical transfer coefficient for near field
behavior.
26-30
6th


Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
15th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
16th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for the separation distance dependent mass flow rate
coefficient.
The 17th through 24th data blocks are repeated for each set of body entities (NSURGN).
17a data block
1-80
1st

17b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th

(JPOINT2).
21-25
5th


Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th

31-35
7th

18b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

17c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2
16-20
4th
Number of subdivisions along the first (surface generator)

direction (NDIV1).
21-25
5th

direction (NDIV2).
18c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
19c data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th


17d data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
18d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

17e data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

NSEG.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th

Default: no printing.The 16e data block is repeated NSEG times for
patches not entered by means of user subroutines (ITYPE = 7 and KUNIT
not -1)
18e data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
19e data block
1-5
1st
Point number.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th

17f data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
18f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

17g data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
18g data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
19g data block
1-10
1st
20g data block
1-10
1st
Knot vector(0 k 1).
21g data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
22g data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
23g data block
1-10
1st
24g data block
1-10
1st

17h data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
18h data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Third coordinate of center point on bottom surface radius of

bottom surface.
71-80
8th

Note:


17i data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
18i data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Radius of sphere.
Note:


Define Three-dimensional Thermal or

Electrical Contact Conditions
input style.
Description
Note:
DCONTACT
1st field
3rd data block
Bias factor
2nd field
3rd data block
T1
d
T2

q = H CT T 2 T 1
q = H CT T 2 T BODY
if rigid.
q = H CV T 2 T 1 + T 2 T 1
B NC
+ f T 2 T 1
S
S
+ H CT 1 -------------------------- + H BL -------------------------- T 1
DQNEAR
DQNEAR

If d DQNEAR
4
The distance below which near contact behavior occurs for thermal and electrical behavior (DQNEAR)
needs to be defined in the CONTACT TABLE and can be set for each interface separately.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
deformable surface.
16-20
4th
3rd data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
4th data block
1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd

(NETTY).
11-15
3rd
body ID.
contact is used.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
TABLE option.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th

1: rigid body;
4: heat -rigid body.
7: electromagnetic conducting body
41-64
9th
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
7th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 8th and 9th data blocks are only necessary for heat transfer.
8th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
Enter the surface emissivity for near field behavior ( ).

( H BL ).
9th data block

1-10
1st
10th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th

11a data block
1-80
1st

11b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I

16-20
4th

(JPOINT2).
21-25
5th

26-30
6th

31-35
7th

12b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

11c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2
16-20
4th

(NDIV1).
21-25
5th

(NDIV2).
12c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
13c data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th


11d data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
12d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

11e data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

NSEG.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Set to 1 if patch data is to be printed. Default: no printing.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
12e data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
13e data block
1-5
1st
Point number.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th

11f data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
12f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

11g data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
12g data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
13g data block
1-10
1st
14g data block
1-10
1st
Knot vector(0 k 1).
15g data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
16g data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
17g data block
1-10
1st
18g data block
1-10
1st

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

11h data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
12h data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Third coordinate of center point on bottom surface radius of

bottom surface.
71-80
8th

Note:


11i data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
12i data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Radius of sphere.
Note:

1119 INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer)

INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer) Define Initial Temperatures
Description
This option defines initial temperatures for heat transfer problems. Associated with an initial condition
name will be the magnitude and location of the initial temperature. The initial condition is activated using
the LOADCASE model definition option. The USINC user subroutine or the TABLE model definition
option can be used to enter spatially varying initial conditions. Unless heat transfer shells are present,
there is only one degree of freedom in a heat transfer analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of initial temperatures (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of initial temperatures data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if user subroutines USINC required for this initial condition.
Enter 2 if initial temperatures are read from post file.
11-15
3rd
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 2. Then this entry defines the unit
number from which the post file information is read. Defaults to unit 24
for a formatted post file and to unit 25 for a binary post file.
16-20
4th
Enter the increment number to be read for initial conditions.

INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer) 1120

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Enter a 1 if the initial temperature is applied to all the degrees of freedom

of a heat transfer shell.
31-63
7th
The 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th data blocks are not used if initial temperatures are read from a post file.
For heat transfer shell elements having more than eight degrees of freedom, the 4th and 5th data blocks
are repeated as required giving eight values per set.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Initial temperature in first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Initial temperature in second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Initial temperature in third degree of freedom.
31-40
4th
Initial temperature in fourth degree of freedom.
41-50
5th
Initial temperature in fifth degree of freedom.
51-60
6th
Initial temperature in sixth degree of freedom.
61-70
7th
Initial temperature in seventh degree of freedom.
71-80
8th
Initial temperature in eighth degree of freedom.

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
1121 INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-5
1st

1:
Element IDs
2:
Nodes IDs
3:
Volume/Region/Body IDs
4:
Surface IDs
5:
Curve IDs
6:
Point IDs
11: Element-Edges IDs 12: Element-Faces ids

7th data block
6th data block.
INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer) 1122

input style.
Description
This option provides initial temperatures for heat transfer problems.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter -1 if the USINC user subroutine is used. In this case, data blocks 3
and 4 are not used.
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of prescribed temperatures data, defaults to

input.
11-15
3rd
Flag to indicate that initial conditions read from previously generated post
file. Set to 1.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th

26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Enter 1 if all degrees of freedom of all nodes have same initial temperature
given in the 9th field.
41-50
9th
Enter uniform initial temperature.
3a data block (Not used if 8th field = 1)

For analyses which do not include heat transfer shell elements:
1-10
1st
Initial temperature.
1123 INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block (Not used if 8th field = 1)

For analyses which include heat transfer shell elements:
1-10
1st
Initial temperature in first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Initial temperature in second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Initial temperature in third degree of freedom.

Note:
See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal

degrees of freedom.
4th data block (Not used if 8th field = 1)

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1124

Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials
- Thermal)
Description
This option allows you to define thermal properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate these
material properties with a list of element numbers.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word THERMAL. (required in a multiphysics analysis)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.).
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the ANKOND and ORIENT user subroutines.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Data input mode

21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
1125 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The data entered in data blocks 4 and 5 are the reference values that are used with tables or are
constants.
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
Mass density.
31-40
4th
Resistivity (for Joule heating analysis).
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
6th data block

Note:
Do not enter composite elements which use this material in

its layers.
ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer) 1126

input style.
Description
This option allows you to define thermal properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate these
material properties with a list of element numbers.
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS model
definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-reference to

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option.
6-10
2nd
46-55
8th
temperature dependent properties.
The data entered in data blocks 4 and 5 should be the values at the lowest temperature expected during
an analysis, not necessarily at the initial temperature.
4th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
Mass density.
31-40
4th
Resistivity (for Joule heating analysis).
41-50
5th
Emissivity (for radiation).
1127 ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

Note:

its layers.
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1128

Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic Materials

Input - Thermal)
Description
This option allows you to define thermal properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Notes:
Since the material properties in an orthotropic material are independent, it is your

responsibility to enter all data required to match the dimension of the conductivity matrix
for the elements listed below. (See Marc Volume B: Element Library, if necessary). No
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of orthotropic material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 to 8 are repeated for each data set.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
1129 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I

21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Specific heat per unit mass.
51-60
6th
R11
61-70
7th
R22 If Joule heating analysis, resistivities.
71-80
8th
Mass density.
If Joule heating analysis, resistivities.
5th data block

Only necessary for input format 2 or greater.
1-5
1st
Table ID for K11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for K22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for K33.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Table ID for R11.
31-35
7th
Table ID for R22.
36-40
8th
Table ID for R33.
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1130

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

Only required if RADIATION parameter is present or version is greater or equal to 10.
1-10
1st
Emissivity (for radiation case).
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
7th data block

Only required if RADIATION parameter is present, input format style 2 or greater or version is greater
or equal to 10.
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
8th data block

composite elements that use this material in their layers.)
1131 ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal)

input style.
Description
This option allows you to define thermal properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature, use the ORTHO TEMP model definition.
Notes:

The data entered in the following blocks should be the values at the lowest temperature
expected during an analysis, not necessarily at the initial temperature.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st

ORTHO TEMP option.
6-10
2nd
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal) 1132

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
Mass density.
5th data block

Only required if RADIATION parameter is present.
1-10
1st
6th data block

1133 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

Model Definition Option for Heat Transfer Analysis
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE

Input - Thermal)
Description
This option specifies thermal properties defined by a call to user subroutines ANKOND and ORIENT. The
ANKOND user subroutine must be used for the input of constant or temperature dependent anisotropic
thermal conductivities (K11, K22, K33) and/or resistivities (R11, R22, R33) defined in the user coordinate
(1,2,3) system. The TABLE model definition option can be used for the definition of material properties
with temperatures.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of anisotropic data sets to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 to 10 are repeated as a set NSET times.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-referencing the

ANKOND and ORIENT user subroutines.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if the ANKOND user subroutine is to be called.

Enter 2 if the anisotropic conductivity is to be entered in the 4a data block.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1134

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
4th data block

1-10
1st
Mass density.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Enter the enthalpy of formation (only required if SURFACE ENERGY

is included).
41-50
5th
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Data blocks 6 to 9 are only required if the second field of the 3rd data block is a 2.
6th data block
1-10
1st
K11
11-20
2nd
K12
21-30
3rd
K13
31-40
4th
K22
41-50
5th
K23
51-60
6th
K33
7th data block

1-5
1st
K11 Table ID for conductivity.
6-10
2nd
11-20
3rd
1135 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-30
4th
31-40
5th
41-50
6th
Data blocks 8 and 9 are only required for Joule heating, and the second field of the 3rd data block is a 2.
8th data block
1-10
1st
R11
If Joule heating analysis, resistivities.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
9th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for R11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for R12.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for R13.
16-20
4th
Table ID for R22.
21-25
5th
Table ID for R23.
26-30
6th
Table ID for R33.
10th data block

ANISOTROPIC (Thermal) 1136

input style.
Description
This option specifies thermal properties defined by a call to the ANKOND and ORIENT user subroutines.
The ANKOND user subroutine must be used for the input of constant or temperature dependent
anisotropic thermal conductivities (K11, K22, K33) and/or resistives (R11, R22, R33) defined in the user
coordinate (1,2,3) system. The TEMPERATURE EFFECTS model definition option can be used for the
input of variations of specific heat with temperatures. Note that the data entered in this option should be
the values at the lowest temperature expected during an analysis, not necessarily at the initial
temperature.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ANISOTROPIC.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of anisotropic data sets to follow (optional)
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 to 7 are repeated as a set NSET times.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

ANKOND and ORIENT user subroutines, as well as to the
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if the ANKOND user subroutine is to be called.

Enter 2 if the anisotropic conductivity is to be entered in the 4a data block.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Mass density.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Data blocks 5 and 6 are only required if the second field of the 3rd data block is a 2.
1137 ANISOTROPIC (Thermal)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
K11
11-20
2nd
K12
21-30
3rd
K13
31-40
4th
K22
41-50
5th
K23
51-60
6th
K33
Data block 6 is only required for Joule heating.

6th data block
1-10
1st
R11
11-20
2nd
R12
21-30
3rd
R13
31-40
4th
R22
41-50
5th
R23
51-60
6th
R33
7th data block

COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal) 1138

COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Material Data for Interface Elements
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for the thermal interface elements, and to associate
these material properties with a list of element numbers. This option would also be used in a thermalmechanical coupled analysis where interface elements were used.
Format
Format
Data
Entry Entry
1st date block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of thermal cohesive material data to follow

(optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input (defaults to input file).
Data blocks 3 through 6 as repeated as a set; once for each set of defined cohesive material.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number
6-10
2nd
Cohesive Model:
Enter 1 for the standard model (default).
Enter -1 to define the cohesive material model via the UCOHESIVET
user subroutine.
11-22
3rd
Material Name
Thermal conductance
4th data block

1-10
1st
1139 COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

Format
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for the thermal conductance.

The thermal conductance can be a function of the position (current or
original) in the model or the distance between the top and bottom face
of the element (independent variable=displacement (38), where
positive is opening and negative is closing)
Variation with temperature and state variables two to five are also
supported
Note that the distance dependency will necessarily be one increment
behind
6th data block

COHESIVE 1140
COHESIVE
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for the thermal interface elements, and to associate
these material properties with a list of element numbers. This option would also be used in a thermalmechanical coupled analysis where interface elements were used.
Format
Format
Data
Entry Entry
1st date block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of thermal cohesive material data to follow

(optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input (defaults to input file).
Data blocks 3 through 5 as repeated as a set; once for each set of defined cohesive material.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number
6-10
2nd
Cohesive Model:
Enter 1 for the standard model (default).
Enter -1 to define the cohesive material model via the UCOHESIVET
user subroutine.
11-22
3rd
Material Name
Thermal conductance
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1141 LATENT HEAT

Define Latent Heat
LATENT HEAT
Define Latent Heat
Description
This option is used to define the latent heat introduced into the system due to a phase change in the
material. It is an alternative input to the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option when the table driven input
format is used.
Refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 6, Nonstructural Procedure Library for
more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words LATENT HEAT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Material id.
11-15
3rd
Unit number to read input; defaults to standard input.
Repeat 3rd data block for each phase change.

3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the latent heat value.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Liquids temperature (upper phase change limit).
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer) 1142

Define Variation of Material Properties in Heat Transfer Analysis
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat

Transfer)
Define Variation of Material Properties in

Description
This option defines the variation of material properties (conductivity, specific heat and electrical
resistance) with temperature. The values read in through the ISOTROPIC option are those at the lowest
temperature specified. Properties are not defined below the lowest temperature. The temperature
dependency can be entered using one of the following two options:
Data points must be given in ascending order of temperature. This option is flagged by
Note:
In calculating a particular temperature dependent property, Marc averages the value

of this property at the start and at the end of the increment. The temperature at the
end of the increment is an estimated value.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the word TEMPERATURE EFFECTS.
21-80
2nd
Enter the word DATA to indicate that Option B is used.
For option A, use data blocks 2a through 7a. For option B, use data blocks 2b through 7b.
Option A
2a data block
1-5
1st
Number of slopes of conductivity versus temperature curve.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Number of slopes of resistivity versus temperature curve for Joule

heating problem.
21-25
5th
Number of slopes for emissivity versus temperature curve for

radiating cavities.
1143 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.

Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to the
ISOTROPIC option.
36-40
8th
3a data block
Conductivity variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, first field.
1-15
1st
Slope of conductivity versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Temperature above which above slope becomes operative.
4a data block
Specific heat variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, second field.
1-15
1st
Slope of specific heat versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
5a data block
Latent heat. Number of blocks given on data block 2, third field.
1-15
1st
Latent heat.
16-30
2nd
31-45
3rd
6a data block
Resistivity variation for Joule heating problem. Number of blocks given on data block 2, fourth field.
1-15
1st
Slope of resistivity versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
7a data block
Emissivity variation for radiating cavity problems. Number of blocks given on data block 2, fifth field.
1-15
1st
Slope of emissivity versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Temperature above which the above slope becomes operative.
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer) 1144

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Option B
2b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Number of data points on the resistivity versus temperature curve for

Joule heating problem.
21-25
5th
Number of data points on the emissivity versus the temperature curve.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to ISOTROPIC

option.
36-40
8th
3b data block
Conductivity variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, first field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
4b data block
Specific heat variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, second field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
5b data block
Latent heat. Number of blocks given on data block 2, third field.
1-15
1st
Latent heat.
16-30
2nd
31-45
3rd
6b data block
Resistivity variation for Joule heating problem. Number of blocks given on data block 2, fourth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the resistivity.
16-30
2nd
7b data block
Emissivity variation for radiating cavity problem. Number of blocks given on data block 2, fifth field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
1145 ORTHO TEMP (Thermal)

Define Variation of Orthotropic Thermal Properties
Description
This option defines the variation of all orthotropic thermal properties with temperature. Note that the
values read in through the ORTHOTROPIC model definition are those at the lowest temperature defined.
Properties at temperatures below this temperature are defined to be equal to properties at this
temperature.
The variation of a particular property is defined as a piecewise linear curve. Two options are available to
define this curve.
a. Slope/breakpoint data in ascending order of temperature can be given.
b. Property value/temperature data in ascending order of temperature can be given. This option is
flagged by entering the word DATA after the string ORTHO TEMP on the first data block.
Note:
In calculating a particular temperature dependent property, Marc averages the value

of this property at the start and at the end of the increment. The temperature at the
end of the increment is an estimated value.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the string ORTHO TEMP.
11-80
2nd
Enter the word DATA to indicate that option B defined above is to be used.
Note:
For option A, use data blocks 2a-11a. For option B, use data
blocks 2b-11b.
Option A
2a data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd

ORTHO TEMP (Thermal) 1146

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Number of slopes of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
In a Joule heating analysis, number of slopes of R11 vs. temperature curve.
31-35
7th

Enter -1 to have (R22 vs. temp.) (R11 vs. temp.).
36-40
8th

Enter -1 to have (R33 vs. temp.) (R11 vs. temp.)
.
41-45
9th
Number of slopes of emissivity vs. temperature curve for radiating

cavities.
46-50
10th
Enter the material identification (1,2,3, etc.) for this data set.
51-55
11th
3a data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2a data block, first field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
4a data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2a data block, second field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
5a data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2a data block, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
6a data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2a data block, fourth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
16-30
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7a data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 3a data block, fifth field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
31-45
3rd
8a data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2a data block, sixth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of R11 vs. temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
9a data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2a data block, seventh field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
10a data block

The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2a data block, eighth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
11a data block

The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2a data block, ninth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of emissivity vs. temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Temperature at which the above slope becomes operative.
Option B
2b data block
1-5
1st
Number of data points of K11 vs. temperature curve.
6-10
2nd
Number of data points of K22 vs. temperature curve. Enter -1 to have (K22
vs. temp.) (K11 vs. temp.)
11-15
3rd
Number of data points of K33 vs. temperature curve. Enter -1 to have (K33
vs. temp.) (K11 vs. temp.)
16-20
4th
Number of data points of specific heat vs. temperature curve.
21-25
5th
ORTHO TEMP (Thermal) 1148

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
In a Joule heating analysis, number of data points of R11 vs.

temperature curve.
31-35
7th
In a Joule heating analysis, number of data points of R22 vs. temperature

curve.
36-40
8th
In a Joule heating analysis, number of data points of R33 vs.

temperature curve.
41-45
9th
Number of data points of emissivity versus temperature curve.
46-50
10th
Enter the material identification (1, 2, 3, etc.) for this data set.
51-55
11th
3b data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, first field.)
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
4b data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2b data block, second field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
5b data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2b data block, third field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
6b data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, fourth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of specific heat
16-30
2nd
7b data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, fifth field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
31-45
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8b data block
The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, sixth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of R11.
16-30
2nd
9b data block
The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2b data block, seventh field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
10b data block

The number of blocks in this series is n, the number in the 2b data block, eighth field, or 0 if n = -1.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
11b data block

The number of blocks in this series is the number in the 2b data block, ninth field.
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - Model Definition) 1150

Define Control Parameters for Heat Transfer Analysis
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - Define Control Parameters for Heat Transfer Analysis
Model Definition)
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence solution and accuracy for heat
transfer analysis.
For heat transfer analysis, the only data field required to be set is the maximum number of steps, the first
field in the second data block. All other fields can, in these cases, be left blank but notice that the 3rd data
block must be included.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Maximum number of load steps in this run. Default is 99999. This is a

cumulative number and is usually used to stop the run when RESTART is
being used.
6-10
2nd
Maximum number of recycles during an increment due to temperature

dependent material properties. Default value is 3.
11-15
3rd
Minimum number of recycles during an increment. Note that this data field
forces this number of recycles to take place in all subsequent increments.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Nonpositive definite flag. If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite

system is forced.
36-40
8th
Not used; enter 0.
41-45
9th
Not used; enter 0.
46-50
10th
Not used; enter 0.
51-55
11th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
12th
Assembly flag. If set to 1, the conductivity matrix is assembled

each iteration.
1151 CONTROL (Heat Transfer - Model Definition)

Define Control Parameters for Heat Transfer Analysis
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-10
1st

time step scheme for heat transfer. Default value of 20.
11-20
2nd
Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are

reevaluated and matrices reassembled. Default value of 100.
21-30
3rd

boundary conditions). Default is 0, which bypasses this test. Set to
maximum temperature error which is considered acceptable.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th

51-60
6th

61-70
7th

71-80
8th

CONVERT 1152
Define Conversion Factors
CONVERT
Define Conversion Factors
Description
This option sets a converting factor when a physical quantity is converted to another physical quantity.
This is useful when the units used for the different physics are not consistent (that is, when SI units are
not used), or when there are losses in the process.
In the coupled thermal-stress analysis, depending on the units used for the passes, different conversion
factors must be used. In addition, following the work of Farren and Taylor, not all inelastic work is
dissipated into heat; for most metals, about 90% is converted 11. This should also be considered when
defining this conversion factor.
In the Joule heating analysis or coupled electromagnetic thermal analysis, depending on the units used
for the passes, different conversion factors must be used. For example, in an Joule heating problem, the
heat generation due to the electric current can be expressed in terms of current and resistance as q = I2R.
If the units of current and resistance are (amp) and (ohm/ft), respectively, then the unit of heat generation
in the electric problem must be (watt/ft). Since 1 (watt) is equal to 3.4129 (btu/hr), a factor of 3.4129 must
be used in a Joule heating problem, for the purpose of converting the unit of heat generation from (watt/ft)
to (btu/hr-ft) for heat transfer analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CONVERT.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Heat generation conversion factor between inelastic mechanical energy

and heat transfer flux in a coupled analysis. Default is1.0.
11-20
2nd
Heat generation conversion factor between energy due to friction and heat
generated in a coupled contact analysis. Defaults to the value given in the
first field.
21-30
3rd
Heat generation conversion factor between electric current and heat

transfer flux. This can be used in both a Joule heating analysis and an
electromagnetic thermal analysis. Default is 1.0.
11S.
W. Farren, G. I. Taylor. The Heat Developed During Plastic Extension of Metals, Proceedings of the Royal
Society, London, A107, p. 422, 1925.
1153 CONRAD GAP

Define Convection/Radiation Gap
CONRAD GAP
Define Convection/Radiation Gap
Description
This option allows you to input emissivity, film coefficient, and gap closure temperature for
convection/radiation gap option. The Stefan-Boltzmann and conversion to absolute temperatures is done
via the PARAMETERS option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CONRAD GAP.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data used to input CONRAD GAP.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of CONRAD GAP data; defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Face identification see Marc Volume B: Element Library. Note that these
identifiers are different from those used for DIST FLUXES.
6-15
2nd
Emissivity
16-25
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
26-35
4th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
5th
Film coefficient.
46-55
6th
GAP closure temperature.
56-60
7th
61-65
8th
Table ID for film coefficient.
66-70
9th
Table ID for gap closure temperature.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above CONRAD GAP data
is applied.
CHANNEL 1154
Define Fluid Channel Input
CHANNEL
Define Fluid Channel Input
Description
This option allows you to input inlet temperature, fluxes, and film coefficient for a fluid channel in a heat
transfer analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CHANNEL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data used to input fluid channels.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of fluid channels data; defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Face identification see Marc Volume B: Element Library. Note that these
identifiers are different from those used for DIST FLUXES.
6-10
2nd
First (inlet) element number in the channel.
11-20
3rd
Inlet temperature.
21-30
4th
Mass flow rate.
31-40
5th
Film coefficient.
41-45
6th
Table ID for inlet temperature.
46-50
7th
Table ID for mass flow rate.
51-55
8th
Table ID for film coefficient.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above fluid channel data is applied.
1155 VIEW FACTOR

Read in Radiation View Factors
VIEW FACTOR
Read in Radiation View Factors
Description
This option initiates the reading of radiation view factors created by Marc Mentat using the Monte Carlo
procedure. This file is read as vfid.vfs where vfid is entered using the -vf option when invoking
Marc. The RADIATION parameter is required and the 2nd field on this parameter is a 2.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-11
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the words VIEW FACTOR.
RADIATING CAVITY 1156

Define Outline of Radiating Cavity
RADIATING CAVITY
Define Outline of Radiating Cavity
Description
This option allows for the input of the outlines of radiating cavities. Each cavity outline is defined by a
group of nodal points in a counter clockwise direction. The RADIATION parameter is required and the
2nd field on this parameter is a 1. This method may only be used for axisymmetric solid elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-16
1st
Enter the word RADIATING CAVITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Total number of cavities.
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input. Default is 5 (input).
3rd data block

Enter a list of nodes defining the outline of a cavity. Repeat for each cavity
to be defined.
Note:
List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal in these

nodal lists.
1157 RAD-CAVITY
Define Radiation Cavity
RAD-CAVITY
Description
This option defines a radiation boundary condition. The cavity geometry is specified through the CAVITY
DEFINITION option. If required, the view factors will be first calculated. In a coupled analysis, this option
may be used to control the frequency of recalculating the view factors. The RADIATION parameter is
required and the 2nd field on this parameter is a 3 or a 4. The CAVITY DEFINITION option must also be
used to define the shape of the cavity.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words RAD-CAVITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of radiation boundary conditions to be entered

(optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of radiation boundary condition data, defaults
to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of lines used in card series 6 (default is 1).
6-10
2nd
Enter 0 to calculate view factors.

Enter 1 to read view factors from a file jid_cnn.vfs, where nn is the
cavity ID.
11-15
3rd
Enter increment frequency to recalculate view factors.
16-20
4th
Enter 0 cavity is closed.

Enter 1 cavity is closed and scale view factors.
Enter 2 cavity is open.
21-25
5th
Enter 1 to make Radiation Exchange Matrix Symmetric. This matrix is

defined by A j F ij .
If 1 is entered, the viewfactors are scaled for closed cavities.
Default is 0 and symmetry is not guaranteed.
26-30
6th
Enter a 1 if a post file is to be created that may be used to visualize the

view factors.
31-62
7th
Enter the unique label associated with this radiation boundary condition.
This label will be referenced by the LOADCASE option.
RAD-CAVITY 1158
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Temperature at infinity for an open cavity. If a control node is provided in

the CAVITY DEFINITION, the temperature entered here is ignored.
11-20
2nd
Enter the change in coordinates before view factors will be recalculated.

Only used if 7th field of RADIATION parameter is set to 1.
Table ID for Temperature at infinity for an open cavity.
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block (Repeat based upon 3rd block, first entry)
Enter a list of cavity IDs.
1159 CAVITY DEFINITION

Define Geometry of a Cavity
CAVITY DEFINITION
Description
This option defines the geometric outline of the cavity, including symmetry surface information. This
option is used when the hemi-cube method is used to calculate the view factors, and is used in conjunction
with the RAD-CAVITY and EMISSIVITY options. The RADIATION parameter is required and the 2nd field
on this parameter is a 3 or a 4.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words CAVITY DEFINITION.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of cavities.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read input.
Repeat the 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, 8th, and 9th data blocks for each radiating cavity.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the cavity number.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of geometry types to define cavity.
11-15
3rd
Enter the number of symmetry surfaces to be used, maximum is 16.
16-20
4th
Control Node ID. Used for determining environment temperature 1st

degrees of freedom is used. If the cavity is closed, this is not used.
4th data block - Enter as many as 16 symmetry surface ids

1-5
1st
Enter first symmetry ID

If positive number then ID comes from the SYMMETRY option.
If negative number then ID comes from the SURFACES option.
6-10
2nd
Enter second symmetry ID

11-15
3rd
Enter third symmetry ID.

CAVITY DEFINITION 1160

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

If geometry type is element IDs(1), use either the first or the second and third field.
If geometry type is surface(4) or curve(5), use the second field only.
1-5
1st
Enter the ibody type based upon element library description in Marc
6-10
2nd
Enter 1.
11-15
3rd
block, 2nd field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

12: Element-Face IDs, top side if shell element
13: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention, top side if shell element
14: Element-Face IDs - Mentat convention, top side if shell element
33: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention, bottom side if shell element
34: Element-Face IDs - Mentat convention, bottom side if shell element
41: Element IDs, both sides if shell elements
44: Surface IDs, both sides if shell elements
45: Curve IDs, both sides if shell elements
1161 CAVITY DEFINITION

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51: Element-Edge IDs, both sides if shell elements
52: Element-Face IDs, both sides if shell elements
53: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention, both sides if shell elements
54: Element-Face IDs - Mentat convention, both sides if shell elements.
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to define the cavity. The geometric

entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 6th data block.
EMISSIVITY 1162
Define Emissivity
EMISSIVITY
Define Emissivity
Description
This option is used to define the diffuse surface radiation behavior. Separate emissivity and
absorption values may be entered. The properties may be a function of the spatial coordinate, the
temperature, and/or the frequency. This option is used in conjunction with the CAVITY DEFINITION
and RAD-CAVITY options.
Note:
If the emissivity is spectral dependent, then the absorption equals the emissivity at each
frequency. The wavelength may be given in any units; i.e. m or m, but the frequency used
for table evaluation is based upon the wavelength and the speed of radiation given in the
PARAMETERS option. They should be in consistent units. The emissivity is assumed to
have a linear variation within each band.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words EMISSIVITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number.
11-15
3rd
Enter 0 for new style input.

Enter 1 for MD Nastran style definition of spectral emissivity.
Repeat the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks for each different surface radiation property.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the emissivity ID.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of geometries that this emissivity will be applied to.
11-15
3rd
If input mode 1, then enter the number of wavebands of

spectral emissivity.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the emissivity coefficient.
11-20
2nd
Enter the absorption coefficient.
1163 EMISSIVITY
Define Emissivity
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for emissivity coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for absorption coefficient.
6th data block (Only used is input mode is 1 and the spectral emissivity is included. Repeat for
each band.)
1-10
1st
Enter the wavelength at the start of the band.
11-20
2nd
Enter the wavelength at the end of the band.
21-30
3rd
Enter the emissivity at the start of the band.
31-40
4th
Enter the emissivity at the end of the band.
41-45
5th
Enter the table ID associated with the emissivity at the start of the band.
46-50
6th
Enter the table ID associated with the emissivity at the end of the band.
7th data block

If geometry type is element ids(1), use either the first or the second and third field. If geometry type is
surface(4) or curve(5), use the second field only.
1-5
1st
Enter the ibody type based upon element library description in Marc
6-10
2nd
Enter 1.
11-15
3rd
block, 2nd field.
8th data block
1-5
1st

12: Element-Face IDs, top side if shell element
13: Element-Edge IDs - Marc Mentat convention, top side if shell
element
14: Element-Face IDs - Marc Mentat convention, top side if
shell element.
EMISSIVITY 1164
Define Emissivity
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
33: Element-Edge IDs - Marc Mentat convention, bottom side if
shell element
34: Element-Face IDs - Marc Mentat convention, bottom side if
shell element.
41: Element IDs, both sides if shell elements
44: Surface IDs, both sides if shell elements
45: Curve IDs, both sides if shell elements
51: Element-Edge IDs, both sides if shell elements
52: Element-Face IDs, both sides if shell elements
53: Element-Edge IDs - Marc Mentat convention, both sides if
shell elements
54: Element-Face IDs - Marc Mentat convention, both sides if
shell elements.
9th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to define the cavity.
1165 VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer)

Define Nodal Velocity Components
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Define Nodal Velocity Components

Heat Transfer)
Description
This option allows the specification of the nodal velocity components in a heat transfer analysis, where
the convective terms are to be included. The convective option is specified by placing a 2 in the fifth field
of the HEAT parameter. This activates the nonsymmetric solver as well. The nodal velocity components
are defined by specifying the velocity magnitude of a series of components for sets of nodes.
Moreover, the velocity values can be specified via the UVELOC user subroutine (see Marc Volume D:
User Subroutines and Special Routines).
If the motion of the media is to be calculated, a coupled fluid-thermal analysis should be performed.
Note:
The convective velocities are not applied to heat transfer shell elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words VELOCITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of velocity (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of velocity data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the UVELOC user subroutine required for this initial condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer) 1166

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the unique label associated with this condition. This label will be
4th data block

1-10
1st
Velocity in first coordinate direction.
11-20
2nd
Velocity in second coordinate direction.
21-30
3rd
Velocity in third coordinate direction.

1-5
1st
Table ID associated with the first coordinate direction.
6-10
2nd
Table ID associated with the second coordinate direction.
11-15
3rd
Table ID associated with the third coordinate direction.
6th data block

1-5
1st
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
data block.
1167 VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer)

input style.
Description
are defined by specifying the velocity magnitude of a series of components for sets of nodes. This data
can be input from data blocks or from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the velocity values can be
respecified, or initialized if no previous data was entered via user subroutine UVELOC (see Marc Volume
A summary of nodal velocities appears in the printout. This can be suppressed by specifying a nonzero
value for the print-suppress parameter.
If the motion of the media is to be calculated, a coupled fluid-thermal analysis should be performed.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word VELOCITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of data blocks used to input nodal velocity components. If a

negative value is entered, the UVELOC user subroutine is called for
every node.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of the velocity field. Default to unit 5,
unless the INPUT TAPE parameter has been used.
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 to suppress printout of the summary of nodal

velocity components.
Data blocks 3, 4 and 5 should be repeated for each data set.

3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of the velocity in the first coordinate-direction for

which the velocity is given.
Additional velocity components in other coordinate directions must be
specified on the same data line in F10 format. The number of components
must equal the number of directions.
VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer) 1168

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Enter a list of coordinate directions in which the velocity is specified.
Note:
5th data block

Enter a list of nodes for which the velocity vector as defined in data blocks
3 and 4.
1169 CURE RATE

Cure Kinetics
CURE RATE
Cure Kinetics
Description
This option is used to define the curing property parameters of materials.This property is used to couple
the curing effect for heat transfer or thermal/mechanical problems. There are three choices for this option.
Each choice corresponds to its own input data format.
Option A: Embedded Models
This option allows you to choose one of the four cure models built into the Marc program. Default is a
no cure kinetics model.
Option B: Table Defined Models
This option allows you to define the cure kinetics model in the table format. In this case, the associated
table ID should be included.
Option C: User-defined Models (through user subroutine)
This option allows you to define the cure kinetics model in the UCURE user subroutine.
Note:
This option must be combined with CURING parameter to activate the curing analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CURE RATE.
Enter cure kinetics model definition number.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter a negative value if the cure model is defined by the UCURE

user subroutine.
Enter 0 (default) if no cure kinetics model is defined or if table input is
used to define the cure kinetics model.
Enter 1 for Lee, Loos and Springer (1982) model;
Enter 2 for Combined model: Lee, Chiu, and Lin (1992); White and Hahn
(1992); Kenny (1992); Scott (1991); or Scott (1991)
Enter 3 for Lee, Chiu, and Lin (1992) model
Enter 4 for Johnston and Hubert (1995) model.
CURE RATE 1170

Cure Kinetics
Format
Fixed
6-10
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd
Enter 0 (default) if the model is not defined by a table, or

Enter the table ID number if a table is used to define the cure
kinetics model.
11-15
3rd
Enter the associated material ID number.
16-20
4th
Enter unit number for reading in the data (default is standard input).
Option A (Model 1)
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter First Pre-Exponential Factor: A 1 .
11-20
2nd
Enter Second Pre-Exponential Factor: A 2 .
21-30
3rd
Enter Third Pre-Exponential Factor: A 3 .
31-40
4th
Enter Activation energy: E 1
41-50
5th
Enter Activation energy: E 2 .
51-60
6th
Enter Activation energy: E 3
61-70
7th
Enter value: B .
71-80
8th
Enter value: C .
Enter the maximum cure reaction heat.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Option A (Model 2)
3rd data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Enter Exponential Factor: m
51-60
6th
Enter Exponential Factor: n .
61-70
7th
Not used; enter 0.
71-80
8th
Not used; enter 0.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Option A (Model 3)
1171 CURE RATE

Cure Kinetics
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Enter Exponential Factor: l .
51-60
6th
Enter Exponential Factor: m .
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
Not used; enter 0.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Option A (Model 4)
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter Pre-Exponential Factor: A .
11-20
2nd
Enter Activation Energy: E .
21-30
3rd
Enter Exponential Factor: m .
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Enter Diffusion Constant: C .
51-60
6th
Enter Critical Resin Degree of Cure: C0 .
61-70
7th
Enter Increase of Critical Resin Degree of Cure: CT .
71-80
8th
Not used; enter 0.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Option B
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the reference value associated with the table input.
11-20
2nd
Option C
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are not needed for Option C.
INIT CURE (with TABLE Input) 1172

Define Initial Degree of Cure
Description
This option allows you to enter the initial degree of cure into each elements. The input data is based on
the new table driven input data format.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INIT CURE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of initial degree of cure data to be entered (optional)
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of initial degree of cure data. Defaults to input file.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the number of geometry types used to define this initial condition.
Default is 1. See the 6th and 7th data blocks.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the unique label associated with this initial condition. The label will
Enter the magnitude of the initial degree of cure.
Enter the table ID associated with the initial degree of cure.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
The 6th and 7th data blocks are repeated as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data block,
1st field.
1173 INIT CURE (with TABLE Input)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-5
1st

1 - Element IDs
2 - Volume/region/body IDs.
7th data block

1-80
1st
6th data block.
INIT CURE 1174

INIT CURE
Description
This option allows you to enter the initial degree of cure into each elements. The input data is based on
the non-table driven input format.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words INIT CURE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of initial degree of cure data to be entered (optional)
6-10
2nd
Unit number for input of initial degree of cure data. Defaults to input file.
11-15
3rd
Not used; default is set to 0.
The 3rd to 6th data blocks are entered as pairs.

3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the value of the initial degree of cure.
Enter the list of elements for which initial degree of cure prescribed above
is applied.
4th data block

1-80
1st
5th data block

Only necessary if the CENTROID parameter is not used.
1-80
1st
Enter the list of integration points for which the initial degree of cure
prescribed above is applied.
6th data block

1-80
1st
Enter the list of layers for which the initial degree of cure prescribed
above is applied.
1175 CURE SHRINKAGE

Shrinkage Property of Resin Material
CURE SHRINKAGE
Description
This option is used to define the shrinkage property of resin material and to couple the curing shrinkage
effect into thermal/mechanical problems. There are three choices for this option. Each choice
corresponds to its own input data format.
Option A: Embedded Models:
This option is the default method and allows you to choose one of the two cure models built into the Marc
program. Default is a no cure kinetics model.
Option B: Table Defined Models
This option allows you to define the cure kinetics model in the table format. In this case, the associated
table ID should be included.
Option C: User-defined Models (through user subroutine)
This option allows you to define the cure kinetics model in the USHRINKAGE user subroutine.
Note:
This option must be combined with CURING parameter to activate the curing
shrinkage analysis.
A positive cure shrinkage strain indicates a reduction in volume.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CURE SHRINKAGE.
Enter cure kinetics model definition number. (default is 0).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter a negative value if the cure model is defined by the USHRINKAGE

user subroutine.
Enter 0 if no cure kinetics model is defined or if table input is used to
define the cure kinetics model.
Enter 1 for Bogetti and Gillespie (1992) model;
Enter 2 for White and Hahn (1992) model.
CURE SHRINKAGE 1176

Format
Fixed
6-10
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd
Enter 0 (default) if the model is not defined by a table, or

Enter the table ID number if table is used to define the cure
kinetics model.
11-15
3rd
Enter the associated material ID number.
16-20
4th
Enter unit number for reading in the data (default is standard input).
Option A (Model 1)
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the total volumetric resin shrinkage: V rS .
11-20
2nd
Enter the degree of cure after which the resin shrinkage stops: C1 .
21-30
3rd
Enter the degree of cure after which the resin shrinkage stops: C2 .
31-40
4th
Enter the linear cure shrinkage: A
41-50
5th
Not used; enter 0.
51-60
6th
Not used; enter 0.
61-70
7th
Not used; enter 0.
71-80
8th
Not used; enter 0.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Directional cure shrinkage coefficient: CSC 11 .
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
Option A (Model 2)
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the total volumetric resin shrinkage: V rS .
11-20
2nd
Enter the degree of cure after which the resin shrinkage stops: C .
21-30
3rd
Enter cure shrinkage model superscript: B .
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th
Not used; enter 0.
1177 CURE SHRINKAGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
Not used; enter 0.
61-70
7th
Not used; enter 0.
71-80
8th
Not used; enter 0.
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
Enter the reference value associated with the table input.
Option B
3rd data block
1-10
1st
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
Option C
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are not needed for Option C.
THERMO-PORE 1178
Define Properties of Thermal Degrading Material
THERMO-PORE
Description
This option is used to define the material data required for materials subjected to pyrolysis.
This format is based upon the different material states, virgin, charred, or coked being previously defined
using the ISOTROPIC or ORTHOTROPIC options. The thermal properties of the inert material, the gas,
and water, if required, should be defined in the ISOTROPIC option.
Procedure Library, Pyrolysis.
Notes:
Data that is not required for model A is specified as (NRA), enter 0.

Data that is not required for model A or B is specified as (NRAB).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter word THERMO-PORE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sets of data.
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number to read the data from.
The 3rd through 15th data blocks are repeated for each set of material data.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter material ID.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 for simple pyrolysis model.

Enter 2 for advanced pyrolysis model.
11-15
3rd
Set to 3 if BSM database is used.
16-20
4th
Enter the material ID for virgin material.
21-25
5th
Enter the material ID for charred material.
26-30
6th
Enter the material ID for coked material.
31-35
7th
Enter the material ID for liquid water.
36-40
8th
Enter the material ID for gas.
1179 THERMO-PORE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-45
9th
Enter the material ID for inert material.
46-50
10th
Enter the material ID for water vapor.
51-62
11th
If the BSM database is used, then the 4th through 13th data blocks will be given in the BSM data file.
Data block 3b is only used if BSM database is used.
3b data block
1-80
1st
Enter path to BSM data section for this option.
Enter pyrolysis model (NRA).
4th data block

1-5
1st
0 No pyrolysis.
1 Arrhenius law for pyrolysis based upon rho.
2 Arrhenius law for coking based upon j.
3 UPYROLSL user subroutine is used.
6-10
2nd
Enter water vapor model (NRA).

0 No water vapor model included.
1 Arrhenius law used.
2 Sullivan and Stokes model.
3 UWATERSL user subroutine is used.
11-15
3rd
Enter coking model (NRA).

0 No coking model.
1 Arrhenius coking model based upon Kcg.
2 Linear model for Kcg.
3 UCOKSL user subroutine is used.
16-20
4th
Enter MATFLG where MATFLG = ICEFF*10+IISO.

ICEFF = 0 linear method for calculating effective conductivity.
= 1 CMA,PTIMAD weighted average method for calculating
effective conductivity.
= 2 UPYROLEFF user subroutine used to define
effective conductivity.
IISO
= 0 if isotropic material is being used.

= 1 if orthotropic material is being used.
= 2 if anistropic material is being used.
THERMO-PORE 1180
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Number of terms used in Arrhenius pyrolysis model (NRA).
26-30
6th
Number of terms used in Arrhenius water vapor model (NRA). In current

model = 1.
31-35
7th
Number of terms used in Arrhenius coking model (NRA). In current

model = 1.
36-40
8th
Enter 1 for pressure based upon bulk modulus model.

Enter 2 for pressure-temperature based upon Perfect gas law (default).
5th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the fraction of pyrolysis when pyrolysis stops and coking begins if
present. Default = 0.96.
11-20
2nd
Enter the viscosity of the fluid, only required if DArcy law
21-30
3rd
Enter the volume fraction of the inert material.
31-40
4th
Enter the fluid-gas bulk modulus, only required for DArcy law.
41-50
5th
Enter the molecular weight of the fluid.
6th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for viscosity, only required if DArcy law
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Table ID for fluid-gas bulk modulus.
21-25
5th
Table ID for the Molecular weight.
7th data block

The 7th data block is only required for the simple model.
1-10
1st
Enter reference time associated with the end of the

combustion/transformation.
11-20
2nd
Enter the pyrolysis temperature.
If the Arrhenius theta model is used for pyrolysis, then for each term - repeat the 8a data block.
Do not include for the simple model.
8a data block
1-5
1st
Enter term number (j).
6-15
2nd
Enter B j .
11-25
3rd
Enter E aj .
1181 THERMO-PORE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-35
4th
Enter j .
36-45
5th
Enter s ,p ,c ,j .
If the Arrhenius rho model is used for pyrolysis, then for each term - repeat the 8b data block.
8b data block
1-5
1st
Enter term number (j).
6-15
2nd
Enter B j .
16-25
3rd
Enter E aj .
26-35
4th
Enter j .
36-45
5th
Enter svj .
46-55
6th
Enter scj .
56-65
7th
Enter j .
If Water vapor model included, use the 9th and 10th data blocks.
9th data block
1-10
1st
Enter initial volumetric mass density of liquid l o .
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Boiling point of liquid.
31-40
4th
Normalized of d P s at dT (model C only).
10th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for initial volumetric mass density of liquid.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for boiling point of liquid.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
If the Arrhenius water vapor model - 1 terms used for each term include the 11th data block.
11th data block
1-5
1st
Enter term number (j)
6-15
2nd
Enter B w .
THERMO-PORE 1182
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-25
3rd
Enter E aw .
26-35
4th
Enter w .
If the Arrhenius model is used for coking, use the 12th data block.
12th data block
1-5
1st
Enter term number. Default = 1.
6-15
2nd
Enter K c .
11-25
3rd
Enter E ac .
26-35
4th
Enter c .
36-45
5th
Enter K CGE (total mass fraction of the carbon in the pyrolysis gas when
chemical equilibrium is achieved).
If the Linear model for K CG is used for coking, use the 13th and 14th data blocks.
13th data block
1-10
1st
Enter T low temperature
11-20
2nd
Enter K CG
21-30
3rd
Enter T C equilibrium temperature
31-40
4th
Enter K CGE
14th data block

1- 5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with T .
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with K CE .
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with T E .
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID associated with K CGE .
15th data block

1183 SURFACE ENERGY

Define Surface Energy
SURFACE ENERGY
Description
This option allows the user to define the data required for calculating the surface energy balance and to
provide the data for the surface recession rate calculation. This option must be used in conjunction with
the STREAM DEFINITION option which is used to prescribe the elements/faces associated with a region.
Procedure Library, Thermochemical Ablation and Surface Energy Balance.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words SURFACE ENERGY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of regions to be defined.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read input data. Defaults to standard input.
The 3rd through 18th data blocks are repeated for each surface region.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the numbers of geometry types used to define the surface energy.
Default is 1; see the 17th and 18th data blocks.
6-10
2nd
Enter the surface energy ID.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Enter 3 if surface data is to be obtained from BSM database. In this case,

card series 4 through 16 will be given in the BSM file.
21-25
5th
Enter 1 for simplified heat of ablation model.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the unique label associated with the surface energy. This label will
Data block 3b is only used if BSM database is used.

3b data block
1-80
1st
Enter path to BSM data section for this option.
If the BSM database is used, then the 4th through 16th data blocks will be given in the BSM file.
SURFACE ENERGY 1184

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-5
1st
Enter 1 to include diffusion.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of families of particles.
11-15
3rd
Enter the number of liquid phases.
16-20
4th
Enter 0 if H = Ho.
Enter 1 if H given by standard calculation.
Enter 2 if the UFAH user subroutine is called.
21-25
5th
Enter 0 for constant G law (correlation factor).

Enter 1 if particles given in card series 12 and 13.
Enter 2 if particles defined by the UGLAW user subroutine.
26-30
6th
Enter 0 if empirical constant entered.

Enter 1 if linear formula used.
Enter 2 if arc tan formula.
Enter 3 if user subroutine ach06_03.fm: is called.
31-35
7th
Enter 1 if the UTIMP user subroutine and/or the UFLUXMEC user

subroutine are to be used.
Enter 2 if recession rate due to simplified erosion model.
36-40
8th
Enter 0 for mixture rule for Hsolid based on Hvirgin, Hcharred.

Enter 1 for Hsolid=Hcharred if pyrolysis Hsolid=Hcoked.
41-45
9th
Enter table ID that will control diffusion contribution to surface energy.

Default is 0; diffusion contribution is always active.
5th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th
Enter the convection coefficient H .
51-60
6th
Enter the diffusion coefficient M.
61-70
7th
Enter the transpiration factor .
1185 SURFACE ENERGY

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for the convection coefficient H .
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for the coefficient M.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
7th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the enthalpy of recovery Hrec.
11-20
2nd
Enter the enthalpy of the frozen composition He.
21-30
3rd
Enter the enthalpy of the wall gas Hw.
31-40
4th
Enter the enthalpy of ablation H abl for simple model.
8th data block

1- 5
1st
Enter the table ID for the enthalpy of recovery.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the enthalpy of frozen composition.
11-20
3rd
Enter the table ID for the enthalpy of the wall gas.
21-25
4th
Enter the table ID for the enthalpy of ablation.
Enter mass rate of the solid due to ablation by gasses, normalized by m

B' c = m s th g .
9th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter mass rate of the solid due to ablation by particles. If number of

families of particles are given, this entry is not used m s,th,p .
21-30
3rd
Enter mass rate of the solid due to ablation by erosion.
31-40
4th
Enter amount of ablation due liquid particles solid ablated by liquid.
41-50
5th
Enter amount of ablation due to gases solid ablated by gases.
51-60
6th
Enter the amount of ablation due to particle impact particles impact.
61-70
7th
Enter the amount of pyrolysis at which recession may occur. If zero,

recession may occur at all densities.
71-80
8th
Surface recession rate due to simplified erosion model.
SURFACE ENERGY 1186

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

1- 5
1st
Enter the table ID for B' c .
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the mass rate of the solid due to ablation by particles.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the mass rate of the solid due to ablation by erosion.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the amount of ablation due to liquid particles.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for the amount of ablation due to gases.
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for the amount of ablation due to particle impact.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Enter the table ID for the surface recession rate due to simplified
erosion model.
Enter only if diffusion is included in model (not for simple model).

11th data block
1-10
1st
Enter H.
11-20
2nd
Enter Ze.
21-30
3rd
Enter Zs.
31-35
4th
Enter the table ID associated with H.
36-40
5th
Enter the table ID associated with Ze.
41-45
6th
Enter the table ID associated with Zs.
Repeat card series 12th and 13th data blocks as pairs for each family of particles
12th data block
1-10
1st
Enter Vx of particle.
11-20
2nd
Enter Vy of particle.
21-30
3rd
Enter Vz of particle.
31-40
4th
Enter diameter of particle.
41-50
5th
Enter angle of incidence of particle.
51-60
6th
Enter m of particle.
61-70
7th
Enter the correlation factor (G law) if it is constant.
71-80
8th
Enter the enthalpy of reaction Hr,p.
1187 SURFACE ENERGY

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
13th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with Vx.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with Vy.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with Vz.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID associated with the particle diameter.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID associated with angle of incidence of particle.
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID associated with m of particle.
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID associated with the correlation factor.
36-40
8th
Enter the table ID associated with the enthalpy of reaction.
Include the 14th data block only if particles are included.

14th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the value of the empirical factor fthp.
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of temp1, used to define empirical factor.
21-30
3rd
Enter the value of temp2 used to define empirical factor.
31-40
4th
Enter the value of nfthp.
41-50
5th
Enter the value of fmec.
Repeat the 15th and 16th data block for each family of liquid phases.
15th data block
1-10
1st
Enter m lp .
11-20
2nd
Enter H lp .
16th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with m lp .
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with H lp .
SURFACE ENERGY 1188

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
17th data block

1-5
1st
Marc Volume B, Element Library.
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
18th data block

1-5
1st

04: Surface IDs
05: Curve IDs
09: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
19th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above surface energy terms
17th data block.
1189 RECEDING SURFACE

Define Areas where Surface Recedes Due to Thermo-chemical Erosion
RECEDING SURFACE
Define Areas where Surface Recedes Due to

Thermo-chemical Erosion
Description
This option allows the user to define where the surface is to recede due to either thermal, chemical, or
erosive processes. The process may be defined here, or via the UABLATE user subroutine, or via an
advanced model. This data for the advanced thermal model is given in the SURFACE ENERGY option.
Procedure Library, Ablation.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words RECEDING SURFACE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number to read data default is standard input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of geometries used to describe this receding surface.
6-10
2nd
Enter the recession model:

0 no recession
1 simple thermal ablation model
2 advanced thermal ablation model
3 user subroutine UABLATE
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for recession model 1 or 8.
16-20
4th
Enter the surface ID for the advanced model 2.
21-30
5th
For simple model, enter the reference rate of recession.
31-35
6th
Recession Surface ID.
36-40
7th
Not used; enter 0.
41-72
8th
Enter the name.
RECEDING SURFACE 1190

Define Areas where Surface Recedes Due to Thermo-chemical Erosion
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the geometry type.

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
11: Element-Edge IDs
12: Element-Face IDs
13: Element-Edge IDs - Mentat convention
14: Element-Face IDS - Mentat convention
16: Surface ID: orientation Id
17: Curve ID: orientation id
6-10
2nd
If geometry type 1, enter the face ID.
5th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to define the location of the recession.

The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 4th
data block.
1191 THROAT
Define Coordinates of Throat
THROAT
Define Coordinates of Throat
Description
This option is used to provide the reference dimensions of the throat radius and axial position when used
with quantities that are dependent upon the radius/throat radius, or quantities that use dual tables based
upon the axial coordinate versus the throat axial position. See TABLE option.
For independent variable number 33, the ratio used is:
2-D planar ratio = y current radius of the throat
2-D axisymmetric ratio = r current radius of the throat
2
3-D solid ratio = y + z radius of the throat
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word THROAT.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the axial position of the throat.
11-20
2nd
Enter the radius of the throat.
21-25
3rd
Enter the recession surface ID used to update the throat radius and
axial coordinate.
If zero, the reference values are used for the complete calculation.
26-30
4th
Number of divisions around circumference for 3-D analysis

(default is 36).
31-35
5th
Enter 1 for default method to update node at throat point.

Enter 2 to update node at throat point based upon upstream points
36-40
6th
Enter point ID of throat location.
INITIAL PYROLYSIS 1192

Define Initial Pyrolysis
INITIAL PYROLYSIS
Description
This option is used to define the initial material data in an ablating region. For streamline flow model,
this is along streamlines; for DArcy flow model, it is at conventional integration points. This option is
not necessary for model A.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INITIAL PYROLYSIS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data to follow.
6-10
2nd
The 3rd through 9th data blocks are repeated as a set NSET times.
3rd data block
The 3rd data block is only required for DArcy flow model.
1-10
1st
Enter the initial solid density.
11-20
2nd
Enter the initial gas density due to pyrolysis.
21-30
3rd
Enter the initial vapor density.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the initial value of xsi,p.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Enter the initial value of xsi,c (only required if coking model is included).
31-40
4th
If one term Arrhenius water vapor model is used, enter the initial value
of w.
The 5th data block is only used if Arrhenius Pyrolysis model is used.
5th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the first term of the initial value of phij.
11-20
2nd
Enter the second term of the initial value of phij; continue as necessary for
all terms, enter eight terms per line.
1193 INITIAL PYROLYSIS

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 6th data block is only used if Arrhenius Coking model is used.
6th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the initial value of Kcg.
The 7th data block is used for flowline model.

7th data block
1-80
Enter a list of regions that has these initial conditions.
The 8th and 9th data blocks is used for DArcy flow model.
8th data block
1-80
Enter a list of elements that has these initial conditions.
9th data block

1-80
Enter a list of integration points that has these initial conditions.
INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer) 1194

Define Initial Density
Description
This option provides initial density for pyrolysis analyses, using the streamline flow method. For the
DArcy flow method, use the INITIAL PYROLYSIS option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INITIAL DENSITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th

26-30
6th
31-63
7th
4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of the initial density.
1195 INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the geometric variations in initial

density.
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

2 Node IDs
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above initial density are
data block.
STREAM DEFINITION 1196

Define Stream Definition
STREAM DEFINITION
Description
This option allows the user to define the streamline and the reference point for the arc length. The
streamlines are used for model B of the thermo-poro analysis. The arc length is only required if the
material data and/or boundary conditions are functions of the arc length.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words STREAM DEFINITION.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read in the data.
11-15
3rd
Flag to control display of streamlines.
16-25
4th
Enter the tolerance distance to match streamlines across regions. Only

used if the 10th field of 3rd data block is not zero.
Repeat the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks for each pyrolysis region.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the region ID.
6-10
2nd
Enter the contact body ID associated with this streamline region if

ablation occurs, and remeshing is required, default is the region ID.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Maximum number of elements through the region.
21-25
5th
Enter a 1 if stream definition region is used to define topology for stretch

meshers but no pyrolysis occurs in this region, or ABLATION,3 or
ABLATION, 4 is used, but no pyrolysis occurs.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Enter the number of streamlines. Only required if an irregular mesh is

provided, or if the region is defined using curves.
36-40
8th
Enter the maximum number of edges/faces in a region. Only necessary if

region will be remeshed of if the region is defined by using curves or
surfaces.
1197 STREAM DEFINITION

Format
Fixed
41-45
Free
9th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 if regular region.

Enter 2 if irregular region.
Enter 3 if higher-order regular region.
Enter 4 if higher-order irregular region.
46-50
10th
Enter the previous region id, used to obtain m at beginning of

streamline.Note this ID must be smaller than the current region ID.
If a zero is entered m = 0.0 along inside surface.
51-55
11th
Enter the curve/surface ID associated with the free surface. If a

curve/surface is given, skip the 4th and 5th data blocks.
56-60
12th
Enter the curve/surface ID associated with the interior surface. If a

curve/surface is given, skip the 6th and 7th data blocks.
61-70
13th
Enter m g p at beginning of streamline if unequal to 0 and 10th field is not

used.
71-80
14th
Enter m g w at beginning of streamline if water model is included, and it is

unequal to 0, and 10th field is not used.
4th data block

Enter a list of element:edge or element:face pairs for the free surface.
5th data block
Enter a list of element:edge or element:face pairs for the interior surface.
PRINT STREAMLINE 1198

Control Output of Results along a Streamline
PRINT STREAMLINE
Control Output of Results along a Streamline
Description
This option allows the user to control the amount of results that will be placed in the output if the
pyrolysis model B is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words PRINT STREAM.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the unit number for output; default to .stm file (91).
6-10
2nd
Enter frequency to write results into file.

-1: dont write results
0: (default) write results every increment
11-15
3rd
0: write values at all SIP

1: write values at extreme SIP points only
1199 TRACK STREAMLINE

Track Behavior of a Point along a Streamline
TRACK STREAMLINE
Track Behavior of a Point along a Streamline
Description
This option allows you to create a file that may be viewed by Mentat, thus gives the results at points along
a streamline. This option is often useful when ablation occurs as the conventional stream points have new
locations. The results are written to a file jidname.sltrk.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words TRACK STREAM.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number for points to be tracked.
6-10
2nd
Unit number to read data; default is standard input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if stream points are to be entered using 3rd data block.

Enter 2 if a list of elements are to be entered using 4th data block.
3rd data block (only used if 2nd data block, 3rd field is a 1)
1-5
1st
Enter the region number.
6-10
2nd
Enter the streamline number.
11-15
3rd
Enter the streamline point.
4th data block (only used if 2nd data block, 3rd field is a 2)

Chapt Joule Heating Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of additional data required for coupled Joule heating analysis and
structural-thermal-electrical analysis. All of the options in the previous subsection referring to
Mode coupled
heat transfer are also applicable. You have the ability to apply surface, volumetric and nodal currents, and
prescribe nodal voltages. All applied boundary conditions should be entered as total values. In addition,
l
you can input a conversion factor so that you can work in convenient units for both the heat transfer and
Defini electrical conduction problems.
tion
Joule heating analysis is not available for shell elements.
Optio
ns
1201 JOULE
Define Conversion Factor for Joule Heating Analysis
JOULE
Define Conversion Factor for Joule Heating Analysis
Description
In the analysis of Joule heating, the unit of heat generation computed from the electrical problem is, in
general, not consistent with the unit required for the heat transfer analysis. Depending on the units used
for the problems, different conversion factors must be used. For example, in an electric problem, the heat
generation can be expressed in terms of current and resistance as q = I2R. If the units of current and
resistance are (amp) and (ohm/ft), respectively, then the unit of heat generation in the electric problem
must be (watt/ft). Since 1 (watt) is equal to 3.4129 (btu/hr), a factor of 3.4129 must be used in a Joule
heating problem for the purpose of converting the unit of heat generation from (watt/ft) to (btu/hr-ft) for
heat transfer analysis.
It is also possible to use the CONVERT model definition option as explained in the Heat Transfer
Analysis section to prescribe this factor.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the word JOULE.
Heat generation unit conversion factor between electrical and heat

transfer analyses in a Joule heating problem.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Default is 1.0.
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) 1202

Define Distributed Currents
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule

Heating)
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) currents to be specified. Distributed currents are
converted to consistent nodal currents by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface current on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or
the TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent currents.
The applied current is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
In the current releases, Joule heating is not available for shell elements.
Note:
If a distributed current is applied on the bottom of a shell, the current is applied to the
highest degrees of freedom of the shell.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST CURRENT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of distributed currents to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of distributed current data, defaults to input.
The 3rd through 7th data blocks are given for each set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
1203 DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
in contact.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed currents.
Enter the table ID associated with the distributed current.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
1: Normal current (bottom surface for shells)

10: Normal current (top surface for shells)
11-15
3rd
Enter the face ID or edge id.
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) 1204

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
1205 DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - Model Definition)

Define Distributed Current
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - Model Definition) Define Distributed Current

input style.
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) current to be specified. Distributed current is
converted to a consistent nodal current by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface current of a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be
used to input time and spatial dependent current.
history definition.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered in pairs, once for each data block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of current. See library element description

in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
6-15
2nd
Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed current.
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) 1206

Define Point Currents
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Point Currents
Description
This option allows total nodal point currents to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent currents.
history definition.
In the current releases, Joule heating is not available for shell elements; so, point currents should only be
applied to the first degree of freedom.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT CURRENT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of point currents to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point current data; defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter a 1 if first point current is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of

a heat transfer shell.
31-63
7th
1207 POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)

Define Point Currents
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Magnitude of point current.
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point current for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer

shell elements only).
21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point current for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for point current.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for point current for second degree of freedom (Heat transfer
11-15
3rd
Table ID for point current for third degree of freedom (Heat transfer shell
elements only).
block, 1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block

1-80

6th data block.
POINT CURRENT (Joule - Model Definition) 1208

Define Nodal Point Current
POINT CURRENT (Joule - Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point current to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for the time dependent current.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1-5
6-10
Enter unit number of input of point current data, defaults to input.
2nd data block
3rd data block

1-10
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal current are applied.
1209 FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)

Define Fixed Voltage
Description
This option defines the fixed voltage that each node must take. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the voltage and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. Note that unless heat
transfer shell elements are used, there is only one degree of freedom in a heat transfer analysis. You must
specify it.
The fixed voltage is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
In the current releases, Joule heating is not available for shell elements; so, the degree of freedom should
always be set to one.
Format
Format
Data
Fixed
Free
Entry Entry
1st data block
1-19
1st
A
Enter the words FIXED VOLTAGE.
2nd data block
1-5
1st
I
6-10
2nd
3a data block
1-5
1st
I
6-10
2nd
I
condition.
11-15
3rd
I
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
I
Not used; enter 0.
FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) 1210

Format
Fixed
Free
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-63
7th
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6th data block
Data
Entry Entry
I
Not used; enter 0.
I
Enter a 1 if first prescribed voltage entered is to be applied for all degrees
of freedom of a heat transfer shell.
A
F
F
F
Prescribed voltage for first degree of freedom listed in data block 6.

Prescribed voltage for second degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
Prescribed voltage for third degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
freedom.)
I
I
I


Note: List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st
I
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
8th data block
7th data block.
1211 FIXED VOLTAGE

Define Nodal Fixed Voltage
FIXED VOLTAGE
Define Nodal Fixed Voltage
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed voltage that each associated nodal point must take during the first and
Note that a number equal to or exceeding the total number of degrees of freedom constrained must appear
on the SIZING parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
Enter the words FIXED VOLTAGE.
1-5
Number of sets of voltage boundary condition data lines to be read

(optional).
6-10
Enter unit number for input of voltages;
2nd data block
defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-10
Enter the prescribed voltage.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes for which the voltage is prescribed.
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) 1212

Define Electric Conductivity Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Electric Conductivity Properties for Isotropic

Materials
Input - Electric
Conductivity)
Description
This option allows you to define electric conductivity properties for an isotropic material. This can be
done by entering one of the following properties:
Method Required Data
1
Conductivity possibly controlled by a table.
Resistivity possibly controlled by a table.
E-J relation where a table has to be given with J as the independent variable and E as the
dependent variable.
J-E relation where a table has to be given with E as the independent variable and J as the
dependent variable.
You can also associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
This option is used for both Joule heating and electromagnetic simulations.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word E-CONDUCTI.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 6 should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-reference
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the USIGMA user subroutine.
1213 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)

Define Electric Conductivity Properties for Isotropic Materials
Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Input Mode:
Enter 1 if conductivity is defined.
Enter 2 if resistivity is defined.
Enter 3 if E-J relation with J as the independent variable is defined; a table
is also required.
Enter 4 if J-E relation with E as the independent variable is defined; a table
is also required.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
If input mode = 1, enter conductivity.
4th data block

1-10
1st
If input mode = 2, enter resistivity.

If input mode = 3, enter scale factor for E-J relation.
If input mode = 4, enter scale factor for J-E relation.
5th data block
1-5
1st
If input mode = 1, enter table ID for conductivity.

If input mode = 2, enter table ID for resistivity.
If input mode = 3, enter table ID for E-J relation; J is the
independent variable.
If input mode = 4, enter table ID for J-E relation; E is the
6th data block

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) 1214

Define Electric Conductivity Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE

Input - Electric Conductivity)
Define Electric Conductivity Properties for

Orthotropic Materials
Description
This option allows you to define electrical properties for an orthotropic material. This can be done by
entering one of the following properties in each direction:
1
dependent variable.
dependent variable.
Notes:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
1215 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Input Mode (1st component):

Enter 1 for conductivity.
Enter 2 for resistivity
Enter 3 for E-J relation with J as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
Enter 4 for J-E relation with E as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
16-20
4th
Input Mode (2nd component):

also required.
also required.
21-25
5th
Input Mode (3rd component):

also required.
also required.
26-37
6th
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) 1216

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Data for 1st component:

Method 1; enter 11 (conductivity).
Method 2; enter R11 (resistivity).
Method 3; enter scale factor for E-J relation.
Method 4; enter scale factor for J-E relation.
11-20
2nd
Data for 2nd component:

21-30
3rd
Data for 3rd component:

5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for 1st component:

Method 1; table ID for 11.
Method 2; table ID for R11.
Method 3; table ID for E-J relation; J is the independent variable.
Method 4; table ID for J-E relation; E is the independent variable.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for 2nd component:

1217 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Table ID for 3rd component:

6th data block

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) 1218

Define Electric Conductivity Properties for Anisotropic Materials
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Define Electric Conductivity Properties for

Anisotropic Materials
Electric Conductivity)
Description
This option allows you to define electric conductivity properties for an anisotropic material. This can be
1
dependent variable.
dependent variable.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of anisotropic material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-reference
6-10
2nd
1219 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Input Mode:
Enter 1 if conductivity is defined.
Enter 2 if resistivity is defined.
Enter 3 if E-J relation with J as the independent variable is defined; a table
is also required.
Enter 4 if J-E relation with E as the independent variable is defined; a table
is also required.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
4th data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

31-40
4th
Data for 4th component:

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) 1220

Format
Fixed
41-50
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
F
Data for 5th component:

51-60
6th
Data for 6thcomponent:

5th data block

1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd

1221 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Table ID for 4th component:

21-25
5th

26-30
6th

6th data block


Diffusion Analysis
Chapt Diffusion Analysis

er 3: This section defines the options required to perform a diffusion simulation. The solution obtains the
(concentration) based upon input of a mass flux across the surfaces or an internally generated
Mode pressure
mass defined through the DIST MASS or POINT MASS options. Either a steady state or transient analysis
may be performed based upon the STEADY STATE, TRANSIENT, or AUTO STEP history definition
l
options. For a transient analysis, the INITIAL PRESSURE should be used as well. The matrix (solid)
Defini material is defined by specifying the permeability on the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or
ANISOTROPIC option and the porosity in the INITIAL POROSITY option. In a simple diffusion analysis
tion
as opposed to a coupled soil simulation performed with the PORE option, the porosity is a state variable
Optio and does not change. It is possible to define a new porosity using the CHANGE PORE option. The
fluid/gas is defined by giving the viscosity, density, and the bulk modulus.
ns
1223 INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

Define Initial Pressure
Description
This option defines initial pressure for mass diffusion problems. This option provides the magnitude and
location, and associates it with an initial condition name. The initial condition is activated with the
LOADCASE model definition option. The USINC user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option
can be used to enter spatially varying initial conditions. Unless shell elements are used, there is only one
degree of freedom in a diffusion analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INIT PRESS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of initial pressure (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of initial pressure data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the USINC user subroutine is required for this initial condition.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 2. Then this entry defines the unit
number from which the post file information is read. Defaults to unit 24
for a formatted post file and to unit 25 for a binary post file.
21-25
5th
Enter the increment number to be read for initial conditions.
26-30
6th
31-63
7th
The 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th data blocks are not used if initial pressure are read from a post file.
INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1224

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Initial pressure in first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Initial pressure in second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Initial pressure in third degree of freedom.

Note:
See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal

degrees of freedom.

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
block, 1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block

data block.
1225 FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

Define Fixed Pressure
Description
This data defines a potential fixed pressure boundary condition. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the pressure, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of nodal numbers or a list of
geometric entities. This boundary condition is activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE history
definition option.
Unless shell elements are used, there is only one pressure degree of freedom per node in a diffusion
analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FIXED PRESS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1226

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

4th data block
Magnitudes
1-10
1st
Prescribed pressure for first degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed pressure for second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed pressure for third degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
5th data block

Table IDs
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6th data block

Note:
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
8th data block

7th data block.
1227 DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

Define Distributed Mass Flux
Description
This block of data defines mass flux (surface and volumetric) type boundary conditions. The user defines
a surface distribute mass flux magnitude M 2 t and the location, and associates this with a boundary
condition name. This is activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE history definition option. The
FLUX user subroutine can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed mass fluxes or the TABLE
model definition option may be used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST MASS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of distributed mass fluxes to be entered

(optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of distributed mass fluxes data, defaults
to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
in contact.
31-63
7th
DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1228

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of mass flux.
Enter the table ID associated with the mass flux.
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1:
Normal
106: Uniform volumetric

107: Nonuniform volumetric
11-15
3rd
Enter the face ID.
Data blocks 7 and 8 are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data block,
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
1229 DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1230

Define Nodal Mass Flux
Description
This block of data defines nodal mass flux boundary condition. The user specifies a magnitude and
location, and associates this with a boundary condition name. This is activated or deactivated using the
LOADCASE history definition option.
time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT MASS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sets of point mass fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point mass flux data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
1231 POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Magnitude.
1-10
1st
Point mass flux associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Point mass flux associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Point mass flux associated with third degree of freedom.
5th data block

Table ID for Magnitude
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1:
Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs

7th data block
6th data block.
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1232

Define Diffusion Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Define Diffusion Properties for Isotropic Materials
Diffusion)
Description
This option allows you to define diffusion properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature or pressure, use the TABLE model
definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word DIFFUSION. (required in a multiphysics analysis)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the UPERM and ORIENT user subroutines.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to use Bulk Modulus.

Enter 2 to use perfect gas law.
16-20
4th
Data input mode; enter zero.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
The data entered in data blocks 4 and 5 are the reference values that are used with tables or
are constants.
1233 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

Define Diffusion Properties for Isotropic Materials
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Absolute permeability.
11-20
2nd
Fluid dynamic viscosity.
21-30
3rd
Fluid density.
31-40
4th
Fluid bulk modulus.
41-50
5th
Porosity if the material is used as a component in the

THERMO-PORE option.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for permeability.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for viscosity.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for fluid density.
16-20
4th
Table ID for fluid bulk modulus.
21-25
5th
Table ID for porosity.
6th data block

Note:

its layers.
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1234

Define Diffusion Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Diffusion Properties for Orthotropic Materials

Input - Diffusion)
Description
This option allows you to define diffusion properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
To define the dependence of these properties on temperature or pressure, use the TABLE model definition
option.
Notes:

responsibility to enter all data required to match the dimension of the permeability matrix
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the UPERM and ORIENT user subroutines.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Data input mode.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-62
6th
1235 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

Define Diffusion Properties for Orthotropic Materials
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
K11 Absolute permeability.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
Fluid density.
51-60
6th
Fluid bulk modulus.
61-70
7th
Fluid dynamic viscosity.
Porosity if the material is used as a component in the

THERMO-PORE option.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for K11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for K22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for K33.
16-20
4th
Table ID for dynamic viscosity.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Table ID for porosity.
6th data block

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) 1236

Model Definition Option for Diffusion Analysis
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Model Definition Option for Diffusion Analysis
- Diffusion)
Description
This option specifies diffusion properties defined by a call to the UPERM and ORIENT user subroutines.
The UPERM user subroutine must be used for the input of constant, temperature, or pressure dependent
anisotropic permeability (K11, K22, K33) defined in the user coordinate (1,2,3) system. The TABLE model
definition option can be used for the input of variations of viscosity with temperatures or pressure.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of anisotropic data sets to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3rd through 8th are repeated as a set NSET times.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

UPERM and ORIENT user subroutines.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if the UPERM user subroutine is to be called.

Enter 2 if the anisotropic permeability is to be entered in the 6th and 7th
data blocks.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Data input mode.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
1237 ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

Model Definition Option for Diffusion Analysis
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Fluid Dynamic Viscosity.
11-20
2nd
Fluid density.
21-30
3rd
Fluid bulk modulus.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for fluid dynamic viscosity.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Data block 6 required only if the second fields 6-10 of 3rd data block is a 2.
6th data block
Anisotropic absolute permeability
1-10
1st
K11
11-20
2nd
K12
21-30
3rd
K13
31-40
4th
K22
41-50
5th
K23
51-60
6th
K33
7th data block

Required only if the second field 6-10 of 3rd data block is a 2.
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for K11
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
8th data block


Chapt Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of data necessary for a hydrodynamic bearing analysis. You have the
to define the lubricant film thickness and initial velocity in a variety of ways. In addition,
Mode ability
restrictors and pump pressures can be imposed on the film pressure. The FIXED PRESSURE or
RESTRICTOR model definition option should be used to insure no rigid body modes exist. Lubricant
l
mass flux may be defined using the POINT MASS or DIST MASS options. FIXED PRESSURE, POINT
Defini MASS, and DIST MASS are documented in the Diffusion Analysis section.
tion
Optio
ns
1239 VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)

VELOCITY (with TABLE Input Hydrodynamic)
Description
This option allows the specification of the nodal velocity components in a bearing analysis, where the
convective terms are to be included. The nodal velocity components are defined for sets of nodes.
Moreover, the velocity values can be specified via the UVELOC user subroutine (see Marc Volume D:
User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note that the velocity in a stationary bearing analysis is specified with respect to the (moving) lubricant.
This means that, in case both the adjacent surfaces as well as the lubricant move with respect to some
global coordinate system, the velocity vector to be defined equals the sum of both surface velocities
relative to the stationary film profile.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words VELOCITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of velocity (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of velocity data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the UVELOC user subroutine is required.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the unique label associated with this condition. This label will be
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) 1240

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Velocity in first coordinate direction.
11-20
2nd
Velocity in second coordinate direction.

1-5
1st
Table ID associated with the first coordinate direction.
6-10
2nd
Table ID associated with the second coordinate direction.
6th data block

1-5
1st
1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block
data block.
1241 VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic)

input style.
Description
This option allows the specification of the nodal velocity components in a bearing analysis or a heat
transfer analysis, where the convective terms are to be included. The nodal velocity components are
defined by specifying the velocity magnitude of a series of components for sets of nodes. This data can
be input from data blocks or from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the velocity values can be
respecified, or initialized if no previous data was entered via UVELOC user subroutine (see Marc Volume
value for the print-suppress parameter. Note that the velocity in a stationary bearing analysis is specified
with respect to the (moving) lubricant. This means that, in case both the adjacent surfaces as well as the
lubricant move with respect to some global coordinate system, the velocity vector to be defined equals
the sum of both surface velocities relative to the stationary film profile.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word VELOCITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of data blocks used to input nodal velocity components. If a

negative value is entered, the UVELOC user subroutine is called for
every node.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 to suppress printout of the summary of nodal

velocity components.
Data blocks 3, 4 and 5 should be repeated for each data set.
VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic) 1242

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-10
1st

which the velocity is given.
4th data block

NOTE: List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.
5th data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the velocity vector as defined in data blocks
3 and 4 applied.
1243 THICKNESS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Define Lubrication Thickness
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input - Model

Definition)
Description
This option defines the thickness of the lubricant film in a bearing analysis. The nodal thicknesses are
specified by giving the thickness values for a list of nodes. This data can be input from data blocks or
from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the nodal thickness values can be respecified, or initialized in
case no previous data was input, via the UGROOV user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines
and Special Routines).
The lubricant thickness is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words THICKNESS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of nodal thickness to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of nodal thickness data, defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the number of geometric types used to define the lubricant

thickness, default is 1. See 6th and 7th data blocks.
6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the UGROOV user subroutine is required to specify thickness.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1244

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Nodal thickness.
Table ID for nodal thickness.
5th data block

1-5
1st
block, 1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block

1-80

6th data block.
1245 THICKNESS
THICKNESS
input style.
Description
This option defines the thickness of the lubricant film in a bearing analysis. The nodal thicknesses are
specified by giving the thickness values for a list of nodes. This data can be input from data blocks or
from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the nodal thickness values can be respecified, or initialized in
case no previous data was input, via the UTHICK user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User Subroutines
and Special Routines. A summary of nodal thickness values appears in the printout. This can be
suppressed by specifying a nonzero value for the print-suppress parameter.
The input of element thicknesses can be done via the GEOMETRY option or by means of the UGROOV
user subroutine. Element thickness values usually only have to be defined in case of film discontinuities
(grooves). See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for a description of the various ways to
specify the contributions to the total lubricant film.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word THICKNESS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of data blocks used to input nodal thickness values (optional). If a

negative value is entered, the UTHICK user subroutine is called for
every node.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of film thicknesses. Default to unit 5.
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 to suppress printout of the nodal thickness summary.
The 3rd and 4th blocks should be entered in pairs; one pair for each distinct nodal data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter nodal thickness value.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes for which the thickness as specified in data block 3
is applied.
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 1246

Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input - Model Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis
Definition)
Description
This option allows restrictor coefficients and associated pump pressures to be input. Nonuniform
restrictors or pump pressures can be obtained via the URESTR user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the URESTR user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used, enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used, enter 0.
31-63
7th
4th data block

1-10
1st
Reference value of restrictor coefficient.
11-20
2nd
Reference value of pump pressure.
1247 RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the restrictor coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the pump pressure.
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1:
11-15
3rd
Normal flux
Enter the face ID.
block, 1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
RESTRICTOR 1248
RESTRICTOR
input style.
Description
This option allows restrictor coefficients and associated pump pressures to be input. Nonuniform
restrictors or pump pressures can be obtained via the URESTR user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
Enter the word RESTRICTOR.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number data blocks used to input the restrictor coefficient data (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of restrictor data. Default to unit 5, unless
the INPUT TAPE parameter has been used.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered in pairs, one pair for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Face identification. Same as for the FLUX user subroutine. See Marc
6-15
2nd
Reference value of restrictor coefficient.
16-25
3rd
Reference value of pump pressure (reference values can be modified by

the URESTR user subroutine).
4th data block

Enter a list of elements for which restrictor data as defined in data block
3 is applied.
1249 CONTROL (Hydrodynamic)

Define Maximum Number of Increments for Bearing Analysis
CONTROL
(Hydrodynamic)
Define Maximum Number of Increments for Bearing Analysis
Description
This option allows you to input the maximum number of increments in a hydrodynamic bearing analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word BEARING. (required in a multiphysics analysis)
Maximum number of bearing increments in this run. Default is 4.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block

Not used. Enter a blank data line.
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) 1250

Define Lubricant Material Properties
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Hydrodynamic)
Description
This option is used to define the lubricant material properties for all of the elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of distinct sets of lubricant material properties to be

input (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of data. Defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 6 should be entered as pairs, one for each distinct data block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1,2,3, etc.) for cross-reference to the

material data base.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
Enter the material name to cross-reference with material data base.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the reference value of the viscosity.
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of the cavitation pressure.
21-30
3rd
Enter the reference value of the mass density of the lubricant.
1251 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Table ID for cavitation pressure.
11-15
3rd
6th data block

1-80
Enter element data set for which the properties specified above are
applied.
ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic) 1252

input style.
Description
This option is used to define the lubricant material properties for all of the elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the number of distinct sets of lubricant material properties to be

input (optional).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
For temperature dependent properties, these are values corresponding to

the first (lowest temperature) breakpoint (see TEMPERATURE EFFECTS
option). A temperature dependent property is undefined below its lowest
breakpoint.
6-10
2nd
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks should be entered as pairs, one for each distinct data block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1,2,3, etc.) for cross-reference to

4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the reference temperature value of the viscosity.
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of the cavitation pressure.
21-30
3rd
Enter the reference value of the mass density of the lubricant.
5th data block

Enter element data set for which the properties as specified in data block
3 applies.
1253 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic)

Define Effect of Temperature in Bearing Analysis
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS
(Hydrodynamic)
Description
This option defines the variation of material property (viscosity) temperature. The values read in through
the ISOTROPIC option are those at the lowest temperature specified. Properties are not defined below
the lowest temperature. The temperature dependency can be entered using one of the following two
options:
Data points must be given in ascending order of temperature. This option is flagged by
entering the word DATA on the 1st data line.
In hydrodynamic bearing analyses, the temperature is defined as the second state variable via the INITIAL
STATE and CHANGE STATE options.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
21-80
2nd
For option A, use data blocks 2a and 3a.

For option B, use data blocks 2b and 3b.
Option A
2a data block
1-5
1st
Number of slopes of viscosity versus temperature curve.
6-30
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
3rd
Material type identification (1,2,3,...) for cross-reference to the

ISOTROPIC option.
36-40
4th
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic) 1254

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3a data block
Viscosity variation. Number of data lines as given on data block 2a, first field.
1-15
1st
16-30
Slope of viscosity versus temperature curve.
Temperature above which slope becomes operative.
Option B
2b data block
1-5
1st
Number of data points on the viscosity versus temperature curve.
6-30
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
3rd
Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to the

ISOTROPIC option.
36-40
4th
3b data block
Viscosity variation. Number of data lines as given on data block 2b, first field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the viscosity.
16-30
2nd

Note:
Since in bearing analysis no incrementation is performed, the

value of the viscosity is always taken at the current temperature.
No averaging is performed.
1255 Chapter 3: Model Definition Options

Acoustic Analysis
Chapt Acoustic Analysis

er 3: Marc has two procedures for performing acoustic analysis. One calculates the pressure distribution in a
with rigid reflecting surfaces and the other for when the surfaces are deformable. In the first
Mode cavity
procedure, an eigenvalue analysis is performed, and then modal superposition is used to obtain the
transient response. In the second procedure a harmonic analysis is performed.
l
Defini This section describes the data required for an acoustic analysis where the pressure distribution in a cavity
with reflecting surfaces is calculated. For acoustic structural problems, the acoustive and structural
tion
regions are modeled as separate bodies, and the CONTACT option is used to apply the interface boundary
Optio conditions between the two regions. The fluid in the cavity is treated as an inviscid compressible fluid.
ns
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1256

Description
This data defines a potential fixed pressure boundary condition. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the pressure, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of nodal numbers or a list of
geometric entities. This boundary condition is activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or
The FORCDF user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter frequency
dependent boundary conditions in a harmonic acoustic analysis.
Unless shell elements are used, there is only one pressure degree of freedom per node in a
diffusion analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FIXED PRESS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines are required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd

1257 FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
will be referenced by the LOADCASE model or history definition option.
If a real pressure is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 are used.

If a complex harmonic pressure is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or the
magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.
1-10
1st
Prescribed pressure for first degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed pressure for second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed pressure for third degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex boundary condition.
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of pressure or the phase of the first

11-20
2nd
Prescribed imaginary component of pressure or the phase of the second

21-30
3rd
Prescribed imaginary component of pressure or the phase of the third

1-5
1st
of freedom listed.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second degree
of freedom listed.
11-15
3rd
of freedom listed.
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1258

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

Note:
9th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
10th data block

9th data block.
1259 FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic)

Define Nodal Fixed Pressure
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed pressure that each node must take during the first and subsequent
increments, unless it is further modified using the PRESS CHANGE option. The boundary conditions are
specified either by giving the pressure and a list of nodal numbers, or by the input of boundary conditions
generated during mesh generation (MESH2D).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the words FIXED PRESSURE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of boundary condition blocks to be read (optional).
6-10
2nd
are required in this option block.
Enter 1 for excitation boundary conditions for harmonic analysis.
11-15
3rd
Unit number used for MESH2D option. Note that the boundary conditions
are stored after the connectivity and coordinate data on this file, so that the
model definition options must be arranged accordingly.
Enter 1 if harmonic boundary condition is input as magnitude and phase.
If blank, real and imaginary values are given.
For each set of boundary conditions, use the 3a and 4a data blocks, or the 3b, 4b, and 5b data blocks.
For analyses which do not include heat transfer shell elements, use the 3a and 4a data blocks.
3a data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed nodal pressure.
4a data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above pressure is applied. 3b, 4b and
5b data blocks for analyses which include heat transfer shell elements.
FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic) 1260

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed pressure for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed pressure for second degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed pressure for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal degrees of freedom.
4b data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed pressures
are given.
Note:
5b data block
1261 DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)

Define Distributed Sources
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) sources to be specified. Distributed sources are
converted to consistent nodal sources by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface source on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or
the TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent sources.
Note:
If a distributed source is applied on the bottom of a shell, the source is applied to the highest
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST SOURCES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of distributed sources to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of distributed source data, defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

boundary condition.
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1262

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed sources.
Enter the table ID associated with the distributed source.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block
Imaginary component or phase angle.
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of source or phase angle.
7th data block

Table IDs for imaginary component or phase angle.
1-5
1st
8th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1:
Normal source (bottom surface for shells)
10: Normal source (top surface for shells)

11-15
3rd
9th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
1263 DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10: Polysurface IDs
10th data block

1-80

9th data block.
DIST SOURCES (Acoustic - Model Definition) 1264

DIST SOURCES (Acoustic - Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This option allows incrementally distributed (surface and volumetric) sources to be specified in an
acoustic analysis. Distributed sources are converted to consistent nodal sources by Marc. Note that for a
given element type, there is an established convention for the application of surface source on a particular
face. The FLUX user subroutine can be used to input time and spatial dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
DATA
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST SOURCES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of distributed source data, defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each set of distributed sources.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Source index (optional). (Source index is to be used in the FLUX

user subroutine.)
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed sources.
1265 POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)

Define Point Source
Define Point Source
Description
This option allows total nodal point source to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent source. Either the FORCDF user
subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used for frequency dependent source loads in a
complex harmonic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT SOURCE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of point source to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point source data, defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Enter a 1 if first point source is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of

26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1266

Define Point Source
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Magnitude of point source.
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point source for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer

21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point source for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for point source.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for point source for second degree of freedom (Heat transfer
11-15
3rd
Table ID for point source for third degree of freedom (Heat transfer shell
elements only).
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of point source or phase.
1-5
1st
block, 1st field.
8th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
9th data block

1-80

8th data block.
1267 POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - Model Definition)

Define Point Sources
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - Model Definition)
Define Point Sources
input style.
Description
This option allows incremental nodal point sources to be specified in an acoustic analysis. The FORCDT
user subroutine can be used for the time dependent sources. Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes
with point sources on the DIST LOADS parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
Enter the words POINT SOURCE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of point sources to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 is excitation boundary conditions for harmonic analysis.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if harmonic boundary condition is input magnitude and phase.

The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each set of distributed sources.
3rd data block
1-10
Magnitude of incremental point source.
11-20

21-30
elements only).
4th data block

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1268

Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Acoustic)
Description
This option allows you to define properties for the fluid/gas in the acoustic cavity. You can also associate
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 6 should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
4th data block

1-10
1st
Bulk modulus.
11-20
2nd
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
6th data block

1269 ISOTROPIC (Acoustic)

input style.
Description
This option allows you to define properties for the fluid/gas in the acoustic cavity. You can also associate
Note:
For coupled-structural acoustic analysis or for including fluid drag, you must use
ACOUSTIC model definition option to define the properties of the acoustic media.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
4th data block

1-10
1st
Bulk modulus.
11-20
2nd
5th data block

ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) 1270

Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis
ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis
Acoustic)
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for an acoustic medium (fluid).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ACOUSTIC
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of acoustic material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 to 6 are repeated as a set, once for each set of acoustic material.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
4th data block

1-10
1st
Fluid bulk modulus.
11-20
2nd
Fluid drag (only used for acoustic-solid coupled harmonic analysis).
21-30
3rd
Mass density of fluid.
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Table ID for fluid drag.
11-15
3rd
6th data block

1271 ACOUSTIC
ACOUSTIC
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define material properties for an acoustic medium (fluid).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ACOUSTIC
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of acoustic material data to follow (optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 5 are repeated as a set, once for each set of acoustic material.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
4th data block

1-10
1st
Fluid bulk modulus.
11-20
2nd
Fluid drag (only used for acoustic-solid coupled harmonic analysis).
21-30
3rd
Mass density of fluid.
5th data block


Chapt Electrostatic Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for electrostatic
The boundary conditions discussed in this section are also used for coupled electrostaticMode problems.
structural problems. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC options are used to define dielectric constants
in electrostatic analysis. A steady-state solution can be obtained in one increment using the STEADY
l
STATE option. In addition, the FLUX user subroutine can be used for variable distributions of charges;
Defini the UEPS user subroutine can be used for the anisotropic dielectric constants.
tion
Optio
ns
1273 FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

Define Fixed Potential
Description
This option defines the fixed potential that each node must take. The boundary conditions are specified
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. Note that unless heat
specify it.
The prescribed potential is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the
LOADCASE history definition.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the words FIXED EL-POT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3a data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1274

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter a 1 if first prescribed potential entered is to be applied for all degrees

31-63
7th
4th data block

1-10
1st
Prescribed potential for first degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed potential for second degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed potential for third degree of freedom listed in data block 6.

freedom.)
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6th data block

Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed potentials
are given.
Note:
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
1275 FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

7th data block.
FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic) 1276

Define Fixed Nodal Potential
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed potential that each node must take during the first and subsequent
increments. The boundary conditions are specified either by giving the potential and a list of nodal
numbers, or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation (MESH2D).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
Enter the words FIXED EL-POT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Data blocks 3a and 4a are for analyses which do not include shell elements.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed nodal potential.
4a data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above potential is applied.
Data blocks 3b, 4b, and 5b are for analyses which include shell elements.
3b data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed potential for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
11-20
1st
Prescribed potential for second degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
21-30
2nd
Prescribed potential for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4b.
of freedom.)
1277 FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4b data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed potential
is given.
Note:
5b data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above fixed potential conditions
are applied.
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1278

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Fixed Potential

Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. Note that unless heat
specify it.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the words FIXED POTENTIAL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd


3a data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter a 1 if first prescribed potential entered is to be applied for all degrees

31-63
7th
1279 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

freedom.)
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6th data block

are given.
Note:
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
8th data block

7th data block.
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic) 1280

input style.
Description
Format
Format
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
3rd data block
1-10
1st
4a data block
3b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
1st
21-30
2nd
of freedom.)
1281 FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic)

Format
Data
Entry Entry
4b data block
Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed potential
is given.
Note:
5b data block
are applied.
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic) 1282

Define Distributed Charges
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input Electrosatatic)
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) charges to be specified. Distributed charges are
converted to consistent nodal charges by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface flux on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent charges.
The prescribed charge is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the
Note:
If a distributed charge is applied on the bottom of a shell, the charge is applied to the highest
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST CHARGES.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of distributed charges to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of distributed charge data, defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
1283 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
in contact.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed charges.
Enter the table ID associated with the distributed charge.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1: Normal charge (bottom surface for shells)
10: Normal charge (top surface for shells)
11-15
3rd
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic) 1284

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

1-80

9th data block.
1285 DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic)

input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface charge on a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be
used to input spatially dependent charges.
Format
Format
Fixed
For
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each set of distributed charges.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of distributed charge. See description of

library element in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Charge index (optional). Charge index is to be used in the FLUX

user subroutine.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed charges.
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1286

Define Point Charges
Description
This option allows total nodal point charges to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry
Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT CHARGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of point charges to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point charge data, defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Enter 1 if first point charge is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of a

heat transfer shell.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
1287 POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry
Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Magnitude of point charge.
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point charge for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer

21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point charge for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for point charge.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for point charge for second degree of freedom (Heat transfer
11-15
3rd
Table ID for point flux for third degree of freedom (heat transfer shell
elements only).
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block

1-80

6th data block.
POINT CHARGE 1288

Define Nodal Point Charges
POINT CHARGE
input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for nonuniform point charges.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point charge for second degree of freedom (shell elements

only).
21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point charge for third degree of freedom (shell elements

only).
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal charges are applied.
1289 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity)

Define Electric Permittivity Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Define Electric Permittivity Properties for Isotropic
Materials
- Electric Permittivity)
Description
This option allows you to define electric permittivity properties for isotropic materials. This can be done
by entering one of the following properties:
1
Permittivity possibly controlled by a table.
Inverse permittivity possibly controlled by a table.
E-D relation where a table has to be given with D as the independent variable and E as the
dependent variable.
D-E relation where a table has to be given with E as the independent variable and D as the
dependent variable.
Relative permittivity possibly controlled by a table.
Relative inverse permittivity possibly controlled by a table.
This option is used for both electrostatic and electromagnetic simulations.
The electric permittivity of vacuum (0) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word E-PERMITTI.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of isotropic material data to follow.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input data file.
Data blocks 3 through 6are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity) 1290

Define Electric Permittivity Properties for Isotropic Materials
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.)
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the UEPS user subroutine.
11-15
3rd
Input Mode:
Enter 1 if permittivity is defined.
Enter 2 if inverse permittivity is defined.
Enter 3 if E-D relation with D as the independent variable is defined; a
table is also required.
Enter 4 if D-E relation with E as the independent variable is defined; a
Enter 5 if relative permittivity is defined.
Enter 6 if relative inverse permittivity is defined.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
If input mode = 1, enter permittivity.
4th data block

1-10
1st
If input mode = 2, enter inverse permittivity.

If input mode = 3, enter scale factor for E-D relation.
If input mode = 4, enter scale factor for D-E relation.
If input mode = 5, enter relative permittivity.
If input mode = 6, enter relative inverse permittivity.
5th data block
1-5
1st
If input mode = 1, enter table ID for permittivity.

If input mode = 2, enter table ID inverse permittivity.
If input mode = 3, enter table ID for E-D relation; D is the
If input mode = 4, enter table ID for D-E relation; E is the
If input mode = 5, enter table ID for relative permittivity.
If input mode = 6, enter table ID relative inverse permittivity.
6th data block

1291 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity)

Define Electric Permittivity Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with
TABLE Input - Electric
Permittivity)
Define Electric Permittivity Properties for Orthotropic

Materials
Description
This option allows you to define electric permittivity properties for an orthotropic material. This can be
done by entering one of the following properties in each direction:
1
Permittivity possibly controlled by a table.
Inverse permittivity possibly controlled by a table.
E-D relation where a table has to be given with D as the independent variable and E as the
dependent variable.
D-E relation where a table has to be given with E as the independent variable and D as the
dependent variable.
Relative permittivity possibly controlled by a table.
Relative inverse permittivity possibly controlled by a table.
This option is used for both electrostatic and electromagnetic simulations.
The electric permittivity of vacuum (0) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
Note:

for the elements listed below. (See Marc Volume B: Library Elements, if necessary). No
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word E-PERMITTI.
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity) 1292

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 6are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the UEPS user subroutine.
11-15
3rd

Enter 1 for permittivity.
Enter 2 for inverse permittivity
Enter 3 for E-D relation with D as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
Enter 4 for D-E relation with E as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
Enter 5 for relative permittivity.
Enter 6 for relative inverse permittivity
16-20
4th

Enter 2 for inverse permittivity.
also required.
Enter 4 for D-E relation with E as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
Enter 6 for relative inverse permittivity.
21-25
5th

Enter 2 for inverse permittivity.
also required.
Enter 4 for D-E relation with E as the independent variable; a table is also
required.
Enter 6 for relative inverse permittivity.
26-37
6th
1293 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st

Method 1; enter 11 (electric permittivity).
Method 2; enter 1/11 (inverse electric permittivity).
Method 3; enter scale factor for E-D relation.
Method 4; enter scale factor for D-E relation.
Method 5; enter r,11 (relative electric permittivity).
Method 6; enter 1/r,11 (relative inverse electric permittivity).
11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

5th data block

1-5
1st

Method 2; table ID for 1/11.
Method 3; table ID for E-D relation; D is the independent variable.
Method 4; table ID for D-E relation; E is the independent variable.
Method 5; table ID for r,11.
Method 6; table ID for 1/r,11.
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity) 1294

Format
Fixed
6-10
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
I

11-15
3rd

Method 2; table ID for 1/33
Method 6; table ID for 1/r,33
6th data block

1295 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials
- Electrostatic)
Description
This option allows you to define electrical properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word ELECTROSTATIC (required in a multiphysics analysis).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
Table ID for permittivity.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block

ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic) 1296

input style.
Description
This option allows you to define electrical properties for an isotropic material. You can also associate
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word ELECTROSTATIC (required in a multiphysics analysis).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1297 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

Define Electrical Properties for Orthotropic Materials

ORTHOTROPIC (with
TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
Description
This option allows you to define electrical properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
Note:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word ELECTROSTATIC. (required in a multiphysics analysis)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the UEPS and ORIENT user subroutines.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) 1298

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for 11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for 22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for 33.
6th data block

1299 ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical)

ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical) Define Electrical Properties for Orthotropic Materials

input style.
Description
Note:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ORTHOTROPIC.
11-20
2nd
Enter the word ELECTROSTATIC. (required in a multiphysics analysis)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st

ORTHO TEMP option.
6-10
2nd
4th data block

1-10
1st
11 Electric permittivity
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
5th data block


Chapt Piezoelectric Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of additional material data and boundary conditions applicable to
problems. A piezoelectric analysis is a coupled mechanical-electrostatic analysis. The input
Mode piezoelectric
for mechanical material data is done using the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC option
as described in the section about Material Properties. The PIEZOELECTRIC option is used to define the
l
piezoelectric coupling matrix and the dielectric constants. The mechanical boundary conditions that can
Defini be applied are similar to what is described in the section about Mechanical Analysis. The electrostatic
boundary conditions are described here.
tion
Optio
ns
1301 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Fixed Potential

Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces.
The FORCDF user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter nonuniform
frequency dependent boundary conditions in a harmonic analysis.
Note:
Currently there are no piezoelectric shell elements, so the degree of freedom is always one.
You must specify it.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the number of geometric types used to define boundary

condition, default is 1. See 7th and 8th data blocks.
6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutine required for this
boundary condition.
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1302

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I

16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This
label will be referenced by the LOADCASE option.
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Prescribed potential for second degree of freedom listed in data block

6.
21-30
3rd

(See Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition of nodal
degrees of freedom.)
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Data blocks 6 and 7 are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.
6th data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the first

11-20
2nd
Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the

second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the third

1303 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the first
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the third
8th data block

potentials are given.
Note:
1st field.
9th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
10th data block

9th data block.
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) 1304

FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric - Model

Definition)
input style.
Description
This option defines the fixed potential that each specified node must take during the first and subsequent
increments, unless it will be modified using the POTENTIAL CHANGE option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3a data block
1-10
1st
4a data block
3b data block
1-10
1st

NOTE: Currently, there are no piezoelectric shell elements, but it is
possible to use mechanical shell elements in a piezoelectric analysis.
4b data block
1-5
1st
Enter 1.
5b data block
are applied.
1305 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input Piezoelectric)
Description
TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent charges.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this boundary condition.
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1306

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
in contact.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of the distributed charges.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of the distributed charge or the phase.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for imaginary component of the distributed charge or the
phase.
8th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
1st field.
1307 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9th data block

1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
10th data block

1-80

7th data block.
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) 1308

DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) Define Distributed Charges

input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface charge on a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be
used to input spatially dependent charges.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each set of distributed charges.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Charge index (optional). Charge index is to be used in the FLUX

user subroutine.
4th data block

1309 POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

Description
This option allows total nodal point charges to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent charge.
The FORCDF user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter nonuniform
frequency dependent boundary conditions in a harmonic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1310

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Enter a 1 if first point charge is to be applied to all degrees of freedom of

26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of point charge or phase.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for imaginary component of point charge or phase.
1st field.
8th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
9th data block

1-80

8th data block.
1311 POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)

POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)Define Nodal Point Charges

input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for nonuniform point charges.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each set of point charges.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
4th data block

PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1312

Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric Analysis
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE

Input - Piezoelectric)
Description
This option allows you to specify the coupled electric-mechanical (stress based or strain based) properties
eijk, and the electricproperties i for piezoelectric material. A description of the piezoelectric capabilities
is included in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Note:
In the current release, the table IDs are not used. All piezoelectric properties are constant.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PIEZOELECTRIC.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of piezoelectric material data to follow

(optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 12 are repeated as a set; once for each set of piezoelectric material to be input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1,2,3,etc) for cross-reference to the

ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC option.
6-10
2nd
Flag to indicate if the piezoelectric coupling matrix and the dielectric

matrix is stress based or strain based. Enter 0 for stress based, and a 1 for
strain based data.
4th data block

1-10
1st
e111
11-20
2nd
e221
21-30
3rd
e331
1313 PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
e121
41-50
5th
e231
51-60
6th
e131
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for e111
6-10
2nd
Table ID for e221
11-15
3rd
Table ID for e331
16-20
4th
Table ID for e121
21-25
5th
Table ID for e231
26-30
6th
Table ID for e131
6th data block

1-10
1st
e112
11-20
2nd
e222
21-30
3rd
e332
31-40
4th
e122
41-50
5th
e232
51-60
6th
e132
7th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for e112
6-10
2nd
Table ID for e222
11-15
3rd
Table ID for e332
16-20
4th
Table ID for e122
21-25
5th
Table ID for e232
26-30
6th
Table ID for e132
8th data block

1-10
1st
e113
11-20
2nd
e223
21-30
3rd
e333
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) 1314

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
e123
41-50
5th
e233
51-60
6th
e133
9th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for e113
6-10
2nd
Table ID for e223
11-15
3rd
Table ID for e333
16-20
4th
Table ID for e123
21-25
5th
Table ID for e233
26-30
6th
Table ID for e133
10th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
11th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for 11 Electric permittivity.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
12th data block

1315 PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)

PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric Analysis

Model Definition)
input style.
Description
This option allows you to specify the coupled electric-mechanical (stress based or strain based) properties
eijk, and the electricproperties i for piezoelectric material. A description of the piezoelectric capabilities
is included in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PIEZOELECTRIC.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of piezoelectric material data to follow

(optional).
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 8 are repeated as a set; once for each set of piezoelectric material to be input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1,2,3,etc) for cross-reference to the

ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, or ANISOTROPIC option.
6-10
2nd
Flag to indicate if the piezoelectric coupling matrix and the dielectric

matrix is stress based or strain based. Enter 0 for stress based, and a 1 for
strain based data.
4th data block

1-10
1st
e111
11-20
2nd
e221
21-30
3rd
e331
31-40
4th
e121
41-50
5th
e231
51-60
6th
e131
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Model Definition) 1316

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
e112
11-20
2nd
e222
21-30
3rd
e332
31-40
4th
e122
41-50
5th
e232
51-60
6th
e132
6th data block

1-10
1st
e113
11-20
2nd
e223
21-30
3rd
e333
31-40
4th
e123
41-50
5th
e233
51-60
6th
e133
7th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
8th data block


Chapt Magnetostatic Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for magnetostatic
The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC options are used to define magnetic permeability in
Mode problems.
magnetostatic analysis. The variation of magnetic permeability with either magnetic field density or
magnetic field vector can be prescribed by the B-H RELATION option where the magnetic field intensity
l
(H) is a function of the magnetic induction (B) with B being the independent variable. This variation of
Defini the magnetic permeability can also be described using the table driven option. Then, either the magnetic
induction (B) or the magnetic field intensity (H) can be chosen as the independent variable. A steady state
tion
solution can be obtained in one increment using the STEADY STATE option. In addition, the FLUX user
Optio subroutine can be used for variable distributions of currents; the UMU user subroutine can be used for
anisotropic magnetic permeabilities.
ns
FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1318

Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. In 2-D magnetostatic
analysis, a scalar potential is used; hence, only one degree of freedom. In 3-D magnetostatic analysis, a
vector potential is used.
The fixed potential is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the words FIXED MG-POT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd


3th data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
1319 FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

of freedom.)
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6th data block

are given.
Note:
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
8th data block

7th data block.
FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic) 1320

Define Nodal Fixed Potential
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of boundary condition data blocks to be read (optional).
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Data blocks 3a and 4a are used for analyses which are planar or axisymmetric.
3a data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed potential .
4a data block
Data blocks 3b, 4b, and 5b are used for analyses which include solid brick or shell elements.
1321 FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
of freedom.)
4b data block
are given.
Note:
5b data block
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1322

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input Magnetostatic)
Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. In 2-D magnetostatic
analysis, a scalar potential is used; hence, only one degree of freedom. In 3-D magnetostatic analysis, a
vector potential is used.
The fixed potential is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3th data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
1323 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

of freedom.)
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6th data block

are given.
Note:
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1:
Element IDs
2:
Nodes IDs
3:
4:
Surface IDs
5:
Curve IDs
6:
Point IDs
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1324

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

7th data block.
1325 FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic)

input style.
Description
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of boundary condition data blocks to be read (optional).
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Data blocks 3a and 4a are used for analyses which are planar or axisymmetric.
3a data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed potential .
4a data block
Data blocks 3b, 4b, and 5b are used for analyses which include solid brick or shell elements.
FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic) 1326

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
of freedom.)
4b data block
are given.
Note:
5b data block
1327 DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input Magnetostatic)
Description
convention for the application of surface current on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine(2D), the FORCEM user subroutine (3-D), or the TABLE model definition option can be used to input time
and spatial dependent currents.
history definition.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FLUX (2-D) or the FORCEM (3-D) user subroutine is
required for this boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
in contact.
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1328

Format
Fixed
31-63
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
A
4th data block

1-10
1st
For load type 106 or 107, enter the magnitude of this type of distributed
current in the first coordinate direction.
11-20
2nd
For load type 106 or 107, enter the magnitude of this type if distributed
current in the second coordinate direction.
21-30
3rd
For load type 106 or 107, enter the magnitude of this type of distributed
current in the third coordinate direction.
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1:
11-15
3rd
Normal current
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
1329 DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) 1330

input style.
Description
used to input spatially dependent current.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st

in Marc Volume B: Element LIbrary.
6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Current index (current index is to be used in the FLUX user subroutine).
4th data block

1331 POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input Magnetostatic)
Description
This option allows total nodal point currents to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for spatially dependent or time dependent currents.
The point current is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the LOADCASE
history definition.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point current data, defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1332

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Magnitude of point current for first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point current for second degree of freedom

(3-D elements only).
21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point current for third degree of freedom

5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for point current for first degree of freedom.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for point current for second degree of freedom

11-15
3rd
Table ID for point current for third degree of freedom (3-D elements only).
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
7th data block

1-80

6th data block.
1333 POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic)

input style.
Description
This option allows total nodal point current to be specified.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number of input of point current data; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point current for second degree of freedom

21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point current for third degree of freedom

4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal currents are applied.
COIL CURRENT 1334

Define the current in a Coil
COIL CURRENT
Description
A winding is a single set of coil or a collection of coil sets, such that they are connected in series and end
in only two terminals. This option allows a current to be specified in individual coil of a particular
winding. This coil current is converted to Ampere-turns for this winding. From this the uniform
distributed volumetric current density is calculated using the winding cross-section data and the number
of turns in the winding coil set. This uniform distributed current density is converted to consistent nodal
currents by Marc. The TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent
currents. The applied current is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the
Note:
This boundary condition is applicable to Magnetostatic and Electromagnetic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words COIL CURRENT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of the winding path sets (this is required). This
references the first entry in the 2nd data block of EMWINDING.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for input of winding current data; defaults to input.
The 3rd through 10th data blocks are entered for each winding path.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the identification number of the winding set (this is required). This
identifies a particular winding set detailed in EMWINDING.
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of geometric types used to define the boundary

conditions. Default is 1. See 9th data block.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
1335 COIL CURRENT

Format
Fixed
26-30
Free
6th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 0 if real value given

Enter 1 if complex value if given as real and imaginary numbers.
Enter 2 if complex value is given as magnitude and phase.
31-63
7th
Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition.

This label is references by the LOADCASE option.
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude or real component of the winding coil current.
Enter the table ID for the magnitude or real component of the winding
coil current.
5th data block

1-5
1st
The 6th and 7th data blocks are only requires for a complex harmonic boundary condition.
5th data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of the winding coil current or phase.
Enter the table ID for the imaginary component of the winding

coil current or phase.
7th data block

1-5
1st
8th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the volumetric load type based upon the element description in
6-10
2nd
Enter the distributed load type.
The 9th and 10th data blocks are repeated in pairs for aa many geometry types as specified in the 4th
data block, 2nd field.
9th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element ID
3: Volume/Region/Body ID
10th data block

1-10

are applied.:
The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the 9th
data block.
EMWINDING 1336
Define Path and Are Orientation for Coil or Winding Currents
EMWINDING
Description
This option specifies the winding or coil path to be followed by the coil current. The orientation of the
arc along the path is also defined. The coil path can be specified through nodes or point coordinates of
polyline curves in the input file. The arc orientation can be specified through nodes or point coordinates
of polyline curves.
A particular winding contains multi-turn coils. The multi-turn coils along with the covering insulation
forms a winding. The winding can have two type of cross-section: rectangular or circular. For rectangular
cross section, the arc orientation is along the length of the winding. For circular cross section, the arc
orientation gives a reference direction. The dimensions of the cross section are specified here. The
number of turns in the multi-turn coil is specified in this option. The cross section of an individual coil
is also specified. The cross section can be rectangular or circular. A particular winding can be defined as
a series of paths in this option. In some cases, a winding may be split into two or more parts. Separate
paths are required to define this winding and the paths are not closed in this case. The current in a coil
can be along the path or in the opposite direction of the path. This needs to be specified here. The coil
current in an individual coil is defined in the COIL CURRENT model definition option.
Notes:
1. Use this option only if you have windings with multi-turn coils and the winding cross
section is constant along a given path.
2. The winding has a fixed cross section that traces along the specified path.
3. If your current source does not satisfy the winding type data, it is better to use the DIST
CURRENT boundary condition or other suitable boundary condition like POINT
CURRENT
4. This boundary condition is applicable to Magnetostatic and Electromagnetic analysis.

See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words EMWINDING.
1337 EMWINDING
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of winding current paths to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of winding current path data, defaults to input.
Data blocks 3 through 9 are repeated for each winding

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the identification number of the winding set (required). This

identifies this winding set.
6-10
2nd
Enter the winding cross-section type

1 Cross section is rectangular
2 Cross section is circular
11-20
3rd
If the 2nd field of 3rd data block is:

1 Specifies length of the rectangle
2 Specifies radius of the circle
21-30
4th
If the 2nd field of 3rd data block is:

1 Specifies width of the rectangle
31-35
5th
Enter the number of turns or coils in the winding.
36-40
6th
Enter the coil cross section type

1 Cross section is rectangular
2 Cross section is circular
41-50
7th
If the 6th field of 3rd data block is:

1 Specifies length of the rectangle
2 Specifies radius of the circle
51-60
8th
If the 6th field of 3rd data block is:

1 Specifies width of the rectangle
61-65
9th
Enter the number of winding paths in this set.
66-70
10th
Enter the conductor body associated with this winding set. This number
also references the Inductor ID in the 3rd data block of the EMINDUC
history definition option
Enter the winding set name.
4th data block

1-24
1st
Data blocks 5 through 9 are repeated for each winding path (9th field of 3rd data blocks).
EMWINDING 1338
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the winding current path type:

1 Winding current path is specified through ordered list of nodes
(use 6a data block)
2 Winding current path is specified through point coordinates of
polyline curves (use 6b and 7b data blocks)
Notes: Winding current path type 1 can only be used with cross section
orientation types 1.
Winding current path type 2 can only be used with cross-section
orientation types 2.
6-10
2nd
Enter the winding cross section orientation type: valid only for rectangular
cross section. The direction specified is along the length of the rectangle.
1 Cross section orientation is specified through ordered list of nodes
(use 8a and 9a data blocks)
2 Cross section orientation is specified through point coordinates of
polyline curves (use 8b and 9b data blocks)
11-15
3rd
Enter the number of curves used to define the winding current path. This
field is only valid when winding current path type is 2.
16-20
4th
Enter the path interpolation flag:

0 Cross section orientation at first point of segment is used for
whole segment
1 Cross section orientation is linearly interpolated between first and
last points of segment.
21-25
5th
Enter the direction of current relative to the path:

1 In the same direction as the path
-1 In the opposite direction of the path
The 6th through 9th data blocks depend on the winding current PATH TYPE (1st field of 5th data block)
and CROSS_SECTION ORIENTATION TYPE (2nd field of 5th data block). These data blocks are
only needed for Winding current path types 1 and 2.
I. WINDING CURRENT PATH TYPE 1 (NODES)
6a data block
Enter an unsorted list of nodes or unsorted set of nodes (NDSQ) needed
to define the winding path
7a data block
Not necessary.
1339 EMWINDING
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
CROSS_SECTION ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 1 (NODES)
8a data block
1-10
1st

winding current path (default is 0).
11-15
2nd
Table ID for angle.
9a data block
Enter an unsorted list of nodes or unsorted set of nodes (NDSQ) needed
to define the winding cross section orientation.
Notes: The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length
along the winding path or a function of the position coordinates
along the winding path.
The number of nodes defining the winding cross section
orientation has to be either equal to 1 or equal to the number of
nodes defining the winding path. If only one node is used, the arc
vector is defined as the vector from the winding path node to that
node always.
II. WINDING CURRENT PATH TYPE 2 (CURVES)
Define path and cross section orientation for winding current source.
Start loop over number of polyline curves (5th data block, 3rd field)
Read number of points to define polyline (6b data block)
Start loop over number of points to define path polyline
Read coordinates of each winding current path point (7b data block)
End loop over points
End loop over polyline curves
For Each Curve:
6b data block
1-5
1st
Enter the winding curve type (polyline = 1)
6-10
2nd
Enter the number of points to define polyline.
Repeat 7th data block for each point on the winding path curve (2nd field of 6th data block)
7b data block
1-5
1st
Enter X coordinate of point
11-20
2nd
Enter Y coordinate of point
21-30
3rd
Enter Z coordinate of point
EMWINDING 1340
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
CROSS_SECTION ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 2 (CURVES)
Start loop over number of polyline curves (5th data block, 3rd field)
Read angle for rotation of tangent-arc plane (8b data block)
Start loop over number of points to define arc polyline
Read coordinates of each winding cross section orientation point (9b data block)
End loop over points
End loop over polyline curves
For Each Curve:
8b data block
1-5
1st
Enter arc curve type (polyline = 1)
6-15
2nd
Enter angle in degrees by which arc-tangent plane is rotated about winding

path (default = 0).
16-20
3rd
Enter table ID for angle.
For each point on the Arc Orientation Curve

9b data block
1-10
1st
Enter X coordinate of point
11-20
2nd
Enter Y coordinate of point
21-30
3rd
Enter Z coordinate of point

Notes: Only polylines (winding current curve type = 1, cross section
curve type = 1) are supported in the current version.
The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length
along the winding current path or a function of the position
coordinates along the winding current path.
The number of points defining the cross section orientation curve
has to be equal to the number of points defining the winding
path curve
1341 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials
- Magnetostatic)
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic properties for isotropic materials. This can be done by entering
one of the following properties:
1
Permeability possibly controlled by a table.
Inverse permeability possibly controlled by a table.
H-B relation where a table has to be given with B as the independent variable and H as the
dependent variable.
B-H relation where a table has to be given with H as the independent variable and B as the
dependent variable.
Format
Fixed
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-reference to B-H

RELATION option.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the UMU and ORIENT user subroutines.
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1342

Fixed
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Input Mode:
Enter 0 for Marc 2005 style or older with table driven input.
Enter 1 if permeability is defined.
Enter 2 if inverse permeability is defined.
Enter 3 if H-B relation with B as the independent variable is defined; a
Enter 4 if B-H relation with H as the independent variable is defined; a
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
If input mode = 0 or 1, enter permeability.
4th data block

1-10
1st
If input mode = 2, enter inverse permeability.

If input mode = 3, enter scale factor for H-B relation.
If input mode = 4, enter scale factor for B-H relation.
11-20
2nd
If input mode = 0, enter inverse permeability.
If input mode = 0 or 1, enter table ID for permeability.
5th data block

1-5
1st
If input mode = 2, enter table ID inverse permeability.

If input mode = 3, enter table ID for B-H relation; H is the
If input mode = 4, enter table ID for H-B relation; B is the
6-10
2nd
If input mode = 0, enter table ID inverse permeability.
6th data block

1343 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability)

Define Magnetic Permeability Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Magnetic Permeability)
Define Magnetic Permeability Properties for

Isotropic Materials
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic permeability properties for isotropic materials. This can be
1
Reluctivity possibly controlled by a table.
dependent variable.
dependent variable.
Relative permeability possibly controlled by a table.
Relative reluctivity possibly controlled by a table.
This option is used for both magnetostatic and electromagnetic simulations.
The magnetic permeability of vacuum (0) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word M-PERMEABI.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 6are repeated for each data set.
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability) 1344

Define Magnetic Permeability Properties for Isotropic Materials
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-reference.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the UMU user subroutine.
11-15
3rd
Input Mode:
Enter 1 if permeability is defined.
Enter 2 if reluctivity is defined.
Enter 3 if H-B relation with B as the independent variable is defined; a
Enter 4 if B-H relation with H as the independent variable is defined; a
Enter 5 if relative permeability is defined.
Enter 6 if relative reluctivity is defined.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
If input mode = 1, enter permeability.
4th data block

1-10
1st
If input mode = 2, enter reluctivity.

If input mode = 3, enter scale factor for H-B relation.
If input mode = 4, enter scale factor for B-H relation.
If input mode = 5, enter relative permeability.
If input mode = 6, enter relative reluctivity.
5th data block
1-5
1st
If input mode = 1, enter table ID for permeability.

If input mode = 2, enter table ID reluctivity.
If input mode = 3, enter table ID for B-H relation; H is the
If input mode = 4, enter table ID for H-B relation; B is the
If input mode = 5, enter table ID for relative permeability.
If input mode = 6, enter table ID relative reluctivity.
6th data block

1345 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability)

Define Magnetic Permeability Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Magnetic Permeability Properties for

Orthotropic Materials
Input - Magnetic
Permeability)
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic permeability properties for an orthotropic material. This can
be done by entering one of the following properties in each direction:
1
Reluctivity possibly controlled by a table.
dependent variable.
dependent variable.
Relative permeability possibly controlled by a table.
Relative reluctivity possibly controlled by a table.
This option is used for both magnetostatic and electromagnetic simulations.
The magnetic permeability of vacuum (0) is specified in the PARAMETERS option.
Notes:

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability) 1346

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word M-PERMEABI.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 6are repeated for each data set.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1, 2, 3, etc.) for cross-reference.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the UMU user subroutine.
11-15
3rd

Enter 1 for permeability.
Enter 2 for reluctivity
Enter 3 for H-B relation with B as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
Enter 4 for B-H relation with H as the independent variable; a table is
also required.
Enter 5 for relative permeability.
Enter 6 for relative reluctivity
16-20
4th

Enter 2 for reluctivity.
also required.
also required.
Enter 6 for relative reluctivity.
21-25
5th

Enter 2 for reluctivity.
1347 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
also required.
Enter 4 for B-H relation with H as the independent variable; a table is also
required.
Enter 6 for relative reluctivity.
4th data block

1-10
1st

Method 1; enter 11 (permeability).
Method 2; enter 11 (reluctivity).
Method 3; enter scale factor for H-B relation.
Method 4; enter scale factor for B-H relation.
Method 5; enter r,11 (relative permeability).
Method 6; enter r,11 (relative reluctivity).
11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability) 1348

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-5
1st

Method 3; table ID for H-B relation; B is the independent variable.
Method 4; table ID for B-H relation; H is the independent variable.
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd

Method 2; table ID for 33
Method 6; table ID for r,33
6th data block

1349 ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)

input style.
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic properties for isotropic materials. You can also associate these
material properties with a list of element numbers. Note that either the permeability or its inverse can be
entered.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word MAGNETOSTATIC. (required in a multiphysics analysis)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are repeated for each data set.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

B-H RELATION option.
6-10
2nd
4th data block

1-10
1st
Permeability.
11-20
2nd
Inverse permeability.
5th data block

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1350

Define Magnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Magnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials

Input - Magnetostatic)
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic properties for an orthotropic material. This can be done by
entering one of the following properties in each direction:
1
Inverse permeability possibly controlled by a table.
dependent variable.
dependent variable.
Notes:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
1351 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

Enter 2 for inverse permeability
also required.
also required.
16-20
4th

Enter 2 for inverse permeability.
also required.
also required.
21-25
5th

Enter 2 for inverse permeability.
also required.
Enter 4 for B-H relation with H as the independent variable; a table is also
required.
26-37
6th

temperature dependent properties.
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1352

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4a data block
Use if the input modes for all components are zero.
1-10
1st
11
Magnetic permeability.
11-20
2nd
22
21-30
3rd
33
31-40
4th
1/11 Inverse magnetic permeability.
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
4b data block
Use if the input modes are not zero.
1-10
1st

Method 1; enter 11 (magnetic permeability).
Method 2; enter 1/11 (inverse magnetic permeability).
11-20
2nd

Method 1; enter 22 (Magnetic permeability).
21-30
3rd

Method 1; enter 33 (magnetic permeability).
5a data block
Use if the input modes for all components are zero.
1-5
1st
Table ID for 11
6-10
2nd
Table ID for 22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for 33.
1353 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
Table ID for 1/11.
21-25
5th
Table ID for 1/22.
26-30
6th
Table ID for 1/33.
5b data block
Use if the input modes are not zero.
1-5
1st
Table IDs for 1st component:

Method 2; table ID for 1/11.
6-10
2nd
Table IDs for 2nd component:

11-15
3rd
Table IDs for 3rd component:

Method 2; table ID for 1/33
6th data block

ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) 1354

ORTHOTROPIC
(Magnetostatic)
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define magnetic properties for an orthotropic material. You can also associate
these material properties with a list of element numbers. Note that either the permeability or the inverse
permittivity can be entered.
Notes:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

RELATION option.
6-10
2nd
4th data block

1-10
1st
11
Magnetic permeability
11-20
2nd
22
21-30
3rd
33
1355 ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
1/11 Inverse magnetic permeability
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
5th data block

B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic) 1356

Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear Magnetic Material
B-H RELATION
(Magnetostatic)
Description
This option can be used to specify the magnetization curve(s) for nonlinear isotropic or orthotropic
material. Depending on the material type, a different method of entering data must be used:
Isotropic Material:
(Option A)
Enter one set of data points (|H|, |B|) representing the magnitude of H as a
function of the magnitude of B. For |H| = 0 the value of |B| should be zero. If
not, the corresponding offset of the curve is disregarded.
Orthotropic Material: For every component of H, a set of data points (H,B) is entered, relating this
(Option B)
component of H to the corresponding component of B. A component of the
remanence vector can be specified by choosing a nonzero value of B for H = 0.
Note:
In either cases the curve(s) represented by the data sets must be monotone and uniquely
defined. Furthermore, the data points must be given in ascending order of B.
An alternative way of specifying the magnetization curve(s) is to supply the reluctivity 1/ in the UMU
user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words B-H RELATION.
For option A, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, and 5a. For option B, use data blocks 2b, 3b, 4b, and 5b.
Option A Isotropic Behavior
2a data block
1-5
1st
Number of data points of |H|-|B| curve.
6-10
2nd
Not used; 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; 0.
1357 B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
31-35
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Material type identification (1,2,3...) for cross-reference to

ISOTROPIC option.
36-40
8th
Logical unit number for input of this set of data. Defaults to data blocks.
3a data block
|H| - |B| variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, first field.
1-15
1st
Enter value of |H|.
16-30
2nd
Enter value of |B|.
Option B Orthotropic Behavior

2b data block
1-5
1st
Number of data points of H1 - B1 curve.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rdt
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th

ORTHOTROPIC option.
36-40
8th
3b data block
H1 - B1 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, first field.
1-15
1st
Enter value of H1.
16-30
2nd
Enter value of B1.
4b data block
H2 - B2 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, second field.
1-15
1st
Enter value of H2.
16-30
2nd
Enter value of B2.
5b data block
H3 - B3 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, third field.
1-15
1st
Enter value of H3.
16-30
2nd
Enter value of B3.
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) 1358

Define Permanent Magnet
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Permanent Magnet

Description
This option provides various ways of defining a permanent magnet in parts of the model. The default is
that no permanent magnets are present.
You need to enter the remanence vector Br, which is the product of the magnet vector M0 and the
permeability of the vacuum 0.
The permanent magnet data is associated with a boundary condition name that is activated with the
LOADCASE model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PERMANENT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data to be entered (optional)
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 7 are repeated once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-63
7th
1359 PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the first component of remanence vector.
11-20
2nd
Enter the second component of remanence vector.
21-30
3rd
Enter the third component of remanence vector.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID associated with the first component of remanence vector.
6-10
2nd
Table ID associated with the second component of remanence vector.
11-15
3rd
Table ID associated with the third component of remanence vector.
Data blocks 6 and 7 are repeated for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data block, 1st field.
6th data
block
1-5
1st

1 Element IDs
7th data block

1-80
6th data block.
PERMANENT (Magnetostatic) 1360

input style.
Description
You need to enter the remanence vector Br, which is the product of the magnet vector M0 and the
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to initialize the permanent magnet via data blocks 3 and 4 below.
See also the third field on this block.
Enter 4 to initialize the permanent magnet via data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8
given below. See also the third field on this block.
11-15
3rd
This entry gives the number of pairs of bocks in data blocks 3 and 4 or in
data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 used to input the permanent magnet.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
1361 PERMANENT (Magnetostatic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
First component of remanence vector.
11-20
2nd
Second component of remanence vector.
21-30
3rd
Third component of remanence vector.
5th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
6th data block

7th data block
This data block is not necessary if CENTROID parameter is used.
Enter a list of integration points to which the above remanence is applied.
8th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above remanence is applied.
CONTROL (Magnetostatic) 1362

Control for Magnetostatic Analysis
Control for Magnetostatic Analysis
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and accuracy for
magnetostatic analysis. This option is only required if the B-H RELATION option is used to enter a
nonlinear permeability or when the permeability is depending on a TABLE.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Maximum number of steps in this run. Default is 9999.
6-10
2nd
Maximum number of recycles during an increment. Default is 3.
11-15
3rd
Minimum number of recycles during an increment.
16-20
4th
Flag for convergence testing

0 or blank Convergence is achieved when residuals satisfy the criterion
2 Convergence is achieved when magnetic stored energy satisfies the
criteria
3rd data block

Include if residual testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 0 or blank,
1-10
1st
Maximum allowed relative error in residual current.
11-20
2nd
Maximum allowed absolute error in residual current.
4th data block

Include if magnetic energy testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 2,
1-10
1st
Maximum allowed relative error in magnetic stored energy.

Chapt Electromagnetic Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for electromagnetic
The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC options are used to define magnetic permeability,
Mode problems.
electrical permittivity, conductivity and susceptibility in the electromagnetic analysis. In addition, the
FORCEM user subroutine can be used for variable distributions of currents and charges.
l
Defini Electromagnetic analysis can be performed using either a harmonic or transient approach. If the harmonic
approach is used, the steady state sinusoidal result is obtained. Using this method, the excitation
tion
frequency is given using the HARMONIC option. If the transient approach is used, the time step is defined
using
the DYNAMIC CHANGE option.
Optio
ns
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1364

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input Electromagnetic)
Description
either by giving the potential and either a list of nodal numbers, or a list of surfaces. In electromagnetic
analysis, the potential consists of vector and scalar potentials, the first three of which are associated with
the magnetic vector potential, and the fourth degree of freedom with the scalar potential.
The FORCDF user subroutine or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter frequency
dependent boundary conditions in a harmonic electromagnetic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3a data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

boundary condition.
1365 FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I

16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Prescribed potential for fourth degree of freedom listed in data block 6.
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the fourth degree of freedom listed.
6th data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the first

11-20
2nd
Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the second

21-30
3rd
Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the third

31-40
4th
Prescribed imaginary component of potential or the phase of the fourth

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1366

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-5
1st
of freedom listed.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second degree
of freedom listed.
11-15
3rd
of freedom listed.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the fourth degree
of freedom listed.
8th data block

are given.
Note:
9th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
14: Element-Faces ID - Marc Mentat convention
10th data block

7th data block.
1367 FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic)

input style.
Description
numbers, or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation (MESH2D). In
electromagnetic analysis, the potential consists of vector and scalar potentials, the first three of which are
associated with the magnetic vector potential, and the fourth degree of freedom with the scalar potential.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
mesh generation (MESH2D). If this field is activated, no further blocks
11-15
3rd
Unit number used for the MESH2D option. Note that the boundary
conditions are stored after the connectivity and coordinate data on this
file, so that the model definition options must be arranged accordingly.
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are repeated for each set.

3rd data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Prescribed potential for fourth degree of freedom list in data block 4.
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic) 1368

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

are given.
Note:
5th data block

1369 DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input Electromagnetic)
Description
convention for the application of surface current on a particular face. Either the FLUX user subroutine or
the TABLE model definition option can be used to input time and spatial dependent currents.
history definition.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1370

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
in contact.
31-63
7th
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of the distributed current or the phase.
1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for imaginary component of the distributed current or

the phase.
8th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1:
11-15
3rd
Normal current
1st field.
9th data block
1-5
1st

1:
Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
1371 DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

1-80

9th data block.
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - Model Definition) 1372

DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - Model

Definition)
input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface current of a particular face. The FORCEM user subroutine can
be used to input spatially dependent current.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Current index (current index is to be used in the FORCEM

user subroutine).
4th data block

1373 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input Electromagnetic)
Description
TABLE model definition option can be used to input time, frequency, and spatial dependent charges.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FLUX user subroutine is required for this boundary
condition.
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1374

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
in contact.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of the distributed charges.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed imaginary component of the distributed charge or the phase.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for imaginary component of the distributed charge or

the phase.
8th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
1375 DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
10th data block

1-80

7th data block.
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - Model Definition) 1376

DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - Model

Definition)
input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface charge on a particular face. The FORCEM user subroutine can
be used to input spatially dependent charges.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST CHARGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Charge index (optional). Charge index is to be used in the FORCEM user

subroutine.
4th data block

1377 POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

Define Point Fluxes
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input Electromagnetic)
Define Point Fluxes
Description
This option allows total nodal point fluxes to be specified. Either the FORCDT user subroutine or the
TABLE model definition option can be used for the time dependent fluxes. The FORCDF user subroutine
or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter frequency dependent boundary conditions in
a harmonic electromagnetic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point flux data, defaults to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutine required for this
boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1378

Define Point Fluxes
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point current for second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point current for third degree of freedom.
31-40
4th
Magnitude of point current for fourth degree of freedom.
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for point current for first degree of freedom.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for point current for second degree of freedom.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for point current for third degree of freedom.
16-20
4th
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1:
Element IDs
2:
Nodes IDs
3:
4:
Surface IDs
5:
Curve IDs
6:
Point IDs

7th data block
1-80

6th data block.
1379 POINT CURRENT-CHARGE

Define Nodal Point Currents and Point Charges
Define Nodal Point Currents and Point Charges
input style.
Description
This option allows nodal point currents and point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine
can be used for nonuniform loading conditions.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT CURRENT-CHARGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sets of point current and charge to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point current and charge data;
defaults to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Nodal charge.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above point current-charge applies.
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1380

Define Electromagnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Define Electromagnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials

Input - Electromagnetic)
Description
This option allows you to define electromagnetic properties for an isotropic material. You can also
associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word ELECTROMAG (required in a multiphysics analysis)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
4th data block

Necessary only in coupled electromagnetic-thermal analysis.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
Mass density.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
1381 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

Format
Fixed
41-50
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
F
Emissivity.
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th
6th data block

1-10
1st
Permeability ().
11-20
2nd
Permittivity ().
21-30
3rd
Permeability of air.
31-40
4th
Electric conductivity ().
7th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for permeability.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for permittivity.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for permeability of air.
16-20
4th
Table ID for electric conductivity.
8th data block

ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) 1382

ISOTROPIC
(Electromagnetic)
input style.
Description
This option allows you to define electromagnetic properties for an isotropic material. You can also
associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks should be entered as pairs and repeated for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

RELATION option.
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
Mass density.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th
Emissivity.
1383 ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
Permeability ().
11-20
2nd
Permittivity ().
21-30
3rd
Permeability of air.
31-40
4th
Electric conductivity ().
6th data block

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1384

Define Electromagnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials
ORTHOTROPIC (with Define Electromagnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials

TABLE Input Electromagnetic)
Description
Notes:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-37
6th
Data blocks 4 through 7 are only necessary in coupled electromagnetic-thermal analysis.
1385 ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
K11
Thermal conductivities.
11-20
2nd
K22
21-30
3rd
K33
31-40
4th
Mass density.
41-50
5th
5th data block

1-5
1st
Table ID for K11.
6-10
2nd
Table ID for K22.
11-15
3rd
Table ID for K33.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
8th data block

1-10
1st
11 Magnetic permeability
1-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
11 Permittivity
1-50
5th
22 Permittivity
51-60
6th
33 Permittivity
61-70
7th
Permeability of air
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) 1386

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9th data block

1-10
1st
Table ID for 11 magnetic permeability
1-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Table ID for 11 permittivity
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Table ID for permeability of air
1-10
11 Electrical Conductivity
11-20
21-30
1-10
Table ID for 11 electrical Conductivity
11-20
21-30
10th data block
11th data block
12th data block

1387 ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)

ORTHOTROPIC
(Electromagnetic)
input style.
Description
Notes:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 through 8 are repeated once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to call the UMU, UEPS, and USIGMA user subroutines.
ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) 1388

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Data blocks 4 and 5 are only necessary in coupled electromagnetic-thermal analysis.
1-10
1st
K11
11-20
2nd
K22
21-30
3rd
K33
31-40
4th
Mass density.
41-50
5th
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
6th data block

1-10
1st
1-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
11 Permittivity
1-50
5th
22 Permittivity
51-60
6th
33 Permittivity
61-70
7th
Permeability of air
1-10
11-20
21-30
7th data block
8th data block

1389 B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic)

B-H RELATION
(Electromagnetic)
Description
This option can be used to specify the magnetization curve(s) for nonlinear isotropic or orthotropic
material. Depending on the material type, a different method of entering data must be used:
Isotropic Material:
(Option A)
Enter one set of data points (|H|, |B|) representing the magnitude of H as a
function of the magnitude of B. For |H| = 0 the value of |B| should be zero. If
not, the corresponding offset of the curve is disregarded.
Orthotropic Material:
(Option B)
For every component of H, a set of data points (H,B) is entered, relating this
component of H to the corresponding component of B. A component of the
remanence vector can be specified by choosing a nonzero value of B for H = 0
Note:
In either case, the curve(s) represented by the data sets must be monotone and uniquely
defined. Furthermore, the data points must be given in ascending order of B.
An alternative way of specifying the magnetization curve(s) is to supply the reluctivity 1/ in the UMU
user subroutine.
This option is only applicable for transient electromagnetic analysis and is not applicable to
harmonic calculations.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words B-H RELATION.
For option A, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, and 5a. For option B, use data blocks 2b, 3b, 4b, and 5b.
Option A Isotropic Behavior
2a data block
1-5
1st
Number of data points of |H|-|B| curve.
6-10
2nd
Not used; 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; 0.
B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic) 1390

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-35
7th

ISOTROPIC option.
36-40
8th
3a data block
|H| - |B| variation. Number of blocks as given on data block 2, first field.
1-15
1st
Enter value of |H|.
16-30
2nd
Enter value of |B|.
Option B Orthotropic Behavior

2b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rdt
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th

ORTHOTROPIC option.
36-40
8th
3b data block
H1 - B1 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, first field.
1-15
1st
Enter value of H1.
16-30
2nd
Enter value of B1.
4b data block
H2 - B2 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, second field.
1-15
1st
Enter value of H2.
16-30
2nd
Enter value of B2.
5b data block
H3 - B3 variation. Number of blocks given on data block 2, third field.
1-15
1st
Enter value of H3.
16-30
2nd
Enter value of B3.
1391 PERMANENT (Electromagnetic)

input style.
Description
You need to enter the remanence vector Bv, which is the product of the magnet vector M and the
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to initialize the permanent magnet via data blocks 3 and 4 below. See
also the third field on this block.
Enter 4 to initialize the permanent magnet via data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8
given below. See also the third field on this block.
11-15
3rd
This entry gives the number of pairs of blocks in data blocks 3 and 4 or in
data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 used to input the permanent magnet.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
First layer of cross-section point with this value.
26-30
6th
Last layer or cross-section point with this value can only be bigger than 1
PERMANENT (Electromagnetic) 1392

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
5th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
6th data block

7th data block
This data block is not necessary if CENTROID parameter is used.
Enter a list of integration points to which the above remanence is applied.
8th data block
Enter a list of layer points to which the above remanence is applied.
1393 CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic)

Control for Electromagnetic Analysis
Control for Electromagnetic Analysis
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and accuracy for magnetostatic
analysis. This option is only required if the B-H RELATION option is used to enter a nonlinear
permeability.
This option is only applicable for transient electromagnetic analysis and is not applicable to
harmonic calculations.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
11-20
2nd
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Maximum number of steps in this run. Default is 9999.
6-10
2nd
Maximum number of recycles during an increment. Default is 3.
11-15
3rd
Minimum number of recycles during an increment.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Maximum allowed relative error in residual current.
11-20
2nd
Maximum allowed absolute error in residual current.

Fluid Analysis
Chapt Fluid Analysis

er 3: This section describes the input of material data and boundary conditions applicable for fluid, fluidfluid-solid and fluid-thermal-solid interaction analyses. The ISOTROPIC option is used to
Mode thermal,
define the fluid material properties, viscosity, density, and, if necessary, the conductivity and specific
heat. Non-Newtonian fluid behavior can be defined through the STRAIN RATE option, while temperature
l
dependent properties are defined through the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option. The boundary
Defini conditions on a fluid can be either defined through the FIXED VELOCITY, or the POINT LOAD, and DIST
LOADS options. The POINT LOAD and DIST LOADS options are described in the Mechanical Analysis
tion
section. In a fluid-thermal analysis, the additional boundary conditions are FIXED TEMPERATURE,
Optio POINT FLUX, DIST FLUXES, and FILMS which are defined in the Heat Transfer Analysis section. In a
fluid-solid analysis, the boundary conditions on the solid region are specified using the FIXED DISP,
ns
POINT LOAD, DIST LOADS, and FOUNDATION options. Initial conditions in a transient analysis can be
specified using the INITIAL VEL or INITIAL TEMP options.
In Fluid Analysis, data for POINT LOAD and DIST LOADS should be prescribed as total rather than
incremental quantity (as used in Mechanical Analysis). Similarly, POINT FLUX and DIST FLUXES for
Heat Transfer Analysis are also given as total quantity. This specification is to be used consistently for
fluid and/or heat transfer portion of analysis in coupled fluid-solid, fluid-thermal, and fluid-thermalsolid.
Note the degrees of freedom in an analysis are dependent upon the type of analysis and the procedure
used. This is important when applying boundary conditions in these analyses and is summarized
as follows:
Fluid Parameter 2-D-planar 2-D-axisymmetric
3-D
Fluid only, mixed
10
v x , vy , p
vz , vr , p
v x , vy , v z , p
Fluid only, penalty
11
v x , vy
vz , vr
v x , vy , v z
Fluid-thermal, mixed,
strong coupling
12
vx , vy , p, T
vz , vr , p, T
vx , vy , vz , p, T
Fluid-thermal, penalty,
strong coupling
13
vx , vy , T
vx , vr , T
vx , vy , vz , T
Fluid-thermal, mixed,
weak coupling
vx , v y, p
v z , vr , p
vx , vy , vz , p
Fluid-thermal, penalty,
weak coupling
v x , vy
vz , vr
vx , vy , vz
Fluid-solid, mixed,
weak coupled
40
vx , vy , p
vz , vr , p
vx , vy , vz
ux , uy
uz , ur
ux , uy , uz
Fluid-solid, penalty,
weak coupling
41
vx , vy
vz , vr
vx , vy , vz
ux , uy
uz , ur
ux , uy , uz

Fluid Analysis
Fluid Parameter 2-D-planar 2-D-axisymmetric

Fluid-thermal-solid,
mixed, strong-weak
42
penalty, strong-weak
43
mixed, weak-weak
44
penalty, weak-weak
45
3-D
vx , vy , p, T
vx , vr , p, T
vx , vy , vz , p, T
ux , uy
uz , ur
ux , uy , uz
vx , vy , T
vz , vr , T
vx , vy , vz , T
ux , uy
uz , ur
ux , uy , uz
vx , vy , p
vz , vr , p
vx , vy , vz
ux , uy
uz , ur
ux , uy , uz
v x , vy
vz , vr
vx , vy , vz
ux , uy
uz , ur
ux , uy , uz
The fluid region cannot contain any truss, beams, membranes, shells, generalized plain strain,
axisymmetric elements with twist or any semi-infinite elements. The triangular and tetrahedral elements
should not be used. For a complete list of supported elements, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information, Chapter 6: Nonstructural and Coupled Procedure Library, Element Types.
REGION (Fluid) 1396

Define Elements in a Region
REGION (Fluid)
Define Elements in a Region
Description
This option allows you to define which elements are part of a region. In fluid-solid, or fluid-thermal-solid
analysis, it is necessary to divide the model into different regions depending on whether only a fluid
analysis is performed in an area or a structural analysis is performed. This is used in conjunction with
using the weakly coupled formulations. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for
more details.
This option is also necessary in an acoustic-solid analysis, where you have to define the parts of the model
belonging to the solid and the parts of the model belonging to the acoustic fluid.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word REGION.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of regions.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number for reading data. Defaults to input file.
Repeat data blocks 3 and 4 for region.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the region type:

1 solid region
3 fluid or acoustic region
4th data block

1397 COUPLING REGION

Define Coupling Regions
COUPLING REGION
Description
This data block defines coupling regions and associates them with boundary condition names.
These boundary conditions are activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history
definition option.
Coupling regions, with the accompanying application programming interface (API), provide an interface
to couple Marc with external numerical solvers such as computational fluid dynamics codes, via user
subroutine programming. A coupling region is that part of the surface or volume of the model where the
interaction with the external solver takes place. A surface region consists of a list of edges or geometric
curves in 2-D and a list of faces or geometric surfaces in 3-D. A volumetric region consists of a list of
elements or contact bodies.
On coupling regions, the basic mechanical and thermal quantities (see Table 3-14, Table 3-15,
Table 3-16, Table 3-17) can be exchanged with an external solver via API calls. The quantities that will
be received from the external solver are applied through appropriate boundary conditions on the coupling
region and must be specified on the 4th data block.
The code coupling interface may also be used to apply complex boundary conditions on certain regions
of the model or to develop dedicated post-processing tools. See Chapter 14 Code Coupling Interface in
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information and Chapter 12 Code Coupling Interface in Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for more information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words COUPLING REGION.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of coupling regions to be read (optional).
6-10
2nd
Unit number to read data. Default is the standard input file.
Data blocks 3 through 6 are repeated for each coupling region.
COUPLING REGION 1398

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Enter the number of quantities that will be prescribed on this region. See
4th data block.
11-15
3rd
Not used.
16-20
4th
Not used.
21-25
5th
Not used.
26-30
6th
Not used.
31-63
7th
Enter the unique label associated with this coupling region. This label will
be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.
The 4th data block is repeated for as many quantities as specified in the 3rd data block, 2nd field.
4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the ID of the prescribed quantity (see tables below). Only quantities
which can be put can be selected here. The quantity will be prescribed
through appropriate boundary conditions on the region.
block, 1st field.
5th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
1399 COUPLING REGION

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

5th data block.
Table 3-14
Global Quantities
Quantity ID
Dimension
Description
Scalar
Time Step
Scalar
Coupling Time Step
Put
Get
No
Yes
Yes*
No
* Only with the time stepping scheme. If the Coupling Time Step is prescribed on one coupling region, it
will be prescribed on all coupling regions in the model.
Table 3-15
Nodal Quantities*
Quantity ID
Dimension
101
Vector
102
Description
Put
Get
Current Coordinates
No
Yes
Vector
Displacement
Yes
Yes
103
Vector
External Force
Yes
Yes
104
Vector
Reaction Force
No
Yes
112
Vector
Displacement (Local)
Yes
Yes
113
Vector
External Force (Local)
Yes
Yes
114
Vector
Reaction Force (Local)
No
Yes
121
Scalar
Displacement X
No
Yes
122
Scalar
Displacement Y
No
Yes
123
Scalar
Displacement Z
No
Yes
124
Scalar
External Force X
No
Yes
125
Scalar
External Force Y
No
Yes
126
Scalar
External Force Z
No
Yes
127
Scalar
Reaction Force X
No
Yes
128
Scalar
Reaction Force Y
No
Yes
129
Scalar
Reaction Force Z
No
Yes
* All mechanical nodal quantities are defined in the global coordinate system, except those tagged with
(Local). The latter are defined in the local coordinate systems of the nodes, if such coordinate systems
have been defined by the TRANSFORMATION or the COORD SYSTEM model definition option or in
the global system, otherwise.
COUPLING REGION 1400

Table 3-15
Nodal Quantities* (continued)
Quantity ID
Dimension
161
Scalar
162
Description
Put
Get
Displacement X (Local)
Yes
Yes
Scalar
Displacement Y (Local)
Yes
Yes
163
Scalar
Displacement Z (Local)
Yes
Yes
164
Scalar
External Force X (Local)
Yes
Yes
165
Scalar
External Force Y (Local)
Yes
Yes
166
Scalar
External Force Z (Local)
Yes
Yes
167
Scalar
Reaction Force X (Local)
No
Yes
168
Scalar
Reaction Force Y (Local)
No
Yes
169
Scalar
Reaction Force Z (Local)
No
Yes
201
Scalar
Temperature
Yes
Yes
202
Scalar
External Heat Flux
Yes
Yes
203
Scalar
Reaction Heat Flux
No
Yes
* All mechanical nodal quantities are defined in the global coordinate system, except those tagged with
(Local). The latter are defined in the local coordinate systems of the nodes, if such coordinate systems
have been defined by the TRANSFORMATION or the COORD SYSTEM model definition option or in
the global system, otherwise.
Table 3-16
Edge/Face Quantities
Quantity ID
Dimension
1101
Scalar
1102
Put
Get
Total Pressure
Yes
No
Vector
Total Traction
Yes
No
1201
Scalar
Heat Flux Density
Yes
No
1202
Scalar
Film Coefficient
Yes
No
1203
Scalar
Environment Temperature
Yes
No
Put
Get
Table 3-17
Description
Element Quantities
Quantity ID
Dimension
Description
10101
Vector
Volume Load
Yes
No
10131
Scalar
Volume Load X
Yes
No
10132
Scalar
Volume Load Y
Yes
No
10133
Scalar
Volume Load Z
Yes
No
1401 FIXED DISP (Fluid)

FIXED DISP (Fluid)
input style.
Description
This data defines the fixed displacement that each specified degree of freedom must take during the first
and subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the DISP CHANGE option. The boundary
conditions are specified either by giving the kinematic displacement and a list of degrees of freedom and
a list of nodal numbers or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation
(MESH2D).
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
required in this option block.
11-15
3rd
model definition data must be arranged accordingly.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

4.
21-30
3rd

A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified. Third data
block is read as 8E10.3.
FIXED DISP (Fluid) 1402

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Note:
5th data block

1403 FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid)

Define Fixed Velocity
Description
This data block defines potential fixed velocity, including the magnitude, degrees of freedom and applied
locations, and associates it with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition is activated or
deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The boundary conditions are
specified either by giving the velocity, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of nodal numbers or
a list of surfaces. The prescribed velocities are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the
element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the
TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, or UTRANFORM options.
The FORCDT user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter nonuniform
time-dependent boundary conditions.
Note:
In steady state analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to
remove all rigid body modes.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FIXED VELOCITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT user subroutine are required for this boundary
condition.
FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid) 1404

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
will be referenced by the LOADCASE history definition option.

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

8.
21-30
3rd


1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6th data block

Note:
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
1405 FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

7th data block.
FIXED VELOCITY 1406

FIXED VELOCITY
input style.
Description
This data defines the fixed velocity that each specified degree of freedom must take during the first and
subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the VELOCITY CHANGE option in a fluid
analysis. The boundary conditions are specified either by giving the kinematic velocity and a list of
degrees of freedom and a list of nodal numbers or by the input of boundary conditions generated during
mesh generation (MESH2D).
Note:
In steady state analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to
remove all rigid body modes.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FIXED VELOCITY.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
required in this option block.
11-15
3rd
model definition data must be arranged accordingly.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed velocity for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed velocity for second degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed velocity for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
1407 FIXED VELOCITY

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed velocities
are prescribed.
Note:
5th data block

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid) 1408

Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input Fluid)
Description
This option is used to define the fluid properties for all of the elements. To define the dependence of these
properties on temperature, use the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st

(optional).
6-10
2nd
The 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8th data blocks should be entered as pairs, one for each distinct data
block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1,2,3, etc.).
6-10
2nd
Enter the word FLUID if fluid-solid interaction and this is a fluid region.
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Enter the reference value of the mass density of the fluid.
31-40
4th
Enter the coefficient of volumetric expansion.
5th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Table ID for coefficient of volumetric expansion.
1409 ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

Necessary only in a coupled fluid-thermal analysis or a fluid-thermal-solid analysis.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Reference temperature.
7th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
8th data block

3 applies.
ISOTROPIC (Fluid) 1410

ISOTROPIC (Fluid)
input style.
Description
This option is used to define the fluid properties for all of the elements. To define the dependence of these
properties on temperature, use the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st

(optional).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
For temperature dependent properties, these are values corresponding to

the first (lowest temperature) breakpoint (see TEMPERATURE EFFECTS
option). A temperature dependent property is undefined below its lowest
breakpoint.
6-10
2nd
The 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks should be entered as pairs, one for each distinct data block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Material identification number (1,2,3, etc.) for cross-reference to

6-10
2nd
Enter the word FLUID if fluid-solid interaction and this is a fluid region.
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Enter the reference value of the mass density of the fluid.
31-40
4th
Enter the coefficient of volumetric expansion.
1411 ISOTROPIC (Fluid)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

Necessary only in a coupled fluid-thermal analysis or a fluid-thermal-solid analysis.
1-10
1st
Thermal conductivity
11-20
2nd
Specific heat.
21-30
3rd
Mass density (heat transfer analysis)
31-40
4th
Reference temperature.
6th data block

3 applies.
STRAIN RATE (Fluid) 1412

Define Strain Rate Dependent Viscosity
STRAIN RATE (Fluid)
Description
This option allows the definition of a strain rate dependent viscosity for use in fluid flow problems. It
also allows specification of different non-Newtonian viscosity models. The zero strain rate viscosity is
given on the ISOTROPIC option. This option must be repeated for each different material for which strain
rate data is necessary. The yield stress variation with strain rate is given using the following options:
a. The breakpoints and slopes for a piecewise linear approximation to the viscosity strain rate
curve are given. The strain rate breakpoints should be in ascending order, or
b. The viscosity and stain rate data points lying on the viscosity strain rate curve are input
directly. The data is entered in ascending order of strain rate. This method is flagged by
entering the word DATA on the first data block.
c. Bingham Fluid enter 3 in the fourth field on the second data block.
d. Fluid in the form of Power Law Relation enter 4 in the fourth field on the second data block.
e. Fluid in the form of Generalized Power Law Relation enter 5 in the fourth field on the second
data block.
f. Fluid in the form of Carreau Model - enter 6 in the fourth field on the second data block.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the words STRAIN RATE.
13-80
2nd
For option A, enter the number of slopes of viscosity versus strain

rate curve.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
For option B, enter the number of data points.

For other options, enter 0.
6-10
2nd

ISOTROPICAlphaList.1+option.
11-15
3rd
Unit number for input of the set of this block. Defaults to blocks.
16-20
4th
Non-Newtonian Viscosity Model type.

Enter 0 for piecewise linear (use data block 3a or 3b).
Enter 3 for Bingham Fluid (use data block 3c).
1413 STRAIN RATE (Fluid)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 4 for Power Law Relation (use data block 3d).
Enter 5 for Generalized Power Law Relation (use data block 3e).
Enter 6 for Carreau model (use data block 3f).
3a data block
Data block 3a is used in conjunction with piecewise representations, Option A. The number of blocks
in this series is equal to that given in the first field of data block 2.
1-10
1st
Enter the slope of the viscosity versus strain rate curve.
11-20
2nd
Enter the strain rate value above which the above slope becomes
operational. Note, the first strain rate breakpoint must be zero.
3b data block
Data block 3b is used in conjunction with piecewise representation, Option B.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the associated strain rate. Note that the first strain-rate must be zero.
3c data block
Data block 3c is used for Bingham Fluid.
1-10
1st
Enter the value of g (stress; ij = o ij + g ij if g ; ij = 0 if g ).
3d data block
Data block 3d is used for Power Law Relation Fluid.
n 1
1-10
1st
Enter the value of K (stress; ij = o K
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of N (power; see above equation).
21-30
3rd
Enter the value of o . (cutoff shear rate; see above equation).
3e data block
Data block 3e is used for Generalized Power Law Relation Fluid.
1-10
1st
Enter the value of K.
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of N.
21-30
3rd
Enter the value of o .
31-40
4th
Enter the value of A1.
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
then
ij ).
STRAIN RATE (Fluid) 1414

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
pow = N + A3 * log + A4 T
pow
' ij = o K
exp A1 * T + A2 * T 2 ij
3f data block
Data block 3f is used for Carreau Model Fluid.
2
n 1 2
1-10
1st
Enter the value of (time constant); = + o 1 + 2
11-20
2nd
Enter the value of n (power; see above equation).
21-30
3rd
Enter the value of (infinite shear viscosity; see above equation).
).
1415 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal)

Temperature Effects in Coupled Fluid-Thermal Analysis
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled FluidThermal)
Temperature Effects in Coupled

Fluid-Thermal Analysis
input style. This option is not available with the table driven input; use the
TABLE model definition option instead.
Description
This option defines the variation of material properties (viscosity, thermal conductivity, specific heat)
with temperature for the fluid region. The values read in through the ISOTROPIC option are those at the
lowest temperature specified. Properties are not defined below the lowest temperature. The temperature
dependency can be entered using one of the following two options:
entering the word DATA on the 1st data line.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-19
1st
21-80
2nd
For option A, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, 5a, 6a, 7a and 8a. For option B, use data blocks 2b, 3b, 4b, 5b,
6b, 7b and 8b, below.
Option A
2a data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Number of slopes of viscosity versus temperature curve.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Number of slopes of conductivity versus temperature curve
36-40
8th
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal) 1416

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-45
9th
46-50
10th
Number of slopes of emissivity versus temperature curve.
51-55
11th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
12th

ISOTROPIC option.
61-65
13th
3a data block
Slopes/breakpoints for viscosity versus temperature curve. The number in the fifth field of data line 2
defines the number of data lines required in data block 3.
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of viscosity versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
4a data block
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of conductivity versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
5a data block
1-15
1st
Enter the slope of specific heat versus temperature curve.
16-30
2nd
Temperature above which this slope becomes operative.
6a data block
Latent heat. Number of data lines given on data line 2, ninth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the latent heat.
16-30
2nd
31-45
3rd
Option B
2b data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Number of data points on the viscosity versus temperature curve for

powder materials.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
1417 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
41-45
9th
46-50
10th
Number of data points on the emissivity versus temperature curve.
51-55
11th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
12th

ISOTROPIC option.
61-65
13th
3b data block
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
4b data block
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
5b data block
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd
6b data block
Latent heat. Number of data lines as given on data line 2, ninth field.
1-15
1st
Enter the value of the latent heat.
16-30
2nd
31-45
3rd
7b data block
1-15
1st
16-30
2nd

Note:

end of the increment.
CONTROL (Fluid) 1418

Control Option for Fluid Analysis or Fluid-Thermal Analysis
CONTROL (Fluid)
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for
fluid analysis.
For coupled fluid-thermal analysis, data block 4 must be used in addition to the 3rd data block.
For nonlinear analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. They
do not appear on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st

restart is being used.
6-10
2nd
Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment. Default is

3.
If a negative number is entered, then Marc does a maximum of the absolute
value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is given
and Marc proceeds to the next increment. This is not recommended.
11-15
3rd
Minimum number of recycles during an increment. Default is 0. Note that

this data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all
16-20
4th

0 or left blank Testing is done on residuals.
1 Testing is done on velocities.
Note:
Testing on relative velocity always requires at least one iteration.

If nonlinear analysis is done with the CENTROID parameter, the
residuals are not calculated and testing is always done on
velocities.
Fluid analysis with the CENTROID parameter is
not recommended.
1419 CONTROL (Fluid)

Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Flag to specify relative or absolute error testing. If equal to 0, testing is

done on relative error. If equal to 1, testing is done on absolute value.
If set to 2, testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or
incremental velocities are below minimum value in which case absolute
tolerances testing is used.
26-30
6th

1. Full Newton-Raphson (default).
4. Direct substitution.
31-35
7th
Nonpositive definite flag. If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system

is forced. Default in fluid analysis.
36-40
8th
41-45
9th
3rd data block

1-10
1st

maximum reaction force. Default is 0.10.
If relative velocity checking:
Maximum allowable value of the change in velocity increment divided by
the velocity increment. Default is 0.10.
11-20
2nd

by the rotational increment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on
change in rotational increment occurs.
21-30
3rd

Minimum velocity, if velocity increment is less than this value, checking
CONTROL (Fluid) 1420

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Only necessary for coupled fluid-thermal analysis.
1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are reevaluated and matrices reassembled. Default value of 100.
21-30
3rd
Maximum error in temperature estimate used for property evaluation. This

control provides a recycling capability to improve accuracy in highly
1421 CONTROL (Fluid-Solid)

Control Option for Fluid-Stress or Fluid-Thermal-Stress Analysis
CONTROL (Fluid- Control Option for Fluid-Stress or Fluid-Thermal-Stress Analysis

Solid)
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for fluid-solid
or fluid-thermal-solid analysis.
For nonlinear analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: User Information. They do not appear
on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.
In fluid-solid or fluid-thermal-solid analysis, there are two areas of the model which are defined using
the REGION option. The data given here governs the convergence behavior in these regions. The 2nd and
3rd data blocks control the behavior in the solid region. The 4th and 5th data blocks control the behavior
for thermal analysis in either region. The 6th and 7th data blocks control the fluid behavior.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment for solid

region.
If a negative number is entered, then Marc does a maximum of the
absolute value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is
11-15
3rd

tangent modulus nonlinearities in solid region. Default is 0. Note that this
data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all subsequent
increments.
CONTROL (Fluid-Solid) 1422

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I

0 or left blank Testing is done on residuals.
1 Testing is done on displacements.
2 Testing is done on strain energy.
Note:

requires at least one iteration. If nonlinear analysis is done with
the CENTROID parameter, the residuals are not calculated and
testing is always done on displacements.
recommended.
21-25
26-30
5th
6th
Flag to specify relative or absolute error testing.

Equal to 0
Equal to 1
If set to 2
Testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or

incremental displacements are below minimum value
in which case absolute tolerances testing is used.

2. Modified Newton-Raphson (no reassembly
during iteration).
3. Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification.
8. Secant method.
31-35
7th

is forced. Note that with use of gap and Herrmann elements, the matrix
always is nonpositive definite and this entry has no significance.
36-40
8th
41-45
9th

Format
Fixed
Free
46-50
10th
Data
Entry Entry
I

initial = -fr p I
stiffness matrix, is the current stress tensor, fr is entered
pressure and I is a unit tensor.
51-65
11th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
12th

3rd data block

1-10
1st

If relative displacement checking:
divided by the displacement increment. Default is 0.10.
11-20
2nd


Format
Fixed
21-30
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
F

31-40
4th

Minimum moment: if moment is less than this value, checking is bypassed
or absolute testing is performed.
is bypassed.
41-50
5th

Maximum value of residual force. Default is 0.0 in which case, no
checking on residual force takes place.
If absolute displacement tasking:
Maximum value of displacement increment. Default is 0.0; in which case,
no checking on displacements takes place.
The 4th and 5th lines are used to control the thermal behavior. In an fluid-structure analysis (no
thermal), do not include these blocks.
4th data block
1-5
1st

being used.
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are reevaluated and matrices reassembled. Default value of 100.
21-30
3rd
Maximum error in temperature estimate used for property evaluation. This

control provides a recycling capability to improve accuracy in highly
6th data block

1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment.

If a negative number is entered, then Marc does a maximum of the
absolute value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is
11-15
3rd
Minimum number of recycles during an increment. Default is 0. Note that

this data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all subsequent
increments.
16-20
4th
Flag for convergence testing. If set to 0 or left blank, testing is done on

residuals. If set to one, testing is done on velocities. Note that testing on
relative velocity always requires at least one iteration. If nonlinear analysis
is done with the CENTROID parameter, the residuals are not calculated and
testing is always done on velocities. Note that fluid analysis with the
CENTROID parameter is not recommended.
21-25
5th
Flag to specify relative or absolute error testing. If equal to 0, testing is

done on relative error. If equal to 1, testing is done on absolute value.
If set to 2, testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or
incremental velocities are below minimum value in which case absolute
tolerances testing is used.
26-30
6th

4. Direct substitution.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-35
7th

is forced. Default in fluid analysis.
36-40
8th
41-45
9th
7th data block

1-10
1st

Maximum allowable value of the change in velocity increment divided by
the velocity increment. Default is 0.10.
11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

Minimum velocity, if velocity increment is less than this value, checking
1427 END OPTION

Model Definition Data End
END OPTION
Model Definition Data End
Description
This option is used to signify the end of all model definition data.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
Enter the words END OPTION.
Chapter 4 History Definition Options List
History Definition Options List
History Definition Option
Page
ACC CHANGE
1671
ACCUMULATE
1657
ACTIVATE
1577
ACTUATOR
1652
ADAPT GLOBAL
1496
ADD RIGID (2-D)
1596
ADD RIGID (3-D)
1611
ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D)
1590
1601
ANNEAL
1647
APPROACH
1644
ASSEM LOAD
1576
AUTO CREEP
1655
AUTO INCREMENT
1539
AUTO LOAD
1533
AUTO STEP
1544
AUTO THERM CREEP
1659
AUTO THERM
1557
1429
Page
B2GG, B2PP
1518
BEGIN SEQUENCE
1536
BUCKLE
1570
CHANGE PORE
1565
CHANGE RIGID
1582
CHANGE STATE
1559
COMMENT
1437
CONTACT NODE
1637
CONTACT TABLE
1630
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES
1621
CONTINUE
1751
CONTROL (Heat Transfer)
1707
CONTROL (Mechanical)
1463
CREEP INCREMENT
1654
DAMPING COMPONENTS
1716
DEACTIVATE
1578
DISP CHANGE
1521
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic)
1749
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric)
1731
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic)
1747
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating)
1674
1735
DIST FLUXES
1692
DIST LOADS
1527
DIST MASS (Diffusion)
1683
DIST SOURCES
1721
DMIG-OUT
1510
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic)
1668
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic)
1743
ELEMENT SORT
1456
EMCAPAC
1726
EMINDUC
1737
Chapter 4 History Definition Options List 1430
Page
EMLAMIN
1738
EMRESIS
1673
END SEQUENCE
1537
EXCLUDE
1651
EXTRAPOLATE
1658
FILMS
1711
FORCE MAGNETOSTATIC
1739
FOUNDATION
1581
GAP CHANGE
1525
GRID FORCE
1452
HARMONIC (Acoustic)
1723
HARMONIC (Dynamic)
1670
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic)
1742
INCLUDE
1440
INERTIA RELIEF
1534
K2GG, K2PP
1515
LOADCASE
1507
M2GG, M2PP
1517
MODAL SHAPE
1664
MOTION CHANGE
1638
MOVE
1645
NEW
1439
NO ELEM SORT
1458
NO NODE SORT
1461
NO PRINT
1447
NO PRINT CONTACT
1449
NO PRINT SPRING
1451
1431
Page
NO SUMMARY
1455
NODE SORT
1459
P2G
1519
PARAMETERS
1470
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric)
1730
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic)
1746
POINT CURRENT (Joule)
1675
POINT FLUX
1693
POINT LOAD
1531
POINT MASS (Diffusion)
1686
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic)
1722
POINT TEMP
1563
POROSITY CHANGE
1679
POST
1478
POST INCREMENT
1494
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric)
1728
POTENTIAL CHANGE
1744
PRESS CHANGE
1719
PRINT CHOICE
1441
PRINT CONTACT
1448
PRINT ELEMENT
1443
PRINT NODE
1445
PRINT SPRING
1450
PRINT VMASS
1462
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT
1538
RECOVER
1666
RELEASE NODE
1524
RELEASE
1643
RESET TIME
1569
RESTART INCREMENT
1495
SOLVER
1474
SPECTRUM
1669
Chapter 4 History Definition Options List 1432
Page
SPLINE
1649
SS-ROLLING
1640
STEADY STATE (Electrostatic)
1725
STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer)
1691
STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic)
1734
STIFFNS COMPONENTS
1717
SUMMARY
1454
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications)
1574
SUPERELEM
1572
SUPERPLASTIC
1553
SYNCHRONIZED
1648
TEMP CHANGE
1709
TERMINATE
1551
THERMAL LOADS
1555
THICKNS CHANGE
1715
TIME STEP
1568
TITLE
1438
TRANSIENT
1689
TYING CHANGE
1526
VELOCITY CHANGE
1712
VOID CHANGE
1681
VOLTAGE CHANGE
1676
WELD FILL
1704
WELD FLUX
1694
WELD PATH
1698

Chapter 4 History Definition Options
General Controls
Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis
Rate Dependent Analysis
Diffusion Analysis
Acoustic Analysis
1724
1727
1436
1520
1653
1698
1704
1718
1733
1741
1714
Chapter 4 History Definition Options 1434
The END OPTION ends the initial definition of the problem. All data subsequent to the END OPTION
is interpreted as history definition or mesh display options. The input data for the history options controls
the flow of Marc for the next loadcase which may consist of a single increment or multiple increments
in the case of automatic control of loading.
Facilities exist for changing the boundary conditions and the tying data. This new data is read in when
the analysis of the previous loadcase is complete. A CONTINUE option terminates the input and initiates
the analysis for the series of load increments corresponding to that input. The total number of increments
in the analysis (no table input) is controlled by the CONTROL option or by conditions set within these
options.
Elastic Analysis
When the ELASTIC parameter is includes, all boundary conditions applied are total values that are
applied in a single increment. Each loadcase would contain its own DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD,
THERMAL LOADS, or CHANGE STATE option and be completed by the CONTINUE option.
Mechanical, Acoustic, Piezoelectric or Electrostatic-Structural

or Electromagnetic Analyses
All quantities specified for the previous load increment are also applied in the increment unless it is
modified by the optional data described below. By judicious choice of the order of the load
incrementation options, you can apply many combinations of displacement, traction, and thermal load
vectors. You should note here that any new loads applied after the END OPTION are incremental and the
total load at the end of any increment corresponds to the zero increment load plus all load increments to
that point.
Caution:
You must ensure that you zero out load increments that are being switched off since Marc,
for some options, does not do this automatically.

For heat transfer analysis, total fluxes or temperatures should always be input, and the solution time
controlled by the TRANSIENT or AUTO STEP option.

In a bearing analysis, the lubricant thickness can be modified or the damping or stiffness behavior can
be obtained.
For electrostatic analysis, total charges or potentials should always be input, and the solution time
controlled by the STEADY STATE option.
For magnetostatic analysis, total currents or potentials should always be input, and the solution time
controlled by the STEADY STATE option.
Table Driven Boundary Conditions

When using the table driven boundary conditions, you always enter the total loads at the end of the
loadcase. This is done by having the boundary condition reference a table where one of the independent
variables is time, normalized time, increment number, or normalized increment number. For the case of
loadcases controlled by the arc-length method (AUTO INCREMENT), the independent variable should be
the loadcase number. The LOADCASE option is used to activate boundary conditions. If a boundary
condition is not named, it is deactivated.
Restart Considerations
If a restart is made from one of the increments generated by a multi-increment procedure such as AUTO
LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, TRANSIENT, AUTO STEP, AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO THERM, AUTO
CREEP, AUTO THERM CREEP, the rest of the increments associated with this procedure are
automatically completed before reading of new input. This can be avoided by using the REAUTO option.
The completion of an AUTO LOAD by a restart is done using the control parameters specified by Marc
used with the RESTART option.

General Controls
General Controls
This section describes modifications of program controls. The values given here override the values that
might have been previously specified either with the model definition options or prior load
incrementation data. Note that the CONTROL option is extremely important for specifying the
convergence and tolerance controls.
1437 COMMENT
Enter Comments
COMMENT
Enter Comments
Description
This option allows you to enter informative comments for your own benefit. These data blocks can
appear between parameters, model definition and history definition options.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word COMMENT.
11-80
2nd
User entered comment.
Alternate Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-1
1st
Enter the $ character.
2-80
2nd
User entered comment.
TITLE 1438
TITLE
Description
This option defines the output title. There is no limit to the number of the title data read in as long as the
word TITLE appears in the first field. However, only the last TITLE data is used as an output header. Due
to the free-format processor, do not place commas within the TITLE data (Columns 11-80).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word TITLE.
11-80
2nd
Enter the title to be output with results.
1439 NEW (History Definition)

Use New Format
NEW (History Definition)
Use New Format
Description
This option can be used to switch from input with extended format to the default width or vice-versa.
Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW history definition option is
encountered. This option must not appear embedded inside any history definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word NEW.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input.This will
override the EXTENDED parameter.
INCLUDE (History Definition) 1440

INCLUDE (History Definition)
Description
file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited
to 240 characters.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
11-80
2nd
Physical filename.
case sensitive.
1441 PRINT CHOICE (History Definition)

Define Data to be Printed
PRINT CHOICE (History Definition)
Description
This option allows you the control of the output from Marc. The data given here remains in control until
a subsequent PRINT CHOICE set is inserted such a set can be included with either the model definition
or with history definition set.
point or at the centroid only, depending on whether the ALL POINTS or CENTROID parameter is used.
For shells, only the extreme fibers are output, plus layers where the inelastic strains or state variables are
nonzero. For beams, fibers with inelastic strains or nonzero state variables are printed. In addition,
section forces are given for these elements. This option also allows debug output of certain items. The
default is no debug printout.
The PRINT CHOICE option has no effect on the postprocessor file (see Chapter 3).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of first and last element numbers to be printed

(maximum 10).
6-10
2nd

(maximum 10).
11-15
3rd

ALL POINTS is not flagged).
16-20
4th
Number of layers to be printed. This is for beams and shells only, and
21-25
5th
Increments between printout. Default is print every increment.
26-30
6th
Enter 1 for complex nodal quantities to be output as magnitude and phase;

otherwise, real and imaginary components are given.
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
Log File Flag: Enter unit number to which log file is to be written.
PRINT CHOICE (History Definition) 1442

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

Include only if the first field of 2nd data block is not zero.
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Etc.
Etc. in I5 format.
4th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Etc.
Etc. in I5 format.
5th data block

I
Enter the list of integration point to be printed in (16I5) format (number

of entries given in the third field of data block 2). This is only used if ALL
POINTS is flagged. Be careful with analyses with several different
element types.
6th data block

Include only if the fourth field of 2nd data block is not zero)
I
Enter the list of shell or beam fibers to be printed in (16I5) format. As this
over-rides the Marc default, you should be aware that you do not
unintentionally miss the plasticity or creep printout.
7th data block

Include only if the seventh field is not zero.
1-5
1st
Enter debug plot code. See the PRINT parameter.
1443 PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition)

PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition) Specify Elements to be Included in Output

Description
This option allows you to choose which elements, and what quantities associated with an element are to
be printed. If you do not specify NODE on the first data line, these values are at the integration points.
This option can be used to print response quantities for the first 28 integration points of any element. This
suffices for all elements, except continuum composite elements (types 149 - 154, 175 - 180) which can
have as many as 2040 integration points. For print-outs at integration point numbers greater than 28 for
continuum composite elements, use PRINT CHOICE. If you specify the word NODE, these values are the
extrapolated nodal values. This extrapolation is currently not available for rebar elements, composite
continuum elements, semi-infinite elements, or cavity elements.
Note:
PRINT ELEMENT and not followed by PRINT NODE results in the selected element
printout and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE with a blank node list to suppress
node output.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words PRINT ELEMENT.
11-20
2nd
Enter the word NODE (optional).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
File unit to which output is to be written. Defaults to standard output, unit

6.
Data blocks 3, 4, and, if necessary, 5 and 6 are given once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-80
1st

STRAIN
output total strain.
STRESS
output total stress.
PLASTIC
output plastic strain.
CREEP
THERMAL
output thermal strain
PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition) 1444

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
ENERGY
output of strain energy densities:

total strain energy
incremental total strain energy
total elastic strain energy
incremental elastic strain energy
incremental plastic strain energy
CRACK
output of cracking strain
CAUCHY
output Cauchy stress.
STATE
output state variables.
PREFER
output stresses in preferred system.
ELECTRIC
output electric field and electric flux
MAGNETIC output magnetic field and magnetic flux

CURRENT
output current
ALL
output of all of the above.
4th data block

Note:
To suppress all element print-out, enter a blank list for the list
of elements.
5th data block

If the NODE option is not specified on the 1st data block, enter a list of
integration points to be printed.
If the NODE option is specified on the 1 data block, enter a list of node
positions based upon the CONNECTIVITY option. These node positions
range from one to the maximum number of nodes per element.
6th data block
Enter a list of layers to be printed. This is only necessary if there are either
thin walled beam, shell, rebar, solid composite elements in the mesh, (that
is, element types 1, 4, 5, 8, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 22, 23, 24, 25, 45,46, 47,
48, 49, 50, 72, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 98, 138, 139, 140,
142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 165, 166,
167, 168, 169, 170, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180).
It is also necessary to include this data block if there are beam element
types 52 or 98 and they are used with integrated solid cross sections.
1445 PRINT NODE (History Definition)

Define Nodes and Nodal Quantities to be Printed
PRINT NODE (History

Definition)
Description
This option allows you to choose which nodes and what nodal quantities are to be printed. The average
nodal generalized stresses are obtained via an extrapolation and averaging procedure. If there is a
geometric or material discontinuity at a node, this value is not correct unless either double nodes were
used and kinematic tying, or you control which elements are to be averaged using the
PRINT ELEMENT feature.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words PRINT NODE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
File unit to which output is to be written. Default to standard output, unit 6.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-80
1st

INCR
output incremental displacement or potentials
TOTA
output total displacement or potentials
VELO
output velocity
ACCE
output acceleration
LOAD
output total applied load
REAC
output reaction/residual force
TEMP
output temperature
FLUX
output flux (Fluxes are only available if the HEAT, 0, 0, 2

parameter is used.)
MODE
output eigenvector (modal or buckle)
STRESS output average generalized stresses at nodes
PRINT NODE (History Definition) 1446

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
VOLT
output voltage (Joule analysis)
PRES
output pressure (bearing analysis)
COOR
output coordinates (only for rezoning)
ALL
output all relevant quantities
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to be printed. To suppress all nodal printout, enter a
blank list for the list of nodes.
1447 NO PRINT (History Definition)

Suppress Printing
NO PRINT (History Definition)
Suppress Printing
Description
This option suppresses element and nodal output. This option is revoked by using either the PRINT
CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, or PRINT NODE option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO PRINT.
PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) 1448

PRINT CONTACT (History Definition)
Description
This option ensures that the summary of contact information for each body is printed to the output file
even if the NO PRINT option is activated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words PRINT CONTACT.
1449 NO PRINT CONTACT (History Definition)

NO PRINT CONTACT (History

Definition)
Description
This option deactivates the output of the summary of contact information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO PRINT CONTACT.
PRINT SPRING (History Definition) 1450

PRINT SPRING (History Definition)

Description
This option controls the output for selected springs.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PRINT SPRING.
2nd data block

Enter a list of springs to be printed
1451 NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition)

NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition)
Description
This options suppresses the output of spring results.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word NO PRINT SPRING.
GRID FORCE (History Definition) 1452

GRID FORCE (History Definition) Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level
This option allows the user to output the contributions to the nodal force at either an element level or a
nodal level. This is useful when constructing a free body diagram of part of the structure. The Marc for
grid force balance is with respect to the global coordinate system. In Marc, the following contributions
are considered:
On an element level the grid force balance is based upon the
Internal Forces
Distributed Loads
Foundation Forces
Reaction Force
On a nodal basis it is much more complete and includes
Internal Forces
Distributed + Point Forces
Foundation Forces
Spring Forces
Contact Normal Forces
Contact Friction Forces
Tying/MPC Forces
Inertia Forces
Damping Forces
DMIG Forces
Reaction Force
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word GRID FORCE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Frequency (increments) between writing out the grid forces.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if force output is based upon elements.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if force output is based upon nodes.
16-20
4th
Enter 0 if grid force output is to be written to standard output (default).

Enter 1 if grid force output is to be written to file jid.grd.
21-25
5th
Enter the number of times that grid force should be output in a load case;
if 1 is entered, the output will occur at the last increment of the load case.
3rd and 4th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)
1453 GRID FORCE (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-10
1st
4th data block

1-80
Enter a list of elements for which grid force output will be done
5th data block
1-10
1st
6th data block

1-80
Enter a list of bodies, grid force on an element level will be given for
elements in these bodies.
7th data block
1-10
1st
8th data block

1-80
Enter a list of nodes for which forces will be output on a nodal basis.
SUMMARY (History Definition) 1454

SUMMARY (History Definition)
Description
This option produces a summary of the results of the increment and outputs them in a report format. This
option is in effect until a NO SUMMARY option is encountered. The summary consists of the maximum
and minimum of temperatures, stresses, strains, plastic strains, creep strains, displacements, velocities,
accelerations and reaction forces. The option also produces a detailed accounting of both the memory
usage and timing information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SUMMARY.
11-15
2nd
Enter the unit number to be used for output.

Default is standard output, unit 6.
16-20
3rd
Enter the increment frequency of summary.

Default is every increment.
1455 NO SUMMARY (History Definition)

Suppress Summary
NO SUMMARY (History Definition)
Suppress Summary
Description
This option turns off the summary feature. The default is off unless the SUMMARY option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO SUMMARY.
ELEMENT SORT (History Definition) 1456

Sort Elements for Report
ELEMENT SORT (History Definition)
Description
This option allows various element quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This
option is in effect until a NO ELEM SORT option is encountered. This option allows you to sort either in
ascending or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute
value. A range can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ELEM SORT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block, as given

below, defines each sort.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output,
unit 6.
16-20
4th
3rd data block

The 3rd data block is repeated once for each sort.
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Default is 0; sort in descending order.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value.

Enter 0 for sort by absolute value. Default is 0; sort by absolute value.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Enter lowest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.
26-30
6th
Enter highest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last

element in mesh.
1457 ELEMENT SORT (History Definition)

Table 4-1
Element Sort Codes
Code
Description
Code
Description
1 first stress
28 fourth plastic strain
2 second stress
29 fifth plastic strain
3 third stress
30 sixth plastic strain
4 fourth stress
31 equivalent plastic strain
5 fifth stress
32 mean plastic strain
6 sixth stress
33 Tresca plastic strain
7 equivalent stress
34 first principal plastic strain
8 mean stress
35 second principal plastic strain
9 Tresca stress
36 third principal plastic strain
10 first principal stress
37 first creep strain
11 second principal stress
38 second creep strain
12 third principal stress
39 third creep strain
13 first strain
40 fourth creep strain
14 second strain
41 fifth creep strain
15 third strain
42 sixth creep strain
16 fourth strain
43 equivalent creep strain
17 fifth strain
44 mean creep strain
18 sixth strain
45 Tresca creep strain
19 equivalent strain
46 first principal creep strain
20 mean strain
47 second principal creep strain
21 Tresca strain
48 third principal creep strain
22 first principal strain
49 temperature
23 second principal strain
61 voltage
24 third principal strain
73 first gradient
25 first plastic strain
74 second gradient
26 second plastic strain
75 third gradient
27 third plastic strain
NO ELEM SORT (History Definition) 1458

NO ELEM SORT (History Definition)
Description
This option turns off the ELEM SORT feature. The default is off unless the ELEM SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO ELEM SORT.
1459 NODE SORT (History Definition)

Sort Nodal Results
NODE SORT (History Definition)
Sort Nodal Results
Description
This option allows various nodal quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This option
is in effect until a NO NODE SORT is encountered. NODE SORT allows you to sort either in ascending
or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute value. A range
can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NODE SORT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block as given

below defines each sort.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
6.
16-20
4th
3rd data block

The 3rd data block is entered once for each sort.
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Default is 0, sort in descending value.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value. Enter 0 for sort by absolute value.
Default is 0, sort by absolute value.
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
Enter lowest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.
26-30
6th
Enter highest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last node in

mesh.
NODE SORT (History Definition) 1460

Sort Nodal Results
Table 4-2
Code
Node Sort Codes

Meaning
1-12 sort code I
Result
Results in the Ith component of the incremental displacement to
be sorted.
13-34 sort code I +12
Results in the Ith component of the total displacement to be sorted.
Results in the Ith component of the velocity to be sorted.
Results in the Ith component of the acceleration to be sorted.
Results in the nodal temperature to be sorted.
Results in the Ith component of the reaction force to be sorted.
Results in the Ith component of the contact force to be sorted.
101 101
Sort on magnitude of incremental displacement.
102 102
Sort on magnitude of total displacement.
103 103
Sort on magnitude of velocity.
104 104
Sort on magnitude of acceleration.
105 105
Sort on magnitude of temperature.
106 106
Sort on magnitude of reaction force.
107 107
Sort on magnitude of contact force.
1461 NO NODE SORT (History Definition)

NO NODE SORT (History Definition)
Description
This option negates the NODE SORT option. The default is off unless the NODE SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words NO NODE SORT.
PRINT VMASS (History Definition) 1462

PRINT VMASS
(History Definition)
Description
This option allows you to obtain printed output of element volumes, masses, costs and strain energies.
Options are provided for you to print the total quantities for each group of elements and the quantities for
each element in the group or the total quantities for each group of elements only.
In order to have correct mass computations, mass density for each element must be entered through one
of the material options. In order to have the correct cost, the cost per unit mass or the cost per unit volume
must be defined through the ISOTROPIC/ORTHOTROPIC option. The total strain energy and the plastic
strain energy, if applicable, are printed. Note that volumes and masses for some special elements (for
example, gap element, semi-infinite element, etc.) is not be computed. These quantities can be written on
either standard output file unit 6, or your specified unit.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the words PRINT VMASS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets to be given below.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 for option to print only total volumes, masses, costs, and strain
energy for groups of elements. Default is 0.
11-15
3rd
File unit to which output is to be written; default to standard output, unit 6.
Either data block 3a or 3b may be used

3a data block
3b data block
Enter the negative of deformable body number (only one body number per
data block).
1463 CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition)

CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition) Control Option for Stress Analysis

Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for nonlinear
analysis. For heat transfer analysis, see the CONTROL (Heat Transfer) history definition option.
For coupled thermal-stress analysis, data block 6 must be used.
For coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, data block 7 must be used.
For nonlinear static analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
They do not appear on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st

restart is being used. If an ELASTIC parameter is included, this field is
ignored and all load cases are analyzed.
6-10
2nd
Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment for

plasticity, or other tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 3. This
should usually be increased to 10 for rigid-plastic flow option.
If a negative number is entered, Marc does a maximum of the absolute
value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is
11-15
3rd

tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 0.
Note:
This data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all
Caution: This value is overwritten by the PROPORTIONAL

INCREMENT option.
CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition) 1464

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I

0 or left blank Convergence is achieved when residuals satisfy
the criterion.
1 Convergence is achieved when displacements satisfy
the criterion.
2 Convergence is achieved when strain energy satisfies
the criteria.
4 Convergence is achieved when either residual or
5 Convergence is achieved when both residual and
Notes:

requires at least one iteration. If nonlinear analysis is done
with the CENTROID parameter, the residuals are not
calculated and testing is always done on displacements.
recommended.
If the fields are set as 0, 1, or 2, only the 3rd data block is
needed.
If the fields are set as 4 or 5, the 3a data block is also
needed. In this case, the 3rd data block is set for residual
testing and 3a data block is set for displacements
check only.
21-25
5th
Flag to specify relative or absolute error tolerance and whether checking

is on component values or magnitude of vector.
Enter imag+irel where:
Irel = 0
Irel = 1
Imag = 0
Component value
Imag = 10
Component values
Imag = 20
Use magnitude of vector
This entry is consistently used for displacements, rotations, forces, and

moment testing.

Format
Fixed
26-30
Free
6th
Data
Entry Entry
I

1 Full Newton-Raphson (default).
2 Modified Newton-Raphson (no reassembly
during iteration).
3 Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification (see
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information).
8 Secant method.
31-35
7th
Nonpositive definite flag.

If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system is forced.
Note:
With use of gap and Herrmann elements, the matrix always is

nonpositive definite and this entry has no significance.
36-40
8th
41-45
9th
46-50
10th

initial = f r p I

stiffness matrix, is the current stress tensor, f r is entered
pressure and I I is a unit tensor.
Besides faster convergence, this leads to a stable analysis
of very thin shell structures.

Format
Fixed
Free
51-55
11th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Control parameter:
0 Do not allow switching of convergence testing between
residuals and displacements.
1 Allow switching of convergence testing between residual
and displacements if reaction forces or displacements
become extremely small. For more details, see Marc
Note:
Set this parameter to 0 if any kind of absolute value testing is

being used.
56-60
12th

61-65
13th
For some material models, such as damage, cracking, and Chaboche,

there is an inner iteration loop to insure accuracy. The maximum number
of iterations allowed can be set here.
Default is 50.
3rd data block

Include if residual testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 0, 4, or 5.
1-10
1st

maximum reaction force.
Default is 0.10.
11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd

31-40
4th

Minimum moment: if moment is less than this value, checking is
bypassed or absolute testing is performed.
41-50
5th

Maximum value of residual force.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual force takes place.

Format
Fixed
51-60
Free
6th
Data
Entry Entry
F

Maximum value of residual moment.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual moments
takes place.
If absolute displacement testing, maximum value of rotation increment.
Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking or rotations take place.
61-70
7th

Notes:
4th data block

Include if displacement testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 1, 4, or 5.
1-10
1st

divided by the displacement increment.
Default is 0.10.
11-20
2nd

by the rotational increment.
Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on change in rotational
increment occurs.
21-30
3rd

31-40
4th

is bypassed.
41-50
5th
Maximum value of displacement increment.

Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on displacements takes place.
51-60
6th
Maximum value of rotation increment.

Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on rotations takes place.

Format
Fixed
61-70
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
F

Notes:
5th data block

Include if energy testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 2.
1-10
1st
Maximum allowable value of the change is energy increment.

Default is 0.1.
6th data block

Only necessary for coupled thermal-mechanical analysis.
1-10
1st

time step scheme for heat transfer.
11-20
2nd
Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are reevaluated and matrices reassembled.
21-30
3rd

boundary conditions).
Default is 0, which bypasses this test. Set to maximum temperature error
which is considered acceptable.
Note:
Only the temperature estimate error (3rd field) is checked for

the TRANSIENT NON AUTO fixed stepping procedure. All three
fields are checked for the transient adaptive stepping procedure.
None of the three fields are checked for the auto step adaptive
stepping procedure.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th


Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th

61-70
7th

71-80
8th

7th data block

Only necessary for coupled electrostatic structural analysis.
1-10
1st
Maximum allowed relative error in residual charge.
11-20
2nd
Maximum allowed absolute error in residual charge.
PARAMETERS (History Definition) 1470

PARAMETERS (History
Definition)
Description
There are many parameters that are used in the finite element calculations. These parameters can be
customized for your particular application. Some of these constants can be entered in other input blocks
as well. The last nonzero value is used for the calculation.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word PARAMETERS.
Enter the scale factor which, when multiplied with the incremental strain,
is used to predict the incremental strain in the next increment.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Default is 1.0.
11-20
2nd
Enter the multiplier used to calculate the penalty factor to impose

boundary conditions. The penalty factor is this multiplier times the
maximum diagonal value of the operator matrix. Default multiplier is
1 x 109. If the APPBC parameter is used, this option is not used.
21-30
3rd
Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in rigid plastic

analysis for plane strain, axisymmetric, or solid analysis when
displacement elements are used.
Default is 100.
31-40
4th
Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in fluid analysis

when displacement elements are used.
Default is 1 x 106.
41-50
5th
Beta parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmark-beta

procedure.
Default is 0.25.
51-60
6th
Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmarkbeta procedure.

Default is 0.50.
1471 PARAMETERS (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
61-70
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
E
Gamma1 parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step

Houbolt procedure.
Default is 1.5.
71-80
8th
Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step

Houbolt procedure.
Default is -0.5.
3rd data block

1-10
1st

becomes stuck in a concave corner for two-dimensional contact.
Default is 8.625.
11-20
2nd

becomes stuck in a concave corner for three-dimensional contact.
Default is 20.0.
21-30
3rd
Enter the initial strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.

31-40
4th
Enter the cutoff strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.

41-50
5th
Enter the fraction of the hydrostatic pressure that is subtracted from the
stress tensor in the initial stress calculation. See the tenth field of the
CONTROL option.
Default is 1.0
51-60
6th
Enter the factor used to calculate the drilling mode for shell elements type
22, 75, 138, 139, and 140.
Default is 0.0001.
61-70
7th
Enter the scale factor to the initial incremental displacements estimate for
the increment after a rezoning increment. The default value is 1.0, which
usually improves friction convergence, but may result in an inside-out
element.
PARAMETERS (History Definition) 1472

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Optional
1-10
1st
Universal gas constant (R). Default is 8.314 J mol-1K-1.
11-20
2nd
Offset temperature between user units and absolute temperature.

Default is 273.15; that is, user input in Centigrade.
If user temperature is in Kelvin (K) or Rankine (R), enter a negative value.
The offset temperature is then set to zero.
21-30
3rd
Thermal Properties Evaluation Weight.

Default is 0.5
31-40
4th
Surface projection factor for single step Houbolt.

Default is 0.0.
41-50
5th
Stefan Boltzmann Constant.

Default is 5.67051 x 10-8 W/m2K4.
51-60
6th
Planks second constant.

Default is 14387.69 MK.
61-70
7th
Speed of light in a vacuum.

Default is 2.9979 x 1014 M/s
71-80
8th
Maximum change in the incremental displacement in a Newton-Raphson

iteration.
Default is 1 x 1030.
5th data block

Optional
1-10
1st
Initial friction stiffness (only for friction models 6 and 7). This stiffness
will be used during the first cycle of an increment to define the friction
stiffness matrix in cases where a touching node has a zero normal force
and the amount of sliding does not exceed the elastic sticking limit.
If set to zero, Marc will estimate the initial friction stiffness based on
the initial average stiffness of the contact body to which the touching
node belongs.
11-20
2nd
Specifies the minimum value that indicates a singularity if a direct solver

is used. If a zero is given, that this value is set internally by Marc and
depends on the solver being used.
21-30
3rd
Specify the maximum change in temperature per iteration in radiation

simulations. This is useful to stabilize the solution. The default is 100.
1473 PARAMETERS (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
4th
Enter parameter alphaf for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.

Note that the value of alphaf defined here may be overruled by defining
41-50
5th
Enter parameter alpham for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.

Note that the value of alpham defined here may be overruled by defining
51-60
6th
Define the spectral radius S for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.
The following conventions apply:
0 S 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and alphaf and alpham
are calculated based upon the spectral radius according to

alphaf = - S /(1+ S ) and alpham = (1-2 S )/(1+ S )
S = 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and neither alphaf nor
alpham will be changed
and alpham will be optimized for a dynamic contact analysis
and alpham will be optimized for an analysis without dynamic
contact
S = 4 : use the values of alphaf and alpham as entered on the 4th
and 5th field

61-70
7th
RBE3 conditioning number. If the conditioning number is greater than

this value, the RBE3 is probably singular and a warning message is
printed. If the value is negative, the analysis is stopped. Default is 1 x 106.
6th data block

Optional
1-10
1st
Lowest temperature for elastic temperature dependent material check.
11-20
2nd
Highest temperature for elastic temperature dependent material check.
21-30
3rd
Permeability of vacuum.
Default is 0 = 1.25664 10 6 Hm 1
31-40
4th
Permittivity of vacuum.
Default is 0 = 8.85419 10 12 Fm 1
41-50
5th
Limit angle for segment-to-segment contact. If the angle between the

normal vectors of two segments is smaller than this limit angle, then these
segments will not come into contact. Default value is 120 degrees.
SOLVER (History Definition) 1474

SOLVER (History Definition)
Description
This option defines the solver to be used in the analysis. You can specify either the direct or iterative
solver. The choice of whether the in-core or out-of-core procedure is used is automatically determined
by Marc, based upon the amount of workspace required and the amount of memory that can be allocated.
You can also select whether a symmetric or nonsymmetric solver is used. Additionally, you can specify
if the solution of a nonpositive definite system is to be obtained.
For DDM, an out-of-core procedure is only available for solver type 8. As a convenience, it is necessary
to specify the control parameters for the decoupled pre-conditioner only in the first domain file.
When the iterative solver, type 2 or type 9, is chosen, additional parameters must be defined which are
used to control the accuracy.
Notes:It is not recommended to use the iterative solver type 2 for beam or shell models, because these
problems are ill conditioned, resulting in a large number of iterations. For a well-conditioned
system, the number of iterations should be less than the square root of the total number of degrees
of freedom in the system.
You control the maximum number of iterations allowed. If this is a positive number, Marc stops
if this is exceeded. If this is a negative number, Marc prints a warning and continues to the next
Newton-Raphson iteration or increment.
The Pardiso solver can only be used on shared memory computers.
The MUMPS solver can be used on either shared memory or distributed memory computers.
Solver types 6, 10, and 11 are not available on all hardware platforms. If the solver type is not
supported, solver type 8 is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
1st data block
1-10
1st
2nd data block
1-5
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word SOLVER.
Solver Type, enter:

0 for profile direct solver.
2 for sparse iterative.
4 for sparse direct solver
6 for hardware provided direct sparse solver
8 for multifrontal direct sparse solver.
1475 SOLVER (History Definition)

9 for CASI iterative solver.

10 for mixed direct/iterative solver.
11 for Pardiso parallel direct solver.
12 for MUMPS parallel direct solver
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 for solving a nonsymmetric system. Only available for solver

types 0, 8, 11 and 12. (Not supported for DDM.)
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if the solution of nonpositive definite system is to be obtained.
16-20
4th
Enter 0 if standard pre-conditioner is to be used with DDM (default).

Enter 1 if DDM is used and either the multifrontal or hardware provided
solver is to be used on the total global stiffness matrix.
Enter 3 if decoupled pre-conditioner is to be used with DDM.
Enter 4 if DDM is used and either the Pardiso or MUMPS parallel solver
is to be used on the total global stiffness matrix.
21-25
5th
Maximum number of iterations in inter-domain iterative solver (default

is 500)
26-30
6th
Size of domain overlap for parallel CASI solver, default is 2. A negative

number turns off the overlap.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Enter, in millions, the number of four-byte words to be used by solver type

6, 8, or 10 before going out-of-core. Default is the same behavior as for
other solvers. For solver type 6, this option is only available on SGI. For
solver type 8 or 10, it is available on all platforms.
41-45
9th
Not used; enter 0.
46-50
10th
Used for parallel CASI solver to input coarse preconditioner type.

Enter 0 to use coarse preconditioner (default).
Enter -1 to not use coarse preconditioner.
51-55
11th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
12th
Not used; enter 0.
61-65
13th
Not used; enter 0.
66-70
14th
Enter 1 to activate AUTOSPC when singularity occurs. This is only

applicable to the direct solvers except types 11 and 12.
Enter -1 to deactivate AUTOSPC.
71-75
15th
Not used; enter 0.
76-80
16th
For parallel CASI solver

Enter 1 for domain pre-conditioner (default)
Enter 2 for global preconditioner (uses more memory).
SOLVER (History Definition) 1476

The 3rd data block is only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9 (CASI). It may
also be used with the solver type 10.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter maximum number of conjugate-gradient iterations. Default is 1000.

For solver type 10, set to 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if the previous solution is to be used as the initial trial solution.
11-15
3rd
Solver type 2:
Enter 3 for diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 4 for scaled-diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 5 for incomplete Cholesky preconditioner.
Solver type 9:
Enter 0 for CASI Primal Preconditioner.
Enter 1 for CASI Standard Preconditioner.
Solver type 10:
Enter 0; not used.
The 4th data block is only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9 (CASI). It may
also be used with solver type 10 if the 3rd data block is also entered. It may be used with DDM if the
inter-domain iterative solver is used (pre-conditioner type 0 or 3) in the 4th field of the 2nd data block.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter tolerance on conjugate gradient convergence for stress analysis.

When using the multifrontal direct sparse solver, one can specify the number of threads when submitting
a job by using the nthread command line option. As an example, one would use:
where ntx is the number of threads.

When using the Pardiso solver, one needs to specify the number of threads when submitting a job by
using the nthread command line option. As an example, one would use:
When using the MUMPS parallel solver, one needs to specify the number of processors when submitting
a job by using the nsolver command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nsolver nsx
where nsx is the number of processors.
1477 SOLVER (History Definition)

It is also possible to use the MUMPS parallel solver in a distributed environment over several processors;
each of which has multiple threads. One would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nsolver nsx -nthread ntx.
When using the Pardiso solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:
SOLVER
11,0,0,4
Additionally, one needs to specify the number of threads when submitting a job by using the nthread
run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx -nthread ntx
where ndx is the number of domains and ntx is the number of threads.
When using the MUMPS parallel solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:
SOLVER
12,0,0,4
run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx -nsolver nsx
where nsx is the number of processors. If the nsolver option is not given, then nsx = ndx.
When using the CASI iterative solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:
SOLVER
9,0,0,0,0,2
run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx
POST (History Definition) 1478

POST (History Definition)
Description
This option creates a postprocessor file for time-history or variable versus variable plots using Marc
Mentat or your own postprocessing. In the latter case, the file is accessed via the PLDUMP utility given
in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
Note:
In a modal or buckling analysis in addition to POST option, the RECOVER history

definition option must be used for storing eigenvectors on post file.
Element data is written to the post file for each integration point of a continuum element or for the
integration points on the layer requested; unless, either the CENTROID parameter is used or the average
value is requested via the 14th field.
Note:
The stresses/strains are generally engineering stresses/strains in an analysis involving only

small deformations. In a geometrically nonlinear analysis, if the total Lagrangian
formulation is used, the stresses and the strains are the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress and
the Green-Lagrange strains, respectively. You can always request to output Cauchy stresses
(post code 41-47 and 341) in the post file. If the updated Lagrangian formulation is used in
the large deformation analysis, the stresses and the strains are generally Cauchy stresses
and the logarithmic strains, respectively.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-4
1st
Enter the word POST.
Number of element variables to be written on the file (optional)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
For heat transfer, by default, the temperatures are written to a post file.
Enter -1 to suppress the default.
Enter -2 if both element and nodal post codes are not changed in
this loadcase.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
1479 POST (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
8th
Not used; enter 0.
41-45
9th
Number of increments between writing of post data. Defaults to writing

to the post file every increment.
Enter -1 if the number of increments is not changed in this loadcase.
46-50
10th
Not used; enter 0.
51-55
11th
Enter 0 to use the elements in last post option.

Enter 1 to select elements to be written to post files.
Enter 2 for all elements to be written to post files.
56-60
12th
Not used; enter 0.
61-65
13th
Not used; enter 0.
66-70
14th
Enter 1 if per element only the average element integration point data
should be written on the post file. This might considerably reduce the size
of the post file, but some significant information might be lost.
The default is 0 where the element data is written on the post file for all
available integration points.
Only needed if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is not a -2.
71-75
15th
Enter 1 if automatically generated extra nodes associated with element

types 80-84 and 155-157 do not appear on the post file.
The default is 0, where all the available nodes are written on the post file.
76-80
16th
Enter 1 to exclude forces caused by glued contact from the contact normal
and friction forces.
The default is 0 where the contact normal and friction forces also contain
the contributions due to glued contact.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are used for input of variables to be written on the post file. They are only needed
if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is not -2.
3rd data block
Use for defining element post codes.
1-10
1st
11-15
2nd

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter the layer number for shell elements or continuum

composite elements.
rebar layer
21-68
4th
postprocessing.
4th data block

Use for defining nodal post codes.
1-10
1st
11-15
2nd
Enter a nodal post code. The code numbers are described in Table 4-4.
16-63
3rd
postprocessing.
Data blocks 5, 6, and 7 are only needed if the 11th field of the 2nd data block is 1.
5a data block
1-10
1st
Enter a list of elements to be written to post file.
5b data block
1-80
1st
6a data block
1-10
1st
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if all elements of the selected contact body are placed on post file
(default)
Enter 2 if only the elements on the exterior surface are placed on the
post file.
6b data block
1-80
Enter a list of contact bodies, for which the elements are to be written to
post file.
For the 7th data block, these nodes are in addition to nodes based upon element selection; typically, it
is used for nodes not associated with elements.
7a data block
1-10
1st
Enter a list of nodes to be written to post file.
7b data block
1-80

Table 4-3
Element Post Codes
Codes
Description
1-6
Components of strain. For rigid-perfectly plastic flow problems, components of strain rate
Equivalent plastic strain (integral of equivalent plastic strain rate). For rigid-perfectly
plastic flow problems, equivalent plastic strain rate
Equivalent creep strain (integral of equivalent creep strain rate)
Total temperature
10
Increment of temperature
11-16
Components of stress
17
Equivalent von Mises stress
18
Mean normal stress (tensile positive) for Mohr-Coulomb
19
20
Thickness of element
21-26
Components of plastic strain
27
2
--- ijp ijp
3
Equivalent plastic strain. =
28
Plastic strain rate
29
Total value of second state variable
30
Forming Limit Parameter: FLP = calculated major engineering strain/maximum major

engineering strain
31-36
Components of creep strain
37
Equivalent creep strain. =
38
Total swelling strain (from the VSWELL user subroutine)
39
Total value of third state variable
41-46
Components of Cauchy stress
47
Equivalent Cauchy stress
48
Strain energy density
49
Thickness strain for plane stress: Mooney or Ogden material
51-56
Real components of harmonic stress
57
Equivalent real harmonic stress
58
Elastic strain energy density
59
Equivalent stress/yield stress
60
Equivalent stress/yield stress (at current temperatures)
2
--- ijc ijc
3

Table 4-3
Codes
Description
61-66
Imaginary components of harmonic stress
67
Equivalent imaginary harmonic stress
68
Plastic strain energy density
69
Current volume
71-76
Components of thermal strain
78
Original volume
79
Grain size
80
Damage indicator for Cockroft-Latham, Oyane, and Principal Stress criteria, and criteria
using the UDAMAGE_INDICATOR user subroutine.
81-86
Components of cracking strain (only for stress analysis)
91-107
Failure indices associated with failure criteria
108-109
Interlaminar shear for thick composite shells (TSHEAR parameter must be present)
110
Interlaminar shear bond index for thick composite shells (only available if TSHEAR
parameter is present and Allowable Shear Bond Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the
COMPOSITE option) = max(Interlaminar shear components given by post codes 108 and
109)/SB
111-116
Components of stress in preferred coordinate system defined by the ORIENTATION option
121-126
Elastic strain
127
Equivalent elastic strain
128
Major engineering strain
129
Minor engineering strain
175
Equivalent viscoplastic strain rate (powder material)
176
Relative density (powder material) (Total volumetric strain based)
177
Void volume fraction (damage model)
178
Lemaitre damage factor
179
Lemaitre relative damage
189
Fictive temperature for Narayanaswamy Shift Function for thermal rheologically simple
viscoelastic material
<0
241
Gasket Pressure
242
Gasket Closure
243
Plastic Gasket Closure

Table 4-3
Codes
Description
244
Exponential powder parameter ()
245
Exponential powder parameter (x)
246
Current relative density based off total volumetric strain.
251
Global components of Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1
254
Global components of Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1
257
Interlaminar shear bond index for composite solids (only available if Allowable Shear Bond
Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the COMPOSITE option) = magnitude of interlaminar
shear vector calculated by post code 254/SB
261
Beam axis (required if beam moment plots are created with Marc Mentat). Orientation axis
of CBUSH/CFAST elements 194 and 195.
264
Axial Force (for beam elements)
265
Moment Mxx (for beam elements)
266
Moment Myy (for beam elements)
267
Shear Force Vxz (for beam elements)
268
Shear Force Vyz (for beam elements)
269
Torque (for beam elements)
270
Bimoment (for beam elements)
301
Total strains tensor
311
Stress tensor
321
Plastic strain tensor
331
Creep strain tensor
341
Cauchy stress tensor
351
Real harmonic stress tensor
361
Imaginary harmonic stress tensor
371
Thermal strain tensor
381
Cracking strain tensor
391
Stresses in preferred direction tensor
401
Elastic strain tensor
411
Stress in global coordinate system tensor
421
Elastic strain in global coordinate system tensor
431
Plastic strain in global coordinate system tensor
441
Creep strain in global coordinate system tensor

Table 4-3
Codes
Description
451
Velocity strains (for fluids)
461
Elastic strain in preferred direction tensor
471
Global components of the rebar stresses in the undeformed configuration

(Second Piola-Kirchhoff). See Marc Volume B: Element Library for details.
481
Global components of the rebar stress in the deformed configuration (Cauchy). See Marc
Volume B: Element Library for details.
487
Rebar angle.
491
Stress-based error estimates.
492
Strain-based error estimates.
493
Plastic strain-based error estimates.
494
Creep strain-based error estimates.
501
Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element
Library for details.
511
Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element Library
for details.
531
Volume fraction of Martensite.
541
Phase transformation strain tensor.
547
Equivalent Phase Transformation strain

PH =
eq
548
Equivalent TWIN Strain

TWIN =
eq
549
2 3 ijTWIN ijTWIN
Equivalent TRIP Strain in the forward transformation

TRIP =
eq
551
2 3 ijPH ijPH
2 3 ijTRIP ijTRIP
Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Multiphase Aggregate:

PL =
eq
2 3 ijPL ijPL
552
Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Austenite
553
Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Martensite
557
Yield Stress of Multiphase Aggregate
601-617
Strength ratios based upon FAIL DATA failure modes.
621
Real Harmonic Strain Tensor

Table 4-3
Codes
Description
627
Equivalent Real Harmonic Strain
631
Imaginary Harmonic Strain Tensor
637
Equivalent Imaginary Harmonic Strain
641
Real Harmonic Curvature Tensor (for shell elements)
651
Imaginary Harmonic Curvature Tensor (for shell elements)
661
Real Harmonic Moment Tensor (for shell elements)
671
Imaginary Harmonic Moment Tensor (for shell elements)
681
Logarithmic Strain Tensor (for continuum elements)
691
694
697
Layer Orientation Angle
704
Real Harmonic Axial Force (for beam elements)
705
Real Harmonic Moment Mxx (for beam elements)
706
Real Harmonic Moment Myy (for beam elements)
707
Real Harmonic Shear Force Vxz (for beam elements)
708
Real Harmonic Shear Force Vyz (for beam elements)
709
Real Harmonic Torque (for beam elements)
710
Real Harmonic Bimoment (for beam elements)
714
Imaginary Component of Harmonic Axial Force (for beam elements)
715
Imaginary Component of Harmonic Moment Mxx (for beam elements)
716
Imaginary Component of Harmonic Moment Myy (for beam elements)
717
Imaginary Component of Harmonic Shear Force Vxz (for beam elements)
718
Imaginary Harmonic Shear Force Vyz (for beam elements)
719
Imaginary Harmonic Torque (for beam elements)
720
Imaginary Harmonic Bimoment (for beam elements)
721
Cauchy Stress in Preferred Coordinate System Tensor
731
Curvature Tensor (for shell elements)
741
Moment Tensor (for shell elements)

Table 4-3
Codes
Description
Post Codes for Heat Transfer Analysis

9 or 180
Total temperature
181-183
Components of temperature gradient T
184-186
Components of flux
271
Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysised solid (model C) or nonhomogeneous density
272
Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysis gas (model C)
273
Volumetric Mass density of liquid (model C)
274
275
276
277
278
279
g w
280
mg
281
s p
282
s l
283
s c
eff
eff
Pyrolysis Volumetric Mass density of water vapor
Post Codes for Bearing Analysis

190
Pressure
191-193
194-196
Mass flux vector
Post Codes for Joule Heating Analysis

87
Voltage
88
Current density (per unit of cross sectional area)
89
Thermal energy density (from electric current)
197-199
Components of electric potential gradient
577-579
Components of current density
Post Codes for Acoustic Analysis

190
Pressure
191-193

Table 4-3
Codes
Description
Post Codes for Electrostatic Analysis

130
Electric potential (V)
561-563
564-566
Post Codes for Magnetostatic Analysis

140
Magnetic potential (2-D analysis only) (Az)
570
Lamination loss
571-573
574-576
Post Codes for Magnetostatic Thermal Analysis

89
Thermal energy density (from electric current and lamination loss)
570
Lamination loss
Post Codes for Transient Electromagnetic Analysis

561-563
564-566
567-569
Components of Lorentz force (force per unit volume)
571-573
574-576
577-579
Components of current density (J)
Post Codes for Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis

131-133
134-136
137-139
Real components of Lorentz force (force per unit volume)
141-143
Real components of magnetic induction (B)
144-146
Real components of magnetic field intensity (H)
147-149
Real components of current density (J)
151-153
154-156
157-159
Imaginary components of Lorentz force (force per unit volume)

Table 4-3
Codes
Description
161-163
Imaginary components of magnetic induction (B)
164-166
Imaginary components of magnetic field intensity (H)
167-169
Imaginary components of current density (J)
Post Codes for Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)

561-563
564-566
Post Codes for Harmonic Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)

131-133
134-136
151-153
154-156
Post Codes for Soil Analysis

171
Porosity
172
Void ratio
173
Pore pressure
174
Preconsolidation pressure
Post Codes for Cure and Cure Shrinkage Analysis

285
Degree of cure
286
Total cure reaction heat
287
Degree of cure shrinkage
288
Volumetric cure shrinkage of resin
289-294
Cure shrinkage strain components in global coordinate system
295-300
Cure shrinkage strain components in preferred coordinate system
581-586
Cure shrinkage strain tensor in global coordinate system
591-596
Cure shrinkage strain tensor in preferred coordinate system
Notes:
For heat transfer, code 9 is used for all heat transfer elements.
When using shells in heat transfer, it is important to enter a code for each layer in
chronological order if post file is to be correctly read by the INITIAL STATE or CHANGE
STATE options.

Note that you do not need to select nodal values (that is, displacement, velocities and
accelerations, and temperature for a heat transfer run) as these are automatically written to
the post file.
Eigenmodes (dynamic analysis) and eigenvectors (buckling analysis) are written to
the post file only if indicated by the RECOVER or MODAL
INCREMENT/BUCKLE INCREMENT option.
Note that post codes 91-107 refer to failure indices for different failure criteria and post
codes 601-617 refer to associated strength ratios. More than 17 quantities are allowed in
the analysis but only the first 17 quantities are available for postprocessing. For example.
if three failure criteria (say, max. stress, Hoffman and Puck) are flagged, post codes 9197/601-607 would contain the six indices/ratios associated with maximum stress, post code
98 / 608 would contain the one index / ratio associated with Hoffman and post codes 99103 / 609-613 would contain the five indices / ratios associated with Puck criterion.
Post codes 691 and 694 provide access to the first and second orientation vectors
respectively. These vectors depict the alignment of the material coordinate system at the
element level with respect to the global cartesian system. They are available for elements
that are either composites, or using materials that are orthotropic/anisotropic / requiring the
HOOKLW ANELAS user subroutines, or using the ORIENTATION option to identify the
material coordinate system. Note that these element orientation vectors are averaged across
all integration points of the element and presented as a single set of vectors at the element
centroid. They are always calculated on the current element geometry and any layer IDs
associated with post codes 691 and 694 are ignored. Note also that while the normal usage
of these post vectors is in conjunction with the ORIENTATION option, if no special material
orientation is provided, then they can also be used to obtain the element coordinate system
for orthotropic materials, composites, etc. For composites, post code 697 provides access
to the fiber angle in any layer. If used without any associated layer id, post code 697
provides access to all layer angles. Else, the user can obtain the angle for a specific layer L
by using 697,L as the post code. Note that if there are no composite elements, post code
697 is ignored. The orientation vectors on the post file are available for visualization in
Marc Mentat. Either element orientations or layer orientations can be plotted. Note that for
layer orientation vectors to be available for a set of layers, the associated layer orientation
angle should be available on the post file through post code 697.
For post codes 411, 421, 431, and 441, global quantities for shell elements are reported for
as many layers as requested and the same layer numbering system is used as for regular
shell quantities. Layer 1 is the top surface; layer 2 is the next surface, etc. This convention
is followed from MSC.Marc 2000 on.

Caution has to be exercised in interpreting the results when strain and/or stress tensors are
requested for beam and shell elements:
1.For most elements in this category (elastic beam elements 31, 52, 98 are exceptions),
stress tensors (post codes 311, 351, 361) or their associated component values (post
codes 11-16, 51-56, 61-66) and total strain tensor (post code 301) or its associated
component values (post code 1-6) can be requested with or without an associated layer
number. When no layer number is requested, the generalized strains (stretches, shear
strains) are reported for the strain post values and generalized stresses (axial force,
shear forces) are reported for the stress post values. Generalized curvature strains and
generalized moments can be requested through post codes 641, 651, and 671 for shells
and numerically integrated beams. Note that for shell elements, the generalized stresses
are forces per unit length. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a definition of
the generalized strain and stress output for each element type. When a layer number is
used, the actual strain and stress components at the requested layer are reported.
2.For elastic beams (types 31, 52, 98), there are no layers - so only the generalized strains
and stresses are reported for these elements. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library
for a definition of the generalized strain and stress output for each element type.
Equivalent quantities are not computed for these element types since they do not make
physical sense.
3.For other stress tensors (post codes 341, 391, 411) and strain tensors (post codes 321,
331, 371, 381, 401, 421, 431, 441, 461), there are no generalized values and they can
only be requested for a particular layer. If no layer number is provided by the user, by
default, the tensors are reported for layer number 1. For elastic beams (types 31, 52, 98),
only the thermal strain tensor (post code 371) or its associated components (post codes
71-76) are available.

Table 4-4
Nodal Post Codes
Code
1 Displacement
2 Rotation
3 External Force
4 External Moment
5 Reaction Force
6 Reaction Moment
7 Fluid Velocity
8 Fluid Pressure
9 External Fluid Force
10 Reaction Fluid Force
11 Sound Pressure
12 External Sound Source
13 Reaction Sound Source
14 Temperature
15 External Heat Flux
16 Reaction Heat Flux
17 Electric Potential
18 External Electric Charge
19 Reaction Electric Charge
20 Magnetic Potential
21 External Electric Current
22 Reaction Electric Current
23 Pore Pressure
24 External Mass Flux
25 Reaction Mass Flux
26 Bearing Pressure
27 Bearing Force
28 Velocity
29 Rotational Velocity
30 Acceleration
31 Rotational Acceleration
32 Modal Mass
Description

Table 4-4
Code
33 Rotational Modal Mass
34 Contact Normal Stress
35 Contact Normal Force
36 Contact Friction Stress
37 Contact Friction Force
38 Contact Status
39 Contact Touched Body
40 Herrmann Variable
41 solid (Pyrolysis Model B only)
42 M g (Pyrolysis Model B or C)
43 s p (Pyrolysis Model B only)
44 s l (Pyrolysis Model B only)
46 Tying Force
47 Coulomb Force
48 Tying Moment
49 Generalized Nodal Stress
50 Generalized Nodal Strain
51 Inertia Relief Load
52 Inertia Relief Moment
53 J-Integral
54 Stress Intensity, Mode I
55 Stress Intensity, Mode II
56 Stress Intensity, Mode III
57 Energy Release
58 Energy Release Rate I
59 Energy Release Rate II
60 Energy Release Rate III
61
62 Crack System Local X
63 Crack System Local Y
64 Crack System Local Z
Description

Table 4-4
Code
Description
65 Near Contact Distance

66 Breaking Index (Normal)
67 Breaking Index (Tangential)
68 Breaking Index
69 Delamination Index (Normal)
70 Delamination Index Tangential)
71 Delamination Index
72 Recession
73 Glue Deactivation Status
74 VCCT Failure Index
75 Remesh displacement (relative displacement between two models on the post file).
76 Lorentz Force
77 Wear Index
78 Wear Rate
<0 User-defined nodal quantity via the UPSTNO user subroutine.
Note: The contact status (code 38) can have the following values:
0 if a node is neither in contact nor has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
0.5 if a node is in near contact.
1 if a node is in true contact.
2 if a node has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
POST INCREMENT 1494

Define Increments between Writing on Post File
POST INCREMENT
Define Increments between Writing on Post File
Description
This option allows you to alter the increments at which data is written to the post file. This option has the
same effect as the data in the ninth field of the POST model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
1st data block
1-10
1st
2nd data block
1-5
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the words POST INCREMENT.
Enter the number of increments between writing of post data. Defaults to

write post file very increment.
Enter a -1 to turn off all writing of post data until the next POST
INCREMENT option.
Enter number of times data will be written to the post file for each load
case. The step is calculated based on the progress from the total load case
time, displacement, or energy. This control is used only if there is no
increment frequency control in the first field.
Enter 1 if the post file is to be written at the end of the load case only.
Default is 0 (no such control).
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Notes:
Post data is automatically written to the post file at the increment in which the POST
INCREMENT option occurs.
This value is not saved upon restart; it must be reset through the POST model definition
option or POST INCREMENT option.
Example
POST INCREMENT
2
writes every other increment to the post file beginning with the current increment.
POST INCREMENT
05
writes five steps in the post file for the current loadcase. Based upon the progress check, the steps that
need output will be at about 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, and 100% of the progress report. Progress check is
based upon the total loadcase time, displacement, or energy.
1495 RESTART INCREMENT

Define Increments between Writing on Restart File
RESTART INCREMENT
Define Increments between Writing on Restart File
Description
This option allows you to alter the increments at which restart data is written to the restart data file. This
option has the same effect as the data in the second field of the RESTART model definition option. This
does not effect the RESTART LAST option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words RESTART INCREMENT.
Enter the number of increments between writing of the restart data.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
It defaults to writing of restart data every increment.

Enter -1 to stop all writing of restart data until the next RESTART
INCREMENT option.
Notes:
Restart data is automatically written to the restart file at the increments in which the
RESTART INCREMENT option occurs.
This value is not saved upon restart; it must be reset through the RESTART model
definition or RESTART INCREMENT option.
Example
RESTART INCREMENT
2
writes every other increment to the restart file beginning with the current increment.
ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition) 1496

ADAPT GLOBAL
(History Definition)
Description
This history definition set provides control parameters used for the global adaptive remeshing. The
REZONING parameter must also be included in the parameter section.
The ADAPT GLOBAL history definition option can also be used to support boundary conditions assigned
to the remeshing body for 2-D, 3-D solid (tetrahedral) and 3-D shell. When applying boundary
conditions, the new table style input format is preferred.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the words ADAPT GLOBAL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of bodies to be remeshed.
6-10
2nd
Enter the unit number to read data; defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Not used.
The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated as a set for each body to be remeshed.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter 2 for Advancing Front 2-D quad or mixed mesher.

Enter 3 for Delaunay 2-D mesher.
Enter 4 for 2-D Overlay mesher.
Enter 5 for 3-D Overlay Hexahedral mesher.
Enter 6 for Delaunay 3-D tetrahedral mesher.
Enter 7 for Relax mesh generator.
Enter 8 for Stretch mesh generator.
Enter 9 for Shave mesh generator.
Enter 10 for quadtree mesher. (Simufact externally supplied)
Enter 11 for MD Patran 3-D tetrahedral meshers.
Enter 12 for triangular shell mesh generator.
1497 ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter 18 for reading new mesh from .mesh file.
Note:
jobid_b*.mesh file name is expected where * is the

remeshing body number and jobid is the job name.
Enter 19 for quadrilateral shell mesh generator.

6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to remesh body (default).

Enter 2 if first relax mesh; if that fails, do full remeshing.
Enter 3 if relax mesh only.
11-15
3rd
Enter the body to be remeshed (default = 1).
16-20
4th
Enter the element type; default is to previous element type.

Note:
This element type must also be specified on the

ELEMENTS parameter.
21-25
5th
Enter the number of criteria.
26-30
6h
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Echo mode for Overlay Hexahedral Meshing

0 Default; no message print out.
1 Some message print out.
100 Prints out more messages and saves all the meshing input files. For
details about these files, see Appendix I: 3-D Remeshing Files.
Repeat the 4th block for each criteria (5th field, 3rd data block).
4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter 1 if increment frequency is used.

Enter 2 if element distortion is used (2-D only).
Enter 3 if angle based.
Enter 4 if aspect ratio based.
Enter 5 if strain change.
Enter 6 if penetration based.
Enter 7 if force remeshing at next opportunity.
Enter 8 if recession distance based.
6-10
2nd
Enter the frequency in increments if criteria 1.
11-20
3rd
for quadrilaterals. Default is 40. The reference angle is the angle of the
current mesh without deformation. For 3-D analysis, enter minimum
volume ratio for hexahedral element. Default is 0.1.
For criteria 4, enter the maximum aspect ratio allowed. Default is 10.0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For criteria 5, enter maximum change of equivalent strain allowed before
remeshing occurs.
Default is 0.4.
For criteria 6, enter the penetration limit; default is 2*contact tolerance.
For criteria 8, enter the maximum element side reduction fraction before
remeshing occurs.
If current length divided by the original length < tolerance, remeshing
will occur.
21-30
4th
for triangles. Default is 40. The reference angle is the angle of the current
mesh without deformation.
For 3-D analysis, enter minimum volume ratio for tetrahedral element.
Default is 0.1.
For criteria 8, enter the total amount of recession before
remeshing occurs.
5th data block (Two-dimensional Advancing Front All Quadrilateral or Mixed Mesher)
Mesher type = 2
1-5
1st
Enter 0 for all quadrilateral mesh.

Enter 1 for mixed quadrilateral/triangular mesh.
Enter 2 for all triangular mesh.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments. (Default = 120)
26-30
4th

control.
If both the 2nd and 4th fields are default, the number of elements in the
previous mesh are used.
31-35
5th

Default = 36.
36-45
6th
Outline smoothing ratio range 0 - 1.0; default = 0.8.
46-55
7th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
56-65
8th

66-75
9th
Not used; enter 0.
76-80
10th
5th data block (Two-dimensional Delaunay Triangular Mesher) Mesher type = 3

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments (default 120).
26-30
4th

control.
31-35
5th

Default = 36.
36-45
6th
Outline smoothing ratio range 0-1.0; default = 0.8.
46-55
7th
56-65
8th

66-75
9th
Not used; enter 0.
76-80
10th
5th data block (Two-dimensional Overlay Quadrilateral Mesher) Mesher type = 4

1-10
1st
Enter the element target length.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined one level

if necessary.
Enter 2 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined two levels
if necessary.
16-20
3rd
Enter 1 if elements in the interior can be merged together. Four elements

at a time will be merged.
21-25
4th

control.
26-30
5th
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
6th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
7th
Not used; enter 0.
51-60
8th

5th data block

Three-dimensional Delaunay Tetrahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 6
1-10
1st
Enter target atom size (A).
11-20
2nd
Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0).

A value of 1 means that all element edges between elements not in the
same plane will be considered a hard edge.
21-30
3rd
Minimum edge length.
31-40
4th
Minimum edge angle.
41-50
5th
Gap distance.
51-55
6th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
7th
5th data block

Relax Mesh Generator - Mesher type = 7
1-5
1st
Enter the number of relaxes to be performed.
6-10
2nd
Enter the global direction to relax in, default is all directions.
11-20
3rd
Enter the sweep distance, nodes closer than this distance will be swept
together.
5th data block

Stretch Generator - Mesher type = 8
1-5
1st
Enter the first corner node number, if zero, then the second field gives the
streamline region that is used to define the stretching orientation.
6-10
2nd
Enter the node increment in first direction, or the streamline

region number.
11-15
3rd
Enter number of nodes in first direction.

Enter the contact body which if nodes contact, they should not be
adjusted, if zero all nodes will be adjusted.
16-20
4th
Enter the node increment in second direction.
21-25
5th
Enter the number of nodes in second direction.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
Enter the node increment in third direction (3-D only).
31-35
7th
Enter the number of nodes in third direction (3-D only).
5th data block

Shave Mesh Generator - Mesher type = 9
This 5th data block is not required.
5th data block
Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 11
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-55
6th
56-60
7th
Enter 1 for volume control; default = 1.
61-65
8th

66-70
9th

71-80
10th

5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-55
6th
56-60
7th
Not used; enter 0.
61-65
8th


Format
Fixed
66-70
Free
9th
Data
Entry Entry
I

71-80
10th

5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-55
6th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
7th
Not used; enter 0.
61-65
8th
Not used; enter 0.
66-70
9th

71-80
10th

5th data block

Reading .mesh file - Mesher type = 18
1-10
1st
Enter mesh file type. Default = 3.

Enter 1 for mesh file in .t18 format
Enter 2 for mesh file in .feb format
Enter 3 for mesh file in .dat format (Marc input format)
5th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 5
1-10
1st
Enter target atom size (Ax). For cylindrical grid, Ar.
11-20
2nd
Enter target atom size (Ay). For cylindrical grid, A
21-30
3rd
Enter target atom size (Az).
31-40
4th
Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0). A value of 1 means
that all element edges between elements not in the same plane will be
considered a hard edge.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
Minimum edge length. If an edge length is less than this value, it will not
be considered as a hard edge.
51-60
6th
Minimum edge angle. If the angle between element faces is less than this
value, the common edge will not be considered as a hard edge.
61-70
7th
Gap distance.
71-75
8th
The template file name is specified on the 9th data block.

Enter 1 if grid-based template
Enter 2 if mesh-based template.
Enter 3 if kernel-based template.
76-80
9th
6th data block

Two-dimensional Advancing Front or Delaunay Mesher [If refinement boxes are used]
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
Body ID 1; if not zero, corner 1 will be attached to this rigid body.
16-20
4th
Body ID 2; if not zero, corner 2 will be attached to this rigid body.
21-30
5th
31-40
6th
41-50
8th
51-60
9th
6th data block

Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher [If refinement boxes are used]
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-30
5th
31-40
6th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
7th
51-60
8th
61-70
9th
71-80
10th
6th data block

Two-dimensional Quadtree Mesher or 3-D Hexahedral Mesher
1-5
1st
Number of boxes used for element refinement; entered on 10th series.
6-10
2nd
Enter number of levels to coarsen (merge) the interior elements.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter 0 for no wedge elements

Enter 1 to allow wedge elements.
Enter to split hexahedral elements.
31-35
7th
Enter 1 to perform shuffle after mesh is snapped to contact surface

(default).
Enter 2 to avoid shuffle.
36-40
8th
Enter 1 for Coons projection in meshing phase. This improves the

accuracy, but increases the cost.
41-45
9th
Number of shakes. Default is 10.
46-50
10th
Number of tries. Default is 5.
51-55
11th
Type of enhancement.
56-60
12th
Edge detection:
Enter 0 to detect new edges and use contact data.
Enter 1 to use contact data only.
Enter 2 to detect new edges.
Enter 3 to not use edge information.
Enter 4 to use previously detected edges, new edges, and contact
information.
Enter 5 to use contact data and previous edges.
Enter 6 to use user edges previously detected and new edges.
Enter 7 to use previous edge information only.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only
1-5
1st
Grid type:
Enter 1 for Cartesian (default).
Enter 2 for cylindrical.
Enter 3 for user defined.
6-10
2nd
For cylindrical grid:

Enter 1 for axis aligned with x-direction.
Enter 2 for axis aligned with y-direction.
Enter 3 for axis aligned with z-direction.
11-15
3rd
Maximum allowed refinement levels.
16-20
4th
First user-defined integer parameter.
21-25
5th
Second user-defined integer parameter.
26-30
6th
Third user-defined integer parameter.
8th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only [Version 11 only]
1-10
1st
For cylindrical grid, enter the angle of the part.
11-20
2nd
Enter the geometric refinement tolerance.
21-30
3rd
Enter the surface curvature tolerance.
31-40
4th
First user-defined real parameter.
41-50
5th
Second user-defined real parameter.
51-60
6th
Third user-defined real parameter.
9th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only and Template-based Mesh Requested
1-32
1st
Enter the template name.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]
One can either specify that refinement is in a box based upon coordinate positions or between
two bodies.
Repeat for each box (1st field, 6th data block)
1-5
1st
Enter the refinement level.
6-10
2nd

0 = refinement in the box.
1 = minimum number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
2 = minimum number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
3 = minimum number of elements in z-direction between bodies.
4 = exact number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
5 = exact number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
6 = exact number of elements in z-direction between bodies.
11-15
3rd

rigid body
16-20
4th

rigid body
21-30
5th
31-40
6th
41-50
7th
51-60
8th
61-70
9th
71-80
10th
1507 LOADCASE (History Definition)

Define Loadcase
LOADCASE (History Definition)
Define Loadcase
Description
This option is used to specify the boundary conditions and initial conditions that are active in this
loadcase. This is used to activate or deactivate FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc., DIST LOADS,
DIST FLUXES, etc., POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc., FOUNDATION, FILMS, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL
VEL, INITIAL TEMP, etc. Boundary conditions not explicitly activated are deactivated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word LOADCASE.
11-32
2nd
Enter the name of the loadcase (no blanks).
Enter the number of labels. This is required.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block (Repeat as many times as specified on 2nd data block.)
1-32
1st
Enter the boundary condition or initial condition label.
33-40
2nd
Enter flag to control application of this boundary condition.

This is applicable to FIXED DISP, DIST LOADS, POINT TEMP, and
CHANGE STATE only.
If a time dependent table (independent variable types 1,2,3,4) is applied to
this boundary condition, this flag is ignored and the table is used to control
the temporal variations.
Enter 0 if load is applied instantaneously,
or if boundary condition has been previously activated, it
remains constant (default).
linearly changed from current magnitude to prescribed
magnitude,
LOADCASE (History Definition) 1508

Define Loadcase
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
loadcase: point load, distributed load or kinematic load is
linearly reduced in magnitude to zero,
loadcase:
magnitude to zero,
reduced to zero,
Enter -1 or -2 load is removed gradually.
point load, distributed load or kinematic load is linearly
reduced in magnitude to zero,
1509 LOADCASE (History Definition)

Define Loadcase
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Enter -3 load is removed gradually,
magnitude to zero,
reduced to zero,
point temperature is linearly ramped to the
initial temperatures,
change state is linearly ramped to the initial state.
Enter -4 Load is removed instantaneously,
point load, distributed load is instantaneously reduced to
zero,
reduced to zero,
point temperature is instantaneously changed to the initial
temperature,
change state is instantaneously changed to the
initial state.
When POINT TEMP is used, the initial temperatures are
prescribed in the INITIAL TEMP option.
When CHANGE STATE is used, the initial temperatures
are prescribed in the CHANGE STATE option.
DMIG-OUT (History Definition) 1510

DMIG-OUT (History Definition)
Description
This option allows you to control the output of matrices into DMIG format. These matrices may then be
read in using the DMIG option and activated using either the B2GG, B2PP, K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP,
and P2G options within Marc or within MD Nastran. To output the substructure matrix, use the
SUPERELEM option. In the case of element matrix, they can either be written in the Marc global
(MSC.Nastran Basic) or a local coordinate system. Both symmetric and nonsymmetric matrices are
supported. Note that the scalar factor associated with the STIFSCALE option is not applied to the element
matrices. This option may be repeated in each loadcase.
The files created associated with element matrices have the names jidname_dmigXX_inc, where:
Jidname
is the job ID name
XX
is the suffix associated with the matrix type
ST
stiffness matrix
DF
differential stiffness matrix
MS
mass matrix
DM
damping matrix
CO
conductivity matrix
SP
specific heat matrix
Inc
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word DMIG-OUT.
The 2nd and 3rd, 4th and 5th, 6th and 7th, 8th and 9th, 10th and 11th, 12th and 13th data blocks are
entered as pairs as required.
2nd data block
1-10
1st
Enter the word STIFFNESS.
11-15
2nd

1511 DMIG-OUT (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter -2 to switch off writing DMIG output.
21-25
4th

26-30
5th

31-35
6th
Enter 0 to output global stiffness in untied state.

Enter 1 to output global stiffness in tied state.
36-45
7th

46-50
8th
Enter 1 if DMIG name is to be unique for each element matrix written to

the DMIG file. (default)
Enter 2 is all element matrices share the same name.
3rd data block

1-80
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIFF MATRIX.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th


Format
Fixed
26-30
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I

31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
7th

5th data block

5th data block (only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given)
1-80
6th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words MASS MATRIX.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th

26-30
5th

31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
7th
Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Mass values below this

1513 DMIG-OUT (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

1-80
8th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DAMPING MATRIX.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th
Enter 1 to output in Marc global, Nastran basic (default).

26-30
5th

31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
7th
Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Damping values below this

9th data block

1-80
10th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word CONDUCTIVITY.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th

Format
Fixed
26-30
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I

31-35
6th
Enter 0 to output global conductivity in untied state.

Enter 1 to output global conductivity in tied state.
36-45
7th
Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Conductivity values below

11th data block

1-80
12th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SPECIFIC.
11-15
2nd

16-20
3rd

21-25
4th
26-30
5th

31-35
6th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
7th
Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Specific heat values below

13th data block

1-80
1515 K2GG, K2PP (History Definition)

K2GG, K2PP (History Definition)
Description
This option activates or deactivates a stiffness matrix defined by the DMIG option.
This option should be in the input file before the matrix is read in by the DMIG option.
Note:
If transformation or rigid body rotations of the stiffness matrix are to occur, all degrees of
freedom of the nodes must appear on the DMIG file.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word K2GG or K2PP.
11-20
2nd
21-25
3rd

26-35
4th
36-40
5th
Not used; enter 0.
41-45
6th
Enter 0 to suppress the transformation to the stiffness matrix although a

transformation has been applied to the node (default - this implies that the
stiffness matrix used is provided in the transformed system).
Enter 1 to apply transformations to the stiffness matrix.
46-50
7th
Enter first node number used to rigidly rotate G stiffness.
51-55
8th
Enter second node number used to rigidly rotate stiffness matrix.
56-60
9th
Enter third node number used to rigidly rotate stiffness matrix.

Note:
If only the seventh field is entered, this node must have six
degrees of freedom.
K2GG, K2PP (History Definition) 1516

Remarks
2. Terms are added to the stiffness matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. A scale factor may be applied to the stiffness matrix specified here or to all stiffness matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CK2 entry.
4. If a transformation is to be applied to the stiffness matrix, the DMIG must contain all of the
degrees of freedom associated with the node to which the transformation is applied.
5. The 6th and 7th, 8th and 9th entries cannot change in the history definition section.
1517 M2GG, M2PP (History Definition)

M2GG, M2PP (History Definition)
Description
This option activates or deactivates a mass matrix defined by the DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word M2GG or M2PP.
11-20
2nd
21-25
3rd

26-35
4th
Remarks
2. Terms are added to the mass matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain a 6.
4. M2GG input must either be in consistent mass units or the COEFFICIENT model definition option,
CM2 entry may be used.
B2GG, B2PP (History Definition) 1518

B2GG, B2PP (History Definition)
Description
This option activates or deactivates a damping matrix for dynamic or harmonic analysis defined by the
DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word B2GG or B2PP.
11-20
2nd
21-25
3rd

26-35
4th
Remarks
2. Terms are added to the damping matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain the integer 6.
4. A scale factor may be applied to the damping matrix specified here or to all damping matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CB2 entry.
1519 P2G (History Definition)

P2G (History Definition)
Description
This option activates or deactivates a load vector defined by the DMIG option. This load vector may be
scaled by referencing a table which is a function of time.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the word P2G.
11-20
2nd
21-25
3rd
Enter 0 or 1 to activate the load vector.

Enter -1 to deactivate the load vector.
26-30
4th
31-35
5th
Enter a table ID.
Remarks
1. Terms are added to the load matrix before any constraints are applied.
2. The matrix must be rectangular in form (i.e., field 4 on DMIG entry - IFO -must contain the integer
9).
3. A scale factor may be applied to the vector specified here or to all vectors via the COEFFICIENT
model definition option entry.

Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis
Chapt Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis

This section describes the application of incremental boundary conditions and/or specifies automatic
er 4
Histor multi-increment load control. These boundary conditions include:
kinematic constraint of either zero or specified displacement;
y
surface, volumetric or nodal loads;
Defini
thermal loads, and
tion
modification of tying constraint.
Optio These boundary changes are incremental in nature with the following exceptions:
ns
1. If the ELASTIC parameter is used, each load case is an independent analysis and the load value
are total values.
2. If the FORCEM user subroutine is used with the FOLLOW FOR parameter, the distributed loads
given in this routine are total values.
3. If the AUTO INCREMENT option is used, the total load is applied.
4. If the AUTO STEP option is used, the total load at the end of the time period is entered.
5. The table driven input is used to define boundary conditions.
There are five possibilities for automatic load control:
1. AUTO LOAD allows you to repeat the same incremental load a prescribed number of times.
2. AUTO INCREMENT divides the incremental mechanical load requested into a series of steps to
satisfy the user-prescribed tolerances.
3. AUTO THERM divides the incremental thermal load requested into a series of steps to satisfy the
user-prescribed tolerances.
4. AUTO STEP allows automatic time-stepping in dynamic analysis or in coupled thermal-stress
analysis with a choice of error criteria.
5. AUTO THERM CREEP divides the requested incremental thermal load into a series of steps and
carries out creep analysis between every two steps to satisfy your prescribed tolerances.
The BUCKLE option activates the calculation of the collapse loads and eigenvectors. Note that
eigenvalues can be extracted at any increment of the analysis.
The BACKTOSUBS option allows you to recover the displacements, strains, and stresses from
a substructure.
The RECOVER option allows the recovery of stresses and reactions for a specified mode during
modal analysis.
1521 DISP CHANGE

Define Displacement Boundary Conditions
DISP CHANGE
input style. When using the table driven input for boundary conditions, the
variation with time or increment number should be specified in the table. If
this boundary condition is applied as a harmonic excitation, it may be
defined as a function of the frequency. The complete definition of the
boundary condition can be specified in the model definition section.
Description
This option allows new displacement boundary conditions to be specified or old displacement boundary
conditions to be changed. The exact numbering sequence of the boundary conditions is used in some
applications of this option. This numbering sequence is output after the boundary condition option is used
in the input data describing the problem.
This option is used for incrementation of fixed displacement components or for adding or removing
displacement constraints. Care should be taken when removing fixed displacement conditions to ensure
that the reaction forces are handled properly. The residual load correction should be used to reduce
reactions to zero after a constraint has been removed (the LOAD COR parameter might be necessary);
however, a constraint force might be too large for the piecewise linear analysis. Note that enough space
must be specified on the SIZING parameter in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow
for possible increased storage requirements arising from use of this option. Complex displacement,
velocity, or acceleration histories are more conveniently input by user subroutine FORCDT.
This option implies a proportional increment of 1.0. Any resetting of this factor (for example, the
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT option used before the next CONTINUE option), proportions these
displacement increments as well. When used in conjunction with harmonic analysis, this boundary
change is used for all excitation frequencies until a new boundary change is invoked. In a coupled
thermal-stress analysis, use DISP CHANGE for stress and TEMP CHANGE for thermal analysis.
When used in conjunction with harmonic analysis, this boundary change is used for all excitation
frequencies until a new boundary change is invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the words DISP CHANGE.
DISP CHANGE 1522

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Set to the number of boundary conditions (specified displacement

components to be changed or added). A negative number removes
boundary conditions from the end of the boundary condition list.
Note:
A zero invokes the FIXED DISP option; a complete set of

necessary boundary conditions are then read, using the blocks
for that option except for that key word block.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 if excitation boundary conditions for harmonic analysis.
11-15
3rd

3a data block
Data block 3a is only entered if the number in columns 1 through 5 in data line 2 is positive and then
has the number of data lines required by data block 2.
1-5
1st
Number of the boundary condition being changed. This number is derived

from the Fixed Boundary Condition Summary table in the input echo of
a Marc run. Boundary conditions being added should be given labels
which increment the total count of boundary conditions properly.
Note:
A boundary condition in the middle of the list can be removed

by specifying that labeled boundary condition as a repeat of
some other boundary condition.
6-10
2nd
Nodal point to be constrained.
11-15
3rd
16-30
4th
Specified displacement increment (real part).
31-45
5th
Specified displacement increment (imaginary part).
Data blocks 3b through 6 are only entered if the number in columns 1 through 5 in data line 2 in zero.
3b data block
1-5
1st
For each set of boundary conditions use the 4th, 5th, and 6th data blocks.
1523 DISP CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4a data block
Use only if not Fourier Analysis.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

block 5.
21-30
3rd

A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified. The third
data block is read as 8E10.3.
4b data block
Use for Fourier analysis only.
1-5
1st
Enter the series number associated with this boundary condition.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd

5.
26-35
4th
36-45
5th
Prescribed displacement for fourth degree of freedom listed in data block

5.
46-55
6th
Prescribed displacement for fifth degree of freedom listed in data block 5.
5th data block

Note:
6th data block

RELEASE NODE 1524

Define Nodes for which the Boundary Condition is Gradually Released
RELEASE NODE
Define Nodes for which the Boundary Condition is

Gradually Released
.The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven
release node procedure is controlled through the LOADCASE history
definition option.
Description
This option removes a boundary condition constraint from a node in a gradual manner. This option is
similar to changing boundary conditions, but it allows the reaction force to be brought to a zero value
over a series of increments. The load is reduced in equal steps if used in conjunction with the
AUTO LOAD or DYNAMIC CHANGE option. The load is proportionally reduced to zero if used with the
AUTO STEP or AUTO INCREMENT option. If the RELEASE NODE and DISP CHANGE are given in the
same load incrementation section, the DISP CHANGE option should be given first.
Note:
This option should not be applied to nodes in contact with rigid surfaces.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word RELEASE NODE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data; this must be given.
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of release data, defaults to input.
3rd data block

Enter a list of degrees of freedom to be released.
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to be released.
1525 GAP CHANGE

Redefine Data for Gap Elements
GAP CHANGE
Redefine Data for Gap Elements
Description
This option allows you to modify the data associated with gap elements. This data includes gap closure
distance, gap elastic stiffness, contact coefficient of friction, and momentum ratio.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words GAP CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each set of gap data.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
For a true distance gap, enter the minimum distance d between end points.
Note:
If d > 0, the two end points are never closer than a distance |d|
apart. If d<0, the two end points are never farther apart than |d|.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
User supplied momentum ratio for first gap node. Default: Marc
51-60
6th
User supplied momentum ratio for fourth gap node.

Default: Marc calculates this ratio internally.
61-65
7th
Enter 0 for fixed direction gap.
66-70
8th
Enter 0 if gap is open during increment 0.
Enter 1 for true distance gap. Default is 0.

Enter 1 if gap is closed during increment 0. Default is 0.
4th data block
Enter a list of gap elements to be associated with this set of gap data.
TYING CHANGE 1526

TYING CHANGE
Description
This allows the number of tying constraints to be modified or a totally new series of tying constraints to
be introduced. This option modifies the constraints previously entered on the TYING option. If the
number of ties is increased, the TIE parameter is also required.
Notes:
The use of TYING CHANGE can increase the bandwidth beyond that calculated for the
original space allocation and, therefore, Marc recalculates the nodal bandwidth and the
storage allocation for the assembly and solution part of Marc.
To completely remove a set of tying constraints, set column 5 to 1 and column 10 to 0.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words TYING CHANGE.
Set equal to 1 to reduce the number of tying constraints at this point of

the analysis.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Set equal to 2 to read in an entire new set of tying constraints.

If column 5 is set to 1, the new number of tying constraints has to be less
than the originally specified number of ties. The tying constraints are
deleted from the end of the list to the desired number of remaining ties.
The list is in the same sequence as the list of ties in the input file.
6-10
2nd
New number of tying constraints.

The data lines required by the tying option are read in next if column 5 of
this data line is set to 2, except for the key word block.
1527 DIST LOADS (History Definition)

DIST LOADS (History Definition)
Description
This block of data allows pressure (surface and volumetric) loads to be specified. These values are
incremental values per increment if a fixed time-step procedure is used or the total change over the
loadcase if an adaptive time-step procedure is used or the total value of the load if the ELASTIC parameter
is used. User subroutine FORCEM can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads.
Note:
If FOLLOW FOR is included in the input file with DIST LOADS, the input about type of
load, magnitude etc. (data blocks 3 and 4) needs to be consistent in the model and history
definition options.
If FEATURE,10101 is used, then the pressure on an edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is applied, unless all nodes
of that edge or face are in contact with another body. If separation occurs, the distributed load is reapplied
to the surface. This feature internally turns on FOLLOW FOR.
For most distributed load types, one enters a load per unit length (on beams or shell edges) or a load per
unit area. There are a few exceptions listed below:
Load Type
100
Centrifugal
102
Gravity
Enter three values (Force/mass)
103
104
Centrifugal
105
106
Uniform Volumetric load
107
Nonuniform Volumetric load
110
Uniform load per unit length
111
Nonuniform load per unit length
112
Uniform load per unit area
113
Nonuniform load per unit area
General traction
-10 to -21
DIST LOADS (History Definition) 1528

Table 4-5
CID Load Types (Not Table Driven Input)
IBODY
Specify Traction on Edge or Face
User Subroutine
-10
No
-11
Yes
-12
No
-13
Yes
-14
No
-15
Yes
-16
No
-17
Yes
-18
No
-19
Yes
-20
No
-21
Yes
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3a data block
Use if conventional Marc input, not Fourier, not applied to a cavity, and not Nastran PLOAD4 style.
1-5
1st

times a thousand.
6-15
2nd

16-25
3rd
second coordinate direction
1529 DIST LOADS (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-35
4th
coordinate direction
36-40
5th

3b data block
Use if distributed load is applied to cavity and not Fourier. The CAVITY parameter and CAVITY model
definition option is also required.
1-5
1st

where
ibody_cavity is the cavity-modified value for the distributed load type.
ibody is the original value for the distributed load type (see
library element description in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.)
6-15
2nd
If icavity_type = 1, enter incremental pressure.
16-25
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
26-35
4th
Not used; enter 0.
36-40
5th

41-45
6th
Enter -1 if the cavity load is not active.
If icavity_type = 2, enter incremental mass.
3c data block
Use if Fourier Analysis.
1-5
1st

times a thousand.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
DIST LOADS (History Definition) 1530

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-35
4th
36-40
5th
3d data block
Use if Nastran PLOAD4 style input.
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of load plus 200. See library element
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th
36-45
5th
Enter P4, the magnitude of load at node 4 of face or edge. Not required if
a triangular face.
46-55
6th
Enter first component of direction of load.
56-65
7th
Enter second component of direction of load.
66-75
8th
Enter third component of direction of load.
76-80
9th
If positive, distributed load index (optional). (Distributed load index is to

be used in the FORCEM user subroutine.) If the direction of the load is
given with respect to a COORD SYSTEM option, then enter the negative
of the coordinate system ID.
Notes:
If the direction of the load is not defined, then the conventional Marc direction is used.
If the direction of the load is defined, then it is fixed and not updated even if the FOLLOW
FOR parameter is activated.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed loads.
1531 POINT LOAD (History Definition)

Define Point Loads
POINT LOAD (History Definition)
Define Point Loads
Description
This option allows nodal point loads to be specified. The nodal loads can be specified as fixed direction
loads or follower loads. For the fixed direction loads, the nodal forces are always specified in vector form.
For the follower loads, two options are possible: Option 1 is the MD Nastran style Follower Force
wherein the magnitudes of the nodal force and moment are specified and the direction is independently
specified using 2 or 4 nodes. Option 2 is the Mesh Based Automated Follower Force wherein the nodal
loads are specified in vector form and the initial load orientation with respect to the mesh is maintained
as the structure deforms. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
If the number of nodes which have point loads has been changed from the model definition option, you
must give an upper bound on the DIST LOADS parameter.
Note:
loads are used in the model. When this global parameter for follower force point loads is
turned on, the 5th data block is mandatory. The follower force option is not valid for fourier
loads or harmonic loads. Also, the follower force capability is not supported for point loads
specified through the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 to enter real harmonic load.

Enter 2 to enter imaginary harmonic load.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter logical unit number for input of point load data; defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to signal existence of more than one point load on the same node.
The loads are summed in this case.
POINT LOAD (History Definition) 1532

Define Point Loads
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st

Nodal Force magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.
11-20
2nd

Nodal Moment magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
Nodal load associated with seventh degree of freedom.
71-80
8th
Nodal load associated with eighth degree of freedom.
Note:
Continuation data line is necessary and must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data lines are
needed if there are more than eight degrees of freedom per node in the analysis.\
The nodal load vector is valid for fixed direction force or for automated follower force.
Only the first two fields are used for the MD Nastran style follower force.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above point load is applied.
5th data block
Used only when 4th field of FOLLOW FOR parameter is 1.
For the MD Nastran style follower force, enter as many lines as there are nodes in the 4th data block.
1-5
1st
= Fixed direction force
-1 = Automated follower force

First node for MD Nastran style follower force
6-10
2nd
Second node for MD Nastran style follower force
11-15
3rd
Third node for MD Nastran style follower force
16-20
4th
Fourth node for MD Nastran style follower force
1533 AUTO LOAD

Define Equal Load Increments
AUTO LOAD
Define Equal Load Increments
Description
This option is useful for nonlinear analysis with proportional loads. It generates a specified number
of increments.
For contact analysis, the TIME STEP history definition option is also needed with AUTO LOAD, so that
the incremental displacement of the contact body can be obtained from the velocity.
AUTO LOAD primarily controls mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions. For
uncoupled thermal stress analysis, AUTO LOAD can also be used to control state variables specified
by the THERMAL LOADS/CHANGE STATE options or point temperatures specified by the
POINT TEMP option.
No Table Driven Input

The load increment is the net result of the changes and scalings made to the load increment in all the
previous increments, plus the effect of any tractions, proportional increment options, etc., in the current
increment. The load increment is the same for all steps in this loadcase. These options should come after
the AUTO LOAD option. If the proportional increment option is not included, AUTO LOAD sets the
proportionality factor to a default of 1.
Table Driven Input
When this option is used with the table driven boundary conditions, it is only used to control the number
of increments, and with TIME STEP the total time period. The magnitude of the boundary conditions is
determined by the table.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-9
1st
Enter the words AUTO LOAD.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of times this load increment is to be applied.
6-10
2nd
Reassembly interval for stiffness matrices.
11-15
3rd
Maximum number of allowable time step cuts.
Defaults to whenever nonlinearity occurs.

= 0 means no automatic restart from the previously converged step.
> 1 means maximum number of time step cutbacks allowed if
convergence is not achieved. Marc automatically restarts the analysis
after each cutback until the maximum number is reached.
INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition) 1534

INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition)
Description
This option defines the parameters necessary for conducting an inertia relief analysis. The parameters are
used to evaluate the Rigid Body Modes of the system. Once the modes are evaluated, the program
evaluates the inertia relief load vector which balances the external load vector acting on the system. For
more details of these procedures, you are referred to Inertia Relief in Chapter 5 in the Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information manual.
When inertia relief is no longer active in a current loadcase, an option can be provided to remove or retain
inertia relief loads from previous loadcases.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words INERTIA RELIEF.
Flag for Rigid Body Mode evaluation method:
2nd data block

1-5
1st
0 - Inertia Relief is not active in current loadcase

3 - Support Method
6-10
2nd
Flag to retain/remove previous Inertia Relief Loading:

1 - retain load
-1 - remove load immediately (default)
-2 - remove load gradually
11-15
Note:
3rd
Number of Lines containing Support degree of freedom information

(default 1)
Field 2 of data block 2 is only used if inertia relief is not active in the current loadcase (i.e.,
Field 1 of data block 2 is 0). Also, data block 3 is not necessary in this case.
Data block 3 is repeated as many times as specified in the 2nd data block, 3rd field.
3rd data block
Use only if 1st field of 2nd data block is 3 (Support Method)
1-5
1st
Node ID 1.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Node ID 2.
16-20
4th
1535 INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
Node ID 3.
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
Node ID 4.
36-40
8th
41-45
9th
Node ID 5.
46-50
10th
51-55
11th
Node ID 6.
56-60
12th
61-65
13th
Node ID 7.
66-70
14th
71-75
15th
Node ID 8.
76-80
16th
Note:
The degrees of freedom in fields 2, 4, etc. of data block 3 refer to the nodal degrees of
freedom that define the rigid body motion (r-constraint set). The associated nodes are defined
in fields 1,3, etc. The degrees of freedom that form part of the r-constraint set at any
particular node can be specified in combined form (e.g., 123, 135, etc.). If all degrees of
freedom at node N are to be part of this set, simply specify a negative number in the
associated degrees of freedom field.
BEGIN SEQUENCE 1536

Initiate a Series of Repeated Load Cases
BEGIN SEQUENCE
Initiate a Series of Repeated Load Cases
Description
This option begins a sequence of load cases. All history commands between the BEGIN SEQUENCE and
END SEQUENCE are repeated as often as specified here. The input lines are copied to a file named
jid.seq.
Note:
This does not work with RESTART.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words BEGIN SEQUENCE.
11-15
2nd
Enter the number of times the following history definition commands are
to be repeated.
1537 END SEQUENCE

Terminates a Series of Repeated Load Cases
END SEQUENCE
Terminates a Series of Repeated Load Cases
Description
This option is used in conjunction with BEGIN SEQUENCE to terminate a series of repeated load cases.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words END SEQUENCE.
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT 1538

Define Proportional Increments
Define Proportional Increments
Description
Using this option, the previous load increment can be scaled up or down for use in the current load
increment. This is most frequently used in elastic-plastic analysis where the first load increment is scaled
up to the values that cause first yield. This option governs mechanical loads only; temperature changes
are independent of this proportioning.
The option can precede or follow all the other options in this optional series. If it precedes a DIST LOADS,
POINT LOAD, or DISP CHANGE option, these options reset the proportionality factor to 1.0. If it follows
either of these options, it also scales any nonzero load or displacement increments given in these options.
Note:
If the SCALE parameter is used, the load increment that is applied in the first increment is
the scaled load multiplied by the value given in the second field of the second data block.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-22
1st
Enter the words PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Minimum number of cycles for each step of one increment; normally 1

(forces recycling n times). Every recycle might cause an assembly and
decomposition of the stiffness matrix. Marc automatically recycles if
convergence to tolerance is not achieved. The default value of recycles is
0. If this value is set above 1, more cycles are allowed but each increment
is forced to cycle at least n times before solution. Use caution that no
unnecessary recycling is being forced (for example, in AUTO LOAD).
Recycling is usually forced for the first few critical load steps to get
convergence and then resume normal condition.
6-20
2nd
Ratio of the current increment of load to the previous increment. Only

mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions are scaled.
1539 AUTO INCREMENT

Define Automatic Load Stepping
AUTO INCREMENT
Description
This option allows automatic load stepping in a quasi-static analysis and is very useful for both geometric
(LARGE DISP) and material (elastic-plastic) nonlinear problems. The option is capable of handling
elastic/plastic snap-through phenomena; hence, the post-buckling behavior of structures can be analyzed.
However, the option cannot be used for thermal loading.
You have to specify in the DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD, and/or DISP CHANGE options the total loading
at the end of the loadcase, and Marc automatically generates the magnitude of each load step based on
an initial load step and the amount of nonlinearity occurring during the loading.
The length of the incremental displacement vector (C = uTu) is based upon a number of parameters.
The analysis is stopped when the total load is reached or when the maximum allowed number of
increments is reached. In case of a snap-through problem, the loading can initially increase, decrease after
the buckle load has been reached, and increase if the stiffness increases in the post-buckled state. Within
the history definition data, the AUTO INCREMENT option can be used as often as desired. For more
details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
When this option is used with table driven boundary conditions, the independent variable should not be
time, normalized time, increment number, or normalized increment number. If multiple loadcases are to
be used, the boundary condition should be a function of the loadcase number.
Notes:
The option cannot be used for thermal loading; use the AUTO THERM option instead.
If this option is used for post-buckling analysis, the nonpositive definite flag in the
SOLVER model definition option has to be used. This option can be added upon restart.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-14
1st
Enter the words AUTO INCREMENT.
Fraction () of the total load increment that should be applied in the first
cycle of the first increment of this AUTO INCREMENT session resulting in
u1 = K-1P.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
T
C in = u 1 u 1 .
AUTO INCREMENT 1540

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Recommendations If one knows nothing about the problem, this value
should be 0.01 to 0.02. If one knows that the initial behavior is relatively
linear and the material is elastic, then a higher value may be chosen.
Note that in the first increment of the Auto Increment Loadcase, an initial
arclength is calculated based upon the initial fraction of the load. This
value is used with the data provided in the 5th field of this data block to
determine the maximum change in arclength allowed in this loadcase.
Hence, if the fraction entered here is small and a small value is given in
the 5th field, small increments in displacement will occur.
11-15
2nd
Maximum number of increments during this AUTO INCREMENT session.

Recommendations For elastic buckling problems, 500 increments is a
conservative number. For nonlinear material behavior, 1000 increments
should work for most problems.
16-20
3rd
Desired number of recycles per increment. Used to increase or decrease

load steps during AUTO INCREMENT session.
Default is 3. Please allow for more recycles via CONTROL model
definition option.
Recommendations The desired number of recycles of 3 is good for
elastic buckling problems. For contact problems, especially if friction is
present, the number should be increased to 5. If the convergence criteria is
1% or displacement based convergence checking is preformed, increase
this number by 1.
Note that this number does not control the number of iterations in this
increment, but rather controls how the target arclength will be changed in
the next increment. If the actual number of iterations is less than this
number, the target arclength will be increased in the next increment. If the
actual number of iterations is greater than this number, the target arclength
will be decreased.
If the value is too high, the target change in arclength becomes too large,
but it will hit the upper bound based upon the 5th field.
21-30
4th
Maximum fraction of the total load that can be applied in any increment
of this AUTO INCREMENT session. Default is 1 if no contact is present.
Default is 0.01 if contact is present.
If the 10th field is 1 or 2, the default is 0.1 for all simulations.
Recommendations For true buckling simulations, this number should be
between 0.01 and 0.025. For mildly nonlinear problems, a value of 0.10
may be used.
1541 AUTO INCREMENT

Format
Fixed
31-40
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
F
Maximum multiplier of applied arc length in norm of displacement vector

to initial arc length. Cmax/Cin
Defaults to maximum fraction of load divided by initial fraction of load.
Comments - This number, along with the 1st field, is used to determine the
maximum change of arclength in an increment. It is a critical number for
the case of stability analyses; unfortunately, it is hard to determine.
Recommendations Typically, a value of 10 should be used. The problem
with the default is that the initial arclength based upon the first increment
is usually very small, because the initial fraction of load is 1% and the
structure is elastic at that point. Hence, the default results in a large
number of small displacements.
41-50
6th
Total time period to be covered; to be used in conjunction with

contact analyses.
Default is 1.0.
51-60
7th
Fraction of the initial arclength to define a minimal arclength. Cmin/Cin

Default is 0.01.
Recommendations The default is acceptable; as the arclength is small,
the minimal arclength will be very small.
61-65
8th
Arclength root procedure:

1 = Crisfield (quadratic constraint).
2 = Riks/Ramm (linear constraint).
3 = Modified Riks/Ramm (linear constraint) (default).
4 = Crisfield; switch to Modified Riks/Ramm if no real root found.
5 = Scaled Riks/Ramm.
Recommendations The default (Modified Riks/Ramm is good. Though,
the Crisfield method with the root selection based upon the sign of the
singularity ratio - 3rd data block, 1st field appears to be very effective.
66-70
9th
Maximum number of allowable time step cuts.

= 0 means no automatic restart from the previously converged step.
> 1 means maximum number of time step cutbacks allowed. Marc
automatically restarts the analysis after each cutback until the
maximum number is reached.
Recommendation - A value of 3 should be used.
AUTO INCREMENT 1542

Format
Fixed
Free
71-75
10th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 or 2 for new Crisfield approach and new defaults.

Enter 2 if the 3rd data block is to be entered. This is only available
beginning with 2005r3a release.
76-80
11th
Enter a 0 if the maximum fraction of the total load is constant over the
loadcase (default).
Enter a 1 if the maximum fraction of the total load can vary over the
loadcase. This requires the 4th data block.
3rd data block

Only used if 10th field of 2nd data block is a 2.
1-5
1st
For the Crisfield method, select the method to choose the roots.
Enter 1 for method used in 2005r3 and previous versions based upon the
angle between u n 1 and u n such that the displacement is in the same
direction (default).
Enter 2 for selection of root based upon the sign of the singularity ratio.
Enter 3 for root selection based upon Falzon.
Recommendation Method 2 appears to be the best for problems that do
not have Lagrange multipliers in them; i.e., no Herrmann elements.
6-10
2nd
Enter method to modify arclength in next increment.

Enter 1 for method used in 2005r3 and pervious versions.
The target arclength, n + 1 = icydes/ncycle * , where icydes is the desired
number of cycles (3rd field, 2nd data block) and ncycle is the number of
cycles required in the nth increment.
Enter 2 for gradual approach of changing target arclength.
n + 1 = factor * n ,
where
factor = 1.5 if 3 ratio 5

factor = 1.25 if 1 ratio 3
factor = ratio if 0.1 ratio 1
factor = 0.1 if ratio 0.1
where ratio is icydes/ncycle.
Recommendation Use method 2.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
1543 AUTO INCREMENT

Format
Fixed
16-25
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
F
Enter a target incremental displacement. The maximum allowable

arclength will be calculated based upon the maximum displacement due to
the initial load and this value. This is an alternative to used the 5th field,
2nd data block and is more physical.
Recommendation For shell buckling, enter the thickness of the shell.
26-30
5th
Enter 1 to allow the analysis to continue even if the load has reached 100%
of the magnitude, but in the opposite direction.
Enter 2 to terminate analysis if load has reached 100% of the magnitude,
but in the opposite direction. This is the default if this data block is
included.
Note:
Upon restart, before reading history definition data, this AUTO INCREMENT session is
finished. The maximum number of increments allowed, the desired number of recycles, and
the maximum step size for this session can be changed upon restart using the REAUTO model
definition option.
4th data block

Only required if 11th field of 2nd data block is a one.
1-10
1st
Maximum fraction of total load to be applied between (MFA) 0%

and L1%.
11-20
2nd
First percentage cutoff L1.
21-30
3rd
MFA between L1% and L2%.
31-40
4th
Second percentage cutoff L2.
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
Third percentage cutoff L3.
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
Fourth percentage cutoff = 100%.
AUTO STEP 1544

Adaptive Load Step Control
AUTO STEP
Description
This option allows control of the automatic time/load stepping procedure. In this procedure, the time step
is adjusted based upon the calculated value of a parameter (strain increment, plastic strain increment,
creep strain increment, stress increment, strain rate, strain energy increment, temperature increment,
displacement increment, rotation increment) versus a user-defined maximum. More than one criterion
can be specified. If the criteria are not satisfied within an increment, recycling occurs with a reduced
time/load applied. After the increment has converged based upon tolerances specified on the CONTROL
values, the data given here controls the next increment.
The enhanced variant (flagged with a 1 in the 9th field of the second data block) allows the scheme to be
used with or without a user specified criterion. The default auto step scheme is available for backward
compatibility only. The enhanced auto step scheme should be always used for MSC.Marc 2001 and
beyond. The time step is adjusted based upon the number of recycles in addition to the user criteria. More
details on the scheme can be found in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 11.
The recycling criterion for the enhanced auto step scheme works as follows: For every increment,
depending on the starting time step and the minimum time step (specified in the 5th field of the 2nd data
block) a maximum number of recycling related cutbacks, N max
, are automatically determined by the
r
program. If an increment converges in less than the desired number of recycles specified in the 8th field
of the 2nd data block, the time step for the next increment is scaled up using the factor specified in the
6th field of the 3rd data block S u . If the desired number of recycles are exceeded in the current increment,
the time step is scaled back with an automatically determined factor and the actual recycling related
cutback count, N r , is updated by 1. The value for the automatic scaleback factor is at least 1 S u .
For each additional cutback, the magnitude of the scaleback factor is progressively increased such
that the minimum time step specified in the 5th field of the 2nd data block is reached on or before N r
reaches N max
.
r
For the enhanced auto step scheme, user criteria can be prescribed by explicitly defining the criteria
(defined in data blocks 4 and 5), or by allowing the program to automatically add appropriate physical
criteria (flagged by a 1 or -1 in the 12th field of the 3rd data block), or by doing both. In the last case, the
program will only add automatic criteria if there are no competing explicitly defined criteria already.
Details of the automatic criteria that are added can be found in Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information, Chapter 11.
The user criteria for the enhanced auto step scheme works as follows: After every iteration, the user
criteria are checked to see if they are satisfied. If not, the time step is scaled back and the user-criteria
related cutback number, N c , is updated by 1. The smallest factor that can be used for reducing the time
step is specified by the 3rd field of the 2nd data block. The maximum allowable number of user-criteria
related cutbacks, Ncmax, is specified by the 2nd field of the 3rd data block.
For each scaleback (recycling related or user-criterion related), the increment is started from the
beginning. Scalebacks also occur if any of the following occurs: maximum number of iterations reached
1545 AUTO STEP

(exit 3002), elements going inside out (exits 1005, 1009), or a contact node slides off the end of a rigid
body (exit 2400). In this case, the time step is divided by a minimum of 2. The enhanced auto step scheme
is available for mechanical, thermal and thermo-mechanically coupled analyses.
When using table driven input, the 10th field of the 3rd data block is used to determine if the peaks in the
tables are to be exactly satisfied. If the table controlling load is based on experimental data, it is suggested
that a -1 be used, which will remove the constraint and effectively smooth out the time history of the load.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words AUTO STEP.
Enter the initial time step.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Defaults to 1% of total time period for enhanced scheme. Input is required

for old scheme.
Recommendations If one knows nothing about the problem, this value
should be 0.01 to 0.02 of the total time period. If one knows that the initial
behavior is relatively linear and the material is elastic, a higher value may
be chosen.
11-20
2nd
Enter the total time period.

Defaults to 1.0 for enhanced scheme.
21-30
3rd
Enter the smallest ratio between steps.

Default is 0.1.
31-40
4th
Enter the largest ratio between steps.

Default is 10.0.
Recommendation Enter a value of 2.0.
41-50
5th
Enter the minimum time step.

Defaults to total time/maximum number of steps.
51-60
6th
Enter the maximum time step.

Defaults to half of the total time period.
Recommendation The default is acceptable except for buckling analyses
where a value of 0.025 is more appropriate.
AUTO STEP 1546

Format
Fixed
61-65
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter the maximum number of steps allowed.

Recommendations For elastic buckling problems, 200 increments is a
conservative number. For nonlinear material behavior, 500 increments
should work for most problems. For extremely nonlinear contact
problems, 1000 should be used.
Normally, a very large number can be used to be conservative.
66-70
8th
Controls the iteration criteria. This criteria is not used if the damping
energy criteria type 5 is used.
Enter the desired number of recycles per increment.
Enter -1 if the iteration criteria are not to be used.
Recommendations The desired number of recycles of 3 is good for
elastic buckling problems or mildly nonlinear problems. For contact
problems, especially if friction is present or highly material nonlinear
problems, the number should be increased to 5. If the convergence criteria
is 1% or displacement based convergence checking is performed, increase
this number by 1.
Note:
If the damping method selected in the 10th field is set to 4, this

entry is not used and should be set to -1.
71-75
9th
Enter 1 to read an extra data block below.
76-80
10th
Control of the addition of artificial damping to improve stability.

-1 No damping considered.
0 When the time step reaches the minimum time step, increase the time
step by a factor of 10 and add damping similar to method 4.
1 Turn on artificial damping if time step is below minimum time step.
Reduce time step by a factor of 1000. Damping is based on factor
specified in 9th field of data block 3.
2 Always turn on artificial damping. Damping is based on factor
specified in 9th field of data block 3.
4 Always turn on artificial damping. Damping is based upon the
estimated damping energy and the estimated total strain energy.
Estimates are based upon the first increment in this loadcase.
Artificial damping strain rate is also controlling the time step.
5 Do not add damping but use the damping energy to control the
time step.
Recommendation For buckling or other stability problems, it is
recommended that a 4 be entered.
AUTOSTEP utilizes the desired number of iterations unless the damping
energy criteria type 4 or 5 is used.
1547 AUTO STEP

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 3rd data block is only present if the 9th field of the 2nd data block is equal to 1.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the number of states to put on the post file. These states will be
equally spaced in time. By default, the increment based variant as given
by the POST option will be used.
6-10
2nd
Enter the maximum number of times to cut down the time step in each
increment to satisfy any user-specified criteria. Defaults to 10.
11-15
3rd
Enter 0 to treat user criteria as limits on behavior within an increment.

Enter 1 to treat user criteria as both limits on behavior within an increment
and as a target to adjust the time step for the next increment.
Recommendation If user criteria are used, it is recommended that a value
of 1 be entered here.
16-20
4th
Indicate finish criterion for thermal or coupled analysis.

Set to 1 to finish the transient time period when all nodal temperatures fall
below the value given in the 5th field (see below).
Set to -1 to finish the transient time period when all nodal temperatures
exceed the value given in the 5th field (see below).
Set to 0 to complete transient time period without any check on
temperatures reached.
21-30
5th
Finish temperature value to be used in conjunction with flag set above.
31-40
6th
Enter scale factor for time step changes other than changes due to user
criteria. Defaults to 1.2.
41-45
7th
Enter flag to override CREEP and DYNAMIC parameters as specified in

the parameter section for this load case.
0 Do not override parameters.
1 Turn off CREEP and DYNAMIC.
2 Turn off CREEP.
3 Turn off DYNAMIC.
46-50
8th
Enter table ID for the table that is used for scaling the damping factor. This
field is only relevant for artificial damping method 2.
Recommendation This is an advanced feature that would allow the
amount of damping to change with time. It is recommended that this field
be set to 0.
AUTO STEP 1548

Format
Fixed
51-60
Free
9th
Data
Entry Entry
E
Enter damping factor for artificial damping. Amount of damping depends

on the damping flag in the 10th field of data block 2.
If it is 1, the damping matrix is scaled by setting this factor to be the ratio
of the initial damping energy to the initial strain energy (defaults to 1e-5).
If it is 2, the damping matrix is directly scaled by this factor.
If it is 4, the estimated total damping energy in the loadcase will be
this factor times the estimated total strain energy. Default value of 2.e-4
is used.
Recommendation - Use the defaults.
61-65
10th
Enter flag for reaching instances in time from load tables.

-1 Ignore points in tables.
0 Reach peak (and valley) points in active load tables (default).
1 Reach all points in active load tables.
Recommendation If there are just a few points, one should enter 0; but if
the time history of the boundary condition is generated from experimental
data with many points, one should enter -1.
66-70
11th
Enter 1 to put states reached by the above flag on the post file.
71-75
12th
Enter flag to determine if automatic physical criteria should be added and

how analysis should proceed if they are not satisfied.
2 Do not add automatic physical criteria. Stop when any user criteria are
not satisfied (default).
1 Add automatic physical criteria. Stop when any user criteria are not
satisfied.
-1 Add automatic physical criteria. Continue when any user criteria are
not satisfied.
-2 Do not add automatic physical criteria. Continue when any user
criteria are not satisfied.
Recommendation - If no user criteria are specified, this should be set to 1.
The automatic criteria are:
a 0.5
b
0.1
if large displacement analysis.

if PLASTICITY,3 or PLASTICITY,5 or large strain.
c cr el 0.5
if creep analysis.
d 0.5
if creep analysis.
e th 0.5
if thermal stress analysis.
1549 AUTO STEP

Format
Fixed
Free
75-80
13th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter flag to check if dynamic integration error checks should be made

while determining time step (only valid for single-step Houbolt and
Newmark-Beta operators).
0 Skip error check (default).
1 Include error check.
Recommendation Including error check typically results in smaller time
step. For larger models, it is cost effective to enter 0, but physical based
criteria should be included to limit the time step.
Note:
For dynamic analysis, controlling the time step based upon the
number of iterations or the damping energy are not very useful.
Repeat 4rd and 5th data blocks in pairs for each criterion.
4th data block
1-5
1st
Enter the criterion ID:

Enter 1 for strain increment. (Elements)
Enter 2 for plastic strain increment. (Elements)
Enter 3 for creep strain increment. (Elements)
Enter 4 for normalized creep strain increment. (Elements)
Enter 5 for stress increment. (Elements)
Enter 7 for strain energy increment. (Elements)
Enter 8 for temperature increment. This is only for heat transfer or thermal
part of coupled analysis. (Nodes)
Enter 9 for displacement increment. (Nodes)
Enter 10 for rotation increment. (Nodes)
Enter 12 for normalized stress increment (Elements)
Enter (13 x 100 + state variable id) for state variable increment. Criterion
ID 13, 1300, or 1301 can all be used for temperature. (Elements)
Recommendation For buckling or post buckling analysis, it is very useful
to cure Criteria type 9 with a displacement increment equal to the shell
thickness.
For large strain plasticity problems, it is very useful to use criteria type 2
with a requirement of change in plastic strain to be 0.01 or, at most 0.05.
6-80
2nd
Enter set name of elements/nodes to which this criterion is to be applied.
YI.
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
XMAX1.
21-30
3rd
Y2.
AUTO STEP 1550

Format
Fixed
Data
Entry Entry
Free
31-40
4th
XMAX2.
41-50
5th
Y3.
51-60
6th
XMAX3.
61-70
7th
Y4.
71-80
8th
XMAX4.
For criteria 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, the time step is adjusted based upon:

if X XMAX1
Y calculated/Y1
if XMAX1 < X < XMAX2
Y calculated/Y2
if XMAX2 < X < XMAX3
Y calculated/Y3
if XMAX3 < X
Y calculated/Y4
where
X
strain
strain increment
plastic strain
plastic strain increment
creep strain
creep strain increment
creep strain
creep strain increment/elastic strain
stress
stress increment
strain energy
strain energy increment
temperature
temperature increment
displacement
displacement increment
10
rotation
rotation increment
12
stress
stress increment/stress
state variable n
increment of state variable n
Criterion
13*100+ n
1551 TERMINATE
Terminate Loadcase
TERMINATE
Terminate Loadcase
Description
This option terminates the current loadcase defined by the AUTO LOAD and AUTO STEP options if the
termination criterion is satisfied.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word TERMINATE.
Enter the number of termination criteria; maximum of 10 allowed.
Termination Criteria Type.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 1 if termination occurs when a percentage of the boundary nodes are

in contact.
Enter 2 if termination occurs when the maximum force on a rigid body
is exceeded.
Enter 3 if termination occurs when the displacement of the rigid body
exceeds the allowed displacement.
Enter 5 if termination occurs when the distance between the reference
points of two rigid bodies is less or greater than the specified value.
Enter 6 if termination occurs when any displacement in body, is greater
than the specified value.
Enter 7 if termination occurs when the displacement at the node, is greater
than the specified value.
Enter 8 if termination occurs when the prescribed percentage of elements
have a relative density greater than a threshold.
Enter 9 if termination occurs when the percentage of the boundary nodes
in contact is less than the threshold.
6-10
2nd
Enter the body number.

For criterion type 7, enter the node number.
For criteria 8, enter 0.
TERMINATE 1552
Terminate Loadcase
Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
For criterion type 1, enter the percentage of nodes to be in contact for

termination; default = 100.
For criterion type 2, enter direction 1/2/3 for the x, y, z global directions
For criterion type 5, enter the second body.
For criterion type 6 or 7, enter the degree of freedom.
For criterion type 6 or 7, enter -1 if the total translational displacement.
For criterion type 6 or 7, enter -2 if total rotation.
For criterion type 8, enter the percentage of elements that must have a
density greater than threshold (default = 95%).
For criterion type 9, enter the minimum percentage of nodes in contact for
the analysis to continue.
16-25
4th
For criterion type 2, enter the critical force.

For criterion type 3, enter the critical maximum displacement.
For criterion type 5, enter the critical distance. If the value is positive, the
termination occurs when the distance is less than the value. If the value is
negative, the termination occurs when the distance is greater than the
value in a positive sign.
For criterion type 6 or 7, enter the critical distance (rotation).
For criterion type 8, enter the threshold relative density.
1553 SUPERPLASTIC
SUPERPLASTIC
Description
This option allows you to define the various parameters needed in superplastic forming analysis. The
pressure is modified such that the calculated strain rate is approximately equal to the target strain rate.
This option is not supported with the table driven input format.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SUPERPLASTIC.
2nd data block

This data block controls the prestress options.
1-10
1st
Prestress function
1 For a constant application of prestress for a given number of
increments.
2 If the prestress is ramped down linearly to 0 in a given number of
increments from the prescribed value.
11-20
2nd
Number of increments for which prestress is applied.
21-30
3rd
Prestress to be applied (applicable for membrane elements only).
3rd data block

This data block controls the process control parameters.
1-10
1st
Target strain rate.
11-20
2nd
Strain rate sampling cutoff factor - the use of this factor depends on the
sampling method specified by field 5 (ignores any value above this given
number for calculating the average strain rate - this helps in ruling out
numerical aberrations).
21-30
3rd
Minimum pressure for this loadcase.
31-40
4th
Maximum pressure for this loadcase.
SUPERPLASTIC 1554
Format
Fixed
41-45
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Strain rate sampling method:

0 Sampling is done over elements with strain rate > cut-off factor (field
2) * target strain rate. If no elements exist, sampling is done over all
elements.
1 (default) Averaging is done over elements with strain rate > cut-off
factor (field 2) * maximum strain rate. The cut-off factor can vary
between 0 (all elements will be sampled) and 1 (only elements with
maximum strain rate will be sampled). Recommended value range for
cut-off factor is 0.7 to 0.9 (default is 0.8). The cut-off factor is also
used to smooth out the maximum strain rate in the mesh.
4th data block

This data block controls the process driving parameters.
1-10
1st
Number of sets to define pressure orientation.
Repeat the 5th and 6th data blocks for the number of sets defined.
5th data block
1-10
1st
Pressure orientation
6th data block

Enter list of distributed load indices.
7th data block
This data block controls the analysis termination criteria.
Enter the fraction of the total nodes that must come into contact before the
analysis is stopped.
1555 THERMAL LOADS (History Definition)

Define Thermal Loads
THERMAL LOADS (History Definition)
Description
This option allows input of temperature and other state variables (see STATE VARS parameter). Used
here, the loads are incremental; in that, they are in addition to any loads previously applied. The loads are
total loads only if the ELASTIC parameter is used.
You can specify either a uniform or nonuniform change in temperature (or other state variables). If a
nonuniform change is desired, the change of every state variable at every layer of every integration point
of every element must be specified. In this case, Marc calls the CREDE user subroutine for every element
in the mesh. (See the THERMAL LOADS model definition option for more information.)
If the Fourier decomposition method is being used to analyze an arbitrarily loaded axisymmetric
structure, the THERMAL LOADS option must be invoked separately for each Fourier series term that has
temperatures (state variables) associated with it. If there is no variation of these variables in the
circumferential direction, only the zeroth term of the series should be specified.
This option is not supported with the table driven input format; use INITIAL STATE and CHANGE STATE
or INITIAL TEMP and POINT TEMP instead.
Note:
On a restart run, any THERMAL LOADS option before the END OPTION reads data.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words THERMAL LOADS.
Set to 1 if uniform increment temperature (state variable) increment is

applied to all elements.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Set to 2 if nonuniform incremental total temperature (state variable) is read via the
Set to 3 if nonuniform total temperature (state variable) is read via the
THERMAL LOADS (History Definition) 1556

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-80
1st
Include only if the first field of data line 2 is 1; enter the uniform
increments in temperature and any additional state variables in (8E10.3)
format is applied to all elements.
4th data block

1-80
1st
Include only if the first field of data line 2 is 2 or 3, and using the default
CREDE user subroutine. Temperature and state variable data to be read in
by CREDE. All lines should contain 8 values in (8E10.3) format; do not
start a new data line for each element.
1557 AUTO THERM

Specify Data for Automatic Thermal Loading
AUTO THERM
Description
This option is intended to allow automatic, static, elastic-plastic, thermally loaded stress analysis based
on a set of temperatures defined throughout the mesh as a function of time. The temperatures are
presented to Marc through the CHANGE STATE option using any of the input possibilities of that option,
and Marc then creates its own set of temperature steps based on a temperature change tolerance provided
on this option. You should recall that the elastic-plastic stress analysis is time independent, but that the
strain increments should be small to obtain accuracy in the integration of the rate equations of plasticity.
As a guideline, the maximum thermal strain should be restricted to 20%50% of the strain to cause yield,
depending on how much free thermal expansion is possible. Based on this argument, a temperature
- , where is the yield stress, E is Youngs modulus and is the

change tolerance of 20%50% of ------E
coefficient of thermal expansion, should be set. Given your temperature change tolerance on this option,
Marc proceeds through your definition of the history of the temperatures provided on the CHANGE
STATE set, and linearly subdivides or merges together the user-defined steps so as to conform to the
tolerance.
The automatic thermally loaded analysis continues until all steps indicated on the CHANGE STATE
option are completed, so that a typical automatic thermally loaded analysis would have as input:
AUTO THERM
30., 0, 0, 4.0,
CHANGE STATE
1, 3, 0, 19, 1, 15, 1,
In the above case, a temperature change tolerance of 30 is set for the creation of temperature steps by
Marc; the total transient time in thermal analysis is 4.0. The data in the CHANGE STATE option indicates
that the temperatures are stored in a formatted post file (unit 19) and there are 15 sets of temperatures on
the file.
Mechanical Loading - No Table Driven Input
If no DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD, or PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT options appear with the AUTO
THERM set, all mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions are held constant during the AUTO
THERM. However, DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD, PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT, or DISP CHANGE can
be included in the set the mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions, which are then defined,
are assumed to change in proportion to the time scale of the temperature history defined by the CHANGE
STATE option and are applied accordingly, on the basis that the increments of load and displacement
correspond to the end of the transient time (TOTIM) of the AUTO THERM input.
AUTO THERM 1558

Mechanical Loading - Table Driven Input

When table input is used and either FIXED DISP, POINT LOAD, or DIST LOADS references a table
which is a function of time, the total mechanical boundary condition will be evaluated based upon the
current time.
Notes:
All load options must be specified before AUTO THERM.

The CHANGE STATE option must follow the AUTO THERM option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words AUTO THERM.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the maximum temperature change to be used per step of stress

analysis. Marc linearly subdivides steps or merges steps together to create
increments which are close to, but do not exceed, this tolerance.
11-15
2nd
Enter the maximum number of increments to be allowed in this AUTO

THERM. If this number of increments is exceeded before the temperature
history is completed, Marc ends. This is intended as a protection to avoid
excessive increments in the case of a data error. Default value is 50
increments if set to 0.
16-20
3rd
Reassembly interval for element matrices.
21-30
4th
Total transient time, TOTIM. This is used to proportionally scale the

incremental boundary conditions.
If TOTIM is equal to zero, mechanical loads given with this group are
applied for each increment in this group. If TOTIM is unequal to zero, then
the mechanical loads specified in this group are linearly scaled.
If the temperatures are obtained from a previous heat transfer
analysis/post file, enter the total time period of the heat transfer analysis.
31-40
5th
Maximum time step allowed per step of stress analysis. Marc linearly
subdivides steps or merges steps to create increments which are close to,
but do not exceed, this tolerance. Both the maximum temperature change
allowed and the maximum time step allowed tolerances must be satisfied.
1559 CHANGE STATE (History Definition)

Change State Variables
CHANGE STATE (History Definition)
variation with time or increment number should be specified in the table.
The complete definition of the boundary condition can be specified in the
model definition section.
Description
This option provides various ways of changing the state variables throughout the model. State variables
are initialized in the INITIAL STATE model definition set. The number of state variables per point is
defined in the STATE VARS parameter. The default is one with temperature always being the first state
variable at a point. If more than one state variable per point has been assigned, this option can be used
repeatedly to change the values of all state variables. The default value is no change if this option is not
used. In this option, the values of the state variable at the end of the current increment are read in. When
the temperature is being defined, the following points should be noted:
For history following analysis, the thermal strains are based on temperature change during this
step.
For elastic re-analysis (ELASTIC parameter), the thermal strains are always based on
temperature change between the initial, stress free temperature field and the values read in here.
The AUTO LOAD option is available for specifying a time-varying history of state variables. The
value of the total state variable at the end of each increment is specified.
The AUTO THERM option is available for automatic control of a nonlinear (elastic-plastic)
temperature loaded stress problem, to be used in conjunction with this option.

The THERMAL LOADS option can be used as an alternative to input the change of temperature.
Either incremental or total temperatures can be specified using this option.

The AUTO THERM CREEP option is available for automatic control of a thermally loaded
elastic-plastic-creep problem and is to be used in conjunction with this option.

The AUTO STEP option is available for automatic control of a nonlinear thermally loaded
problem, to be used in conjunction with this option. Time steps based on default recycling
criteria and/or user-defined physical criteria are used to determine appropriate state variable
increments.
Four ways of changing any state variable through CHANGE STATE are possible:
Read a range of elements, integration points, and layers, and a corresponding state variable value
for the end of the current step.

Read the state variable values for the end of the current step through user subroutine NEWSV.
CHANGE STATE (History Definition) 1560

Read the state variable values for the end of the current step from a named step of the post file
output from a previous heat transfer analysis with Marc. With this option, Marc assumes direct
interpolation must be provided separately the user. Providing state variables through the thermal
post file is currently supported for AUTO LOAD, AUTO THERM, AUTO THERM CREEP and
AUTO STEP. It is not supported other adaptive stepping procedures.
For AUTO LOAD, a one-to-one correspondence between the thermal increments on the post
file and the mechanical increments is assumed between the user-defined starting and ending
post increments.
For AUTO THERM or AUTO THERM CREEP, based on the user-defined allowable
temperature change, the thermal increments on the post file can be subdivided into many
mechanical increments.
For AUTO STEP, thermal values on the post file are used to determine interpolated values of
state variables for the mechanical run. The interpolation is based on how the current
mechanical loadcase time compares with the times read in from the thermal post file. Use of
a state variable criterion to control the temperature increment is optional. The starting
increment to be read in from the thermal post file (5th field of the 2nd data block) is userdefined. The number of sets of input to be read in (6th field of the 2nd data block) is
not supported for AUTO STEP. Instead, the thermal information is read till the mechanical
loadcase time or the thermal post file is completed. The post file is rewound and read from the
beginning at the start of each loadcase or at any time a cutback is used by the AUTO STEP
algorithm to reduce the current time step.
Read a list of elements, integration points, and layers, and a corresponding state variable value.
It should be noted that the end of the current step is interpreted as the end of the current increment for
fixed stepping procedures (AUTO LOAD, DYNAMIC CHANGE, CREEP INCREMENT) and as the end of
the loadcase for adaptive stepping procedures (AUTO STEP, AUTO THERM, AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO
CREEP).
Note:
Using this option, total state variable values are input. From Marc 2001 onwards, the
incremental change in the state variables is reset to 0 before each new increment if the
AUTO LOAD option is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
1561 CHANGE STATE (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the state variable identifier for the state variable being changed
(1,2,3,etc.) 1 = temperature. If more than one state variable is being used,
the STATE VARS parameter must be included.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to change the state variable via the 3rd and 4th data blocks below.
In this case, the third field must also be defined, and the sixth field if the
AUTO THERM option is in use.
Enter 2 to change the state variable via the NEWSV user subroutine. This
subroutine is now called in a loop on all the elements in the mesh.
Enter 3 to read the new values of the state variable from a post file written
by a previous heat transfer analysis. In this case, the fourth and fifth field
must be defined, and the sixth field if the AUTO THERM option is in use.
Enter 4 to change the state variable via data blocks 5, 6, 7, and 8 below.
11-15
3rd
gives the number of data blocks set in data blocks 3 and 4 used to input
the new value of the state variable (optional).
16-20
4th
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. Then. this entry defines the
unit number from which the post file information from the previous heat
21-25
5th
the step number on the heat transfer run post file to be read as the definition
of the new value of the state variable at the end of the current step. This
is currently only supported for AUTO LOAD, AUTO THERM, and
AUTO STEP.
26-30
6th
Only used if the AUTO LOAD or AUTO THERM options are in use. Give
the number of sets of input to be read to define the temperature history.
Not used for AUTO STEP.
31-35
7th
Enter 1 if formatted post file is used.
36-40
8th

Set to 1 to suppress printout of state variable values that are defined
in NEWSV.
41-45
9th
Enter the post code number to be read into this state variable; default is 9
(temperature).
CHANGE STATE (History Definition) 1562

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Last integration point with this value (11-15 and 16-20 can only be bigger
than 1 if ALL POINTS parameter is used).
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Last layer or cross-section point with this value (21-25 and 26-30 can
only be bigger than 1 for beam or shell elements).
New value of this state variable for the above range of points at the end of
the current step.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block
1-10
1st
6th data block

7th data block
applied.
8th data block
of the 2nd data block is -1.
9th data block
1-80
1563 POINT TEMP (History Definition)

POINT TEMP (History Definition)
Description
This option defines temperatures at nodal points for an uncoupled thermal stress problems at the end of
the increment.
Note:
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

to input.

3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
file. Set to 1.
16-20
4th
POINT TEMP (History Definition) 1564

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-63
7th
4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of the temperature.
Enter the table ID associated with the temperature.
5th data block

1-5
1st
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

2 - Node IDs
7th data block

1-80
data block.
1565 CHANGE PORE (History Definition)

CHANGE PORE (History
Definition)
Description
This option provides various ways of changing the pore pressure throughout the model. This option is
only used in uncoupled soil analysis.
Given below are four ways of providing the pore pressures.
1. Read a range of elements, integration points and layers, and corresponding pore pressures for the
end of the current step.
2. Read the pore pressure values for the end of the current step through the NEWPO user subroutine.
3. Read the pore pressure values for the end of the current step from a named step of the post file
output from a previous pore pressure analysis with Marc. With this option, Marc assumes direct
4. Read a list of elements, integration points and layers, and corresponding pore pressure.
Note:
On this option, total pore pressures are input.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter 1.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
CHANGE PORE (History Definition) 1566

Format
Fixed
6-10
Free
2nd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 to change the pore pressure via data block 3 below. In this case,
the third field must also be defined.
Enter 2 to change the pore pressure via the NEWPO user subroutine. This
subroutine is then called in a loop on all the elements in the mesh.
Enter 4 to change the pore pressure via data blocks 5, 6, 7 and 8 below.
11-15
3rd
gives the number of block sets in series 3 and 4 used to input the new value
of the pore pressure (optional).
16-20
4th
Only nonzero if the second field is set to 3. Then, this entry defines the
unit number from which the post file information from the previous pore
pressure run is read.
21-25
5th
the step number on the pore pressure run post file to be read as the
definition of the new value of the pore pressure at the end of the
current step.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 1.
31-35
7th
36-40
8th

of pore pressure values that are defined in the NEWPO user subroutine.
Data blocks 3 and 4 are only input if the second field above set to 1. In that case, the number of block
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Last integration point with this value can only be bigger than 1 if the ALL
POINTS parameter is used.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
Last layer or cross-section point with this value.
New value of the pore pressure for the above range of points at the end of
the current step.
4th data block

1-10
1st
1567 CHANGE PORE (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block
1-10
1st
Pore pressure for the points given below at the end of the current
increment.
6th data block

7th data block
Enter a list of integration points to which the above pore pressure is to be
applied.
8th data block
be applied.
TIME STEP 1568

Define Time Step
TIME STEP
Define Time Step
Description
This option allows you to enter a time step for static analysis.This option can be used to prescribe the
time step in a contact analysis. This time step can be used in conjunction with strain rate effects (CREEP,
VISCO ELAS) option. This time step is used for this step or series of steps if AUTO LOAD is used. This
time step is not scaled by the proportional increment option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words TIME STEP.
Enter time step.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
1569 RESET TIME

Resets Time to Zero
RESET TIME
Resets Time to Zero
Description
In multi-stage forging, it is often useful to consider each stage beginning at time = 0.0. This facilitates
the definition of tool velocities, and is useful for postprocessing. This option allows you to reset the time,
at the beginning of the increment.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words RESET TIME.
Enter the time at beginning of step.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Default is 0.0.
BUCKLE 1570
Specify Buckling Analysis
BUCKLE
Description
This sets a flag for the buckling analysis and solves the eigenvalue problem by the inverse power sweep
method or the Lanczos method. The number of modes and the procedure used is specified on the
BUCKLE parameter. This option can be exercised after every increment of load. The LARGE DISP
parameter should be included for nonlinear collapse analysis. This option can also be used to control
perturbation analyses. The perturbation is added to the coordinates in the increment following the
eigenvalue extraction.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word BUCKLE.
Maximum number of iterations allowed.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Not used for Lanczos. Enter 0.

Default is 40.
6-15
2nd

eigenvalue is less than the tolerance.
Not used for Lanczos. Enter 0.
Default is 0.0001.
16-20
3rd
Enter the harmonic number for Fourier buckling; positive number results
in cosine terms, negative number results in sine terms.
Default is zero.
21-25
4th
Enter 1 for buckling perturbation to occur in the next increment.
26-30
5th
Enter mode number to be used in the perturbation analysis.

Enter negative number of modes if multiple modes are used in the
perturbation analysis.
1571 BUCKLE
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-40
6th
Enter the scale factor to be multiplied with the normalized mode and
added to the coordinates in the next increment.
41-50
7th
Solution scaling factor for linear analysis.

If the applied load in increment 0 is too large, the Lanczos procedure may
fail; this number is used to scale the solution for numerical reasons. The
collapse load will be output based upon the total load applied.
3a data block is used only if 5th field of the 2nd data block is negative. Use one line for each mode.
3a data block
1-5
1st
Mode number.
6-15
2nd
Scale factor.
SUPERELEM (History Definition) 1572

SUPERELEM (History Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface

Definition)
Description
This option triggers Marc to perform the Craig-Bampton method of Component Mode Synthesis and
generate a Modal Neutral File (MNF) that can be uploaded into MD Adams models to represent flexible
components. The option allows direct definition of the boundary or interface degrees of freedom. The
option also allows automatic definition of interface degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact
with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint
analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are not known a priori. It also allows the specification
of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The
two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies are consolidated into one node with six degrees of
freedom before exporting to the MNF.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to generate MNF.
2nd data block
A. List of Interface Degrees of Freedom.
3a data block
1-80
1st
1st
4a data block
1-80
3b data block
1-5
1st
Enter -1.
1st
4b data block
1-80
1573 SUPERELEM (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3c data block
1-5
1st
Enter -2.
1st
4c data block
1-80
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition) 1574

SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition) Create DMIG of Substructure

Description
This option allows the creation of a DMIG file containing the stiffness associated with the degrees of
freedom specified here. This DMIG may be subsequently read into Marc or Nastran. The option allows
direct definition of the degrees of freedom. The option also allows automatic definition of interface
degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful
for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are
not known a priori. It also allows the specification of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes
of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies
are consolidated into one node with six degrees of freedom before exporting to the DMIG.
This option can only occur once in the analysis. However, it may be used in either the model definition
or the load increment section.
The DMIG will be written to file jidname_dmigst_inc, where:
jidname
is the job name
inc
Notes:
If a node is subsequently going to be transformed, all degrees of freedom of all nodes must
be specified here.
If a rigid body rotation is to be applied to the DMIG, all degrees of freedom of all nodes
must be specified here.
This option may only be used with direct solution techniques.

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
2nd data block
1575 SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition)

Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 to create DMIG file.

Enter 3 to create a DMIGB file.
DMIGB uses a different output format, which results in a smaller file
(about one third of the size of a DMIG file). When a DMIGB file is
included in a Marc analysis, the program uses a column-wise storage
instead of a full in-core matrix storage. This memory reduction can be
important for large DMIG files. The DMIGB format can be used only
as input for a Marc analysis; it can not be used in a Nastran analysis.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Enter 0 if all stiffness terms written to DMIG.

Enter 1 if terms less than xf K 1 are filtered out.
Enter 2 if terms less than xf are filtered out.
31-40
7th
Enter the value used for filtering xf ; default = 1.e-8.
41-50
8th
Enter the name of the matrix; default is KAAX which is limited to

eight characters.
A.
List of Interface Degrees of Freedom.
3a data block
1-80
1st
1st
4a data block
1-80
3b data block
1-5
1st
Enter -1.
1st
4b data block
1-80
3c data block
1-5
1st
Enter -2.
1st
4c data block
1-80
ASSEM LOAD 1576

Assemble Equivalent Nodal Force Vector
ASSEM LOAD
Assemble Equivalent Nodal Force Vector
Description
This option signals Marc to compute only the equivalent nodal force vector for all loads defined in this
loadcase. These loads are not applied to the finite element model and no matrix solution takes place for
this loadcase.
In the case of Marc - MD Adams MNF interface, Marc projects the computed equivalent nodal force
vectors onto the modal space and exports them to the MNF as modal loads. MD Adams models can then
make use of these modal loads; e.g., by scaling them up or down, before applying them in MD Adams.
For MNF generation, all ASSEM LOAD loadcases should appear in the input file before any actual
loading is applied to the component.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ASSEM LOAD.
1577 ACTIVATE
Activate Elements
ACTIVATE
Activate Elements
Description
This option allows you to activate elements which were deactivated either before the start of the analysis
or during the analysis. Elements, which were deactivated before analysis, have zero internal stress upon
activation. Elements, which were used earlier and deactivated during analysis, have an internal stress
which is equal to the state when they were deactivated or zero if requested on the DEACTIVATE option.
Elements can be activated and deactivated as often as needed. Note that activation of elements results in
an increase in the size of the stiffness matrix.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ACTIVATE.
11-20
2nd
Enter the word POST to update the post file geometry so the activated
elements are shown.
21-30
3rd
Enter the word NOPO to not update the post file geometry; the activated
2nd data block

1-80
1st
Enter the list of elements that are to be activated at this time.
DEACTIVATE (History Definition) 1578

Deactivate Elements
DEACTIVATE (History Definition)
Deactivate Elements
Description
The DEACTIVATE option has two choices.
Option A
This option is the default method. This option allows the manual deactivation of elements during the
course of an analysis, which can be useful to model ablation, excavation and other problems. By default,
after the elements are deactivated, they demonstrate zero stresses and strains on the post file. However,
internally, they retain the stress state in effect at the time of deactivation and this state can be
postprocessed or printed at any time. At the later stage in the analysis, the elements can again be activated
with the ACTIVATE history definition option. As an alternative, one can use the UACTIVE user
subroutine. The stress state is restored in the post file when the elements are reactivated. If this is not
desirable, stress/strain states can be permanently set to zero at deactivation by using the additional
command line option STRESS/STRAIN.
Option B
This option allows one to automatically deactivate elements according to the cutter path defined by either
Automatically Programmed Tools (APT) source or Cutter Location (CL) data files. This is useful for
modeling NC machining (for example, metal cutting or material removal) processes. Marc has an
interface to translate the cutter path information into a series of elements to be deactivated. The
deactivated elements are not postprocessed or printed. The post file only includes the elements that
remain in the model. This method can be chosen by setting the second field of the first data block as
CUTTING and specifying the APT/CL file name in the second data block. APT/CL data files should be
located in the same directory as the input data file jid.dat.
Notes:
The typical definition of APT source file or CL file is shown as below:

cutterpath.apt
cutterpath.ccl
where the extensions .apt or .ccl are used to distinguish these two types of cutter path
data. For example, if the Marc input data specifies the cutter path file name as:
cutterpath without either the extension .apt or .ccl, the Marc program looks for
either type of cutter path file by adding the extension .apt or .ccl. The first file found
existing in the input data directory is used for the analysis.
This option must be combined with MACHINING parameter.
In the current release, this option can only be used with the AUTO LOAD option.
1579 DEACTIVATE (History Definition)

Deactivate Elements
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Option A
1st data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word STRESS to set the stresses to zero.
21-30
3rd
Enter the word STRAIN to set the strains to zero.
31-40
4th
Enter the word POST to update the post file geometry so deactivated
41-50
5th
Enter the word NOPO to not update the post file geometry; the deactivated
elements are shown.
2nd data block

This is needed for Option A.
1-80
1st
Enter the list of elements to be deactivated at this time.
Option B
1st data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Enter the word CUTTING if MACHINING feature is to be used.
2nd data block

This is needed for Option B.
1-80
1st
Enter the name of the file that defines the cutter path.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Enter 0 for NC Machining (default)
11-20
2nd
Enter 0 if no time synchronization between the time defined by the load

case definition option and the real calculated time based on cutter motion
defined by the APT/CL file.
Enter 1 if time synchronization is needed between the time defined by the
load case definition option and the real calculated time based on cutter
motion defined by the APT/CL file. In this case, a factor is applied to the
calculated time based on cutter motion.
21-30
3rd
Enter the ID of the rigid contact body which is defined by cutter if the user
wants to visualize the cutter motion of the cutting process.
Default is set to 0.
DEACTIVATE (History Definition) 1580

Deactivate Elements
Format
Fixed
31-40
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 0 if the time spent for rapid cutter motion is to be ignored.

Enter 1 if the adaptive remeshing is to be performed for every cutter
motion step.
Enter 2 if the adaptive remeshing is only performed at the end of the
cutting process.
41-50
5th
Enter 0 if the speed of the rapid cutter motion is the same as the regular
cutting speed of cutter.
Enter 1 if the speed of the rapid cutter motion is provided by the user.
51-65
6th
Enter the rapid motion speed of cutter if the fifth field is equal to 1.
1581 FOUNDATION (History Definition)

Define Foundation Spring Force for Elements
FOUNDATION (History Definition)
Define Foundation Spring Force for Elements
Description
This option allows the specification of elements and associated foundation spring force to be used with
the elastic foundation option (Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information). Nonlinear foundations are
available via the USPRNG user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of foundation data. Defaults to input.
3rd data block

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, once for each list.
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of elastic foundation; this is the same

parameter as used in the DIST LOADS option. See Marc Volume B:
Element Library for a description of the possible distributed load types for
each element type in Marc.
6-15
2nd
Spring stiffness per unit surface area (or per unit length for
beam elements).
4th data block

1-80
1st
Enter a list of elements to which the above foundation is applied.
CHANGE RIGID 1582

Define New Geometry For a Rigid Contact Surface
CHANGE RIGID
Description
This option allows for the input of a new geometry for an existing rigid contact surface. The procedure
used to control the surface motion (displacement controlled, velocity controlled, or load controlled) will
not change. The position of the reference point of the rigid surface is also not changed. It is good
engineering practice to first move the rigid surface away from deformable bodies such that it is not in
contact before changing the geometry of the rigid body. Otherwise, penetration may occur. This option
may be used multiple times to change different contact bodies.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the word CHANGE RIGID.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Body number (must be an existing rigid body).
6-10
2nd
Number of sets of geometrical data to be input for this rigid body (NETTY).
11-15
3rd
Not used enter 0
16-20
4th
Enter 1 if geometry will be defined with respect to original position of this

body (default if 0 is entered).
Enter 2 if geometry will be defined with respect to current position of this
body.
21-25
5th
3rd data block

1-32
1st
A. For 2-D Rigid Body (Line-Segment)
4a data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 5a data block is repeated once for each point entered.
1583 CHANGE RIGID

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5a data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
B. For 2-D Rigid Body (Circular Arc)

4b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 5b data block is repeated four times.

5b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
C. For 2-D Rigid Body (Spline)

4c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 5c data block is repeated for each point to be entered.

5c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
D. For 2-D Rigid Body (NURBS)

4d data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
The 5d data block is repeated NPTU times for control points

5d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
The 6d data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
CHANGE RIGID 1584

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6d data block
1-10
1st
The 7d data block is repeated NPTU times for knot vectors.

7d data block
1-10
1st
E. For 3-D Rigid Body (Ruled Surface)

4e data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th

(JPOINT2).
21-25
5th

26-30
6th

31-35
7th

The 5e data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for ruled surface.
5e data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
F. For 3-D Rigid Body (Surface of Revolution)

4f data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

generator (NPOINT).
If JTYPE = 2 method to describe the circular arc (METH).
1585 CHANGE RIGID

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th

(NDIV1).
21-25
5th

direction (NDIV2).
The 5f data block is repeated NPOINT times for surface of revolution.

5f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
6f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th

G. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface)

4g data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
The 5g data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for Bezier surface.
5g data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
CHANGE RIGID 1586

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
H For 3-D Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch)

4h data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

NSEG.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th

The 5h data block is repeated NSEG times for patches not entered by means of user subroutines
5h data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
The 6h data block is repeated NPOINT times for patches not entered by means number of user
6h data block
1-5
1st
Point number.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th
I. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Poly-Surface)

4i data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
The 5i data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for poly-surfaces.
1587 CHANGE RIGID

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5i data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
J. For 3-D Rigid Surface (NURBS)

4j data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
The 5j data block is repeated (NPTU NPTV) for control points.

5j data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
The 6j data block is repeated (NPTU NPTV) for homogeneous coordinate.

6j data block
1-10
1st
The 7j data block is repeated (NPTU + NORU) + (NPTV + NORV) for knot vectors.
7j data block
1-10
1st
Knot vector(0 k 1).
For each trimming curve, data blocks 8j, 9j, 10j, and 11j.
8j data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
The 9j data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
CHANGE RIGID 1588

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9j data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
The 10j data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
10j data block
1-10
1st
The 11j data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
11j data block
1-10
1st
K. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Cylinder)

4k data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
5k data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th

surface.
71-80
8th

Note:

1589 CHANGE RIGID

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
L. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Sphere)

4l data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
5l data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Radius of sphere.
Note:

ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D) 1590

Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
D)
Description
This option allows for the input of a new rigid contact surface. The new body will be velocity controlled.
If a load controlled rigid body is added the node number(s) having the degrees of freedom associated with
the rigid body must already exist in the model. This option may be used multiple times to add more than
one new rigid surface.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the word ADD RIGID.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Body number (must be 1 higher than the current number of bodies).
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 if body is a symmetry plane.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th

position of this node is at the center of rotation given in the 5th data block.
1591 ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D)

Format
Fixed
31-35
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
degrees of freedom. The position of this node is at the center of rotation
given in the 5th data block.
Both nodes of a load-controlled body may use the TRANSFORMATION or COORD SYSTEM option to
allow for movement in the user-defined directions. Note also that it is not necessary for the user-defined
directions at the nodes to be identical to each other.
The load controlled body node(s) may have FIXED DISP/POINT LOAD or connections with
environment/other structures using the SPRINGS option.
36-40
8th

1: rigid body,
3: symmetry body
3rd data block

1-32
1st
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

Only required if a mechanical-displacement analysis.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Angular velocity or angular position about local axis through center

of rotation.
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
7th data block

1-5
1st
center of rotation.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the third component of velocity, or target position
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
Enter the table id for the friction coefficient.
8th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Body temperature (TBODY).

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
10th data block

1-10
1st

(HBL).
11th data block

1-5
1st
12th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
13th data block

Only if Joule heating is included
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
14th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Enter the body pressure.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
15th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0t.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
16th data block

1-10
1st
1
----k1
11-20
2nd
1
----c1
17th data block

1-5
1st
1
6-10
2nd
1
k1
c1
The 18th through 21st data blocks are repeated for as many geometrical data as required (NETTY).
18a data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 19th data block is repeated once for each point entered.
19a data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

18b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd


Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
19b data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

18c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

19c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

The 18d data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
18d data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
19d data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
20d data block
1-10
1st
The 21d data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
21d data block
1-10
1st
ADD RIGID (2-D) 1596

ADD RIGID (2-D)
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the word ADD RIGID.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th

1597 ADD RIGID (2-D)

Format
Fixed
31-35
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
36-40
8th

1: rigid body,
3: symmetry body
3rd data block

1-32
1st
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
4th data
block
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

The 6th data block is only required for a mechanical-displacement analysis.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

of rotation.
41-50
5th
Not used; enter 0.
51-60
6th
Not used; enter 0.
61-70
7th
Not used; enter 0.
71-80
8th
7th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
8th data block

1-10
1st

( H BL ).
9th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
10th data block

1-10
1st
1
----k1
11-20
2nd
1---c1
11a data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 12a data block is repeated once for each point entered.
12a data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

11b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd


12b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

11c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

12c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

11d data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
The 12d data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
12d data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
13d data block
1-10
1st
The 14d data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
14d data block
1-10
1st

Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
ADD RIGID with TABLES Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface
(3-D)
Description
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words ADD RIGID.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Not used enter 0
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th


Format
Fixed
31-35
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
36-40
8th

1: rigid body,
3: symmetry body
3rd data block

1-32
1st
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

of rotation.
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
7th data block

1-5
1st
center of rotation.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the third component of velocity, or target position
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th

8th data block
1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Body temperature (TBODY).

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

9th data block
1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
10th data block

1-10
1st

(HBL).
11th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table id associated with (HBL).
12th data block

1-10
1st
Not used.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Body voltage.
13th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
14th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Enter the body pressure.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
15th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
16th data block

1-10
1st
1
----k1
11-20
2nd
1
----c1
17th data block

1-5
1st
1
Enter the table id associated with ----
6-10
2nd
1
Enter the table id associated with ----
k1
c1
The 18th through 25th data blocks are repeated for each set of body entities (NETTY).
A. For 3-D Rigid Body (Ruled Surface)
18a data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th

(JPOINT2).
21-25
5th


Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th

31-35
7th

The 19a data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for ruled surface.
19a data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
B. For 3-D Rigid Body (Surface of Revolution)

18b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

generator (NPOINT).
16-20
4th

(NDIV1).
21-25
5th

direction (NDIV2).
The 19b data block is repeated NPOINT times for surface of revolution.
19b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
20b data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th

C. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface)

18c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
The 19c data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for Bezier surface.
19c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
D. For 3-D Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch)

18d data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

surface) NSEG.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th

The 19d data block is repeated NSEG times for patches not entered by means of user subroutines
19d data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
The 20d data block is repeated NPOINT times for patches not entered by means number of user
20d data block
1-5
1st
Point number.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th
E. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Poly-Surface)

18e data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
The 19e data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for poly-surfaces.
19e data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
F. For 3-D Rigid Surface (NURBS)

18f data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 19f data block is repeated (NPTU NPTV) for control points.
19f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
The 20f data block is repeated (NPTU NPTV) for homogeneous coordinate.
20f data block
1-10
1st
The 21f data block is repeated (NPTU + NORU) + (NPTV + NORV) for knot vectors.
21f data block
1-10
1st
Knot vector(0 k 1).
For each trimming curve, data blocks 22f, 23f, 24f, and 25f.
22f data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th
The 23f data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
23f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
The 24f data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
24f data block
1-10
1st
The 25f data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
25f data block
1-10
1st
G. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Cylinder)

18g data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
19g data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th

surface.
71-80
8th

Note:

H. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Sphere)

18h data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
19h data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Radius of sphere.
Note:


ADD RIGID (3-D)
input style.
Description
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words ADD RIGID.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Not used enter 0
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th


Format
Fixed
31-35
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
36-40
8th

1: rigid body,
3: symmetry body
3rd data block

1-32
1st
The 4th through the 15th data blocks are repeated once for each body to be defined.
4th data block
1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd
Number of sets of body entities, NSURGN, to be input for this rigid body.
11-15
3rd
For rigid bodies, enter 1 if body is a symmetry plane.

contact is used. Note that in this case, results are dependent upon the order
in which contact bodies are defined.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th


Format
Fixed
31-35
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
36-40
8th

1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
41-64
9th
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th

Default = 0.0.
51-60
6th

Default = 0.0.
61-70
7th
Third component direction cosine of local axis.

Default = 1.0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
7th data block

The 7th data block is only required for a mechanical-displacement analysis.
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

rotation.
41-50
5th
Not used; enter 0.
51-60
6th
Not used; enter 0.
61-70
7th
Not used; enter 0.
71-80
8th
8th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
9th data block

1-10
1st

( H BL ).
10th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11-20
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11th data block

1-10
1st
1
----k1
11-20
2nd
1---c1
A. For 3-D Rigid Body (Ruled Surface)
12a data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

16-20
4th
Entity type of the second surface generator (child) of the

surface (JPOINT2).
21-25
5th

26-30
6th

31-35
7th

The 13a data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for ruled surface.
13a data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
B. For 3-D Rigid Body (Surface of Revolution)

12b data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I

generator (NPOINT).
16-20
4th

(NDIV1).
21-25
5th

(NDIV2).
The 13b data block is repeated NPOINT times for surface of revolution.
13b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
14b data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th

C. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface)

12c data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
The 13c data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for Bezier surface.
13c data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
D. For 3-D Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch)

12d data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

surface) NSEG.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th

The 13d data block is repeated NSEG times for patches not entered by means of user subroutines
13d data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used.
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
The 14d data block is repeated NPOINT times for patches not entered by means number of user
14d data block
1-5
1st
Point number.
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
26-35
4th
E. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Poly-Surface)

12e data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 13e data block is repeated (NPOINT1 NPOINT2) times for poly-surfaces.
13e data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
F. For 3-D Rigid Surface (NURBS)

12f data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
The 13f data block is repeated (NPTU NPTV) for control points.
13f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
The 14f data block is repeated (NPTU NPTV) for homogeneous coordinate.
14f data block
1-10
1st
The 15f data block is repeated (NPTU + NORU) + (NPTV + NORV) for knot vectors.
15f data block
1-10
1st
Knot vector(0 k 1).
For each trimming curve, data blocks 16f, 17f, 18f, and 19f.
16f data block
1-5
1st
Enter 9 for NURBS.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Order (NORU).
16-20
4th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
The 17f data block is repeated NPTU times for control points.
17f data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
The 18f data block is repeated NPTU times for homogeneous coordinate.
18f data block
1-10
1st
The 19f data block is repeated NPTU+ NORU times for knot vectors.
19f data block
1-10
1st
G. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Cylinder)

12g data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
13g data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-70
7th

surface.
71-80
8th

NOTE: If the radius is negative value in 4th field the normal of cylinder
H. For 3-D Rigid Surface (Sphere)

12h data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
13h data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
Radius of sphere.
Note:

1621 CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition)

CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition)
Description
a gap exists.
initial contact.
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition) 1622

Notes:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter 2 if the 5th, 8th, 9th,16th, and 17th data blocks are to be read to
control contact, ungluing, and multiphysics. Default is 0.
The 3rd through the 22nd data blocks are entered once for each set of bodies to be input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
occurs ( DQNEAR ). A 0 entered here indicates that near contact behavior
is not included.
26-35
4th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
5th
Not used; enter 0.
46-55
6th
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
56-65
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
F

degrees of freedom.
66-70
8th
71-75
9th
Enter 0 (default) if during initial contact, a projection onto the contact


Format
Fixed
Free
76-80
10th
Data
Entry Entry
I
been set.
Enter 0 (default) if a node should not separate.
4th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the contact tolerance.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the near contact distance.
5th data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block).
6-10
2nd
22nd data block).

meaning are:
A = 1:
B = 1:
description.
B = 2:
only bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the

B = 3:
only bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the

B = 4:

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
B = 5:
B = 6:
both top and bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the
direction/thickness contribution of shell elements as entered on the
CONTACT option.
Note:
The choice B = 6 for both bodies in a contact combination is only

C = 0:
C = 1:
C = 10:
C = 11:
If beam-to-beam contact is not activated on the CONTACT option, the default value
of C is 0, otherwise the default value is 1.
6th data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Enter the interference closure amount, normal to the contact surface.
31-40
4th

41-50
5th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
ratio is 2.
7th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the contact separation threshold.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the interface closure amount.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the friction stress limit.
8th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

41-50
5th

51-60
6th

61-70
7th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
9th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with normal stress to break glued contact.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with tangential stress to break glued contact.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with exponent of normal stress term.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID associated with exponent of tangential stress term.
21-25
5th
Not used
26-30
6th
Not used
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID associated with wear scale factor.
10th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the contact heat transfer coefficient. (HCT)
11-20
2nd
Enter the convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior. (HCV)
21-30
3rd
Enter the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for near

behavior. (HNC)
31-40
4th
behavior. (BNC)
41-50
5th
Enter the surface emissivity. ()
51-60
6th
Enter the separation distance dependent thermal convection

coefficient. (HBL)
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
11th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID for the contact heat transfer coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID for the heat transfer coefficient for near behavior.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID for the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
16-20
4th
Enter the table ID for the exponent associated with the natural convection
for near behavior.
21-25
5th
Enter the table ID for the surface emissivity.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-30
6th
Enter the table ID for the separation dependent thermal

convection coefficient.
31-35
7th
Enter the table ID associated with (HCVNB).
36-40
8th
Enter the table ID associated with (BCVNB).
12th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
13th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the contact electrical coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the electrical transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with the separation distance dependent

electrical transfer coefficient.
14th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the contact mass transfer coefficient).
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
15th data block

1-5
1st
Enter the table ID associated with the contact mass transfer coefficient.
6-10
2nd
Enter the table ID associated with the mass transfer coefficient for
near behavior.
11-15
3rd
Enter the table ID associated with the separation distance dependent mass
diffusion coefficient.
16th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
17th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
18th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
19th data block

1-5
1st
Not used; enter 0.
20th data block

1-10
1st
1
Enter the ----
11-20
2nd
1
Enter the ----
k1
c1
21st data block

1-5
1st
1
Enter the table ID for the ---k1
6-10
2nd
1
Enter the table ID for the ---c1
22nd data block

CONTACT TABLE (History Definition) 1630

CONTACT TABLE (History Definition)
input style.
Description
a gap exists.
initial contact.
1631 CONTACT TABLE (History Definition)

Notes:

Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st

2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter 2 if the 4th, 6th, and 10th data blocks are to be read to control
contact, ungluing, and multiphysics. Default is 0.
The 3rd through the 13th data blocks are entered once for each set of bodies to be input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd
occurs ( DQNEAR ). A zero entered here indicates that near contact
behavior is not included.
26-35
4th
Not used; enter 0.
36-45
5th
Not used; enter 0.
46-55
6th
Not used; enter 0.

Format
Fixed
56-65
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
F

degrees of freedom.
66-70
8th
71-75
9th
Enter 0 (default) if, during initial contact, a projection onto the contact

Format
Fixed
Free
76-80
10th
Data
Entry Entry
I
been set.
Enter 0 if a node should not separate (default).
4th data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block).
6-10
2nd
13th data block).

meaning are:
A=1:
B=1:
description.
B=2:
only bottom faces, including thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=3:
only bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
B=4:
B=5:
B=6:
both top and bottom faces, ignoring thickness offset, are included in the boundary
description.
direction/thickness contribution of shell elements as entered on the CONTACT
option.
Note:
The choice B=6 for both bodies in a contact combination is only


Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
C=0:
C=1:
C=10:
C=11:
If beam-to-beam contact is not activated on the CONTACT option, the default
value of C is 0, otherwise the default value is 1.
5th data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Enter the interference closure amount; normal to the contact surface.
31-40
4th

41-50
5th
51-60
6th

Format
Fixed
61-70
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th
ratio is 2.
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

41-50
5th

51-60
6th

61-70
7th
7th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the contact heat transfer coefficient ( H T ).
11-20
2nd
Enter the convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior ( H CV ).
21-30
3rd
Enter the natural convection heat transfer coefficient for near behavior
( H NC ).
31-40
4th
behavior ( B NC ).
41-50
5th
Enter the surface emissivity ( ).
51-60
6th
Enter the separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient

( H BL ).
61-70
7th
71-80
8th

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Enter the separation distance dependent electrical coefficient.
9th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the contact mass transfer coefficient.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
10th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
11th data block

1-10
1st
Not used; enter 0.
12th data block

1-10
1st
1
Enter the ---k1
11-20
2nd
1
Enter the ---c1
13th data block

1637 CONTACT NODE (History Definition)

CONTACT NODE (History Definition)
Description
This option is used to define which nodes in a body might potentially contact other surfaces. This option
can be used to reduce the computational cost if a body has many exterior nodes and it is known for which
nodes contact might occur. If this option is not used, all exterior surface nodes are checked for contact.
Notes:
If this option is used and a node number is not explicitly listed, that node might penetrate
other bodies.
the CONTACT NODE option after the END OPTION.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
Enter the words CONTACT NODE.
Enter the number of bodies for which exterior nodes are defined
Body number.
Enter a list of nodes that are potential contact nodes.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block

1-5
1st
4th data block

1-80
1st
MOTION CHANGE 1638

Define Motion of Rigid Surfaces
MOTION CHANGE
input style. When using the table driven input for contact, the motion of the
rigid surfaces can be defined on the CONTACT with TABLES model
definition option by referencing tables that are functions of time.
Description
This option is useful for prescribing the motion of rigid bodies when the CONTACT option is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words MOTION CHANGE.
Enter the number of sets of rigid bodies to be input.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, once for each data set.
2-D Contact Problems
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the rigid body number.
6-10
2nd
Enter -1 for position controlled body.

Enter 0 for velocity controlled body.
Enter 1 for load controlled body.
4th data block (if velocity controlled rigid surface)

1-10
1st
First component of velocity of center of rotation (COR).
11-20
2nd
Second component of velocity of COR.
21-30
3rd
Angular velocity (in radian/unit time) about COR.
31-40
4th
4th data block (if position controlled rigid surface)

1-10
1st
First component of position of COR.
11-20
2nd
Second component of position of COR.
21-30
3rd
Angular position (in radian) about COR.
31-40
4th
1639 MOTION CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3-D Contact Problems

3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the rigid body number.
6-10
2nd
Enter -1 for position controlled body.

Enter 0 for velocity controlled body.
Enter 1 for load controlled body.
4th data block

If velocity controlled rigid surface.
1-10
1st
First component of velocity of COR.
11-20
2nd
Second component of velocity of COR.
21-30
3rd
Third component of velocity of COR.
31-40
4th
Angular velocity (in radian/unit time) about local axis through COR.
41-50
5th
4th data block

If position controlled rigid surface.
1-10
1st
First component of position of COR.
11-20
2nd
Second component of position of COR.
21-30
3rd
Third component of position of COR.
31-40
4th
Angular position (in radian) about local axis through COR.
41-50
5th
SS-ROLLING 1640
Define the Parameters for Steady State Transport
SS-ROLLING
Description
This option is used to define the spinning, cornering, and ground moving velocities for a body in steady
state rolling analysis.
Alternatively, this option can also define parameters for a procedure in steady state transport analysis
to achieve certain load conditions such as friction force or torque by adjusting spinning velocity.
This requires the corresponding degrees of freedom of the ground body being properly constrained
(no moving).
The torque (friction force) controlled steady state analysis requires iteration to determine the spinning
velocity; in addition to Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations, the convergence is slower compared to
the spinning velocity controlled analysis. It is recommended the spinning velocity control option be used
if a series of steady state solutions are to be obtained. The torque (friction force) control option is
advantageous in case of only one steady state solution at a specific torque (friction force) is required. Start
the job with spinning velocity control and switch to torque (friction force) control at a point near to the
real solution improves the efficiency of the calculation.
This option can be used with either AUTO LOAD or AUTO STEP. The velocities, friction force, or torque
defined here are total values. Their values at a given time within the load case are obtained by time
interpolating between the values defined here and those at the end of the last case.
In the current release, there can be only one spinning body under steady state conditions and it contains
all existing elements. The spinning velocity is applied to all elements in the model. The frictional force
and torque are associated with the contact body defined here. Refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Input, Chapter 5 in the Steady State Rolling Analysis section for more details.
Ps
Ts
Tc
c
Pc
Figure 4-1
Kinematics of a Rolling Body
1641 SS-ROLLING
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SS-ROLLING.
Body ID for spinning body.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
If no contact body is defined, all existing elements are included in the

spinning body.
6-10
2nd
Body ID for ground.
11-15
3rd
jtrncon:flag to input format.
= 0 spinning velocity/ground velocity input

= 1 friction force/ground velocity input
= 2 torque/ground velocity input
Default is 0.
16-25
4th
If jtrncon
= 0 spinning velocity (cycle/time)
= 1 friction force in 0 rolling direction
= 2 torque with respect to spinning axis.
26-35
5th
Cornering velocity (cycle/time).
36-45
6th
x component of ground velocity (in sliding direction).
46-55
7th
y component of ground velocity (normal to surface).
56-65
8th
z component of ground velocity (in rolling direction).
66-70
9th
Used only if jtrncon = 0.

If set to 1, friction coefficient increases gradually from 0 to the final value
within the load case based on the time increment. In this case only solution
at the end of the load case is physically meaningful. This may enhance
stability of the analysis, especially for the transition periods from
standstill to rolling and from brake to traction.
Default is 0.
SS-ROLLING 1642
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

Only needed if the 3rd field in the 2nd data block (jtrncon) is not zero.
1-5
1st
Maximum number of adjustments in friction force (torque) - ground

velocity input.
Default is 20.
6-15
2nd
Tolerance ratio of friction force (torque) change in the adjustment over the
maximum friction force (torque).
Default is 0.02.
1643 RELEASE
Define Release Data
RELEASE
Define Release Data
Description
This option is useful for the analysis of spring-back after bodies contact one another. The body number
is entered and then all of the nodes which contact that body are released at the beginning of the increment.
The contact force can either be immediately removed or gradually reduced. In addition, the body must
either be moving away to avoid nodes recontacting during the same increment or the CONTACT TABLE
option should be used to deactivate contract.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word RELEASE.
11-15
2nd
Enter 0 if the contact forces are to be immediately removed (default).

Enter 1 if the contact forces are to be reduced to zero over the number of
increments specified in this load period.
2nd data block

Enter a list of bodies. All nodes contacting these bodies are released.
APPROACH 1644
Move Rigid Surfaces into Position
APPROACH
Description
The APPROACH option allows you to move rigid bodies so that they just make contact with deformable
bodies. In the case of multistage forging, you usually have a time period where the first set of bodies are
released, followed by a new time period where the second set of bodies are brought into contact. This
option is used in conjunction with the CONTACT TABLE option to determine which bodies are now
applicable, and the CONTACT (2-D or 3-D), CONTACT with TABLES (2-D or 3-D), or MOTION CHANGE
option which prescribes the velocity of the rigid bodies. Marc moves all rigid bodies with nonzero
velocities until they come into contact with a deformable body.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the word APPROACH.
1645 MOVE (History Definition)

Perform Rigid Body Motion on Model
MOVE (History Definition)
Description
The MOVE option allows you to apply a rigid body motion to either a rigid body, a deformable body, or
a collection of elements.
In general, use the RELEASE option to separate the moving elements from previously contacting
surfaces. You need to use the CONTACT TABLE and/or MOTION CHANGE to control the rigid bodies,
and the APPROACH option to position the new rigid bodies.
Note:
The MOVE option may not be used with shell or beam elements. One must be very careful
if the elements use the ORIENTATION option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word MOVE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the contact body number. For deformable body, all elements
associated with this body are moved. If a zero is entered, the 3rd data
block is used.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to move symmetry bodies that contact the deformable body.
3rd data block

Used only if body number is zero.
Enter list of elements to be moved.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Translation in first direction.
11-20
2nd
Translation in second direction.
21-30
3rd
Translation in third direction.
31-40
4th
Rotation about first direction.
41-50
5th
Rotation about second direction.
51-60
6th
Rotation about third direction.
For 2-D planar analysis, rotation about X and Y axis should be zero.
For axisymmetric analysis, all rotations should be zero.
MOVE (History Definition) 1646

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
First coordinate of center of rotation.
11-20
2nd
Second coordinate of center of rotation.
21-30
3rd
Third coordinate of center of rotation.
1647 ANNEAL
Modify State of Material
ANNEAL
Modify State of Material
Description
This option allows you to simulate an annealing operation at the end of deformation. You can choose to
set the stresses and/or strains to zero. Also, an annealing temperature can be set.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word ANNEAL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 1 to set stresses to zero.
6-10
2nd
Enter 1 to set strains to zero.
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to set temperature to anneal temperature.
16-25
4th
Enter the anneal temperature.
26-30
5th
Enter 0 if a list of elements is entered in the 3rd data block.

Enter 1 if a list of deformable contact bodies is entered in the 3rd
data block.
3rd data block

Enter a list of elements or deformable contact bodies for which this
is applied.
SYNCHRONIZED 1648
SYNCHRONIZED
Description
The SYNCHRONIZED option allows you to move rigid bodies so that they just make contact with
deformable bodies. (In the case of multistage forging, you usually have a time period where the first set
of dies are released, followed by a new time period where the second set of dies are brought into contact.
This option is used in conjunction with the CONTACT TABLE option to determine which dies are now
applicable, and the CONTACT (2-D or 3-D), CONTACT with TABLES (2-D or 3-D), or MOTION CHANGE
option which prescribes the velocity of the rigid dies. Marc all rigid bodies with nonzero velocities until
one of the moving rigid surfaces makes contact with a deformable body.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the word SYNCHRONIZE.
1649 SPLINE (History Definition)

SPLINE (History
Definition)
Description
In order to improve the accuracy for a deformable-deformable contact analysis, the outer surface of a
contacted body can be described based on a spline (2-D) or Coons surface (3-D) description. The
analytical surface is then used to calculate the normal to the deformable body and the closest point
projection of a contacting node.
In 2-D, for a contacted segment, a spline is created based on:
tangent at first and second point of segment
position of first and second point of segment
In 3-D, for a contacted segment, a Coons surface is created based on:
tangent vectors at corner points of segment
position of corner points of segment
zero twist vectors
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word SPLINE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of deformable bodies for which the spline description
must be applied.
6-10
2nd
Enter the increment frequency of writing the spline representation in Marc

Mentat model files, called jid_spline_inc.mfd, where inc is the
increment number. These files can be used to visualize the spline
description and can be merged to the post file during post processing.
Default is zero, so that no additional files are generated.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each deformable body with a spline description.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd
For 3-D analyses only: enter 1 to enforce C0-continuity at edges where the
normal vector to the outer contour of the structure shows a discontinuity
(also see the 4th data block below).
SPLINE (History Definition) 1650

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
11-15
3rd
Enter 1 to automatically determine nodes (2-D) or edges (3-D) where the

16-25
4th
Used only if the 3rd entry of this data block is set to 1: enter the threshold
angle to decide if there is a normal vector discontinuity between two
adjacent segments of the contact body defined in the first entry of this data
block. The threshold angle should be between 0 and 90 degrees; the
default value is 60 degrees.
26-30
5th
Only used if the contact body given on the first entry of this data block
consists of quadratic elements.
Enter 1 if the midside node coordinates have to be adjusted by projecting
the midside nodes on the analytical curve (2-D) or surface (3-D) obtained
by fitting a curve or surface through the given element coordinates.
Note:
This projection is done at the very beginning of the analysis and

may be useful if a curved contact body consists of quadratic
elements, but the midside nodes are located on the straight
edges between the corner nodes.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes defining nodes (2-D) or edges
(3-D) where the
Notes:
In 3-D, when there is a normal vector discontinuity at an

element edge, the corner nodes defining the edge must be
entered one after another.
If the automatic detection is activated using the 3rd data
block above, the nodes/edges with a normal vector
discontinuity found by the program will be added to the list
defined here.
1651 EXCLUDE (History Definition)

EXCLUDE (History Definition)
Description
For certain contact problems, you might wish to influence the decision regarding the deformable segment
a node contacts. By means of the EXCLUDE option, you can specify a list of nodes defining segments to
be excluded from the contacted bodies.
Use the set name convention if ADAPT GLOBAL model definition is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word EXCLUDE.
Enter the number of deformable bodies for which the EXCLUDE option
must be applied.
2 data block
1-5
1st
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are repeated for each deformable body with the EXCLUDE option.
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd
Enter 0 to define excluded segments using node numbers (default).

Enter 1 to give a element: edge or element: face set in Marc convention.
Enter 2 to give a element: edge or element: face set in Mentat convention.
Use 4 data block is 2nd field of 3rd data block = 0.

4th data block
Enter a list of nodes defining segments to be excluded from contacted
bodies.
Notes:
In 2-D, each segment must be defined by two nodes.

In 3-D, each segment must be defined by four nodes.
If, in a 3-D, a segment corresponds to a tetrahedral or a
collapsed hexahedral element, then the last two nodes of the
set of four should be identical.
Use 5th data block is 2nd field of 3rd data block = 1 or 2.

5th data block
1-32
1st
Enter an element edge or element face set name.
ACTUATOR 1652
ACTUATOR
Description
This option can be used in conjunction with the truss element type 9 to simulate an actuator. This is often
used in mechanism analyses to allow the prescription of the relative distance between two points. This
option should be used with the LARGE DISP parameter whenever large rotations of the actuator or large
displacements are anticipated.
The original length of the actuator is given in the fourth field of the GEOMETRY option. The actuator is
treated as an elastic link.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word ACTUATOR.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of actuators (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of actuator data.

Defaults to input.
3rd data block

Repeat for each actuator to be modified.
1-5
1st
Enter the element number
6-15
2nd
Enter the new length of the actuator.
16-20
3rd
Enter the table ID for the length of the actuator.
1653
Rate Dependent Analysis
Chapt Rate Dependent Analysis

This section describes the control of the transient aspects of rate dependent analysis. There are several
er 4
ways to specify the time step (TIME STEP) in either creep or viscoelastic analysis. Note that the adaptive
Histor options
AUTO STEP, AUTO CREEP, and AUTO THERM CREEP are recommended. The ACCUMULATE
and EXTRAPOLATE options are techniques to allow extrapolation in time based on the results previously
y
calculated. Note that extrapolation is always a risky procedure.
Defini
tion
Optio
ns
CREEP INCREMENT 1654

Define Creep Increment
CREEP INCREMENT
Define Creep Increment
Description
This option allows manual control of the creep time step size. This form of control is not recommended.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
Enter the words CREEP INCREMENT.
Creep time increment.
2nd data block

1-15
1st
1655 AUTO CREEP

Control Transient Creep
AUTO CREEP
Description
This option controls the transient creep analysis. You specify a total creep time and a suggested time
increment. Marc automatically selects the largest possible time increment consistent with the tolerance
set on stress and strain increments.
You should make sure that load increments are not left on unintentionally, since this would reduce the
time step size severely. Information is also input for limiting the total number of time increments. See
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words AUTO CREEP.
2nd data block

1-15
1st
Enter the suggested time increment for creep. When the automatic creep
control is in use, Marc iterates for the appropriate increment size to satisfy
the tolerances placed on stress and strain increments.
16-30
2nd
Period of creep time to be covered during this AUTO CREEP option. This
value can be changed at restart by using the REAUTO option.
31-35
3rd
Maximum number of time increments to be allowed during this part of the

creep analysis.
Default is 50 increments.
36-40
4th
Maximum number iterations allowed to modify the time step during

an increment.
Default is 5.
41-45
5th
Number of increments between stiffness matrix updates. This option is

used to prevent unnecessary updating of the stiffness matrix during large
displacement creep analysis.
If left blank, the stiffness matrix is reformed each step if tangent modulus
nonlinearities (for example, plasticity) are present.
46-50
6th
Not used; enter 0.
51-60
7th
Enter stable time step limit, if known. Marc uses stresses and strain
change tolerances if this is not used. Stable time step limit is needed
for viscoplasticity.
AUTO CREEP 1656

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-10
1st
If the fifth field is 0, enter tolerance on the creep strain increment relative
to the elastic strain.
Default is 0.50. Note that a higher value is likely to cause
stability problems.
If the fifth field is 1, enter the maximum creep strain increment allowed.
Default is .01.
11-20
2nd
If the fifth field is 0, enter the tolerance on the stress change per stress
during creep.
Default is 0.10.
If the fifth field is 0, enter the maximum stress increment.
Default is 100.
This control is included primarily for accuracy purposes. The default
value is adequate for creep laws of the type = An, where 3<n<6. For
lower values of n, the tolerance can be increased; for higher values, it
21-30
3rd
Tolerance on low stress point cut-off. Points with a stress lower than this
ratio relative to the maximum stress in the structure are not used in the
creep tolerance checking.
Default is 0.05.
31-35
4th
Number of the element in which the stress change is checked. Leave

blank to check all elements for stress change. If a number of elements
(but not all elements) are to be checked, enter the number of elements as
a negative number, with 14 as the maximum. In this case, the actual
elements are entered on the next data block.
36-40
5th
4th data block

This series is only required if the entry in the fourth field of the previous block is negative.
1-70
1st
Enter the elements to be checked in (14I5) format.
1657 ACCUMULATE
Specify Accumulation Option
ACCUMULATE
Specify Accumulation Option
Description
This flags the start of accumulation of strains and displacements for use with the extrapolate option. If a
new accumulation period is to be started immediately after an extrapolation in the same increment, the
ACCUMULATE option must be preceded by the EXTRAPOLATE option. These options are typically used
to predict creep behavior at large times.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word ACCUMULATE.
EXTRAPOLATE 1658
Specify Extrapolation Option
EXTRAPOLATE
Specify Extrapolation Option
Description
This option uses the accumulation of strains and displacements during one cycle of loading. It takes a
linear extrapolation with respect to time or loading of the accumulated quantities.
Note:
In order to use this option, the ACCUMULATE parameter must be included. The
extrapolation is made from the period starting with the last entry of the ACCUMULATE
option and ending at the current increment. If no ACCUMULATE option was used before,
the accumulation period starts at the beginning of the analysis. A regular load increment
can be applied simultaneously with the EXTRAPOLATE option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-9
1st
Enter the word EXTRAPOLATE.
If a positive number is entered: Time to which extrapolation is to

be extended.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
If a negative number is entered: Factor with which the previous

accumulation period is multiplied to obtain extrapolation period.
1659 AUTO THERM CREEP

Automatic, Thermally-Loaded Elastic-Creep Analysis
AUTO THERM CREEP
Description
This option is intended to allow automatic, thermally loaded elastic-creep/elastic-plastic-creep stress
analysis, based on a set of temperatures defined throughout the mesh as a function of time. The
temperatures and transient times are presented to Marc through the CHANGE STATE option, using input
option 3 (post file), and Marc then creates its own set of temperature steps (increments) based on a
temperature change tolerance provided on this option. The times at all temperature steps are calculated
by Marc for creep analyses.
At each temperature step (increment), an elastic/elastic-plastic analysis is carried out first to establish
stress level in the structure. A creep analysis is performed next on the structure for the time period
between current and previous temperature steps (increments). Both the elastic/elastic-plastic stress and
the creep analyses are repeated until the total creep time provided on this option is reached. Convergence
controls are provided on the CONTROL option for elastic-plastic analysis and on the AUTO THERM
CREEP option for creep analysis.
You also specify a suggested time increment for creep analysis. Marc automatically selects the largest
possible time increment consistent with the tolerance set on stress and strain increments. The analysis can
be restarted at temperature steps (increments) or at creep steps (subincrements). The results can be saved
on a post file (POST option) for postprocessing.
The automatic thermally loaded elastic-creep/elastic-plastic-creep analysis continues until the total
creep time is reached. A typical automatic thermally loaded elastic-creep/elastic-plastic-creep analysis
has as input:
AUTO THERM CREEP
50.,0,0,4.0,
0.1,2.0,
0.,0.,0.,1,
CHANGE STATE
1,3,0,19,1,4,1,
CONTINUE
In the above case, a temperature change tolerance of 50 is set for the creation of temperature steps
(increments) by Marc; the total transient time in thermal analysis is equal to 4.0; the suggested time
increment for creep analysis is 0.1; and the total creep time (time for the termination of this analysis) is
2.0. Note that the total creep time cannot be greater than the total transient time in the thermal analysis.
The data in the CHANGE STATE option indicates that the temperatures are stored in a formatted post file
(file 19) and there are four sets of temperatures on the file.
Mechanical Loading - No Table Driven Input
If no DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD or PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT option appears with the AUTO
THERM CREEP set, all mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions are held constant during
the AUTO THERM CREEP. However, DIST LOADS, POINT LOAD, PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT, or
DISP CHANGE can be included in the set. The mechanical loads and kinematic boundary conditions,
AUTO THERM CREEP 1660

which are then defined, are assumed to change in proportion to the time scale of the temperature history
defined by the CHANGE STATE option and are applied accordingly on the basis that the increments of
load and displacement correspond to the end of the transient time (TOTIM) of the AUTO THERM CREEP
option input.
Mechanical Loading - Table Driven Input
When table input is used and either FIXED DISP, POINT LOAD, or DIST LOADS references a table
which is a function of time, the total mechanical boundary condition will be evaluated based upon the
current time.
Note:
You must include the CHANGE STATE, option 3 (post file), in conjunction with
this option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-16
1st
Enter the words AUTO THERM CREEP.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the maximum temperature change to be used per step of stress

analysis. Marc linearly subdivides steps, or merges steps together, to
create increments which are close to, but do not exceed, this tolerance.
11-15
2nd
Enter the maximum number of increments to be allowed in this AUTO

THERM CREEP. If this number of increments is exceeded before the
temperature history is completed, Marc ends. This is intended as a
protection to avoid excessive increments in the case of a data error.
Default value is 50 increments if set to 0.
16-20
3rd
Reassembly internal for element matrices.
21-30
4th
Total transient time from heat transfer analysis. This is used to

proportionally scale the incremental boundary conditions.
3rd data block

1-15
1st
Enter the suggested time increment for creep. When the automatic creep
control is in use, Marc iterates for the appropriate increment size to satisfy
the tolerances placed on stress and strain increments by the CREEP model
definition option.
16-30
2nd
Total creep time to be covered during this AUTO THERM CREEP option.
This value can be changed at restart by using the REAUTO option.
1661 AUTO THERM CREEP

Format
Fixed
31-35
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Maximum number of subincrements to be allowed during this part of the

creep analysis.
Default is 50.
36-40
4th
Maximum number of iterations allowed to modify the time step during

an increment.
Default is 5.
41-45
5th
Number of increments between stiffness matrix updates. This reduces

the number of updates to the stiffness matrix for mildly nonlinear
analyses. This should not be activated if elastic material properties are
temperature dependent.
If left blank, the stiffness matrix is reformed each step if tangent modulus
nonlinearities occur.
4th data block

1-10
1st
If the fifth field is a zero, enter tolerance on the creep strain increment
relative to the elastic strain. Default is 0.50. Note that a higher value is
likely to cause stability problems.
If the fifth field is a one, enter the maximum creep strain
increment allowed.
Default is .01.
11-20
2nd
If the fifth field is a zero, enter the tolerance on the stress change per stress
during creep.
Default is 0.10.
If the fifth field is a one, enter the maximum stress increment.
Default is 100.
This control is included primarily for accuracy purposes. The default
value is adequate for creep laws of the type = An, where 3<n<6. For
lower values of n, the tolerance can be increased; for higher values, it
21-30
3rd
Tolerance on low stress point cut-off. Points with a stress lower than this
ratio relative to the maximum stress in the structure is not used in the creep
tolerance checking.
Default is 0.05.
AUTO THERM CREEP 1662

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
31-35
4th
Number of the element in which the stress change is checked. Leave blank
to check all elements for stress change. If a number of elements (but not
all elements) are to be checked, enter the number of elements as a negative
number, with 14 as the maximum. In this case, the actual elements are
entered on the next data line.
36-40
5th
5th data block

This data block is only required if the entry in the fourth field of the previous data block is negative.
1-70
1st
Enter the elements to be checked in (14I5) format.
1663
Dynamic Analysis
Chapt Dynamic Analysis

This section describes the options used to control dynamic analysis. The MODAL SHAPE option requests
er 4
Marc calculate the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the structure. In linear dynamic analysis, this
Histor that
option immediately follows the END OPTION. It is possible to do a nonlinear static analysis and then
perform a modal extraction based on the current deformed state. These modes can then be used to
y
perform a transient analysis. The DYNAMIC CHANGE option is used to specify the incremental time and
Defini the total time period to be covered. An automatic time-stepping scheme (AUTO STEP) is also available
for dynamic analysis. The SPECTRUM option allows a spectral response analysis be performed based
tion
upon the modes previously extracted. In addition, harmonic analysis can be performed at any step in an
Optio analysis. The harmonic response is based on the current configuration of the structure.
ns
MODAL SHAPE 1664

Define Modal Shape
MODAL SHAPE
Define Modal Shape
Description
This option is used when a modal analysis is indicated on the DYNAMIC parameter or during an acoustic
analysis to indicate that eigenmodes are to be extracted.
When using the inverse power shift method, this option controls the initial shift and the number of modes
to be calculated per shift. The accuracy of the modes calculated is degraded if the number of modes per
shift is too high.
When using the Lanczos method, if a highest frequency is entered, a Sturm sequence check is performed.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
Enter the words MODAL SHAPE.
Option A
If inverse power sweep method is used (as specified with the DYNAMIC parameter), use this option.
2nd data block
1-5
1st
Maximum number of iterations per mode in the power sweep.

Default is 40.
6-15
2nd

eigenvalue is less than the tolerance.
16-25
3rd
Initial shift in cycles per time. The power shift is likely to start converging
to the eigenvalue closest to this value.
Default is 0.
26-35
4th
Maximum frequency to be extracted in cycles per time. If this is left blank

or zero, the number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC parameter is
extracted. If this is nonzero, extraction ends when this frequency is
exceeded or when the number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC
parameter is reached, whichever occurs first.
36-40
5th
Number of modes extracted per shift. This data field determines if auto
shifting occurs. If auto shift is not required, set equal to or greater than
number of modes requested on the DYNAMIC parameter.
Default is 5.
1665 MODAL SHAPE

Define Modal Shape
Format
Fixed
41-50
Free
6th
Data
Entry Entry
F
Auto shift parameter. Marc determines the new shift point (in
frequency squared) as the highest frequency square plus this entry
times the difference between the highest and next highest distinct
frequency squared.
Default is 1.0.
Option B
If the Lanczos method is used (as specified with the DYNAMIC parameter), use the following data
blocks.
2nd data block
1-10
1st
Lowest frequency of mode to be extracted (in cycles/time). This is also the

initial shift point. This cannot be changed upon restart.
11-20
2nd
SHFMAX, highest frequency of modes to be extracted. If set to 0, NSNRM

modes are extracted. If not set to zero, all modes between SHFMIN and
SHFMAX are extracted and NSNRM is not used. A Strum sequence check is
performed to calculate this number. This can be changed upon restart.

21-25
3rd
NSNRM, number of requested modes. Only needed if SHFMAX is set equal

to 0. This can be increased upon restart.
26-30
4th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
5th
Not used; enter 0.
RECOVER 1666
Recover Option
RECOVER
Recover Option
Description
This option allows for: (1) the storing of eigenvectors on the post file, (2) the recovery of reaction forces,
or (3) the recovery of stresses and reactions for a specified number of modes during a modal or a buckling
analysis. The option should be used after the modal shapes and frequencies or buckling modes have been
extracted (MODAL SHAPE or BUCKLE history definition option), and can be repeated as many times as
you wish. Additional input data is required on parameters DYNAMIC or BUCKLE for the activation of this
option, and the POST model definition option must be included in the input if the eigenvectors are to be
stored on a post file.
In the RECOVER option, the stresses are computed from the modal displacement vector, (eigenvector
without normalization), and the nodal reactions are calculated from F = K -2 M for the modal
analysis or from F = K for buckling analysis.
You can choose your normalization by entering the amplitude value of one particular degree of freedom
of one particular node in the mesh. The eigenvector is scaled linearly such that the degree of freedom on
this node reaches above amplitude.
When performing a modal analysis on a structure with rubber material, it is recommended that the modes
be scaled so that the amplitude is small relative to the element size if the modal stresses or the reactions
are to be calculated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
Enter the word RECOVER.
Starting mode number.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Default is 1.
6-10
2nd
Ending mode number.

Default is modes specified on the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter.
11-15
3rd
Set to 0 if only the eigenvectors are to be written to post file.

Set to 1 if only reactions are to be calculated.
Set to 2 if both stresses and reactions are to be calculated.
Note:
If set to 2, the 4th field of the DYNAMIC parameter or the 3rd

field of the BUCKLE parameter must be set equal to 1.
1667 RECOVER
Recover Option
Format
Fixed
16-20
Free
4th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Node number of node with respect to which the eigenvector is scaled.

Default is 0.
21-25
5th
Degree of freedom of node selected in the fourth field with respect to

which the eigenvector is scaled.
Default is 0.
26-35
6th
Reference amplitude of degree of freedom of node selected above.

Default is 0, which uses the eigenvector without user scaling.
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic) 1668

Define Integration in Time
Define Integration in Time
Description
This option specifies the parameters required for integration in time when the fixed time step procedure
is to be used. It can be used for either the modal or the direct integration procedure. See Marc Volume A:
User Information on Dynamic Options and the DYNAMIC, ACOUSTIC, PIEZO, or EL-MA parameter (see
Chapter 2).
In the case of explicit analysis, IDYN = 5, the time step is adjusted at the given increment interval to
insure that the stability limit is not violated.
In the case of explicit analysis, IDYN = 4, the time step is adjusted to ensure that the stability limit is not
violated at the start of this DYNAMIC CHANGE.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-14
1st
Enter the words DYNAMIC CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-15
1st
Time step size.
16-30
2nd
Period of time for this set of boundary conditions.
31-35
3rd
Number of time steps in this set of boundary conditions.
36-40
4th
Increment frequency to recalculate the time step for IDYN = 5; default

is 100.
41-45
5th
set equal to value in the third field. This may be used to reduce the number
of updates to the stiffness matrix for mildly nonlinear analysis.
46-50
6th
This field is not used; enter 0.
51-60
7th
Enter for Newmark operator.

Default is = 0.5 or what was used in previous
DYNAMIC CHANGE option.
61-70
8th
Enter for Newmark operator.

Default is = 0.25 or what was used in previous
DYNAMIC CHANGE option.
1669 SPECTRUM
Initiate Spectral Response Analysis
SPECTRUM
Initiate Spectral Response Analysis
Description
This option initiates the spectral response analysis. The calculation is based upon the last set of
eigenmodes obtained.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SPECTRUM.
Enter the number of modes to be used.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 0 if a range of frequencies are given in the second and third field.
6-15
2nd
Enter the lowest frequency to be used in response analysis, in cycles per

time unit.
16-25
3rd
Enter the highest frequency to be used in response analysis, in cycles per

time unit.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Weighting factor associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Weighting factor associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Weighting factor associated with third degree of freedom.

Etc.; for higher degrees of freedommaximum of 8 factors on a data line.
HARMONIC (Dynamic) 1670

Define Excitation Frequency
HARMONIC (Dynamic)
Description
This option is necessary to specify the frequency of excitation implemented. The option is used in
dynamic harmonic, acoustic, and piezoelectric analyses.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Enter the lowest frequency in cycles per time unit.
11-20
2nd
Enter the increment in frequency for each subincrement.

If zero, only single frequency is used.
21-30
3rd
Enter the highest frequency in cycles per time unit.
31-35
4th
Enter 0 for linear increments in frequency (default).

Enter 1 for logarithmic increments in frequency.
36-40
5th
Enter the number of frequencies (n) if linear intervals, then if n = 0 ;

n = HIGH LOW
i = entered value of HIGH LOW n 1
If logarithmic increments in frequency

HIGH 1 n 1
fac = ----------------
LOW
i = fac ** i 1
1671 ACC CHANGE

Define Acceleration Boundary Conditions
ACC CHANGE
Define Acceleration Boundary Conditions
Description
This option allows new nodal acceleration conditions to be specified in a dynamic analysis. You specify
total accelerations through this option. Complex accelerations are more conveniently defined by the
FORCDT user subroutine. Note that enough space must be specified on the SIZING parameter on the
maximum number of boundary condition field to allow for possible increased storage requirements
arising from the use of this option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ACC CHANGE.
Enter the number of sets of boundary condition data lines to be read

(optional)
2nd data block

1-5
1st
For each set of boundary conditions use the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed acceleration for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
11-20
2nd
Prescribed acceleration for second degree of freedom listed in data block

4.
21-30
3rd
Prescribed acceleration for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.
4th data block

Note:
5th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above accelerations are applied.

Chapt Heat Transfer Analysis

This section describes the control of both steady-state and transient heat transfer analyses. The
er 4
option is available to specify the incremental time and the total time in this set. The default
Histor isTRANSIENT
that an adaptive time stepping is performed to cover the complete time period, such that the your
tolerances are satisfied. These tolerances are given in the CONTROL option. The AUTO STEP option may
y
also be used to control the time steps in a transient thermal analysis. There are several methods of
Defini specifying the fluxes. Note that the total flux is required in a heat transfer analysis.
tion
Optio
ns
1673 TRANSIENT
Specify Transient or Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis
TRANSIENT
Description
This option controls the transient heat transfer analysis. Marc optionally uses automatic time step
controls, based on the maximum nodal temperature change allowed (input on the CONTROL model
definition option). You input a suggested initial time step which is adjusted according to the automatic
stepping scheme (see Marc Volume A: User Information). The transient period can be ended in one of two
ways. A time period is input the transient solution continues until this period is completed. You can also
give a finish temperature, and a flag which indicates that the transient solution should end when all nodal
point temperatures are below (or above) this finish temperature. This second technique for ending the
transient is optional and does not disable the first option, so that an adequately long time period should
be allowed if the finish temperature option is to govern the solution. In addition, you should supply a
maximum number of steps to be allowed. This is intended to prevent an excessive number of increments
in case of a data error. If Marc analyzes this number of increments before completing the time period (or
reaching the finish temperature), it stops any further analysis.
For steady-state solutions, use the TRANSIENT NON AUTO option with one infinite time step (set
specific heat to zero if problem is linear). Use the recycling tolerance for property evaluation for
nonlinear steady-state solutions. In addition, the STEADY STATE option is also available for
steady-state solution.
The first line must be in fixed format.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-9
1st
Enter the word TRANSIENT.
11-18
2nd
Leave blank to use automatic time stepping. Enter the words NON AUTO to
suppress automatic time stepping, and complete total period with a uniform
time step.
21-28
3rd
Enter the words NO SOLID to suppress performing a structural analysis

during this period in a coupled analysis.
2nd data block

1-10
1st
Suggested initial time step. This is be adjusted by the automatic timestepping scheme (see Marc Volume A: User Information).
11-20
2nd
Time period. Marc continues the transient solution until this time period
is completed, unless the finish temperature option is flagged.
TRANSIENT 1674
Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Maximum number of steps to be allowed in this transient period. Marc

stops the analysis if this number of steps is exceeded. This data field is
intended to be used to avoid excessive steps in the automatic control.
Default (if left blank) is time period divided by suggested step.
26-30
4th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
5th
Reassembly interval number of increments between reassessment of

element (material) properties based on temperature or time dependency.
For purely linear problems (constant properties), a large number should be
given here to avoid reassembly.
Default value (if left blank) is automatic reassembly controlled by the
temperature change given on the CONTROL option, data line 3, second
field. Note that if a material property or film coefficient changes,
reassembly is needed.
36-40
6th
Set to 1 to finish the transient when all nodal temperatures fall below the
value given in the seventh field (see below).
Set to -1 to finish the transient when all nodal temperatures exceed the
value given in the seventh field (see below).
Set to 0 to complete transient time period without any check on
temperatures reached.
Set to 2 to indicate that a steady-state analysis is to be performed in
one increment.
41-50
7th
Finish temperature value to be used in conjunction with flag set above.
1675 STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer)

Specify Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis
Specify Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis
Description
This option allows the solution of the steady-state heat transfer problem. This procedure uses less
computation time than using the TRANSIENT NON AUTO option with a large time step. If temperature
dependent properties or boundary conditions are included, the recycling tolerance for property evaluation
must be used so that iteration is performed.
Marc begins execution of the step when a CONTINUE option is encountered. Multiple steady-state steps
can be performed to solve quasi-steady-state problems.
The first line must be in fixed format.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-10
1st
Enter the words STEADY STATE.
21-28
2nd
Enter the words NO SOLID to suppress performing a structural analysis

during this period in a coupled analysis.
DIST FLUXES (History Definition) 1676

DIST FLUXES (History Definition)
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) fluxes to be specified. Distributed fluxes are
converted to consistent nodal fluxes by Marc. For a given element type, there is an established convention
for the application of surface flux on a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be used to input and
spatial dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st

Also see distributed flux type 101 under the COUPLE

parameter definition.
6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Flux index (optional). (Flux index is to be used in the FLUX

user subroutine.)
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed fluxes.
1677 POINT FLUX (History Definition)

Define Point Fluxes
POINT FLUX (History Definition)
Define Point Fluxes
Description
This option allows total nodal point fluxes to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used for
the time dependent fluxes. If the number of nodes which have point fluxes has been changed from the
model definition option, you must give an upper bound on the FLUXES parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point flux data; defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
Magnitude of point flux.
11-20
2nd
Magnitude of point flux for second degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
21-30
3rd
Magnitude of point flux for third degree of freedom, (heat transfer shell
elements only).
4th data block

WELD FLUX (History Definition) 1678

WELD FLUX (History
Definition)
Description
Refer to Marc Volumes A, D, and E for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of weld fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Weld Flux Index (Index is to be used in the UWELDFLUX

user subroutine).
6-10
2nd
Weld Flux Type:

11-15
3rd
Weld Path Index.
16-20
4th
Weld Filler Index.
1679 WELD FLUX (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Parameter identifying the type of distributed flux. See library element

Note that the parameter in this field should be consistent with the weld
flux type specified in the 2nd field.
26-30
6th

0 Initial weld position is automatically taken as first point of
associated weld path.
1 Initial weld position is specified in the first three fields of the 4th
data block.
31-35
7th
Weld Flux Activation Flag

0 Weld Flux boundary condition is active in loadcase
1 Weld Flux boundary condition is inactive in loadcase
36-67
8th
Weld Flux Name (optional)
4th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-65
7th
Notes: The initial position defined in fields 1, 2, and 3 of data block 4 is only used if the initial
position should be along the associated weld path. Else, the program will terminate with exit
20. The defined initial weld position is mandatory when the UWELDPATH user subroutine is
used to define the associated weld path. When the same weld flux is specified in multiple
loadcases, the initial weld position is only used for the starting loadcase. For subsequent
loadcases, the position at the end of the previous loadcase is used as the starting position.
The X and Y offsets (fields 4 and 5 in data block 4) are defined in the local coordinate system
of the weld flux. They are 0 by default. The Y offset is along the arc direction and the X offset
is along the tangent direction. These offsets allow the flux to be located at a specified distance
from the associated weld path.
WELD FLUX (History Definition) 1680

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-10
1st
Power of weld flux.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th

41-50
5th
Depth of weld.
51-60
6th
61-70
7th
71-80
8th
Maximum distance from weld origin for nonzero flux.
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Scale Factor Flag:

16-20
4th
Fields 5 - 7 are only valid for the double ellipsoidal volumetric weld flux:
21-25
5th
26-30
6th
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
Table ID for maximum distance from weld origin.
Notes: The 5th and 6th data blocks are directly used for the ellipsoidal and disc shaped weld fluxes.
The flux values are defined directly for the user subroutine option. The weld dimensions can
still be entered in this case since they are useful for filler element activation, adaptive meshing
box definition, etc.
automatically determined by the program. The scale factor flag in the 3rd field of the 6th data
block determines the usage. See Volume A for more details.
The tables defining the weld power, efficiency, weld width/radius, depth, forward and rear
lengths, and maximum distance from weld origin can be a function of time or arc length
measured along the associated weld path.
1681 WELD FLUX (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
7th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above weld flux.
WELD PATH (History Definition) 1682

WELD PATH (History
Definition)
Description
This option specifies the weld path to be followed by the weld flux. The orientation of the arc along the
path is also defined. The weld path can be specified through nodes or point coordinates of polyline curves
in the input file or through point coordinates in a separate text file, or through the UWELDPATH user
subroutine. The arc orientation can be specified through nodes, point coordinates of polyline curves,
vector components or Euler angles in the input file, point coordinates, vector components, or Euler angles
in a separate text file, or through the UWELDPATH user subroutine.
The specified path and arc orientation are used to define a moving local coordinate system. The Z axis
of the local coordinate system is along the weld path, the Y axis is along the arc orientation and the X
axis is along the tangent. X and Y axes that are perpendicular to each other and perpendicular to the given
weld path (Z axis) are constructed based on the information provided in this option. See MARC Volume
A: Theory and User Information for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words WELD PATH.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of weld paths to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of weld path data, defaults to input.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Weld Path Index (Index is used for cross-referencing with the 3rd data
block of the WELD FLUX option)
6-10
2nd
Weld Path Type

1 Weld Path is specified through ordered list of nodes
2 Weld Path is specified through point coordinates of polyline curves.
4 Weld Path is specified through text file
5 Weld Path is specified through the UWELDPATH user subroutine.
1683 WELD PATH (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Arc Orientation Type

1 Arc Orientation is specified through ordered list of nodes.
2 Arc Orientation is specified through point coordinates of
polyline curves.
3 Arc Orientation is specified through vector components.
4 Arc Orientation is specified through Euler angles.
5 Arc Orientation is specified through the UWELDPATH
user subroutine.
16-20
4th
Number of curves used to define the Weld Path. This field is only valid
when Weld Path Type is 2.
21-25
5th
Path Interpolation flag 0 or 1.

0 Arc Orientation at first point of segment is used for whole segment.
1 Arc Orientation is linearly interpolated between first and last points
of segment.
26-30
6th
Not used.
31-62
7th
Weld Path Name (optional)
Notes: Weld Path Type 1 can only be used with Arc Orientation Types 1, 3, or 4.
Weld Path Type 2 can only be used with Arc Orientation Types 2, 3, or 4.
Weld Path Type 4 can only be used with Arc Orientation Type 2, 3, or 4. All quantities are
specified via separate text file in this case.
Weld Path Type 5 can only be used with Arc Orientation Type 5.
The 4th through 7th data blocks depend on the WELD PATH TYPE (2nd field of 3rd data block) and
ARC ORIENTATION TYPE (3rd field of 3rd data block). These data blocks are only needed for weld
path types 1, 2, and 4.
I. WELD PATH TYPE 1 (NODES)
4th data block
define the weld path.
A. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 1 (NODES)
5th data block

1-10
1st

weld path (default is 0).
11-15
2nd
Table ID for Angle.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

define the weld orientation.
Notes: The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length along the weld path or a
The arc vector is defined as the vector from the weld path node to the weld orientation node.
The number of nodes defining the weld orientation has to be either equal to 1 or equal to the
number of nodes defining the weld path. If only one node is used, the arc vector is defined as
the vector from the weld path node to that node always.
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-35
4th
36-40
5th
41-45
6th
Note:
The tables defining the arc orientation vector components can be a function of the arclength
5th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-35
4th
36-40
5th
41-45
6th
Note:
taken as <1,0,0>; i.e., unit vector in global X direction. Tables defining the Euler angles can
be a function of arclength along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along
the weld path.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
II. WELD PATH TYPE 2 (CURVES)

Read Number of Points to define Polyline
(4th data block)
Start Loop over Number of Points to define Path Polyline

Read coordinates of each Weld Path Point
(5th data block)
End loop over Points

End loop over Polyline Curves
For Each Curve:

4th data block
1-5
1st
Weld Curve Type (polyline = 1).
6-10
2nd
Number of Points to Define Polyline.
For each point on the Weld Path Curve:

5th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
A. ARC ORIENTATION TYPE 2 (CURVES)

Read Angle for Rotation of Tangent-Arc Plane (6th data block)
Start Loop over Number of Points to define Arc Polyline
Read coordinates of each Weld Orientation Point (7th data block)
End Loop over Point
End Loop over Polyline Curves
For Each Curve:

6th data block
1-5
1st
Arc Curve Type (polyline = 1).
6-15
2nd
Angle in degrees by which Arc-Tangent plane is rotated about Weld Path

(default = 0).
16-20
3rd
Table ID for angle.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
For each point on the Arc Orientation Curve:

7th data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Notes: Only Polylines (Weld Curve Type = 1, Arc Curve Type = 1) are supported in the
current version.
The table defining the angle can be a function of the arc length along the weld path or a
The number of points defining the arc orientation curve has to be equal to the number of points
defining the weld path curve.
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-35
4th
36-40
5th
41-45
6th
Note:
The tables defining the arc orientation vector components can be a function of the arc length
6th data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-35
4th
36-40
5th
41-45
6th
Note:
taken as <1,0,0> i.e., unit vector in global X direction. Tables defining the euler angles can be
a function of arclength along the weld path or a function of the position coordinates along the
weld path.

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
III. WELD PATH TYPE 4 (Text File)

4th data block
Enter name of Text File containing Weld Path and Arc
Orientation Information.
Note:
Columns 1 - 3 of the text file contain weld path information. Columns 4 - 6 of the text file
contain arc orientation information. Depending on the arc orientation type (2, 3 or 4) specified
on the 3rd data block, columns 4 - 6 can contain point coordinates, vector components or Euler
angle values. The entry in each column is a real number of width 10. The columns can be in
free or fixed format with commas being used to separate the columns in the free format mode.
WELD FILL (History Definition) 1688

WELD FILL (History Definition)
Description
This option identifies the weld filler elements that are associated with a particular weld heat source. The
method by which the filler elements can potentially participate in the analysis is specified. Two methods
can be used: Quiet Element method and Deactivated Element Method.
In the Quiet Element Method, the filler elements are always part of the analysis. However, prior to their
physical creation, the filler elements are used with scaled down material properties. The regular material
properties are restored after the filler elements are physically created by the moving heat source. In the
Deactivated Element Method, the filler elements are deactivated at the outset and are automatically
activated only when they are physically created by the moving heat source.
Filler Bounding Box X, Y, and Z refer to dimensions in the local coordinate system attached to the
moving heat source. They are used to identify if filler elements are physically created during the welding
process. If these dimensions are not specified on the option (i.e., left at 0), they are related to weld pool
dimensions set on the WELD FLUX option:
Filler Bounding Box X in the Tangent direction = 1.5 x Weld Width
Filler Bounding Box Y in the Arc direction = 2 x Weld Width
Filler Bounding Box Z in the Arc Direction = Weld Pool Length
See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words WELD FILL.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of weld fillers to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
Weld Filler Index (Index is used for cross-referencing with field 4 of the
3rd data block in the WELD FLUX option).
6-10
2nd
Initial Activation Flag

0 Quiet Element Method.
1 Deactivated Element Method.
1689 WELD FILL (History Definition)

Format
Fixed
11-15
Free
3rd
Data
Entry Entry
I
Temperature Boundary Condition Flag

0 Nodal boundary conditions are applied
1 Nodal boundary conditions are not applied
16-25
4th
Melting Point Temperature
26-35
5th
Temperature Activation Time (0 by default)
36-45
6th
Material Property Scale Factor (1e-5 by default)
46-77
7th
Weld Filler Name (Optional)
Notes: The melting point temperature information in field 4 is only used if the boundary condition
flag in field 3 is 0. If nodal boundary conditions are not applied (3rd field = 1), weld fluxes
can be applied to the filler elements to ramp up the temperature. A user-specified thermal
activation time, specified in field 5, can also be used.
The thermal activation time serves two purposes: (1) It defines the time over which the
temperature boundary condition is ramped (only valid when field 3 is 0). Default is 0 which
means that the temperatures are applied instantaneously. For nonzero time values, the
temperatures of the active filler elements are linearly increased from the current value to the
specified temperature over the specified time step. (2) It defines the time during which the
filler elements only participate in the thermal pass and not in the mechanical pass (valid when
field 3 is 0 or 1). Default is 0 which means that if the filler elements are first created at
increment n, they only participate on the thermal side at increment n, and then participate in
both thermal and mechanical passes at increment n+1. For nonzero time values, the filler
elements remain thermally active over the specified time duration and become mechanically
active only after the time duration.
The property scale factor in field 6 is only used for the quiet element method.
4th data block
1-10
1st
Filler Bounding Box in X (weld width) direction
11-20
2nd
Filler Bounding Box in Y (weld depth) direction
21-30
3rd
Filler Bounding Box in +Z (forward path) direction
31-40
4th
Filler Bounding Box in -Z (rear path) direction
41-45
5th
Table ID for Filler Bounding Box X
46-50
6th
Table ID for Filler Bounding Box Y
51-55
7th
Table ID for Filler Bounding Box +Z
56-60
8th
Table ID for Filler Bounding Box -Z
Note:
The table IDs for the filler bounding boxes can be a function of time or arc length. The arc
length is measured along the weld path from the first point to the current position of the
weld source. If the bounding box dimensions are not specified, the weld pool dimensions are
used to define the box.
WELD FILL (History Definition) 1690

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
5th data block

1-80
Enter the list of filler elements
1691 CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition)

Define Controls for Heat Transfer Analysis
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History
Definition)
Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence solution and accuracy for heat
transfer analysis.
For transient heat transfer, the only data field required to be set is the maximum number of steps, the first
field in the second data block. All other fields can, in these cases, be left blank, but notice that the third
data block must be included.
For coupled thermal-stress analysis, see CONTROL option for stress analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-7
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st

being used.
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-35
7th
Nonpositive definite flag. If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite

system is forced.
36-40
8th
Not used; enter 0.
41-45
9th
Not used; enter 0.
46-50
10th
Not used; enter 0.
51-55
11th
Not used; enter 0.
56-60
12th
Assembly flag. If set to 1, the conductivity matrix is assembled

each iteration.
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition) 1692

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-10
1st

11-20
2nd
Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are

reevaluated and matrices reassembled. Default value of 100.
21-30
3rd

31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th

51-60
6th

61-70
7th

71-80
8th

1693 TEMP CHANGE

Specify or Change Fixed Temperatures
TEMP CHANGE
Description
This option allows new fixed temperature to be specified or old fixed temperatures to be changed. The
exact numbering sequence of the fixed temperatures is used in some applications of this option. This
numbering sequence is output after the fixed temperature option is used in the input data describing
the problem.
This option is used to change fixed temperatures in heat transfer. Note that enough space must be
specified on the SIZING parameter in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow for
possible increased storage requirements arising from use of this option. Complex temperature histories
are more conveniently input by the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
Enter the words TEMP CHANGE.
Set to the number of fixed temperatures to be changed or added.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
A negative number removes fixed temperatures from the end of the fixed
temperature list.
A zero activates the FIXED TEMPERATURE option; a complete set of
necessary fixed temperatures are then read, using the data blocks for that
option except for that key word block.
TEMP CHANGE 1694

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

Data block 3 is only entered if columns 1 through 5 in data block 2 are a positive number and then has
the number of data lines required by data block 2.
1-5
1st

Note that a boundary condition in the middle of the list can be removed by
specifying that labeled boundary condition as a repeat of some other
boundary condition.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
1695 FILMS (History Definition)

Define Film Coefficients and Sink Temperatures
FILMS (History Definition)
Define Film Coefficients and Sink Temperatures
Description
This option allows film coefficients and associated sink temperatures to be input. Nonuniform films or
sink temperatures can be obtained via the FILM user subroutine, see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines
and Special Routines.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-5
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block

1-5
1st
6-15
2nd
16-25
3rd

the FILM user subroutine).
26-30
4th
Film coefficient index (optional).
31-35
5th
Sink temperature index (optional). (Film coefficient and sink temperature

indices are to be used in the FILM user subroutine).
4th data block

VELOCITY CHANGE 1696

Modify Nodal Velocity Components
VELOCITY CHANGE
Description
are defined by specifying the velocity magnitude of a series of components for sets of nodes. This data
can be input from data blocks or from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the velocity values can be
respecified or initialized if no previous data was entered via the UVELOC user subroutine. See Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
value for the print-suppress parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word VELOCITY CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of data lines used to input nodal velocity components. If

a negative value is entered, the UVELOC user subroutine is called for
every node.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 to suppress printout of the summary of nodal velocity

components.
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 should be repeated for each data set.
1697 VELOCITY CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

1-10
1st

which the velocity is to be given.
4th data block

Note:
5th data block

Enter a list of nodes for which the velocity vector, as defined in data
blocks 3 and 4, is applied.

Chapt Joule Heating Analysis

This section describes the input of data necessary for a Joule heating analysis. All of the options in the
er 4
subsections referring to heat transfer are also applicable. Both the applied currents and the nodal
Histor previous
voltages can be specified in this section. In Joule heating analysis, these are total values.
y
Defini
tion
Optio
ns
1699 EMRESIS
Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Resistance Calculation
EMRESIS
Select Conducting Bodies to be

used in a Resistance Calculation
Description
The purpose of this option is to define a group of conductors that will be used in a resistance calculation.
This option is to be used only in conjunction with the THERMAL CONTACT model definition option. You
can select all conductor bodies or a sub-set of these bodies for resistance computation.
This option may only be used in a Joule Heating analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word EMRESIS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 0; not used.
3rd data block

Enter a list of body IDs.
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History Definition) 1700

DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History

Definition)
Description
This option allows distributed (surface and volumetric) current to be specified. Distributed current is
converted to a consistent nodal current by Marc. Note that for a given element type, there is an established
used to input time and spatial dependent current.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered in pairs, once for each data block.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
4th data block

1701 POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition)

POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition)
Description
This option allows total nodal point current to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used
for the time dependent current. If the number of nodes which have point currents has been changed from
the model definition option, you must give an upper bound on the DIST LOADS parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1-5
6-10
Enter unit number of input of point current data, defaults to input.
2nd data block
3rd data block

1-10
4th data block
Enter a list of nodes to which the above nodal current are applied.
VOLTAGE CHANGE 1702

Define or Change Voltage for Joule Heating Analysis
VOLTAGE CHANGE
Description
This option allows new voltage conditions to be specified or old voltage conditions to be changed in a
Joule heating analysis. The exact numbering sequence of the voltage conditions is used in some
applications of this option. This numbering sequence is output after the voltage conditions governing
increment zero are read by Marc.
This option is used for Joule heating analysis. Enough space must be specified on the SIZING parameter
in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow for possible increased storage
requirements arising from use of this option. Complex time dependent voltage histories are more
conveniently input by the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
Enter the words VOLTAGE CHANGE.
Set to the number of specified voltage conditions to be changed or added.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
A negative number removes voltage conditions from the end of the

voltage condition list.
A zero activates the voltage option; a complete set of voltages are then
read, using the data blocks for that option as described in the model
definition section, except for that key word block.
1703 VOLTAGE CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

Data block 3 is only entered if the first field in data block 2 is a positive number determining the
number of blocks required in this series.
1-5
1st

from the Fixed Voltage Condition Summary table in the input echo of a
Marc run. Voltage conditions being added should be given labels which
increment the total count of voltage conditions properly.
A voltage condition in the middle of the list can be removed by specifying
that labeled boundary condition as a repeat of some other boundary
condition.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
Set to 1.
16-30
4th
Specified voltage.

Diffusion Analysis
Chapt Diffusion Analysis

This section describes the input of data necessary for a transient diffusion simulation with changing
er 4
Histor boundary conditions or porosity.
y
Defini
tion
Optio
ns
1705 POROSITY CHANGE

POROSITY CHANGE
Description
This option provides the ability to change the porosity in nonsoil model. You can either specify
the porosity or use the VOID CHANGE option to specify the void ratio.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words POROSITY CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the porosity.
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of the porosity.
Enter the table id associated with the porosity.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
1st field.
POROSITY CHANGE 1706

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-5
1st

1 Elements IDs
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above porosity is applied.

data block.
1707 VOID CHANGE

VOID CHANGE
Description
This option provides the ability to change the void ratio in a nonsoil analysis model. You can either
specify the void ratio or use the POROSITY CHANGE option to specify the porosity.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-13
1st
Enter the words VOID CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of data required to define the void ratio.
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
Enter the magnitude of the void ratio.
Enter the table id associated with the void ratio.
4th data block

1-10
1st
5th data block

1-5
1st
1st field.
VOID CHANGE 1708

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6th data block

1-5
1st

1 Elements IDs
7th data block

1-80
Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above void ratio is applied.
data block.
1709 DIST MASS (Diffusion)

Description
This block of data defines mass flux (surface and volumetric) type boundary conditions. The user defines
a surface distribute mass flux magnitude M 2 t and the location, and associates this with a boundary
condition name. This is activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE history definition option. The
FLUX user subroutine can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed mass fluxes or the TABLE
model definition option may be used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST MASS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of distributed mass fluxes to be entered

(optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of distributed mass fluxes data, defaults
to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

boundary condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
in contact.
31-63
7th
DIST MASS (Diffusion) 1710

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry

4th data block
1-10
1st
Enter the magnitude of mass flux.
Enter the table ID associated with the mass flux.
5th data block

1-5
1st
6th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd

1:
Normal
106: Uniform volumetric

107: Nonuniform volumetric
11-15
3rd
Enter the face ID.
1st field.
7th data block
1-5
1st

1: Element IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
1711 DIST MASS (Diffusion)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
8th data block

1-80

7th data block.
POINT MASS (Diffusion) 1712

Description
This block of data defines nodal mass flux boundary condition. The user specifies a magnitude and
location, and associates this with a boundary condition name. This is activated or deactivated using the
time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT MASS.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sets of point mass fluxes to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for input of point mass flux data, defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd

condition.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
Not used; enter 0.
26-30
6th
Not used; enter 0.
31-63
7th
1713 POINT MASS (Diffusion)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

Magnitude.
1-10
1st
Point mass flux associated with first degree of freedom.
11-20
2nd
Point mass flux associated with second degree of freedom.
21-30
3rd
Point mass flux associated with third degree of freedom.
5th data block - Table ID for Magnitude

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
1st field.
6th data block
1-5
1st

1:
Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs

7th data block
6th data block.

Chapt Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis

The purpose of bearing analysis history definition options are mainly to activate the calculation of
er 4
characteristics like damping and stiffness coefficients for a particular film profile. In addition, it
Histor bearing
is possible to solve the lubrication problem for a new film profile. The history definition options used are:
y
THICKNS CHANGE to specify a variation of the thickness field.
Defini
DAMPING COMPONENTS to activate the calculation of damping coefficients based on the
defined thickness change.
tion
STIFFNS COMPONENTS to activate the calculation of stiffness coefficients based on the
Optio
defined thickness change.
ns
The calculation of damping and stiffness properties is performed within subincrements.
If only the THICKNS CHANGE option is activated within an increment, the defined thickness change is
added to the current film profile. The lubrication problem is then solved for the current film thickness.
1715 THICKNS CHANGE

Define Thickness Variations
THICKNS CHANGE
Define Thickness Variations
Description
This option defines the thickness variations of the lubricant film in a bearing analysis. The nodal
thickness changes are specified by giving the thickness increments for a list of nodes. This data can be
input from data blocks or from an auxiliary input device. Moreover, the nodal thickness changes can be
respecified or initialized, in case no previous data was input, via the UTHICK user subroutine. See Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
A summary of nodal thickness changes appears in the printout. This can be suppressed by specifying a
nonzero value for the print-suppress parameter.
The THICKNS CHANGE option enables the solution of the lubrication problems for a modified film
profile. The defined thickness variation is added to the previously defined film profile. In case this option
is combined with either the DAMPING COMPONENTS or STIFFNS COMPONENTS option, no updating
is performed and damping or stiffness components are calculated within a subincrement based on the
specified thickness variation.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word THICKNS CHANGE.
Number of sets of data lines used to input nodal thickness changes.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
If a negative value is entered, the UTHICK user subroutine is called for

every node.
6-10
2nd
Enter the file number for input of film thickness variations.

Default to unit 5, unless the INPUT TAPE parameter has been used.
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 to suppress printout of the summary of nodal thickness

increments.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter nodal thickness increment.
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes for which the nodal thickness variation as specified
in data block 3 applied.
DAMPING COMPONENTS 1716

Define Damping Coefficients
DAMPING COMPONENTS
Define Damping Coefficients
Description
This option activates the calculation of damping coefficients for bearing analysis. Based on the thickness
variation specified in the THICKNS CHANGE option, an incremental pressure distribution due to the
thickness variation per unit time is calculated for the current bearing configuration within a
subincrement. The resulting bearing force represents the damping properties pertaining to the specified
rate of thickness change for the current film profile.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DAMPING COMPONENTS.
1717 STIFFNS COMPONENTS

Define Stiffness Coefficients
STIFFNS COMPONENTS
Define Stiffness Coefficients
Description
This option activates the calculation of stiffness coefficients for bearing analysis. Based on the thickness
variation specified in the THICKNS CHANGE option, an incremental pressure distribution due to the
thickness variation is calculated for the current bearing configuration within a subincrement. The
resulting bearing force represents the stiffness properties pertaining to the specified thickness change for
the current film profile.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word STIFFNS COMPONENTS.

Acoustic Analysis
Chapt Acoustic Analysis

This section describes options for the control of an acoustic analysis in a cavity with rigid boundaries. In
er 4
an acoustic analysis, you would first extract the eigenmodes of the cavity using the MODAL SHAPE
Histor option. The time step during the transient option would be controlled by the DYNAMIC CHANGE option.
These two options are previously discussed in this chapter. The DIST SOURCES, POINT SOURCE, and
y
PRESS CHANGE options are available to specify the data to allow Marc to calculate the fundamental
Defini frequencies of the cavity as well as the pressure distribution in the cavity. Incremental load information
is provided here.
tion
Optio
ns
1719 PRESS CHANGE

Define Fixed Pressures
PRESS CHANGE
Description
This option allows new fixed pressures to be specified or old fixed pressures to be changed. The exact
numbering sequence of the fixed pressures is used in some applications of this option. This numbering
sequence is output after the fixed pressure option is used in the input data describing the problem.
This option is used to change fixed pressures in acoustic transfer. Enough space must be specified on the
SIZING parameter in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow for possible increased
storage requirements arising from use of this option. Complex pressure histories are more conveniently
input by the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-15
1st
Enter the words PRESS CHANGE.
Set to the number of fixed pressure to be changed or added.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
A negative number removes fixed pressures from the end of the fixed
pressure list.
A zero activates the FIXED PRESSURE option; a complete set of necessary
fixed pressures are then read, using the blocks for that option except for that
key word block.
PRESS CHANGE 1720

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

Data block 3 is only entered if columns 1 through 5 in data block 2 is a positive number and then has
the number of data lines required by data block 2.
1-5
1st

A boundary condition in the middle of the list can be removed by
boundary condition.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-30
4th
Specified pressure.
1721 DIST SOURCES (History Definition)

Define Incremental Distributed Sources
DIST SOURCES (History Definition)
Define Incremental Distributed Sources
Description
This option allows incrementally distributed (surface and volumetric) sources to be specified in an
acoustic analysis. Distributed sources are converted to consistent nodal sources by Marc. Note that for a
given element type, there is an established convention for the application of surface source on a particular
face. The FLUX user subroutine can be used to input time and spatial dependent fluxes.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST SOURC.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if distributed source is to be applied as excitation load in a

harmonic analysis.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of distributed source data. Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are given as pairs; once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Source index (optional). Source index is to be used in the FLUX user

subroutine.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed sources.
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History Definition) 1722

Define Incremental Nodal Point Sources
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History

Definition)
Define Incremental Nodal Point Sources
Description
This option allows incremental nodal point sources to be specified in an acoustic analysis. The FORCDT
user subroutine can be used for the time dependent sources. If the number of nodes which have point
source has been changed from the model definition option, you must give an upper bound on the DIST
LOADS parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POINT SOUR.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 to enter real harmonic load.

Enter 2 to enter imaginary harmonic load.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of point sources to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of point source data. Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are given in pairs, once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Magnitude of incremental point source.
11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd
elements only).
4th data block

1723 HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition)

HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition)
Description
dynamic harmonic, acoustic, and piezoelectric analyses.
Note:
This history definition option cannot be used in modal or transient acoustic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd
31-35
4th

36-40
5th

n = HIGH LOW

HIGH
fac = ----------------
LOW
1 n 1
i = fac ** i 1

Chapt Electrostatic Analysis

In an electrostatic analysis, the boundary conditions are charges given in the POINT CHARGE and DIST
er 4
CHARGES option, and the potential given in the FIXED POTENTIAL option. The history definition
Histor consists
of the STEADY STATE option and the CONTINUE option which initiates the analysis. The
analysis is linear, so no iterations occur.
y
Defini For a coupled electrostatic structural analysis a static or a dynamic transient analysis type are possible.
For the static analysis the application of the mechanical boundary conditions, and how to specify
tion
automatic multi-increment load control is similar to what was described in the subsection Static,
Optio Dynamic, Creep Analysis. Options which are used to control the dynamic transient analysis are
described in the subsection Dynamic Analysis. For nontable driven input, the electrostatic boundary
ns
conditions are charges given in the POINT CHARGE and DIST CHARGE option, and the potential
given in the POTENTIAL CHANGE option. Incremental values are required for coupled electrostatic
structural analyses.
1725 STEADY STATE (Electrostatic)

Specify Steady-State Electrostatic Analysis
Specify Steady-State Electrostatic Analysis
Description
This option allows the solution of the steady-state electrostatic problem.
Marc begins execution of the step when a CONTINUE option is encountered.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
EMCAPAC 1726
Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Capacitance Calculation
EMCAPAC
Select Conducting Bodies to be used

in a Capacitance Calculation
Description
The purpose of this option is to select a group of conductors that will be used in a capacitance calculation
in this increment.
can select all conductor bodies or a subset of these bodies for capacitance computation. The chosen
conductor bodies are used for the capacitance matrix calculation in Marc. This option may only be used
with electrostatic analysis.
No two conductors should touch each other.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word EMCAPAC.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 0; not used.
6-10
2 nd
Enter the increment frequency at which the capacitance calculation should

be done. Default is 1.
3rd data block

Enter a list of body IDs.
1727 EMCAPAC
Chapt Piezoelectric Analysis

This section describes options used to control a piezoelectric analysis. Possible analysis types are static,
er 4
dynamic modal, dynamic transient, and dynamic harmonic. For static analysis the application of the
Histor mechanical
boundary conditions, and how to specify automatic multi-increment load control is similar
to what was described in the subsection Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis. Options which are used to
y
control the dynamic modal, dynamic transient, or dynamic harmonic analysis are described in the
Defini subsection Dynamic Analysis. The electrical boundary conditions are charges given in the POINT
CHARGE and DIST CHARGE option, and the potential given in the POTENTIAL CHANGE option.
tion
Optio
ns
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) 1728

Define Potential Boundary Conditions
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric History Definition)
Description
This option allows new potential boundary conditions to be specified or old potential boundary
conditions to be changed. The change in potential is incremental. Care should be taken, when removing
fixed potential conditions, to ensure that the reaction forces are handled properly. Note that enough space
must be specified on the SIZING parameter in the maximum number of boundary condition fields to
allow for possible increased storage requirements arising from use of this option. Time dependent
potentials are more conveniently input by the FORCDT user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words POTENTIAL CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter 0. This activates the FIXED POTENTIAL option; a complete set of

necessary fixed potential boundary conditions are then read, replacing the
existing fixed potential boundary conditions.
6-10
2nd
11-15
3th

Number of the boundary condition blocks to be read (optional).
3rd data block

1-5
1st
1729 POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4a data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed potential or amplitude or real part of potential for harmonic

analysis.
11-20
2nd
Phase or imaginary part of potential for harmonic analysis.
5a data block
4b data block
1-10
1st
Prescribed potential, or amplitude or real part of potential for

harmonic analysis.
11-20
2nd
Enter 0.
21-30
3rd
Phase or imaginary part of potential for harmonic analysis.

Note:
Currently, there are no piezoelectric shell elements, but it is

possible to use mechanical shell elements in a piezoelectric
analysis.
5b data block
1-5
1st
Enter 1.
6b data block
Enter a list of nodes for which the above potential change conditions
are applied.
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) 1730

POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History

Definition)
Description
This option allows nodal point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine can be used for
nonuniform loading conditions.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 to enter real harmonic charge.

Enter 2 to enter imaginary harmonic charge.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of sets of point charge to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of point charge data; defaults to input.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
4th data block

1731 DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)

DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Distributed Charges

Description
converted to consistent nodal charges by Marc. For a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface charge of a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine can be
used to input spatially dependent charge.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if distributed charge is to be applied as excitation load in a

harmonic analysis.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of distributed charge data; defaults to input.
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are given in pairs; once for each data set.
3a data block
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Charge index. Charge index is to be used in the FLUX user subroutine.
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) 1732

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block
Use if harmonic analysis.
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of charge. See library element description

6-15
2nd
Enter the real component of this type of distributed charge.
16-25
3rd
Enter the imaginary component of this type of distributed charge.
25-30
4th
Charge index. Charge index is to be used in the FLUX user subroutine.
4th data block

1733 DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)

Chapt Magnetostatic Analysis

In a magnetostatic, the boundary conditions are currents given to the POINT CURRENT and DIST
er 4
CURRENT options and the potential given in the FIXED POTENTIAL option. The history definition
Histor consists
of the STEADY STATE and the CONTINUE options which initiate the analysis. If a nonlinear
material is present, defined through the B-H RELATION option, iteration is required as specified in the
y
CONTROL option; otherwise, no iterations occur.
Defini
tion
Optio
ns
STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic) 1734

Specify Steady-State Magnetostatic Analysis
Specify Steady-State Magnetostatic Analysis
Description
This option allows the solution of the steady-state magnetostatic problem. If nonlinear magnetic
properties are included, the recycling tolerance for property evaluation must be used so that iteration is
performed.
Marc begins execution of the step when a CONTINUE option is encountered.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
Data
Entry
1st
1735 DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic)

input style.
Description
convention for the application of surface current of a particular face. The FLUX user subroutine for 2-D
and the FORCEM user subroutine for 3-D can be used to input spatially dependent current.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
3rd data block
1-5
1st

in Marc Volume B: Element LIbrary.
6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Current index (current index is to be used in the FLUX for 2-D and
FORCEM for 3-D user subroutine).
3b data block
The following block is only used if the parameter identifying the type of current is 106 or 107.
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of current (106 or 107). See

library element description in Marc Volume B: Element LIbrary.
6-15
2nd
Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current in the first

16-25
3rd
Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current in the second

DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) 1736

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
26-35
4th
Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed current in the third

36-40
5th
Current index (current index is to be used in the FORCEM

user subroutine).
4th data block

1737 EMINDUC
Initiate an Inductance Calculation
Ch
EMINDUC
Initiate an Inductance Calculation
Description
The purpose of this option is to select a group of conductors that will be used in an inductance calculation
in this increment.
can select all conductor bodies or a subset of these bodies for inductance computation. The chosen
conductor bodies are used for the inductance matrix calculation in Marc. This option may only be used
with magnetostatic analysis. The purpose of this card is to define the selected group of conductors. This
card gives the total number of selected conductors and a list of their conductor identification numbers.
No two conductors should touch each other.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words EMINDUC.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of data sets (inductance) to be read (required).
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for inputs, defaults to standard input (unit 5).
Enter a list of selected conductor identification number to be used for

inductance matrix computation.
3rd data block

1-5
1st
EMLAMIN 1738
Initiate Lamination
Ch
EMLAMIN
Initiate Lamination
Description
A lamination is a glued collection of magnetic thin sheets that forms a solid core in magnetic problems.
Each sheet has thin insulation on either side to ensure electrical insulation between adjacent sheets. For
magnetic circuit excited by a sinusoidal time varying currents, hysteresis phenomena, and eddy currents
are set up in lamination. In addition, eddy currents and stray charges are set up due to higher-order
harmonics. Higher-order harmonics occur due to nonlinear nature of magnetic materials. Induced charges
are time varying and causes stray capacitance effects. The sum total effects are classifies as hysteresis,
eddy and stray losses. An electromagnetic harmonic analysis cannot predict these losses because
hysteresis models are not available for different operating conditions and non-linear magnetic behavior
can not be handled in harmonic analysis. In addition the complete modeling of all lamination sheets will
create a very large model.
Usually, the manufacturer of the lamination sheets provides loss curves that give the total loss per unit
volume for different values of frequency and magnetic induction. This loss curve can be used with a
magnetostatic analysis which predicts the correct value of magnetic induction for nonlinear magnetic
materials. Using the specified value of the operating frequency and the computed elemental magnetic
induction one can find the elemental lamination losses.
This option is applicable to magnetostatic analysis only.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word EMLAMIN.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of data sets (laminations) to be read.
6-10
2nd
Enter unit number for inputs; defaults to standard input (unit 5).
Operating frequency of the problem in Hertz.
3rd data block

1-10
1st
4th data block

Enter a list of lamination conductor identification numbers.
1739 FORCE MAGNETOSTATIC

Calculate Lorenzi Force
Ch
FORCE MAGNETOSTATIC
Description
The purpose of this option is to select a body or a set of bodies onto which the Lorentz force is calculated
in a coupled structural-magnetostatic analysis.
This option is to be used only in conjunction with the CONTACT with TABLES model definition option
where a group of elements are defined onto which the force is calculated. Two methods can be
distinguished, The Virtual Work Method and the Maxwell Stress Tensor.
Virtual Work Method (VWM)
When the VWM is chosen the elements inside the selected contact bodies are displaced in different
directions and magnetic energies of the system are compared with the magnetic energy of the undisplaced
system. To do this correctly the work piece plus some surrounding are needs to be displaced. Marc will
try to find a number of layers surrounding the work piece, the default is 4, but can be chosen by the user.
By default the displacement is taken as 0.5 of the smallest element edge length, but can be chosen by
the user.
Maxwell Stress Tensor (MST)
When the MST method is chosen the Lorentz force will be calculated at the contact interface using the
MST. No other options are needed for this method.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words FORCE MAGN.
Enter one of the following methods for the force calculation
2nd data block

1-10
1st
VIRTUAL WO for the Virtual Work Method (VWM)

MST
for the Maxwell Stress Tensor Method
The 3rd and 4th data blocks are only used with the virtual work method (VWM)
3rd data block
1-5
1st
Enter the number of layers of elements to extend the work piece which
will be displaced when VWM is chosen.
FORCE MAGNETOSTATIC 1740

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
4th data block

1-10
1st
Enter the virtual displacement of the body if the 0 in the 2nd field is used.
11-20
2nd
Enter the scale factor; the virtual displacement is the scale factor times the
smallest element edge length (default is 2).
Enter the list of bodies on which the force is calculated.
5th data block

1-5
1st
1741 FORCE MAGNETOSTATIC

This section describes options used to control both transient and harmonic electromagnetic analysis. The
DYNAMIC CHANGE option is used to specify the time step, while the HARMONIC option is used to
control the excitation frequency. Note that all loads are incremental in nature.
For a coupled electromagnetic thermal analysis a harmonic electromagnetic analysis is combined with a
thermal analysis. To activate this analysis chose the HARMONIC option to set the excitation frequency of
the electromagnetic pass, and either STEADY STATE, TRANSIENT, or AUTO STEP, for the thermal pass.
For the thermal boundary conditions like DIST FLUXES, POINT FLUX, TEMP CHANGE, and FILMS see
the Heat Transfer Analysis section.
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History Definition) 1742

HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History

Definition)
Description
dynamic harmonic, acoustic, and piezoelectric analyses. This can be used if the harmonic flag (1) has
been set on the EL-MA parameter. For a coupled electromagnetic thermal analysis enter only one
excitation frequency.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
2nd data block

1-10
1st
11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd
31-35
4th

36-40
5th

n = HIGH LOW

HIGH 1 n 1
fac = ----------------
LOW
i = fac ** i 1
1743 DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition)

Define Dynamic Change
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History

Definition)
Define Dynamic Change
Description
This option specifies the parameters required for integration in time. This can be used if the transient flag
(0) has been set on the EL-MA parameter. The Newmark-beta procedure with a fixed time step is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-14
1st
Enter the words DYNAMIC CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-15
1st
Time step size.
16-30
2nd
Period of time for this set of boundary conditions.
31-35
3rd
Number of time steps in this set of boundary conditions.
36-40
4th
This field is not used.
41-45
5th
set equal to value in the seventh field.
POTENTIAL CHANGE 1744

Define or Redefine Potential Boundary Conditions
POTENTIAL CHANGE
Description
This option allows new potential boundary conditions to be specified or old potential boundary
conditions to be changed. The exact numbering sequence of the boundary conditions is used in some
applications of this option. This numbering sequence is output after the boundary condition option is used
in the input data describing the problem.
This option is used for incrementation of fixed potential components or for adding or removing potential
constraints. Care should be taken, when removing fixed potential conditions, to ensure that the reaction
forces are handled properly. Note that enough space must be specified on the SIZING parameter in the
maximum number of boundary condition fields to allow for possible increased storage requirements
arising from use of this option. Time dependent potentials are more conveniently input by the FORCDT
user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-11
1st
Enter the words POTENTIAL CHANGE.
Set to the number of boundary conditions (specified potential components

to be changed or added).
2nd data block

1-5
1st
A negative number removes boundary conditions from the end of the

boundary condition list.
A zero activates the FIXED POTENTIAL option; a complete set of
necessary boundary conditions are then read, using the blocks for that
option except for that key word block.
1745 POTENTIAL CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

3rd data block

Data block 3 is only entered if the number in columns 1 through 5 in data block 2 is positive and then
has the number of data lines required by data block 2.
1-5
1st

6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd

Note that a boundary condition in the middle of the list can be removed by
boundary condition.
16-30
4th
Specified potential increment (real part).
31-45
5th
Specified potential increment (imaginary part).
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) 1746

Define Point Current and/or Charge
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic History Definition)
Define Point Current and/or Charge
Description
This option allows nodal point currents and point charges to be specified. The FORCDT user subroutine
can be used for nonuniform loading conditions.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 to enter real harmonic current and charge.

Enter 2 to enter imaginary harmonic current and charge.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter number of sets of point current and charge to be entered (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of point current and charge data.
Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs; once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
4th data block

Enter a list of nodes to which the above point current-charge applies.
1747 DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition)

DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History

Definition)
Description
converted to consistent nodal currents by Marc. For a given element type, there is an established
convention for the application of surface current of a particular face. The FORCEM user subroutine can
be used to input spatially dependent current.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if distributed current is to be applied as excitation load in a

harmonic analysis.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of distributed current data. Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are given in pairs; once for each data set.
3a data block
Use if not harmonic analysis.
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Current index. Current index is to be used in the FORCEM user

subroutine.
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) 1748

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
Enter the real component of distributed current.
16-25
3rd
Enter the imaginary component of distributed current.
26-30
4th
Current index. Current index is to be used in the FLUX user subroutine.
4th data block

1749 DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition)

DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History

Definition)
Description
convention for the application of surface charge on a particular face. The FORCEM user subroutine can
be used to input spatially-dependent charges.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words DIST CHARGE.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if distributed charge is to be applied as excitation load in a

harmonic analysis.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of distributed charge data. Defaults to input.
The following 3rd and 4th data blocks are given as pairs; once for each data set.
3a data block
Use if not harmonic analysis.
1-5
1st

6-15
2nd
16-20
3rd
Charge index (optional). Charge index is to be used in the FORCEM user

subroutine.
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) 1750

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3b data block
1-5
1st
Parameter identifying the type of charge. See library element description

6-15
2nd
Enter the real component of distributed charge.
16-25
3rd
Enter the imaginary component of distributed charge.
26-30
4th
Charge index. Charge index is to be used in the FORCEM user subroutine.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed charge.
1751 CONTINUE (History Definition)

End Loadcase
CONTINUE (History Definition)
End Loadcase
Description
The CONTINUE option is necessary to indicate that all data for this increment or series of increments has
been read in. The analysis is then initiated.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-8
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word CONTINUE.
Chapter 5 Rezoning Options List
Rezoning Options List
Reaoning Option
Page
CONNECTIVITY CHANGE
1761
CONTACT CHANGE
1773
CONTINUE
1782
COORDINATE CHANGE
1770
END REZONE
1783
GAP DATA CHANGE
1768
GEOMETRY CHANGE
1762
MOVE
1772
ORIENTATION CHANGE
1766
PRINT CHOICE
1779
REZONE
1757
1753
Reaoning Option
Page
SECTIONING
1759
SPLIT BODIES
1758
UFRORD
1771
URCONN
1781
Chapter 5 Rezoning Options

Rezoning Options
Rezoning Options
1756
For the analysis of metal forming problems, Marc utilizes the updated Lagrange approach. In this
approach, the state at the beginning of an increment serves as the reference state for the calculation of the
incremental values. At each subsequent increment, the reference state is updated.
This analysis method has several advantages, but it has a limit on the maximum deformation attainable.
Due to the large deformations, the element mesh can degenerate strongly, and, in the updated approach,
this means that the analysis of subsequent increments is carried out with a very poor mesh. This effect
can even be so serious that elements locally turn inside out, which makes further analysis impossible.
In order to continue the analysis with sufficient accuracy, it is necessary to use a new mesh. The state in
the old mesh must be transferred to the new mesh. Such a transfer is, of course, only possible if the state
in the old mesh is defined with respect to the current configuration. Hence, if you use the updated
Lagrange approach, you might be required to rezone the mesh to successfully complete a given analysis.
This process involves two steps, defining a new mesh or remeshing and transferring the results from the
old mesh to the new mesh. This section defines the used-controlled process of creating a new mesh. As
an alternative, the ADAPT GLOBAL option may be used. This procedure automatically creates a new
mesh and is preferred because the meshing automatically occurs when necessary. When using the
manual procedure discussed in this chapter, one increment is required to perform this definition of the
new mesh using a complete set of input options, as defined in the following sections of this chapter.
The rezoning capability is available for the following element types:
Continuum 2-D and 3-D displacement elements (except semi-infinite).
Shell elements 22 and 75.
Herrmann elements 80-84, 118-120, and 155-157 using techniques defined under the
SECTIONING option.
Heat transfer continuum elements.
Chapter 5 Rezoning Options 1756

Rezoning Options
Rezoning Options
When you insert the REZONE option into a typical data setup of a problem, Marc is able to read a
selection of the rezoning option format to control the rezoning steps. These rezoning option formats are
described on the following pages. These options must follow immediately after a load incrementation
CONTINUE option. If you do not want any rezoning steps, Marc reinterprets the input as load
incrementation data.
You can select as many rezoning steps in one increment as are needed. Every rezoning step is defined by
the data starting with the REZONE option and ending with the CONTINUE option. The complete set of
rezoning steps that form a complete rezoning increment is terminated by the END REZONE option. The
rezoning input is followed by normal load incrementation data or again by rezoning data.
1757 REZONE
Specify Rezoning Input
REZONE
Specify Rezoning Input
Description
This option starts the rezoning input and should be present in the rezoning input data. If this option is not
encountered, no rezoning step is performed and the option read in is interpreted as a history definition
option.
This option must be repeated for every rezoning step; if the rezoning increment consists of more than one
step, this option must be repeated.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1-6
1st
Enter the word REZONE.
11-15
2nd
Enter 1 if the total displacements in subsequent increments are to be

printed with respect to the original configuration; otherwise, they are with
respect to the updated coordinate position defined in this rezoning step.
For the regions modeled using Mooney, Ogden, or powder materials, this
should be set to 1.
SPLIT BODIES 1758

Defines Rezoned Data of Contact Nodes
SPLIT BODIES
Defines Rezoned Data of Contact Nodes
Description
This option is very useful in ensuring correct rezoning in bodies involved in deformable to deformable
contact. In case of slight penetration of the contact node (allowed by the contact zone tolerance) of one
body into another, the rezoned data of the contact nodes is correctly defined with this option. This option
is currently available for 4-node quadrilateral in two-dimensional analysis and 8-node hexahedral in
three-dimensional analysis.
Note:
This option must immediately follow the REZONE option and is necessary only in the
increment with rezoning.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words SPLIT BODIES.
1759 SECTIONING (Rezoning)

Define Sections for Rezoning
SECTIONING (Rezoning)
Description
This option allows rezoning of parts of the mesh. Three input definitions are allowed for specifications
of the mesh part to be rezoned. Only one of the following sectioning options can be used during a
rezoning step definition.
a. Selection by element numbers a list of element numbers must be supplied.
b. Selection by element type the element type must be supplied.
c. Selection by material type the material type must be supplied.
If Herrmann elements are to be used in a rubber rezoning, they should be selected using method B
described above. Only Herrmann element types 80-84, 118-120, and 155-157 can be rezoned.
Note:
Only one of the above sectioning options can be used during a rezoning step definition.
If the sectioning option is not used, the complete mesh is taken into account during the current rezoning
step which can cause problems. If discontinuities in material type or element thickness are present, not
all element variables are continuous across element boundaries. In that case, SECTIONING should be
used to divide the regions. If continuum and shell elements are to be rezoned, two rezoning steps should
be taken and the SECTIONING option used to separate the element types.
Caution:
If an analysis has both Herrmann elements and displacement elements and a rezoning step
is to be performed, it is necessary to have double nodes at the interface and to tie all the
displacement degrees of freedom. See note on COORDINATE CHANGE option on
definition of coordinate points
Note:
For an analysis with 2-D deformable to deformable contact, the SPLIT BODIES option
must be used if rezoning is required for the contacting bodies.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word SECTIONING.
SECTIONING (Rezoning) 1760

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of lists of elements to be given in data block 3. If either

option B or C are used, enter 0.
6-10
2nd
If a particular element type is selected enter the element type number to

be selected.
11-15
3rd
If a particular material type is selected enter the material type to be

selected.
3rd data block

The 3rd data block is repeated once for each list of elements.
Enter a list of elements to be taken into account during this rezoning step.
1761 CONNECTIVITY CHANGE

Define or Change Connectivity
CONNECTIVITY CHANGE
Define or Change Connectivity
Description
This option provides the possibility of changing the connectivity of a number of elements or to delete
and/or add some elements. If elements are added, you must ensure that all the other element quantities
(for example, GEOMETRY) are initialized for this element number in the model definition data and that
the element number to be added is smaller than the maximum number of elements given on the SIZING
parameter. If elements are deleted, you must enter element type 0 in this option.
Caution:
If this option is used, the bandwidth of the system matrix might change and this makes a
renewed calculation of the bandwidth necessary. This is automatically done by Marc.
Format
1st data block

1-19
1st
Enter the words CONNECTIVITY CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of elements to be change with this option (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter the file number for input of connectivity. Defaults to input.
11-15
3rd
Set to 1 to suppress printing of element connectivity list during

this option.
3rd data block

One data block per element.
1-5
1st
Element number.
6-10
2nd
Element type. Enter 0 if this element is to be deleted. In the latter case, no

nodes have to be read in for this option.
11-15
3rd
First nodal point.
16-20
4th
Second nodal point.
etc.
etc.
Repeat until all nodes for this element type are read in. Continuation, if
necessary, is in format 16I5.
GEOMETRY CHANGE 1762

Specify New Geometry
GEOMETRY CHANGE
Description
This option can be used to specify the GEOMETRY model definition data for changed or added elements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-8
1st
Enter the words GEOMETRY CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of distinct sets of element geometries to be input (optional).
6-10
2nd
Enter file number for input of geometry data. Defaults to input.
3rd data block

Element geometries. The 3rd through 6th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.
1-10
1st
EGEOM1
11-20
2nd
EGEOM2
21-30
3rd
EGEOM3
31-40
4th
EGEOM4
41-50
5th
EGEOM5
51-60
6th
EGEOM6
61-70
7th
EGEOM7
71-80
8th
EGEOM8
For beam and shells, EGEOM8 is the negative of the sum of three numbers
= -(ioffset + iorien + ipin)
ioffset
0 no offsets
10 offsets with beams; include the 5a data block
2 offsets with shells; include the 5b data block
iorien
0 conventional definition of local beam

orientation, beam axis given in 4th through 6th
field in global system
10 the local beam orientation is given with respect to
the coordinate system of the first beam node.
1763 GEOMETRY CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
ipin
0 no pin codes are used

100 pin codes are used; include the 4th data block
Note:
iorien and ipin are only valid for beam elements.
See library element descriptions in Quick Reference of Marc Volume B:

Element Library for the meaning of EGEOM1, etc. for each element type.
4th data block
Necessary only if ipin = 100
1-5
1st
Enter the pin code associated with the first node of the beam.
6-10
2nd
Enter the pin code associated with the second node of the beam.
The degrees of freedom are defined in the elements coordinate system
and the pin flags are applied at the offset ends of the beam.
The pin code is a packed integer of up to five unique integers 1 through 6
with no embedded blanks.
5a data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
Y component of offset
vector at beam node 1
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
6th
61-65
7th
Interpolation flag for higher-order beams

0 no interpolation of offset vector for midside node
(Offset vector at midside node set to 0.).
1 linear interpolation of offset vector for midside node
66-70
8th

0 vector in global coordinate system
1 vector in element coordinate system
2 vector along associated shell normal at node
3 vector in local coordinate system at node 1.
GEOMETRY CHANGE 1764

Format
Fixed
71-75
Free
9th
Data
Entry Entry
I

0 vector in global coordinate system
1 vector in element coordinate system
2 vector along associated shell normal at node
3 vector in local coordinate system at node 2.
5b data block
1-10
1st
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-45
5th
Interpolation flag for higher-order shells

0 no interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes
1 linear interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes
46-50
6th
Constant Offset flag

0 offset magnitude is variable. Four data fields are used to
1 offset magnitude is constant. First data field is used to
6th data block

Enter a list of elements to which the above geometry is applied.
Notes: For elements 7, 10, 11, and 19, enter 1 in the EGEOM2 field to activate the constant dilatation
option. This improves the behavior of the element for nearly incompressible analysis. See
Marc Volume B: Element Library for further details.
For elements 3, 7, and 11, enter 1 in the EGEOM3 field to activate the assumed strain
formulation. This improves the element bending behavior. This is an alternative to the
ASSUMED STRAIN parameter.
For elements 109 and 110, the penalty factor used to add the constraint for the vector potential
(Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information) to the set of equations for magnetostatic
calculations can be set in the EGEOM2 field.
1765 GEOMETRY CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
Beam offset capability is possible for elements 5, 14, 25, 36, 45, 52, 65, 76, 77, 78, 79, 98.
Enter -1 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4a data block. See Marc
The components of the local x-axis for beam elements are entered in the EGEOM4-EGEOM6
fields. These components can be entered in the global Cartesian coordinate system (default)
or in a local coordinate system. In the latter case, the local coordinate system used to define
the beam x-axis is flagged through the EGEOM8 field and is taken to be the coordinate system
defined at the first nodal point of the beam element using the TRANSFORMATION,
CYLINDRICAL, or COORD SYSTEM options. Enter --10 or -11 in the EGEOM8 field to
indicate that the fields EGEOM4-EGEOM6 are in the local coordinate system. If EGEOM8 is
-11, it further indicates that the beam elements are offset and that the nodal offset vectors are
provided via the 4a data block.
Shell offset capability is possible for elements 1, 22, 50, 75, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 138, 139, 140.
Enter -2 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4b data block. See Marc
ORIENTATION CHANGE 1766

Redefine Orientation
ORIENTATION CHANGE
Description
This option allows redefinition of the internal material orientation data for the new rezoned mesh. See
the discussion of the ORIENTATION model definition option in Chapter 3.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words ORIENTATION CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Enter the number of orientation angle data sets to follow.
6-10
2nd
Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated as pairs; once for each angle data set.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
Enter one of the following to specify orientation angle type:

EDGE 1-2
EDGE 2-3
EDGE 3-4
EDGE 3-1
EDGE 4-1
XY PLANE
YZ PLANE
ZX PLANE
XU PLANE
YU PLANE
ZU PLANE
UU PLANE
UORIENT (activate user subroutine ORIENT)
3D ANISO
COORD SYS
1767 ORIENTATION CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3D LOCAL
CURVE
UORIENT2 (activate user subroutine ORIENT2)
11-20
2nd
Enter orientation angle.
For EDGE style orientations:

21-30
3rd
31-40
4th
41-50
5th
51-60
3rd
61-70
4th
71-80
5th
For XU PLANE, YU PLANE, ZU PLANE, UU PLANE, and 3D ANISO, complete the following:
21-30
1st
31-40
2nd
2 component of user vector 1 with respect to global coordinates.
41-50
3rd
For UU PLANE, 3D ANISO, complete the following:

51-60
4th
61-70
5th
2 component of user vector 2 with respect to global coordinates.
71-80
6th
For COORD SYS style orientation:

21-25
3rd
Enter the coordinate system ID from COORD SYSTEM option.
4th data block

Enter a list of elements associated with this orientation angle.
GAP DATA CHANGE 1768

Redefine Gap Data
GAP DATA CHANGE
Redefine Gap Data
Description
This option allows redefinition of gap data for the new rezoned mesh.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the words GAP DATA CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
Unit number for reading data.

Defaults to input format.
Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are entered as a set; once for each set of gap data materials.
3rd data block
1-10
1st
For a true distance gap, enter the minimum distance between end points
|d|.
Notes: If d>0, the two end points are never closer than a distance
|d| apart.
If d<0, the two end points are never farther apart than |d|.
11-20
2nd
21-30
3rd
Default: gap is rigid when closed.
31-40
4th
Default: gap is rigid when closed.
41-50
5th
User-supplied momentum ratio for first gap node. Default: Marc

51-60
6th
User-supplied momentum ratio for fourth gap node. Default: Marc

1769 GAP DATA CHANGE

Redefine Gap Data
Format
Fixed
61-65
Free
7th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 1 for true distance gap.

Default is 0: fixed direction gap.
66-70
8th
Enter 1 if gap is closed during increment 0.

Default is 0: gap is open during increment 0.
4th data block

Enter a list of gap elements associated with this set of gap data.
COORDINATE CHANGE 1770

Redefine Node Coordinates
COORDINATE CHANGE
Description
This option allows redefinition of the coordinates of a number of nodes to redefine the mesh.
If the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used or a rubber rezoning analysis using element types 80-84, 118120, or 155-157 is preformed, the new coordinates to be read in by this option are the updated
coordinates. Marc itself divides this into new coordinates and new total displacements. If LARGE
STRAIN is not used, the coordinates to be read in are the actual new coordinates without considering the
displacements.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-17
1st
Enter the words COORDINATE CHANGE.
Enter the maximum number of coordinate directions to be read in

per node.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Defaults to the number of coordinates per node.

6-10
2nd
Enter the number of nodal points for which the new coordinates are read
in this block (optional).
11-15
3rd
Enter the unit number to read coordinates.

Defaults to input.
16-20
4th
Enter 1 to suppress printout of nodal coordinate list.
3rd data block

One data block per nodal point.
Input six coordinates per data block; CONTINUE options in format 6E10.
1-5
1st
Nodal point number.
6-15
2nd
Coordinate 1.
16-25
3rd
Coordinate 2.
26-35
4th
Coordinate 3.
etc.
etc.
Number of coordinates per node to read in.
1771 UFRORD
Use Subroutine UFRORD
UFRORD
Use Subroutine UFRORD
Description
This option calls the UFRORD user subroutine to generate or modify nodal coordinates. See Marc Volume
D: User Subroutines and Special Routines. The option can be repeated as often as necessary. If
coordinates must be modified, this option should follow the COORDINATE CHANGE option. If
coordinates must be defined, this option can be used alone.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word UFRORD.
2nd data block

Enter a list of nodes for which the UFRORD user subroutine is to
be called.
MOVE (Rezoning) 1772

MOVE (Rezoning)
Description
This option allows you to apply a uniform translation to a list of elements, redefining the coordinates of
all nodes in the elements. This translation is applied to the last value of the coordinates, excluding any
displacement. This option can be repeated as often as necessary.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-10
1st
Enter the word MOVE.
Enter the number of lists to be entered.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
3rd data block

1-10
1st
The amount of translation in the first coordinate direction.
11-20
2nd
The amount of translation in the second coordinate direction.
21-30
3rd
The amount of translation in the third coordinate direction.
4th data block

This data block is entered once for each list.
Enter a list of element numbers to which the above translation is applied.
1773 CONTACT CHANGE

Change Surface Contact after Rezoning
CONTACT CHANGE
Description
This option allows changes to a deformable surface definition (rezoned mesh) in 2-D and 3-D contact
problems after rezoning occurs. Changes to the rigid surfaces should be made in the next loadcase using
the CHANGE RIGID option. It also allows changes to friction type, choice of Coulomb friction
calculation, maximum number of separations in each increment, suppression of splitting of increment. In
addition, relative sliding velocity for sticking condition, contact tolerance, separation force, as well as
average and cut-off strain rates in rigid-plastic analysis, can also be changed.
Note:
See the SPLIT BODIES option if the analysis has deformable-to-deformable contact.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-14
1st
Enter the words CONTACT CHANGE.
2nd data block

1-5
1st
(Must be same value as before rezoning.)

6-10
2nd
Not used; enter 0.
11-15
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
16-20
4th
Friction type
0: No Friction
1: Shear Friction
2: Coulomb
(Same value as before rezoning.)
CONTACT CHANGE 1774

Format
Fixed
21-25
Free
5th
Data
Entry Entry
I
Enter 0 for the calculation of Coulomb friction based on nodal stress.

Default is 0.
This can only be activated for friction types 1 to 4. Friction types 5 to 7
always used nodal force.
26-30
6th
Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. Default is

9999.
31-35
7th
NON AUTO).
Enter 3 to use contact procedure which does not require increment
splitting (iterative penetration checking procedure).
Note:
The iterative penetration checking procedure is not available for

dynamic problems using the AUTO STEP option.
36-40
8th
Enter 3 to not reset NCYCLE = 0 when separation occurs; this speeds up

41-45
9th

When 0 is entered, if the force on a node is greater than the separation
force, the node separates and an iteration occurs.
next increment.
1775 CONTACT CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
46-50
10th
Data
Entry Entry
I

(ISH).
Enter 0 Check Node Contact with top and bottom surface
Enter 1 Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer
Enter 2 Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer and ignore
shell thickness
thickness
51-55
11th
56-60
12th
Separation flag. This flag is related to the separation threshold entered on

the 5th field of the 3rd data block and may have the following values:
0: Separation is based on nodal forces. If the contact normal force
on a node in contact exceeds the threshold, the node separates.
threshold, the node separates.
exceeds the threshold, the node separates.
threshold times the maximum contact normal stress, the
node separates.
exceeds the threshold times the maximum contact normal stress,
the node separates.
61-65
13th
Not used; enter 0.
CONTACT CHANGE 1776

Format
Fixed
Free
66-70
14th
Data
Entry Entry
I

quadratic elements:
71-75
15th
Not used; enter 0.
76-80
16th
a file called jid.comnpc_xxx where xxx is the increment number the
3rd data block

1-10
1st

Default = 1.0.
For friction type 5, enter the slip-to-stick transition region (); Default is
1.e-6.
11-20
2nd

21-30
3rd
Not used; enter 0.
31-40
4th
Not used; enter 0.
41-50
5th
Separation threshold. The physical meaning of this threshold (a force, a

stress or a percentage of the maximum contact normal stress) depends on
the separation flag entered on the 12th field of the 2nd data block.
1777 CONTACT CHANGE

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
51-60
6th
61-70
7th

Defaults to 1.05
71-80
8th

Defaults to 0.05.
For two- and three-dimensional contact problems

The data blocks 4 and 5 are repeated once for each data set.
4th data block
1-5
1st
Body number.
6-10
2nd

11-15
3rd

contact is used.
16-20
4th
Not used; enter 0.
21-25
5th
26-30
6th

31-35
7th
The first node of a load-controlled body may use the TRANSFORMATION
or COORD SYSTEM option to allow for movement in
user-defined directions.
SPRINGS option.
CONTACT CHANGE 1778

Format
Fixed
36-40
Free
8th
Data
Entry Entry
I

1: rigid body;
2: deformable body;
3: symmetry body;
4: heat-rigid body;
5: workpiece;
6: acoustic body.
41-64
9th
The 5th data block is only necessary if the surface is deformable; if the surface is rigid, no additional
data is required.
5th data block
Enter a list of elements of which the surface is comprised.
1779 PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning)

Select Print Settings
PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning)
Description
This option allows control of the output from Marc. The data given here remains in control until a
subsequent PRINT CHOICE set is inserted such a set can be included with either the model definition
or the history definition data options.
point or at the centroid only, depending on whether ALL POINTS parameter was used. For shells, only
the extreme fibers are output, plus layers where the inelastic strains or state variables are nonzero. For
beams, fibers with inelastic strains or nonzero state variables are printed. In addition, section forces are
given for these elements. This option also allows debug output of certain items. The default is no debug
printout.
The PRINT CHOICE option has no effect on the postprocessor file (see the POST model
definition option).
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-12
1st
2nd data block

1-5
1st
Number of sets of first and last element numbers to be printed

(maximum 10).
6-10
2nd

(maximum 10).
11-15
3rd

ALL POINTS parameter not flagged).
16-20
4th
Number of layers to be printed. This is for beams and shells only, and
21-25
5th
Increments between printout.

Default is print every increment.
26-30
6th
Enter 1 for complex nodal quantities to be output as magnitude and phase;

otherwise, real and imaginary components are given.
31-35
7th
36-40
8th
Log File Flag: Enter unit number to which log file is to be written.
PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning) 1780

Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
3rd data block

Include only of the first field of 2nd data block is not zero.
1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Etc.
Etc. in I5 format.
4th data block

1-5
1st
6-10
2nd
11-15
3rd
16-20
4th
Etc.
Etc. in I5 format.
5th data block

Enter the list of integration points to be printed in (16I5) format (number
of entries given in the third field of cards series 2). This is only used if ALL
POINTS parameter is flagged. Be careful with analyses with several
different element types.
6th data block
Include only if the fourth field of the 2nd data block is not zero.
Enter the list of shell or beam fibers to be printed in (16I5) format. This
over-rides Marcs default, so that you should be aware that you do not
unintentionally miss plasticity or creep printout.
7th data block
Include only if the seventh field of the 2nd data block is not zero
1-5
Enter debug plot code. See the PRINT parameter.
1781 URCONN
Invoke User Subroutine URCONN
URCONN
Invoke User Subroutine URCONN
Description
This option calls the URCONN user subroutine to generate or modify element connectivity (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.) The option can be repeated as often as necessary.
This option must follow the connectivity change option.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1-6
1st
Enter the word URCONN.
2nd data block

Enter a list of elements for which the URCONN user subroutine is called.
CONTINUE (Rezoning) 1782

End Rezoning Input
CONTINUE (Rezoning)
End Rezoning Input
Description
This option closes the input for this rezoning step and gives control back to the executing routine.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-8
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the word CONTINUE.
1783 END REZONE

End Input for Rezoning Increment
END REZONE
End Input for Rezoning Increment
Description
This option closes the input for the rezoning increment. It must follow the CONTINUE option of the last
defined rezoning step of the increment.
If this option is read, control is given back to the main control routine of Marc, and the next input is
interpreted as either mesh plot data or as history definition data.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10
Free
1st
Data
Entry Entry
A
Enter the words END REZONE.

Appendix A Program Messages
Program Messages
Marc Exits
1785

Marc Exits
Marc Exits
Marc provides an exit number when execution terminates, unless a system abort interrupts execution
first. These exits are grouped as follows:
Exit Number Classification
1-1000
Simple data errors detected during initial data input (before END OPTION).
1001-2000
Errors detected during stiffness assembly or load distribution.
2001-3000
Errors detected during solution of stiffness matrix or boundary condition or constraint

application.
3001-4000
Exits during load incrementation control and output. Most normal exits are in this
range.
4001-5000
System I/O Errors.
5001-6000
Errors detected during adaptive meshing.
The following subsections list the current exit numbers with their corresponding description and
probable cause.
Exit Numbers 1-1000

Exit Number Explanation
1
The number of elements associated with a distributed load exceeds the maximum
number given on the SIZING, DIST LOADS, or FLUXES parameters. This usually
happens in the history definition when a new distributed load is added or the number
of elements is increased. Increase the value on the parameter. Note that this cannot be
done in a restarted analysis, it must be done beginning with increment zero.
A line being read as a parameter line is unidentifiable. This may be caused by illegal
data or a mistyped line.
The compilation of a user subroutine failed. The log file contains information about
the failure. This error is given by the start-up script run_marc before the execution of
Marc has started.
The number of fixed displacement boundary conditions input with the BC FILL or BC
GENER options exceeds the maximum specified with the SIZING parameter. Check
the data and change the maximum specification as necessary.
The analysis cannot be run in the memory space available. Either increase the work
space on the SIZING parameter or modify the input.
Appendix A Program Messages 1786

Marc Exits

Adding the ELSTO parameter stores the element data on the disk, thus reducing the
amount of memory necessary. Reducing the number of layers associated with beam
and shell elements and/or switching to reduced integration elements also reduces the
amount of memory necessary. Be sure that the best solver has been chosen for your
problem and that the bandwidth is being minimized.
7
Normal finish caused by setting the STOP parameter. Try to request larger work space
on the SIZING parameter than the required work space mentioned in the output file,
remove the STOP parameter, and resubmit the analysis.
Too many points (more than 60) used in the BEAM SECT parameter. Either the number
of branches in a beam section is large, or the number of points per branch is large.
Reduce the relevant number(s).
13
Data errors have been detected during data input. Refer to output for location of error.
Likely causes are misspelled keywords, mistyped lines, or invalid input options.
14
Negative relative density during equilibrium iterations for the POWDER model.
Decrease the load increment or use AUTO STEP or AUTO INCREMENT schemes. If
the problem still occurs, check the material properties in the input data.
17
Conjugate gradient solver (2) or Hardware solver (6) cannot be combined with the
OOC (out-of-core) parameter, or there is not enough available memory to use this
solver in-core, or Memory Allocation Failed for CASI solver
18
Error with MACHINING (METAL CUTTING) is found.

Possible reason and solution:
1. Features that MACHINING does not support yet are used. Turn off the unsupported
feature if possible.
2. Error in cutter path data. Check the APT/CCL file.
3. If cutter motion type other than
a. Point to Point (GOTO/)
b. Cycle motion (CYCLE/DRILL)
has been used, use the correct CATIA setting to convert it into one of the above
motion types.
4. Wrong loadcase definition option is used.
5. Wrong load case definition option is used.

Marc Exits

19
Error in welding simulation. Inconsistency in WELD FLUX, WELD PATH, and

WELD FILL data.
1. Check that weld flux id exists.
2. Check that weld path id associated with weld flux exists.
3. Check that weld filler id associated with weld flux exists.
4. Check that weld flux type (volumetric or surface) is consistent with distributed
flux index.
20
Error in welding simulation. Position of weld flux is not within specified weld path.
1. Check initial position of weld flux specified on WELD FLUX option.
2. Weld flux may be moving out of range of the specified weld path. Check weld
velocity and/or WELD FLUX data. Extrapolation flag may be set to continue
beyond last point on WELD FLUX option.
23
The wave front optimization scheme has lost continuity. This indicates that the mesh
is not continuous. Two or more distinct bodies are defined in the same problem, and
the wave front renumbering scheme cannot handle this case.
Switch to the Sloan optimizer.
24
No elements, springs or ties exist; the analysis cannot be meaningful. Check your
input, it is possible that the input file is empty.
25
Internal renumbering scheme for Lagrange multipliers does not converge. Check if
there are Herrmann elements where all displacement degrees of freedom are
prescribed. Try a different optimization scheme. Otherwise, Marc system error;
consult with an MSC software analyst.
26
No element type chosen. Include ELEMENTS or SIZING parameter.
27
Failure in transformation, most probably due to bad coordinates data.
28
The contacting body is moving away from the bottom dead center. Check current
position and the bottom dead center in the output file (jidname.out) and adjust your
input data.
29
The contacting body is not moving at all. Either the bottom dead center is reached or
the zero moving velocity is encountered. Check current position and the bottom dead
center or the velocity in the output file (jidname.out) and adjust the input data.
30
Selected surface entity not allowable in CONTACT model definition option. Check the
input data.
31
A surface has more entities than the maximum declared. Increase the maximum
number of entities on the CONTACT model definition option.
32
Circle segment data not consistent. Likely cause is that radii calculated are not
consistent with the given input. Check input.

Marc Exits

33
There are more boundary nodes than the upper bound declared. Increase the upper
bound to the number of boundary nodes on the CONTACT model definition option.
34
Error in CONTACT model definition option. Either no deformable body has been
defined, or there are rigid surfaces defined before deformable bodies. There must be
at least one deformable body on the CONTACT option. All deformable bodies should
be specified before rigid bodies.
35
During initial surface approach, velocities were set to zero before initial contact
occurred.
36
Data error in supplying the surface profile for a 2-D deformable body. Check that
elements specified for the body form a continuous path. Make sure that there are no
inside-out or upside-down elements.
37
Friction calculations with the CONTACT option are being attempted without defining
the relative sliding velocity below which sticking is simulated. Input the relative
sliding velocity below which sticking is simulated on the CONTACT option.
38
The CONTACT model definition option is being exercised without a time increment
being defined. Enter the time period using either TIME STEP, AUTO TIME, AUTO
STEP, AUTO INCREMENT, DYNAMIC CHANGE, or TRANSIENT history definition
options.
39
Attempt to change contact data during a REZONE increment. Only the elements
associated with a deformable body can be changed during rezoning. Other changes
must be done through the MOTION CHANGE or CONTACT TABLE history definition
options.
40
During the approach stage of a contact analysis, a rigid body did not contact a
deformable body within 1000 trials. The time step per trial is chosen in such a way that
the displacement of the rigid body does not exceed 100 times the error tolerance
calculated by Marc. The initial distance between the rigid and deformable contact
bodies is probably too large or the rigid body velocity has an incorrect direction.
41
Error in determining normal direction to a contact surface; potential conflict with

boundary condition. Try to remove boundary conditions on nodes that come into
contact. It is better to use symmetry surfaces.
42
The number of subdivisions of a 3-D arc must be greater than 1. Change your input in
the CONTACT model definition option.
43
The number of data points of a 3-D curve must be less than or equal to the number of
subdivisions. Change your input in the CONTACT model definition option.
44
The number of data points on a polyline must be equal to the number of subdivisions
minus 1. Change your input in the CONTACT model definition option.
45
The number of spline data points should be greater than 3 and less than 30. If the
number is less than 3, convert the spline segment into a line. If the number of points
is greater than 30, consider breaking the spline segment into multiple spline segments.

Marc Exits

46
The number of Bezier data points should be greater than 3. If the number of points is
2, treat entity as a 4-node patch (Type 7).
47
The input data points are either too close or colinear. Could not convert input to
proposed surface type. Check input in the CONTACT model definition option.
48
The current patch is too small for program to find its normal. Check input of rigid
contact surfaces. It is also possible that deformation has caused a surface of a
deformable body to become very small.
50
The normal direction of the tied node in deformable-deformable contact has the same
direction as a boundary condition. Try to remove boundary conditions of nodes that
come into contact. It is better to use symmetry surfaces.
51
END parameter is missing. This must be included in the input file.
57
In a contact body used in the beam-to-beam contact model definition option a branch
is detected. This is not supported in the current version of the program.
58
An analysis feature requested is currently not supported by the parallel version of

Marc but will be in the near future.
59
An analysis feature requested is currently not supported by the parallel version

of Marc.
Unsupported features in the current parallel version of Marc are: acoustic, auto therm
creep, bearing, buckling, beam-to-beam contact, segment-to-segment contact, design
sensitivity and optimization, electromagnetics, explicit dynamics, fluid and its
coupled analysis, gap elements, harmonic, hydrodynamics, insert, J-Integral, out-ofcore solver, unsymmetric solver, radiation, convective terms in heat transfer, response
spectrum, rezoning, and steady state rolling.
60
The listed contact body contains elements from the acoustic region and elements from
other regions.
61
The listed contact body contains a combination of different element types (e.g., solid
+ shell, solid + beam, beam + shell or linear + quadratic). This is not supported.
62
Beam bodies in the current version cannot touch both beam bodies and other bodies.
67
Marc password security has determined that you are not allowed to run on this
machine; possible reasons are:
1. The choice of machine or current OS level is not compliant with the passwords.
2. The file license.dat in the Marc subdirectory security contains wrong
information.
3. The directory security has wrong access permissions.
4. All available licenses are in use - contact your local MSC software office to
purchase additional licenses.

Marc Exits

68
Marc password security has determined that you are not allowed to run on this
machine; possible reasons are:
1. The license has expired.
2. The file license.dat in the Marc subdirectory
wrong information.
security contains
69
A third party solver requested is not supported in this version of Marc on this platform
or in multi-processor mode.
70
Attempt to run a model larger than 500 nodes or 500 elements using the demo version
of Marc.
71
While extracting outlines for remeshing, Marc found more than 100 closed loops in
one body. The closed loops should be smaller than 100 at this time.
72
While extracting outlines for remeshing, Marc found more than 1000 nodes
penetrating a contact body. The slave surface probably has a very coarse mesh
compared with the master contact surface.
75
More than 1 outline found for the 2-D overlay mesher. Use other meshers, such as the
advancing front mesher, in order to overcome the problem.
76
Incompatible view factor data has been read in. The number of segments read in is not
consistent with the number required.
77
Error in restart run. There is an illegal change in parameter or model definition options
in the input file of the restart run, such that the core allocation has changed. This may
also occur if restart data utilized is from a different version of Marc.
78
Error in restart run with user provided mesh data.
79
Error in memory allocation.
80
Lap formation encountered during the analysis.
81
Error in remeshing. Nodes belonging to a body which is being remeshed have

boundary conditions which cannot be transported correctly to the new mesh.
82
Number of faces of a cavity exceeds maximum estimated value. Increase maximum

number on CAVITY parameter.
83
Error determining streamline. Check the input in the STREAM DEFINITION option.
Make sure that the number of edges is consistent between inner and outer surface, and
that the outer surface is truly the outer surface of this body.
84
The density at the surface is less than or equal to zero in recession/ablation calculation.
Enter initial value of density was not provided, or charred density was not provided,
or pyrolysis calculation is incorrect. Check input data.
85
The program is trying to perform an incremental data backup for a nonlinear analysis.
However, the ELASTIC or SUBSTRUC parameter indicates that this is a linear elastic
analysis. This is a conflict.

Marc Exits

100
Viewpoint chosen for plotting causes excessive distortion. Probable causes are that the
viewpoint chosen is either within the body or too close to it.
666
The Powder model data input is incomplete. Check the input in the POWDER option.
Exit Numbers 1001-2000

1001
Connectivity exceeded at the node given in the message:

MORE THAN MAXNP JOINED TO NODE...
during in-core assembly of elements. This aborts Marc at that point. If this occurs
during a contact analysis, try to activate single-sided contact on the CONTACT option.
This can also occur if a contacted element has a user-defined tying on the contacted
patch or edge. Otherwise, Marc system error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
1002
Connectivity exceeded at the node given in the message:

MORE THAN MAXNP JOINED TO NODE...
during out-of-core assembly of elements. This aborts Marc at that point. If this occurs
during a contact analysis, try to activate single-sided contact on the CONTACT option.
This can also occur if a contacted element has a user-defined tying on the contacted
patch or edge.Otherwise, Marc system error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
1003
Too many nodes joined to node in forming fluid coupling matrix. Marc system error;
1004
Error occurred when calculating equivalent nodal loads. This is either due to an
incorrect load type, or the element going inside out. Check input for valid load type
for this element type or reduce step size.
1005
Errors during stiffness or mass matrix generation. The output reveals which element
has a particular problem.
If this occurs during the first assembly, it is due to input errors associated with the
COORDINATES, GEOMETRY or the CONNECTIVITY model definition options. If
this occurs during a later increment, it is due to excessive deformation in the element.
Note that this can occur during the iterative process, so that it is not always possible
to visualize the excessive deformation. Check the material behavior and the
magnitude of the incremental loads.
Suggestion:
Activate the cut-back feature if using the AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, or AUTO
INCREMENT solution schemes. This will allow the analysis to automatically cut down
the time step and try again from the end of the last converged increment. For the
AUTO LOAD procedure, the increment numbers are maintained as specified in
the input.

Marc Exits

1006
Elastic reanalysis attempted with nonzero displacement boundary conditions and

boundary condition enforcement by row/column elimination. This is not possible.
Remove the APPBC option.
1007
Incorrect Film or Foundation load type given. See additional messages in output to
indicate which element and correct input.
1009
Error encountered in stress recovery. The output reveals which element has a
particular problem. The error is usually due to excessive deformation in the element.
This can occur during the iterative process, so that it is not always possible to visualize
the excessive deformation. Check the material behavior and the magnitude of the
incremental loads.
Suggestion:
INCREMENT solution schemes. This will allow the analysis to automatically cut down
the time step and to try again from the end of the last converged increment. For the
AUTO LOAD procedure, the increment numbers are maintained as specified in
the input.
1010
Error occurred because emissivity was not defined for an element edge or face that is
used in a radiating cavity. Correct input file.
1021
Error in adding fluid mass to node. Marc system error; consult with an MSC
software analyst.
1030
Reference vector obtained by intersection of tangent plane and orientation plane has
zero length; cannot determine preferred orientation. Check input in the
ORIENTATION model definition option.
1031
Error while determining view factors in cavity. Make sure that node numbers defining
cavity are in consecutive order in the input file.
1040
Maximum number of element groups exceeded while using EBE iterative solver.
Increase the maximum number of groups allowed in the SOLVER option.
1041
Error in calculation of the spline constants during the reading of the material database.
1042
Material database file could not be opened.
1043
Too many materials from database used.
1044
Curves in material database have too many points.
1045
Error in calculation of the spline constants during the reading of the material database.
Total number of curves read from material database is too large.
1050
Radiation is using an element type that is not supported by CAVITY option - output
indicates element type. Remove elements of this type from CAVITY DEFINITION.
1051
Error in calculating pyrolysis damage. Damage indicator is less than 0 or greater

than 1.0

Marc Exits

1052
The pyrolysis appears to begin on the colder side. Possibly the definition of interior
and exterior surfaces is incorrect.
1053
The mass density is less than or equal to zero; either the initial mass density was not
defined via INITIAL PYROLYSIS or the pyrolysis calculation is incorrect.
1054
Too much ablation occurred within this increment and the fixed time stepping
procedure is used. Either switch to adaptive time stepping or reduce the time step or
increase the amount of ablation allowed per time step.
1055
Attempt to use table ID which has not been defined.
1111
An error occurred during the outline search of a 2-D contact body. In planar problems,
check for correct anti-clockwise numbering of all elements in the body. Otherwise,
Marc system error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
1112
An error occurred during the adding of load provided in DMIG. Marc system error;
consult MSC software analyst.
1113
An error occurred during adaptive meshing. Marc system error; consult MSC software
analyst.

2004
The determinant of the stiffness matrix becomes zero or negative when the indicated
node has been reached during the Gaussian elimination phase of the solution process.
This means that the stiffness matrix is nonpositive definite. If this happens at the start
of the analysis, the condition is usually caused by the existence of rigid body modes.
It may also be caused by incorrect material properties (for example, Poisson's ratio
greater than 0.5; note that these situations may arise through temperature dependence
of properties). In nonlinear cases, the structure may have buckled or reached a plastic
limit load. In rubber analysis, it may also be due to the strain state being in a region
where the input data for the strain energy function is invalid. In contact analysis with
friction, lack of normal forces may result in friction being absent. If desired, Marc may
be forced to continue by use of the PRINT parameter or the CONTROL model (or
history) definition option. Either one of these procedures may be used for restart.
Whenever a nonpositive definite situation occurs one must exercise caution, as the
resultant numerical solution may be infeasible.
2006
System error in multifrontal sparse solver. Marc system error; consult with an MSC
software analyst.
2007
System error in CASI iterative solver. The output gives additional messages. The
problem may be due to rigid body modes in the system. Switch to the multifrontal
direct solver if possible.

Marc Exits

2008
Maximum connectivity has been exceeded during application of tying constraints. If

tyings are included, check the TYING model definition and TYING CHANGE history
definition options. This may also occur because of inconsistencies in deformabledeformable contact; switch to single-sided (K3 style) contact. Marc system error;
2009
Not enough space to convert system from nodal blocks to row format. Marc system
error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
2011
Errors encountered during application of TYING equations. Printout indicates

specific problem.
2012
One of the surface directions in Tying Type 22 (intersecting shells of type 22) has zero
length. This is caused by bad surface normal coordinates at one of the nodes being tied.
2014
Search vector for eigen extraction is zero. Caused by inadequate guess vector, or by
asking for more eigenvalues than the system contains. Do not attempt to extract more
modes than exist in the system. The number of modes is the total number of degrees
of freedom minus the number of boundary conditions. Remember that contact to rigid
bodies effectively apply boundary conditions to the system, hence removing potential
modes.
2015
Not enough work space for the fluid/solid interface calculations. Increase the space
specified on the SIZING parameter,
2016
specified on the SIZING parameter.
2017
2020
Conjugate gradient iterative solver fails to converge within the required number of
iterations. This may be due to the fact that there are rigid body modes in the system,
or that the system is numerically ill-conditioned, such as with shell or membrane
structures.
Possible things to do:
1. Add pre-conditioner, incomplete Cholesky preferred.
2. Increase the number of iterations.
3. Set the number of iterations to a negative number. This forces Marc to continue.
If the solution is truly poor, Marc does not converge in the outer Newton-Raphson
iterations.
2030
Unable to perform dynamic memory allocation for hardware-provided direct sparse

solver. Decrease the amount of memory requested on the SIZING parameter down to
the number printed in the output file (jidname.out). Use reduced integration
elements and reduce the number of layers of shell elements. If you still get this
message, either increase the amount of virtual/real memory on the computer, switch
to the multifrontal sparse solver, or switch to the sparse iterative solver.

Marc Exits

2031
Error occurred during initialization or factorization process with hardware provided

direct sparse solver. Switch to one of the Marc solvers. Consult with an MSC
software analyst.
2032
The number of entries including fill-in is too large for the sky-line solver. Use
another solver.
2033
Memory allocation error; not enough memory to perform internal nodal renumbering
with METIS. To avoid this error, try using either a different solver or nodal
optization routine.
2034
System error occurred in Pardiso solver. Marc system error; consult MSC Software
analyst.
2035
Unable to perform dynamic memory allocation for Pardiso direct sparse solver. Use
reduced integration elements and reduce the number of layers of shell elements. If you
still get this message, either increase the amount of virtual/real memory on the
computer, switch to the mlultifrontal sparse solver, or switch to the sparse iterative
solver.
2036
An error occurred in internal nodal renumbering. To avoid this error, try using either
a different renumbering scheme or different solver.
2037
Error occurred during initialization or factorization process with Pardiso solver.

Switch to one of the Marc solvers. Consult an MSC Software analyst
2041
Error occurred during initialization or factorization process with MF2 direct sparse
solver. Switch to one of the Marc solvers. Consult an MSC Software analyst.
2042
Error occurred during initialization or factorization process with MUMPS direct

sparse solver. Switch to one of the Marc solvers. Consult an MSC Software analyst.
2043
Unable to perform dynamic memory allocation for MUMPS direct sparse solver. Use
reduced integration elements and reduce the number of layers of shell elements. If you
still get this message, either increase the amount of virtual/real memory on the
computer, switch to the multifrontal sparse solver, or switch to the sparse iterative
solver.
2109
Mode with zero energy is found during transient modal response analysis. Probable
cause is failure to use MODAL SHAPE history definition option before DYNAMIC
CHANGE is used. Check input file.
2201
Attempt to recover a substructure, before solving the one level higher superstructure.
2304
Cannot use AUTO INCREMENT with boundary conditions using table input that is a
function of time. either switch to AUTO STEP or remove time dependent table - load
will be controlled by AUTO INCREMENT procedure.

Marc Exits

2400
A node on the boundary of a deformable body tried to slide out of surface definition
in a contact analysis. Either the segment of a rigid body is not large enough, in which
case increase the length, or the nodal points in the area of contact have a large
incremental displacement due to possible instability. In the latter case, the suggestion
below may help under certain circumstances.
Suggestion:
INCREMENT solution schemes. This allows the analysis to automatically cut down the
time step and to try again from the end of the last converged increment. For the AUTO
LOAD procedure, the increment numbers are maintained as specified in the input.
2401
In a 3-D contact analysis, a node touching a 3-D NURBS cannot be projected on the
NURBS. Marc system error: consult with an MSC software analyst.
2402
A growing rigid body may have different growing factors in x, y, and z-direction in
this release only if it is not rotating.
2404
A growing rigid body should have relative size of 1.0 at time 0.0 You should scale the
initial size in the modelling phase of your analysis.

3001
The maximum number of increments specified on the CONTROL option has been
reached. Note that increment zero has to be considered as an increment as well.
3002
Analysis has failed to converge to required convergence tolerances. One of several

error conditions has been detected and the run aborted. The output specifies
additional messages.
3003
Analysis could not be finished because the maximum number of increments defined
in an adaptive loading procedure has been reached or the calculated step is too small.
The user should increase the number of increments allowed during the automatic
loading procedure.
3004
This is a successful completion to a Marc analysis, indicating that no additional

incremental data was found and the analysis is complete.
3005
This is a successful completion to a Marc analysis when the CASE COMBIN(ATION)

model definition option is used.
3006
This is a successful completion to a Marc analysis when the user has requested that the
restart file is to be read and that either the results are to be printed or a post file is to
be created.

Marc Exits

3007
A restart analysis has been requested at an increment that is not on the restart file. The
previous output will give the message
RESTART DATA AT INCREMENT XX
The new input file should specify the increment number XX on the RESTART model
definition option.
3008
Contact caused the restarting of an increment an excessive number of times. This may
be due to separation or increment splitting. Increase the separation force or reduce the
size of the step. An alternative is to increase the number of recycles allowed.
3009
Time step size becomes too small to continue the analysis. This may be due to having
too many cutback times in current increment. An alternative is to increase the allowed
maximum number of cutback times.
3010
Successful completion of design sensitivity analysis.
3011
Successful completion of design optimization process.
3012
No constraints activated at vertex of design space. Enter bounds on design variables,

as these are probably missing.
3013
User element is not supported in design sensitivity analysis or design

optimization process.
3014
For design optimization with composite layer thicknesses as design variables, the
initial thicknesses may not be given in terms of percentages. Enter only estimated
values, as it is not necessary to enter accurate values in this case.
3015
Unable to reduce the time step below the minimum value allowed, and to still satisfy
the user criteria in the AUTO STEP history definition option. Either change the criteria
or reduce the minimum time step allowed.
3016
The element chosen is not supported in the Lorenzi j-integral calculation. This element
type must not be used in the crack region of the model, but it can be used outside the
crack region.
3017
DESIGN SENSITIVITY cannot be used with rebar elements.
3018
This is a successful completion of an analysis to generate an MD Adams MNF

database file.
3019
MD Adams MNF database file generation failed.
3020
Job stopped immediately due to user intervention.
3021
Job stopped at end of increment due to user intervention.
3022
This is a successful completion of an analysis to generate a DMIG file of a substructure.
3023
This analysis needs the use of solver 8.
3025
Normal ending of Marc-reader.
3026
Marc-reader does not support substructures or superelements.

Marc Exits

3027
Marc-reader does not support:

1. UFCONN user subroutine;
2. Element type chosen.
3. Reading of a restart file. Set relevant field to 1 in Marc input file.
3030
Job has created brake squeal DMIG matrices as requested.
3031
Job has created contact interface file as requested.
3032
Job has been terminated in an AUTO INCREMENT loadcase because the load has
reached over 100% of desired load in opposite direction. It is likely that the wrong
branch in bifurcation analysis has been taken. Change the AUTO INCREMENT
procedure and/or tighten the convergence testing.
3300
The eigenvalue extraction did not converge within the maximum number of iterations
allowed. Increase the maximum number of cycles or tolerance in the MODAL SHAPE,
MODAL INCREMENT, BUCKLE, or BUCKLE INCREMENT options or, if applicable,
change from the inverse power sweep to the Lanczos method using the BUCKLE
parameter.
3301
Eigenvalue analysis requested, but either mass is zero or initial stress stiffness is zero.
For dynamic modal analysis, make sure that there is mass in the system. This can be
from either entering a mass density or mass points. For buckling analysis, make sure
that load has been previously applied to the structure, such that stresses are present.
3302
Nonpositive definite system occurred during Lanczos eigenvalue extraction for

buckling analysis. Decrease the applied load before the buckling analysis is performed
or switch to the inverse power sweep method using the BUCKLE parameter.
3303
Either eigenvalue extraction for modal analysis or buckling analysis cannot be

performed immediately after the activation or de-activation or local adaptive meshing
or global rezoning of elements or the number of modes below the specified maximum
frequency is zero. You should perform at least one extra increment before the
eigenvalue extraction can be performed or change the maximum frequency.
3304
In an inertia relief analysis using the Kinematic method, only free directions specified
for inertia relief loading can be left unconstrained. If non-inertia relief directions are
unconstrained, the system has a singularity. You should constrain the non-inertia relief
directions OR you should specify the unconstrained directions as free inertia relief
directions.
3305
Eigenvalue extraction for modal analysis using the Lanczos method did not converge.
A possible cause is that the model contains rigid body modes and the value of the
lowest frequency to be extracted (defined on the MODAL SHAPE option) is either zero
or very small.
Try to specify this value to be around 10% of the first nonzero eigenfrequency. If you
specify a positive value, you will only find the positive eigenmodes; if you specify a
negative value also, the rigid body modes will be found.

Marc Exits

3401
Errors in torque (or friction force) controlled steady state rolling analysis. Check the
error messages in the output file for details.
3402
In a structural zooming analysis, the local analysis time exceeds the maximum time
available in global post file. Either rerun the global analysis with a wider time range
in post file, or use extrapolation option defined under GLOBALLOCAL.
3403
Errors in a structural zooming analysis when read in the global post (or GLK) file.
Check the error messages in output file for details.
3404
In a thermal stress analysis using MAP TEMP option, the stress analysis time is outside
the range available in heat transfer post file. Either re-run the heat transfer analysis to
create a post file with a wider time range or use extrapolation, or end option defined
under MAP TEMP.
3405
A thermal stress analysis using MAP TEMP option cannot be used with the AUTO
THERM or AUTO THERM CREEP option. Use AUTO STEP with temperature and/or
creep control instead.
3410
The thermal solution has become unstable. If using fixed time step procedure reduce
time step and/or reduce the maximum error in the temperature estimate allowed. If
using adaptive time step procedure reduce the maximum temperature change allowed
nd/or reduce the maximum error in the temperature estimate allowed.

4001
Sequential I/O error: problems with opening, reading or writing files. Check file
access permissions and available disk space. If on a restart or post file, there was an
attempt to read an increment which is not on file. Otherwise, Marc system error;
4002
Cannot find jidname.pass file which is needed for automatic restart run. This is an
internal file and should not be removed.
4003
Cannot read any continue statement in jidname.rst file for the automatic
restart run. Check jidname.dat to make sure there are loadcases to run the problem.
4004
Cannot find the jidname.rst file which is needed for automatic restart run. This is
an internal file and should not be removed.
4009
Sequential I/O error, unable to open file. Either a file requested is not found, or there
is a system protection against opening the file. Make sure that you have read/write
permission in the current directory or that the file has not been opened by another
process; for example, Marc Mentat.
If this is a mesh data file, the mesher may have failed to create a mesh.

Marc Exits

4031
Unable to obtain the memory requested during a dynamic memory request. This can
be due to the following reasons:
1. The maximum allowed amount of memory is exceeded. This is specified by the
MAXSIZE variable in the include file in the tools directory in the Marc install
directory. MAXSIZE specifies the memory in million words, multiply by 4 to get
the amount in megabytes.
2. There is not enough free memory on the system. If the memory available is not
enough for an in-core solution, Marc attempts to perform the solution out-of-core.
In this case, some data which normally would be stored in memory is stored on
the hard disk (which could slow down the analysis considerably). The memory
request fails if there is still not enough memory for the analysis.
4032
The maximum amount of memory in the job is exceeded and it was not possible at this
point to switch over to an out-of-core solution.
4209
The option of reading radiation view factors from a file is specified in the related
model definition option, but either the given file could not be opened (for example, no
read permission) or, the input option -vf was not used to specify the file.
4210
Restart requested, but no restart file was provided. Add -rid parameter when
submitting the job.
4211
Substructure analysis requested, but no database was found. Add -sid parameter
when submitting the job.
4212
AUTO STEP does not support electromagnetics analysis. Try to use other auto
loading strategies.
4213
AUTO STEP is not supported by the Shima-Oyane powder model. Try using the
Exponential Cap powder model or use other auto loading strategies.
4214
AUTO STEP does not support powder material models. Try to use other auto loading
strategies.

Marc Exits

5001
The number of nodes created during adaptive meshing is greater than the number
specified on the ADAPTIVE parameter. Either increase the number on the ADAPTIVE
parameter or reduce the number of levels allowed with the ADAPTIVE model
definition option. The analysis can be forced to continue using the
ADAPTIVE parameter.
5002
The number of elements created during adaptive meshing is greater than the number
specified on the ADAPTIVE parameter. Either increase the number on the ADAPTIVE
parameter or reduce the number of levels allowed with the ADAPTIVE model
definition option. The analysis can be forced to continue using the
ADAPTIVE parameter.
5003
Adaptive meshing is not available for the element type used. Either use a valid element
type, remove ADAPTIVE option or use ADAPTIVE option with a set specifying
elements of a valid type.
5004
Adaptive meshing is not available for the element type used. Either use a valid element
type, remove ADAPTIVE option or use ADAPTIVE option with a set specifying
elements which are of a valid type.
5005
Number of boundary conditions created during adaptive meshing exceeds the number
specified on the SIZING parameter. Increase the number of boundary conditions
5006
The number(s) of nodes and/or elements created during adaptive meshing is greater
than the numbers specified on the ADAPTIVE parameter. Either increase the numbers
on the ADAPTIVE parameter or increase the element edge length on the ADAPT
GLOBAL option. The analysis can be forced to continue using the ADAPTIVE
parameter.
5007
Error in performing adaptive meshing with elastic foundations or films; Marc system
error; consult with an MSC software analyst.
5008
The number of elastic foundations or films created during adaptive meshing exceeds
the number specified on the ADAPTIVE parameter. Add FOUNDATION model (or
history) or FILMS model (or history) definition option.
5009
Error in memory allocation while performing adaptive meshing. Marc system error;
5010
System error during adaptive meshing. Marc system error; consult with an MSC
software analyst.
5011
Unable to find surface for adaptive meshing with shells if the ATTACH NODE model
definition option is used. Check definition of surfaces.
5012
Unable to find surface normal when using the ATTACH NODE model definition option
with 3-D adaptive meshing. Check definition of surfaces.

Marc Exits

5013
The command string to call mesher is too long. It is likely that your path to the mesher
is too long or your filename is too long.
5024
Not enough space on SIZING parameter to perform rezoning. Increase

workspace available.
5025
The node being printed is used in the TRANSFORMATION or COORD SYSTEM

model definition option and also belongs to an element which is subdivided in the
ADAPTIVE option. This is not allowed.
5050
Number of divisions in the x-direction exceeds maximum needed.

Increase the element target length on ADAPT GLOBAL option.
5051
5052
Number of divisions in the y-direction exceeds maximum needed. Increase the

element target length on ADAPT GLOBAL option.
Something is wrong with start point in mesher. Reduce the element target length on
ADAPT GLOBAL option.
5053
Something is wrong with projection in mesher. Reduce the element target length on
ADAPT GLOBAL option.
5054
Something is wrong with start point in mesher. Marc system error; consult with an
MSC software analyst.
5055
Something is wrong with the mesh outline; outline is not complete. Marc system error;
5056
Cannot mesh with current edge length. Try smaller edge length and, if necessary,
increase maximum number of elements and nodes on the ADAPTIVE parameter.
5057
Error found from 3-D hexmesher. Check error message in file jidname.log.
5058
2-D overlay mesher failed to create a mesh after many trials. This may be due to small
element size or wrong outlines.
5059
The mesher failed to create a mesh. Check error messages in the output file
(jidname.out) or in the log file.
5060
Cannot find the mesh data file. The mesher might be hanging due to memory problem
or the disk space is full.
5061
The mesh data file is not complete. The mesher might be hanging due to memory
problem or the disk space is full.
5062
The solver has been waiting for remeshing status file. Check if Run_sleep program
is running properly.
5063
The element size for remeshing is found to be zero. You need to specify the element
size or number of elements needed for remeshing. Check input.
5064
2-D trimming fails because of the above error. Check your input and redesign
your trimmer.

Marc Exits

5065
Bad elements are found after remeshing check if the mesher creates a good mesh.
Contact with MSC Support.
5066
Trimming operation is not supported in Marc release.
5067
During the rezoning process, a new node is found outside the previous mesh. It is not
possible to transfer data to the new mesh. Contact Support.
5091
Stand alone view factor program failed; consult Software analyst.
5092
The solver has been waiting for view factor status file. Check if Run_sleep program
is running properly.
5093
The command string to call viewfactor program is too long. It is likely that your path
to the bin directory is too long or your filename is too long.
5094
Cannot find the view factor data file. The view factor program might be hanging due
to memory problem or the disk space is full.
5095
The view factor file is not complete. The view factor might be hanging due to memory
problem or the disk space is full or the view factor file does not output the
required data.

9991
Error in 2-D contact code. This is usually related to excessive iterative displacements
which cause difficulties in finding the correct new position of nodes in contact.
Possible remedies are:
use the iterative penetration checking procedure;
reduce the load incrementation;
define the maximum change in the incremental displacement to be equal to, e.g.,
a characteristic element length;
for incompressible materials, only use the tensile stresses in the geometric
stiffness matrix.
If the problem remains, consult an MSC software analyst.

Marc Exits

9992
Error in 3-D contact code. This is usually related to excessive iterative displacements
which cause difficulties in finding the correct new position of nodes in contact.
Possible remedies are:
use the iterative penetration checking procedure;
reduce the load incrementation;
define the maximum change in the incremental displacement to be equal to, e.g.,
a characteristic element length;
for incompressible materials, only use the tensile stresses in the geometric
stiffness matrix.
If the problem remains, consult an MSC software analyst.
9993
Error in equation interpreter or evaluator; used by TABLE option.
Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option
Workspace Definition and the

Sizing Option
I/O With Marc
Estimating File Sizes
Running Marc
Examples of Running Marc Jobs
1807
1808
1810
1817
Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option 1806

Estimating Workspace Sizes for Marc Jobs
Finite element analysis requires the generation of a large amount of data including element quantities,
nodal quantities, input data and the stiffness matrix. Under ideal circumstances, all of this data can be
stored in core.
Marc uses dynamic memory management in performing the analysis. The memory used by Marc is
allocated in separate parts. One part is what is referred to as general memory and contains much of the
data used in the analysis. The largest parts are the assembled stiffness matrix and, possibly, the
decomposed stiffness matrix. Solvers 6 (hardware provided), 8 (multifrontal sparse), and 9 (CASI)
allocate the main part of the memory separately. Another part of the memory allocation is the so-called
incremental backup. This is a copy of part of the element data and is needed for a nonlinear analysis.
Other parts allocated separately are the element data, vector data, contact data, tyings, transformations
and data for boundary conditions. The memory allocation is automatically done for the amount of
memory needed. When more memory is needed, additional memory is allocated. Only the general
memory part can be affected by the user. At the beginning of the job, Marc allocates the amount of
memory specified by the SIZING parameter in the Marc input file (if no sizing value is specified, it uses
5,000,000). This memory is among other things used for storing data that is read in. After the model data
is read, more memory is allocated for the general memory as needed. This additional allocation of
memory can be limited by means of the variable MAXSIZE defined in the file include (include.bat on
Windows) in the tools directory of the Marc installation. In the case that the amount specified by
MAXSIZE, or that there is no more memory to allocate, Marc attempts to put part of the memory on disk.
It then activates either the ELSTO parameter or the out-of-core solver option, or both. The ELSTO
parameter places the element quantities on the disk. This option substantially reduces the memory
requirements with only a small penalty to the performance.
For models that require an amount of memory close to the memory limit, it is advantageous to specify a
sizing value high enough to avoid that additional allocation is necessary. The memory allocation in Marc
is done via a C routine called calloc. When additional memory is needed the memory portion is
extended via the C routine realloc. This part is handle by the operative system. During the realloc
phase both the old and the new memory needs to be kept in virtual memory. Thus, it is important that the
system is set up with enough swapping (paging) space. For efficiency, it is usually best to avoid realloc
of large memory segments.
The amount used for general memory is reported at the end of the analysis in the output file under
memory usage: as the item general memory (sizing). This printout can also be obtained during the
analysis by means of the control file, see Appendix D. A test run for determining the memory usage
without running the whole job can be done by using the STOP parameter in the input file. Unfortunately,
because of deformable-deformable contact the global bandwidth may increase, hence requiring
additional memory allocation. There is no way to predict this.
Estimating Workspace Sizes for Marc Jobs

Unfortunately, there is no easy method for estimating how much workspace is needed by Marc, as the
space computation is a complicated function of many variables. The most efficient method is to select a
workspace to handle as large a variety of runs as possible, without at the same time sacrificing efficiency
or wasted core space.
1807
I/O With Marc
Marc presents some complications to estimating sizing as both in-core and out-of-core solutions are
possible. It is also possible to have the storage of elements data out-of-core through the use of the ELSTO
parameter. Normally, you have no direct control over whether the solution is in-core or out-of-core except
the OOC parameter may be used to force out-of-core assembly. If the memory limitation is exceeded, the
job goes out-of-core. If the disk space limitation is exceeded, the job stops. The program now comes with
defaults sufficient to run well-sized problems, so simply setting the SIZING parameter to zero (0) allows
these defaults to take over.
I/O With Marc

In this section, the input and output (I/O) that Marc performs during an analysis are discussed. The
machine dependent specifics are discussed in subsequent sections. In many cases, it is your responsibility
to preserve one or more of the files written out for subsequent analysis.
Marcs execution is performed in a noninteractive manner; that is, input data is placed in a file and is not
modified during the execution of the problem. During the execution of this job, this file and others are
either read, written, or both written and read.
The primary data file is the input file and is normally read from FORTRAN unit 5. This file is a socalled card image file, referring to the days when input was prepared as punch card decks. It is necessary
for all analyses.
The results of the finite element analysis containing the stresses, strains, displacements, reactions, etc.
are normally written to FORTRAN unit 6. This is the output file. This file is always created by Marc.
If you request a restart file, it is written by default to unit 8. Upon restarting the analysis, this previously
generated file is, by default, read from as unit 9. The restart files are binary sequential files containing
the results of one or more increments. You can control the frequency with which the restart information
is written. The information written for each increment contains control information, element and
nodal data.
Normally, you should request that a subset of the results be written to an auxiliary file labeled the post
file. This information is typically used for postprocessing by Marc. Mentat and MD Patran use this
information to produce either deformation, contour, x-y, or time history plots. The PLDUMP program, as
discussed in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines, can also be used to examine this
information. This file is used to transfer temperature data from a heat transfer analysis to a stress analysis.
You select the post file to be either a binary or formatted (ASCII) file. Either type of a file is a sequential
file. By default, the binary file is written to unit 16 and the formatted file is written to unit 19. The
advantage of generating a binary file is that the I/O time is faster and the resultant file is smaller. The
advantage of generating a formatted file is that the results can be more readily transferred to another
machine for postprocessing. The PLDUMP program can be used to translate the post file from one format
to the other. One or more increments of analysis can be written to this file.
Upon restart, you can request that Marc make a new post file that contains either the information from
both previous and restart analyses (continuous) or the data from the restart analysis only. If the RESTART
option appears before the POST option, a continuous post file is written. In such an analysis, the old post

file is read from units 17 or 20 depending on whether a binary or formatted file was made, respectively.
The creation of a continuous post file results in a much larger file.
If the CHANGE STATE option is used in a thermal stress analysis, the post files previously generated in
a heat transfer analysis is read from unit 24 (formatted) or unit 25 (binary).
If the PRE STATE option is used, the post files previously generated is read from unit 24 (formatted) or
unit 25 (binary).
If the GLOBALLOCAL option is used, the post files previously generated is read from unit 24 (formatted)
or unit 25 (binary).
The use of substructures/superelements requires I/O on multiple files. The primary data base is a direct
access binary file written to unit 31. Optionally, you can place the bulk of the information required in
substructure analysis to auxiliary sequential binary files. In this case, each formed superelement is placed
in its own file. The direct access database is still required.
Marc also uses additional files for scratch purposes depending on the type of the analysis or options
selected, as discussed below.
If you include the ELSTO parameter, the information associated with element quantities is stored on a
binary direct access file on unit 3. These element quantities are stresses, strains, plastic strains, etc. Marc
may automatically switch on the ELSTO parameter if the workspace specified on the SIZING parameter
is not adequate to store the information in core.
The global stiffness matrix typically requires the largest amount of data. If the amount of data exceeds
the available workspace, Marc automatically utilizes the out-of-core solver. The out-of-core assembly
and solver utilize as many as five files. Some of the files are used for multiple purposes during this
process. Files 11, 12, 13, and 15 are binary sequential files, while file 14 is a binary direct access file.
Marc also uses files 12 and 13 during the iteration process of nonlinear analysis.
If the Lanczos eigenvalue extraction procedure is used, the eigenvectors are stored in a binary sequential
file on unit 22.

In an out-of-core solution using the symmetric profile solver, units 11 and 12 have approximately the
same storage space requirements. The number of single-precision words needed is:
NUMNP*(MAXBW*NDEG*2+3)*NDEG
where
NUMNP
= number of nodes in the mesh
MAXBW
= average nodal half-bandwidth
NDEG
= number of degrees of freedom per node
1809
The other two out-of-core solution files, units 13 and 15, are also approximately the same regarding total
disk space usage. The number of single- precision words is:
MAXBW2 * NDEG2
where
MAXBW and NDEG are defined as above.

Also important is the need to have some idea of how large the files created by the POST or RESTART
options are going to be. For the POST option, the approximate number of words written per increment is:
(NUMV*INTEL*NUMEL)+(NUMNP*JNODE*NDEG)
where
NUMV
= number of element variables per integration point
INTEL
= maximum number of integration points per element
NUMEL = number of elements

NUMNP = number of nodes
JNODE
= number of types of nodal vectors written to the post file.
NDEG
= number of degrees of freedom per node
Note:
INOD = JNODE * NDEG. Also see Block 502nn for PLDUMP 2000 in the same chapter
mentioned above.
The format of a restart file is much more complicated and changes somewhat with every new feature
added. Therefore, an accurate estimate of space requirements is very difficult. The amount of data output
depends, to some extent, on the options within Marc that have been selected.
However, the largest amount of data on the file is formed from three parts:
1. Space for element variables (connectivity, stresses, etc.).
2. Space for the storage of the displacement, load and coordinate vectors.
The space for the first two can be found by examining the output of a Marc run. About one-third of the
way down the page entitled Key to Strain, Stress, and Displacement Output, there is a section Internal
Core Allocation Parameters. In this section, the total space required in words for element and
vector storage is printed.
When these two numbers are added together, you will have a rough idea of how many words per
increment are written to the restart file. When a large analysis of many increments is run, the total number
of words in the restart file is quite large.
Note that since all these files contain unformatted variable-length records, some extra space must be
added to the above figures to determine the total disk space. Also, Marc requires some additional space

Running Marc
for internal control variables, thereby increasing the total space even more. Thus, any estimates should
be at least doubled to provide a sufficient safety margin.
Running Marc
This section describes the use of Marc on UNIX- and Linux-based and Windows platforms. Marc is
mainly controlled by a shell script program called run_marc (run_marc.bat for Windows
platforms) which is stored in the subdirectory tools. If you have used the option to create a link during
the installation, this shell script is also known system wide as marc. It is designed to handle practically
all possible options.
The shell script submits a job and automatically takes care of the file assignments provided that use is
made of the default FORTRAN file units as specified in Table B-1. Note that Marc automatically opens
all needed file units. For the single processor case, the shell script must be executed in the directory where
all relevant input and output files concerning the job are available. To use the shell script, each Marc job
should have a unique name qualifier and, as a result, all Marc output files connected to that job use this
same qualifier.
For domain decomposition based parallel processing on the same platform, see the -nprocd option in
Table B-2. For parallel processing over a number of machines refer to the Parallel Installation and User
Notes for the Parallel Network version of Marc on UNIX or NT.
Table B-1
FORTRAN File Units Used by Marc
File Name
Unit
Description
File Type
jidname.log
Analysis sequence log file
sequential access, formatted
jidname.t01
Usually contains mesh data
random access, formatted
jidname.t02
OOC* solver scratch file
random access, binary
jidname.t03
Element data storage (see

ELSTO parameter)
jidname.dat
Data input file
jidname.out
Output file
jidname.t08
Restart file, written out
sequential access, binary
ridname.t08
Restart file to be read in from a

previous job
jidname.t11
11
jidname.t12
12
jidname.t13
13
jidname.t14
14
jidname.t15
15
*OOC denotes Out-Of-Core solution.
1811
Running Marc
Table B-1
FORTRAN File Units Used by Marc (continued)
File Name
Unit
Description
File Type
jidname.t16
16
Post file, written out
ridname.t16
17
Post file to be read in from a

previous job
jidname.t18
18
Mesh optimization
correspondence table
jidname.fem
18
From Marc to external mesher
jidname.t19
19
Post file, written out
ridname.t19
20
Post file to be read in from a

previous job
jidname_j_.dat
21
Temporary input file when cutback is used.
jidname.t22
22
Subspace iteration scratch file.
jidname.t23
23
Fluid-solid interaction file.
pidname.t19
24
Temperature post file for
CHANGE STATE or post file

from previous analysis for PRE
STATE or GLOBALLOCAL.
pidname.t16
25
Temperature post file for
CHANGE STATE or post file

from previous analysis for PRE
STATE or GLOBALLOCAL.
jidname.t29
29
Incremental backup file when
ELSTO, IBOOC is used, or
insufficient memory exists.

sidname.t31
31
Substructure results file
jidname.t32
32
Secant method file
jidname.t33
33
Lanczos scratch file
sidname.t35
35
Substructure results file
material.mat
38
Material data base file
jidname.g
39
Intergraph post file
jidname.unv
40
I-DEAS Universal post file
jidname.t41
41
Post file Domain

Decomposition

Running Marc
Table B-1
File Name
Unit
Description
File Type
ridname.t42
42
Post file Domain

Decomposition
jidname.opt
45
Duplicate loadcase data file

during design optimization run
jidname.t46
46
Design optimization scratch file sequential access, binary
jidname.trk
47
New particle tracking file
ridname.trk
48
Old particle tracking file
userspecified
49
User defaults file

(see Appendix C: Default File)
jidname.vfs
50
Viewfactors
jidname.lck
51
Locking of post file
jidname.cnt
52
Dynamic control file
jidname.mfd
52
rebar - Marc Mentat interface
jidnamebbc.mfd
52
beam-beam contact - Marc

Mentat interface
jidname_spline
.mfd
52
Contact with spline - Marc

Mentat interface
jidname.seq
53
Sequence option
jidname.rst
54
Loadcase data
jidname.mesh
55
User supplied mesh
jidname.feb
55
From 3-D mesher to Marc
jidname.pass
56
Auto restart command line
jidname.rms
57
2-D outline file for remeshing
jidname.domesh
59
Lock files indicating meshing

status
jidname.doneme
sh
do mesh and done mesh
jidname.sltrk
60
New streamline tracking file
ridname.sltrk
61
Old streamline tracking file
jidname.sts
67
Analysis progress reporting file sequential access, formatted
bbctch.noconv
80
beam-beam contact information sequential access, formatted
jidname.t81
81
multifrontal OOC scratch file
jidname.t82
82
1813
Running Marc
Table B-1
File Name
Unit
Description
File Type
jidname.t83
83
jidname.t84
84
jidname.t85
85
multifrontal DDM scratch file
jidname.t86
86
jidname.t87
87
jidname.t88
88
jidname.t89
89
jidname.t90
90
jidname.fld
91
Forming Limit input file
filename.apt
94
APT file - machining option
sequential access, file
filename.ccl
95
CL file - machining option
sequential access, file
EXITMSG
97
Exit messages
USRDEF
98
User global defaults file

(see Appendix C: Default File)
jidname.t08
99
Base restart file for DDM
jidname.grd
103
Grid Force Balance Output
user specified
110 - 119 Include files for input
jidnam-dmig*
120 - 130 DMIG output files.
jidname.hmr
N/A
Hypermesh results file
sequential access, binary C file
jidname.dump
N/A
Scratch file used during

memory reallocation on
Windows if in-core
reallocation fails.
sequential access, binary C file

Marc input files should always be named job_name.dat, whereby the prefix job_name (or jidname,
as in Table B-1; also see -jid below) is the name qualifier which you are free to choose. The
suffix .dat is obligatory.
To actually submit a Marc job from the command line, the following command should be used. The
single input line is split over multiple lines for clarity:
run_marc
-jid
job_name (required as minimum)
-rid
restart_name
-pid
post_name

Running Marc
-sid
job_name containing solution of the external nodes
-prog
program_name
-user
user_subroutine_name
-save
save_user_executable
-queue
queue_name
-back
alternative for -queue
-ver
verification_flag
-def
data_name
-vf
viewfactor
-nprocd
domains
-nthread
threads
-nsolver
number of MUMPS solvers
-dir
directory where job I/O takes place
-sdir
directory where job scratch files are placed
-itree
message passing type
-host
hostfile (for running over the network)
-comp
compatible machines on a network
-pq
Batch queue only: queue priority
-at
Batch queue only: delay time for start of job
-cpu
Batch queue only: cpu time limit
Table B-2 describes the meanings of these input options and Examples of Running Marc Jobs
gives examples.
1815
Running Marc
Table B-2
run_marc Input Options*
Keyword
Options
Description
-jid (-j)
job_name
Input file (job) name identification.
-prog (-pr)
progname
Run saved executable progname.marc from a previous job

(see -user and -save).
-user (-u)
user_name
User subroutine user_name.f is used to generate a new

executable program called user_name.marc (see -save
and -prog).
-save (-sa)
no
Do not save the new executable program user_name.marc.
yes
Save the executable program user_name.marc for a future

time (see -prog and -user).
-rid -(r)
restart_name
Identification of previous job that created RESTART file.
-pid (-pi)
post_name
Identification of previous job that created the post file.
-sid (-si)
substructure
Identify the job that contains the solution to the external

nodes of the superelement.
-back (-b)
yes
Run Marc in the background.
no
Run Marc in the foreground.
yes
Ask for confirmation of these input options before starting

the job.
Start the job immediately.
-ver (-v)
no
-def (-de)
default_file
File name containing user defined default data.
-nprocd (-np)
number
Number of domains for parallel processing.
-nprods (-nps) number
Number of domains for parallel processing using a Single

Input file.
-nthread
number
Number of threads per parallel matrix solver (solver 6, 8, and

11) on hardware that supports this capability.
-nsolver
number
Number of processes to use for the MUMPS parallel matrix

solver (solver 12).
-dir
directory_name
Pathname to directory where the job I/O should take place.

Defaults to current directory.
-sdir
directory_name
Directory where scratch files are placed. Defaults to -dir.
-host (-ho)
hostfile
Specify the name of the host file for running over a network
(default is execution on one machine only in which case this
option is not needed).
*Default options are shown in bold.

Running Marc
Table B-2
run_marc Input Options* (continued)
Keyword
-comp (-co)
Options
Description
yes
When machines are compatible in a run over the network.
no
When machines are not compatible in a run over the network.

This option is only needed when user subroutines are used.
-ci
yes
no
-cr
yes
no
Copy input files automatically to remote hosts for a network

run, if necessary.
Copy post files automatically from remote hosts used for a
network run, if necessary.
-vf
viewfactor_name
Name of file containing viewfactors for radiation from

previous analysis or from Mentat using either the Monte
Carlo or Hemicube method.
-mo
i4
i8
Indicate if the i4 or i8 version is used if both are installed; if

the default unless the run_marc_defaults file is used.
-mpi
intel-mpi
ms-mpi
hpmpi
hardware
Select which version of mpi will be used for Domain

Decomposition or the MUMPS solver. If not specified, the
appropriate default shown below will be used:
-ml
memlimit
*Default options are shown in bold.
Platform
Default MPI
Alternative
MPI
Windows 32
intel-mpi
none
Windows 64
intel-mpi
ms-mpi
Linux 32
hpmpi
intelmpi
Linux 64
hpmpi
intelmpi
Linux Itanium
hpmpi
intelmpi
HP UX
hpmpi
none
HP UX Itanium
hpmpi
none
IBM
mpich
hardware
SGI Altrix
hardware
none
SGI/Irix
mpich
hardware
SUN/Solaris/SPARC
mpich
hardware
SUN/Solaris/8664
hardware
none
Memory limit for deciding if the solver should go out-ofcore. Specified in Mbyte. Defaults to the physical amount of
memory on the machine.
1817

Example 1:
run_marc -jid e2x1
This runs the job e2x1 in the background using a single processor.
The input file is e2x1.dat in the current working directory.
Example 2:
run_marc -jid e2x14 -user u2x14 -sav y -nproc 4
This runs the job e2x14 in the background with four processors. The user subroutine is linked with the
Marc library and a new execu module is created as u2x14.marc and saved in the current working
directory after completion of the job.
Example 3:
run_marc -jid e2x14a -prog u2x14 -nproc 4
Use the above saved module u2x14.marc to run the job e2x14a in the background with four processors.
Example 4:
run_marc -jid e3x2a -v no -b no -nproc 2
Run the job e3x2a in the foreground with two processors. The job runs immediately without verifying
any arguments interactively. If there are any input errors in the arguments, the job does not run and the
error message is sent to the screen.
Example 5:
run_marc -jid e3x2b -rid e3x2a
Run the job e3x2b in the background using a single processor. The job uses e3x2a.t08, which is
created from Example 4, as restart file.
Example 6:
run_marc -jid e2x1 -nproc 2
Runs a two processor job on a single parallel machine.
Example 7:
run_marc -jid e2x1 -nproc 2 -host hostfile
Runs a two-processor job over a network. The hosts are specified in the file hostfile.
Example 8:
run_marc -jid e2x1 -nps 2
Runs a two-processor job on a single parallel machine using a single input file.

Example 9:
run_marc -jid e2x1 -nps 2 -host hostfile
Runs a two-processor job over a network using a single input file. The hosts are specified in the
file hostfile.
Example 10:
run_marc -jid e2x10 -mo i8
Runs a job in large integer mode.
Example 11:
run_marc -jid e8x102d -nthread 4
Runs a job using four threads on a machine that supports parallel processing. The Pardiso solver should
also be activated.

Appendix C Default File
Default File
Appendix C Default File 1820
Marc allows commonly used options to be stored in a file, so that it is not necessary to include them into
the input file. This can be done in two ways. First, an organization could have a file that has options that
are commonly used and shared by all users. The file name is defined by an environment variable named
USRDEF (see Appendix B, Table B-1, Unit 98). This default file is read first. Second, you can specify a
file when you are running an analysis. This is done when submitting a job using the -def option (see
Appendix B, Table B-1, Unit 49). This file is read second.
Values of data previously read can be overwritten. Your actual model data specified by -jid is read last.
It can also overwrite previously defined data. The form of the file containing the defaults is the same as
the standard Marc input file (it must include an END parameter and an END OPTION model definition
option), but is restricted to selective options. These options include:
Parameters
All parameters can be put in the default file.

ADAPTIVE
CONTROL
CONVERT
NO PRINT
OPTIMIZE
POST
RESTART
RESTART LAST
SOLVER
SUMMARY
END OPTION

Appendix D Control File
Control File
Appendix D Control File 1822
Marc allows you to change the controls while the analysis is being performed. This is done by creating a
file named jid.cnt where jid is the job id name.
This file supports the following options.
STOP
Stops the job as soon as the current operation is complete; goes through the
Marc quit procedure to correctly close files.
STOP NEXT
Stops the job after the completion of the current increment. As you can change
the restart frequency or post frequency, you can make sure that his last
increment is saved.
CONTROL
Same as normal CONTROL history definition option; can be used to change

tolerances, etc.
POST INCREMENT Same as normal POST INCREMENT option; can be used to change post
tape frequency.
RESTART IN
Same as normal RESTART INCREMENT option; can be used to change restart

file frequency.
RESTART NOW
Writes a restart file at the end of the current increment.
ADAPT GLOBAL
Same as normal ADAPT GLOBAL option; can be used to change global

remeshing settings.
MEMORY
Prints out a memory usage summary similar to the one printed at the end of
the analysis.
TIMING
Prints out a timing summary similar to the one printed at the end of
the analysis.

Appendix E Environment Variables
Environment Variables
Appendix E Environment Variables 1824
Marc has introduced user-controlled environment variables. They can be put into your login shell script
or the run_marc shell script. However, it is not recommended that you change any of these default
settings.
These environment variables include:
EXITMSG
Name of file containing centralized exit messages. The default is set in run_marc
or run_marc.bat.
USRDEF
Name of file containing default input options/data. Change is not recommended.

There is no default setting for this variable. The default input options/data are set
internally in Marc.
AFMATDAT
Name of file containing material data base. The default is set in run_marc or
run_marc.bat.
IBIG
Set to 1 for reading integers in I5 format, reals in F10 format.

Set to 2 for reading integers in I10 format, reals in F20 format. This setting is not
necessary if the EXTENDED parameter is used in the Marc input file. There is no
default setting for this variable.
NPROCDS
Set to the number of domains when using the single input data file for parallel
processing using DDM.
MSC_MMEM
Set to the maximum number of elements or nodes in the model. Default is one
million.
If you need to reset these variables:

For UNIX environments, you typically use
csh and similar:
setenv USRDEF myfile.dat
sh, ksh and similar: USRDEF=myfile.dat

export USRDEF
For Windows, you typically define the environmental variable under the Control Panel or define at a
Command Prompt:
set USRDEF=myfile.dat

Appendix F Material Database
Material Database
Appendix F Material Database 1826
To enter a new material into the database, the following steps would be performed.
Please use the name convention followed in Marc to be certain that Marc reads your material data file
properly. Using the convention, Marc exits with error if the file with the material name does not exist in
the directory. The user-defined material data should use the prefix of usr_ and the file extension for the
flow stress data should be .mat. Eight characters are allowed after usr_. For example, if you name your
material as usr_material, you will create one use_material.mud or use_material.mfd file for
Marc Mentat database and one flow stress data file, usr_material.mat for the analysis. You have to
place the Marc Mentat database file in mentat/materials/directory. You can put the flow stress file in your
current job directory or in marc/AF_flowmat directory if you want to share it with other users. Once you
have done the preparation for the material database, you can use it in setting up your finite element model
file in the future.
Step 1
Collect all experimental data for the new material. This includes the following data:
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
mass density
instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion
yield stress
conductivity
specific heat
latent heats (if applicable)
The above properties may be dependent on the temperature. For the yield stress, it is dependent upon the
equivalent plastic strain and optionally with strain rate.
For the yield behavior of materials, the data must be in the form of Cauchy (true) stress versus logarithmic
(true) strain. Therefore, if your data is in any other form, it is necessary to convert the data. Make sure
your material data is in a consistent set of units.
Step 2
Begin with a new database, use the FILES>NEW to clear out old data. Use SAVE AS to create a database
with the material name you desire. Material name must be no more than eight characters.
Step 3
Use the MATERIAL and TABLE menus to define the material properties except for the flow stress. Enter
a 1 for the initial yield stress.
Step 4
Save database for this material. This file will be called usr_material.mfd, or usr_material.mud.
Step 5
If you have the write permissions, move this database into mentat/materials/. Be sure that you dont
overwrite a material that has been previously defined.
Step 6
Use the editor to define a file for the flow stress. This file should be called usr.material.mat.
The structure of this file is as follows:
Data structure in x_xxxxcc.mat
1. data card:
2. data card:
where
3. data card:
Material name beginning in column one with the material identification number
Format
: character*40
Example
: 3.2318 AlMgSi 1
ncurves, npoints, ntemps, nerates, number of:

ncurves
: number of curves in input
(Max. 400)
npoints
: number of data points in each curve
(Max. 100)
ntemps
: number of reference temperatures
(Max. 20)
nerates
: number of reference strain rates
(Max. 20)
Format
: four integer in free format
Example
: 30, 13, 5,
6
eqpemin, eqpemax,
equivalent plastic strain range of the material described in

this input eqpemin
must be = 0.0, logarithmic strain measure
4. data card:
5. data card:
Format
: two real in free format
Example
: 0.0, 7.0,
eratmin, eratmax,
equivalent plastic strain rate range of the material described

in this input
Format
Example
: 0.2, 10.0,
eratmin, eratmax,
Temperature range of the material described in this input
Format
Example
: 350.0, 550.0,
Appendix F Material Database 1828
The following data are repeated ncurves time (See card 2)

6. 0 data card:
documentation text, character*80
6. 1 data card:
icurve, temp., erate, sequential curve identification number, Temperature and

equivalent plastic strain rate
6. 2 data card:
eqpmin, eq_stress,
logarithmic equivalent plastic strain and equivalent von

mises (true) stress (first point)
6. n data card:
eqpmax, eq_stress,
logarithmic equivalent plastic strain and equivalent von

mises (true) stress (npointth point, see card 2)
Format
character*80
Example
=== CURVE_01 Sig_Yiel, T=350. C, Eps_dot=0.2 1/s
Format
one integer, two real in free format
Example
1, 350.0, 0.20,
Format
two real in free format
Example
0.00, 78.0,
Format
Example
11.75, 59.0,0,
Format
Example
7.00, 52.0,
6.0:
6.1:
6.2:
6.i:
6.n:
Step 7
Save file and move file into marc/AF_flowmat/.
Step 8
Your new material can now be read from:
material properties>Read>Read other materials.

Appendix G Flow Line File Format
Flow Line File Format
Appendix G Flow Line File Format 1830
This appendix defines the syntax of the flow line file if the user desires to specify an initial geometry for
the flow lines. This data is entered into a file called jidnam.flw. All data entered is in free format.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
Data
Entry Entry
1st data block

1st
Enter number of flow lines.
1st
Enter flow line ID.
2nd
Enter flow line type:
2nd data block
0 straight line
1 2-D circle
3rd
Enter number of divisions of the flow line.
3rd data block

For 2-D analysis, if flow line type = 0 (straight line)
1st
Starting point X-coordinate.
2nd
Starting point Y-coordinate.
3rd
Starting point Z-coordinate.
4th
End point X-coordinate.
5th
End point Y-coordinate.
6th
End point Z-coordinate.
For 2-D analysis, if flow line type = 1 (circle)
Note:
1st
Center point X-coordinate.
2nd
Center point Y-coordinate.
3rd
Center point Z-coordinate.
4th
Radius.
For 2-D flow line, the Z-coordinate equals 0.
For 3-D analysis, if flow line type = 0 (straight line)

1st
Starting point X-coordinate.
2nd
Starting point Y-coordinate.
3rd
Starting point Z-coordinate.
4th
End point X-coordinate.
5th
End point Y-coordinate.
6th
End point Z-coordinate.

Appendix H: 3-D Remeshing Files
3-D Remeshing Files
Appendix H: 3-D Remeshing Files 1832
During the automatic 3-D remeshing phase, several files are created depending on the value of the
verbose flag. These files may be viewed within the GUI to observe the remeshing process. The file names
are based upon the following syntax, jid_bnn.fe?, where jid is the job name, nn is the body number,
and the suffix fe? is described below.
.fem
This file is created by the analysis program containing the mesh of the deformed
body, contact information, and meshing information. It is created every time there
is a remeshing operation. Normally, the current working directory contains the last
one created.
If the verbose flag is set to greater than 20, files are saved for each meshing operation.
They have the syntax jid_bnn_ll.fem. Here ll, is the number of times this body
has been remeshed. Note that this is not the same as the increment number.
.fen
This file contains the previous edge information, which may be used to create the
new mesh.
If the verbose flag is set to greater than 20, files are saved for each meshing operation.
They have the syntax jid_bnn_11.fen.
.feb
This file is created by the mesher containing the new meshing data. This includes the
connectivity, coordinated, and contact node information. This is the mesh that
MSC.SuperForm uses for the next increment.
.fee
This file contains information about what edges have been detected. If one observes
small edges with discontinuities between them, one should increase the minimum
edge length.
.fei
This file shows the surface of the workpiece after checking for penetration with the
tools, but before remeshing. Only saved if verbose > 40.
.feik
This file shows the surface of tool number k. Only saved if verbose > 40.
.fek
This file contains the kernel of the mesh. The kernel should do a good job
representing the volume of the body and be smooth. If the kernel is too far from the
surface, it is necessary to reduce the target element size.
.fes
This file contains the surface of the final mesh. This is useful for quick visualization.
Only saved if verbose > 2.
To visualize the intermediate files go into the FILE menu, and select NEW, and then type
*read_marc filename.

Appendix I: Units
Units
Tables of Units
1834
Appendix I: Units 1834

Tables of Units
Tables of Units
Marc has no units built into it. Therefore, the units chosen must be self-consistent. The International
System of units (SI) is an example of a self-consistent set of units but there are more sets of units
supported by Marc tabulated below:
SI
mm/tonne/s/K
or SI-mm
Imperial
US Common
Length
mm
in
in
Time
Quantity
Mass
kg
tonne
Force
kg-m/s2
tonne-mm/s2
lbf-s /in
pound (lb)
lbf
pound force (lbf)
lbf-s2/in4
lb/in3
lbf/in2
p.s.i.
lbf-in
lbf-in
Mg
Density
kg/m
tonne/mm3
Mg/mm3
Stress
Energy
Temperature
Spec. Heat Capacity
kg/m/s2
tonne/mm/s2
N/m2
MPa or N/mm2
kg-m2/s2
tonne-mm2/s2
MJ or N-mm
mm /s /C
2 2
in /s /R
Btu/lb/F
kg/s3/K
tonne/s3/C
lbf/in/s/R
Btu/in2/s/F
W/m2/C
N/s/K/mm
kg-m/s3/K
tonne-mm/s3/C
lbf/s/R
Btu/in/s/F
W/m/C
N/s/K
m/m/K
mm/mm/C
in/in/R
in/in/F
2 2
m /s /K
C
2 2
J/kg/C
Heat Convection
Thermal Conductivity
Thermal Expansion
Sometimes the standard units are not convenient to work with. For example, Youngs modulus is
frequently specified in terms of MegaPascals (MPa or, equivalently,

Tables of Units
N/mm2) where 1 Pascal is 1 N/m2. As shown in the table below, SI units are fundamental units with only
conversion factors for stress and temperature.
Quantity
Common Units
to
SI Units
Multiplication Factor
Length
meter (m)
meter (m)
1.0
Time
second (s)
second (s)
1.0
Mass
kilogram (kg)
kilogram (kg)
1.0
Density
Force
Stress
Temperature
Spec. Heat Capacity
Heat Convection
kg/m
kg/m
1.0
Newton (N)
kg-m/s
MegaPascal (MPa)
kg/m/s2
1.0x106
Celsius (C)
Kelvin (K)
K = C + 273.15
J/kg/K
2 2
1.0
m /s /K
1.0
W/m /C
kg/s /K
1.0
Thermal
Conductivity
W/m/C
kg-m/s3/K
1.0
Thermal Expansion
m/m/C
m/m/K
1.0
However, Imperial or American units can cause confusion since the naming conventions are not as clear
as in the SI system. The American units are not consistent and require the user to give a conversion factor
in coupled analyses. Below you can find a conversion table which will help you to derive Imperial units
from common US units:
Quantity
Length
Time
Mass
Density
Force
Stress
Temperature
Spec. Heat Capacity
Heat Convection
Thermal Conductivity
Thermal Expansion
Common Units
to
Imperial
Multiplication Factor
inch (in)
inch (in)
1.0
second (s)
second (s)
1.0
pound (lb)
lbf-s /in
2.590076x10-3
lb/in3
lbf-s2/in4
2.590076x10-3
pound force (lbf)
pound force (lbf)
1.0
lbf/in
lbf/in
1.0
Fahrenheit (F)
Rankine (R)
R = 459.67 + F
Btu/lb/F
in2/s2/R
3.605299x106
Btu/in2/sec/F
lbf/in/s/R
9336.0
Btu/in/s/F
lbf/s/R
9336.0
in/in/F
in/in/R
1.0
Appendix I: Units 1836

Tables of Units
The following is a table to convert from SI(mm) to either Imperial or common US units.
Quantity
Length
Time
Mass
SI(mm)
mm
inch
Mg/mm
lbf-s /in
3
lbf-s /in
Factor
US
Factor
inch
3.9370x10-2
1.0
1.0
5.7101
pound(lb)
3.9370x10
Mg
Density
Imperial
145.04
lbf
0.22481
lbf-in
8.8508x10-3
9/5*C+32
Btu/lb/F
2.3883x10-10
145.04
Force
lbf
0.22481
3.6127x104
lbf/in2
lbf/in2
lbf-in
2204.6
lb/in
N/mm2
MJ(Nmm)
93.573
Stress
Energy
-2
8.8508x10
-3
Temperature
Spec. Heat Capacity
2 2
mm /s /C
in /s /F
Heat Convection
N/s/C/mm
lbf/in/s/F
3.1723
Btu/in2/s/F
3.3979x10-4
Heat Conductivity
N/s/C
lbf/s/F
0.12489
Btu/in/s/F
1.3377x10-5
Thermal Expansion
l/C
l/F
0.55556
l/F
0.55556
2 2
9/5*C+32
8.6111x10
-4
Finally, it is often necessary to convert between US and SI units for which the following table may used.
General Conversion Factors (to five significant digits)

Quantity
Length
US Units
1 in
1 ft
1 mile
Area
Volume
SI Equivalent
0.025400 m
0.30480 m
1609.3 m
1 in2
0.64516x10-3 m2
1 ft2
0.092903 m2
1 acre
4046.9 m2
1 in3
0.016387x10-3 m3
1 ft3
0.028317 m3
1 US gallon
3.7854x10-3 m3

Tables of Units
Conversion Factors for Stress Analysis

Quantity
Density
US Units
SI Equivalent
1 slug/ft3 = 1 lbf s2/ft4
515.38 kg/m3
1 lbf s2/in4
10.687x106 kg/m3
Energy
1 ft lbf
1.3558 J (N m)
Force
1 lbf
4.4482 N (kg m/s2)
Mass
1 slug = 1 lbf s2/ft
14.594 kg (N s2/m)
1 lbf s2/in
175.13 kg
1 lb
0.45359 kg
Power
1 ft lbf/s
1.3558 W (N m/s)
Pressure, Stress
1 psi (lbf/in2)
6894.8 Pa (N/m2)
Conversion Factors for Heat Transfer Analysis

Conductivity
1 Btu/ft hr F
1.7307 W/m C
1 Btu/in hr F
20.769 W/m C
Density
1 lb/in3
27680.0 kg/m3
Energy
1 Btu
1055.1 J
2
Heat flux density
1 Btu/in hr
454.26 W/m2
Power
1 Btu/hr
0.29307 W
Specific heat
1 Btu/lb F
4186.8 J/kg C
Temperature
1F
5/9 C
Temp F
9/5 x Temp C + 32
9/5 x Temp K459.67
Important Constants
Absolute zero
-459.67 F
-273.15 C
Acceleration of gravity
32.174 ft/s2
9.8066 m/s2
Stefan-Boltzmann constant
0.1714x10-8 Btu/hr ft2 R4
5.669x10-8 W/m2 K4
where R = F + 459.67
where K = C + 273.15

Appendix J: Parameters List
Parameters List
Parameter
Page
$NO LIST
80
ABLATION
126
ACCUMULATE
157
ACOUSTIC
134
ADAPTIVE
87
ALIAS
158
ALL POINTS
149
ALLOCATE
70
APPBC
156
ASSUMED STRAIN
107
AUTOMSET
186
AUTOSPC
188
BEAM SECT
191
BEARING
129
Parameter
Page
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
181
BUCKLE
112
CAVITY
138
CENTROID
148
COMMENT
162
CONSTANT DILATATION
106
COUPLE
116
CREEP
113
CURING
128
DECOUPLING
117
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION
86
DESIGN SENSITIVITY
85
DIFFUSION
125
DIST LOADS
176
DYNAMIC
91
ELASTIC
84
ELASTICITY
108
ELECTRO
130
ELEMENTS
73
EL-MA
132
ELSTO
169
END
82
EXTENDED
81
FEATURE
75
FILMS
178
FINITE
105
FLUID
118
Appendix J: Parameters List 1840
Parameter
Page
FLUXES
177
FOLLOW FOR
110
FOURIER
90
HARMONIC
93
HEAT
122
IBOOC
171
INCLUDE
173
INPUT TAPE
168
IO-DEACTIVATE
189
ISTRESS
154
JOULE
124
LARGE DISP
98
LARGE STRAIN
99
LINEAR
89
LOAD COR
150
LUMP
155
MACHINING
140
MAGNETO
131
MNF
143
MPC-CHECK
185
NEW
160
NO ECHO
172
NO LOADCOR
151
NOTES
167
OOC
170
Parameter
Page
PIEZO
133
PLASTICITY
109
PORE
120
PREALLOC
PRINT
PROCESSOR
72
163
77
PYROLYSIS
127
RADIATION
135
RBE
139
RESPONSE
95
RESTRICTOR
179
REZONING
142
R-P FLOW
96
SCALE
152
SHELL SECT
182
SIZING
71
SPFLOW
97
SS-ROLLING
94
STATE VARS
175
STOP
166
STRUCTURAL
115
SUPER
144
TABLE
161
THERMAL
153
TIE
184
TITLE
69
TSHEAR
183
T-T-T
121
Appendix J: Parameters List 1842
Parameter
UNIT
Page
79
UPDATE
104
USER
145
VERSION
74
VISCO ELAS
114
WELDING
180

Appendix K: Options List
Options List
Option
Page
ACC CHANGE
1671
ACCUMULATE
1657
ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
1270
ACOUSTIC
1271
ACTIVATE
1577
ACTUATOR
1652
ACTUATOR
297
ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition)
1496
ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)
263
ADAPTIVE
255
ADD RIGID (2-D)
1596
ADD RIGID (3-D)
1611
1590
1601
768
1136
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1236
Appendix K: Options List 1844
Option
Page
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)
1218
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
761
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
1133
ANNEAL
1647
APPROACH
1644
786
ARRUDBOYCE
790
ASSEM LOAD
1576
ATTACH EDGE
290
ATTACH FACE
291
ATTACH NODE
288
AUTO CREEP
1655
AUTO INCREMENT
1539
AUTO LOAD
1533
AUTO STEP
1544
AUTO THERM CREEP
1659
AUTO THERM
1557
AXITO3D (Model Definition)
537
B2GG, B2PP (History Definition)
1518
B2GG, B2PP (Model Definition)
383
BACKTOSUBS (Model Definition)
385
BEGIN SEQUENCE
1536
B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic)
1389
B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic)
1356
BLOCKS
216
BOUNDARY
220
BSQUEAL
375
BUCKLE INCREMENT
1041
BUCKLE
1570
CASE COMBIN
396
CAVITY DEFINITION
1159
1845
Option
Page
CAVITY
532
CFAST
344
CHANGE PORE (History Definition)
1565
CHANGE PORE (Model Definition)
990
CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
988
CHANGE RIGID
1582
CHANGE STATE (History Definition)
1559
CHANGE STATE (Model Definition)
566
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
562
CHANNEL
1154
COEFFICIENT
389
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
1138
919
COHESIVE
1140
COHESIVE
922
COIL CURRENT
1334
COMMENT
1437
COMPOSITE
913
CONM1
1030
CONM2
1036
CONN FILL
237
CONN GENER
238
CONNECT
226
CONNECTIVITY CHANGE
1761
CONNECTIVITY
235
CONRAD GAP
1153
CONSTRAINT
223
CONTACT (2-D)
646
CONTACT (3-D)
678
CONTACT CHANGE
1773
CONTACT NODE (History Definition)
1637
CONTACT NODE (Model Definition)
718
CONTACT TABLE (History Definition)
1630
Option
Page
CONTACT TABLE (Model Definition)
703
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition)
1621
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (Model Definition)
694
632
659
CONTINUE (History Definition)
1751
CONTINUE (Rezoning)
1782
1393
CONTROL (Fluid)
1418
CONTROL (Fluid-Solid)
1421
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition)
1691
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - Model Definition)
1150
CONTROL (Hydrodynamic)
1249
1362
CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition)
1463
CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition)
482
CONUDS
494
CONVERT
1152
COORD SYSTEM
301
COORDINATE CHANGE
1770
COORDINATES
241
CORNERING AXIS
529
COUPLING REGION
1397
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input)
874
CRACK DATA
876
999
CREEP INCREMENT
1654
CREEP
1002
CURE RATE
1169
CURE SHRINKAGE
1175
CURVES
275
1847
Option
Page
CWELD
349
CYCLIC SYMMETRY
310
CYLINDRICAL
252
DAMAGE
905
DAMPING COMPONENTS
1716
DAMPING
1018
DEACT GLUE (Model Definition)
719
DEACTIVATE (History Definition)
1578
DEACTIVATE (Model Definition)
392
217
DEFINE (Sets)
232
DELAMINATION
601
DENSITY EFFECTS
953
474
480
DESIGN OBJECTIVE
471
478
476
DESIGN VARIABLES
472
DISP CHANGE
1521
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
1749
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - Model Definition)
1376
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)
1731
1285
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
1308
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1373
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic)
1282
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
1305
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
1747
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - Model Definition)
1372
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History Definition)
1700
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - Model Definition)
1205
Option
Page
1330
1735
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1369
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
1202
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1327
DIST FLUXES (History Definition)
1676
DIST FLUXES (Model Definition)
1059
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
1056
DIST LOADS (History Definition)
1527
DIST LOADS (Model Definition)
506
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
501
1709
1227
DIST SOURCES (Acoustic - Model Definition)
1264
DIST SOURCES (History Definition)
1721
1261
DMIG
378
DMIG-OUT (History Definition)
1510
DMIG-OUT (Model Definition)
370
1668
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
1743
ELEMENT SORT (History Definition)
1456
ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition)
465
EMCAPAC
1726
EMINDUC
1737
EMISSIVITY
1162
EMLAMIN
1738
EMRESIS
1699
EMWINDING
1336
END OPTION
1427
END REZONE
1783
END SEQUENCE
1537
1849
Option
Page
ERROR ESTIMATE
393
EXCLUDE (History Definition)
1651
EXCLUDE (Model Definition)
720
EXTRAPOLATE
1658
FACE IDS
511
877
FAIL DATA
891
FILMS (History Definition)
1695
FILMS (Model Definition)
1053
FILMS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
1049
FIXED ACCE
1028
FIXED DISP (Fluid)
1401
499
495
1276
1273
1320
1318
1367
1280
1325
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
1304
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1364
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
1278
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1322
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
1301
1259
1256
1225
1044
FIXED TEMPERATURE
1047
1403
Option
Page
FIXED VELOCITY
1406
1209
FIXED VOLTAGE
1211
FLOW LINE
427
FLUID DRAG
530
FLUID SOLID
1020
813
FOAM
817
FORCDT
586
FORCE MAGNETOSTATIC
1739
FORMING LIMIT
833
FOUNDATION (History Definition)
1581
FOUNDATION (Model Definition)
590
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
587
FOURIER
591
FXORD
244
GAP CHANGE
1525
GAP DATA CHANGE
1768
GAP DATA
912
GASKET
820
GENERATE
229
793
GENT
797
GEOMETRY CHANGE
1762
GEOMETRY
292
GLK
541
GLOBALLOCAL
542
GRAIN SIZE
903
GRID FORCE (History Definition)
1452
GRID FORCE (Model Definition)
452
1851
Option
Page
HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition)
1723
HARMONIC (Dynamic)
1670
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
1742
523
HOLD NODES
525
HYPERMESH
438
772
HYPOELASTIC
774
INCLUDE (History Definition)
1440
INCLUDE (Model Definition)
243
INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition)
1534
INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition)
526
1172
INIT CURE
1174
546
INIT STRESS
548
1194
1021
INITIAL DISP
1024
570
INITIAL FICTIVE
572
979
INITIAL PC
981
552
554
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input)
983
INITIAL PORE
985
969
INITIAL POROSITY
971
1223
INITIAL PYROLYSIS
1192
556
Option
Page
INITIAL STATE
559
1122
580
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer)
1119
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress)
578
1025
INITIAL VEL
1027
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input)
974
INITIAL VOID RATIO
976
INPUT TAPE
168
INSERT
330
IRM
429
ISLAND REMOVAL
603
1269
ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)
1382
1296
ISOTROPIC (Fluid)
1410
1126
1252
1349
ISOTROPIC (Stress)
745
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)
1268
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1232
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)
1212
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity)
1289
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1380
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
1295
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid)
1408
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)
1250
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability)
1343
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1341
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress)
737
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
1124
1853
Option
Page
J-INTEGRAL
593
JOULE
1201
K2GG, K2PP (History Definition)
1515
K2GG, K2PP (Model Definition)
381
LATENT HEAT
1141
LOADCASE (History Definition)
1507
LOADCASE (Model Definition)
423
LORENZI
594
M2GG, M2PP (History Definition)
1517
M2GG, M2PP (Model Definition)
382
MANY TYPES
218
MAP TEMP
574
MAPPER
222
MASSES
1029
MATERIAL DATA
902
MATUDS
493
MERGE (Model Definition)
224
MERGE SELECTIVE
225
MESH2D
215
MIXTURE
916
MNF UNITS
386
MODAL INCREMENT
1039
MODAL SHAPE
1664
776
MOONEY
782
MOTION CHANGE
1638
MOVE (History Definition)
1645
MOVE (Rezoning)
1772
MPCOUT (Model Definition)
377
Option
Page
NEW (History Definition)
1439
NEW (Model Definition)
231
NLELAST
807
NO ELEM SORT (History Definition)
1458
NO ELEM SORT (Model Definition)
467
NO NODE SORT (History Definition)
1461
NO NODE SORT (Model Definition)
470
NO PRINT (History Definition)
1447
NO PRINT (Model Definition)
447
NO PRINT CONTACT (History Definition)
1449
NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition)
451
NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition)
1451
NO PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)
449
NO SUMMARY (History Definition)
1455
NO SUMMARY (Model Definition)
464
NODAL THICKNESS
296
NODE CIRCLE
247
NODE FILL
248
NODE GENER
249
NODE MERGE
250
NODE SORT (History Definition)
1459
NODE SORT (Model Definition)
468
OGDEN (with TABLE Input)
800
OGDEN
804
OPTIMIZE
402
ORIENTATION CHANGE
1766
ORIENTATION
935
850
1145
ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical)
1299
ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)
1387
ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)
1354
1855
Option
Page
757
1131
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)
1234
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)
1214
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity)
1291
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1384
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)
1297
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability)
1345
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1350
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)
751
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
1128
P2G (History Definition)
1519
P2G (Model Definition)
384
PARAMETERS (History Definition)
1470
PARAMETERS (Model Definition)
489
PBUSH
336
1391
1360
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1358
PFAST
347
PHI-COEFFICIENTS
1007
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
1315
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)
1312
PIN CODE
329
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)
1730
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - Model Definition)
1311
1286
1309
POINT CHARGE
1288
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition)
1746
POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition)
1701
POINT CURRENT (Joule - Model Definition)
1208
Option
Page
1333
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)
1206
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)
1331
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)
1377
1379
POINT FLUX (History Definition)
1677
POINT FLUX (Model Definition)
1063
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
1060
POINT LOAD (History Definition)
1531
POINT LOAD (Model Definition)
520
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
516
1712
1230
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History Definition)
1722
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - Model Definition)
1267
1265
POINT TEMP (History Definition)
1563
POINT TEMP (Model Definition)
584
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
582
POINTS
274
POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
972
POROSITY CHANGE
1705
POST (History Definition)
1478
POST (Model Definition)
404
POST INCREMENT
1494
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition)
1728
POTENTIAL CHANGE
1744
943
POWDER
949
PRE STATE
533
PRESS CHANGE
1719
PRESS FILM (Model Definition)
996
993
1857
Option
Page
PRINT CHOICE (History Definition)
1441
PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition)
440
PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning)
1779
PRINT CONTACT (History Definition)
1448
PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition)
450
PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition)
1443
PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition)
442
PRINT NODE (History Definition)
1445
PRINT NODE (Model Definition)
445
PRINT SPRING (History Definition)
1450
PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)
448
PRINT STREAMLINE
1198
PRINT VMASS (History Definition)
1462
PRINT VMASS (Model Definition)
454
1538
PRTCONNECT
227
PSHELL
925
PWELD
357
QVECT (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
1064
RAD-CAVITY
1157
RADIATING CAVITY
1156
RBE2
323
RBE3
325
REAUTO
455
REBAR
928
RECEDING SURFACE
1189
RECOVER
1666
REGION (Fluid)
1396
RELATIVE DENSITY (with TABLE Input)
956
RELATIVE DENSITY
958
RELEASE NODE
1524
Option
Page
RELEASE
1643
RESET TIME
1569
RESPONSE SPECTRUM
1038
RESTART INCREMENT
1495
RESTART LAST
460
RESTART
457
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
1246
RESTRICTOR
1248
REZONE
1757
ROTATION A
528
RROD
328
SDRC
435
SECTIONING (Rezoning)
1759
SERVO LINK
321
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input)
864
SHAPE MEMORY
870
SHELL SECT
182
308
SHIFT FUNCTION
1014
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
1054
959
SOIL
965
SOLVER (History Definition)
1474
SOLVER (Model Definition)
398
SPECIFIC WEIGHT
982
SPECIFIED NODES
221
SPECTRUM
1669
SPLINE (History Definition)
1649
SPLINE (Model Definition)
710
SPLIT BODIES
1758
SPRINGS
332
SS-ROLLING
1640
1859
Option
Page
START NUMBER
219
1725
1675
1734
STIFFNS COMPONENTS
1717
STIFSCALE
388
STRAIN RATE (Fluid)
1412
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties)
831
STREAM DEFINITION
1196
STRING
286
SUMMARY (History Definition)
1454
SUMMARY (Model Definition)
463
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition)
1574
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition)
367
SUPERELEM (History Definition)
1572
SUPERELEM (Model Definition)
365
SUPERPLASTIC
1553
SURFACE ENERGY
1183
SURFACES
280
SWLDPRM
359
SYMMETRY
228
SYNCHRONIZED
1648
TABLE
823
TEMP CHANGE
1693
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal)
1415
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress)
843
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer)
1142
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic)
1253
838
TERMINATE
1551
1093
1110
Option
Page
1085
1099
THERMAL LOADS (History Definition)
1555
THERMAL LOADS (Model Definition)
576
THERMO-PORE
1178
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
1243
THICKNESS
1245
THICKNS CHANGE
1715
THROAT
1191
TIME STEP
1568
TIME-TEMP
860
TITLE
1438
TRACK STREAMLINE
1199
TRACK
426
TRANSFORMATION
298
TRANSIENT
1673
TSHEAR
183
TYING CHANGE
1526
TYING
313
UDUMP
462
UFCONN
240
UFRICTION
715
UFRORD
1771
UFXORD
251
UHTCOEF
716
UHTCON
717
UMOTION
714
URCONN
1781
USDATA
394
UTRANFORM
309
1861
Option
Page
VCCT
597
1167
1241
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer)
1165
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)
1239
VELOCITY CHANGE
1696
VIEW FACTOR
1155
VISCEL EXP
1016
VISCELFOAM
1013
VISCELMOON
1011
VISCELOGDEN
1012
VISCELORTH
1009
VISCELPROP
1008
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
977
VOID CHANGE
1707
VOLTAGE CHANGE
1702
WEAR (Model Definition)
721
WELD FILL (History Definition)
1688
WELD FILL (Model Definition)
1082
WELD FLUX (History Definition)
1678
WELD FLUX (Model Definition)
1072
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)
1068
WELD PATH (History Definition)
1682
WELD PATH (Model Definition)
1076
WORK HARD
835
WRITE
254

Marc 2010 Doc Volume C

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Marc 2010 Doc Volume C

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Marc 2010

Volume C: Program Input

Who Should Read this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Marc Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input of List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Edges and Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Input Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Marc Volume C: Program Input

VERSION Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CURING Curing Analysis Parameter Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rezoning and Substructure Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Additional Flags for Various Analyses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program Function and I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Modifying Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Model Definition Options List

Model Definition Options

CONNECTIVITY Specify Element Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Marc Volume C: Program Input

SWLDPRM Parameters for CWELD Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO SUMMARY Do Not Create Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Marc Volume C: Program Input

CHANGE STATE Redefine State Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT TABLE Define Contact Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 Marc Volume C: Program Input

TABLE Define Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL PORE Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat Transfer Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14 Marc Volume C: Program Input

RECEDING SURFACE Define Areas where Surface Recedes Due to

Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16 Marc Volume C: Program Input

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . .

18 Marc Volume C: Program Input

History Definition Options List

History Definition Options

NO ELEM SORT (History Definition) Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element . . . . . . . . . . . .

Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20 Marc Volume C: Program Input

SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition) Create DMIG of Substructure . . . . . . .

Rate Dependent Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Rezoning Options List

Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option

Estimating Workspace Sizes for Marc Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/O With Marc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Estimating File Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Examples of Running Marc Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Flow Line File Format

3-D Remeshing Files

Marc Volume C: Program Input

About this Manual

Who Should Read this Manual

Other Marc Manuals

25 Marc Volume C: Program Input

About this Manual